xx

2 Series Mixed Signal Oscilloscope

MSO22, MSO24
ZZZ

Programmer Manual

*P077177601*
077-1776-01
xx 2 Series Mixed Signal Oscilloscope
MSO22, MSO24
ZZZ

Programmer Manual

Supports FW version 1.42.5 and above

www.tek.com
077-1776-01
Copyright © Tektronix. All rights reserved. Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries
or suppliers, and are protected by national copyright laws and international treaty provisions.
Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication
supersedes that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved.
TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.
TekSecure is a trademark of Tektronix, Inc.
2 Series MSO Programmer Manual. Released April 2022.

Contacting Tektronix
Tektronix, Inc.
14150 SW Karl Braun Drive
P.O. Box 500
Beaverton, OR 97077
USA

For product information, sales, service, and technical support:

In North America, call 1-800-833-9200.
Worldwide, visit www.tek.com to find contacts in your area.
Table of Contents
Preface .............................................................................................................. iii
Getting Started .................................................................................................... 1-1
Setting Up Remote Communications Hardware ......................................................... 1-1
Ethernet .................................................................................................. 1-1
USB....................................................................................................... 1-1
Setting Up Remote Communications Software .......................................................... 1-2
Using VISA.............................................................................................. 1-2
Using a Socket Server .................................................................................. 1-3
Documentation .......................................................................................... 1-5
Dynamic programmatic interface .......................................................................... 1-5
Implicit activation ........................................................................................... 1-5
Creating, deleting, and listing dynamic instances ........................................................ 1-6
Backwards Compatibility ................................................................................... 1-6
Command Syntax................................................................................................. 2-1
Command and Query Structure ............................................................................ 2-1
Clearing the instrument output queue ..................................................................... 2-3
Command Entry.............................................................................................. 2-3
Constructed Mnemonics .................................................................................... 2-5
Argument Types.............................................................................................. 2-7
Command groups ............................................................................................... 2-11
Acquisition command group ............................................................................. 2-11
Act On Event command group ........................................................................... 2-11
AFG Command Group .................................................................................... 2-13
Alias command group ..................................................................................... 2-14
Battery command group................................................................................... 2-14
Bus command group....................................................................................... 2-15
Calibration command group .............................................................................. 2-19
Callouts command group ................................................................................. 2-20
Cursor command group ................................................................................... 2-21
Digital command group ................................................................................... 2-26
Display control command group ......................................................................... 2-27
Ethernet Command Group ................................................................................ 2-30
File system command group.............................................................................. 2-31
Horizontal command group............................................................................... 2-33
Mask command group..................................................................................... 2-34
Math command group ..................................................................................... 2-35
Measurement command group ........................................................................... 2-37
Miscellaneous command group .......................................................................... 2-47
Pattern Generator group................................................................................... 2-50

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual i

Table of Contents

Plot command group ...................................................................................... 2-51

Save and Recall command group ........................................................................ 2-52
Save On command Group ................................................................................ 2-53
Search and Mark command group ....................................................................... 2-54
Self Test command group ................................................................................. 2-60
Status and Error command group ........................................................................ 2-61
Trigger command group .................................................................................. 2-62
Vertical command group .................................................................................. 2-66
Waveform Transfer command group .................................................................... 2-68
Zoom command group .................................................................................... 2-72
Commands listed in alphabetical order....................................................................... 2-73
Status and Events ................................................................................................. 3-1
Registers ...................................................................................................... 3-1
Queues ........................................................................................................ 3-4
Event Handling Sequence................................................................................... 3-5
Synchronization Methods ................................................................................... 3-5
Appendix A: Character Set ..................................................................................... A-1
Appendix B: Reserved Words .................................................................................. B-1
Appendix C: Factory Defaults ................................................................................. C-1
Default Setup ................................................................................................ C-1
Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples ......................... D-1
Example 1: Analog Waveform (Channels 1–4) ......................................................... D-1
Example 2: Digital Waveform ............................................................................ D-3
Example 3: Digital with 4 Bytes Per Point and Zoom Off ............................................. D-5
Example 4: Digital with 8 Bytes Per Point and Zoom Off ............................................. D-7
Example 5: Digital with 4 Bytes Per Point and Zoom On ........................................... D-10
Example 6: RF Frequency Domain Waveform........................................................ D-12
Example 7: Baseband IQ Waveform ................................................................... D-14
Appendix E: Search and Trigger Command Sequence Examples.......................................... E-1
Example 1: Single Threshold Edge Search .............................................................. E-1
Example 2: Single Threshold Edge Trigger ............................................................. E-1
Example 3: Dual Threshold Runt Search ................................................................ E-2
Example 4: Single Threshold Logic Search on Three Waveforms.................................... E-3
Glossary
Index

ii 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Preface
This programmer guide provides you with the information required to use
Programmable Interface commands to remotely control your instrument.
The programmer manual is divided into the following major topics:
Getting started. This topic introduces you to the programming information
and provides basic information about setting up your instrument for remote
control.
Command syntax. This topic provides an overview of the command syntax
that you use to communicate with the instrument and other general information
about commands, such as how commands and queries are constructed, how to
enter commands, constructed mnemonics, and argument types.
Command groups. This topic contains all the commands listed in functional
groups. Each group consists of an overview of the commands in that group and
a table that lists all the commands and queries for that group. You can click a
command in the listing to display a detailed description of the command.
Commands listed in alphabetical order. This topic contains all commands
listed in alphabetical order. Command details, syntax, and examples are
provided.
Status and events. This topic discusses the status and event reporting system
for the programming interfaces. This system informs you of certain significant
events that occur within the instrument. Topics that are discussed include
registers, queues, event handling sequences, synchronization methods, and
messages that the instrument might return, including error messages.
Appendices. These topics contain miscellaneous information, such as a list
of reserved words, a table of the factory initialization (default) settings, and
interface specifications that can be helpful when using commands to remotely
control the instrument.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual iii

Preface

iv 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Getting Started
This manual explains the use of commands to remotely control your instrument.
With this information, you can write computer programs to perform functions,
such as setting the front-panel controls, taking measurements, performing
statistical calculations, and exporting data for use in other programs.
Familiarity with the User Manual for your instrument is assumed. You can
download the User Manual from the Tektronix website at www.tek.com.

NOTE. Most examples in this document assume that both HEADer and VERBose
are set to ON.

Setting Up Remote Communications Hardware

You can remotely control communications between your instrument and a PC
via Ethernet or USB cables.

Ethernet If you are using Ethernet, start by connecting an appropriate Ethernet cable to the
Ethernet port (RJ-45 connector) on the side of your instrument. This connects the
instrument to a 10BASE-T/100BASE-T/1000BASE-T local area network.
To change the Ethernet settings on your instrument, do the following:
1. Select the Utility drop-down menu.
2. Select the I/O menu.
3. Select the LAN panel.
4. In the menu, if you are on a DHCP Ethernet network that supplies the IP
address automatically by a DHCP, tap Auto.
5. In the menu, if you want to supply your own network settings, tap Manual
to set a hard coded TCP/IP address.

USB If you are using USB, start by connecting the appropriate USB cable to the USB
2.0 device port on the side of your instrument. This port requires that the cable
connected from the port to the host computer meets the USB 2.0 specification.
Typically, such cables should be 3 feet or shorter in length, but this is determined
by the quality of the cable and, with higher quality cables, this length can be
extended. (It is also dependent upon the drive capability of the host USB port
to which the instrument is connected.) The use of high quality short cables is
recommended to avoid USB connection problems.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 1-1

Getting Started

With USB, the system automatically configures itself. To verify that the USB is
enabled:
1. Select the Utility drop-down menu.
2. Select the I/O menu.
3. Touch USB Device Port to open the USB Device Port configuration menu.
4. If USB is disabled, tap USB Device Port to enable the USB Device port.
After connection, the host, with appropriate software, can list the instrument as a
USB device with the following parameters: (See Table 1-1.)

Table 1-1: USB Device Parameters

Parameter Value
Manufacturer ID 0x0699 (decimal 1689)
Product ID 0x105
(You can send the
USBTMC:PRODUCTID:HEXadecimal?
query to read the value)
Serial number Serial number
Manufacturer description “Tektronix”
Interface description “USBTMC-USB488”

Setting Up Remote Communications Software

Connect your instrument directly to a computer to let the PC analyze your data,
collect screen images, or to control the instrument using a program of your own
creation. Three ways to connect your instrument to a computer are through the
VISA drivers, or via a socket server.

Using VISA VISA lets you use your MS-Windows computer to acquire data from your
instrument for use in an analysis package that runs on your PC, such as Microsoft
Excel, National Instruments LabVIEW, Tektronix OpenChoice Desktop software,
or your own custom software. You can use a common communications
connection, such as USB or Ethernet, to connect the computer to the instrument.
To set up VISA communications between your instrument and a computer:

1-2 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Getting Started

1. Load the VISA drivers on your computer. Also, load your application, such
as OpenChoice Desktop. You will find the drivers and OpenChoice Desktop
software on the appropriate CD that comes with your instrument or at the
Tektronix software finder Web page (www.tektronix.com\downloads).
2. Connect the instrument to your computer with the appropriate USB or
Ethernet cable. Cycle the power on the instrument.
3. Select the Utility drop-down menu
4. Select I/O menu.
5. If you are using USB, the system sets itself up automatically for you, if
USB is enabled. Check USB DEVICE PORT panel to be sure that USB is
enabled. If it is not enabled, toggle the On/Off button to On.
6. To use Ethernet, select the LAN panel. Use the controls to adjust your
network settings, as needed. For more information, see the e*Scope setup
information below.
7. If you want to change socket server parameters, select the Socket Server
panel and enter new values through the resulting panel controls.
8. Run your application software on your computer.

Quick Tips The USB 2.0 device port is the correct USB port for computer connectivity.
Use the side USB 2.0 host ports to connect your instrument to USB flash
drives, hard drives, keyboards or mice. Use the USB Device port to connect
your instrument to a PC.
There are two USB 2.0 host ports and a USB 2.0 device port on the side of
the instrument. Printers are not supported on host ports. PictBridge printers
are not supported on the device port.

Using a Socket Server A socket server provides two-way communication over an Internet Protocol-based
computer network. You can use your instrument’s socket server feature to let your
instrument talk to a remote-terminal device or computer.
To set up and use a socket server between your instrument and a remote terminal
or computer:
1. Connect the instrument to your computer network with an appropriate
Ethernet cable.
2. Select the Utility drop-down menu.
3. Select the I/O menu.
4. Tap Socket Server.
5. On the resulting Socket Server panel, tap the top entry to toggle the Socket
Server On.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 1-3

Getting Started

6. Choose whether the protocol should be None or Terminal. A communication

session run by a human at a keyboard typically uses a terminal protocol.
An automated session might handle its own communications without using
such a protocol.
7. If required, change the port number by rotating multipurpose knob a.
8. If required, press OK to set the new port number.
9. After setting up the socket server parameters, you can now have the computer
“talk” to the instrument. If you are running an MS Windows PC, you could
run its default client with its command-like interface. One way to do this is
by typing “ Telnet ” in the Run window. The Telnet window will open on
the PC.

NOTE. On MS Windows 10, you must first enable Telnet in order for it to work.

10. Start a terminal session between your computer and your instrument by typing
in an open command with the instrument LAN address and port #. You can
obtain the LAN address by pushing the LAN panel to view the resulting LAN
setting panel. You can obtain the port # by tapping the Socket Server panel
and viewing the Port item.
For example, if the instrument IP address was 123.45.67.89 and the port
# was the default of 4000, you could open a session by writing into the MS
Windows Telnet screen:
open 123.45.67.89 4000

The instrument will send a help screen to the computer when it is done
connecting.
11. You can now type in a standard query, as found in the programmer manual,
such as *idn?
The Telnet session window will respond by displaying a character string
describing your instrument. You can type in more queries and view more
results on this Telnet session window. You can find the syntax for relevant
queries and related status codes in other sections of this manual.

NOTE. Do not use the computer’s backspace key during an MS Windows' Telnet
session with the instrument.

Socket Server Terminal Protocol Mode Commands. Following are Tektronix

Instrument Control Terminal Session Control commands:
!t <timeout> : set the response timeout in milliseconds.
!d : send device clear to the instrument.

1-4 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Getting Started

!r : read response from instrument.

!h : print this usage info.

NOTE. Commands containing a ? are treated as queries, and the responses are
read automatically.

Documentation Documentation for your instrument is available for download at www.tek.com.

Dynamic programmatic interface

This programmatic interface is dynamic. This means the instrument will not
recognize certain commands until the objects referenced by those commands
actually exist. For example, commands related to measurements are not
recognized until measurements are added. Therefore, the response to a *LRN?
query will not normally include the instrument's complete command set.
The following command groups are not available when the instrument is in its
default state:
Measurement
Math
Bus
Search and Mark
Plot
Adding an instance of one of those components will cause all commands
related to that component to be recognized. For example, sending the
MEASUrement:ADDNew command adds a measurement at which point the
measurement commands will be recognized. Conversely, once all instances of a
component have been deleted, the commands related to that component will no
longer be recognized.

Implicit activation
When you send a command or query related to a dynamic object (such as
Math1, Bus3, or Meas2) to the instrument and that instance does not yet exist,
the instrument:
creates a default instance with the name you specified
adds all relevant commands and queries to the set of recognized commands
responds to the command or query

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 1-5

Getting Started

Example 1 *RST followed by a *LRN? will not return any MATH<x> commands because in
the default state, the instrument does not have any math waveforms. However
querying :MATH:MATH1:DEFinition? will add MATH1 with the default math
expression Ch1 - Ch2. Then the query will return the expected result. Note that if
Ch1 or Ch2 is not active, they will be activated as part of this action. A *LRN
issued after this will return MATH commands in addition to other available
commands.

Example 2 *RST followed by :MEASUrement:MEAS3:TYPE? creates a measurement

named MEAS3 and returns its type. Since the default type is Period, you
will get Period as the response. A *LRN issued after this will return all
MEASUrement:MEAS3 commands in addition to other available commands.
Not all commands in these groups start implicit activation. ADDNew, DELete,
and LIST commands do not result in implicit activation.

Creating, deleting, and listing dynamic instances

You can create a new default instance of a dynamic feature by using the ADDNew
command. For example, :MEASUrement:ADDNew "Meas1" will create a new
measurement named Meas1. Meas1 will be a Period measurement since the
default type for measurements is Period. Note that you can change Meas1 type
to any other supported type using :MEASUrement:MEAS1:TYPE command.
The DELete command deletes the named dynamic instance. For example
:BUS:DELete “B2” will delete a bus named B2 if it exists. You can delete only
one instance at a time. The LIST command returns a list of all dynamic instances
currently in existence. For example, if you have added three measurements named
Meas1, Meas2 and Meas3, :MEASUrement:LIST? returns MEAS1, MEAS2,
MEAS3.

Backwards Compatibility
2 Series MSO instruments have implicit backwards compatibility built
into the command set. Many commands from previous scope generations
can be successfully processed by modern scopes. In particular, the
MSO/DPO5000/7000/70000 command set has been partially migrated to the new
generation. Use the following table to check if a legacy command is supported
and how it will be interpreted by a 2 Series MSO.
The left column indicates the legacy command and the right column indicates
the command that will be executed on a 2 Series MSO. Some functions on the
scope have been simplified, so multiple legacy commands are mapped to a single
modern command.
In addition to these implicit aliases, the 2 Series MSO also contain a PI Translator
feature. This allows users to define custom command processing to improve

1-6 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Getting Started

compatibility with legacy automation code. Please refer to the Programming

Interface Translator Technical Brief on tek.com for more information.

Legacy oscilloscope command 2 Series MSO command alias

:BUS:B<n>:CAN:BITRate:VALue :BUS:B<n>:CAN:BITRate:CUSTom
:BUS:B<n>:CAN:FD:BITRate:VALue :BUS:B<n>:CAN:FD:BITRate:CUSTom
:MEASUrement:MEAS<n>:EDGEQUALifier :MEASUrement:MEAS<n>:SOUrce<n>
:MEASUrement:MEAS<n>:ACQTime :MEASUrement:MEAS<n>:WAITTime
:DPOJET:GATing :MEASUrement:MEAS<n>:GATing
:BUS:B<n>:I2C:SCLk:SOUrce :BUS:B<n>:I2C:CLOCk:SOUrce
:BUS:B<n>:I2C:ADDRess:RWINClude :BUS:B<n>:I2C:DATa:SOUrce
:MEASUrement:MEAS<n>:FUNDAMENTALFreq :MEASUrement:MEAS<n>:FREQ
:BUS:B<n>:LIN:VALue :BUS:B<n>:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom
:MATH:MATH<n>:SPECTral:UNWRap :MATH:MATH<n>:SPECTral:WRAP:STATE
:MATH:MATH<n>:SPECTral:UNWRap:DEGrees :MATH:MATH<n>:SPECTral:WRAP:DEGrees
:DPOJET:INTERp :MEASUrement:INTERp
:BUS:B<n>:RS232C:TX:SOUrce :BUS:B<n>:RS232C:SOUrce
:BUS:B<n>:RS232C:TX:SOUrce:THReshold :BUS:B<n>:RS232C:SOUrce:THReshold
:BUS:B<n>:SPI:SCLk:SOUrce :BUS:B<n>:SPI:CLOCk:SOUrce
:BUS:B<n>:SPI:MOSi:INPut :BUS:B<n>:SPI:DATa:SOUrce
:BUS:B<n>:SPI:SS:SOUrce :BUS:B<n>:SPI:SELect:SOUrce
:BUS:B<n>:SPI:MOSi:THReshold :BUS:B<n>:SPI:DATa:THReshold
:BUS:B<n>:SPI:SCLk:POLarity :BUS:B<n>:SPI:CLOCk:POLarity
:BUS:B<n>:SPI:MOSi:DATa:POLarity :BUS:B<n>:SPI:DATa:POLarity
:BUS:B<n>:SPI:SS:POLarity :BUS:B<n>:SPI:SELect:POLarity
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<n>:SPI:DATa:IN:VALue :TRIGger:A:BUS:B<n>:SPI:DATa:VALue
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<n>:SPI:DATa:MISO:VALue
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<n>:SPI:DATa:OUT:VALue
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<n>:SPI:DATa:MOSI:VALue"
:MEASUrement:MEAS<n>:DELay:DIREction :MEASUrement:MEAS<n>:TOEDGESEARCHDIRec
:MATH:MATH<n>:POSITION :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:MATH:MATH<n>:VERTical:POSition
:MATH:MATH<n>:SCAle :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:MATH:MATH<n>:VERTical:SCAle
:REF:REF<n>:POSITION :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:REF:REF<n>:VERTical:POSition
:REF:REF<n>:SCAle :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:REF:REF<n>:VERTical:SCAle
CH<x>:YUNits CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 1-7

Getting Started

:CURSor:VBArs:POSITIONA :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:APOSition
:CURSor:VBArs:POSA"
:CURSor:VBArs:POSITIONB :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:BPOSition
:CURSor:VBArs:POSB"
:CURSor:HBArs:POSITIONA :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:APOSition
:CURSor:HBArs:POSITIONB :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:BPOSition
:CURSor:SCREEN:XPOSITIONA :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:SCREEN:AXPOSition
:CURSor:SCREEN:XPOSITIONB :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:SCREEN:BXPOSition
:CURSor:SCREEN:YPOSITIONA :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:SCREEN:AYPOSition
:CURSor:SCREEN:YPOSITIONB :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:SCREEN:BYPOSition
:CURSor:WAVEform:POSITIONA :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:APOSition
:CURSor:WAVEform:POSITIONB :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:BPOSition
:CURSor:SOURCEA :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:ASOUrce
:CURSor:SOURCEB :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:BSOUrce
:CURSor:VBArs:UNIts :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:UNIts
:CURSor:HBArs:UNITA :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:AUNIts
:CURSor:HBArs:UNITA :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:AUNIts
:CURSor:HBArs:UNIts
:CURSor:HBArs:UNITB :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:BUNIts
:CURSor:VBArs:ALTERNATEA :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:ALTERNATEA
:CURSor:VBArs:ALTERNATEB :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:ALTERNATEB
:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:DELTa
:CURSor:WAVEform:HDELTa" :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:HBArs:DELTa
:CURSor:HBArs:DELTa
:CURSor:WAVEform:VDELTa" :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:VBArs:DELTa
:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa
:CURSor:DDT :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:DDT
:CURSor:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE
:CURSor:FUNCtion :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:FUNCtion
:CURSor:STATE :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:STATE
:CURSor:CURSOR:STATE"
:CURSor:MODe :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:CURSor:CURSOR:MODe
:BUS:B<n>:POSition :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:BUS:B<n>:VERTical:POSition

1-8 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Getting Started

:ZOOm:HORizontal:POSition :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:ZOOM:ZOOM<n>:HORizontal:POSition
:ZOOm:ZOOM<n>:HORizontal:POSition"
:ZOOm:HORizontal:SCALe :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:ZOOM:ZOOM<n>:HORizontal:SCALe
:ZOOm:ZOOM<n>:HORizontal:SCALe"
:ZOOm:VERTical:POSition :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:ZOOM:ZOOM<n>:VERTical:POSition
:ZOOm:ZOOM<n>:VERTical:POSition"
:ZOOm:VERTical:SCALe :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:ZOOM:ZOOM<n>:VERTical:SCALe
:ZOOm:ZOOM<n>:VERTical:SCALe"
:ZOOm:STATe :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:ZOOM:ZOOM<n>:STATe
:ZOOm:ZOOM<n>:STATe"
:BUS:B<n>:STATE :DISplay:GLObal:B<n>:STATE
CH1:STATE DISplay:GLObal:CH1:STATE
:MATH:MATH<n>:STATE :DISplay:GLObal:MATH<n>:STATE
:REF:REF<n>:STATE :DISplay:GLObal:REF<n>:STATE
:REM:REM<n>:STATE :DISplay:GLObal:REM<n>:STATE
:PLOT:PLOT<n>:STATE :DISplay:GLObal:PLOT<n>:STATE
:DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform(:ANALYsis|:FASTAcq) :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:INTENSITy:WAVEform
:DISplay:INTENSITy:GRATicule :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:INTENSITy:GRATicule
:DISplay:STYle :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:STYle
:DISplay:GRAticule :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:GRAticule
:DISplay:FILTer :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:FILTer
:DISplay:VIEWStyle :DISplay:WAVEView<n>:VIEWStyle
:HORizontal:DELay:POSition :HORizontal:POSition
:HORizontal:MAIn:POSition"
:HORizontal:DELay:POSition
:HORizontal:MODe:SCAle :HORizontal:SCAle
:HORizontal:SECdiv
:HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle
:HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv
:HORizontal:DELay:SCAle
:HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv"
:HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing :HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts
:HORizontal:DELay:STATE :HORizontal:DELay:MODe
:HORizontal:MAIn:DELay:MODe"

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 1-9

Getting Started

:HORizontal:DELay:TIMe(:RUNSAfter|:TRIGAfter) :HORizontal:DELay:TIMe
:HORizontal:MAIn:DELay:TIMe"
:CH1:VOLTS CH1:SCAle
:HORizontal:MODe:SAMPLERate :HORizontal:SAMPLERate
:HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate
:HORizontal:DIGital:SAMPLERate
:HORizontal:DIGital:SAMPLERate:MAIn"
:HORizontal:MODe:RECOrdlength :HORizontal:RECOrdlengt
:HORizontal:RESOlution
:HORizontal:DIGital:RECOrdlength
:HORizontal:DIGital:RECOrdlength:MAIn
:HORizontal:ACQLENGTH"
:CH<X>:AMPSViavolts:ENABle :CH<X>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits:STATE
:CH<X>:AMPSViavolts:FACTor :CH<X>:SCALERATio
:SAVEON:WAVEform:FILEFormat :SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
:SAVEON:WAVEform:SOURce :SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce
:SAVEON:IMAGe:FILEFormat :SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat
:SAVEON:FILE:NAME :SAVEONEVent:FILEName
:SAVEON:FILE:NAME :SAVEONEVent:FILEName
:TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn :TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn
:TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity :TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity
:TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit :TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit
:TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit :TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit
:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth"
:TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn :TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn
:TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity :TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity
:TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth :TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth
:TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity :TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity
:TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe :TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe
:TRIGger:A:RISEFall:SOUrce :TRIGger:A:TRANsition:SOUrce
:TRIGger:A:RISEFall:WHEn :TRIGger:A:TRANsition:WHEn
:TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn"
:TRIGger:A:RISEFall:WHEn :TRIGger:A:TRANsition:WHEn
:TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn"

1-10 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Getting Started

:TRIGger:A:RISEFall:POLarity :TRIGger:A:TRANsition:POLarity
:TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity"
:TRIGger:A:RISEFall:POLarity :TRIGger:A:TRANsition:POLarity
:TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity"
:TRIGger:A:RISEFall:DELTatime :TRIGger:A:TRANsition:DELTatime
:TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTatime"
:TRIGger:A:RISEFall:DELTatime :TRIGger:A:TRANsition:DELTatime
:TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTatime"
:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce :TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE :TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime :TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime
:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime :TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime
:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn :TRIGger:A:LOGIc:WHEn
:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:DELTatime :TRIGger:A:LOGIc:DELTatime
:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:CLOck:SOUrce :TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce
:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:EDGE :TRIGger:A:LOGIc:POLarity
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<n>:CAN:ADDRess:MODe :TRIGger:A:BUS:B<n>:CAN:IDentifier:MODe
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<n>:CAN:ADDRess:VALue :TRIGger:A:BUS:B<n>:CAN:IDentifier:VALue
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<n>:PARallel:VALue :TRIGger:A:BUS:B<n>:PARallel:DATa:VALue
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<n>:RS232C:RX:DATa:VALue :TRIGger:A:BUS:B<n>:RS232C:DATa:VALue
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<n>:RS232C:RX:DATa:VALue :TRIGger:A:BUS:B<n>:RS232C:DATa:VALue
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B<n>:RS232C:RX:DATa:SIZe :TRIGger:A:BUS:B<n>:RS232C:DATa:SIZe

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 1-11

Getting Started

1-12 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command Syntax
You can control the operations and functions of the instrument through the
Ethernet port or the USB 2.0 device port using commands and queries. The related
topics listed below describe the syntax of these commands and queries. The topics
also describe the conventions that the instrument uses to process them. See the
Command Groups topic in the table of contents for a listing of the commands by
command group, or use the index to locate a specific command.

Backus-Naur Form This documentation describes the commands and queries using Backus-Naur
Notation Form (BNF) notation. Refer to the following table for the symbols that are used.

Table 2-1: Symbols for Backus-Naur Form

Symbol Meaning
<> Defined element
= Is defined as
| Exclusive OR
{} Group; one element is required
[] Optional; can be omitted
.. . Previous element(s) may be repeated

Command and Query Structure

Commands consist of set commands and query commands (usually called
commands and queries). Commands modify instrument settings or tell the
instrument to perform a specific action. Queries cause the instrument to return
data and status information.
Most commands have both a set form and a query form. The query form of the
command differs from the set form by its question mark at the end. For example,
the set command ACQuire:MODe has a query form ACQuire:MODe?. Not all
commands have both a set and a query form. Some commands have set only and
some have query only.

Messages A command message is a command or query name followed by any information

the instrument needs to execute the command or query. Command messages may
contain five element types, defined in the following table.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-1

Command Syntax

Table 2-2: Command Message Elements

Symbol Meaning
<Header> This is the basic command name. If the header ends with a question
mark, the command is a query. The header may begin with a colon
(:) character. If the command is concatenated with other commands,
the beginning colon is required. Never use the beginning colon with
command headers beginning with a star (*).
<Mnemonic> This is a header subfunction. Some command headers have only one
mnemonic. If a command header has multiple mnemonics, a colon (:)
character always separates them from each other.
<Argument> This is a quantity, quality, restriction, or limit associated with the header.
Some commands have no arguments while others have multiple
arguments. A <space> separates arguments from the header. A
<comma> separates arguments from each other.
<Comma> A single comma is used between arguments of multiple-argument
commands. Optionally, there may be white space characters before
and after the comma.
<Space> A white space character is used between a command header and the
related argument. Optionally, a white space may consist of multiple
white space characters.

Commands Commands cause the instrument to perform a specific function or change one of
the settings. Commands have the structure:
[:]<Header>[<Space><Argument>[<Comma> <Argument>]...]

A command header consists of one or more mnemonics arranged in a hierarchical

or tree structure. The first mnemonic is the base or root of the tree and each
subsequent mnemonic is a level or branch off the previous one. Commands at a
higher level in the tree may affect those at a lower level. The leading colon (:)
always returns you to the base of the command tree.

2-2 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command Syntax

Queries Queries cause the instrument to return status or setting information. Queries
have the structure:
[:]<Header>

[:]<Header>[<Space><Argument> [<Comma><Argument>]...]

You can specify a query command at any level within the command tree unless
otherwise noted. These branch queries return information about all the mnemonics
below the specified branch or level.

Headers Use the HEADer command to control whether the instrument returns headers as
part of the query response. If header is on, the query response returns command
headers, then formats itself as a valid set command. When header is off, the
response includes only the values. This may make it easier to parse and extract the
information from the response. The table below shows the difference in responses.

Table 2-3: Comparison of Header Off and Header On Responses

Query Header Off Header On
TIME? "14:30:00" :TIME “14:30:00”
ACQuire:NUMAVg? 100 :ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 100

Clearing the instrument output queue

You can clear the Output Queue and reset the instrument a new command or query
by using the selected Device Clear (DCL) function.

Command Entry
The following rules apply when entering commands:
You can enter commands in upper or lower case.
You can precede any command with white space characters. White space
characters include any combination of the ASCII control characters 00 through
09 and 0B through 20 hexadecimal (0 through 9 and 11 through 32 decimal).
The instrument ignores commands consisting of any combination of white
space characters and line feeds.

Abbreviating You can abbreviate many instrument commands. Each command in this
documentation shows the minimum acceptable abbreviations in capitals. For
example, you can enter the command ACQuire:NUMAvg simply as ACQ:NUMA
or acq:numa.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-3

Command Syntax

Abbreviation rules may change over time as new instrument models are
introduced. Thus, for the most robust code, use the full spelling.
If you use the HEADer command to have command headers included as part
of query responses, you can further control whether the returned headers are
abbreviated or are full-length with the VERBose command.

Concatenating You can concatenate any combination of set commands and queries using a
semicolon (;). The instrument executes concatenated commands in the order
received.
When concatenating commands and queries, you must follow these rules:
1. Separate completely different headers by a semicolon and by the beginning
colon on all commands except the first one. For example, the commands
TRIGger:MODe NORMal and ACQuire:NUMAVg 8, can be concatenated
into the following single command:
TRIGger:MODe NORMal;:ACQuire:NUMAVg 8

2. If concatenated commands have headers that differ by only the last mnemonic,
you can abbreviate the second command and eliminate the beginning colon.
For example, you can concatenate the commands ACQuire:MODe ENVelope
and ACQuire:NUMAVg 8 into a single command:
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope; NUMAVg 8

The longer version works equally well:

ACQuire:MODe ENVelope;:ACQuire:NUMAVg 8

3. Never precede a star (*) command with a colon:

ACQuire:STATE 1;*OPC

Any commands that follow will be processed as if the star command was
not there so the commands, ACQuire:MODe ENVelope;*OPC;NUMAVg 8
will set the acquisition mode to envelope and set the number of acquisitions
for averaging to 8.
4. When you concatenate queries, the responses to all the queries are
concatenated into a single response message. For example, if the display
graticule is set to Full and the display style is set to dotsonly, the concatenated
query DISplay:GRAticule?;STYle? will return the following.
If the header is on:
DISPLAY:GRATICULE FULL;:DISPLAY:STYLE DOTSONLY

If the header is off:

2-4 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command Syntax

FULL;DOTSONLY

1. Set commands and queries may be concatenated in the same message. For
example,
ACQuire:MODe SAMple;NUMAVg?;STATE?

is a valid message that sets the acquisition mode to sample. The message then
queries the number of acquisitions for averaging and the acquisition state.
Concatenated commands and queries are executed in the order received.
Here are some invalid concatenations:
DISPlay:STYle DOTsonly OFF;ACQuire:NUMAVg 8 (no colon before
ACQuire)

DISPlay:GRAticule FULL;:STYle DOTSONLY OFF (extra colon before

STYle.

DISPlay:GRAticule FULL;:*TRG (colon before a star (*) command)

Terminating This documentation uses <EOM> (End of Message) to represent a message

terminator.

Table 2-4: End of Message Terminator

Symbol Meaning
<EOM> Message terminator

The end-of-message terminator must be the END message (EOI asserted

concurrently with the last data byte). The last data byte may be an ASCII line
feed (LF) character.
This instrument does not support ASCII LF only message termination. The
instrument always terminates outgoing messages with LF and EOI.

Constructed Mnemonics
Some header mnemonics specify one of a range of mnemonics. For example,
a channel mnemonic can be CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5, CH6, CH7, or CH8
depending on the number of FlexChannels in your instrument. You use these
mnemonics in the command just as you do any other mnemonic. For example,
there is a CH1:POSition command, and there is also a CH2:POSition
command. In the command descriptions, this list of choices is abbreviated as
CH<x>.

Bus Mnemonics Commands specify the bus to use as a mnemonic in the header.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-5

Command Syntax

Table 2-5: Bus Mnemonics

Symbol Meaning
B<x> A bus specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Channel Mnemonics Commands specify the channel to use as a mnemonic in the header.

Table 2-6: Channel Mnemonics

Symbol Meaning
CH<x> A channel specifier; <x> is 1 through 8 and is limited by the number of
FlexChannels in your instrument.

Cursor Position When cursors are displayed, commands may specify which cursor of the pair to
Mnemonics use.

Table 2-7: Cursor Mnemonics

Symbol Meaning
CURSOR<x> A cursor selector; <x> is must be 1 or 2.

Math Specifier Mnemonics Commands can specify the mathematical waveform to use as a mnemonic in
the header.

Table 2-8: Math Specifier Mnemonics

Symbol Meaning
MATH<x> A math waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Measurement Specifier Commands can specify which measurement to set or query as a mnemonic in
Mnemonics the header.

Table 2-9: Measurement Specifier Mnemonics

Symbol Meaning
MEAS<x> A measurement specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Reference Waveform Commands can specify the reference waveform to use as a mnemonic in the
Mnemonics header.

Table 2-10: Reference Waveform Mnemonics

Symbol Meaning
REF<x> A reference waveform specifier; <x> is ≥1.

2-6 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command Syntax

View Mnemonics Commands can specify the view to use as a mnemonic in the header.

Table 2-11: Waveview Mnemonics

Symbol Meaning
WAVEView<x> A waveview specifier; <x> must be equal to 1.
PLOTView<x> A plotview specifier; <x> must be equal to 1.
MATHFFTView<x> A mathfftview specifier; <x> must be equal to 1.

Search Mnemonics Commands can specify a search to use as a mnemonic in the header.

Table 2-12: Search Mnemonics

Symbol Meaning
SEARCH<x> A Search specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Zoom Mnemonics Commands can specify a zoom to use as a mnemonic in the header.

Table 2-13: Zoom Mnemonics

Symbol Meaning
ZOOM<x> A zoom specifier; <x> must be equal to 1.

Argument Types
Commands use arguments such as enumeration, numeric, quoted string and block.
Each of these arguments are listed in detail below.

Enumeration Enter these arguments as unquoted text words. Like key words, enumeration
arguments follow the same convention where the portion indicated in uppercase is
required and that in lowercase is optional.
For example: ACQuire:MODe SAMple

Numeric Many instrument commands require numeric arguments. The syntax shows the
format that the instrument returns in response to a query. This is also the preferred
format when sending the command to the instrument, though any of the formats
will be accepted. This documentation represents these arguments as described
below.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-7

Command Syntax

Table 2-14: Numeric Arguments

Symbol Meaning
<NR1> Signed integer value
<NR2> Floating point value without an exponent
<NR3> Floating point value with an exponent
<bin> Signed or unsigned integer in binary format

Most numeric arguments will be automatically forced to a valid setting, by either

rounding or truncating, when an invalid number is input, unless otherwise noted
in the command description.

Quoted String Some commands accept or return data in the form of a quoted string, which is
simply a group of ASCII characters enclosed by a single quote (') or double quote
("). The following is an example of a quoted string: "This is a quoted
string". This documentation represents these arguments as follows:

Table 2-15: Quoted String Argument

Symbol Meaning
<QString> Quoted string of ASCII text

A quoted string can include any character defined in the 7-bit ASCII character
set. Follow these rules when you use quoted strings:
1. Use the same type of quote character to open and close the string. For
example: "this is a valid string".
2. You can mix quotation marks within a string as long as you follow the
previous rule. For example: "this is an 'acceptable' string".
3. You can include a quote character within a string by repeating the quote. For
example: "here is a "" mark".
4. Strings can have upper or lower case characters.
5. A carriage return or line feed embedded in a quoted string does not terminate
the string. The return is treated as another character in the string.
6. The maximum length of a quoted string returned from a query is 1000
characters.
Here are some invalid strings:
"Invalid string argument' (quotes are not of the same type)

"test<EOI>" (termination character is embedded in the string)

Block Some commands use a block argument form to define a range or type of value,
as defined in the table below.

2-8 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command Syntax

Table 2-16: Block Argument

Symbol Meaning
<NZDig> A nonzero digit character in the range of 1–9
<Dig> A digit character, in the range of 0–9
<DChar> A character with the hexadecimal equivalent of 00 through FF (0
through 255 decimal)
<Block> A block of data bytes defined as: <Block> ::=
{#<NZDig><Dig>[<Dig>...][<DChar>...]|#0[<DChar>...]<terminator>}

<NZDig> specifies the number of <Dig> elements that follow. Taken together,
the <NZDig> and <Dig> elements form a decimal integer that specifies how
many <DChar> elements follow.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-9

Command Syntax

2-10 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Command groups
The programmable interface conforms to Tektronix standard codes and formats
except where noted. The interface also conforms to IEEE Std 488.2-1987 except
where noted.

Acquisition command group

Acquisition commands set up the modes and functions that control how the
instrument acquires signals and processes them into waveforms. Using these
commands for acquiring waveforms, you can do the following:
Start and stop acquisitions.
Control whether each waveform is simply acquired, averaged, or enveloped
over successive acquisitions of that waveform.
Set the controls or conditions that start and stop acquisitions.
Control acquisition of acquired channel waveforms.
Set acquisition parameters.

Table 2-17: Acquisition commands

Command Description
ACQuire? Queries the current acquisition state.
ACQuire:MAXSamplerate? Returns the maximum real-time sample rate.
ACQuire:MODe Sets or queries the acquisition mode.
ACQuire:NUMACq? Returns the number of waveform acquisitions that have occurred since starting
acquisition with the ACQuire:STATE RUN command.
ACQuire:NUMAVg Sets or queries number of acquisitions for an averaged waveform.
ACQuire:SEQuence:CURrent? In single sequence acquisition mode, this query returns the number of acquisitions
or measurements in the sequence completed so far.
ACQuire:SEQuence:MODe In single sequence acquisition, the single sequence stop after count is based on
number of acquisitions or measurements. Number of acquisitions is the only mode
supported for this product.
ACQuire:SEQuence:NUMSEQuence In single sequence acquisition mode, specify the number of acquisitions or
measurements that comprise the sequence.
ACQuire:STATE Starts, stops, or returns acquisition state.
ACQuire:STOPAfter Sets or queries whether the acquisition is continuous or single sequence.

Act On Event command group

Use this group of commands to program the instrument to perform an action on
trigger, search, measurement limit, and mask test events.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-11

Command groups

Table 2-18: Act On Event commands

Command Description
ACTONEVent:ENable Enables or disables actions on event (AOE).
ACTONEVent:LIMit Sets whether the act on event should limit the number of saves, so as not to fill the hard drive.
ACTONEVent:LIMITCount If the number of act on event saves is limited, this command sets the limit.
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION: Save a screen capture when a mask test fails.
SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION: Saves the user set source waveform(s) when a mask test fails.
SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SRQ: Generates an SRQ event when a mask fails.
STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:STOPACQ: Stops acquisitions when a mask test fails.
STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION: Saves a screen capture when a mask hit occurs.
SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION: Saves the user set source waveform(s) when a mask hit occurs.
SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SRQ: Generates an SRQ event when a mask hit occurs.
STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:STOPACQ: Stops acquisitions when a mask hit occurs.
STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION: Saves a screen capture when a mask test passes.
SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION: Saves the user set source waveform(s) when a mask test passes.
SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SRQ: Generates an SRQ event when a mask passes
STATE
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION: Stops acquisitions when a mask test passes.
STOPACQ:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION: Saves a screen capture when the user-set measurement limit is exceeded.
SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION: Saves the user set source waveform(s) when the user-set measurement limit
SAVEWAVEform:STATE is exceeded.
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ: Generates an SRQ event when any measurement triggers the user-defined
STATE measurement limits.
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION: Stops acquisitions when the user-set measurement limit is exceeded.
STOPACQ:STATE
ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION: Saves a screen capture when a search event is found.
SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION: Saves the user set source waveform(s) when a search event is found.
SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SRQ: Generates an SRQ event when any search event is found.
STATE

2-12 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Table 2-18: Act On Event commands (cont.)

Command Description
ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:STOPACQ: Stops acquisitions when a search event is found.
STATE
ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION: Saves a screen capture on a trigger event from a single sequence or sequence of
SAVEIMAGe:STATE N acquisition.
ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION: Saves the user set source waveform(s) on a trigger event from a single sequence
SAVEWAVEform:STATE or sequence of N acquisition.
ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SRQ:STATE Generates an SRQ event when a trigger event occurs.
ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:STOPACQ: Stops acquisitions on a trigger event from a single sequence or sequence of N
STATE acquisition.
SAVEONEVent:FILEDest Sets or queries the file path.
SAVEONEVent:FILEName Sets or queries the file name without the extension.
SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat Sets or returns the file extension (png, jpg, bmp).
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat Sets or returns the file extension (csv, wfm, mat).
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce Sets or returns the sources for saving waveforms when an event occurs.

AFG Command Group

Use the AFG commands for Arbitrary Function Generator functionality. Requires
option AFG.

Table 2-19: AFG commands

Command Description
AFG:AMPLitude Sets (or queries) the AFG amplitude in volts, peak to peak.
AFG:ARBitrary:SOUrce Sets or queries the source name for the Arbitrary Waveform.
AFG:BURSt:CCOUnt Sets or returns the cycle count for AFG burst mode.
AFG:BURSt:TRIGger Triggers a burst on AFG output.
AFG:FREQuency Sets (or queries) the AFG frequency, in Hz.
AFG:FUNCtion Sets (or queries) which AFG function to execute.
AFG:HIGHLevel Sets (or queries) the high level value of the output waveform, in volts.
AFG:LOWLevel Sets (or queries) the low level value of the output waveform, in volts.
AFG:NOISEAdd:PERCent Sets (or queries) the AFG additive noise level as a percentage.
AFG:NOISEAdd:STATE Sets (or queries) the AFG additive noise state.
AFG:OFFSet Sets (or queries) the AFG offset value, in volts.
AFG:OUTPut:LOAd:IMPEDance Sets (or queries) the AFG output load impedance.
AFG:OUTPut:MODe Sets or returns the AFG output mode.
AFG:OUTPut:STATE Sets (or queries) the AFG output state.
AFG:PERIod Sets (or queries) the period of the AFG waveform, in seconds.
AFG:PULse:WIDth Sets (or queries) the AFG pulse width, in seconds.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-13

Command groups

Table 2-19: AFG commands (cont.)

Command Description
AFG:RAMP:SYMmetry Sets (or queries) the AFG ramp symmetry as a percentage.
AFG:SQUare:DUty Sets (or queries) the AFG duty cycle, as a percentage.

Alias command group

Alias commands allow you to define new commands as a sequence of standard
commands. You might find this useful when repeatedly using the same commands
to perform certain tasks like setting up measurements.
Aliases are similar to macros but do not include the capability to substitute
parameters into alias bodies. The alias mechanism obeys the following rules:
The alias name must consist of a valid IEEE 488.2 message unit, which may
not appear in a message preceded by a colon, comma, or a command or query
program header.
The alias name may not appear in a message followed by program date, a
colon, comma, or question mark.
An alias name must be distinct from any keyword or keyword short form.
An alias name cannot be redefined without first being deleted using one of
the alias deletion functions.
Alias names do not appear in response messages.
The Alias commands are defined in Tektronix Standard Codes and Formats.
Deviations between that standard and what is specified here will be considered
errors unless specifically noted in the command description in this document.

Table 2-20: Alias commands

Command Description
ALIas Sets or queries the alias state.
ALIas:CATalog? Returns a list of the currently defined alias labels.
ALIas:DEFine Assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label.
ALIas:DELEte Removes a specified alias.
ALIas:DELEte:ALL Deletes all existing aliases.
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe Removes a specified alias.
ALIas:STATE Sets or queries the alias state.

Battery command group

Battery commands gather battery information from your instrument.

2-14 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Table 2-21: Battery commands

Command Description
BATTery:ACPOWer? Queries the state of AC being plugged in.
BATTery:SLOT<1,2>:CHARGE? Queries the current charge of the battery.
BATTery:SLOT<1,2>:INSTalled? Queries if a battery is installed.
BATTery:SLOT<1,2>:SERIALnumber? Queries the serial number of the battery.
BATTery:SLOT<1,2>:TIMETOEMPty? Queries the time to empty of the battery.
BATTery:SLOT<1,2>:TIMETOFULL? Queries the time to full of the battery.

Bus command group

Use the commands in the Bus Command Group to configure a bus. These
commands let you:
Specify the bus type.
Specify the signals to be used in the bus.
Specify its display style.

NOTE. Bus commands are present once a bus has been added.

Bus Mnemonics Commands specify the bus to use as a mnemonic in the header.

Table 2-22: Bus mnemonics

Symbol Meaning
B<x> A bus specifier; <x> is ≥1.

Table 2-23: Bus commands

Command Description
BUS:ADDNew Adds the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate Sets or queries the CAN bit rate.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate:VALue Sets or queries CAN bit rate.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate Sets or queries the increased data phase bit rate used by CAN FD packets on
the specified CAN bus.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate:CUSTom Sets or queries the custom bit rate for the increased data phase of CAN FD
packets on the specified CAN bus.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint Sets or queries the sample point for the specified CAN bus.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SIGNal Sets or queries the signal type for the specified CAN bus.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce Sets or queries the CAN source channel.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-15

Command groups

Table 2-23: Bus commands (cont.)

Command Description
BUS:B<x>:CAN:STANDard Sets or queries which CAN standard specification to analyze the specified
CAN bus with.
BUS:B<x>:CAN:THReshold Sets or queries the source channel threshold for the specified CAN bus.
BUS:B<x>:DISplay:FORMat Sets or queries how the data is represented in the busform for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:DISplay:LAYout This command sets or queries the format a bus layer should use.
BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:SOUrce Sets or queries the I2C clock (SCLK) source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:THReshold Sets or queries the I2C Clock (SCLK) source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SOUrce Sets or queries the I2C data (SDA) source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:THReshold Sets or queries the I2C Data (SDA) source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:I2C:RWINADDR Determines whether decoded I2C slave addresses are pure seven-bit values,
or have the R/W* combined with them.
BUS:B<x>:LABel:COLor Sets or queries the color of the specified bus label.
BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD Sets or queries the bold state of the specified bus label.
BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic Sets or queries the italic state of the specified bus label.
BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE Sets or queries the font size of the specified bus label.
BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE Sets or queries the font type of the specified bus label, such as Arial or Times
New Roman.
BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline Sets or queries the underline state of the specified bus label.
BUS:B<x>:LABel:name Sets or queries the waveform label for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:LABel:XPOS Sets or queries the x-position of the specified bus' label.
BUS:B<x>:LABel:YPOS Sets or queries the y-position of the specified bus' label.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate Sets or queries the LIN bus bit rate.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDFORmat Sets or queries LIN bus id format.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:POLarity Sets or queries the LIN bus polarity.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SAMPLEpoint Specifies the point to sample during each bit period, as a percent, for the
specified LIN bus.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce Sets or queries sets the LIN bus source.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce:THReshold Sets or queries the LIN source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:STANDard Sets or queries the LIN bus standard.
BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom Sets or queries LIN custom bit rate for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds Sets or queries the threshold for all sources for the parallel bus.
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds:APPly Sets all of the data source thresholds to the value of the allMRefs parameter for
the parallel bus.
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<x>SOUrce Sets or queries the specified bit source for specified parallel bus.
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<n>SOUrce:THReshold Sets or queries the specified bit source threshold for the specified parallel bus.
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:EDGE Determines which edges of its clock signal cause a clocked parallel bus to
sample new states.
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:ISCLOCKED Determines whether the bus operates in a clocked or asynchronous fashion.

2-16 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Table 2-23: Bus commands (cont.)

Command Description
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCkSOUrce Sets or queries the Parallel clock source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCKSOUrce:THReshold Sets or queries the bit source threshold for the parallel bus.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate Sets or queries the RS-232 bit rate for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate:CUSTom Sets or queries the RS232 custom bit rate for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATABits Sets or queries the number of RS-232 data bits for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELIMiter Sets or queries the RS-232 delimiting value for a packet on the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DISplaymode Sets or queries the display mode for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:PARity Sets or queries the RS-232 parity for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:POLarity Sets or queries the RS-232 polarity for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:SOUrce Sets or queries the RS-232 polarity for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:SOUrce:THReshold Sets or queries the RS232 source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SENT:CHANWidth Sets or queries SENT fast channel bit widths for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount Sets or queries SENT data nibbles for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel Sets or queries SENT fast data channels for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSEPULSe Sets or queries SENT pause pulse for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SENT:POLARITY Sets or queries SENT Idle State signal polarity for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW Sets or queries the SENT slow channel configuration for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SENT:SOUrce Sets or queries the SENT DATA source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SENT:THRESHold Sets or queries the SENT DATA source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SENT:TICKTIME Sets or queries the SENT bus Clock Tick parameter for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SENT:TICKTOLerance Sets or queries the SENT bus Tick Tolerance percent parameter for the
specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:BITOrder Sets or queries the shift direction used to de-serialize data for the SPI mode of
the bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:POLarity Sets or queries the SPI clock (SCLK) polarity for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:SOUrce Sets or queries the SPI clock (SCLK) source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:THReshold Sets or queries the SPI Clock (SCLK) source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:POLarity Sets or queries the SPI data (DATA) polarity for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe Sets or queries the number of bits per word for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SOUrce Sets or queries the SPI data (DATA) source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:THReshold Sets or queries the SPI Data (DATA) source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING Sets or queries the SPI bus framing.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime Sets or queries the SPI bus idle time.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:DATa:POLarity Sets or queries the SPI MISo Data source polarity for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:INPut Sets or queries the SPI MISo source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:THReshold Sets or queries the SPI MISo Data source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:DATa:POLarity Sets or queries the SPI MOSI source polarity for the specified bus.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-17

Command groups

Table 2-23: Bus commands (cont.)

Command Description
BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:INPut Sets or queries the SPI MOSI source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:THReshold Sets or queries the SPI MOSI source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:NUMBer:INputs Sets or queries the number of inputs for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:POLarity Sets or queries the SPI Slave Select (SS) polarity for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:SOUrce Sets or queries the SPI Slave Select (SS) source for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:THReshold Sets or queries the SPI Select (SS) source threshold for the specified bus.
BUS:B<x>:TYPe Sets or queries the bus type specified.
BUS:DELete Deletes the specified bus.
BUS:LIST? Lists all currently defined bus.
BUSTABle:ADDNew Adds the specified bus table.
BUSTABle:DELete Deletes the specified bus table.
BUSTABle:LIST? Lists all currently defined bus tables.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:STATE Sets or queries the state of the specified bus in the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:VERTical: Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified bus in the specified
POSition Waveform View.

2-18 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Calibration command group

The Calibration commands provide information about the current state of
instrument calibration and allow you to initiate signal path calibration (SPC).

NOTE. When running SPC through the remote interface, calibration status cannot
be obtained until after the SPC completes, which can take several minutes. Any
remote command that performs an action on the instrument is also disabled until
the SPC is complete.

Table 2-24: Calibration commands

Command Description
*CAL? Instructs the instrument to perform signal path calibration and returns the calibration
status when complete. Takes several minutes to run.
CALibrate? Returns the calibration status.
CALibrate:INTERNal Starts the signal path calibration. Takes several minutes to run.
CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt Starts the signal path calibration.
CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? Returns the status of the signal path calibration.
CALibrate:PWRUpstatus? Returns the current status of the power-up calibration.
TOUCHSCReen:STATe Sets or queries the enabled state of the touch screen.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-19

Command groups

Callouts command group

The Callout commands creates custom callouts to document specific details of
your test results.

Table 2-25: Callout commands

Command Description
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x> Creates a new note.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:BOOKMark: Sets or queries the source of the Bookmark callout type.
SOURCE
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:BOOKMark:XPOS Sets or queries the X-Position of the Bookmark callout type.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:COLOR Sets or queries the text color of the callout.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>: Sets or queries horizontal display position of the callout text
DISPLAYPOSition:X
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>: Sets or queries vertical display position of the callout text
DISPLAYPOSition:Y
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:BOLD Sets or queries the bold state of the callout text.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:ITALIC Sets or queries the italic state of the callout text.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:SIZE Sets or queries the font size of the callout text.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:TYPE Sets or queries the font type of the callout.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT: Sets or queries the underline state of the callout text.
UNDERLine
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:TEXT Sets or queries the callout text.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:TYPE Sets or queries type of the callout

2-20 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Cursor command group

Use the commands in the Cursor Command Group to control the cursor display
and readout. You can use these commands to control the setups for each cursor,
such as waveform source, and cursor position.
You can also use the commands to select one of the following cursor functions:
Off. Shuts off the display of all cursors.
Vertical bars. Displays vertical bar cursors, which provide traditional
horizontal unit readouts for Cursor 1 (bar1), Cursor 2 (bar2), the delta
between them, and 1/delta (results in frequency when the horizontal unit is
time). Vertical bars are another name for vertical screen cursors.
Horizontal bars. Displays horizontal bar cursors, which provide traditional
vertical unit readouts for Cursor 1 (bar1), Cursor 2 (bar2), and the delta
between them. Horizontal bars are another name for horizontal screen cursors.
Waveform cursors. Consists of two cursors you can independently assign to a
waveform. Waveform cursors enable you to conveniently measure waveform
amplitude and time at specific points on the waveform. In XY format,
waveform cursors indicate the amplitude position of an XY pair (Ch1 vs Ch2
voltage, where Ch1 is the X axis and Ch2 is the Y axis) relative to the trigger.
Screen cursors. Consist of two pairs of horizontal and vertical bar cursors.
You can use these cursors to indicate an arbitrary position within the
waveform display area. Screen cursors are basically just turning on horizontal
bars and vertical bars at the same time. These cursors have no association
with any waveform, except that they inherit the color of the waveform they
are assigned to.

NOTE. Cursor commands are available once a view has been added.

Table 2-26: Cursor commands

Command Description
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Queries the cursor source for cursor A in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
ASOUrce?
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Queries the cursor source for cursor B in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
BSOUrce?
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:DDT? Queries the delta V over delta T cursor readout value in the specified Math-FFT
waveform.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the cursor typein the specified Math-FFT waveform.
FUNCtion
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Sets or returns the horizontal cursor A position in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
APOSition

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-21

Command groups

Table 2-26: Cursor commands (cont.)

Command Description
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Queries cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified view.
AUNIts?
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Sets or returns the vertical cursor B position in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
BPOSition
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Queries the cursor B vertical units in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
BUNIts?
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Queries the delta V cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified view.
DELTa?
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:MODe Sets or returns the cursor tracking mode in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Queries the one over delta T cursor readout value in the specified Math-FFT
ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? waveform.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<n>:CURSor: Sets or queries the location to display the specified Math FFT plot cursor readouts
ROLOCATION (in the plot graticule or in a badge in the Results Bar).
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or returns the horizontal cursor A position in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
SCREEN:AXPOSition
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or returns the vertical cursor A position in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
SCREEN:AYPOSition
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or returns the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the
SCREEN:BXPOSition specified view.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or returns the vertical cursor B position in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
SCREEN:BYPOSition
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:STATE Sets or queries the visible state of cursors in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position in the specified Math-FFT waveform.
APOSition
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Queries the vertical cursor A measurement units for the specified Math-FFT view.
AUNIts?
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B positionin the specified Math-FFT waveform.
BPOSition
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Queries the vertical cursor B measurement units for the specified Math-FFT view.
BUNIts?
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Queries the delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified
DELTa? Math-FFT waveform.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the waveform cursor A position in the specified plot view.
WAVEform:APOSition
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the waveform cursor B position in the specified plot view.
WAVEform:BPOSition
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:ASOUrce? Queries the cursor source for plot cursor A.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:BSOUrce? Queries the cursor source for plot cursor B.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:DDT? Queries the delta V over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in
the specified view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion Sets or queries the cursor mode of the specified cursor in the specified view.

2-22 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Table 2-26: Cursor commands (cont.)

Command Description
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
APOSition view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Sets or queries the cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified view.
AUNIts?
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
BPOSition view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Sets or queries the cursor B vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified view.
BUNIts?
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Sets or queries the delta V cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the
DELTa? specified view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:MODe Sets or queries the cursor tracking mode of the specified cursor in the specified view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the one over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in
ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? the specified view.
DISplay:PLOTView<n>:CURSor: Sets or queries the location to display the specified Plot cursor readouts (in the plot
ROLOCATION graticule or in a badge in the Results Bar).
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the
AXPOSition specified view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: Sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
AYPOSition view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the
BXPOSition specified view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: Sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
BYPOSition view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the cursor source mode in the specified view.
SPLITMODE
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:STATE Sets or queries the visible state of the cursor of the specified cursor in the specified
view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the
APOSition specified view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the
BPOSition specified view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Queries the delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified view.
DELTa?
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Queries the VBArs cursor readout units of the specified cursor in the specified view.
UNIts?
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the
APOSition specified view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the
BPOSition specified view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Queries the cursor source for plot cursor A
ASOUrce?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-23

Command groups

Table 2-26: Cursor commands (cont.)

Command Description
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Queries the cursor source for plot cursor B.
BSOUrce?
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:DDT? Queries the delta V over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in
the specified view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion Sets or queries the cursor type of the specified cursor in the specified view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
APOSition view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Queries cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified view.
AUNIts?
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
BPOSition view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Queries the cursor B vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified view.
BUNIts?
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: Queries the delta V cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified view.
DELTa?
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:MODe Sets or queries the cursor tracking mode of the specified cursor in the specified view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Queries the one over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the
ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? specified view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<n>:CURSor: Sets or queries the location to display the specified Reference FFT plot cursor
ROLOCATION readouts (in the plot graticule or in a badge in the Results Bar).
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the
AXPOSition specified view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: Sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
AYPOSition view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the
BXPOSition specified view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: Sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
BYPOSition view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries whether both cursors have same or different source.
SPLITMODE
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:STATE Sets or queries the visible state of the cursor of the specified cursor n the specified
view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the
APOSition specified view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the
BPOSition specified view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Queries the delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified view.
DELTa?
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: Queries cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified view.
UNIts?
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Queries the value of the cursor A horizontal position.
WAVEform:AHPOSition?

2-24 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Table 2-26: Cursor commands (cont.)

Command Description
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or returns the waveform cursor A position in the specified plot view.
WAVEform:APOSition
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Queries the value of the cursor A vertical position.
WAVEform:AVPOSition?
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Queries the value of the cursor B horizontal position.
WAVEform:BHPOSition?
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Sets or returns the waveform cursor B position in the specified plot view.
WAVEform:BPOSition
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor: Queries the value of the cursor B vertical position.
WAVEform:BVPOSition?
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor? Queries the cursor parameters for the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Queries the cursor parameters for the specified cursor in the specified Waveform
CURSOR<x>? View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the cursor A source of the specified cursor in the specified Waveform
CURSOR<x>:ASOUrce View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the cursor B source of the specified cursor in the specified Waveform
CURSOR<x>:BSOUrce View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Returns the delta V over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in
CURSOR<x>:DDT? the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the cursor mode (SCREEN or DATA) of the specified cursor in
CURSOR<x>:FUNCtion the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
CURSOR<x>:HBArs:APOSition Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Queries the cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified Waveform
CURSOR<x>:HBArs:AUNIts? View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
CURSOR<x>:HBArs:BPOSition Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Queries the cursor B vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified Waveform
CURSOR<x>:HBArs:BUNIts? View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the delta V cursor readout value over the history period.
CURSOR<x>:HBArs:DELTa?
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the cursor tracking mode of the specified cursor in the specified
CURSOR<x>:MODe Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the one over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in
CURSOR<x>:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView:CURSor:CURSOR1: Sets or queries the location to display the Waveform View cursor readouts (in the
ROLOCATION Waveform View graticule or in a badge in the Results Bar).
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the
CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:AXPOSition specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:AYPOSition Waveform View.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-25

Command groups

Table 2-26: Cursor commands (cont.)

Command Description
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the
CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:BXPOSition specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:BYPOSition Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the cursor source mode in the specified view.
CURSOR<x>:SPLITMODE
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the visible state of the cursor of the specified cursor in the specified
CURSOR<x>:STATE Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the
CURSOR<x>:VBArs:APOSition specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the
CURSOR<x>:VBArs:BPOSition specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the
CURSOR<x>:VBArs:DELTa? specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Queries cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified Waveform
CURSOR<x>:VBArs:UNIts? View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the
CURSOR<x>:WAVEform:APOSition specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Queries the vertical waveform value at the cursor A position in the specified
WAVEform:AVPOSition? Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the
CURSOR<x>:WAVEform:BPOSition specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: Queries the vertical waveform value at the cursor B position in the specified
WAVEform:BVPOSition? Waveform View.

Digital command group

Use the commands in the Digital Command Group to acquire up to 16 digital
signals and analyze them.

Table 2-27: Digital commands

Command Description
DCH<x>:D<x>:THReshold Sets or queries the threshold level in volts for the specified digital channel.
DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:COLor Sets or queries the color of the label of the specified digital bit.
DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD Sets or queries the bold state of the label of the specified digital bit.
DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic Sets or queries the italic state of the label of the specified digital bit.
DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE Sets or queries the font size of the label of the specified digital bit.
DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE Sets or queries the font type of the label of the specified digital bit.
DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline Sets or queries the underline state of the label of the specified digital bit.

2-26 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Table 2-27: Digital commands (cont.)

Command Description
DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:NAMe Sets or queries the label name of the specified digital bit.
SELect:DCH<x>:DAll Turns on or off all constituent digital channels.

Display control command group

Display commands can be found in this section as well as the sections of related
components. These commands control general instrument settings, such as the
intensity of the graticule, stacked or overlay display mode, and the fastacq color
palette. Display commands also control how and where waveforms are shown,
their position on screen, and zoom settings applied to the view. For example,
display commands can turn on or off the display of channels or set the selected
source.
Some actions can create a new view which can have its own settings. For example,
adding a histogram will create a new view where the Histogram plot is displayed.
Each view acts as a separate window within the instrument application and can
be rearranged or annotated as desired.
A WaveView is the primary view used for viewing inputs and time-domain signals.
Buses, non-FFT maths, refs, and analog channels are displayed in the WaveView.
A PlotView is used for viewing measurement results and other plotted data. XY
plots and FFTs are shown in individual PlotViews.
Each of these views can have separate settings, zoom, cursors, and annotations.
Display commands which are view specific have a view parameter in
the programmable interface, such as DISPLAY:WAVEView<x>: ... or
DISPLAY:PLOTView<x>: ... Selected source can also be specified on a per-view
basis. The overall selected source is determined by the selected view and the
selected source within that view.
PlotViews and WaveViews have some differences in command syntax due to
differences in view functionality. For example, WaveViews and PlotViews have
a different zoom model. The commands for specifying the zoom reflects these
differences, and different command syntax is available depending on the view.

Table 2-28: Display control commands

Command Description
DISplay? Returns current display settings.
DISplay:{CH<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>}: Sets or queries the Inverted mode color of the specified input source to the specified
INVERTColor color.
DISplay:{CH<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>}: Sets or queries the Inverted mode color of the specified input source to the specified
NORMALColor color.
DISplay:COLors Sets or queries the color mode for the graticule and waveform display.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-27

Command groups

Table 2-28: Display control commands (cont.)

Command Description
DISplay:GLObal:B<x>:STATE Sets or queries the display mode (on or off) of the specified bus.
DISplay:GLObal:CH<x>:STATE Sets or queries the display mode (on or off) of the specified channel (both analog
and digital).
DISplay:GLObal:DCH<x>:STATE Sets or queries the display mode (on or off) of the specified channel (digital).
DISplay:GLObal:MATH<x>:STATE Sets or queries the display mode (on or off) of the specified math.
DISplay:GLObal:REF<x>:STATE Sets or queries the display mode (on or off) of the specified reference.
DISplay:INTENSITy? Returns the waveform and graticule saturation levels.
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight Sets or queries the waveform backlight intensity settings.
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim: Sets or queries the state of the display auto-dim feature.
ENAble
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim: Sets or queries the amount of time, in minutes, to wait for no user interface activity
TIMe before automatically dimming the display.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:AUTOScale Sets or returns the enabled state of autoscale for plots.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:GRIDlines Sets or queries the grid lines setting of the plot.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: Sets or queries the state of the specified math waveform in the specified Waveform
STATE View.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE Sets or queries the x-axis scale setting for FFT Math waveforms.
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:YAXIS:SCALE Sets or queries the vertical scale setting for FFT Maths.
DISplay:PERSistence Sets or queries display persistence setting.
DISplay:PERSistence:RESET Clears the persistence data.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:AUTOScale Sets or queries the enabled state of autoscale for plots.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:GRIDlines Sets or queries the Grid lines setting of the specified plot.
DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW<x>:XAXIS:SCALE Sets or queries the horizontal scale setting for applicable plot.
DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW<x>:YAXIS:SCALE Sets or queries the vertical scale setting for applicable plots.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:AUTOScale Sets or queries the enabled state of auto-scale for plots.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:GRIDlines Sets or returns the grid lines setting of the plot.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:REF:REF<x>: Sets or queries the state of the specified reference waveform in the specified
STATE Waveform View.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE Sets or queries the x-axis scale setting for REFFFT.
DISplay:SELect:BUS Sets or queries the overall selected bus.
DISplay:SELect:MATH Sets or queries the overall selected math.
DISplay:SELect:REFerence Sets or queries the overall selected reference waveform.
DISplay:SELect:SOUrce Sets or queries the overall selected source.
DISplay:SELect:VIEW Sets or queries the selected view.
DISplay:SELect:WAVEView<x>:SOUrce Sets or queries the selected source in the given waveview.
DISplay:VARpersist Sets or queries the persistence decay time.
DISplay:WAVEform Globally enables or disables the waveform display.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:STATE Sets or queries the state of the specified bus in the specified Waveform View.

2-28 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Table 2-28: Display control commands (cont.)

Command Description
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:VERTical: Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified bus in the specified Waveform
POSition View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:STATE Sets or queries the state of the specified channel in the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:VERTical: Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified channel in the specified
POSition Waveform View in divisions.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:VERTical: Sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified channel in volts per division within
SCAle the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:DCH<x>_D<x>: Sets or queries the display state of the specified digital channel in the specified
STATE Waveform View.
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW<x>:DCH<x>_DALL: Sets or queries the order of the digital channels.
DIGORDER
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:DCH<x>_DALL: Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified channel in the specified
VERTical:POSition Waveform View in divisions.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:FILTer Sets or queries the type of interpolation filter for the display.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:GRAticule Selects or queries the type of graticule that is displayed.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:INTENSITy: Sets or queries the graticule saturation level.
GRATicule
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:INTENSITy: Sets or queries the waveform saturation level.
WAVEform
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: Sets or queries whether the specified math gets auto-scaled when the math
AUTOScale equation changes within the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: Sets or queries the state of the specified math waveform in the specified Waveform
STATE View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: Sets or queries the vertical position in divisions of the specified math waveform.
VERTical:POSition
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: Sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified math waveform.
VERTical:SCAle
DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF<x>_DALL: Sets or returns the selected frame of the specified digital ref.
FRAMe
DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF:REF<x>: sets or returns the selected frame of the specified analog ref.
FRAMe
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:STATE Sets or queries the state of the specified reference waveform in the specified
Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>: Sets or queries the vertical position in divisions of the specified reference waveform.
VERTical:POSition
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>: Sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified reference waveform.
VERTical:SCAle
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:STYle Sets or queries the waveforms are displayed for analysis mode.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:VIEWStyle Sets or queries the waveform layout style used by the display.
DISplay:WAVEView:GRIDTYPE Sets or queries the Waveform View Graticule mode (Fixed or Moveable).

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-29

Command groups

Table 2-28: Display control commands (cont.)

Command Description
DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW<x>:XAXIS:SCALE Sets or queries the horizontal scale setting for applicable plots, either Linear or Log.
DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW<x>:YAXIS:SCALE Sets or queries the vertical scale setting for applicable plots, either Linear or Log.

Ethernet Command Group

Use the commands in the Ethernet Command Group to set up the 10BASE-T,
100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-TX or 100BASE-T Ethernet remote interface.

Table 2-29: Ethernet Commands

Command Description
ETHERnet:DHCPbootp Specifies the network initialization search for a DHCP/BOOTP server.
ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress Specifies the network Domain Name Server (DNS) IP address.
ETHERnet:DOMAINname Specifies the network domain name.
ETHERnet:ENET:ADDress? Returns the Ethernet address (MAC address) value assigned to the instrument.
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress Specifies the network gateway IP address.
ETHERnet:IPADDress Specifies the IP address assigned to the instrument.
ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:RESET Resets the LXI local area network.
ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:SERVICENAMe Specifies the mDNS service name used for the LXI interface.
ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:STATus? Returns the LXI network status.
ETHERnet:NAME Sets or queries the instrument Ethernet hostname assigned to the instrument.
ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig Specifies the Ethernet network configuration setting.
ETHERnet:PING Causes the instrument to ping the gateway IP address.
ETHERnet:PING:STATus? Returns the results from sending the ETHERnet:PING command to ping the
gateway IP address.
ETHERnet:SUBNETMask Specifies the network subnet mask value.

2-30 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

File system command group

Use the commands in the File System Command Group to help you use the
built-in hard disk drive. You can use the commands to do the following:
List the contents of the current directory
Create and delete directories
Create, copy, read, rename, or delete a file
When using these commands, keep the following points in mind:
File arguments are always enclosed within double quotes:
“C:\MYDIR\TEK00001.SET”
File names follow the MS-DOS format: [DRIVE:][\PATH\]filename
Path separators can be either forward slashes (/) or back slashes (\)

NOTE. Using a back slash as a path separator can produce some unexpected
results, depending on how your controller application treats escaped characters.
Many applications recognize the sequence of a back slash followed by an
alphabetic character as an escaped character, and, as such, interpret that
alphabetic character as a control character. For example, the sequence “\n”
might be interpreted as a newline character; “\t” might be interpreted as a tab
character. To ensure that this interpretation does not occur, you can use double
back slashes. For example, “C:\\testfile.txt”.

Some FILESystem commands can fail because a file has read-only attributes.
You will not be able to delete or replace such files until this attribute is
removed. Refer to the operating system help on file properties for further
information.

Table 2-30: File system commands

Command Description
FILESystem? Returns the file system state.
FILESystem:COPy Copies one or more files to a new file.
FILESystem:CWD Sets or queries the current working directory for FILESystem commands.
FILESystem:DELEte Deletes a named file or directory.
FILESystem:DIR? Returns a list of directory contents.
FILESystem:HOMEDir? Returns the current user's home directory.
FILESystem:LDIR? Returns a list of directory contents.
FILESystem:MKDir Makes a new directory.
FILESYSTEM:MOUNT:DRIVE Mounts a network drive or queries if a network drive is currently mounted.
FILESystem:MOUNT:TEKDrive Mounts the TekDrive specified by the quoted string arguments.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-31

Command groups

Table 2-30: File system commands (cont.)

Command Description
FILESystem:READFile Copies the named file to the interface.
FILESystem:REName Assigns a new name to an existing file.
FILESystem:RMDir Deletes the named directory.
FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE? Returns short code in string format.
FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE:EXPirytime? Returns expiry time of short code.
FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE:STATus? Returns status of short code.
FILESystem:UNMOUNT:DRIve Unmount the USB drive.
FILESystem:UNMOUNT:TEKDrive Unmounts the TekDrive specified by the quoted string argument and the drive name
is case insensitive.
FILESystem:WRITEFile Copies the block data to a named file.

2-32 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Horizontal command group

Horizontal commands control the time base of the instrument. You can set the
time per division (or time per point) of the main time base. You can use the
Horizontal commands to do the following:
Set the scale, horizontal position and reference, and units of the time base
Get the screen resolution, time of first point and time of last point, or get all
the horizontal settings
Enable or disable the display of the time base

Table 2-31: Horizontal commands

Command Description
HORizontal? Queries the current horizontal settings.
HORizontal:ACQDURATION? Returns the time base duration.
HORizontal:DELay:MODe Sets or queries the horizontal delay mode.
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe Sets or queries the horizontal delay time (position) that is used when delay is on.
HORizontal:DIVisions? Returns the number of graticule divisions over which the waveform is displayed.
HORizontal:MAIn:INTERPRatio? Returns the main horizontal time base interpolation ratio.
HORizontal:MODE Sets or queries the horizontal mode.
HORizontal:MODe:MANual:CONFIGure Sets or queries which horizontal control (scale or record length) will also change
when the sample rate is adjusted.
HORizontal:MODE:RECOrdlength Sets or queries the record length.
HORizontal:MODE:SAMPLERate Sets or queries the sample rate.
HORizontal:MODE:SCAle Sets or queries the horizontal scale.
HORizontal:POSition Sets or queries the waveform horizontal position, in percent, that is used when
delay is off.
HORizontal:PREViewstate? Returns the display system preview state.
HORizontal:RECOrdlength Sets or queries the horizontal record length.
HORizontal:SAMPLERate Sets or queries the horizontal sample rate.
HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode: Sets or queries the flag which allows override of the horizontal analyze minimum
MINimum:OVERRide sample rate.
HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode: Sets or queries the minimum sample rate used by Analysis Automatic horizontal
MINimum:VALue mode.
HORizontal:SCAle Sets or queries the horizontal scale.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-33

Command groups

Mask command group

Mask commands compare incoming waveforms to standard or user-defined
masks. A mask is a set of polygonal regions on the screen. Unlike limit testing,
the inside of a mask is the region where waveform data would not normally fall.
Standards with eye patterns usually have three masks, but some have four.

Table 2-32: Mask commands

Command Description
MASK:DELete Deletes all mask segments of the specified mask test.
MASK:MASK<x>:COUNT? Returns the total number of mask hits in all segments and the number of mask hits in
each individual mask segment for the specified mask test.
MASK:MASK<x>:COUNT:HITS? Returns the total number of mask hits in all mask segments for the specified mask test.
MASK:MASK<x>:DEFinedby Sets or queries whether the specified mask is defined by segments or tolerances.
MASK:MASK<x>:DISplay Sets or queries the display state of the mask used for the specified mask test.
MASK:MASK<x>:LIST? Queries the list of segments in the mask used by the specified mask test.
MASK:MASK<x>:SEG<x>:POINTS Sets or queries the X/Y coordinates of all points in the designated mask segment.
MASK:MASK<x>:SEG<x>COUNT:HITS? Returns the total number of mask hits in the specified mask segment of the specified
mask test.
MASK:MASK<x>:SOUrce Sets or queries analog source for the specified mask test.
MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATE Sets or queries state of the specified mask test.
MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATUS? Queries the status of the specified mask test.
MASK:MASK<x>:TEST:THReshold Sets or queries the number of waveform violations needed for the specified mask test
to change from PASS to FAIL.
MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HORizontal Sets or queries the mask horizontal tolerance.
MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:UPDatenow Causes the tolerance mask to be recalculated with the current horizontal and vertical
tolerances.
MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VERTical Sets or queries the mask vertical tolerance.
MASK:TESt:WAVEforms Sets or queries the number of waveform acquisitions to test during mask testing.
RECAll:MASK Recalls a saved mask definition from a Mask File.

2-34 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Math command group

Use the commands in the Math Command Group to create and define math
waveforms. Use the available math functions to define your math waveform.
The math waveform you create depends on sources listed in the math expression.
If you change these sources, the math waveforms you previously defined will be
affected.
Math expressions can be simple, containing no mathematical computation, such
as CH1, which specifies that a waveform shows the signal source of channel 1.
Math expressions can also be complex, consisting of 100 plus characters and
comprising many sources, functions, and operands.
The acquisition of a live waveform can stop for several reasons: You can turn off
the channel, stop the waveform (via Run/Stop from the Horiz/Acq menu), or stop
the trigger (via Run/Stop from the Trig menu). When you turn off the channel,
math continues and data is acquired but is not displayed. When you stop either the
waveform or the trigger, the math calculation stops, and the last math calculation
performed is displayed.
When a live waveform updates or a reference waveform is altered, math
waveforms containing those waveforms as sources are also updated to reflect the
changes. Also, sources must exist but do not need to be displayed to be used in
and to update math waveforms.

NOTE. Math commands are present once a math has been added.

Table 2-33: Math commands

Command Description
DISplay:GLObal:MATH<x>:STATE Sets or queries the global state of the specified math.
DISplay:SELect:MATH Sets or queries the overall selected math.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: Sets or queries the state of the specified math waveform in the specified Waveform
STATE View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: Sets or queries the vertical position in divisions of the specified math waveform.
VERTical:POSition
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: Sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified math waveform.
VERTical:SCAle
MATH:ADDNew Adds the specified math.
MATH:DELete Deletes the specified math.
MATH:LIST? Lists all currently defined math waveforms.
MATH:MATH<x>:AVG:MODE Sets or queries the math average mode flag.
MATH:MATH<x>:AVG:WEIGht Sets or queries the number of acquisitions at which the averaging algorithm will
begin exponential averaging.
MATH:MATH<x>:CAN:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for CAN bus.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-35

Command groups

Table 2-33: Math commands (cont.)

Command Description
MATH:MATH<x>:FUNCtion Sets or queries the basic math arithmetic function.
MATH:MATH<x>:I2C:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for I2C bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:INTERpolation Sets or queries whether sinc interpolation is enabled for math on bus source.
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:COLor Sets or queries color of the specified math's label.
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD Sets or queries bold state of the specified math label.
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic Sets or queries italic state of the specified math label.
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE Sets or queries font size of the specified math label.
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE Sets or queries font type of the specified math label.
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline Sets or queries the underline state of the specified math label.
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS Sets or queries the X screen offset where the math waveform label is displayed.
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS Sets or queries the Y screen offset where the math waveform label is displayed.
MATH:MATH<x>:DEFine Defines new waveforms using mathematical expressions.
MATH:MATH<x>:GATing Specifies or returns the gating setting.
MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:NAMe Sets or queries the label string.
MATH:MATH<x>:LIN:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for LIN bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:PARallel:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for PARallel bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:RS232C:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for RS232C bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:SENT:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for SENT bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:SIGNeddata Sets or queries value to denote that bus field is decoded as signed/unsigned data
for math on bus source.
MATH:MATH<x>:SOUrce<x> Sets or queries the specified math source.
MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow Sets or queries the window function used to multiply the spectral analyzer input
data for the specified math waveform.
MATH:MATH<x>:SPI:SUPPortedfields Sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for SPI bus.
MATH:MATH<x>:TYPe Sets or queries the math type.
MATH:MATH<x>:VUNIT Sets or queries the math custom vertical units.

2-36 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Measurement command group

Use the commands in the Measurement Command Group to control the automated
measurement system.
Measurement commands can set and query measurement parameters. You can
assign parameters, such as waveform sources and reference levels, differently
for each measurement.
Edge, gating, and range measurement commands can be either global or
per-measurement.
Global edge commands are of the form :MEASUrement:XXXX
Global gating commands are of the form :MEASUrement:GATing:XXXX

Reference levels for measurements can be global, per-measurement

or per-source. The default is global. Per-measurement settings are
used when local reference levels are enabled for the measurement with
the command :MEASUrement:MEAS?:GLOBalref 0. Per-source
settings are used when per-source settings are enabled with the
command :MEASUrement:REFLevels:TYPE PerSource and
per-source settings are selected for the measurement with the command
:MEASUrement:MEAS?:GLOBalref 0.

Global reference level commands are of the form

:MEASUrement:REFLevels:XXXX

Per-source reference level commands are of the form

:MEASUrement:CH1:REFLevels:XXXX
:MEASUrement:MATH1:REFLevels:XXXX

When there is a change in source type then the measurements should be re-added
to get valid results.
/* Add a reference slot on which to measure */
:REF:ADDNEW "REF1"
/* Set up the measurement parameters on the reference */
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:TYPE AMPLITUDE
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:SOURCE REF1
/* Load the new waveform file */
:RECALL:WAVEFORM "E:\waveform.wfm”,REF1
*OPC?
/* Wait for read from Output Queue. */
/* Take amplitude measurement */
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?
/* change analog to digital waveform file */
:RECALL:WAVEFORM "E:\digital8.wfm”,REF1
*OPC?
/* Set up the measurement parameters on the reference
again*/
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:TYPE AMPLITUDE

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-37

Command groups

/* Take amplitude measurement */

:MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?

Table 2-34: Measurement commands

Command Description
MEASTABle:ADDNew Adds a new measurement results view table to the scope application.

MEASTABle:DELETE Removes the requested measurement results view table from the scope application.
MEASUrement? This command returns all measurement parameters.
MEASUrement:ADDMEAS This command adds a measurement.
MEASUrement:ADDNew Adds the specified measurement.
MEASUrement:ANNOTate This command sets or queries the annotation state for measurements.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the falling
FALLHigh edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the falling
FALLLow edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the falling
FALLMid edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level when
HYSTeresis the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the rising
RISEHigh edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the rising
RISELow edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the rising
RISEMid edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the reference level type for the source.
TYPE
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:BASETop This command sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE, used
to calculate reference levels for the measurement.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:METHod This command sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels for
the source.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and 0%
FALLHigh is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the falling edge when
the source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and 0%
FALLLow is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge when
the source ref level method is set to percent.

2-38 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Table 2-34: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and 0%
FALLMid is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge when
the source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to MAX and 0%
HYSTeresis is equal to MIN) used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level when the
source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and 0%
RISEHigh is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the rising edge when
the source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and 0%
RISELow is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge when the
source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and 0%
RISEMid is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising edge when
the source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command specifies or queries the reference level percent type for the source.
TYPE
MEASUrement:DELete The command deletes the specified measurement.
MEASUrement:DELETEALL Deletes all the active instances of measurements defined in the scope application.
MEASUrement:EDGE<x> Sets or queries the type of the edge for the measurement.
MEASUrement:GATing This command sets or queries the global gating type.
MEASUrement:GATing:ACTive This command sets or queries the global gating active level used for logic gating.
MEASUrement:GATing:ENDtime Sets or queries the end gate time for all measurements that use Global gating.
MEASUrement:GATing:HYSTeresis This command sets or queries the global gating hysteresis value used for logic gating.
MEASUrement:GATing:LOGICSource This command sets or queries the gating data source used for logic gating.
MEASUrement:GATing:MIDRef This command sets or queries the global gating mid ref value used for logic gating.
MEASUrement:GATing:SEARCHSource This command sets or queries the global gating search source used for logic gating.
MEASUrement:GATing:STARTtime Sets or queries the start gate time for all measurements that use Global gating.
MEASUrement:INTERp This command sets or queries the interpolation mode used to locate edge crossings.
MEASUrement:LIST? Lists all currently defined measurements.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the falling
FALLHigh edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the falling
FALLLow edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the falling
FALLMid edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-39

Command groups

Table 2-34: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level when
HYSTeresis the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the rising
RISEHigh edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the rising
RISELow edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the rising
RISEMid edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: This command sets or queries the reference level type for the source.
TYPE
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:BASETop This command sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE used
to calculate reference levels for the source.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:METHod This command sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels for
the source.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and 0%
FALLHigh is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the falling edge when
the source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and 0%
FALLLow is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge when
the source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and 0%
FALLMid is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge when
the source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to MAX and 0%
HYSTeresis is equal to MIN) used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level when the
source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and 0%
RISEHigh is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the rising edge when
the source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and 0%
RISELow is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge when the
source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and 0%
RISEMid is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising edge when
the source ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: This command specifies or queries the reference level percent type for the source.
TYPE
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BURSTEDGTYPe This command sets or queries the burst edge type for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the maximum cycle-cycle value for the specified
ALLAcqs:MAXimum? measurement for all acquisitions.

2-40 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Table 2-34: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the mean cycle-cycle value for the specified
ALLAcqs:MEAN? measurement for all acquisitions.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the minimum cycle-cycle value for the specified
ALLAcqs:MINimum? measurement for all acquisitions.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the peak to peak cycle-cycle statistic for the
ALLAcqs:PK2PK? specified measurement for all acquisitions.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the population of all cycle-cycle statistics for the
ALLAcqs:POPUlation? specified measurement for all acquisitions accumulated since statistics were last reset.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the standard deviation cycle-cycle for the specified
ALLAcqs:STDDev? measurement for all acquisitions.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the maximum cycle-cycle value for the specified
CURRentacq:MAXimum? measurement for the current acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the mean cycle-cycle value for the specified
CURRentacq:MEAN? measurement for the current acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the minimum cycle-cycle value for the specified
CURRentacq:MINimum? measurement for the current acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the peak to peak cycle-cycle statistic for the
CURRentacq:PK2PK? specified measurement for the current acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the population of the cycle-cycle statistics for the
CURRentacq:POPUlation? specified measurement for the current acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: This query-only command returns the standard deviation cycle-cycle for the specified
CURRentacq:STDDev? measurement for the current acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x> This command sets or queries the 'to edge' type when EDGE? is EDGE1 and the
'from edge' type when EDGE? is EDG2, for the measurement when the measurement
type is DELAY.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DISPlaystat:ENABle Turns on and off the display of statistics in measurement badges.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGE<x> This command sets or queries the type of the specified edge, rise or fall, for the
measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEIncre This command sets or queries the edge increment value for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:FROMLevel This command sets or queries the 'from level' edge for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:LEVel This sets or queries the level type for the 'time outside level' measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:N The command sets or queries the number of accumulation cycles for the measurement
when the measurement type is nperiod.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES: This command sets or queries the slew rate method for the measurement.
SLEWRATEMethod
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:TOLevel This command sets or queries the 'to level' edge for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FAILCount? Returns the number of measurement failures, if applicable, for the selected measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMedge This command sets or queries the 'from edge' type for the measurement.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-41

Command groups

Table 2-34: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: This command sets or queries the 'from edge' search direction for the measurement.
FROMEDGESEARCHDIRect
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing This command sets or queries the gating type for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ACTive This command sets or queries the gating active level when the gating type is logic.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ENDtime Sets or queries the end gate time for the measurement when using Local gating.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:GLOBal This command sets or queries the gating settings global flag.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:HYSTeresis This command sets or queries the gating hysteresis value when the gating type is
logic.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing: This command sets or queries the gating data source when the gating type is logic.
LOGICSource
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:MIDRef This command sets or queries the gating mid ref value when the gating type is logic.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing: This command sets or queries the gating search source when the gating type is
SEARCHSource search.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:STARTtime Sets or queries the start gate time for the measurement when using Local gating.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GLOBalref This command sets or queries the reference levels global flag for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHREFVoltage Sets or queries the high reference voltage value for the 'time outside level'
measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:IDLETime Sets or queries the idle time for the measurement when the measurement type
is burst width.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LABel This command sets or queries the label for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LOWREFVoltage This command sets or queries the low reference voltage value for the 'time outside
level' measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILENabled Sets or returns the pass/fail test enable status.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILHIGHlimit Sets or returns the high limit for a measurement test.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILLIMit Sets or returns the limit for a measurement test.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILLOWlimit Sets or returns the low limit for a measurement test.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILMARgin Sets or returns the allowed margin for limit comparisons for all pass/fail checks
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILWHEN Sets or returns the condition on which a measurement test fails.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PERFREQ:EDGE This command sets or queries the edge type of a Period/Frequency measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POLarity This command sets or queries the polarity for the measurement when the
measurement type is burst width.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels: This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the falling
ABSolute:FALLHigh edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the falling
ABSolute:FALLLow edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

2-42 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Table 2-34: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the falling
ABSolute:FALLMid edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level when
ABSolute:HYSTeresis the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the rising
ABSolute:RISEHigh edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the rising
ABSolute:RISELow edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the rising
ABSolute:RISEMid edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the reference level type for the measurement.
ABSolute:TYPE
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE used
BASETop to calculate reference levels for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels for
METHod the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and 0%
PERCent:FALLHigh is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the falling edge when
the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and 0%
PERCent:FALLLow is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the falling edge when
the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and 0%
PERCent:FALLMid is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge when
the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to MAX and 0%
PERCent:HYSTeresis is equal to MIN) used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level when the
measurement's ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and 0%
PERCent:RISEHigh is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the rising edge when
the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and 0%
PERCent:RISELow is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge when
the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and 0%
PERCent:RISEMid is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising edge when
the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>: This command specifies or queries the reference level percent type for the
PERCent:TYPE measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFMode This command sets or queries the reference level mode for the measurement.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-43

Command groups

Table 2-34: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFVoltage This command sets or queries the reference voltage value for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs: This command is identical to that described in the DPOJet programmer manual.
MAXimum?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs: This command is identical to that described in the DPOJet programmer manual.
MEAN?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs: This command is identical to that described in the DPOJet programmer manual.
MINimum?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs: This command is identical to that described in the DPOJet programmer manual.
PK2PK?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs: This command is identical to that described in the DPOJet programmer manual.
POPUlation?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs: This command is identical to that described in the DPOJet programmer manual.
STDDev?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts: This query-only command returns the maximum value found for the specified
CURRentacq:MAXimum? measurement since the last statistical reset.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts: This query-only command returns the mean value for the measurement for the current
CURRentacq:MEAN? acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts: This query-only command returns the minimum value found for the specified
CURRentacq:MINimum? measurement since the last statistical reset.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts: This query-only command returns the peak-to-peak value for the specified
CURRentacq:PK2PK? measurement for the current acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts: This query-only command returns the population for the specified measurement for
CURRentacq:POPUlation? the current acquisition.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts: This query-only command returns the standard deviation for the specified
CURRentacq:STDDev? measurement for all acquisitions accumulated since statistics were last reset.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SIGNALType Sets or queries the signal type of source 1 for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x> This command sets or queries the measurement source.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATUS? Returns the pass fail status, if applicable, for the selected measurement
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOEdge This command sets or queries the 'to edge' type for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: This command sets or queries the 'to edge' search direction for the measurement.
TOEDGESEARCHDIRect
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TRANSition This command sets or queries the transition edges flag for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe This command sets or queries the measurement type.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:XUNIT? Returns the horizontal scale units of the specified measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:YUNIT? Returns the vertical scale units of the specified measurement.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh Sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the falling edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow Sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the falling edge.

2-44 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Table 2-34: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid Sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the falling edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute: Sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level.
HYSTeresis
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh Sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the rising edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow Sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the rising edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid Sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the rising edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE Sets or queries the reference level type.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:BASETop Sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE, used to calculate
reference levels.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:METHod Sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:MODE This command sets or queries how often reference levels are calculated.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the high reference level of the falling
edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling
edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling
edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent: Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level.
HYSTeresis
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the high reference level of the rising
edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the low reference level of the rising
edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising
edge.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE Sets or queries the reference level percent type.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:TYPE This command sets or queries the shared reference level method used for sources
of measurement calculations.
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: Sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the falling edge.
FALLHigh
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: Sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the falling edge.
FALLLow
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: Sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the falling edge.
FALLMid
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: Sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level.
HYSTeresis

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-45

Command groups

Table 2-34: Measurement commands (cont.)

Command Description
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: Sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the rising edge.
RISEHigh
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: Sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the rising edge.
RISELow
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: Sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the rising edge.
RISEMid
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: Sets or queries the reference level type.
TYPE
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:BASETop Sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE, used to calculate
reference levels.
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:METHod Sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels.
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the high reference level of the falling
FALLHigh edge.
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the low reference level of the falling
FALLLow edge.
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling
FALLMid edge.
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level.
HYSTeresis
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the high reference level of the rising
RISEHigh edge.
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the low reference level of the rising
RISELow edge.
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: Sets or queries the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising
RISEMid edge.
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: Sets or queries the reference level percent type.
TYPE
MEASUrement:STATIstics:CYCLEMode This command sets or queries whether cycle-cycle statistics are calculated for all
measurements.

2-46 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Miscellaneous command group

Miscellaneous commands do not fit into other categories.
Several commands and queries are common to all devices. The
488.2-1987 standard defines these commands. The common commands begin
with an asterisk (*) character.

Table 2-35: Miscellaneous commands

Command Description
AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT Sets or queries the idle time from the programmable interface before auto-save
occurs.
AUTOSAVEUITIMEOUT Sets or queries the idle time from the user interface before auto-save occurs.
AUTOSet Sets or queries the vertical, horizontal, and trigger controls of the instrument to
automatically acquire and display the selected waveform.
AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble Sets or queries the Autoset acquisition setting adjustment.
AUTOSet:ENAble Sets or queries the Autoset enable/disable mode.
AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble Sets or queries Autoset's adjustment of horizontal settings.
AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble Sets or queries Autoset's adjustment of trigger settings.
AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble sets or queries Autoset's adjustment of vertical settings.
AUTOSet:VERTical:OPTIMize Sets or queries which vertical settings Autoset will optimize when the display mode
is set to Overlay mode.
AUXout:EDGE Sets or queries the direction in which the trigger output signal will transition when a
trigger occurs.
AUXout:SOUrce Sets or queries the trigger source at the BNC connection.
CLEAR Clears acquisitions, measurements, and waveforms.
CONNected:REQUested:STATus Sets the status of the Connected Scope Preference feature.
CONNected:STATus? Returns the status of the Connected Scope Preference feature.
CONNected:USAGe:TRack:REQUested: Sets the tracking usage status of the Connected Scope Preference feature.
STATus
CONNected:USAGe:TRack:STATus? Returns the tracking usage status of the Connected Scope Preference feature.
DATE? Queries the date that the instrument displays.
*DDT Sets or queries the commands that will be executed by the group execute trigger.
FPAnel:PRESS Emulates a button press.
FPAnel:TURN Emulates a knob turn.
HEADer Sets or queries the Response Header Enable State.
ID? Returns identifying information about the instrument and its firmware.
*IDN? Returns the instrument identification code.
LICense? Queries all license parameters.
LICENSE:APPID? Returns a comma-separated list of the active application IDs.
LICense:COUNt? Returns a count of the number of active licenses installed.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-47

Command groups

Table 2-35: Miscellaneous commands (cont.)

Command Description
LICense:ERRor? This query-only command prompts the instrument to return all events and their
messages (delimited by commas), and removes the returned events from the Event
Queue (alias for ALLEV?).
LICense:GMT? Returns the GMT time in ISO 8601 format, the local date, 24 hour time and
time-zone offset.
LICense:HID? Returns the instrument HostID unique identifier.
LICense:INSTall Accepts a <block data> license and installs it on the instrument.
LICense:ITEM? Returns the details pertaining to a specific license.
LICense:LIST? Returns the active license nomenclatures as a comma-separated list of strings.
LICense:VALidate? Accepts a license nomenclature as an argument and returns the status of the
license.
LIC:UNINSTALL? Returns the exit license information for the user to return to their TekAMS account.
LOCk Sets or queries the front panel and touchscreen lock state.
*LRN? Returns a listing of instrument settings.
MAINWindow:BADGe:BRINgtoview Makes a specified badge visible.
MAINWindow:FONTSize Sets the font size for UI text elements.
MAINWindow:RRBDisplaystate Sets the display state of the Results readout bar to ON (displayed) or OFF (not
displayed).
NEWpass Changes the password for user protected data.
PASSWord Provides access for changing user protected data.
PAUSe Causes the interface to pause the specified number of seconds before processing
any other commands.
REM Specifies a comment which is ignored by the instrument.
ROSc:SOUrce Selects or queries the selected source for the time base reference oscillator.
ROSc:STATE? Returns whether the time base reference oscillator is locked.
SCOPEApp REBOOT Reboots the scope.
SET? Returns a listing of instrument settings.
SOCKETServer:ENAble Enables or disables the socket server which supports a telnet or other TCPIP socket
connection to send commands and queries to the instrument.
SOCKETServer:PORT Sets the TCPIP port for the socket server connection.
SOCKETServer:PROTOCol Sets or queries the protocol for the socket server.
TEKSecure Initializes both waveform and setup memories.
TIMe Queries the time displayed by the instrument.
TIMe:ZONe Sets the time zone to the one specified.
TIMe:ZONe:UTCDELTa Sets or queries the time zone using the difference between the desired time zone
and UTC.
TOTaluptime? Returns the total number of hours the instrument has been turned on since the NV
memory was last programmed.
TOUCHSCReen:STATe Sets or queries the enabled state of the touch screen.

2-48 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Table 2-35: Miscellaneous commands (cont.)

Command Description
*TRG Performs the group execute trigger (GET).
*TST? Tests the interface and returns status.
UNDO Reverts the scope settings to a state before the previous command or user interface
action.
UNLock Unlocks front panel controls.
USBDevice:CONFigure Used to configure the rear USB port to be off or enabled as a USBTMC device.
VERBose Sets or queries the verbose state.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-49

Command groups

Pattern Generator group

Configure the Pattern Generator to provide output of a predefined pattern up to
bit rate 25 Mb/s.

Table 2-36: Pattern Generator commands

Command Description
PG:AMPlitude Sets or queries the Pattern Generator output voltage.
PG:BIT:ONE Sets or queries the output value of Pattern Generator bit 1.
PG:BIT:THREE Sets or queries the output value of Pattern Generator bit 3.
PG:BIT:TWO Sets or queries the output value of Pattern Generator bit 2.
PG:BIT:ZERO Sets or queries the output value of Pattern Generator bit 0.
PG:BITRate Sets or queries the bit rate of data in the Pattern Generator.
PG:BURSt:CCOUnt Sets or queries the cycle count for Pattern Generator burst mode.
PG:BURSt:TRIGger Manually starts the burst pattern.

PG:FILE:PATTern Sets or queries the path of your data file to generate a digital pattern in file mode.
PG:OUTPut:MODe Sets or queries the Pattern Generator output mode.
PG:PATTERNdefinition Sets or queries the Pattern Generator definition.

2-50 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Plot command group

Plot commands let you select the type and control the appearance of your plots.

Table 2-37: Plot commands

Command Description
PLOT:ADDNew Adds the specified plot.
PLOT:DELete Deletes the specified plot.
PLOT:LIST? Lists all currently defined plots.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:SOUrce<x> Sets or queries the measurement source.
PLOT:PLOT<x>:TYPe Sets or queries the current plot type for the selected plot.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-51

Command groups

Save and Recall command group

Use the commands in the Save and Recall Command Group to store and retrieve
internal waveforms and settings. When you save a setup, you save all the settings
of the instrument. When you recall a setup, the instrument restores itself to the
state that it was in when you originally saved that setting.

Table 2-38: Save and Recall commands

Command Description
FACtory Resets the instrument to factory default settings.
RECAll:SESsion Restores the state of the instrument from a saved session file.
RECAll:SETUp Recalls saved instrument settings.
RECAll:WAVEform Recalls a stored waveform to a reference memory location.
SAVe:EVENTtable:BUS Saves bus results table to the specified file.
SAVe:EVENTtable:MEASUrement Saves data (measurement) results to the specified file.
SAVe:EVENTtable:SEARCHTable Saves a search results table to the specified file.
SAVe:IMAGe Saves a capture of the screen contents to the specified image file.
SAVe:IMAGe:COMPosition Sets or queries the color mode for saved images (normal or inverted).
SAVe:IMAGe:VIEWTYpe Sets or queries the view type for saved images. Currently only FULLScreen is
supported.
SAVe:PLOTData Saves the plot data of the currently selected plot in a specified file. Supported file
format is CSV.
SAVe:REPOrt Saves a report to the specified file or, if no argument is specified, uses the folder
and file name specified by the related commands.
SAVe:REPOrt:COMMents Sets or queries the comments to be included in saved report files.
SAVe:SESsion Saves the state of the instrument, including reference waveforms, to a saved
session file.
SAVe:SETUp Saves the current instrument state to the specified file.
SAVe:SETUp:INCLUDEREFs Sets or queries whether displayed reference waveforms are to be included in saved
setups.
SAVe:WAVEform Saves the specified waveform(s) to the specified destination file(s).
SAVe:WAVEform:GATing Sets the method to save a specified part of the waveform data.
SAVe:WAVEform:GATing:RESAMPLErate Saves the waveform data at a sample interval.
SAVe:WAVEform:SOURCELIst? Returns a list of the available waveforms that can be specified as the source for
the SAVe:WAVEform command.

2-52 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Save On command Group

Use this group of commands to program the instrument to save images,
measurements, waveforms, or the instrument setup, on triggers that you select.
These commands still function, however the Act On Event commands are
preferred. Please see the Act On Event section for continued development and
enhancements. (See Table 2-18.)

Table 2-39: Save On commands

Command Description
SAVEON:FILE:DEST Sets or queries the location where files are saved.
SAVEON:FILE:NAME Sets or queries the file name to use when SAVEON:TRIGer is ON.
SAVEON:IMAGe:FILEFormat Sets or queries the file format to be used for saved image files.
SAVEON:IMAGe Sets or queries whether to save a screen capture when a trigger occurs.
SAVEON:TRIGger Sets or queries whether to save a file when a trigger occurs.
SAVEON:WAVEform Sets or queries whether to save a waveform when a limit test failure, mask failure,
or trigger occurs.
SAVEON:WAVEform:FILEFormat Sets or queries the file format for saving waveform.
SAVEON:WAVEform:SOURce Sets or queries the sources for saving waveforms.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-53

Command groups

Search and Mark command group

Use search and mark commands to seek out and identify information in waveform
records that warrant further investigation.

Table 2-40: Search and Mark commands

Command Description
SEARCH:ADDNew Adds the specified search.
SEARCH:DELete Deletes the specified search.
SEARCH:DELETEALL Deletes all the active instances of measurements defined in the scope application.
SEARCH:LIST? Lists all currently defined searches.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:COPy Copies the search criteria to or from the trigger.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:NAVigate Sets the navigation action for search marks.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TOTAL? Queries the total number of found search marks for this search.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the CAN bus trigger condition.
CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets the CAN search type.
DATa:DIRection
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the data offset value, in bytes, to use when searching on the CAN
DATa:OFFSet data field.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the CAN bus trigger data qualifier.
DATa:QUALifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the CAN bus trigger data size.
DATa:SIZe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the binary data value to be used when searching on a CAN bus signal.
DATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the type of error condition for a CAN bus to search on.
ERRType
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the value of the bit rate switch bit (BRS bit) for a CAN bus to search on.
FD:BRSBit
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the value of the error state indicator bit (ESI bit) for a CAN bus
FD:ESIBit to search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries CAN bus trigger frame type.
FRAMEtype
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries the CAN bus trigger identifier mode.
IDentifier:MODe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: Sets or queries CAN bus trigger identifier value.
IDentifier:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C: Sets or queries the address mode for the specified I2C bus trigger search to determine
ADDRess:MODe where to place a mark.

2-54 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Table 2-40: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C: Sets or queries the address string when the search condition for the specified search
ADDRess:VALue is Address or AddressData, to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C: Sets or queries the trigger condition for the specified I2C bus trigger search to
CONDition determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C: Sets or queries the direction of the data for the I2C bus trigger search to determine
DATa:DIRection where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C: Sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes used for the specified I2C bus
DATa:SIZe trigger search to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C: Sets or queries the data value of the data token for the specified I2C bus trigger
DATa:VALue search to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN: Specifies the high data value to be used in a LIN search.
DATa:HIVALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN: Sets or queries the LIN bus search trigger data qualifier.
DATa:QUALifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN: Sets or queries the LIN bus search trigger data size.
DATa:SIZe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN: Sets or queries the LIN bus search trigger data value.
DATa:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN: Sets or queries the LIN bus search trigger error type.
ERRTYPE
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN: Sets or queries the LIN bus search trigger identifier value.
IDentifier:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the data value for a parallel bus trigger search to determine where to
PARallel:DATa:VALue place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the data string value for the specified RS232c bus trigger search to
RS232C:DATa:VALue determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the condition for an RS232C bus search to determine where to
RS232C:CONDition place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an RS232 bus
RS232C:DATa:SIZe search to determine where to place a mark when the search condition is Data.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the search condition for a SENT bus.
CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the error type to be used when searching on SENT data.
ERRType
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the CRC error type to be used when searching on SENT data.
ERRType:CRC
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the high binary fast channel 1 value to use when searching on a
FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue SENT bus signal.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-55

Command groups

Table 2-40: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on SENT fast packet bus
FAST:CHAN1A:QUALifier data for device channel 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the binary fast channel 1 value to be used when searching on a
FAST:CHAN1A:VALue SENT bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the high binary fast channel 2 value to use when searching on a
FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue SENT bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on SENT fast packet bus
FAST:CHAN2B:QUALifier data for device channel 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the binary fast channel 2 value to be used when searching on a
FAST:CHAN2B:VALue SENT bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the high binary fast message counter value to use when searching
FAST:COUNTer:HIVALue on a SENT bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on SENT fast packet bus data
FAST:COUNTer:QUALifier for the secure format counter.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the binary fast message counter value to be used when searching
FAST:COUNTer:VALue on a SENT bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the binary fast message inverted nibble value to be used when
FAST:INVERTNIBble:VALue searching on a SENT bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the binary status value to be used when searching on a SENT bus
FAST:STATus:VALue signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on SENT pause pulses.
PAUSE:QUALifier
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the maximum number of pause clock ticks to be used when searching
PAUSE:TICKs:HIVALue on a SENT bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the minimum number of pause clock ticks to be used when searching
PAUSE:TICKs:VALue on a SENT bus signal.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the high binary Slow channel data value to use when searching on
SLOW:DATA:HIVALue SENT Slow packet bus data.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on SENT Slow packet bus
SLOW:DATA:QUALifier data.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the binary slow channel data value to be used when searching on
SLOW:DATA:VALue SENT Slow packet bus data.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: Sets or queries the binary Slow identifier value to be used when searching on SENT
SLOW:IDentifier:VALue Slow packet bus data.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: Sets or queries the bus source for the specified bus trigger search to determine
SOUrce where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI: Sets or queries the trigger condition for the specified SPI bus trigger search to
CONDition determine where to place a mark.

2-56 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Table 2-40: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI: Sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes used for the specified SPI bus
DATa:SIZe trigger search to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI: Sets or queries the data value of the data token for the specified SPI bus trigger
DATa:VALue search to determine where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI: Sets or queries trigger Source for SPI bus.
SOURCETYpe
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE: Sets or queries the slope for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a
SLOpe mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE: Sets or queries the source waveform for an edge trigger search to determine where to
SOUrce place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets or queries the logic operator for a pattern or state trigger search to determine
FUNCtion where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets whether or not Logic search uses a clock source.
USEClockedge
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: Sets or queries the condition setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to
WHEn place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth Sets or queries the width setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to
place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the clock slope setting for a setup/hold trigger search to determine
CLOCk:EDGE where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the clock source setting for a setup/hold trigger search to determine
CLOCk:SOUrce where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the hold time setting for a setup/hold trigger search to determine
HOLDTime where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the setup time setting for a setup/hold trigger search to determine
SETTime where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut: Sets or queries the time setting for a timeout trigger search to determine where to
TIMe place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe Sets or queries the trigger type setting for a search to determine where to place a
mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN: Sets or queries the LIN bus search trigger condition.
CONDition
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE: Sets or queries the source threshold level for an edge trigger search to determine
THReshold where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets or queries the logic clock threshold for a logic trigger search to determine where
CLOCk:THReshold to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Specifies the Logic search delta time value.
DELTatime

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-57

Command groups

Table 2-40: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets or queries the channel to use as the clock source for logic trigger.
INPUT:CLOCK:SOUrce
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets or queries the voltage level to use for logic trigger search.
LEVel:CH<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets the voltage level to use for logic trigger search.
LEVel:MATH<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets the voltage level to use for logic trigger search.
LEVel:REF<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern.
LOGICPattern:CH<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern.
LOGICPattern:DCH<x>_D<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern.
LOGICPattern:MATH<x>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern.
LOGICPattern:REF<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets or queries the polarity for the clock channel when Use Clock Edge is set to
POLarity Yes for Logic search type.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc: Sets or queries the condition for generating an A or B logic search with respect to
WHEn the defined input pattern.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Specifies the upper limit to use, in seconds, when searching for a pulse whose
PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit duration is inside or outside a range of two values.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a pulse width search.
PULSEWidth:LOGICQUALification
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Specifies the lower limit to use, in seconds, when searching for a pulse whose
PULSEWidth:LOWLimit duration is inside or outside a range of two values.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Specifies the polarity for a pulse width search.
PULSEWidth:POLarity
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets and queries the source for the pulsewidth search input.
PULSEWidth:SOUrce
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the source threshold level for a pulse width trigger search to determine
PULSEWidth:THReshold where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Specifies to search for a pulse with a specified width.
PULSEWidth:WHEn

2-58 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Table 2-40: Search and Mark commands (cont.)

Command Description
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: Specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a runt search.
LOGICQUALification
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: Specifies the polarity for the runt search.
POLarity
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: Sets and queries the source for the Runt search input.
SOUrce
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: Sets or queries the source threshold HIGH level for a runt trigger search to determine
THReshold:HIGH where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: Sets or queries the source threshold LOW level for a runt trigger search to determine
THReshold:LOW where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the clock threshold setting for a setup/hold trigger search to determine
CLOCk:THReshold where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the voltage level to use for setup & hold trigger search.
LEVel:CH<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the voltage level to use for setup & hold trigger search.
LEVel:MATH<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the voltage level to use for setup & hold trigger search.
LEVel:REF<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern.
LOGICPattern:CH<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern.
LOGICPattern:MATH<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets and returns the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern.
LOGICPattern:REF<x>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STATE Sets or queries the enabled state of the search.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STOPAcq Sets or queries whether acquisitions are stopped when a search hit is found.
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut: Sets whether or not to use logic qualification for a timeout search.
LOGICQUALification
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut: Sets or queries the polarity to be used for a Timeout search.
POLarity
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut: Sets and queries the source for timeout search input.
SOUrce
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut: Sets or queries the source threshold level for a timeout trigger search to determine
THReshold where to place a mark.
SEARCH:SELected Sets or queries the selected search.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-59

Command groups

Self Test command group

The Self Test commands control the selection and execution of diagnostic tests.

Table 2-41: Self Test commands

Command Description
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion Sets or queries the type of looping desired.
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes Sets or queries how many loops to run.
DIAg:LOOP:STOP Stops diagnostics looping.
DIAg:MODe Sets or queries the diagnostics mode.
DIAg:RESUlt? Returns the diagnostics results.
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg? Returns the status of the diagnostics (single area).
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? Returns the status of the diagnostic area.
DIAg:SELect Selects or queries an available diagnostic area.
DIAg:STATE Sets the instrument operating state.

2-60 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Status and Error command group

Use the commands in the Status and Error command Group to determine the
status of the instrument and control events.
Several commands and queries used with the instrument are common to all
devices. The IEEE Std 488.2-1987 defines these commands and queries. The
common commands begin with an asterisk (*) character.

Table 2-42: Status and Error commands

Command Description
ALLEv? Returns all events and their messages.
BUSY? Returns instrument status.
*CLS Clears status.
DESE Sets or queries the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register.
*ESE Sets or queries the bits in the Event Status Enable Register.
*ESR? Returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register.
EVENT? Returns event code from the event queue.
EVMsg? Returns event code, message from the event queue.
EVQty? Returns number of events that are enabled in the queue.
*OPC Generates the operation complete message in the standard event status register
when all pending operations are finished
Or returns “1” when all current operations are finished.
*OPT? Returns a comma separated list of installed options as an arbitrary ASCII string
(no quotes).
*PSC Sets or queries the power on status flag.
*PUD Sets or queries a string of protected user data.
*RST Resets the instrument to factory default settings.
*SRE Sets or queries the bits in the Service Request Enable Register.
*STB? Returns the contents of the Status Byte Register.
*WAI Prevents the instrument from executing further commands until all pending
operations finish.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-61

Command groups

Trigger command group

Use the commands in the Trigger Command Group to control all aspects of
triggering for the instrument.
There is one trigger: A. You can set the A triggers to edge mode. Edge triggering
lets you display a waveform at or near the point where the signal passes through a
voltage level of your choosing.
You can also set A triggers to Pulse Width, Timeout, Runt, Logic, Setup & Hold,
Rise/Fall Time, and Bus types.

Table 2-43: Trigger commands

Command Description
TRIGger Forces a trigger event to occur or returns current trigger parameters for the
instrument.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition Sets the condition (start of frame, frame type, identifier, matching data, EOF, missing
ACK field, bit-stuffing error) to be used when triggering on a CAN bus signal.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection Sets the data direction (read, write or “nocare”) to be used to search on a CAN
bus signal.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:OFFSet Sets or queries the data offset value, in bytes, to use when triggering on the CAN
data field.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier Sets the qualifier (<, >, =, not =, <=, >=) to be used when triggering on a CAN bus
signal.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe Sets the length of the data string, in bytes, to be used when triggering on a CAN
bus signal.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue Sets the binary data value to be used when triggering on a CAN bus signal.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:ERRType Sets or queries the type of error condition for a CAN bus to triggering on.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BRSBit Sets or queries the value of the bit rate switch bit (BRS bit) for a CAN bus to
triggering on.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:ESIBit Sets or queries the value of the error state indicator bit (ESI bit) for a CAN bus to
triggering on.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype Sets the frame type (data, remote, error or overload) to be used when triggering on
a CAN bus signal.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:IDentifier:MODe Sets the addressing mode (standard or extended format) to be used when triggering
on a CAN bus signal.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:IDentifier:VALue Sets the binary address value to be used when triggering on a CAN bus signal.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe Specifies the I2C address mode to 7 or 10-bit.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue Specifies the binary address string used for the I2C trigger if the trigger condition is
ADDRESS or ADDRANDDATA.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition Specifies the trigger condition for an I2C trigger.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection Specifies the I2C trigger type to be valid on a Read, Write, or No Care condition.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe Specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an I2C trigger if the
trigger condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA.

2-62 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Table 2-43: Trigger commands (cont.)

Command Description
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue Specifies the binary data string used for I2C triggering if the trigger condition is
DATA or ADDRANDDATA.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition Specifies the trigger condition for LIN.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue Specifies the high data value string used for a LIN bus trigger when the trigger
condition is DATA or IDANDDATA and the data qualifier is INRANGE or OUTRANGE.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier Specifies the LIN data qualifier. This only applies if the trigger condition is
IDANDDATA or DATA.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe Specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for LIN trigger.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue Specifies the binary data string to be used for LIN trigger condition if trigger condition
is ID or IDANDDATA.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE Specifies the error type be used for LIN trigger.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue Specifies the binary address string used for LIN trigger if the trigger condition is
ID or IDANDDATA.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:DATa:VALue Specifies the binary data string used for a Parallel Bus trigger.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:CONDition Specifies the condition for an RS-232C trigger.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATa:SIZe Sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an RS232 trigger.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATa:VALue Sets or queries the data value of the data token for an RS232 trigger.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition Sets or queries the trigger condition for a SENT bus.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType Sets or queries the error type to be used when triggering on SENT data.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType:CRC Sets or queries the CRC error type to be used when triggering on SENT data.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A: Sets or queries the high binary Fast channel 1 value to use when triggering on a
HIVALue SENT bus signal.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on SENT fast packet bus
QUALifier data for device channel 1.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A: Sets or queries the binary fast channel 1 value to be used when triggering on a
VALue SENT bus signal.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B: Sets or queries the high binary fast channel 2 value to use when triggering on a
HIVALue SENT Fast bus signal.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on SENT Fast packet bus
QUALifier data for device channel 2.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B: Sets or queries the binary Fast channel 2 value to be used when triggering on a
VALue SENT bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to FAST.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST: Sets or queries the high binary Fast message counter value to be used when
COUNTer:HIVALue triggering on a SENT bus signal.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on SENT Fast packet bus
COUNTer:QUALifier data for the secure format counter.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST: Sets or queries the binary fast message counter value to be used when triggering
COUNTer:VALue on a SENT bus signal.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST: Sets or queries the binary fast message inverted nibble value to be used when
INVERTNIBble:VALue triggering on a SENT bus signal.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-63

Command groups

Table 2-43: Trigger commands (cont.)

Command Description
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:STATus: Sets or queries the binary status value to be used when triggering on a SENT bus
VALue signal.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSE: Sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on SENT pause pulses.
QUALifier
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA: Sets or queries the high binary Slow channel data value to use when triggering on
HIVALue SENT Slow packet bus data.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA: This command sets or queries the binary identifier value to use when triggering on
QUALifier Slow packet bus data.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA: This command sets or queries the binary slow channel value to use when triggering
VALue on Slow packet bus data.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW: This command sets or queries the qualifier to use when triggering on SENT Slow
IDentifier:VALue packet bus data.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition Specifies the trigger condition for a SPI trigger.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe Specifies the length of the data string to be used for a SPI trigger if the trigger
condition is DATa.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:VALue Specifies the binary data string used for SPI triggering if the trigger condition is DATA.
TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce Sets or queries the source for a bus trigger.
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling Sets or queries the type of coupling for the edge trigger.
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe Sets or queries the slope for the edge trigger.
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce Sets or queries the source for the edge trigger.
TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x> Sets or queries the level for the trigger for the channel.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:DELTatime Sets or queries the Logic trigger delta time value.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion Sets or queries the logical combination of the input channels for the logic trigger.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce Sets or queries the channel to use as the clock source.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:POLarity Sets or queries the polarity for the clock channel when Use Clock Edge is set to
Yes for Logic trigger type.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:USECLockedge Sets whether or not Logic trigger type uses clock source.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:WHEn Sets or queries the condition for generating a logic trigger with respect to the defined
input pattern.
TRIGger:A:LOGICPattern:CH<x> Sets or queries the Logic Pattern to trigger on.
TRIGger:A:LOGICPattern:DCH<x>_D<x> Sets or queries the Logic Pattern to trigger on.
TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> Sets or queries CH<x> lower trigger level.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit Sets or queries the upper limit to use, in seconds, when triggering on detection of a
pulse whose duration is inside or outside a range of two values.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit Sets or queries the lower limit to use, in seconds, when triggering on detection of a
pulse whose duration is inside or outside a range of two values.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity Sets or queries the polarity for a pulse width trigger.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce Sets or queries the source waveform for a pulse width trigger.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn Sets or queries to trigger when a pulse is detected with a width (duration) that is less
than, greater than, equal to, or unequal to a specified value.

2-64 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Table 2-43: Trigger commands (cont.)

Command Description
TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity Sets or queries the polarity for the runt trigger.
TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce Sets or queries the source waveform for the runt trigger.
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn Sets or queries the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when it detects a runt.
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth Sets or queries the width, in seconds, for a runt trigger.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE Sets or queries the clock edge polarity for setup and hold triggering.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce Sets or queries the clock source for the setup and hold triggering.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime Sets or queries the hold time for setup and hold violation triggering.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime Sets or queries the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLDLOGICVAL: Sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern.
DCH<x>_D<x>
TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity When triggering using the TIMEOut trigger type, this commands specifies the
polarity to be used.
TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce When triggering using the TIMEOut trigger type, this command specifies the source.
TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe When triggering using the TIMEOut trigger type, this command specifies the
timeout time, in seconds.
TRIGger:A:TYPe Sets or queries the type of A trigger.
TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> Sets or queries the CH<x> upper trigger level.
TRIGger:A Sets the A trigger level automatically to 50% of the range of the minimum and
maximum values of the trigger input signal.
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe Sets or queries the A trigger holdoff time.
TRIGger:A:MODe Sets or queries the A trigger mode.
TRIGger:AUXLevel Sets or queries the Auxiliary Input voltage level to use for an edge trigger.
TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:STATe Enables or disables user-defined trigger hysteresis.
TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:VALue Sets or returns the height of the user-defined trigger hysteresis zone in volts.
TRIGger:STATE? Queries the current state of the triggering system.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-65

Command groups

Vertical command group

Use the commands in the Vertical Command Group to control the vertical setup of
all live (channel) waveforms for acquisition and to control the display of channel,
reference, and math waveforms.
You can replace VOLts with SCAle in the vertical commands. This provides
program compatibility with earlier models of Tektronix instruments.

Table 2-44: Vertical commands

Command Description
CH<x>? Returns vertical parameters for the specified channel.
CH<x>:BANdwidth Sets or queries the bandwidth of the specified channel.
CH<x>:CLIPping? Queries whether the specified channel’s input signal is clipping (exceeding) the
channel vertical scale setting.
CH<x>:COUPling Sets or queries the coupling setting for the specified channel.
CH<x>:DESKew Sets or queries the deskew time for the specified channel.
CH<x>:DITHERrange Sets or queries the amount of dithering for the specified analog channel.
CH<x>:INVert Sets or queries invert state of the specified channel.
CH<x>:LABel:COLor Sets or queries the color of the specified channel label.
CH<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD Sets or queries the bold state of the specified channel label.
CH<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic Sets or queries the italic state of the specified channel label.
CH<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE Sets or queries the font size of the specified channel label.
CH<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE Sets or queries the font type of the specified channel label.
CH<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline Sets or queries the underline state of the specified channel label.
CH<x>:LABel:NAMe Defines or queries the label for the channel waveform.
CH<x>:LABel:XPOS Sets or queries the X display coordinate for the channel waveform label.
CH<x>:LABel:YPOS Sets or queries the Y display coordinate for the channel waveform label.
CH<x>:OFFSet Sets or queries the channel offset.
CH<x>:POSition Sets or queries the vertical position for the specified analog channel.
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten Sets the attenuation value for the specified channel to the specified scale factor.
Or queries the user-specified attenuation.
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten Sets the attenuation value for the specified channel to the specified value in
decibels.
Or queries the user-specified attenuation in decibels.
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits Sets or queries the alternate unit for the external attenuator of the specified
channel.
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits:STATE Sets or queries the custom units enable state for the specified channel.
CH<x>:SCAle Sets or returns the vertical scale for the specified analog channel.
CH<x>:SCALERATio Sets or returns the scale ratio for the specified analog channel.
CH<x>:TERmination Sets channel input termination.

2-66 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Table 2-44: Vertical commands (cont.)

Command Description
CH<x>:VTERm:BIAS Sets or queries the termination voltage for the specified channel (if control
is available).
CONFIGuration:ANALOg:BANDWidth? Queries the maximum licensed bandwidth of the instrument.
REF:ADDNew Adds the specified reference. Argument is of the form "REF<NR1> ", where
NR1 ≥ 1.
REF:DELete Deletes the specified reference.
REF:REF<x>:DESKew Sets or queries the deskew time for the specified reference.
REF:REF<x>:LABel:COLor Sets or queries the color of the specified ref label.
REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD Sets or queries the bold state of the specified reference label.
REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic Sets or queries the italic state of the specified reference label.
REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE Sets or queries the font size of the specified reference label.
REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE Sets or queries the font type of the specified reference label.
REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline Sets or queries the underline state of the specified reference label.
REF:REF<x>:LABel:NAMe Sets or queries the label of the designated waveform.
REF:REF<x>:LABel:XPOS Sets or queries the position of the reference waveform label on the X axis.
REF:REF<x>:LABel:YPOS Sets or queries the position of the reference waveform label on the Y axis.
REF:LIST? Lists all currently defined references.
REF:REF<x>:SOUrce Sets or queries the filename used by the given reference.
VERTical:DESKew:FROM: Sets or queries a target (FROM) delay that you can specify when the
CUSTOMPROPAgation propagation delay of the target (FROM) probe used for deskew cannot be
detected automatically.
VERTical:DESKEW:STATIC Sets or queries the target channel for performing channel-to-channel deskew
adjustment.
VERTical:DESKew:TO:CUSTOMPROPAgation Sets or queries a target (TO) delay that can be specified by the user when
the propagation delay of the target (TO) probe used for deskew cannot be
detected automatically.
VERTical:DESKEW:FROM:SOUrce Sets or queries the source channel for performing channel-to-channel deskew
adjustment.
VERTical:DESKEW:TO:SOUrce Sets or queries the target channel for performing channel-to-channel deskew
adjustment.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-67

Command groups

Waveform Transfer command group

Use the commands in the Waveform Transfer Command Group to transfer
waveform data points from the instrument. Waveform data points are a collection
of values that define a waveform. One data value usually represents one data point
in the waveform record. When working with envelope waveforms, each data
value is either the minimum or maximum of a min/max pair.
Before you transfer waveform data, you must specify the data format, record
length, and waveform source.

Data formats. Acquired waveform data uses eight or more bits to represent each
data point. The number of bits used depends on the acquisition mode specified
when you acquired the data. Data acquired in SAMple or ENVelope mode uses
eight bits per waveform data point. Data acquired in AVERage mode uses up to
14 bits per point.
The instrument can transfer waveform data in either ASCII or binary format.
You specify the format with the DATa:ENCdg command. The instrument uses
signed, 4 byte integers and floating point values; it does not support unsigned
floating point values.
ASCII data is represented by signed integer or floating point values. An example
ASCII waveform data string can look like this:
CURVE<space>-110,-109,-110,-110,-109,-107,
-109,-107,-106,-105,-103,-100,-97,-90,-84,-80
Use ASCII to obtain more readable and easier to format output than binary.
However, ASCII can require more bytes to send the same values than it does with
binary. This can reduce transmission speeds.
Binary data can be represented by signed integer or floating point values. The
range of the values depends on the byte width specified. When the byte width is
one, signed integer data ranges from -128 to 127, and positive integer values
range from 0 to 255. When the byte width is two, the values range from -32768 to
32767. When a MATH (or REF that came from a MATH) is used, 32-bit floating
point values are used that are four bytes in width.

2-68 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

The defined binary formats specify the order in which the bytes are transferred.
The following are the four binary formats:
RIBinary specifies signed integer data-point representation with the most
significant byte transferred first.
SRIBinary is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is swapped,
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful
when transferring data to PCs.
RFBinary specifies floating point data-point representation with the most
significant byte transferred first.
SRFBinary is the same as RFBinary except that the byte order is swapped,
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful
when transferring data to PCs.

Waveform data and record lengths. You can transfer multiple points for each
waveform record. You can transfer a portion of the waveform or you can transfer
the entire record. You can use the DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands to
specify the first and last data points of the waveform record.
When transferring data from the instrument, you must specify the first and last
data points in the waveform record. Setting DATa:STARt to 1 and DATa:STOP to
the record length will always return the entire waveform.

Waveform data locations and memory allocation. The DATa:SOUrce command

specifies the waveform source when transferring a waveform from the instrument.

Waveform preamble. Each waveform that you transfer has an associated

waveform preamble that contains information such as the horizontal scale, the
vertical scale, and other settings in effect when the waveform was created. Refer
to the individual WFMOutpre? commands for more information.

Scaling waveform data. Once you transfer the waveform data to the controller,
you can convert the data points into voltage values for analysis using information
from the waveform preamble.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-69

Command groups

Transferring waveform data from the instrument.

You can transfer waveforms from the instrument to an external controller using
the following sequence:
1. Select the waveform source(s) using DATa:SOUrce.
2. Specify the waveform data format using DATa:ENCdg.
3. Specify the number of bytes per data point using WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr.

NOTE. MATH waveforms (and REF waveforms that came from a MATH) are
always set to four bytes.

4. Specify the portion of the waveform that you want to transfer using
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP.

5. Transfer waveform preamble information using WFMOutpre.

6. Transfer waveform data from the instrument using CURVe?.

Table 2-45: Waveform Transfer commands

Command Description
CURVe? The query format transfers waveform data from instrument specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command.
CURVEStream? Continuously transfers waveform data from the instrument as it is acquired.
DATa Sets the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred with the
CURVe Command.
Or queries the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred with
the CURVe? command.
DATa:ENCdg Sets or queries the format of outgoing waveform data.
DATA:MODe Sets or returns the mode for waveform data.
DATa:RESample Sets or queries the resampling of outgoing waveform data.
DATa:SOUrce Sets or queries the location of waveform data transferred from the instrument.
DATa:SOUrce:AVAILable? Returns a list of enumerations representing the source waveforms that are currently
available for :CURVe? queries.
DATa:STARt Sets or queries the starting point in waveform transfer.
DATa:STOP Sets or queries the ending data point in waveform transfer.
DATa:WIDth Specifies the width, in bytes per point, for waveform data transferred from the
instrument via the CURVe? query.
WAVFrm? Returns WFMOutpre? and CURVe? data for the waveform as specified by the
DATA:SOUrce command.
WFMOutpre? Returns the waveform formatting data for the waveform specified by the
DATA:SOURCE command.
WFMOutpre:ASC_Fmt? Returns the format for ASCII data transferred from the instrument.

2-70 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Command groups

Table 2-45: Waveform Transfer commands (cont.)

Command Description
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr Sets or queries the number of bits per waveform point that outgoing waveforms
contain.
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt Sets or queries the format of binary data for the waveform.
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr Sets or queries the data width for the waveform.
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or Sets or queries the byte order of waveform points.
WFMOutpre:CENTERFREQuency? Returns the center frequency of the outgoing waveform.
WFMOutpre:DOMain? Returns the domain of the outgoing waveform.
WFMOutpre:ENCdg Sets or queries the type of encoding for outgoing waveforms.
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? Returns the number of points for the waveform transmitted in response to a
CURVe? query.
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? Returns the point format for the waveform.
WFMOutpre:PT_Off? Returns the trigger point relative to DATA:START for the waveform.
WFMOutpre:PT_ORder? Returns whether the source waveform is Fast Acquisition.
WFMOutpre:RESample Sets or queries the resampling of outgoing waveform data.
WFMOutpre:SPAN? Returns the frequency span of the outgoing waveform.
WFMOutpre:WFId? Returns a string describing the acquisition parameters for the waveform.
WFMOutpre:WFMTYPe? Returns the type of the outgoing waveform.
WFMOutpre:XINcr? Returns the horizontal sampling interval.
WFMOutpre:XUNit? Returns the horizontal units for the waveform.
WFMOutpre:XZEro? Returns the (sub-sample) time between the trigger sample and the occurrence
of the actual waveform trigger.
WFMOutpre:YOFf? Returns the vertical offset in digitizing levels for the waveform.
WFMOutpre:YUNit? Returns the vertical units for the waveform.
WFMOutpre:YZEro? Returns the vertical offset for the waveform.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-71

Command groups

Zoom command group

Zoom commands let you expand and position the waveform display horizontally
and vertically, without changing the time base or vertical settings.

NOTE. Zoom commands are available once a view has been added.

Table 2-46: Zoom commands

Command Description
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS: Sets or queries the start of the zoom x axis in the specified plot view.
FROM
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS: Sets or queries the end of the zoom x axis in the specified plot view.
TO
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS: Sets or queries the start of the zoom y axis in the specified plot view.
FROM
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS: Sets or queries the end of the zoom y axis in the specified plot view.
TO
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM Sets or queries the start of the zoom x-axis in the specified plot view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO Sets or queries the end of the zoom x-axis in the specified plot view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM Sets or queries the start of the zoom y-axis in the specified plot view.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO Sets or queries the end of the zoom y-axis in the specified plot view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS: Sets or returns the left edge of the zoom x-axis in the specified plot view.
FROM
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO Sets or queries the right edge of the zoom x-axis in the specified plot view.
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS: Sets or queries the bottom value of the zoom y-axis in the specified plot view.
FROM
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO Sets or queries the top value of the zoom y-axis in the specified plot view.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>: Sets or queries the horizontal zoom position (of the specified zoom in the specified
HORizontal:POSition Waveform View) of the zoomed waveform or zoom waveform in the display, around
which the zoom waveform displays.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>: Sets or queries the zoom horizontal scale factor, of the specified zoom in the
HORizontal:SCALe specified Waveform View, in which the zoom waveform is displayed.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>: Sets or queries the zoom window horizontal scale in the specified Waveform View.
HORizontal:WINSCALe
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>: Sets or queries the specified zoom in the specified Waveform View on or off.
STATe
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>: Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified zoom in the specified Waveform
VERTical:POSition View, in which the zoom waveform is displayed.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>: Sets or queries the zoom vertical scale factor of the specified waveform for the
VERTical:SCALe specified zoom in the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:Zoom? Queries the zoom parameters of the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>? Queries the zoom parameters of the specified zoom in the specified Waveform View.

2-72 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Commands listed in alphabetical order
NOTE. Some of the following commands may not be available on your instrument
model. Also, some of the following commands are only available if your
instrument has the associated option installed.

ACQuire? (Query Only)

Queries the current acquisition state.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire?

Examples ACQUIRE? might return :ACQUIRE:STATE 1;NUMENV INFINITE;STOPAFTER

RUNSTOP;SEQUENCE:MODE NUMACQS;NUMSEQUENCE 1;:ACQUIRE:NUMAVG
16;FASTACQ:STATE 0;PALETTE TEMPERATURE;:ACQUIRE:MODE
SAMPLE;SAMPLINGMODE IT.

ACQuire:MAXSamplerate? (Query Only)

This query returns the maximum real-time sample rate.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:MAXSamplerate?

Examples ACQUIRE:MAXSAMPLERATE? might return :ACQUIRE:MAXSAMPLERATE 2.5E9.

ACQuire:MODe
This command sets or queries the selected acquisition mode of the instrument.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:MODe {SAMple|PEAKdetect|HIRes|AVErage|ENVelope}

ACQuire:MODe?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-73

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands ACQuire:NUMAVg

CURVe?

Arguments SAMple specifies that the displayed data point value is the first sampled value that
is taken during the acquisition interval. The CURVe? query, depending on sample
rate, will result in either 8 bit or 16 bit data. In case of 8 bit data, the precision is
also 8 bit. However, in case of 16 bit data, 12 bit precision data is zero padded in
lower 4 bits. SAMple is the default mode.
PEAKdetect specifies the display of high-low range of the samples taken from a
single waveform acquisition. The high-low range is displayed as a vertical column
that extends from the highest to the lowest value sampled during the acquisition
interval. PEAKdetect mode can reveal the presence of aliasing or narrow spikes.
HIRes specifies Hi Res mode where the displayed data point value is the
average of all the samples taken during the acquisition interval. This is a form
of averaging, where the average comes from a single waveform acquisition. The
number of samples taken during the acquisition interval determines the number of
data values that compose the average.
AVErage specifies averaging mode, in which the resulting waveform shows an
average of SAMple data points from several separate waveform acquisitions. The
instrument processes the number of waveforms you specify into the acquired
waveform, creating a running exponential average of the input signal. The number
of waveform acquisitions that go into making up the average waveform is set or
queried using the ACQuire:NUMAVg command.
ENVelope specifies envelope mode, where the resulting waveform displays the
range of PEAKdetect from continued waveform acquisitions.

Examples ACQUIRE:MODE ENVELOPE sets the acquisition mode to display a waveform that
is an envelope of many individual waveform acquisitions.
ACQUIRE:MODE? might return :ACQuire:MODe AVERAGE, indicating that
the displayed waveform is the average of the specified number of waveform
acquisitions.

ACQuire:NUMACq? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the number of waveform acquisitions that have
occurred since the last time acquisitions were stopped.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:NUMACq?

2-74 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands ACQuire:STATE

Examples ACQUIRE:NUMACQ? might return :ACQUIRE:NUMACQ 350, indicating that 350

acquisitions have occurred since executing an ACQuire:STATE RUN command.

ACQuire:NUMAVg
This command sets or queries the number of waveform acquisitions that make
up an averaged waveform. Ranges from 2 to 10240.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:NUMAVg <NR1>

ACQuire:NUMAVg?

Related Commands ACQuire:MODe

Arguments <NR1> is the number of waveform acquisitions to average.

Examples ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 10 specifies that 10 waveform averages will be performed

before exponential averaging starts.
ACQUIRE:NUMAVG? might return :ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 75, indicating that there
are 75 acquisitions specified for averaging.

ACQuire:SEQuence:CURrent? (Query Only)

In single sequence acquisition mode, this query returns the number of acquisitions
or measurements in the sequence completed so far.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:SEQuence:CURrent?

Examples ACQUIRE:SEQUENCE:CURRENT? might return :ACQUIRE:SEQUENCE:CURRENT

5.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-75

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ACQuire:SEQuence:MODe
In single sequence acquisition, the single sequence stop after count is based on the
number of acquisitions.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:SEQuence:MODe NUMACQs

Arguments NUMACQs is the number of acquisitions.

Examples ACQUIRE:SEQUENCE:MODE? might return :ACQUIRE:SEQUENCE:MODE

NUMACQS indicating the acquisition sequence mode is set to NUMACQS.

ACQuire:SEQuence:NUMSEQuence
In single sequence acquisition mode, specify the number of acquisitions or
measurements that comprise the sequence. The default is 1.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:SEQuence:NUMSEQuence <NR1>

ACQuire:SEQuence:NUMSEQuence?

Arguments <NR1> is the number of acquisitions or measurements that comprise the sequence.

Examples ACQUIRE:SEQUENCE:NUMSEQUENCE 2 sets the number of acquisition in a

sequence is set to 2.
ACQUIRE:SEQUENCE:NUMSEQUENCE? might return
ACQUIRE:SEQUENCE:NUMSEQUENCE 1, indicating that the number of acquisition
in a sequence is set to 1.

ACQuire:STATE
This command starts or stops acquisitions. When state is set to ON or RUN, a
new acquisition will be started. If the last acquisition was a single acquisition
sequence, a new single sequence acquisition will be started. If the last acquisition
was continuous, a new continuous acquisition will be started.

2-76 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

If RUN is issued in the middle of completing a single sequence acquisition (for

example, averaging or enveloping), the acquisition sequence is restarted, and
any accumulated data is discarded. Also, the instrument resets the number of
acquisitions. If the RUN argument is issued while in continuous mode, a reset
occurs and acquired data continues to acquire.
If acquire:stopafter is SEQUENCE, this command leaves the instrument in single
sequence, unlike the run/stop button which takes the instrument out of single
sequence.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON|RUN|STOP}

ACQuire:STATE?

Related Commands ACQuire:STOPAfter

Arguments <NR1> = 0 stops acquisitions; any other value starts acquisitions.

OFF stops acquisitions.

ON starts acquisitions.

RUN starts acquisitions.

STOP stops acquisitions.

Examples ACQUIRE:STATE RUN starts the acquisition of waveform data and resets the count
of the number of acquisitions.
ACQUIRE:STATE? might return :ACQUIRE:STATE 0, indicating that the
acquisition is stopped.

ACQuire:STOPAfter
This command sets or queries whether the instrument continually acquires
acquisitions or acquires a single sequence. Pressing SINGLE on the front
panel button is equivalent to sending these commands: ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER
SEQUENCE and ACQUIRE:STATE 1.

Group Acquisition

Syntax ACQuire:STOPAfter {RUNSTop|SEQuence}

ACQuire:STOPAfter?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-77

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands ACQuire:STATE

Arguments RUNSTop specifies that the instrument will continually acquire data, if
ACQuire:STATE is turned on.

SEQuence specifies that the next acquisition will be a single-sequence acquisition.

Examples ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP sets the instrument to continually acquire data.

ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER? might return :ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE,

indicating that the next acquisition the instrument makes will be of the
single-sequence type.

ACTONEVent:ENable
This command
enables or disables actions on event (AOE). If AOE saves are limited and the limit has been reached

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:ENable <NR1>

ACTONEVent:ENable?

Arguments <NR1> is a number that enables or disables actions on event. The number zero
disables the feature and the number one enables the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:ENable 1 enables actions on event.

ACTONEVent:ENable? might return :ACTONEVent:ENable 0, indicating

the actions on event feature is disabled.

ACTONEVent:LIMit
This command
sets whether the act on event should limit the number of saves. This prevents
the saves from filling the hard drive.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:LIMit <NR1>

ACTONEVent:LIMit?

2-78 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR1> is a number that enables or disables

whether the act on event should limit the number of saves. The number zero
disables the feature and the number one enables the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:LIMit 1 enables the limiting of act on event saves.

ACTONEVent:LIMit? might return :ACTONEVent:LIMit 0, indicating the

limiting of act on event saves feature is disabled.

ACTONEVent:LIMITCount
This command sets the limit of act on even saves. The ACTONEVent:LIMit
command must be enabled.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:LIMITCount <NR1>

ACTONEVent:LIMITCount?

Arguments <NR1> sets the number of allowed saves for the act on event feature. The number
must be a positive integer.

Examples ACTONEVent:LIMITCount 2 sets the number of saves to 2.

ACTONEVent:LIMITCount? might return :ACTONEVent:LIMITCount 4,

indicating the limit of act on event saves is 4.

ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
This command saves a screen capture when a mask test fails.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE?

Related Commands SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-79

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce

Arguments ON enables the save screen capture when a mask test fails feature.

OFF disables the save screen capture when a mask test fails feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save screen capture when a mask
test fails feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers enable
the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE ON sets the state of

the save screen capture feature to on.
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE OFF, indicating the
state of the save screen capture feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
This command saves the user set source waveform(s) when a mask test fails.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE?

Related Commands SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce

Arguments ON enables the save source waveform(s) when a mask test fails feature.

OFF disables the save source waveform(s) when a mask test fails feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save source waveform(s) when a
mask test fails feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers
enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE ON sets the state of

the save source waveform feature to on.

2-80 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE? might return

:ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE OFF, indicating
the state of the save source waveform feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
This command generates an SRQ event when a mask fails.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SRQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SRQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

Arguments ON enables the generate an SRQ event when a mask fails feature.

OFF disables the generate an SRQ event when a mask fails feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the generate an SRQ event when
a mask fails feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers
enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 1 enables the generate an SRQ

event when a mask fails feature to enabled.
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SRQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 0, indicating the state of the
generate an SRQ event when a mask fails feature is disabled.

ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE
This command stops acquisitions when a mask test fails.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-81

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ON enables the stop acquisitions when a mask test fails feature.

OFF disables the stop acquisitions when a mask test fails feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the stop acquisitions when a mask test
fails feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers enable the
feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE ON sets the state of the

stop acquisitions feature to on.
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE OFF, indicating the state
of the stop acquisitions feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
This command saves a screen capture when a mask hit occurs.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE?

Related Commands SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce

Arguments ON enables the save screen capture when a mask hit occurs feature.

OFF disables the save screen capture when a mask hit occurs feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save screen capture when a mask
hit occurs feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers enable
the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE ON sets the state of the

save screen capture feature to on.
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE OFF, indicating the
state of the save screen capture feature is set to off.

2-82 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
This command saves the user set source waveform(s) when a mask hit occurs.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE?

Related Commands SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce

Arguments ON enables the save source waveform(s) when a mask hit occurs feature.

OFF disables the save source waveform(s) when a mask hit occurs feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save source waveform(s) when a
mask hit occurs feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers
enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE ON sets the state of

the save source waveform feature to on.
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE OFF, indicating the
state of the save source waveform feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
This command generates an SRQ event when a mask hit occurs.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SRQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SRQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-83

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ON enables the generate an SRQ event when a mask hit occurs feature.

OFF disables the generate an SRQ event when a mask hit occurs feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the generate an SRQ event when a
mask hit occurs feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers
enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 1 enables the generate an SRQ

event when a mask hit occurs feature.
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SRQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 0, indicating the generate an
SRQ event when a mask hit occurs feature is disabled.

ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE
This command stops acquisitions when a mask hit occurs.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

Arguments ON enables the stop acquisitions when a mask hit occurs feature.

OFF disables the stop acquisitions when a mask hit occurs feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the stop acquisitions when a mask hit
occurs feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers enable the
feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE ON sets the state of the stop

acquisitions feature to on.
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE OFF, indicating the state
of the stop acquisitions feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
This command saves a screen capture when a mask test passes.

2-84 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE?

Related Commands SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce

Arguments ON enables the save screen capture when a mask test passes feature.

OFF disables the save screen capture when a mask test passes feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save screen capture when a mask
test passes feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers
enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE ON sets the state of

the save screen capture feature to on.
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE OFF, indicating the
state of the save screen capture feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
This command saves the user set source waveform(s) when a mask test passes.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE?

Related Commands SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-85

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ON enables the save source waveform(s) when a mask test passes feature.

OFF disables the save source waveform(s) when a mask test passes feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save source waveform(s) when a
mask test passes feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers
enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE ON sets the state of

the save source waveform feature to on.
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE OFF, indicating
the state of the save source waveform feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
This command generates an SRQ event when a mask passes.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SRQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SRQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

Arguments ON enables the generate an SRQ event when a mask passes feature.

OFF disables the generate an SRQ event when a mask passes feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the generate an SRQ event when a
mask passes feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers
enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 1 enables the generate an SRQ

event when a mask passes feature.
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SRQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 0, indicating the generate an
SRQ event when a mask passes feature is disabled.

ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE
This command stops acquisitions when a mask test passes.

2-86 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

Arguments ON enables the stop acquisitions when a mask test passes feature.

OFF disables the stop acquisitions when a mask test passes feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the stop acquisitions when a mask test
passes feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers enable the
feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE ON sets the state of the

stop acquisitions feature to on.
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE OFF, indicating the state
of the stop acquisitions feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
This command saves a screen capture when the user-set measurement limit is
exceeded.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE?

Related Commands SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce

Arguments ON enables the save screen capture when the measurement limit is exceeded
feature.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-87

Commands listed in alphabetical order

OFF disables the save screen capture when the measurement limit is exceeded
feature.
<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save screen capture when the
measurement limit is exceeded feature. The number zero disables the feature,
all other numbers enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE ON sets the state of

the save screen capture feature to on.
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE OFF, indicating
the state of the save screen capture feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
This command saves the user set source waveform(s) when the user-set
measurement limit is exceeded.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
{ON|OFF|<NR1>}
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE?

Related Commands SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce

Arguments ON enables the save source waveform(s) when the measurement limit is exceeded
feature.
OFF disables the save source waveform(s) when the measurement limit is
exceeded feature.
<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save source waveform(s) when
the measurement limit is exceeded feature. The number zero disables the feature,
all other numbers enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE ON sets the

state of the save source waveform feature to on.

2-88 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE? might
return :ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE OFF,
indicating the state of the save source waveform feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
This command generates an SRQ event when any measurement triggers the
user-defined measurement limits.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

Arguments ON enables the generate an SRQ event when any measurement triggers the
user-defined measurement limits feature.
OFF disables the generate an SRQ event when any measurement triggers the
user-defined measurement limits feature.
<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the generate an SRQ event when any
measurement triggers the user-defined measurement limits feature. The number
zero disables the feature, all other numbers enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 1 enables the generate an

SRQ event when any measurement triggers the user-defined measurement limits
feature.
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 0, indicating the generate
an SRQ event when any measurement triggers the user-defined measurement
limits feature is disabled.

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE
This command stops acquisitions when the user-set measurement limit is
exceeded.

Group Act On Event

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-89

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

Arguments ON enables the stop acquisitions when the measurement limit is exceeded feature.

OFF disables the stop acquisitions when the measurement limit is exceeded feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the stop acquisitions when the
measurement limit is exceeded feature. The number zero disables the feature,
all other numbers enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE ON sets the state of the

stop acquisitions feature to on.
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE OFF, indicating the
state of the stop acquisitions feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
This command saves a screen capture when a search event is found.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE?

Related Commands SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce

Arguments ON enables the save screen capture when a search event is found feature.

OFF disables the save screen capture when a search event is found feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save screen capture when a search
event is found feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers
enable the feature.

2-90 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE ON sets the state of the

save screen capture feature to on.
ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE OFF, indicating the state
of the save screen capture feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
This command saves the user set source waveform(s) when a search event is
found.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE?

Related Commands SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce

Arguments ON enables the save source waveform(s) when a search event is found feature.

OFF disables the save source waveform(s) when a search event is found feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save source waveform(s) when
a search event is found feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other
numbers enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE ON sets the state of the

save source waveform feature to on.
ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE OFF, indicating the
state of the save source waveform feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
This command generates an SRQ event when any search event is found.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-91

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SRQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SRQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

Arguments ON enables the generate an SRQ event when any search event is found feature.

OFF disables the generate an SRQ event when any search event is found feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the generate an SRQ event when any
search event is found feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other
numbers enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 1 enables the generate an SRQ

event when any search event is found feature.
ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SRQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 0, indicating the
generate an SRQ event when any search event is found feature is disabled.

ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE
This command stops acquisitions when a search event is found.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

Arguments ON enables the stop acquisitions when a search event is found feature.

OFF disables the stop acquisitions when a search event is found feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the stop acquisitions when a search
event is found feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers
enable the feature.

2-92 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE ON sets the state of the stop

acquisitions feature to on.
ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE OFF, indicating the state of
the stop acquisitions feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
This command saves a screen capture on a trigger event from a single sequence or
sequence of N acquisition. Each acquisition in the sequence of N will perform a
save operation. This command replaces SAVe:IMAGe (still valid command, but
only an alias for this new command).

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE?

Arguments ON enables the save screen capture on a trigger event feature.

OFF disables the save screen capture on a trigger event feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save screen capture on a trigger
event feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers enable the
feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE ON sets the state of the

save screen capture feature to on.
ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE OFF, indicating the
state of the save screen capture feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
This command saves the user set source waveform(s) on a trigger event from a
single sequence or sequence of N acquisition. Each acquisition in the sequence of
N will perform a save operation. This command replaces SAVEON:WAVEform
(still valid command, but only an alias for this new command).

Group Act On Event

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-93

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE?

Arguments ON enables the save source waveform(s) on a trigger event feature.

OFF disables the save source waveform(s) on a trigger event feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the save source waveform(s) on a

trigger event feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers
enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE ON sets the state of

the save source waveform feature to on.
ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE OFF, indicating the
state of the save source waveform feature is set to off.

ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
This command generates an SRQ event when a trigger event occurs.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SRQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SRQ:STATE?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

Arguments ON enables the generate an SRQ event when a trigger event occurs feature.

OFF disables the generate an SRQ event when a trigger event occurs feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the generate an SRQ event when
a trigger event occurs feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other
numbers enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 1 enables the generate an SRQ

event when a trigger event occurs feature.
ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SRQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 0, indicating the generate an
SRQ event when a trigger event occurs feature is disabled.

2-94 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE
This command stops acquisitions on a trigger event from a single sequence or
sequence of N acquisition. Each acquisition in the sequence of N will perform
a save operation.

Group Act On Event

Syntax ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE?

Arguments ON enables the stop acquisitions on a trigger event feature.

OFF disables the stop acquisitions on a trigger event feature.

<NR1> is a number that enables or disables the stop acquisitions on a trigger event
feature. The number zero disables the feature, all other numbers enable the feature.

Examples ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE ON sets the state of the stop

acquisitions feature to on.
ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE? might return
:ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE OFF, indicating the state
of the stop acquisitions feature is set to off.

AFG:AMPLitude
Sets (or queries) the AFG amplitude in volts, peak to peak.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:AMPLitude <NR3>

AFG:AMPLitude?

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that represents the AFG amplitude, peak to
peak, in volts.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-95

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples AFG:AMPLITUDE 1.0 sets the AFG amplitude to 1.0 volts, peak to peak.

AFG:AMPLITUDE? might return :AFG:AMPLITUDE 3.0000 indicating the

amplitude is set to 3.0 Volts.

AFG:ARBitrary:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the source name for the Arbitrary Waveform.
Currently supported sources are either waveform file (.wfm) or text file (.csv).

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:ARBitrary:SOUrce <QString>

AFG:ARBitrary:SOUrce?

Arguments <QString> is the source name.

Examples AFG:ARBITRARY:SOURCE "E:/Waveforms/Square.wfm" sets the source

waveform to E:/Waveforms/Square.wfm.
AFG:ARBITRARY:SOURCE? might return "E:/Waveforms/Square.wfm" indicating
the source is set to E:/Waveforms/Square.wfm.

AFG:BURSt:CCOUnt
This command sets or returns the cycle count for AFG burst mode.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:BURSt:CCOUnt <NR1>

AFG:BURSt:CCOUnt?

Related Commands AFG:BURSt:TRIGger

Arguments <NR1> is the cycle count.

2-96 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples AFG:BURSt:CCOUnt 1000 sets the cycle count for AFG burst mode to 1000

AFG:BURSt:CCOUnt? might return :AFG:BURSt:CCOUnt 50, indicating that

the cycle count for AFG burst mode is set to 50

AFG:BURSt:TRIGger (No Query Form)

This command triggers a burst on AFG output.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:BURSt:TRIGger

Related Commands AFG:BURSt:CCOUnt

Examples AFG:BURSt:TRIGger triggers a burst on AFG output.

AFG:FREQuency
Sets (or queries) the AFG frequency, in Hz.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:FREQuency <NR3>

AFG:FREQuency?

Arguments <NR3> is the floating point number that represents the AFG frequency, in Hz.

Examples AFG:FREQUENCY 100.0E3 sets the AFG frequency to 100 kHz.

AFG:FREQUENCY? might return :AFG:FREQUENCY 312.5000E+3 indicating the

frequency is set to 312.5 kHz.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-97

Commands listed in alphabetical order

AFG:FUNCtion
Sets (or queries) which AFG function to execute.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:FUNCtion
{SINE|SQUare|PULSe|RAMP|NOISe|DC|SINC|GAUSsian|LORENtz
|ERISe|EDECAy|HAVERSINe|CARDIac|ARBitrary}
AFG:FUNCtion?

Arguments SINE
SQUare
PULSe
RAMP
NOISe
DC – The DC level is controlled by AFG:OFFSet.
SINC (Sin(x)/x)
GAUSsian
LORENtz
ERISe
EDECAy
HAVERSINe
CARDIac
ARBitrary

Examples AFG:FUNC LOREN specifies to generate the Lorentz function.

AFG:FUNCTION? might return :AFG:FUNCTION SINE indicating the AFG

function is set to sine.

AFG:HIGHLevel
This command sets (or queries) the high level value of the output waveform, in
volts, when using the arbitrary function generator feature.

2-98 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:HIGHLevel <NR3>

AFG:HIGHLevel?

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that represents the AFG high level value, in
volts.

Examples AFG:HIGHLEVEL 1.0 sets the AFG high level value to 1.0 volts.

AFG:HIGHLEVEL? might return :AFG:HIGHLEVEL 1.5000 indicating the high

level is set to 1.5 Volts.

AFG:LOWLevel
This command sets (or queries) the low level value of the output waveform, in
volts, when using the arbitrary function generator feature.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:LOWLevel <NR3>

AFG:LOWLevel?

Arguments NR3 is the floating point number that represents the AFG low level value, in volts.

Examples AFG:LOWLEVEL 1.0 sets the AFG low level value to 1.00 volts.

AFG:LOWLEVEL? might return :AFG:LOWLEVEL -1.5000 indicating the low

level is set to —1.5 Volts.

AFG:NOISEAdd:PERCent
Sets (or queries) the AFG additive noise level as a percentage. Minimum is 0.0%,
maximum is 100.0% and increment is 1.0%.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-99

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:NOISEAdd:PERCent <NR3>

AFG:NOISEAdd:PERCent?

Arguments Floating point number that represents the AFG additive noise level, as a
percentage.

Examples AFG:NOISEADD:PERCENT 50 sets the AFG additive noise level to 50 percent.

AFG:NOISEADD:PERCENT? might return :AFG:NOISEADD:PERCENT 0
indicating that no noise is added.

AFG:NOISEAdd:STATE
Sets (or queries) the AFG additive noise state.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:NOISEAdd:STATE {0|1|OFF|ON}

AFG:NOISEAdd:STATE?

Arguments 1 or ON turns on the AFG additive noise state.

0 or OFF turns it off.

Examples AFG:NOISEADD:STATE ON turns on the additive noise state.

AFG:NOISEADD:STATE? might return :AFG:NOISEADD:STATE 0 indicating
the noise additive state is off.

AFG:OFFSet
Sets (or queries) the AFG offset value, in volts.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

2-100 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:OFFSet <NR3>

AFG:OFFSet?

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that represents the AFG offset, in volts.

Examples AFG:OFFSET 1.0 sets the AFG offset to 1.0 volts.

AFG:OFFSET? might return AFG:OFFSET 0.0E+0 indicating there is no offset.

AFG:OUTPut:LOAd:IMPEDance
Sets (or queries) the AFG output load impedance.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:OUTPut:LOAd:IMPEDance {FIFty|HIGHZ}

AFG:OUTPut:LOAd:IMPEDance?

Arguments FIFty sets the output load impedance to 50 Ohms.

HIGHZ sets the output load impedance to the high-impedance state.

Examples AFG:OUTP:LOA:IMPED FIF sets the AFG output load impedance to 50 Ohms.

AFG:OUTPUT:LOAD:IMPEDANCE? might return AFG:OUTPUT:LOAD:IMPEDANCE

HIGHZ indicating the load impedance is set to the high impedance state.

AFG:OUTPut:MODe
This command sets or returns the AFG output mode.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-101

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax AFG:OUTPut:MODe {OFF|CONTinuous|BURSt}

AFG:OUTPut:MODe?

Related Commands AFG:OUTPut:STATE

Arguments OFF turns off the AFG output mode.

CONTinuous turns the AFG output mode to continuous.

BURSt turns the AFG output mode to burst.

Examples AFG:OUTPut:MODe BURSt sets the AFG output mode to burst.

AFG:OUTPut:MODe? might return AFG:OUTPut:MODe CONTinuous, indicating

that the AFG output mode is set to continuous.

AFG:OUTPut:STATE
Sets (or queries) the AFG output state.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:OUTPut:STATE {0|1|OFF|ON}

AFG:OUTPut:STATE?

Arguments 1 or ON turns on the AFG output state.

0 or OFF turns it off.

Examples AFG:OUTPUT:STATE ON turns on the AFG output state.

AFG:OUTPUT:STATE? might return AFG:OUTPUT:STATE 1 indicating the AFG

output is on.

AFG:PERIod
Sets (or queries) the period of the AFG waveform, in seconds.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

2-102 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:PERIod <NR3>

AFG:PERIod?

Arguments NR3 is the floating point number that represents the AFG period value, in seconds.

Returns The query response is returned in high precision NR3 format (up to 12 digits with
more than 4 trailing 0 digits after the decimal point is omitted).

Examples AFG:PERIOD 1 sets the AFG period value to 1 second.

AFG:PERIOD? might return :AFG:PERIOD 3.2000E-6 indicating the AFG period

is set to 3.2 μs.

AFG:PULse:WIDth
Sets (or queries) the AFG pulse width, in seconds.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:PULse:WIDth <NR3>

AFG:PULse:WIDth?

Arguments NR3 is the floating point number that represents the pulse width, in seconds.

Examples AFG:PULSE:WIDTH 100.0E-6 sets the AFG pulse width to 100 microseconds.

AFG:PULSE:WIDTH? might return :AFG:PULSE:WIDTH 1.0000E-6 indicating

the pulse width is set to 1 μs.

AFG:RAMP:SYMmetry
Sets (or queries) the AFG ramp symmetry in percent. Minimum is 0.0%,
maximum is 100.0% and increment is 0.10%.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-103

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:RAMP:SYMmetry <NR3>

AFG:RAMP:SYMmetry?

Arguments Floating point number that represents the AFG ramp symmetry, as a percentage.

Examples AFG:RAMP:SYMMETRY 50.0 sets the AFG ramp symmetry to 50 percent.

AFG:RAMP:SYMMETRY? might return :AFG:RAMP:SYMMETRY 50.0000

indicating the symmetry is set to 50%.

AFG:SQUare:DUty
Sets (or queries) the AFG duty cycle in percent. The minimum is 10.0%,
maximum is 90.0% and increment is 0.10%.

Conditions Requires option AFG.

Group AFG

Syntax AFG:SQUare:DUty <NR3>

AFG:SQUare:DUty?

Arguments Floating point number that represents the AFG duty cycle, as a percentage.

Examples AFG:SQUARE:DUTY 50.0 sets the AFG duty cycle to 50 percent.

AFG:SQUARE:DUTY? might return :AFG:SQUARE:DUTY 50.0000 indicating

the duty cycle is set to 50%.

ALIas
This command sets or queries the state of alias functionality, and it is identical to
the ALIAS:STATE command.

Group Alias

2-104 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax ALIas {OFF|ON|<NR1>}

ALIas?

Related Commands ALIas:STATE

Arguments OFF turns Alias expansion off.

ON turns Alias expansion on. When a defined alias is received, the specified
command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.
<NR1> = 0 disables Alias mode; any other value enables Alias mode.

Examples ALIAS ON turns the alias feature on. When a defined alias is received, the specified
command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.
ALIAS? might return :ALIAS:STATE 1, indicating that the alias feature is on.

ALIas:CATalog? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns a list of the currently defined alias labels,
separated by commas. If no aliases are defined, the query returns the string “”.

Group Alias

Syntax ALIas:CATalog?

Examples ALIAS:CATALOG? might return the string :ALIAS:CATALOG

"SETUP1","TESTMENU1","DEFAULT" showing that there are three aliases
named SETUP1, TESTMENU1, and DEFAULT.

ALIas:DEFine
This command assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label. These
messages are then substituted for the alias whenever it is received as a command
or query, provided that ALIas:STATE is turned on. The query form of this
command returns the definitions of a selected alias.

NOTE. Attempting to give two aliases the same name causes an error. To give a
new alias the name of an existing alias, the existing alias must first be deleted.

Group Alias

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-105

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax ALIas:DEFine <QString><,>{<QString>|<Block>}

ALIas:DEFine?

Related Commands ALIas:STATE

Arguments The first <QString> is the alias label.

This label cannot be a command name. Labels must start with a letter and can
contain only letters, numbers, and underscores; other characters are not allowed.
The label must be less than or equal to 12 characters.
The second <QString> or <Block> is a complete sequence of program messages.
The messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by
semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands. The sequence
must be less than or equal to 256 characters.

Examples ALIAS:DEFINE "ST1",":RECALL:SETUP 'C:/mySetup.set';:AUTOSET

EXECUTE" defines an alias named “ST1” that recalls a previously saved setup
and performs an autoset.
ALIAS:DEFINE? "ST1" returns :ALIAS:DEFINE "ST1",#247
:RECALL:SETUP 'C:/mySetup.set';:AUTOSET EXECUTE.

ALIas:DELEte (No Query Form)

This command removes a specified alias and is identical to ALIas:DELEte:NAMe.
An error message is generated if the named alias does not exist.

Group Alias

Syntax ALIas:DELEte <QString>

Related Commands *ESR?

ALIas:DELEte:ALL

Arguments <QString> is the name of the alias to be removed. Using ALIas:DELEte

without specifying an alias causes an execution error. <QString> must be a
previously defined value.

Examples ALIAS:DELETE "SETUP1" deletes the alias named SETUP1.

2-106 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

ALIas:DELEte:ALL (No Query Form)

This command deletes all existing aliases.

Group Alias

Syntax ALIas:DELEte:ALL

Related Commands ALIas:DELEte

ALIas:DELEte:NAMe

Examples ALIAS:DELETE:ALL deletes all existing aliases.

ALIas:DELEte:NAMe (No Query Form)

This command removes a specified alias. An error message is generated if the
named alias does not exist. This command is identical to ALIas:DELEte.

Group Alias

Syntax ALIas:DELEte:NAMe <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the name of the alias to remove. Using ALIas:DELEte:NAMe

without specifying an alias causes an exception error.<QString> must be a
previously defined alias.

Examples ALIAS:DELETE:NAME "STARTUP" deletes the alias named STARTUP.

ALIas:STATE
This command turns aliases on or off and is identical to the ALIas command. The
query form of this command returns the state of the aliases.

Group Alias

Syntax ALIas:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

ALIas:STATE?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-107

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR1> = 0 turns off aliases; any other value turns on aliases.

OFF turns alias expansion off.

ON turns alias expansion on. When a defined alias is received, the specified
command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.

Examples ALIAS:STATE OFF turns off the alias feature.

ALIAS:STATE? might return :ALIAS:STATE ON, indicating that alias expansion

is currently turned on.

ALLEv? (Query Only)

This query-only command prompts the instrument to return all events and their
messages (delimited by commas), and removes the returned events from the Event
Queue. Use the *ESR? query to enable the events to be returned. This command
is similar to repeatedly sending *EVMsg? queries to the instrument.

Group Status and Error

Syntax ALLEv?

Related Commands *ESR?

EVMsg?

Examples ALLEV? might return :ALLEV 2225,"Measurement error, No waveform

to measure; "420,"Query UNTERMINATED;".

AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT
This command sets or queries the idle time from the programmable interface
before auto-save occurs.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT <NR1>

AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT?

Arguments <NR1>

2-108 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT 100000 sets the timeout to 100 seconds.

AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT? might return :AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT 180000

indicating the time out value is 180 seconds.

AUTOSAVEUITIMEOUT
This command sets or queries the idle time from the user interface before
auto-save occurs.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax AUTOSAVEUITIMEOUT <NR1>

AUTOSAVEUITIMEOUT?

Arguments <NR1>

Examples AUTOSAVEUITIMEOUT 4000 sets the timeout to 4 seconds.

AUTOSAVEUITIMEOUT? might return :AUTOSAVEUITIMEOUT 3000 indicating

the time out value is 3 seconds.

AUTOSet (No Query Form)

This command (no query format) sets the vertical, horizontal, and trigger controls
of the instrument to automatically acquire and display the selected waveform.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax AUTOSet EXECute

Arguments EXECute autosets the displayed waveform; this is equivalent to pressing the front
panel Autoset button.

Examples AUTOSET EXECute autosets the displayed waveform.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-109

Commands listed in alphabetical order

AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble
This command sets or queries the Autoset acquisition setting adjustment. Settings
affected may include, but not be limited to, acquisition mode, and FastAcq mode.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble {ON|1|OFF|0}

AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble?

Related Commands AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble

AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble

AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble

Arguments ON or 1 enables Autoset to change acquisition settings.

OFF or 0 disables Autoset from changing acquisition settings.

Examples AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble OFF turns off Autoset's adjustment of the

acquisition settings.
AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble? might return 0, indicating Autoset's
adjustment of the acquisition settings is turned off.

AUTOSet:ENAble
This command sets or queries the Autoset enable/disable feature. This is useful
for classroom purposes where the instructor wants the students to achieve the
desired instrument settings without the benefit of the Autoset feature.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax AUTOSet:ENAble {ON|1|OFF|0}

AUTOSet:ENAble?

Related Commands AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble

AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble
AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble
AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble

2-110 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ON or 1 enables Autoset.

OFF or 0 disables Autoset.

Examples AUTOSet:ENAble ON turns on the Autoset feature.

AUTOSet:ENAble? might return 1, indicating that Autoset is enabled.

AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble
This command sets or queries Autoset's adjustment of horizontal settings. Settings
affected may include, but not be limited to, horizontal scale, horizontal position,
and horizontal delay mode.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble {ON|1|OFF|0}

AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble?

Related Commands AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble

AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble
AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble

Arguments ON or 1 enables Autoset to change horizontal settings.

OFF or 0 disables Autoset from changing horizontal settings.

Examples AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble OFF turns off Autoset's adjustment of the

horizontal settings.
AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble? might return 0, indicating Autoset's
adjustment of the horizontal settings is turned off.

AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble
This command sets or queries Autoset's adjustment of trigger settings. Settings
affected may include, but not be limited to, trigger level, trigger source, and
trigger coupling.

Group Miscellaneous

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-111

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble {ON|1|OFF|0}

AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble?

Related Commands AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble

AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble
AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble

Arguments ON or 1 enables Autoset to change trigger settings.

OFF or 0 disables Autoset from changing trigger settings.

Examples AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble OFF turns off Autoset's adjustment of the trigger

settings.
AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble? might return 0, indicating Autoset's adjustment of
the trigger settings is turned off.

AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble
This command sets or queries Autoset's adjustment of vertical settings. Settings
affected may include, but not be limited to, vertical scale, vertical position, and
vertical offset.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble {ON|1|OFF|0}

AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble?

Related Commands AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble

AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble
AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble

Arguments ON or 1 enables Autoset to change vertical settings.

OFF or 0 disables Autoset from changing vertical settings.

Examples AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble OFF turns off Autoset's adjustment of the vertical

settings.

2-112 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble? might return 0, indicating Autoset's adjustment

of the vertical settings is turned off.

AUTOSet:VERTical:OPTIMize
This command sets or queries which vertical settings Autoset will optimize when
the display mode is set to Overlay mode (all waveforms are in one common
graticule in the Waveform View).

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax AUTOSet:VERTical:OPTIMize {RESOlution|VISIBility}

AUTOSet:VERTical:OPTIMize?

Related Commands DISplay:WAVEView<x>:VIEWStyle

Arguments RESOlution uses as much of the ADC's (Analog to Digital Converter) range as
possible to provide the best vertical resolution and measurement accuracy, but
waveforms will overlap each other.
VISIBility vertically scales and positions waveforms so they are visually
separated from each other at the expense of vertical resolution and measurement
accuracy.

Examples AUTOSet:VERTical:OPTIMize VISIBility will vertically scale and position

all active waveforms so that they are visually separated from each other when
autoset is executed.
AUTOSet:VERTical:OPTIMize? might return
AUTOSet:VERTical:OPTIMize RESOLUTION, which indicates that, when
executed, autoset will vertically scale/position the active waveforms to maximize
the ADC range while in Overlay display mode.

AUXout:EDGE
This command sets or queries the direction in which the Auxiliary Output signal
will transition when a trigger occurs.

Group Miscellaneous

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-113

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax AUXout:EDGE {RISing|FALling}

AUXout:EDGE?

Arguments RISing sets the polarity to the rising edge.

FALling sets the polarity to the falling edge.

Examples AUXOUT:EDGE RISING sets the polarity to rising edge.

AUXOUT:EDGE? might return :AUXOUT:EDGE FALLING, indicating that the

polarity is set to falling edge.

AUXout:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the source at the AFG/AUX OUT, shared BNC
connection.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax AUXout:SOUrce {ATRIGger|OFF}

AUXout:SOUrce?

Arguments ATRIGger sets the source at the AFG/AUX OUT, shared BNC connector to the
main trigger and turns off the AFG output (if on).
OFF turns off the output of the AFG/AUX OUT, shared BNC connector, this
will turn off the AFG (if on).

Examples AUXOUT:SOURCE? might return :AUXOUT:SOURCE ATRIGGER, indicating that

the source at the BNC connector is set to the A trigger.

BATTery:ACPOWer? (Query Only)

This command queries the state of AC power being plugged in.

Conditions Requires the battery pack accessory.

Group Battery

Syntax BATTery:ACPOWer?

2-114 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Returns The command returns a 0 when no AC power is plugged in and a 1 when AC

power is plugged in.

Examples BATTERY:ACPOWER? might return 0, indicating that no AC power is plugged

into the instrument.

BATTery:SLOT<1,2>:CHARGE? (Query Only)

This command queries the current charge of the battery.

Conditions Requires the battery pack accessory.

Group Battery

Syntax BATTery:SLOT<1,2>:CHARGE?

Returns The command returns the charge percentage (0% to 100%). Returns NaN if there
is no battery in the slot being queried.

Examples BATTery:SLOT1:CHARGE? might return 75, indicating that the battery in slot 1
is 75% charged.

BATTery:SLOT<1,2>:INSTalled? (Query Only)

This command queries if a battery is installed.

Conditions Requires the battery pack accessory.

Group Battery

Syntax BATTery:SLOT<1,2>:INSTalled?

Returns The command returns 0 for battery not installed or 1 for battery installed.

Examples BATTery:SLOT1:INSTalled? might return 0, indicating that the battery is

not installed.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-115

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BATTery:SLOT<1,2>:SERIALnumber? (Query Only)

This command queries the serial number of the battery.

Conditions Requires the battery pack accessory.

Group Battery

Syntax BATTery:SLOT<1,2>:SERIALnumber?

Returns The command returns the serial number of the battery (0 to 65534). Returns NaN
if there is no battery in the slot being queried.

Examples BATTery:SLOT1:SERIALnumber? might return 10, indicating that the serial

number of the battery in slot 1 is 10.

BATTery:SLOT<1,2>:TIMETOEMPty? (Query Only)

This command queries the time to empty of the battery.

Conditions Requires the battery pack accessory.

Group Battery

Syntax BATTery:SLOT<1,2>:TIMETOEMPty?

Returns The command returns the time, in minutes, until the battery in the slot being
queried is depleted. Based on the current being pulled from the battery. NaN
indicates that the battery being queried is not discharging or that there is no
battery in the slot.

Examples BATTery:SLOT1:TIMETOEMPty? might return 120, indicating that the battery

in slot 1 has 2 hours until it is completely drained.

BATTery:SLOT<1,2>:TIMETOFULL? (Query Only)

This command queries the time to full of the battery.

2-116 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires the battery pack accessory.

Group Battery

Syntax BATTery:SLOT<1,2>:TIMETOFULL?

Returns The command returns the time, in minutes, until the battery in the slot being
queried is charged. Based on the current being pushed into the battery. NaN
can indicate that the battery being queried is not charging or that there is not
battery in the slot.

Examples BATTery:SLOT1:TIMETOFULL? might return 120, indicating that the battery in

slot 1 has 2 hours until it is completely full.

BUS:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds the specified bus. This command creates/adds the bus but
does not display it (turn it on). In order to enable bus decoding and see the bus
display on screen, send the DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:STATE ON
command.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:ADDNew <QString>

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:TYPe

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:STATE

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of the form "B<NR1>" where NR1 is ≥1.

Examples BUS:ADDNEW "B5";:display:waveview1:bus:b5:state on creates bus 3

with the default type of Parallel, and then turns it on.

BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate
This command sets or queries the CAN bit rate. The bus number is specified by x.
If you select Custom, use BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate:VALue to set the bit rate.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-117

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate
{RATE10K|RATE100K|RATE1M|RATE125K|RATE153K|
RATE20K|RATE25K|RATE250K|RATE31K|RATE33K|RATE400K|RATE50K|
RATE500K|RATE62K| RATE68K|RATE800K|RATE83K|RATE92K|CUSTom}
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate:VALue

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

Arguments specify the bit rate.

Examples BUS:B1:CAN:BITRate RATE1M sets the CAN bit rate to 1 Mb.

BUS:B1:CAN:BITRate? might return :BUS:B1:CAN:BITRATE RATE500K,

indicating the CAN bit rate is set to 500 k.

BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate:VALue
This command sets or queries CAN bit rate when Custom is selected by
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate:VALue <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate:VALue?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> specifies the CAN bit rate.

2-118 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Returns <NR1> is the bit rate.

Examples BUS:B1:CAN:BITRate:VALue 400.0E+3 sets the bit rate to 400 k.

BUS:B1:CAN:BITRate:VALue? might return :BUS:B1:CAN:BITRATE:VALUE

500000, indicating that the bit rate is set to 500,000.

BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate
This command sets or queries the increased data phase bit rate used by CAN
FD packets on the specified CAN bus. The bus is specified by x. If you select
Custom, use BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate:CUSTom to set the bit rate.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate
{RATE1M|RATE2M|RATE3M|RATE4M|RATE5M|RATE6M|
RATE7M|RATE8M|RATE9M|RATE10M|RATE11M|RATE12M|RATE13M|
RATE14M|RATE15M|RATE16M|CUSTom}
BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate:CUSTom

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

Arguments specify the bit rate.

Examples BUS:B1:CAN:BITRATE RATE1M sets the CAN FD bit rate to 1 Mbps.

BUS:B1:CAN:BITRATE? might return :BUS:B1:CAN:BITRATE RATE4M,

indicating that the CAN FD bit rate is 4 Mbps.

BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate:CUSTom
This command sets or queries the custom bit rate for the increased data phase of
CAN FD packets on the specified CAN bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-119

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate:CUSTom <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate:CUSTom?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> is the custom FD bit rate for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:CAN:FD:BITRATE:CUSTOM 1000000 sets the bit rate to 1,000,000.

BUS:B1:CAN:FD:BITRATE:CUSTOM? might return

:BUS:B1:CAN:FD:BITRATE:CUSTOM 4000000, indicating the bit rate is set
to 4,000,000.

BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint
This command sets or queries the sample point for the specified CAN bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> is the sample point, in percent, for the specified CAN bus.

Examples BUS:B1:CAN:SAMPLEpoint 40 sets the sample point to 40%.

BUS:B1:CAN:SAMPLEpoint? might return :BUS:B1:CAN:SAMPLEPOINT 50

indicating the sample point is at 50%.

2-120 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:CAN:SIGNal
This command sets or queries the signal type for the specified CAN bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:SIGNal {DIFFerential|CANH|CANL|RX|TX}

BUS:B<x>:CAN:SIGNal?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

Arguments are the CAN bus signal types.

Examples BUS:B1:CAN:SINal CANL sets the signal type to CANL.

BUS:B1:CAN:SINal? might return :BUS:B1:CAN:SIGNAL CANH indicating

the signal type is CANH.

BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the CAN source channel for the specified CAN
bus. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce {CH<x>| DCH<x>_D<x>| MATH<x>| REF<x>|

REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel to use as the source.

DCH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel to use as the source. The supported

digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bits values are 0 to 15.
MATH<x> specifies a math waveform to use as the source.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-121

Commands listed in alphabetical order

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform to use as the source.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:CAN:SOUrce MATH6 sets the source channel to MATH6.

BUS:B1:CAN:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:CAN:SOURCE CH1, indicating

that the CAN source channel is CH1.

BUS:B<x>:CAN:STANDard
This command sets or queries which CAN standard specification to analyze the
specified CAN bus with. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AERO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:STANDard {CAN2X|FDISO|FDNONISO}

BUS:B<x>:CAN:STANDard?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CAN2X sets the CAN bus standard to CAN 2.0.

FDISO sets the CAN bus standard to ISO CAN FD (11898-1:2015).

FDNONISO sets the CAN bus standard to non-ISO CAN FD (Bosch:2012).

Examples BUS:B1:CAN:STANDARD FDISO sets the CAN standard to ISO CAN FD.

BUS:B1:CAN:STANDARD? might return :BUS:B1:CAN:STANDARD CAN2X,

indicating that the CAN standard is CAN 2.0.

BUS:B<x>:CAN:THReshold
This command sets or queries the source channel threshold for the specified CAN
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

2-122 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:CAN:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:CAN:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the source channel threshold for the specified CAN bus.

Examples BUS:B1:CAN:THReshold 5 sets the threshold to 5 V.

BUS:B1:CAN:THReshold? might return :BUS:B1:CAN:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0

indicating the threshold is set to 0.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:DISplay:FORMat
This command sets or queries how the data is represented in the bus form for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:DISplay:FORMat
{HEX|BINARY|MIXEDASCII|MIXEDHEX|ASCII|DECIMAL|MIXED}
BUS:B<x>:DISplay:FORMat?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

NOTE. Different bus types support only a subset of these arguments.

HEX specifies hexadecimal format.

BINARY specifies binary format.

MIXEDASCII specifies mixed ASCII format.

MIXEDHEX specifies mixed hexadecimal format.

ASCII specifies ASCII format.

DECIMAL specifies decimal format.

MIXED specifies mixed format.

Examples BUS:B1:DISplay:FORMat BINARY sets the format to binary.

BUS:B1:DISplay:FORMat? might return :BUS:B1:DISPLAY:FORMAT HEX

indicating the format is set to hexadecimal.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-123

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:DISplay:LAYout
This command sets or queries what to display for the specified bus. The bus
is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:DISplay:LAYout {BUS|BUSANDWAVEFORM}

BUS:B<x>:DISplay:LAYout?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

BUS specifies displaying the bus form only.

BUSANDWAVEFORM specifies displaying the bus form and the constituent source
waveform(s). This argument is not available for some bus types and some bus
configurations

Examples BUS:B1:DISplay:LAYout BUS specifies displaying the bus form only.

BUS:B1:DISplay:LAYout? might return :BUS:B1:DISPLAY:LAYOUT BUS

indicating the bus will be displayed without displaying its constituent source
waveform(s).

BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the I2C clock (SCLK) source for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH<x>| DCH<x>_D<x>| MATH<x>|

REF<x>| REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:SOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SOUrce

BUS:B<x>:I2C:RWINADDR

2-124 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel to use as the I2C SCLK source.

DCH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel to use as the I2C SCLK source. The
supported digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are 0 to 15.
MATH<x> specifies a math waveform to use as the I2C SCLK source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform to use as the I2C SCLK source.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the clock source

waveform for the specified I2C bus.

Examples BUS:B1:I2C:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1 sets the I2C SCLK source to CH1.

BUS:B1:I2C:CLOCK:SOURCE? might return :BUS:B1:I2C:CLOCK:SOURCE

CH4, indicating that the I2C SCLK source is set to channel 4.

BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:THReshold
This command sets or queries the I2C Clock (SCLK) source threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the I2C Clock (SCLK) source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:I2C:CLOCk:THReshold 50.0e-3 sets the threshold to

50 mV.

BUS:B1:I2C:CLOCk:THReshold? might return

:BUS:B1:I2C:CLOCK:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0 indicating the threshold is set
to 0 V.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-125

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the I2C data (SDA) source for the specified I2C
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SOUrce {CH<x>| DCH<x>_D<x>| MATH<x>|

REF<x>| REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:SOUrce

BUS:B<x>:I2C:RWINADDR

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel to use as the I2C SDA source.

DCH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel to use as the I2C SDA source. The
supported digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are 0 to 15.
MATH<x> specifies a math waveform to use as the I2C SDA source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform to use as the I2C SDA source.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the data source waveform

for the specified I2C bus.

Examples BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:SOURCE CH1 sets the I2C SDA source to CH1.

BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:SOURCE? might return :BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:SOURCE

MATH1, indicating that the I2C SDA source is set to MATH1.

BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:THReshold
This command sets or queries the I2C Data (SDA) source threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Bus

2-126 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the I2C Data (SDA) source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:I2C:DATa:THReshold 50.0e-3 sets the threshold to 50 mV.

BUS:B1:I2C:DATa:THReshold? might return

:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0 indicating the threshold is set to 0 V.

BUS:B<x>:I2C:RWINADDR
This command sets or queries the manner in which seven-bit I2C addresses are
represented in the busform display of the specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:I2C:RWINADDR {0|1}

BUS:B<x>:I2C:RWINADDR?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:SOUrce

BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

0 displays seven-bit slave addresses as integers in the range of 0 to 127, with

the state of the R/W* bit from the LSB of the slave address byte. For example,
the slave address byte of 0b10100101 is displayed as the value 0x52 R.

1 displays the entire slave address byte as a number, with the R/W* signal as its
LSB (bit 0) and the slave address in bits 7..1. For example, the slave address byte
of 0b10100101 is displayed as the value 0xA5 R.

Examples BUS:B1:I2C:RWINADDR 0 displays seven-bit slave addresses as integers in

the range of 0 to 127.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-127

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B1:I2C:RWINADDR? might return :BUS:B1:I2C:RWINADDR 1, indicating

that the entire slave address byte is displayed as a number, with the R/W* signal
as its LSB (bit 0) and the slave address in bits 7..1.

BUS:B<x>:LABel:COLor
This command sets or queries the color of the specified bus label. The bus is
specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LABel:COLor <QString>

BUS:B<x>:LABel:COLor?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<QString> is the bus label color. To return the color to the default color, send an
empty string as in this example: :BUS:B1:LABEL:COLOR "".

Examples BUS:B1:LABel:COLor "#FF0000" sets the label color to red.

BUS:B1:LABel:COLor? might return :BUS:B1:LABEL:COLOR "#FF0000"

indicating the color is red.

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD
This command sets or queries the bold state of the specified bus label. The bus
is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD {ON|OFF|1|0}

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

ON displays the label in bold font.

OFF does not display the label in bold font.

1 displays the label in bold font.

2-128 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

0 does not display the label in bold font.

Examples BUS:B1:LABel:FONT:BOLD OFF turns off bold font.

BUS:B1:LABel:FONT:BOLD? might return :BUS:B1:LABEL:FONT:BOLD 1

indicating a bold font.

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic
This command sets or queries the italic state of the specified bus label. The bus
is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic {ON|OFF|1|0}

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

ON displays the label in italic font.

OFF does not display the label in italic font.

1 displays the label in italic font.

0 does not display the label in italic font.

Examples BUS:B1LABel:FONT:ITALic OFF turns off italic font.

BUS:B1LABel:FONT:ITALic? might return :BUS:B1:LABEL:FONT:ITALIC

1 indicating the font is italic.

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE
This command sets or queries the font size of the specified bus label. The bus
is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-129

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> is the font size.

Examples BUS:B1:LABel:FONT:SIZE 10 sets the font size to 10 points.

BUS:B1:LABel:FONT:SIZE? might return :BUS:B1:LABEL:FONT:SIZE 20

indicating the font size is 20 points.

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE
This command sets or queries the font type of the specified bus label, such as
Arial or Times New Roman. The bus is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE <QString>

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<QString> is the specified font type. Available fonts include: DejaVu Sans,
DejaVu Sans Mono, DejaVu Serif, Frutiger LT Std, Monospace, Sans Serif, Serif,
Ubuntu, Ubuntu Condensed, and Ubuntu Mono.

Examples BUS:B1:LABel:FONT:TYPE Monospace selects a monospace font.

BUS:B1:LABel:FONT:TYPE? might return :BUS:B1:LABEL:FONT:TYPE

"Frutiger LT Std 55 Roman" indicating the font type is Frutiger LT Stdn.

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline
This command sets or queries the underline state of the specified bus label. The
bus is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline {ON|OFF|1|0}

BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline?

2-130 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

ON displays the label in underlined font.

OFF does not display the label in underlined font.

1 displays the label in underlined font.

0 does not display the label in underlined font.

Examples BUS:B:LABel:FONT:UNDERline ON turns on underline font.

BUS:B:LABel:FONT:UNDERline? might return

:BUS:B1:LABEL:FONT:UNDERLINE 0 indicating underline is off.

BUS:B<x>:LABel:name
This command sets or queries the label for the specified bus. The bus is specified
by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LABel:name <QString>

BUS:B<x>:LABel:name?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:TYPe

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<QString> is an alphanumeric string of text enclosed in quotes. The text string is

limited to 30 characters. It contains the text label information for the bus.

Examples BUS:B1:LABEL:NAME “TEST” sets the waveform label for the bus B1 to Test.

BUS:B1:LABEL:NAME? might return :BUS:B1:LABEL:NAME “BUS 1”,

indicating that the waveform label for the bus B1 is set to “Bus 1”.

BUS:B<x>:LABel:XPOS
This command sets or queries the x-position of the specified bus label. The bus
is specified by x.

Group Bus

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-131

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LABel:XPOS <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:LABel:XPOS?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the x-position, in pixels relative to the left edge of the screen of the
specified bus label.

Examples BUS:B1:LABel:XPOS 90 set the x position to 90.

BUS:B1:LABel:XPOS? might return :BUS:B1:LABEL:XPOS 45.0000

indicating the x position is 45.0 pixels to the right of the left edge of the display.

BUS:B<x>:LABel:YPOS
This command sets or queries the y-position of the specified bus label. The bus
is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LABel:YPOS <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:LABel:YPOS?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the y-position, in pixels relative to the baseline of the waveform, of

the specified bus label.

Examples BUS:B1:LABel:YPOS 1.0e1 set the y position to 10.0.

BUS:B1:LABel:YPOS? might return :BUS:B1:LABEL:YPOS 0.0E+0

indicating the y position is 0.0 pixels from the baseline of the waveform.

BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate
This command sets or queries the LIN bus bit rate. The bus number is specified by
x. If you select Custom, use BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom to set the bit rate.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

2-132 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate
{RATE10K|RATE1K|RATE19K|RATE2K|RATE4K|RATE9K|CUSTom}
BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

Arguments are the available bit rates.

Examples BUS:B1:LIN:BITRate Rate4k sets the bit rate to 4 kb.

BUS:B1:LIN:BITRate? might return :BUS:B1:LIN:BITRATE RATE19K,

indicating that the bit rate is set to 19 kb.

BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom
This command sets or queries LIN custom bit rate for the specified bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> is the LIN custom bit rate for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom 9000 sets the bit rate to 9,000.

BUS:B1:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom? might return

:BUS:B1:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom 10000 indicating the bit rate is set to 10,000.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-133

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDFORmat
This command sets or queries LIN bus identifier format for the specified bus. The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDFORmat {NOPARity|PARity}

BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDFORmat?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

NOPARity specifies an id format that includes parity.

PARity specifies an id format that separates parity.

Examples BUS:B1:LIN:IDFORmat PARITY set the id format to parity.

BUS:B1:LIN:IDFORmat? might return :BUS:B1:LIN:IDFORMAT NOPARITY,

indicating the id format is set to no parity.

BUS:B<x>:LIN:POLarity
This command sets or queries the LIN source polarity for the specified bus. The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LIN:POLarity {INVerted|NORmal}

BUS:B<x>:LIN:POLarity?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

INVerted specifies inverted polarity.

NORmal specifies normal polarity.

2-134 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:LIN:POLarity Inverted sets the polarity to inverted.

BUS:B1:LIN:POLarity? might return :BUS:B1:LIN:POLARITY NORMAL,

indicating the bus polarity is set to normal.

BUS:B<x>:LIN:SAMPLEpoint
Specifies the LIN sample point, for the specified LIN bus. The bus is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LIN:SAMPLEpoint <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:LIN:SAMPLEpoint?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> is a percentage that represents the point at which to sample during each
bit period.

Examples BUS:B1:LIN:SAMPLEPOINT 10 sets the sample point to 10% of the bit period

BUS:B1:LIN:SAMPLEPOINT? might return BUS:B1:LIN:SAMPLEPOINT 50

indicating that the sample point is set to 50% of the bit period

BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the LIN data source for the specified bus. The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce {CH<x>| DCH<x>_D<x>| MATH<x>| REF<x>|

REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-135

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel to use as the LIN data source.

DCH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel to use as the LIN data source. The
supported digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are 0 to 15.
MATH<x> specifies a math waveform to use as the LIN data source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform to use as the LIN data source.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the data source waveform.

Examples BUS:B1:LIN:SOUrce MATH4 sets the source to MATH 4

BUS:B1:LIN:SOUrce? might return :BUS:B1:LIN:SOURCE CH1, indicating

the source is set to channel 1.

BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce:THReshold
This command sets or queries the LIN source threshold for the specified bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> the LIN source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:LIN:SOUrce:THReshold 50.0e-3 sets the threshold to 50 mV.

BUS:B1:LIN:SOUrce:THReshold? might return

:BUS:B1:LIN:SOURCE:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0 indicating the threshold is 0.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:LIN:STANDard
This command sets or queries the LIN bus standard for the specified bus. The
bus number is specified by x.

2-136 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-AUTO.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:LIN:STANDard {MIXed|V1X|V2X}

BUS:B<x>:LIN:STANDard?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

MIXed specifies both versions 1.x and 2.x of the LIN standard.

V1X specifies version 1.x of the LIN standard.

V2X specifies version 2.x of the LIN standard.

Examples BUS:B1:LIN:STANDard V1X sets the standard to version 1.x.

BUS:B1:LIN:STANDard? might return :BUS:B1:LIN:STANDARD V2X,

indicating the standard is set to version 2.x for bus B1.

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds
This command sets or queries a threshold value for sources for the parallel
bus. Use the BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds:APPly command to set the
thresholds to this value. The bus is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds <NR3>

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds:APPly

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the source threshold.

Examples BUS:B4:PARALLEL:ALLTHRESHOLDS 1.0 sets the threshold of all the sources in

parallel Bus 4 to 1.0 V.
BUS:B3:PARALLEL:ALLTHRESHOLDS? might return
BUS:B3:PARALLEL:ALLTHRESHOLDS 500.00000E-3 indicates the threshold for
all sources in parallel Bus 3 is currently set to 500.0 mV.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-137

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds:APPly (No Query Form)

This command sets all of the data source thresholds to the value set by
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds for the parallel bus. The bus is specified
by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds:APPly

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds

Examples BUS:B1:PARallel:ALLTHResholds:APPly sets all data source thresholds to

the value set by BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds.

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<x>SOUrce
This command sets or queries the specified bit source for specified parallel bus.
The bus is specified by x. The bit is specified by n and is an integer in the range of
1 to 64.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<x>SOUrce {CH<x>| DCH<x>_D<x>| MATH<x>|

REF<x>| REF<x>_D<x>| NONE}

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<n>SOUrce:THReshold

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> is the specified bit source.

DCH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel to use as the source. The supported

digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are 0 to 15.
MATH<x> is the specified bit source.

REF<x> is the specified bit source.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the bit<x> source

waveform for the specified parallel bus.
NONE disables the bit source.

2-138 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:PARallel:BIT1SOUrce CH1 sets the bit 1 source to channel 1.

BUS:B1:PARallel:BIT1SOUrce? might return

:BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT1SOURCE CH1 indicating the bit1 source is CH1.

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<n>SOUrce:THReshold
This command sets or queries the specified bit source threshold for the specified
parallel bus. The bus is specified by x. The bit is specified by n and is an integer
in the range of 1 to 64.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<n>SOUrce:THReshold <NR3>

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<x>SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the specified bit source threshold for the specified parallel bus.

Examples BUS:B3:PARALLEL:BIT2SOURCE:THRESHOLD 1.0 sets the threshold of bit

source 2 of parallel Bus 3 to 1.0 V.
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT4SOURCE:THRESHOLD? might return
:BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT4SOURCE:THRESHOLD 250.00000E-3 indicates the
threshold of bit source 4 of parallel Bus 1 is currently set to 250.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:EDGE
This command sets or queries the clock edge for the parallel bus. The bus is
specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:EDGE {FALLING|RISING|EITHER}

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:EDGE?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCkSOUrce

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-139

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

FALLING decodes on the falling edge of the clocked parallel bus signal.

RISING decodes on the rising edge of the clocked parallel bus signal.

EITHER decodes on the rising or falling edge of the clocked parallel bus signal.

Examples BUS:B1:PARALLEL:CLOCK:EDGE FALLING sets the decoding to happen on the

falling edge of its clocked parallel bus B1.
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:CLOCK:EDGE? might return
:BUS:B1:PARALLEL:CLOCK:EDGE RISING, indicating that when bus B1
operates in Clocked Parallel mode, it samples new data values on the rising edge
of its clock source signal.

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:ISCLOCKED
This command determines whether the bus operates in a clocked or asynchronous
fashion. The bus is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:ISCLOCKED {OFF|ON|NR1>

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:ISCLOCKED?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

OFF argument specifies an asynchronous bus.

ON argument specifies a clocked bus.

<NR1> = 0 specifies an asynchronous bus; any other value specifies a clocked bus.

Examples BUS:B1:PARallel:CLOCk:ISCLOCKED 0 sets the bus to operate

asynchronously.
BUS:B1:PARallel:CLOCk:ISCLOCKED? might return
:BUS:B1:PARALLEL:CLOCK:ISCLOCKED 1 indicating the bus is
clocked.

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCkSOUrce
This command sets or queries the Parallel clock bit source for the specified bus.
The bus is specified by x.

2-140 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCkSOUrce {CH<x>| DCH<x>_D<x>| MATH<x>|

REF<x>| REF<x>_D<x>| NONE}
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCkSOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:ISCLOCKED

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog FlexChannel to use as the bus clock source.

DCH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel on a specified digital channel to use as

the bus clock source. The supported digital channel value is 1. The supported
digital bit values are 0 to 15.
MATH<x> specifies the math channel to use as the bus clock source.

REF<x> specifies the reference channel to use as the bus clock source.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the clock source

waveform for the specified parallel bus.
NONE specifies the reference channel to use as the bus clock source.

Examples BUS:B1:PARALLEL:CLOCK:SOURCE CH3 sets the Parallel clock source for the
bus B1 to channel 3.
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:CLOCK:SOURCE? might return
:BUS:B1:PARALLEL:CLOCK:SOURCE CH8, indicating that the Parallel clock
source for the bus B1 is set to channel 8.

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCKSOUrce:THReshold
This command sets or queries the clock source threshold for the parallel bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCKSOUrce:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCKSOUrce:THReshold?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:ISCLOCKED

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-141

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR3> is the clock bit source threshold for the parallel bus.

Examples BUS:B4:PARALLEL:CLOCKSOUrce:THRESHOLD 1.5 sets the threshold of the

clock source of parallel Bus 4 to 1.5 V.
BUS:B3:PARALLEL:CLOCKSOUrce:THRESHOLD? might return
:BUS:B3:PARALLEL:CLOCKSOUrce:THRESHOLD 750.00000E-3 indicates the
threshold of the clock source of parallel Bus 3 is currently set to 750.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate
This command sets or queries the RS-232C bit rate for bus<x>,
where the bus number is specified by x. If you select Custom, use
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate:CUSTom to set the bit rate.

Conditions Requires option SR-COMP.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate
{CUSTOM|RATE300|RATE1K|RATE2K|RATE9K|
RATE19K|RATE38K|RATE115K|RATE921K}
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

Arguments are the available bit rates.

Examples BUS:B1:RS232C:BITRATE RATE9K sets the bit rate for the RS-232C bus B1 to
9000 bits-per-second.
BUS:B1:RS232C:BITRATE? might return :BUS:B1:RS232C:BITRATE 9000,
indicating that the bit rate for the RS-232C bus B1 is set to 9000 bits-per-second.

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate:CUSTom
This command sets or queries the RS-232C custom bit rate for the specified bus.
The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-COMP.

2-142 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate:CUSTom <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate:CUSTom?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> is the custom bit rate.

Examples BUS:B1:RS232C:BITRATE:CUSTOM 9500 sets the bit rate for the RS-232C bus
B1 to 9500 bits-per-second.
BUS:B1:RS232C:BITRATE:CUSTOM? might return
:BUS:B1:RS232C:BITRATE:CUSTOM 9500, indicating that the bit rate for the
RS-232C bus B1 is set to 9500 bits-per-second.

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATABits
This command sets or queries the RS-232C data width for bus<x>, where the
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-COMP.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATABits {7|8|9}

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATABits?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR1> specifies the number of bits in the RS-232C data frame.

Examples BUS:B1:RS232C:DATABITS 8 sets the data bits to 8 for the RS-232C bus B1.

BUS:B5:RS232C:DATABITS? might return :BUS:B1:RS232C:DATABITS 7,

indicating that the data bits is set to 7 for the RS-232C bus B5.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-143

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELIMiter
This command sets or queries the RS-232C string delimiter on bus <x>, where
the bus number is specified by x. This command only applies when Packet view
is turned On.

Conditions Requires option SR-COMP.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELIMiter {NULl|CR|LF|SPace|XFF}

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELIMiter?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DISplaymode

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

NULl specifies NULL (0x00 ) delimiting value for a packet.

CR specifies CR (0x0D) delimiting value for a packet.

LF specifies LF (0x0A) delimiting value for a packet.

XFF specifies XFF (0xFF) delimiting value for a packet.

SPace specifies SPace delimiting value for a packet.

Examples BUS:B1:RS232C:DELIMITER LF sets the delimiter to 0x0A for the RS-232C

bus B1.
BUS:B1:RS232C:DELIMITER? might return :BUS:B1:RS232C:DELIMITER
NULL, indicating that the delimiter to 0x00 for the RS-232C bus B1.

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DISplaymode
This command sets or queries the RS-232C display mode for the specified bus.
The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-COMP.

Group Bus

2-144 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DISplaymode {FRame|PACKET}

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DISplaymode?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELIMiter

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

FRame displays each frame as a single entity.

PACKET displays a group of frames terminated with a single frame defined by the
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELImiter command.

Examples BUS:B1:RS232C:DISPLAYMODE FRAME sets the display mode for the RS-232C
bus B1 to Frame.
BUS:B1:RS232C:DISPLAYMODE? might return
:BUS:B1:RS232C:DISPLAYMODE PACKET, indicating that the display mode for
the RS-232C bus B1 is set to Packet.

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:PARity
This command sets or queries the RS-232C parity for bus <x>, where the bus
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-COMP.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:PARity {NONe|EVEN|ODD}

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:PARity?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

NONe specifies no parity.

EVEN specifies even parity.

ODD specifies odd parity.

Examples BUS:B1:RS232C:PARITY ODD sets the parity for the RS-232C bus B1 to odd.

BUS:B1:RS232C:PARITY? might return :BUS:B1:RS232C:PARITY NONE,

indicating that the display mode for the RS-232C bus B1 is set to none.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-145

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:POLarity
This command sets or queries the RS-232C source polarity for bus <x>, where the
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-COMP.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:POLarity {NORmal|INVERTed}

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:POLarity?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

NORmal sets the RS-232C bus polarity to positive.

INVERTed sets the RS-232C bus polarity to negative.

Examples BUS:B1:RS232C:POLARITY INVERTed sets the polarity for the RS-232C bus
B1 to Inverted.
BUS:B1:RS232C:POLARITY? might return :BUS:B1:RS232C:POLARITY
NORMAL, indicating that the polarity for the RS-232C bus B1 is set to Normal.

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the RS-232C source for the bus, where the bus
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-COMP.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:SOUrce {CH<x>| DCH<x>_D<x>| REF<x>| MATH<x>|

REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel to use as the RS-232C source.

2-146 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DCH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel of a specified digital channel to use for

the RS-232C source. The supported digital channel value is 1. The supported
digital bit values are 0 to 15.
MATH<x> specifies a math channel to use for the RS-232C source.

REF<x> specifies a reference channel to use for the RS-232C source.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source waveform

for the specified RS-232C bus.

Examples BUS:B1:RS232C:SOURCE CH1 sets the source for the RS-232C bus B1 to
channel 1.
BUS:B1:RS232C:SOURCE? might return :BUS:B1:RS232C:SOURCE CH1,
indicating that the source for the RS-232C bus B1 is CH1.

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:SOUrce:THReshold
This command sets or queries the RS-232C source threshold for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-COMP.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:RS232C:SOUrce:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:RS232C:SOUrce:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

<NR3> is the RS-232C source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:RS232C:SOURCE:THRESHOLD 50.0e-3 sets the threshold to 50 mV.

BUS:B1:RS232C:SOURCE:THRESHOLD? might return

:BUS:B1:RS232C:SOURCE:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0 indicating the threshold
is set to 0.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:SENT:CHANWidth
This command sets or queries SENT fast channel bit widths for the specified bus.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-147

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SENT:CHANWidth
{TWELVEtwelve|FOURTEENten|SIXTEENeight}
BUS:B<x>:SENT:CHANWidth?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

TWELVEtwelve sets both Fast Channel 1 and Fast Channel 2 to12 bits wide.

FOURTEENten sets Fast Channel 1 to 14 bits and Fast Channel 2 to 10 bits.

SIXTEENeight sets Fast Channel 1 to 16 bits and Fast Channel 2 to eight bits.

Examples BUS:B1:SENT:CHANWIDTH TWELVETWELVE sets the channel width of both Fast

Channel 1 and Fast Channel 2 to twelve bits.
BUS:B1:SENT:CHANWIDTH? might return :BUS:B1:SENT:CHANWIDTH
SIXTEENEIGHT, which indicates that the Fast Channel 1 width is 16 and the
Fast Channel 2 width is eight.

BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount
This command sets or queries SENT data nibbles for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount {THREE|FOUR|SIX}

BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

THREE specifies regular data with 3 nibbles

FOUR specifies regular data with 4nibbles

SIX specifies regular data with 6nibbles

2-148 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:SENT:NIBBLECOUNT THREE sets the data nibble count to three.

BUS:B1:SENT:NIBBLECOUNT? might return :BUS:B1:SENT:NIBBLECOUNT

SIX, which indicates the nibble count is set to six.

BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel
This command sets or queries SENT fast data channels for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel {ONE|TWO}

BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

ONE specifies a SENT bus with one fast channel.

TWO specifies a SENT bus with two fast channels.

Examples BUS:B1:SENT:NUMCHANnel TWO sets the number of SENT channels to two.

BUS:B1:SENT:NUMCHANNEL? might return :BUS:B1:SENT:NUMCHANNEL ONE

to indicate that the number of channels is set to one.

BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSEPULSe
This command sets or queries SENT pause pulse for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSEPULSe {NO|YES}

BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSEPULSe?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

NO specifies no pause pulse.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-149

Commands listed in alphabetical order

YES specifies a pause pulse is used.

Examples BUS:B1:SENT:PAUSEPULSE NO sets the pause pulse value to indicate no pause

pulse.
BUS:B1:SENT:PAUSEPULSE? might return :BUS:B1:SENT:PAUSEPULSE YES,
which indicates the SENT bus is set to use pause pulses.

BUS:B<x>:SENT:POLARITY
This command sets or queries SENT Idle State signal polarity for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SENT:POLARITY {INVerted|NORmal}

BUS:B<x>:SENT:POLARITY?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

INVerted specifies inverted polarity.

NORmal specifies normal polarity.

Examples BUS:B1:SENT:POLARITY INVERTED sets the idle state of the bus to inverted
polarity.
BUS:B1:SENT:POLARITY? might return :BUS:B1:SENT:POLARITY NORMAL
to indicate the bus idle state polarity is set to normal

BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW
This command sets or queries the SENT slow channel configuration for the
specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Bus

2-150 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW {NOne|ENHANCED4|ENHANCED8|SHOrt}

BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

NOne specifies no slow channel configured.

ENHANCED4 specifies Enhanced 4 slow channel configuration.

ENHANCED8 specifies Enhanced 8 slow channel configuration.

SHOrt specifies short slow channel configuration.

Examples BUS:B1:SENT:SLOW SHORT sets the SENT bus to use the short slow channel
configuration.
BUS:B1:SENT:SLOW? might return :BUS:B1:SENT:SLOW NONE to indicate that
the SENT bus is set to have no slow channel.

BUS:B<x>:SENT:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the SENT DATA source for the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SENT:SOUrce {CH<x>| DCH<x>_D<x>| Math<x>| REF<x>|

REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:SENT:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the clock source waveform for the audio bus.

DCH<x>_D<x> specifies the channel bit of a separate digital channel as the clock
source waveform for the audio bus. The supported digital channel value is 1. The
supported digital bit values are 0 to 15.
Math<x> specifies a math waveform as the clock source waveform for the audio
bus.
REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the clock source waveform for the
audio bus

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-151

Commands listed in alphabetical order

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the clock source

waveform for the specified audio bus.

Examples BUS:B1:SENT:SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the source for the SENT bus.

BUS:B1:SENT:SOURCE? might return :BUS:B1:SENT:SOURCE CH1 indicating

that the source is set to channel 1

BUS:B<x>:SENT:THRESHold
This command sets or queries the SENT DATA source threshold for the specified
bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SENT:THRESHold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SENT:THRESHold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> sets the data source threshold value in volts.

Examples BUS:B1:SENT:THRESHOLD 500.0E-3 sets the Bus 1 source threshold to

500.0 mV.
BUS:B1:SENT:THRESHOLD? might return :BUS:B1:SENT:THRESHOLD
2.5000 to indicate the Bus 1 source threshold is 2.5 V.

BUS:B<x>:SENT:TICKTIME
This command sets or queries the SENT bus Clock Tick parameter for the
specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Bus

2-152 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SENT:TICKTIME <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SENT:TICKTIME?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the SENT clock tick time, in seconds.

Examples BUS:B1:SENT:TICKTIME 3.0E-6 sets the SENT bus to clock tick to

3 microseconds.
BUS:B1:SENT:TICKTIME? might return :BUS:B1:SENT:TICKTIME
10.0000E-6 to indicate the clock tick is set to 10 microseconds.

BUS:B<x>:SENT:TICKTOLerance
This command sets or queries the SENT bus Tick Tolerance percent parameter for
the specified bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SENT:TICKTOLerance <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SENT:TICKTOLerance?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the tick tolerance percentage.

Examples BUS:B1:SENT:TICKTOLERANCE 20.0 sets the tick tolerance to 20%.

US:B1:SENT:TICKTOLERANCE? might return

:BUS:B1:SENT:TICKTOLERANCE 22.5 to indicate the tolerance is set to 22.5%.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:BITOrder
This command sets or queries the SPI bit order for the specified bus. The bus
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-153

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:BITOrder {LSB|MSB}

BUS:B<x>:SPI:BITOrder?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

LSB specifies that each bit becomes the recovered value's new LSB, after shifting
previously recovered bits one place to the left. The decoding happens right to left.

MSB specifies that each successive bit from the bus's data line becomes the new
MSB of the recovered value, shifting any previously recovered bits one place to
the right. The decoding happens left to right.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:BITORDER LSB sets each bit order for the SPI Bus 1 to LSB.

BUS:B1:SPI:BITORDER? might return BUS:B1:SPI:BITORDER MSB,

indicating that the bit order for the SPI Bus 1 is set to MSB.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:POLarity
This command sets or queries the SPI clock (SCLK) source polarity for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:POLarity {FALL|RISE}

BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:POLarity?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

FALL sets the clock to the falling edge of the signal.

RISE sets the clock to the rising edge of the signal.

2-154 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCK:POLARITY FALL sets the SPI clock polarity to the falling
edge for the Bus 1.
BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCK:POLARITY? might return
BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCK:POLARITY RISE, indicating that the SPI clock polarity for
the Bus 1 is set to the rising edge.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the SPI clock (SCLK) source for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH<x>| DCH<x>_D<x>| MATH<x>|

REF<x>| REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:SOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:POLarity

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CH<x> designates an analog channel as the bus SPI clock source.

DCH<x>_D<x> specifies the digital channel as the bus SPI clock source. The
supported digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are 0 to 15.
MATH<x> designates a math waveform as the clock source.

REF<x> designates a reference waveform as the clock source.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the clock source

waveform for the specified SPI bus.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCK:SOURCE CH5 sets the SPI clock source for the Bus 1 to
CH5.
BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCK:SOURCE? might return BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCK:SOURCE
MATH1, indicating that the SPI clock source for the Bus 1 is set to MATH1.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-155

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:THReshold
This command sets or queries the SPI Clock (SCLK) source threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the SPI Clock (SCLK) source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCk:THReshold 50.0e-3 sets the threshold to 50.0 mV.

BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCk:THReshold? might return

BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCK:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0, indicating the threshold is set to
0.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:POLarity
This command sets or queries the SPI Data (Data) source polarity for the bus
number specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:POLarity {HIGH|LOW}

BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:POLarity?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

HIGH sets the SPI data polarity to active high.

LOW sets the SPI data polarity to active low.

2-156 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B4:SPI:DATA:POLARITY HIGH sets the SPI data polarity for the Bus
4 to active high.
BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:POLARITY? might return BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:POLARITY
LOW, indicating that the SPI SDA polarity for the Bus 1 is set to active low.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the number of bits per word for the specified SPI
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR1> is the data size for the specified bus. The minimum value is 2 and
maximum is 32.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SIZE 7 sets the data size for SPI Bus 1 to seven bits per
word.
BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SIZE? might return BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SIZE 8,
indicating that the data size for SPI Bus 1 is set to eight bits per word.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the SPI Data (Data) source for the bus number
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SOUrce {CH<x>| DCH<x>_D<x>| MATH<x>|

REF<x>| REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SOUrce?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-157

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CH<x> designates an analog channel as the data source for the specified SPI bus.

DCH<x>_D<x> specifies the digital channel as the bus SPI clock source. The
supported digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are 0 to 15.
MATH<x> designates a math waveform as the data source.

REF<x> designates a reference waveform as the data source.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the data source waveform

for the specified SPI bus.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SOURCE CH2 sets the SPI data source for the Bus 1 to CH2.

BUS:B3:SPI:DATA:SOURCE? might return BUS:B3:SPI:DATA:SOURCE CH3,

indicating that the SPI data source for the Bus 3 is set to CH3.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:THReshold
This command sets or queries the SPI Data (Data) source threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the SPI Data (SDA) source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:DATa:THReshold 50.0e-3 sets the threshold to 50.0 mV.

BUS:B1:SPI:DATa:THReshold? might return

BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0 indicating the threshold is set to 0.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING
This command sets or queries the SPI framing setting for the specified bus. The
bus number is specified by x.

2-158 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING {IDLE|SS}

BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

IDLE specifies IDLE SPI framing.

SS specifies SS SPI framing.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:FRAMING IDLE sets the SPI framing to IDLE.

BUS:B1:SPI:FRAMING? might return BUS:B1:SPI:FRAMING SS, indicating

that the SPI framing is set to SS.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime
This command sets or queries the SPI idle time for the specified bus. The bus
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> specifies the SPI idle time.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:IDLETime 0.000004 sets the idle time to 4 μs.

BUS:B1:SPI:IDLETime? might return BUS:B1:SPI:IDLETIME 5.0000E-6,

indicating that the idle time is set to 5 μs.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-159

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:DATa:POLarity
This command sets or queries the SPI MISo Data source polarity for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:DATa:POLarity {HIGH|LOW}

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:DATa:POLarity?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

HIGH sets the polarity to high.

LOW sets the polarity to low.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:MISo:DATa:POLarity HIGH sets the SPI MISo data polarity

to high.
BUS:B1:SPI:MISo:DATa:POLarity? might return
BUS:B1:SPI:MISo:DATa:POLarity HIGH, indicating that the SPI MISo
data polarity is high.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:INPut
This command sets or queries the SPI MISo source for the specified bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:INPut {CH<x>| DCH<x>_D<x>| MATH<x>|

REF<x>}
BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:INPut?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CH<x> designates an analog channel as the source.

2-160 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DCH<x>_D<x> specifies the channel bit of separate digital channel as the source.
The supported digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are
0 to 15.
MATH<x> designates a math waveform as the source.

REF<x> designates a reference waveform as the source.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:MISo:INPut Ch5 sets the source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:SPI:MISo:INPut? might return BUS:B1:SPI:MISo:INPut HIGH,

indicating the source is set to channel 5.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:THReshold
This command sets or queries the SPI MISo Data source threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the SPI MISo Data source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:MISo:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 1 SPI MISo threshold to

1.0 V.
BUS:B1:SPI:MISo:THReshold? might return
:BUS:B1:SPI:MISo:THReshold 225.00000E-3, indicates the Bus 1 SPI
MISo threshold is set to 225.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:DATa:POLarity
This command sets or queries the SPI MOSI source polarity for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPI.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-161

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:DATa:POLarity {HIGH|LOW}

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:DATa:POLarity?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

HIGH sets the polarity to high.

LOW sets the polarity to low.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:MOSi:DATa:POLarity HIGH sets the SPI MOSI data polarity

to high.
BUS:B1:SPI:MOSi:DATa:POLarity? might return
:BUS:B1:SPI:MOSi:DATa:POLarity HIGH, indicating that the SPI MOSI
data polarity is high.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:INPut
This command sets or queries the SPI MOSI source for the specified bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:INPut {CH<x>| DCH<x>_D<x>| MATH<x>|

REF<x>}
BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:INPut?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CH<x> designates an analog channel as the source.

DCH<x>_D<x> designates the channel bit of separate digital channel as the source.
The supported digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are
0 to 15.
MATH<x> designates a math waveform as the source.

REF<x> designates a reference waveform as the source.

2-162 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:MOSi:INPut Ch5 sets the source to channel 5.

BUS:B1:SPI:MOSi:INPut? might return :BUS:B1:SPI:MOSi:INPut HIGH,

indicating the source is set to channel 5.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:THReshold
This command sets or queries the SPI MOSI source thresold for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:THReshold?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the SPI MOSI Data source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:MOSi:THReshold 1.0 sets the Bus 1 SPI MOSI threshold to

1.0 V.
BUS:B1:SPI:MOSi:THReshold? might return
:BUS:B1:SPI:MOSi:THReshold 225.00000E-3, indicates the Bus 1 SPI
MOSI threshold is set to 225.0 mV.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:NUMBer:INputs
This command sets or queries the number of inputs for the specified bus. The
bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option SR-SPI.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:NUMBer:INputs {ONE|TWO}

BUS:B<x>:SPI:NUMBer:INputs?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-163

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

ONE sets the Data Inputs as one.

TWO sets the Data Inputs as two.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:NUMBer:INputs TWO sets the Data Inputs as two.

BUS:B1:SPI:NUMBer:INputs? might return :BUS:B1:SPI:NUMBer:INputs

TWO, indicating that the Data Inputs is two.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:POLarity
This command sets or queries the SPI Slave Select (SS) polarity for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:POLarity {LOW|HIGH}

BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:POLarity?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:SOUrce

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

LOW sets an active low polarity.

HIGH sets an active high polarity.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:SELECT:POLARITY HIGH sets the SPI Slave Select polarity for
the bus B1 to active high.
BUS:B1:SPI:SELECT:POLARITY? might return
BUS:B1:SPI:SELECT:POLARITY HIGH, indicating that the SPI Slave Select
polarity for the bus B1 is set to active high.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the SPI Slave Select (SS) source for the specified
bus. The bus is specified by x.

2-164 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:SOUrce {CH<x>| DCH<x>_D<x>| MATH<x>|

REF<x>| REF<x>_D<x>}
BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:SOUrce?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:POLarity

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CH<x> designates an analog channel as the bus SPI Slave Select source.

DCH<x>_D<x> designates a digital channel as the bus SPI Slave Select source. The
supported digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are 0 to 15.
MATH<x> designates a math waveform as the Slave Select source.

REF<x> designates a reference waveform as the Slave Select source.

REF<x> _D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the clock source

waveform for the specified SPI bus.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:SELECT:SOURCE MATH3 sets the SPI Slave Select source for
the bus B1 to MATH3.
BUS:B1:SPI:SELECT:SOURCE? might return BUS:B1:SPI:SELECT:SOURCE
CH3, indicating that the SPI Slave Select source for the bus B1 is set to CH3.

BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:THReshold
This command sets or queries the SPI Select (SS) source threshold for the
specified bus. The bus is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:THReshold <NR3>

BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:THReshold?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-165

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<NR3> is the SPI Select (SS) source threshold for the specified bus.

Examples BUS:B1:SPI:SELect:THReshold 50.0e-3 sets the threshold to 50.0 mV.

BUS:B1:SPI:SELect:THReshold? might return

BUS:B1:SPI:SELECT:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0, indicating the threshold is set to
0.0 V.

BUS:B<x>:TYPe
This command sets or queries the bus type or standard for the specified bus.
The bus is specified by x. Arguments for a bus type are only available then the
required serial bus option is installed.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:B<x>:TYPe {CAN| I2C| LIN| PARallel| RS232C| SENT| SPI}

BUS:B<x>:TYPe?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CAN specifies a Controller Area Network bus.

I2C specifies the Inter-IC bus.

LIN specifies a Local Interconnect Network bus.

PARallel specifies a parallel bus.

RS232C specifies the RS-232 Serial bus.

SENT specifies the Single Edge Nibble Transmission (SENT) automotive serial
bus.
SPI specifies the Serial Peripheral Interface bus.

Examples BUS:B1:TYPE I2C sets the bus B1 type to I2C.

BUS:B1:TYPE? might return BUS:B1:TYPE SPI, indicating that the bus B1 type
is set to SPI and that the bus behavior is governed by the BUS:B1:SPI:xxxx
commands.

2-166 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:DELete (No Query Form)

This command deletes the specified bus.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:DELete <QString>

Arguments <QString> specifies the bus to delete and is of the form "B<NR1>", where
<NR1> is ≥1.

Examples BUS:DELETE B1 deletes bus B1.

BUS:LIST? (Query Only)

This query returns a comma separated list of all currently defined buses.

Group Bus

Syntax BUS:LIST?

Returns Returns all currently defined buses.

Examples BUS:LIST? might return BUS:LIST B1,B4 indicating the bus 1 and bus 4 are
defined.

BUSTABle:ADDNew (No Query Form)

Adds the specified bus table. Argument is of the form "TABLE<NR1>", where
<NR1> is ≥1).

Group Bus

Syntax BUSTABle:ADDNew <QString>

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the name of the new bus table.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-167

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples BUSTABLE:ADDNEW "Table1" adds bus table Table1.

BUSTABle:DELete (No Query Form)

Deletes the specified bus table. Argument is of the form "TABLE<NR1>", where
<NR1> is ≥1).

Group Bus

Syntax BUSTABle:DELete <QString>

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the name of the bus table to delete.

Examples BUSTABLE:DELETE "Table1" deletes bus table Table1.

BUSTABle:LIST? (Query Only)

This query lists all currently defined bus tables.

Group Bus

Syntax BUSTABle:LIST?

Returns Returns a list of all currently defined bus tables.

Examples BUSTABLE:LIST? might return BUSTABLE:LIST TABLE1 indicating TABLE1

is currently the only defined bus table.

BUSY? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the status of the instrument. This command
allows you to synchronize the operation of the instrument with your application
program.

Group Status and Error

2-168 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax BUSY?

Related Commands *OPC

*WAI

Returns <NR1> = 0 means that the instrument is not busy processing a command whose
execution time is extensive.
<NR1> = 1 means that the instrument is busy processing Commands that Generate
an OPC Message(See Table 3-3.).

Examples BUSY? might return BUSY 1, indicating that the instrument is currently busy.

*CAL? (Query Only)

This query-only command starts signal path calibration (SPC) and returns the
status upon completion.

NOTE. When running SPC through the remote interface, calibration status cannot
be obtained until after the SPC completes. SPC takes approximately 5 minutes per
channel which means a total of 20 minutes on an 4-channel model. Any remote
command that performs an action on the instrument is also disabled until the
SPC is complete.

Group Calibration

Syntax *CAL?

Returns 0 indicates SPC passed.

-1 indicates SPC failed or did not complete.

Examples *CAL? starts the signal path calibration and returns the status upon completion.

CALibrate? (Query Only)

This query returns the status of signal path calibration.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-169

Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOTE. When running SPC through the remote interface, calibration status cannot
be obtained until after the SPC completes, which can take several minutes.

Group Calibration

Syntax CALibrate?

Examples CALIBRATE? might return CALIBRATE:INTERNAL:STATUS PASS, indicating

the calibration status.

CALibrate:INTERNal (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) starts the signal path calibration (SPC) of the
instrument. You can use the CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? query to return the
current status of the signal path calibration of the instrument.

NOTE. When running SPC through the remote interface, calibration status cannot
be obtained until after the SPC completes. SPC takes approximately 5 minutes per
channel which means a total of 20 minutes on an 4-channel model. Any remote
command that performs an action on the instrument is also disabled until the
SPC is complete.

Group Calibration

Syntax CALibrate:INTERNal

Related Commands CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus?

Examples CALIBRATE:INTERNAL starts the signal path calibration of the instrument.

CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) starts the signal path calibration (SPC) of the
analog channels. This command is the same as the CALibrate:INTERNal
command. You can use the CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? query to return the
current status of the signal path calibration of the instrument.

2-170 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOTE. When running SPC through the remote interface, calibration status cannot
be obtained until after the SPC completes. SPC takes approximately 5 minutes per
channel which means a total of 20 minutes on an 4-channel model. Any remote
command that performs an action on the instrument is also disabled until the
SPC is complete.

Group Calibration

Syntax CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt

Related Commands CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus?

Examples CALIBRATE:INTERNAL:START starts the signal path calibration.

CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the current status of the signal path calibration.

NOTE. When running SPC through the remote interface, calibration status cannot
be obtained until after the SPC completes. SPC takes approximately 15 minutes
per channel which means a total of 2 hours on an 8-channel model. Any remote
command that performs an action on the instrument is also disabled until the
SPC is complete.

Group Calibration

Syntax CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus?

Related Commands *CAL?

Returns This query will return one of the following:

INIT indicates the instrument has not had signal path calibration run. The
instrument may need to be readjusted at the Tektronix service center.
PASS indicates that the signal path calibration completed successfully.

FAIL indicates that the signal path calibration did not complete successfully.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-171

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples CALIBRATE:INTERNAL:STATUS? might return PASS, indicating that the current

status of the signal path calibration is that the signal path calibration completed
successfully.

CALibrate:PWRUpstatus? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the current status of the power-up calibration.

Group Calibration

Syntax CALibrate:PWRUpstatus?

Returns This query will return one of the following:

0 Indicating the power-up calibration failed.
1 Indicating the power-up calibration passed.

Examples CALIBRATE:PWRUPSTATUS? might return 0, indicating that the power-up

calibration failed.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x> (No Query Form)

This command creates a new note. A Note is the default callout value. The callout
number is specified by x.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1 creates a new Note callout specified as callout1.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:BOOKMark:SOURCE
This command sets or queries the source of the Bookmark callout type.

Group Callouts

2-172 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:BOOKMark:SOURCE {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4}

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:BOOKMark:SOURCE?

Arguments CH1 specifies the bookmark callout source as Ch1.

CH2 specifies the bookmark callout source as Ch2.

CH3 specifies the bookmark callout source as Ch3.

CH4 specifies the bookmark callout source as Ch4.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:BOOKMark:SOURCE CH2 sets the bookmark callout

source as Ch2 for callout1.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:BOOKMark:SOURCE?, might return "CH1", indicating
that the bookmark callout source is Ch1.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:BOOKMark:XPOS
This command sets or queries the X-Position of the Bookmark callout type.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:BOOKMark:XPOS <NR1>

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:BOOKMark:XPOS?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the location of the bookmark linked to the source waveform
in X-axis.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:BOOKMark:XPOS 9.28μs sets the bookmark callout

X-Position to 9.28 μs for callout1.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:BOOKMark:XPOS?, might return "9.28 μs", indicating
the bookmark callout X-Position is 9.28 μs.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:COLOR
This command sets or queries the text color of the callout.

Group Callouts

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-173

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:COLOR <QString>

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:COLOR?

Arguments <QString> specifies the callout text color using hexadecimal color values.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:COLOR "#FF0000" sets the text color of callout 1 to red.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:COLOR?, might return "#FF0000", indicating the text

color is red.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:DISPLAYPOSition:X
This command sets or queries horizontal display position of the callout text.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:DISPLAYPOSition:X <NR1>

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:DISPLAYPOSition:X?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the callout horizontal display position.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:DISPLAYPOSition:X 50 sets the callout text in the

center on the horizontal axis of the display on the scopeapp.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:DISPLAYPOSition:X?, might return "50", indicating
the callout text is in the center on the horizontal axis of the display on the scopeapp

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:DISPLAYPOSition:Y
This command sets or queries vertical display position of the callout text.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:DISPLAYPOSition:Y <NR1>

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:DISPLAYPOSition:Y?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the callout vertical display position.

2-174 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:DISPLAYPOSition:Y 50 sets the callout text in the

center on the vertical axis of the display on the scopeapp.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:DISPLAYPOSition:Y?, might return "50", indicating
the callout text is in the center on the vertical axis of the display on the scopeapp

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:BOLD
This command sets or queries the bold state of the callout text.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:BOLD {1|0}

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:BOLD?

Arguments 1 specifies the callout font weight as bold.

0 specifies the callout font weight as normal.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:FONT:BOLD 1 sets the font weight of callout1 to bold.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:FONT:BOLD?, might return "0", indicating the font

weight is set to normal.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:ITALIC
This command sets or queries the italic state of the callout text.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:ITALIC {1|0}

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:ITALIC?

Arguments 1 specifies the callout font style as italic.

0 does not specify the font style as italic.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:FONT:ITALIC 1 sets the font style of callout1 to italic.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:FONT:ITALIC?, might return "0", indicating the font

style is not italic.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-175

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:SIZE
This command sets or queries the font size of the callout text.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:SIZE <NR1>

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:SIZE?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the font size in points.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:FONT:SIZE 11 sets the font size of callout1 to 11 points.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:FONT:SIZE?, might return "14", indicating the font

size is 14 points.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:TYPE
This command sets or queries type of the callout.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:TYPE <QString>

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:TYPE?

Arguments <QString> specifies the type of font for the callout text. The available font
types include: DejaVu Sans, DejaVu Sans Mono, DejaVu Serif, Frutiger LT Std,
Monospace, Sans Serif, Serif, Ubuntu, Ubuntu Condensed, and Ubuntu Mono.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:FONT:TYPE "Serif" sets the font type of callout1 to

serif.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:FONT:TYPE?, might return "Monospace", indicating the
font type is monospace.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:UNDERLine
This command sets or queries the underline state of the callout text.

Group Callouts

2-176 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:UNDERLine {1|0}

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:UNDERLine?

Arguments 1 underlines the callout text.

0 does not underline the callout text.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:FONT:UNDERLine 1 displays the text of callout 1 as

underlined.
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:FONT:UNDERLine?, might return "0", indicating the
callout text is not underlined.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:TEXT
This command sets or queries the callout text.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:TEXT <QString>

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:TEXT?

Arguments <QString> specifies the callout text.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:TEXT "Review measurements" sets the text for

callout 1 as "Review measurements".
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:TEXT?, might return "Review measurements",
indicating the text for callout 1 is "Review measurements".

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:TYPE
This command sets or queries type of the callout.

Group Callouts

Syntax CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:TYPE {NOTE|ARROW|RECTANGLE|BOOKMARK}

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:TYPE?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-177

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments NOTE specifies callout type as note.

ARROW specifies callout type as arrow.

RECTANGLE specifies callout type as rectangle.

BOOKMARK specifies callout type as bookmark.

Examples CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:TYPE NOTE sets the callout type of callout1 to note.

CALLOUTS:CALLOUT1:TYPE?, might return "ARROW", indicating the callout

type is arrow.

CH<x>? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the vertical parameters for the specified
channel. The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>?

Examples CH1? might return the following vertical parameters for channel 1:
CH1:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+09;COUPLING DC;DESKEW0.0000E+00;OFFSET
0.0000E+00;POSITION 0.0000E+00;SCALE 5.0000E-01;RESISTANCE
1.0000E+06;UNITS "V";ID:TYPE "1X";SERNUMBER
"N/A";:CH1:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN 1.0000E+00;EXTUNITS
"None";:CH1:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS 5.

CH<x>:BANdwidth
This command sets or queries the selectable low-pass bandwidth limit filter of
the specified channel. The channel is specified by x.
The query form of this command always returns the approximate realized
bandwidth of the channel.
Available arguments depend upon the instrument and the attached accessories.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:BANdwidth {<NR3>|FULl}

CH<x>:BANdwidth?

2-178 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> is the desired bandwidth. The instrument rounds this value to an available
bandwidth using geometric rounding and then uses this value to set the upper
bandwidth.
FULl disables any optional bandwidth limiting. The specified channel operates at
its maximum bandwidth.

Examples CH1:BANDWIDTH 20 sets the bandwidth of Channel 1 to 20 MHz.

CH2:BANDWIDTH?, might return :CH2:BANDWIDTH 500.0000E+06, indicating

that there is bandwidth limiting on Channel 2.

CH<x>:CLIPping? (Query Only)

Queries whether the specified channel’s input signal is clipping (exceeding) the
channel A/D converter range. The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:CLIPping?

Related Commands CH<x>:SCAle

CH<x>:POSition

Returns This query will return one of the following:

0 indicates the channel is not clipping.

1 indicates the channel is clipping.

Examples CH4:CLIPping? might return CH4:CLIPping? 1, indicating that the input

signal range is exceeding (clipping) the channel 4 A/D converter range.

CH<x>:COUPling
This command sets or queries the input coupling setting for the specified analog
channel. The channel is specified by x.

NOTE. The available arguments depend on the attached accessories.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-179

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:COUPling {AC|DC|DCREJ}

CH<x>:COUPling?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

AC sets the specified channel to AC coupling.

DC sets the specified channel to DC coupling.

DCREJect sets DC Reject coupling when probes are attached that support that
feature.

Examples CH2:COUPLING AC sets Channel 2 coupling to AC.

CH3:COUPLING? might return :CH3:COUPLING DC, indicating that Channel 3

is set to DC coupling.

CH<x>:DESKew
This command sets or queries the horizontal deskew time for the specified
channel. The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:DESKew <NR3>

CH<x>:DESKew?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> is the deskew time for this channel, ranging from -125 ns to +125 ns with a
resolution of 40 ps. Out-of-range values are clipped.

Examples CH4:DESKEW 5.0E-9 sets the deskew time for Channel 4 to 5 ns.

CH2:DESKEW? might return CH2:DESKEW 2.0000E-09, indicating that the

deskew time for Channel 2 is set to 2 ns.

2-180 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH<x>:DITHERrange
This command sets or returns the amount of dithering for the specified analog
channel. The channel is specified by x. The amount of dithering is a percentage
of full scale (10 times volts/division).
Note: Setting this value to 0.0 for any unused channels may slightly improve
performance.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:DITHERrange <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> is the amount of dithering as a percentage of full scale. Must be between
0.0 and 100.0 and 0.0 disables dithering.

Examples CH1:DITHERrange 10 sets the amount of dithering as a percentage of full scale

to 10.
CH1:DITHERrange? might return CH1:DITHERrange 10, which if vertical
scale is 1V/div then the dithering amplitude will be 1 Vpk-pk.

CH<x>:INVert
This command sets or queries invert state of the specified channel. The channel
is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:INVert {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

CH<x>:INVert?

Arguments OFF turns off the channel invert.

ON turns on the channel invert.

<NR1> 0 turns off the channel invert; any other value turns on the channel invert.

Examples CH2:INVert OFF turns off the invert on channel 2.

CH2:INVert? might return CH2:INVert 1, indicating channel 2 is inverted.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-181

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH<x>:LABel:COLor
This command sets or queries the color of the specified channel label. The
channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:LABel:COLor <QString>

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<QString> is the label color. To return the color to the default color, send an
empty string as in this example: CH5:LABEL:COLOR "".

Examples CH2:LABel:COLor "#FFFF00" sets the label color to yellow.

CH2:LABel:COLor? might return CH2:LABEL:COLOR "#FF0000" indicating

the color is red.

CH<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD
This command sets or queries the bold state of the specified channel label. The
channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

OFF argument turns off bold font.

ON argument turns on bold font.

<NR1> = 0 turns off bold font; any other value turns on bold font.

Examples CH2:LABel:FONT:BOLD OFF turns off the bold font.

CH2:LABel:FONT:BOLD? might return CH2:LABEL:FONT:BOLD 1 indicating a

bold font.

2-182 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic
This command sets or queries the italic state of the specified channel label. The
channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

OFF argument turns off italic font.

ON argument turns on italic font.

<NR1> = 0 turns off italic font; any other value turns on italic font.

Examples CH2:LABel:FONT:ITALic ON set the font to italic.

CH2:LABel:FONT:ITALic? might return CH2:LABEL:FONT:ITALIC 0

indicating the font is not italic.

CH<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE
This command sets or queries the font size of the specified channel label. The
channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE <NR1>

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR1> is the font size.

Examples CH2:LABel:FONT:SIZE 16 sets the font size to 16 point size.

CH2:LABel:FONT:SIZE? might return CH2:LABEL:FONT:SIZE 20 indicating

a 20 point font size.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-183

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE
This command sets or queries the font type of the specified channel label, such as
Arial or Times New Roman. The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE <QString>

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<QString> is the specified font type.

Examples CH2:LABel:FONT:TYPE "Monospace" sets the font to a mono space font.

CH2:LABel:FONT:TYPE? might return CH2:LABEL:FONT:TYPE "Frutiger

LT Std 55 Roman".

CH<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline
This command sets or queries the underline state of the specified channel label.
The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

OFF argument turns off underlined font.

ON argument turns on underlined font.

<NR1> = 0 turns off underlined font; any other value turns on underlined font.

Examples CH2:LABel:FONT:UNDERline ON sets the font to underlined.

CH2:LABel:FONT:UNDERline? might return CH2:LABEL:FONT:UNDERLINE

0 indicating the font is not underlined.

2-184 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH<x>:LABel:NAMe
This command sets or queries the label attached to the displayed waveform for
the specified channel. The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:LABel:NAMe <QString>

CH<x>:LABel:NAMe?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<QString> is an alphanumeric character string, ranging from 1 through 32

characters in length.

Examples CH2:LABEL:NAME "Pressure" changes the waveform label for the Channel 2
waveform to “Pressure”.
CH3:LABEL:NAME? might return CH3:LABEL:NAME "Force", indicating that
the waveform label for the Channel 3 waveform is “Force”.

CH<x>:LABel:XPOS
This command sets or queries the X-position of the specified channel label. The
channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:LABel:XPOS <NR3>

CH<x>:LABel:XPOS?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> is the location (in pixels) where the waveform label for the selected
channel is displayed, relative to the left edge of the screen.

Examples CH3:LABEL:XPOS 5 moves the waveform label for Channel 3 so that it begins
5 pixels to the right of the left edge of the screen.
CH2:LABEL:XPOS? might return CH2:LABEL:XPOS 5, indicating that the
waveform label for the Channel 2 currently 5 pixels to the right of the left edge
of the screen.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-185

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH<x>:LABel:YPOS
This command sets or queries the Y-position of the specified channel label. The
channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:LABel:YPOS <NR3>

CH<x>:LABel:YPOS?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> is the location (in pixels) where the waveform label for the selected
channel is displayed, relative to the baseline of the waveform. Positive values are
above the baseline and negative values are below.

Examples CH3:LABEl:YPOS -20 moves the waveform label for the Channel 3 20 pixels
below the baseline of the waveform.
CH2:LABEl:YPOS? might return CH2:LABEL:YPOS 0, indicating that the
waveform label for the Channel 2 is currently located at the baseline of the
waveform.

CH<x>:OFFSet
This command sets or queries the vertical offset for the specified analog channel.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:OFFSet <NR3>

CH<x>:OFFSet?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> is the offset value for the specified channel.

Examples CH3:OFFSET 2.0E-3 sets the offset for Channel 3 to 2 mV.

CH4:OFFSET? might return :CH4:OFFSET 1.0000E-03, indicating that the

offset for Channel 4 is set to 1 mV.

2-186 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH<x>:POSition
This command sets or queries the vertical position for the specified analog channel.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:POSition <NR1>

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR1> is the vertical position for the specified analog channel.

Examples CH2:POSition -2.0 sets the position to -2 divisions.

CH2:POSition? might return CH2:POSITION -2.2400 indicating the position

is -2.24 divisions.

CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten
This command is used to specify the attenuation value as a multiplier to the given
scale factor on the specified channel. The channel is specified by x.
The query form of this command returns the user-specified attenuation.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten <NR3>

CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten?

Related Commands CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> is the attenuation value, which is specified as a multiplier in the range

from 1.00E-10 to 1.00E+10.

Examples CH1:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN 167.00E-3 specifies an external attenuation,

which is connected between the your input signal and the input of the probe
attached to Channel 1.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-187

Commands listed in alphabetical order

CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN? might return CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN

1.0000E+00, indicating that the probe attached to Channel 2 is connected
directly to the user's signal.

CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten
This command sets or queries the input-output ratio (expressed in decibel units) of
external attenuation or gain between the signal and the instrument input channels.
The channel is specified by x.
The query form of this command returns the user-specified attenuation in decibels.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten <NR3>

CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten?

Related Commands CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> is the attenuation value, which is specified in the range from -200.00 dB
to 200.00 dB.

Examples CH3:PROBEFUNC:EXTDBATTEN 2.5 specifies an external 2.5 dB attenuator

on Channel 3.
CH1:PROBEFUNC:EXTDBATTEN? might return CH1:PROBEFUNC:EXTDBATTEEN
2.5000E+00, indicating that the attenuation for Channel 1 is 2.5 dB.

CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits
This command Sets or queries the units of the specified channel. The
channel is specified by x. This command can only be set to "V" or "A",
which corresponds to selecting a voltage or current probe respectively.
The CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits command can only select "V" if the
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits:STATE is disabled (set to 0).

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits <QString>

CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits?

2-188 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<QString> a quoted string that indicates the units of the specified channel. Only
units "V" or "A" are supported. This command is case sensitive.

Examples CH4:PROBEFUNC:EXTUNITS "V" sets the unit of measurement for the Channel
4 to Volts.
CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTUNITS? might return :CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTUNITS "V",
indicating that the unit of measurement for Channel 2 is Volts.

CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits:STATE
This command sets or queries measure current status as ON or OFF. The channel is
specified by x. If this command is set, the vertical scale is set to “A”, as it implies
that the unit is measuring current from a voltage probe. When it is unset, the
vertical scale is set to the value of CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits ("V" or "A").

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

OFF argument turns current status off.

ON argument turns current status on.

<NR1> = 0 turns current status off; any other value turns current status on.

Examples CH2:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits:STATE ON sets the CH2 measure current status

to on.
CH2:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits:STATE? might return
CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTUNITS:STATE 0 indicating that CH2 current status is off.

CH<x>:SCAle
This command sets or returns the vertical scale for the specified analog channel.
The channel is specified by x.

Group Vertical

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-189

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax CH<x>:SCAle <NR3>

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> is the vertical scale for the specified analog channel.

Examples CH2:SCAle 200E-3 sets the scale to 200 mV per division.

CH2:SCAle? might return CH2:SCALE 500.0000E-3 indicating the vertical

scale for the specified channel is 500 mV per division.

CH<x>:SCALERATio
This command sets or returns the scale ratio for the specified analog channel.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:SCALERATio <NR2>

CH<x>:SCALERATio?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR2> is the scale ratio for the specified analog channel.

Examples CH2:SCALERATio 2.0 sets the scale ratio to 2.0.

CH2:SCALERATio? might return CH2:SCALERATIO 1.0000 indicating the

scale ratio is 1.0.

CH<x>:TERmination
This command sets or queries the vertical termination for the specified analog
channel. The channel is specified by x.

NOTE. The available arguments depend on the instrument model and the attached
accessories.

Group Vertical

2-190 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax CH<x>:TERmination <NR3>

CH<x>:TERmination?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR3> specifies the channel input resistance, which can be specified as 50 Ω or

1,000,000 Ω.

Examples CH4:TERMINATION 50.0E+0 establishes 50 Ω impedance on Channel 1.

CH2:TERMINATION? might return CH2:TERMINATION 50.0E+0, indicating that

Channel 2 is set to 50 Ω impedance.

CH<x>:VTERm:BIAS
Sets or queries the termination bias voltage for the specified channel (if control
is available).

Conditions Requires a probe with dual inputs.

Group Vertical

Syntax CH<x>:VTERm:BIAS <NR3>

CH<x>:VTERm:BIAS?

Arguments CH<x> is the channel number.

<NR> is the termination voltage.

Examples CH1:VTERm:BIAS 1.5 sets the termination bias voltage on channel 1 to 1.5 Volts

CH2:VTERm:BIAS? might return CH2:VTERm:BIAS 0.0000, indicating that the

termination bias voltage for channel 2 is set to 0 volts.

CLEAR (No Query Form)

This command clears acquisitions, measurements, and waveforms.

Group Miscellaneous

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-191

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax CLEAR

Examples CLEAR clears all acquisitions, measurements, and waveforms.

*CLS (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) clears the following:
Event Queue
Standard Event Status Register
Status Byte Register (except the MAV bit)
If the *CLS command immediately follows an <EOI>, the Output Queue and
MAV bit (Status Byte Register bit 4) are also cleared. MAV indicates that
information is in the output queue. The device clear (DCL) control message
will clear the output queue and thus MAV. *CLS does not clear the output queue
or MAV.
*CLS can suppress a Service Request that is to be generated by an *OPC. This
will happen if a single sequence acquisition operation is still being processed
when the *CLS command is executed.

Group Status and Error

Syntax *CLS

Related Commands DESE

*ESE
*ESR?
EVENT?
EVMsg?
*SRE
*STB?

Examples *CLS clears the instrument status data structures.

2-192 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

CONFIGuration:ANALOg:BANDWidth? (Query Only)

This command queries the maximum licensed bandwidth of the instrument.

Group Vertical

Syntax CONFIGuration:ANALOg:BANDWidth?

Returns The maximum licensed bandwidth of the instrument is returned.

Examples CONFIGuration:ANALOg:BANDWidth? might return

CONFIGURATION:ANALOG:BANDWIDTH 2.0000E+9 indicating the
bandwidth is 2.0 GHz.

CONNected:REQUested:STATus (No Query Form)

This command sets the status of the Connected Scope Preference feature. After
issuing the status command, the CONNected:SAVEPREferences command
should be set immediately to make the feature enabled. On the instrument,
the feature is found in Utility > User Preferences > Other > Connected Scope
Preferences.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax CONNected:REQUested:STATus <NR1>

Arguments <NR1> enables or disables the Connected Scope Preference feature. The argument
can be either 1 or 0. Setting 1 will enable the feature.

Examples CONNected:REQUested:STATus 1 CONNected:SAVEPREferences enables

and saves Connected Scope Preference feature.

CONNected:STATus? (Query Only)

This query command returns the status of the Connected Scope Preference feature.
On the instrument, the feature is found in Utility > User Preferences > Other >
Connected Scope Preferences.

Group Miscellaneous

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-193

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax CONNected:STATus?

Returns This command returns either 1 or 0. A return value of 1 means the feature is
enabled and 0 means the feature is disabled.

Examples CONNected:STATus? might return :CONNected:STATus 1, indicating the

Connected Scope Preference feature is enabled.

CONNected:USAGe:TRack:REQUested:STATus (No Query Form)

This command sets the tracking usage status of the Connected Scope Preference
feature. After issuing the status command, the CONNected:SAVEPREferences
command should be set immediately to make the feature enabled. On the
instrument, the feature is found in Utility > User Preferences > Other > Connected
Scope Preferences.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax CONNected:USAGe:TRack:REQUested:STATus<NR1>

Arguments <NR1> enables or disables the Connected Scope Preference feature. The argument
can be either 1 or 0. Setting 1 will enable the tracking usage status of the
Connected Scope Preference feature.

Examples CONNected:USAGe:TRack:REQUested:STATus 1
CONNected:SAVEPREferences enables and saves the tracking usage status of
the Connected Scope Preference feature.

CONNected:USAGe:TRack:STATus? (Query Only)

This query command returns the tracking usage status of the Connected Scope
Preference feature. On the instrument, the feature is found in Utility > User
Preferences > Other > Connected Scope Preferences.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax CONNected:USAGe:TRack:STATus?

2-194 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Returns This command returns either 1 or 0. A return value of 1 means the feature is
enabled and 0 means the feature is disabled.

Examples CONNected:USAGe:TRack:STATus? might return

:CONNected:USAGe:TRack:STATus 1, indicating the tracking usage status of
the Connected Scope Preference feature is enabled.

CURVe? (Query Only)

This command transfers waveform data from the instrument. Each waveform that
is transferred has an associated waveform preamble that contains information
such as data format and scale.
The CURVe? query transfers data from the instrument. The data source is specified
by the DATa:SOUrce command. The first and last data points are specified by the
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.
For MATH sources, only 8-byte double precision floating point data is returned in
:CURVe? queries.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax CURVe?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

DATa:STARt
DATa:STOP
SAVe:WAVEform
SAVEON:WAVEform:FILEFormat
WFMOutpre?

Returns CH<x>_SV_NORMal, CH<x>_SV_AVErage, CH<x>_SV_MAXHold,

CH<x>_SV_MINHold: When DATa:SOUrce is set to one of these traces, the data
points represent the amplitude of the Spectrum View frequency domain traces in
the current units, and are floating point values. The frequency domain trace data is
returned as 8-byte floating point values.
CH<x>_SV_AMPlitude, CH<x>_SV_FREQuency, CH<x>_SV_PHASe: When
DATa:SOUrce is set to one of these traces, the data points are the Magnitude
vs. Time, Frequency vs. Time, or Phase vs. Time representations of the RF

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-195

Commands listed in alphabetical order

input signal (Spectrum View) time domain traces. The RF time domain traces
are returned as floating point values.
CH<x>_FREQ_vs_time is the frequency in Hz.

CH<x>_PHASE_vs_time is the phase in degrees.

CH<x>_MAG_vs_time is the magnitude in Volts.

CH<x>_SV_BASEband_IQ is the Spectrum View RF baseband IQ traces. When

DATa:SOUrce is set to one of these traces, the data points represent the digitizing
levels of the IQ data. The IQ data is formatted as pairs of integer values (i.e.
<I>,<Q>,<I>,<Q>,...)

Examples CURVE? with ASCII encoding, start and stop of 1 and 10 respectively, and a width
set to 1 might return :CURVE 61,62,61,60,60,-59,-59,-58,-58,-59

NOTE. Curve data is transferred from the instrument asynchronously and,

depending upon the length of the curve record, such transfers can require several
seconds to complete. During this time, the instrument will not respond to user
controls. You can interrupt these asynchronous data transfers by sending a
device clear message to the instrument or by interrupting the query with another
command or query. Verify that curve data is completely transferred.
It is recommended that you follow such queries with an *ESR? query and verify
that the error bit returned and, if set, check the event queue to ascertain the
reason for the error. If the error was caused by an interrupted query, then the
asynchronous data transfer had not completed when the *ESR? query was sent.
In this case, you might need increase your program's time-out value to ensure
that all data is transferred and read.

CURVEStream? (Query Only)

This query-only command continuously transfers waveform data from the
instrument as it is acquired.
This command puts the instrument into a streaming data mode, allowing the
controller to receive waveform records as fast as they are acquired. Use the
DATa:SOUrce command to specify the waveform sources. The command
supports all the same data formatting options as the CURVe? command.

2-196 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Control of the instrument through the user interface or other external clients is
not allowed while in streaming data mode.
The GPIB controller must take the instrument out of this streaming data mode
to terminate the query and allow other input sources to resume communication
with the instrument. The following options are available to transition out of
streaming data mode:
Send a device clear over the bus
Send another command or query to the instrument
Turning the waveform screen display mode off (:DISplay:WAVEform OFF)
may increase waveform throughput during streaming mode.
Using a data encoding of SRIbinary (DATa:ENCdg SRIbinary) may also
increase the waveform throughput since that is the raw native data format of
the oscilloscope.
While in streaming data mode, two extreme conditions can occur.
If the waveform records are being acquired slowly (high resolution),
configure the controller for a long time-out threshold, as the data is not
sent out until each complete record is acquired.
If the waveform records are being acquired rapidly (low resolution), and
the controller is not reading the data off the bus fast enough, the trigger
rate is slowed to allow each waveform to be sent sequentially.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax CURVEStream?

Related Commands CURVe?

DATa:SOUrce
DATa:STARt
DATa:STOP
DATa:ENCdg
DATa:WIDth
WFMOutpre?

Returns Formatted waveform data, once per acquisition.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-197

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples CURVESTREAM? with ASCII encoding, start and stop of 1 and 10

respectively, and a width set to 1 might return :CURVESTREAM
61,62,61,60,60,-59,-59,-58,-58,-59

NOTE. Curve data is transferred from the instrument asynchronously and,

depending upon the length of the curve record, such transfers can require several
seconds to complete. During this time, the instrument will not respond to user
controls. You can interrupt these asynchronous data transfers by sending a
device clear message to the instrument or by interrupting the query with another
command or query. Verify that curve data is completely transferred.
It is recommended that you follow such queries with an *ESR? query and verify
that the error bit returned and, if set, check the event queue to ascertain the
reason for the error. If the error was caused by an interrupted query, then the
asynchronous data transfer had not completed when the *ESR? query was sent.
In this case, you might need increase your program's time-out value to ensure
that all data is transferred and read.

DATa
This command sets or queries the format and location of the waveform data that is
transferred with the CURVe? command.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax DATa {INIT|SNAp}

DATa?

Related Commands CURVe?

DATa:STARt
DATa:STOP
DATa:ENCdg
SAVEON:WAVEform:FILEFormat
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?

Arguments INIT initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory defaults except for
DATa:STOP, which isset to the current acquisition record length.
SNAp Sets DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP to match the current waveform cursor
positions of WAVEVIEW1 CURSOR1 if these waveform cursors are currently

2-198 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

on. If these waveform cursors are not on when the DATa SNAp command is sent,
it is silently ignored and DATa:STARt and :STOP remain unchanged.
If either of the cursors is outside the record, DATa:STARt and :STOP are set to
nearest values within the record. This will cause DATa:STARt and/or :STOP to
snap to the beginning or end of the record whichever is nearest, and the following
event is set: 500, "Execution warning", "One or both cursors outside of waveform
record".
If there is no acquired waveform for the cursor source, then DATa:STARt and
:STOP remain unchanged and the following event is set: 500, "Execution
warning", "No acquired waveform record".
If DATa:STARt is greater than :STOP, the values of DATa:STARt and STOp are
swapped and the following event is set: 530, "Data start > stop, Values swapped
internally".

Examples DATA INIT initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory defaults.

DATA? might return DATA:ENCDG RIBINARY;SOURCE CH1;START 1;STOP

1000;FRAMESTART 1;FRAMESTOP 1000.

DATa:ENCdg
This command sets or queries the format of outgoing waveform data. This
command is equivalent to setting WFMOutpre:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt,
and WFMOutpre:BYT_Or. Setting the DATa:ENGdg value causes the
corresponding WFMOutpre values to be updated and vice versa.

NOTE. Values are constrained (for outbound data) to the format of the data
specified by DATa:SOUrce.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax DATa:ENCdg {ASCIi| RIBinary| RPBinary| FPBinary| SRIbinary|

SRPbinary| SFPbinary}
DATa:ENCdg?

Related Commands WFMOutpre:ENCdg

WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-199

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ASCIi specifies the ASCII representation of signed INT, FLOAT. If ASCII is
the value, then :BN_Fmt and :BYT_Or are ignored.
RIBinary specifies the positive integer data-point representation, with the
most significant byte transferred first.
When :BYT_Nr is 1, the range from 0 through 255. When :BYT_Nr is 2,the
range is from 0 to 65,535. When :BYT_Nr is 4, then the waveform being
queried would return Fast Acquisition Pixmap data (if fast acq is turned on
and data mode is set to pixmap).
RPBinary specifies the positive integer data-point representation, with the
most significant byte transferred first.
When :BYT_Nr is 1, the range from 0 through 255. When :BYT_Nr is 2,
the range is from 0 to 65,535.
FPBinary specifies the floating point (width = 4) data.

The range is from –3.4 × 1038 to 3.4 × 1038. The center of the screen is 0.
The upper limit is the top of the screen and the lower limit is the bottom of
the screen.
The FPBinary argument is only applicable to math waveforms or ref
waveforms saved from math waveforms.
SRIbinary is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is swapped,
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful
when transferring data to IBM compatible PCs.
SRPbinary is the same as RPBinary except that the byte order is swapped,
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful
when transferring data to PCs.
SFPbinary specifies floating point data in IBM PC format. The SFPbinary
argument only works on math waveforms or ref waveforms saved from math
waveforms.

Table 2-47: DATa and WFMOutpre Parameter Settings

WFMOutpre Settings
DATa:ENCdg Setting :ENCdg :BN_Fmt :BYT_Or :BYT_NR
ASCii ASC N/A N/A 1,2,4
RIBinary BIN RI MSB 1,2
RPBinary ASC RP MSB 1,2
FPBinary BIN FP MSB 4
SRIbinary BIN RI LSB 1,2
SRPbinary BIN RP LSB 1,2
SFPbinary BIN FP LSB 4

2-200 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DATA:ENCDG RPBinary sets the data encoding format to be a positive integer
data-point representation, where the most significant byte is transferred first.
DATA:ENCDG? might return DATa:ENCDG SRPBINARY for the format of the
outgoing waveform data.

DATA:MODe
This command sets or queries the mode for waveform data sent to returned by
CURVe?. When the data mode is set as VECtor then you get the waveform
sampled data. The Data width is reset to 1 or 2 instead of 4.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax DATA:MODe {VECtor|PIXmap}

DATA:MODe ?

Arguments VECtor sets the mode for waveform data to vector.

PIXmap sets the mode for waveform data to pixmap.

Examples DATA:MODE VECtor sets the mode for waveform data to vector.

DATA:MODE ? might return :DATa:MODe VECtor, indicating that the mode for
waveform data is set to vector.

DATa:RESample
This command sets or queries the resampling of outgoing waveform data.
This command is equivalent to setting WFMOutpre:RESample. Setting the
DATa:RESample value causes the corresponding WFMOutpre value to be
updated and vice versa.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax DATa:RESample <NR1>

DATa:RESample?

Related Commands WFMOutpre:RESample

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-201

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR1> is the resampling rate. The default value is 1, which means every sample
is returned. A value of 2 returns every other sample, while a value of 3 returns
every third sample, and so on.

Examples DATA:RESAMPLE 1 sets the resampling to return all waveform data samples.

DATA:RESAMPLE? might return :DATa:RESAMPLE 4, indicating that every forth

sample of the waveform data is returned.

DATa:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the location of waveform data that is transferred
from the instrument by the CURVe?? Query.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax DATa:SOUrce {CH<x>| DCH<x>_D<x>| MATH<x>| REF<x>}

DATa:SOUrce?

Related Commands CURVe?

DATa

Arguments CH<x> selects the specified analog channel as the source.

DCH<x>_D<x> specifies the digital channel as the source. The supported digital
channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are 0 to 15 and ALL (all
digital bits).
MATH<x> selects the specified reference waveform as the source. The reference
number is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4.
REF<x> selects the specified reference waveform as the source. The reference
number is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.

Examples DATA:SOURCE CH1 specifies that the CH1 waveforms will be transferred in the
next CURVe? query.
DATA:SOURCE? might return DATA:SOURCE REF3, indicating that the source for
the waveform data which is transferred using a CURVe? query is reference 3.

2-202 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DATa:SOUrce:AVAILable? (Query Only)

This query returns a list of enumerations representing the source waveforms that
are currently available for :CURVe? queries. This means that the waveforms have
been acquired. If there are none, NONE is returned.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax DATa:SOUrce:AVAILable?

Related Commands CURVe?

Returns Returns a list of source waveforms that are currently available for :CURVe?
queries.

Examples DATA:SOURCE:AVAILABLE? might return DATA:SOURCE:AVAILABLE

CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, DCH1_DALL, DCH1_D0, DCH1_D1, DCH1_D2,
DCH1_D3, DCH1_D4, DCH1_D5, DCH1_D6, DCH1_D7, DCH1_D8,
DCH1_D9, DCH1_D10, DCH1_D11, DCH1_D12, DCH1_D13, DCH1_D14,
DCH1_D15, MATH1 indicating that CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, DCH1_DALL,
DCH1_D0, DCH1_D1, DCH1_D2, DCH1_D3, DCH1_D4, DCH1_D5,
DCH1_D6, DCH1_D7, DCH1_D8, DCH1_D9, DCH1_D10, DCH1_D11,
DCH1_D12, DCH1_D13, DCH1_D14, DCH1_D15, and MATH1 are available.

DATa:STARt
This command sets or queries the starting data point for waveform transfer. This
command allows for the transfer of partial waveforms to and from the instrument.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax DATa:STARt <NR1>

DATa:STARt?

Related Commands CURVe?

DATa
DATa:STOP
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-203

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR1> is the first data point that will be transferred, which ranges from 1 to the
record length. Data will be transferred from <NR1> to DATa:STOP or the record
length, whichever is less. If <NR1> is greater than the record length, the last
data point in the record is transferred.
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP are order independent. When DATa:STOP is
greater than DATa:STARt, the values will be swapped internally for the CURVE?
query.

Examples DATA:START 10 specifies that the waveform transfer will begin with data point 10.

DATA:START? might return DATA:START 214, indicating that data point 214 is
the first waveform data point that will be transferred.

DATa:STOP
This command sets or queries the last data point that will be transferred when
using the CURVe?? query. This command allows for the transfer of partial
waveforms to the controller.
Changes to the record length value are not automatically reflected in the data:stop
value. As record length is varied, the DATa:STOP value must be explicitly changed
to ensure the entire record is transmitted. In other words, curve results will not
automatically and correctly reflect increases in record length if the distance from
DATa:STARt to DATa:STOP stays smaller than the increased record length.

NOTE. When using the CURVe? command, DATa:STOP is ignored.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax DATa:STOP <NR1>

DATa:STOP?

Related Commands CURVe?

DATa
DATa:STARt
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?

Arguments <NR1> is the last data point that will be transferred, which ranges from 1 to
the record length. If <NR1> is greater than the record length, then data will be
transferred up to the record length. If both DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP are
greater than the record length, the last data point in the record is returned.

2-204 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP are order independent. When DATa:STOP is less

than DATa:STARt, the values will be swapped internally for the CURVE? query.
If you always want to transfer complete waveforms, set DATa:STARt to 1 and
DATa:STOP to the maximum record length, or larger.

Examples DATA:STOP 15000 specifies that the waveform transfer will stop at data point
15000.
DATA:STOP? might return DATA:STOP 14900, indicating that 14900 is the last
waveform data point that will be transferred.

DATa:WIDth
This command specifies the width, in bytes per point, for waveform data
transferred from the instrument via the CURVe? query. (This command is
synonymous with WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr.)

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax DATa:WIDth <NR1>

DATa:WIDth?

Related Commands WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr

Arguments <NR1> is an integer that indicates the number of bytes per point for the outgoing
waveform data when queried using the CURVe? command. For analog channels,
NR1 can be 1 or 2.

Examples DATA:WIDTH 1 sets the data width to 1 byte.

DATA:WIDTH? might return DATA:WIDTH 1 indicating the width, in bytes per

point, for waveform data transferred bya the CURVE? query is 1 byte.

DATE? (Query Only)

This command queries the date that the instrument displays.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax DATE?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-205

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands TIMe

Returns <QString> is a date in the form “yyyy-mm-dd” where yyyy refers to a four-digit
year number, mm refers to a two-digit month number from 01 to 12, and dd refers
to a two-digit day number in the month.

Examples DATE? might return DATE 2000-01-24, indicating the current date is set to
January 24, 2000.

DCH<x>:D<x>:THReshold
This command sets or queries the threshold level in volts for the specified digital
channel. If the source channel doesn't exist, a hardware missing error event is set.

Group Digital

Syntax DCH<x>:D<x>:THReshold <NR3>

DCH<x>:D<x>:THReshold?

Arguments DCH<x> specifies the digital channel. The supported value is 1.

D<x> specifies the digital bits. The supported values are 0 to 15. 0 to 7 have
common a threshold and 8 to 15 have a common threshold.
<NR3> specifies the threshold level in volts for the specified digital channel. The
minimum value is -20 V and the maximum value is 30.0 V.

Examples DCH1:D1:THRESHOLD 30.0 sets the threshold to 30.0 V.

DCH1:D1:THRESHOLD? might return :DCH1:D1:THRESHOLD 0.0 indicating

the threshold is set to 0.0 V.

DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:COLor
This command sets or queries the color of the label of the specified digital bit.

Group Digital

Syntax DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:COLor <QString>

DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:COLor?

2-206 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments DCH<x> specifies the digital channel. The supported value is 1.

D<x> specifies the digital bits. The supported values are 0 to 15.

<QString> is the label color. To return the color to the default color, send an
empty string as in this example: :DCH1_D1:LABEL:COLOR "".

Examples DCH1_D1:LABel:COLor "#FF0000" sets the color to red.

DCH1_D1:LABel:COLor? might return :DCH1_D1:LABel:COLor "#FFFF00",

indicating the color is yellow.

DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD
This command sets or queries the bold state of the label of the specified digital bit.

Group Digital

Syntax DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD?

Arguments DCH<x> specifies the digital channel. The supported value is 1.

D<x> specifies the digital bits. The supported values are 0 to 15.

<NR1> = 0 turns off bold font; any other value turns on bold font.

OFF turns off bold font.

ON turns on bold font.

Examples DCH1_D1:LABel:FONT:BOLD ON turns on bold font.

DCH1_D1:LABel:FONT:BOLD? might return :DCH1_D1:LABel:FONT:BOLD 0,

indicating the font is not bold.

DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic
This command sets or queries the italic state of the label of the specified digital bit.

Group Digital

Syntax DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-207

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments DCH<x> specifies the digital channel. The supported value is 1.

D<x> specifies the digital bits. The supported values are 0 to 15.

<NR1> = 0 turns off italic font; any other value turns on italic font.

OFF turns off italic font.

ON turns on italic font.

Examples DCH1_D1:LABel:FONT:ITALic ON turns on italic font.

DCH1_D1:LABel:FONT:ITALic? might return

:DCH1_D1:LABel:FONT:ITALic 0, indicating the font is not italic.

DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE
This command sets or queries the font size of the label of the specified digital bit.

Group Digital

Syntax DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE <NR1>

DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE?

Arguments DCH<x> specifies the digital channel. The supported value is 1.

D<x> specifies the digital bits. The supported values are 0 to 15.

<NR1> specifies the font size in points.

Examples DCH1_D1:LABel:FONT:SIZE 16 sets the font size to 16 points.

DCH1_D1:LABel:FONT:SIZE? might return :DCH1_D1:LABel:FONT:SIZE

20, indicating the font size is 20 points.

DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE
This command sets or queries the font type of the label of the specified digital bit,
such as Arial or Times New Roman.

Group Digital

Syntax DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE <QString>

DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE?

2-208 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments DCH<x> specifies the digital channel. The supported value is 1.

D<x> specifies the digital bits. The supported values are 0 to 15.

<QString> is the font type of the label.

Examples DCH1_D1:LABel:FONT:TYPE "Monospace" sets the font to Monospace.

DCH1_D1:LABel:FONT:TYPE? might return :DCH1_D1:LABel:FONT:TYPE

"Frutiger LT Std 55 Roman", indicating the font is Frutiger LT Std 55
Roman.

DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline
This command sets or queries the underline state of the label of the specified
digital bit.

Group Digital

Syntax DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline?

Arguments DCH<x> specifies the digital channel. The supported value is 1.

D<x> specifies the digital bits. The supported values are 0 to 15.

<NR1> = 0 turns off underline font; any other value turns on italic font.

OFF turns off underline font.

ON turns on underline font.

Examples DCH1_D1:LABel:FONT:UNDERline ON turns on italic font.

DCH1_D1:LABel:FONT:UNDERline? might return

:DCH1_D1:LABel:FONT:UNDERline 0, indicating the font is not italic.

DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:NAMe
This command sets or queries the label of the specified digital bit.

Group Digital

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-209

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:NAMe <QString>

DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:NAMe?

Arguments DCH<x> specifies the digital channel. The supported value is 1.

D<x> specifies the digital bits. specifies the digital bits. The supported values
are 0 to 15 or DALL (all digital bits).
<QString> is the label name.

Examples DCH1_D1:LABel:NAMe "Digital 1" sets the label name to Digital 1.

DCH1_D1:LABel:NAMe? might return :DCH1_D1:LABel:NAMe "Digital

1", indicating the label name is Digital 1.

*DDT
This command allows you to specify a command or a list of commands that are
executed when the instrument receives a *TRG command. Define Device Trigger
(*DDT) is a special alias that the *TRG command uses.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax *DDT {<Block>|<QString>}

*DDT?

Related Commands ALIas

*TRG

Arguments <Block> is a complete sequence of program messages. The messages can contain
only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all
rules for concatenating commands. The sequence must be less than or equal to 80
characters. The format of this argument is always returned as a query.
<QString> is a complete sequence of program messages. The messages can
contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must
follow all rules for concatenating commands. The sequence must be less than or
equal to 80 characters.

Examples *DDT #217ACQUIRE:STATE RUN specifies that the acquisition system will be
started each time a *TRG command is sent.

2-210 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DESE
This command sets and queries the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register
(DESER). The DESER is the mask that determines whether events are reported to
the Standard Event Status Register (SESR), and entered into the Event Queue.
For a more detailed discussion of the use of these registers, see Registers.

Group Status and Error

Syntax DESE <NR1>

DESE?

Related Commands *CLS

*ESE
*ESR?
EVENT?
EVMsg?
*SRE
*STB?

Arguments <NR1> The binary bits of the DESER are set according to this value, which ranges
from 1 through 255. For example, DESE 209 sets the DESER to the binary value
11010001 (that is, the most significant bit in the register is set to 1, the next most
significant bit to 1, the next bit to 0, etc.).
The power-on default for DESER is all bits set if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the
DESER maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle.

NOTE. Setting the DESER and ESER to the same value allows only those codes
to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit (bit 5) of the
Status Byte Register. Use the *ESE command to set the ESER.

Examples DESE 209 sets the DESER to binary 11010001, which enables the PON, URQ,
EXE and OPC bits.
DESE? might return DESE 186, showing that the DESER contains the binary
value 10111010.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-211

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DIAg:LOOP:OPTion
This command sets or queries the type of looping desired.

Group Self Test

Syntax DIAg:LOOP:OPTion {FAIL|ONCE|ALWAYS|ONFAIL|NTIMES}

DIAg:LOOP:OPTion?

Arguments Fail - run until a failure is found, then halt.

Once - run through one loop.

Always - run forever.

Onfail - run until a failure is found, then loop on it.

Ntimes - run n number of loops.

Examples DIAG:LOOP:OPTION ALWAYS sets loop option to ALWAYS.

DIAG:LOOP:OPTION? returns current looping option value.

DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes
This command sets or queries how many loops to run, if N-times is being used.

Group Self Test

Syntax DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes <NR1>

DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes?

Arguments <NR1> is how many loops to run.

Examples DIAG:LOOP:OPTION:NTIMES 2 sets diagnostics to loop 2 times.

DIAG:LOOP:OPTION:NTIMES? might return DIAG:LOOP:OPTION:NTIMES 1

indicating diagnostics will run once.

DIAg:LOOP:STOP (No Query Form)

Request that diagnostics stop looping.

2-212 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Self Test

Syntax DIAg:LOOP:STOP

Examples DIAG:LOOP:STOP stops diagnostics looping.

DIAg:MODe
This command sets or queries the diagnostics mode.

Group Self Test

Syntax DIAg:MODe {POST|EXTENDED|SERVICE}

DIAg:MODe?

Arguments POST specifies the power on self test diagnostics.

EXTENDED specifies the extended diagnostics.

SERVICE specifies the service diagnostics.

Examples DIAG:MODE POST specifies the power on self test diagnostics.

DIAg:RESUlt? (Query Only)

This query returns both the overall diagnostics test results and the results of each
individual test area.

Group Self Test

Syntax DIAg:RESUlt?

Returns The diagnostics results.

Examples DIAG:RESULT? might return DIAG:RESULT:FLAG "NOT RUN";LOG

"PASS--IO,PASS--ANALOG,PASS--SYSTEM,PASS--ASIC,PASS--ACQ,
PASS--SIGNAL,PASS--MEMORY" indicating the diagnostics results.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-213

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg? (Query Only)

This query returns the status of the diagnostic test area that has been selected.

Group Self Test

Syntax DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?

Related Commands DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?

Returns The status of the diagnostics (single area).

Examples DIAG:RESULT:FLAG? might return DIAG:RESULT:FLAG "NOT RUN"

indicating the diagnostics have not been run.

DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? (Query Only)

This query returns the test Pass/Fail status of each diagnostic area. It does not
return the overall status.

Group Self Test

Syntax DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?

Returns The status of the diagnostic area.

Examples DIAG:RESULT:LOG? might return :DIAG:RESULT:LOG

"PASS--IO,PASS--ANALOG,PASS--SYSTEM,PASS--ASIC,PASS--ACQ,
PASS--SIGNAL,PASS--MEMORY" indicating the diagnostics result stored in
the log.

DIAg:SELect (No Query Form)

This command selects or queries an available diagnostic area.

Group Self Test

2-214 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DIAg:SELect {ALL|IO|ANALOG|SYSTEM|ASIC|ACQ|SIGNAL|MEMORY}

DIAg:SELect?

Arguments The argument is the desired diagnostic area.

Examples DIAG:SELECT IO will select the IO group.

DIAg:STATE (No Query Form)

This command starts or aborts Self Test. Abort happens after group under test
completes.

Group Self Test

Syntax DIAg:STATE {EXECute|ABOrt}

Arguments EXECUTE starts execution of the diagnostics.

ABOrt disables diagnostics capabilities and returns the instrument to a normal

operating state.

Examples DIAG:STATE ABORT turns off diagnostics capabilities and returns the instrument
to a normal operating state.
DIAG:STATE? might return DIAG:STATE ABORT, indicating that diagnostics
are disabled.

DISplay? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the current Display settings.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay?

Examples DISPLAY? might return DISPLAY:CLOCK 1;COLOR:PALETTE:IMAGEVIEW

MONOGREEN; RECORDVIEW TEMPERATURE;USER:GRATICULE
165,50,15;CH1 180,50,100; CH2 300,50,100;CH3
60,50,100;CH4 240,50,100;REF1 0,90,0; REF2

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-215

Commands listed in alphabetical order

0,90,100;REF3 60,90,100;REF4 240,90,100;MATH1

160,50,100; MATH2 40,60,100;MATH3 120,60,100;MATH4
195,50,100; HISTOGRAM 320,50,100;CARET 150,50,100;MASK
0,25,75;MASKHIGHLIGHT 140,50,100;:DISPLAY:COLOR:MATHCOLOR
DEFAULT;REFCOLOR DEFAULT; :DISPLAY:FILTER SINX;FORMAT
YT;GRATICULE IRE;INTENSITY :WAVEFORM:IMAGEVIEW
81.0000;RECORDVIEW 81.0000;:DISPLAY :INTENSITY:AUTOBRIGHT
0; :DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE OFF;STYLE DOTS;TRIGBAR OFF;TRIGT
1; CURSORTICK LONG;VARPERSIST 2.6000;SCREENTEXT:STATE
1; LABEL1:NAME "";XPOS 100;YPOS 5;:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT
:LABEL2:NAME "THIS IS SCREEN TEXT";XPOS 100;YPOS 20;
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:NAME "";XPOS 100;YPOS 35;
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL4:NAME "";XPOS 100;YPOS 50;
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL5:NAME "";XPOS 100;YPOS 343;
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL6:NAME "";XPOS 100;YPOS 80;
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL7:NAME "";XPOS 100;YPOS 95;
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL8:NAME "";XPOS 100;YPOS 110;
:DISPLAY:WAVEFORM 1.

DISplay:{CH<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>}:INVERTColor
This command sets or queries the Inverted mode color of the specified input
source to the specified color. You can assign one of 48 unique colors to any
channel, math, or reference waveform. These colors replace the default Inverted
colors and remain in effect until you reset the colors.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:{CH<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>}:INVERTColor COLOR<y>

DISplay:{CH<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>}:INVERTColor?

Arguments CH<x> specifies the input channel for which you want to change the waveform
color, where <x> is the channel number.
Math<x> specifies the math waveform for which you want to change the
waveform color, where <x> is the math waveform number.
REF<x> specifies the reference waveform for which you want to change the
waveform color, where <x> is the reference waveform number.
COLOR<y> specifies the color to assign to the specified waveform, where <y> =
0 to 47.

Examples DISplay:Ch1:INVERTColor COLOR23 sets the channel 2 Inverted waveform

color to the value 23.

2-216 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:REF3:INVERTColor? might return COLOR2, indicating that the

Inverted waveform color setting for reference waveform 3 is 2.

DISplay:{CH<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>}:NORMALColor
This command sets or queries the normal mode color of the specified input source
to the specified color. You can assign one of 48 unique colors to any channel,
math, or reference waveform. These colors replace the default normal colors and
remain in effect until you reset the colors.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:{CH<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>}:NORMALColor COLOR<y>

DISplay:{CH<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>}:NORMALColor?

Arguments CH<x> specifies the input channel for which you want to change the waveform
color, where <x> is the channel number.
Math<x> specifies the math waveform for which you want to change the
waveform color, where <x> is the math waveform number.
REF<x> specifies the reference waveform for which you want to change the
waveform color, where <x> is the reference waveform number.
COLOR<y> specifies the color to assign to the specified waveform, where <y> =
0 to 47.

Examples DISplay:Ch1:NORMALColor COLOR13 sets the channel 2 normal waveform

color to the value 13.
DISplay:REF3:NORMALColor? might return COLOR12, indicating that the
normal waveform color setting for reference waveform 3 is 12.

DISplay:COLors
Sets or queries the color mode for the graticule and waveform display.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:COLors {NORMal|INVERTed}

DISplay:COLors?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-217

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments NORMal specifies normal color mode.

INVERTed specifies inverted color mode.

Examples DISPLAY:COLORS NORMAL sets the display colors to normal.

DISPLAY:COLORS? might return DISPLAY:COLORS INVERTED indicating the

display colors are inverted.

DISplay:GLObal:B<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the global state (display mode On or Off) of the
specified bus. Setting this value true (On or NR1 ≠ 0 ) turns on the source in the
waveform view. Setting this value false (Off or NR1 = 0 ) turns off the source
in the waveform view. This command only works if the specified bus is added
already.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:GLObal:B<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the display of the specified bus; any other value enables
display of the bus.
ON enables display of the specified bus.

OFF disables display of the specified bus.

Examples DISplay:GLObal:B1:STATE OFF turns off the display of bus 1.

DISplay:GLObal:B1:STATE? might return DISPLAY:GLOBAL:B1:STATE 1

indicating the bus is displayed.

DISplay:GLObal:CH<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the global state (display mode On or Off) of the
specified channel (both analog and digital). Setting this value true (On or NR1
≠ 0 ) turns on the source in the waveform view. Setting this value false (Off or
NR1 = 0 ) turns off the source in the waveform view. This command only works
if the specified channel is added already.

Group Display Control

2-218 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:GLObal:CH<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the display of the specified channel; any other value enables
display of the channel.
ON enables display of the specified channel.

OFF disables display of the specified channel.

Examples DISplay:GLObal:CH1:STATE OFF turns off the display of channel 1.

DISplay:GLObal:CH1:STATE? might return :DISPLAY:GLOBAL:CH1:STATE

0 indicating that channel 1 is not displayed.

DISplay:GLObal:DCH<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the global state (display mode On or Off) of the
specified channel (digital). Setting this value true (On or NR1 ≠ 0 ) turns on the
source in the waveform view. Setting this value false (Off or NR1 = 0 ) turns off
the source in the waveform view. This command only works if the specified
channel is added already.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:GLObal:DCH<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Arguments DCH<x> = specifies the digital channel. The supported value is 1.

<NR1> = 0 disables the display of the specified digital channel; any other value
enables display of the channel.
ON enables display of the specified digital channel.

OFF disables display of the specified digital channel.

Examples DISplay:GLObal:DCH1:STATE OFF turns off the display of digital channel 1.

DISplay:GLObal:DCH1:STATE? might return

:DISPLAY:GLOBAL:DCH1:STATE 0 indicating that digital channel 1 is not
displayed.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-219

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:GLObal:MATH<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the global state (display mode On or Off) of the
specified math. Setting this value true (On or NR1 ≠ 0 ) turns on the source in the
waveform view. Setting this value false (Off or NR1 = 0 ) turns off the source in
the waveform view. This command only works if the specified math waveform
is added already.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:GLObal:MATH<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the display of the specified math; any other value enables
display of the math.
ON enables display of the specified math.

OFF disables display of the specified math.

Examples DISplay:GLObal:MATH1:STATE 1 displays math 1.

DISplay:GLObal:MATH1:STATE? might return

:DISPLAY:GLOBAL:MATH1:STATE 1 indicating that math1 is displayed.

DISplay:GLObal:REF<x>:STATE
this command sets or queries the global state (display mode On or Off) of the
specified reference waveform. Setting this value true (On or NR1 ≠ 0 ) turns on
the source in the waveform view. Setting this value false (Off or NR1 = 0 ) turns
off the source in the waveform view. This command only works if the specified
reference waveform is added already.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:GLObal:REF<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Arguments REF<x> is the Reference waveform number.

<NR1> = 0 disables the display of the specified reference; any other value enables
display of the reference.

ON enables display of the specified reference.

OFF disables display of the specified reference.

2-220 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:GLObal:REF1:STATE 1 displays reference 1.

DISplay:GLObal:REF1:STATE? might return

:DISPLAY:GLOBAL:REF1:STATE 1 indicating that reference 1 is displayed.

DISplay:INTENSITy? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the waveform saturation level and screen saver
settings.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:INTENSITy?

Related Commands
Arguments None

Examples DISPLAY:INTENSITY? might return :DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT 1,

indicating the intensity is set to 1.

DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight
This command sets or queries the display backlight intensity setting.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight {LOW|MEDium|HIGH}

DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight?

Arguments LOW selects a low brightness level.

MEDium selects a moderate brightness level.

HIGH selects a full brightness level.

Examples DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT LOW sets the display backlight to low

brightness level.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-221

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT? might return

DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT HIGH, indicating that the display backlight
is set to full brightness level.

DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim:ENAble
Sets or queries the state of the display auto-dim feature. The default is enabled.
Once the backlight has dimmed, any button push, knob turn or mouse movement
returns the backlight value to the value set by :DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim:ENAble {ON|OFF}

DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim:ENAble?

Related Commands DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight

Arguments ON enables the display auto-dim feature.

OFF disables the display auto-dim feature.

Examples DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT:AUTODIM:ENABLE ON enables

auto-dimming of the backlight.
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT:AUTODIM:ENABLE? might return
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT:AUTODIM:ENABLE ON, indicating that
auto-dimming of the backlight is enabled.

DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim:TIMe
Sets or queries the amount of time, in minutes, to wait for no user interface activity
before automatically dimming the display. The time can range from a minimum of
10 minutes to a maximum of 1440 minutes (24 hours). The default is 10 minutes.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim:TIMe <NR1>

DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim:TIMe?

Arguments <NR1> is the amount of time, in minutes, to wait for no user interface activity
before automatically dimming the display.

2-222 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT:AUTODIM:TIME 30 sets the backlight to

autodim in 30 minutes.
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT:AUTODIM:TIME? might return
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT:AUTODIM:TIME 60, indicating the
backlight will auto-dim in 60 minutes.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<n>:CURSor:ROLOCATION
This command sets or queries the location to display the specified Math FFT plot
cursor readouts (in the plot graticule or in a badge in the Results Bar).

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<n>:CURSor:ROLOCATION {GRATICULE|BADGE}

DISplay:MATHFFTView<n>:CURSor:ROLOCATION?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math FFT plot number.

GRATICULE sets the Math FFT plot cursor readouts to display as part of the
cursors in the plot view.
BADGE removes the Math FFT plot cursor readouts from the cursors in the
graticule and displays the cursor information as a badge in the Results Bar.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView4:CURSor:ROLOCATION GRATICULE sets the cursor

readout information for Math FFT plot 4 to display in the plot graticule.
DISplay:MATHFFTView2:CURSor:ROLOCATION? might return
DISplay:MATHFFTView2:CURSor:ROLOCATION BADGE, indicating that cursor
readout information for Math FFT plot 2 is set to display as a badge in the Results
Bar.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:AUTOScale
This command sets or returns the enabled state of autoscale for Math/FFT
waveforms.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:AUTOScale {OFF|ON|<NR1>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:AUTOScale?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-223

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

OFF disables the autoscale feature.

ON enables the autoscale feature.

<NR1> = 0 disables the autoscale feature; any other value enables the autoscale
feature.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:AUTOScale OFF disables the autoscale feature.

DISplay:MATHFFTView3:AUTOScale? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW3:AUTOSCALE 1, indicating that autoscale
is on for the Math3 FFT waveform.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:ASOUrce? (Query Only)

This command queries the Math-FFT waveform view source for cursor A.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:ASOUrce?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:ASOUrce? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:ASOURCE MATH1, indicating the source
is MATH 1.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:BSOUrce? (Query Only)

This command queries the Math-FFT waveform view source for cursor B.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:BSOUrce?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

2-224 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView5:CURSor:BSOUrce? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:BSOURCE MATH5, indicating the source
is Math waveform MATH 5.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:DDT? (Query Only)

This command queries the delta Y over delta X (ΔY/Δ X) cursor readout value of
the specified cursor in the specified Math-FFT view.

NOTE. If the current cursor is set to horizontal mode, this command will time out.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:DDT?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:DDT? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:DDT 14.0056E-9, indicating
the ΔY/Δ X cursor readout value is 14.0056E-9.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion
This command sets or queries the cursor type for the specified Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion
{WAVEform|VBArs|HBArs|SCREEN}
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

WAVEFORM specifies to display the paired vertical cursors in YT display format for
measuring waveform amplitude and time. Measurements are taken at where the
cursor intersects the waveform, and tracks waveform changes.

VBArs specifies vertical bar cursors, which measure in horizontal units.

HBArs specifies horizontal bar cursors, which measure in vertical units.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-225

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SCREEN specifies to display both horizontal and vertical bar cursors, which
display the horizontal and vertical positions of the cursors, not waveform levels.
Use these cursors to measure anywhere in the waveform display area.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView5:CURSor:FUNCtion HBARS sets Math-FFT

waveform 5 to use horizontal bar cursors.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:FUNCtion? might return
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:FUNCtion? SCREEN, indicating that
Math-FFT waveform 2 is set to use both horizontal and vertical cursors.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition
This command sets or returns the position of horizontal cursor A for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the cursor position of the specified cursor in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition 50.0e-3 sets the

position to 50 mV.
DISplay:MATHFFTView4:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW4:CURSOR:HBARS:APOSITION —274.2247E-3,
indicating the A cursor position is –274.2247E-3.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:AUNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the vertical units of horizontal cursor A for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:AUNIts?

2-226 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:HBArs:AUNIts? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:HBARS:AUNITS "dBm", indicating the
vertical units are dBm.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition
This command sets or returns the position of horizontal cursor B for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the vertical cursor B position for the specified Math-FFT view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition 50e-3 sets the

position to 0.005 vertical units.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:HBARS:BPOSITION —40.4061, indicating
the position is –40.4061 vertical units.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BUNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the vertical units of horizontal cursor B for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BUNIts?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-227

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView3:CURSor:HBArs:BUNIts? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW3:CURSOR:HBARS:BUNITS "dBm", indicating the
cursor units are dBm.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)

This command queries the horizontal cursor’s delta value of the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA 30.61448, indicating the
cursor readout is 30.61488 units.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:MODe
This command sets or queries the cursor tracking mode of the specified Math-FFT
view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:MODe {INDEPENDENT|TRACK}

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

INDEPENDENT allows independent adjustment of the two cursors.

TRACK ties the navigational functionality of the two cursors together. For cursor 1
adjustments, this ties the movement of the two cursors together; however, cursor 2
continues to move independently of cursor 1.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:MODe INDEPENDENT allows independent

adjustment of the two cursors.

2-228 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:MODe? might return

:DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:MODE INDEPENDENT, indicating the mode
is set to independent.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? (Query Only)

This command queries the one over delta cursor readout value of the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE 2.6005E-9,
indicating the one over delta time value is 2.6005 nanoseconds.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition
This command sets or returns the vertical cursor A x-axis waveform measurement
position of the specified Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the cursor position in MHz.

Examples DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:SCREEN:AXPOSITION 700.000E+6 sets

the cursor position to 700 MHz.
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW3:CURSOR:SCREEN:AXPOSITION? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW3:CURSOR:SCREEN:AXPOSITION 125.000E+6,
indicating the x-axis value of cursor A is 125 MHz.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-229

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition
This command sets or returns the vertical cursor A y-axis amplitude measurement
value of the specified Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView2:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition 1.0e0 sets the

cursor position to 1.0 dBm.
DISplay:MATHFFTView5:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition? might
return DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:SCREEN:AYPOSITION
1.1741714106633, indicating the cursor position is 1.174 vertical units (such
as dBm).

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition
This command sets or returns the vertical cursor Bx-axis waveform time
measurement position of the specified Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition 3.5e9 sets the

cursor position to 3.5 GHz.

2-230 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:SCREEN:BXPOSITION 2.50E+9,
indicating the cursor position is 2.5 GHz.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition
This command sets or returns the vertical cursor B y-axis amplitude measurement
value of the specified Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition -50.0e0 sets the

cursor position to -50.0.
DISplay:MATHFFTView4:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition? might
return DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW4:CURSOR:SCREEN:BYPOSITION
-59.0460929065173, indicating the cursor position is at -59.0 dBm.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:STATE
This command sets or queries the visible state of cursors for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:STATE?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

1 or ON enables the cursors.

0 or OFF disables the cursors.

<NR1> = 0 turns off cursors; any other value displays cursors.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-231

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView2:CURSor:STATE OFF turns off the cursors for

Math-FFT waveform 2.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:STATE? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:STATE 1 indicating the cursors
are enabled.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> sets the vertical cursor A position in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition 500.0e6 sets the

cursor A position to 500 MHz.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition? might
return DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:VBARS:APOSITION
585.533869115958E+6, indicating cursor position is 585.5 MHz.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:AUNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the vertical cursor A measurement units for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:AUNIts?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

2-232 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:VBArs:AUNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS "dBm", indicating the
cursor units are dBm.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor B position for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> sets the vertical cursor B position in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition 2.0e9 sets the cursor

B position to 2.0 GHz.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:VBARS:BPOSITION 2.50E+9, indicating
the cursor position is at 2.5 GHz.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BUNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the vertical cursor B measurement units for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BUNIts?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:VBArs:BUNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:VBARS:BUNITS "Hz" indicating the
cursor units are Hz.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-233

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)

This command queries the vertical cursor’s delta T readout value for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:VBARS:DELTA 1.9144661308840E+9,
indicating the delta T cursor value is 1.9 GHz.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition
This command sets or queries the waveform cursor A position for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the waveform cursor A position in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition 600.0e6 sets the

position to 600 MHz.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:APOSITION 25.000E+6,
indicating the cursor position is 25 MHz.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition
This command sets or queries the waveform cursor B position for the specified
Math-FFT view.

2-234 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the waveform cursor B position in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition 2.0E+9 sets the

cursor position to 2.0 GHz.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:BPOSITION 250.0E+6,
indicating the waveform cursor B position is 250 MHz.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:GRIDlines
This command sets or queries the grid lines setting for the specified Math-FFT
view.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:GRIDlines {HORizontal|VERTical|BOTH}

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:GRIDlines?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

HORizontal specifies horizontal grid lines.

VERTical specifies vertical grid lines.

BOTH specifies both vertical and horizontal grid lines.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:GRIDlines VERTICAL specifies vertical grid lines.

DISplay:MATHFFTView1:GRIDlines? might return

:DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:GRIDLINES BOTH indicating both
horizontal and vertical grid lines are displayed.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-235

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the display state of the specified math waveform for
the specified Math-FFT view.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:STATE {OFF|ON|<NR1>}

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

OFF disables displaying the specified Math-FFT view.

ON enables displaying the specified Math-FFT view.

<NR1> = 0 disables the specified Math-FFT view; any other value enables the
specified Math-FFT view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:MATH:MATH1:STATE ON enables the specified

Math-FFT view.
DISplay:MATHFFTView4:MATH:MATH4:STATE? might return
:DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:MATH:MATH1:STATE 1, indicating the waveform
Math-FFT 1 is displayed.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE
This command sets or queries the x-axis scale (Linear or Log) for the specified
Math-FFT view.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE {LINEAr|LOG}

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

LINEAr specifies a linear scale.

LOG specifies a logarithmic scale.

2-236 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:XAXIS:SCALE LOG specifies a logarithmic scale.

DISplay:MATHFFTView1:XAXIS:SCALE? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:XAXIS:SCALE LINEAR, indicating that
the scale setting is linear.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:YAXIS:SCALE
This command sets or queries the vertical scale setting (Linear or dBm) for the
specified Math-FFT view.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:YAXIS:SCALE {LINEAr|DBM}

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:YAXIS:SCALE?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

LINEAr specifies a linear scale.

DBM specifies a dBm scale.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:YAXIS:SCALE LINEAR specifies a linear scale.

DISplay:MATHFFTView1:YAXIS:SCALE? might return

DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:YAXIS:SCALE DBM, indicating that the
scale is dBm.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM
This command sets or queries the value of the left edge of the zoom area for
the specified Math-FFT view.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the value of the left edge of the zoom x axis in the specified plot view.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-237

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM 800.e6 sets the x axis value of

the left edge of the plot view to 800 MHz.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM 781.0E+6, indicating the x
axis value of the left edge of the plot view is at 781 MHz.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO
This command sets or queries the value of the right edge value of the zoom area
for the specified Math-FFT view.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO <NR3>

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the value of the right edge of the zoom x axis in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO 2.3E+9 sets the value of the right

edge of the x axis to 2.3 GHz.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO? might return
:DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO 2.343750E+9,
indicating the value of the right edge of the zoom x axis is 2.34 GHz.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM
This command sets or queries the bottom edge value of the zoom y-axis area for
the specified Math-FFT view.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the bottom value of the zoom y axis in the specified plot view.

2-238 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM -75.0e0 sets the bottom value

of the y axis to -75 dBm.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM -78.8258285893367
indicating the bottom value of the y axis is -78.8 dBm.

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO
This command sets or queries the top edge value of the zoom y-axis area for
the specified Math-FFT view.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO <NR3>

DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO?

Arguments MATHFFTView<x> is the Math-FFT waveform number.

<NR3> is the top value of the zoom y axis in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:MATHFFTView1:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO 21.0E0 sets the top value of the

zoom y axis in the specified plot view to 21 dBm.
DISplay:MATHFFTView1:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO? might return
DISPLAY:MATHFFTVIEW1:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO 21.1741714106633,
indicating the top value of the zoom y axis in the specified plot view is 21.17 dBm.

DISplay:PERSistence
This command sets or queries the display persistence for analog waveforms.
Persistence is valid for wave views only.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:PERSistence
{OFF|AUTO|INFPersist|INFInite|VARpersist|CLEAR}
DISplay:PERSistence?

Related Commands DISplay:VARpersist

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-239

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments OFF disables the persistence aspect of the display.

AUTO automatically set the persistence.

INFPersist sets a display mode where any pixels, once touched by samples,
remain set until cleared by a mode change.
INFInite sets a display mode where any pixels, once touched by samples,
remain set until cleared by a mode change.
VARPersist sets a display mode where set pixels are gradually dimmed.

CLEAR resets the persist time count down and clears the display of acquired points.

Examples DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE VARPERSIST sets the persistence aspect of the display

to fade set pixels according to the time set in the DISplay:VARpersist command.
DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE? might return :DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE OFF,
indicating that the persistence aspect of the display is disabled.

DISplay:PERSistence:RESET (No Query Form)

This command controls the clearing of persistence data that has been built up over
time. Persistence is valid for wave views only.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:PERSistence:RESET

Related Commands DISplay:PERSistence

DISplay:VARpersist

Examples DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE:RESET clears the display of persistence data.

DISplay:PLOTView<n>:CURSor:ROLOCATION
This command sets or queries the location to display the specified plot cursor
readouts (in the plot graticule or in a badge in the Results Bar).

Group Cursor

2-240 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<n>:CURSor:ROLOCATION {GRATICULE|BADGE}

DISplay:PLOTView<n>:CURSor:ROLOCATION?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the waveform plot number.

GRATICULE sets the plot cursor readouts to display as part of the cursors in the
plot view.
BADGE removes the plot cursor readouts from the cursors in the graticule and
displays the cursor information as a badge in the Results Bar.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:ROLOCATION GRATICULE sets the cursor

readout information for plot 1to display in the plot graticule.
DISplay:PLOTView2:CURSor:ROLOCATION? might return
DISplay:PLOTView2:CURSor:ROLOCATION BADGE, indicating that cursor
readout information for plot 2 is set to display as a badge in the Results Bar.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:AUTOScale
This command sets or queries the enabled state of autoscale for the specified plot.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:AUTOScale {OFF|ON|<NR1>}

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:AUTOScale?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

OFF disables the autoscale feature.

ON enables the autoscale feature.

<NR1> = 0 disables the autoscale feature; any other value enables the autoscale
feature.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:AUTOScale OFF turns off plot autoscale.

DISplay:PLOTView3:AUTOScale? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW3:AUTOSCALE 0, indicating the plot autoscale is off
for plot 3.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-241

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:ASOUrce? (Query Only)

This command queries the cursor source for plot cursor A.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:ASOUrce?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:ASOUrce? might return

DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:ASOURCE PLOT1 indicating the
source of the cursor is plot 1.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:BSOUrce? (Query Only)

This command queries the cursor source for plot cursor B.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:BSOUrce?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:BSOUrce? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:BSOURCE PLOT1 indicating the B
cursor source is plot 1.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:DDT? (Query Only)

This command returns the delta V over delta T cursor readout value for the
specified Plot view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:DDT?

2-242 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments PlotView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:DDT? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:DDT 131.0470E+6 indicating the cursor
readout value is 131.0470E+6.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion
This command sets or queries the cursor mode for the specified Plot view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion
{WAVEFORM|VBArs|HBArs|SCREEN}
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

WAVEFORM specifies to display the paired cursors in YT display format for

measuring waveform amplitude and time.

VBArs specifies vertical bar cursors, which measure in horizontal units.

HBArs specifies horizontal bar cursors, which measure in vertical units.

SCREEN specifies to display both horizontal and vertical bar cursors, which
measure the selected waveform in horizontal and vertical units. Use these cursors
to measure anywhere in the waveform display area.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:FUNCtion VBARS displays vertical bar cursors.

DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:FUNCtion? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:FUNCTION SCREEN indicating that
both horizontal and vertical bar cursors are displayed.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position for the specified
Plot view.

Group Cursor

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-243

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the cursor position.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition 2.0 sets the cursor to

2 Volts.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:HBARS:APOSITION 2.2186 indicating the
HBArs cursors are at 2.2186 Volts.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:AUNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the horizontal cursor A vertical units for the specified
Plot view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:AUNIts?

Returns PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:HBArs:AUNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:HBARS:AUNITS "V", indicating the A units
are volts.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position for the specified
Plot view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition?

2-244 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the HBArs vertical position.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition 2.0 sets the cursor to

2 Volts.
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:HBARS:BPOSITION 2.2186 indicating the
HBArs cursors are at 2.2186 Volts.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BUNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the cursor B vertical units for the specified Plot view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BUNIts?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:HBArs:BUNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:HBARS:BUNITS "V" indicating the units are
Volts.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)

This command queries the delta V cursor readout value for the specified Plot view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

Returns Returns an <NR3> that is the delta V cursor value.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-245

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA 1.2543, indicating the delta
value is 1.2543 V.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:MODe
This command sets or queries the cursor tracking mode for the specified Plot view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:MODe {INDEPENDENT|TRACK}

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:MODe?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

INDEPENDENT allows independent adjustment of the two cursors.

TRACK ties the navigational functionality of the two cursors together. For cursor A
adjustments, this ties the movement of the two cursors together; however, cursor
B continues to move independently of cursor A.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:MODe TRACK sets the cursor to track together.

DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:MODe? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:MODE INDEPENDENT, indicating independent
adjustment of the cursors is allowed.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? (Query Only)

This command sets or queries the one over delta T cursor readout value for the
specified Plot view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

Returns Returns an <NR3> that is the one over delta T cursor readout value (it may not be
delta T, depending on the plot units).

2-246 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE 88.2295E+6
indicating the 1 over delta time value is 88.2295 MHz.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified
cursor in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the horizontal cursor A position.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition -5.0 sets the A X

cursor position to —5.0 ns.
DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:SCREEN:AXPOSITION -5.5460E-9
indication the cursor A X position is -5.546 ns.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the vertical cursor A position.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition 2.0 set the A cursor

Y position to 2.0 Volts.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-247

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:SCREEN:AYPOSITION 1.9035 indicating
the A cursor Y position is 1.9035 V.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified
cursor in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the horizontal cursor B position.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition 59.0E-9 sets the B

cursor X position to 59.0 ns.
DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:SCREEN:BXPOSITION 59.6802E-9
indicating the B cursor X position is 59.6802 ns.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the vertical cursor B position.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition 0.589 sets the B cursor

Y position to 589 mV.

2-248 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:SCREEN:BYPOSITION 589.0696E-3
indicating the B cursor Y position is 589.0696 mV.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SPLITMODE
This command sets or queries the cursor source mode in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SPLITMODE {SAME|SPLIT}

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SPLITMODE?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

SAME specifies that both cursors are on the same waveform.

SPLIT specifies that the cursors can be on different waveforms.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:SPLITMODE SAME sets the cursors to be on the

same waveform.
DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:SPLITMODE? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:SPLITMODE SAME indicating both
cursors are on the same waveform.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:STATE
This command sets or queries the visible state of the cursor of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:STATE {OFF|ON|<NR1>}

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:STATE?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

OFF disables the specified cursor.

ON enables the specified cursor.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-249

Commands listed in alphabetical order

<NR1> = 0 disables the specified cursor; any other value enables the specified
cursor.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:STATE OFF disables the specified cursor.

DISplay:PLOTView5:CURSor:STATE? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW5:CURSOR:STATE 1 indicating cursors are on.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the vertical cursor A position.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition 50.0E-9 sets the VBARS

APOSITION to 50 ns.

DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:VBARS:APOSITION -60.0796E-9
indicating the VBARS APOSITION is set to -60.08 ns.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition?

2-250 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the vertical cursor B position.

Examples :DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:VBARS:BPOSITION 50.0E-9 sets the VBARS

BPOSITION to 50 ns.

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:VBARS:BPOSITION? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:VBARS:BPOSITION -60.0796E-9
indicating the VBARS BPOSITION is set to 60.08 ns.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)

This command queries the delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

Returns The delta T cursor readout value is returned.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:VBARS:DELTA 119.7593E-9 indicating
the VBARS DELTA is set to 119.76 ns.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:UNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the VBArs cursor readout units of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:UNIts?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-251

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Returns The VBArs cursor readout units are returned.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:UNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW5:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS "V" indicating the units are
Volts.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition
This command sets or queries the waveform cursor A horizontal position of the
specified cursor in the specified view.

NOTE. In case of XY plot, this command has no effect when used to set the value.
In case of bathtub plot, this command sets or returns the cursor A vertical position.
For all other plots, this command sets or returns the cursor A horizontal position.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the horizontal cursor A position.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition -50.0E-9 sets the

waveform APOSITION to -50.0 ns.
DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:APOSITION -60.0796E-9
indicating the waveform APOSITION is set to -60.08 ns.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition
This command sets or queries the waveform cursor B horizontal position of the
specified cursor in the specified view.

NOTE. In case of XY plot, this command has no effect when used to set the value.
In case of bathtub plot, this command has no effect. Query returns invalid values.
For all other plots, this command sets or returns the cursor B horizontal position.

2-252 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the horizontal cursor B position.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition 3.0 sets the position

to 3.0 V.
DISplay:PLOTView5:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW5:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:BPOSITION 2.600517840
indicating the position is 2.5 V.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:GRIDlines
This command sets or queries the Grid (graticule) lines setting of the specified
plot. This command works for plots that have vertical and horizontal units
associated with the graticule. For example, this command does not work for
XY or XYZ plots.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:GRIDlines {HORizontal|VERTical|BOTH}

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:GRIDlines?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

HORizontal specifies horizontal grid lines.

VERTical specifies vertical grid lines.

BOTH specifies both vertical and horizontal grid lines.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:GRIDlines Vertical sets the vertical grid lines to

display.
DISplay:PLOTView1:GRIDlines? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:GRIDLINES BOTH indicating that both vertical and
horizontal grid lines are displayed.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-253

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW<x>:XAXIS:SCALE
This command sets or queries the horizontal scale setting for applicable plots
(Linear or Log) for the specified plot view.

Group Display

Syntax DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW<x>:XAXIS:SCALE {LINEAR|LOG}

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

LINEAR creates a plot with linear scales.

LOG creates a plot with logarithmic scales.

Examples DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:XAXIS:SCALE LOG creates a plot with a logarithmic

horizontal scale.
DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:XAXIS:SCALE? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:XAXIS:SCALE LINEAR indicating plots will have
linear scales.

DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW<x>:YAXIS:SCALE
This command sets or queries the vertical scale setting for applicable plots (Linear
or Log) in the specified plot view.

Group Display

Syntax DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW<x>:YAXIS:SCALE {LINEAR|LOG}

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

LINEAR specifies a linear vertical scale.

LOG specifies a logarithmic vertical scale.

Examples DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:YAXIS:SCALE LINEAR sets the plot to use a linear

vertical scale.
DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:YAXIS:SCALE? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:YAXIS:SCALE LOG indicating a logarithmic vertical
scale is used.

2-254 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM
This command sets or queries the value of the left edge of the specified plot.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is start of the zoom x-axis.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM 2.0 sets the start of the zoom

x-axis to 2.0 V.
DISplay:PLOTView3:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM? might return
DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW3:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM 1.9844803459459
indicating the start of the zoom x-axis is 1.9845 V.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO
This command sets or queries the value of the right edge of the specified plot.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the end of the zoom x-axis.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO 2.5 sets the end of the zoom x-axis

to 2.5 V.
DISplay:PLOTView3:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO? might return
DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW3:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO 2.2144883507508
indicating the end of the zoom x-axis is 2.21 V.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-255

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM
This command sets or queries the bottom value of the zoom y-axis in the specified
plot view.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the bottom value of the zoom y-axis.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM -1.0E+20 sets the bottom value

of the zoom y-axis to -1E+20.
DISplay:PLOTView1:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW1:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM -1.0E+21 indicating
the bottom value of the zoom y-axis is -1E+21.

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO
This command sets or queries the top value of the zoom y-axis in the specified
plot view.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO <NR3>

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

<NR3> is the top value of the zoom y-axis.

Examples DISplay:PLOTView1:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO 100 sets the top value of the zoom

y-axis to 100.
DISplay:PLOTView1:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO? might return
:DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW3:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM 0.0E+0 indicating the
top value of the zoom y-axis is 0.0 hits (for a histogram plot, or it could be Volts
for an XY plot).

2-256 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:REFFFTView<n>:CURSor:ROLOCATION
This command sets or queries the location to display the specified Reference FFT
plot cursor readouts (in the plot graticule or in a badge in the Results Bar).

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<n>:CURSor:ROLOCATION {GRATICULE|BADGE}

DISplay:REFFFTView<n>:CURSor:ROLOCATION?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Reference FFT plot number.

GRATICULE sets the Reference FFT plot cursor readouts to display as part of
the cursors in the plot view.
BADGE removes the Reference FFT plot cursor readouts from the cursors in the
graticule and displays the cursor information as a badge in the Results Bar.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView1:CURSor:ROLOCATION GRATICULE sets the cursor

readout information for Reference FFT plot 1 to display in the plot graticule.
DISplay:REFFFTView2:CURSor:ROLOCATION? might return
DISplay:REFFFTView2:CURSor:ROLOCATION BADGE, indicating that cursor
readout information for Reference FFT plot 2 is set to display as a badge in the
Results Bar.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:AUTOScale
This command sets or queries the enabled state of auto-scale for plots.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:AUTOScale {OFF|ON|0|1}

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:AUTOScale?

Arguments REFFFTView<x> is the plot number.

<NR1> = 0 disables auto-scale on the specified reffftview; any other value turns
this feature on.
OFF disables auto-scale on the specified reffftview.

ON enables the specified channel on the specified Waveform View.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-257

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView1:AUTOScale 1 enables auto-scale on the specified

view.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:AUTOScale? might return
:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:AUTOSCALE 1 indicating auto-scale is on.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:ASOUrce? (Query Only)

This command returns the cursor source for plot cursor A

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:ASOUrce?

Arguments PLOTView<x> is the Plot waveform number.

Returns Returns the cursor source for plot cursor A.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:ASOUrce? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:ASOURCE REF5 indicating the A cursor
source is reference 5.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:BSOUrce? (Query Only)

This command returns the cursor source for plot cursor B.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:BSOUrce?

Returns Returns the cursor source for plot cursor B.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:BSOUrce? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:BSOURCE REF5 indicating the source of the
B cursor is reference 5.

2-258 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:DDT? (Query Only)

This command returns the delta V over delta T cursor readout value of the
specified cursor in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:DDT?

Returns Returns the delta V over delta T cursor readout value

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:DDT? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:DDT 9.91E+37 indicating the delta V over
delta T cursor readout value is 9.91E+37.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion
This command sets or queries the cursor type of the specified cursor in the
specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion
{WAVEform|VBArs|HBArs|SCREEN}
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion?

Arguments HBArs specifies horizontal bar cursors, which measure in vertical units.

VBArs specifies vertical bar cursors, which measure in horizontal units.

SCREEN specifies both horizontal and vertical bar cursors, which measure in
horizontal and vertical units specified by the cursor sources. Use these cursors
to measure anywhere in the waveform display area.
WAVEform specifies paired or split cursors in YT display format for measuring
waveform amplitude and time. In XY and XYZ format, these cursors indicate the
amplitude positions of an XY pair (Ch1 vs Ch2 voltage, where Ch1 is the X axis
and Ch2 is the Y axis) relative to the trigger.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:FUNCtion screen sets the cursor function

to screen.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-259

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:FUNCtion? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:FUNCTION WAVEFORM indicating the cursor
function is set to waveform.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition -20 sets the A cursor

position to -20.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:HBArs:APOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:HBARS:APOSITION
-14.4762489421361 indicating the A cursor position is -14.48 dBm.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:AUNIts? (Query Only)

This command returns cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the
specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:AUNIts?

Returns Returns the cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:HBArs:AUNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:HBARS:AUNITS "dBm" indicating the A
cursor units are dBm.

2-260 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition -90 sets the B cursor

position to -90.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:HBArs:BPOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:HBARS:BPOSITION
-100.6262359333038 indicating the B cursor position is -100.6.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BUNIts? (Query Only)

This command returns the cursor B vertical units of the specified cursor in the
specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:BUNIts?

Returns Returns the cursor B vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:HBArs:BUNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:HBARS:BUNITS "dBm" indicating the units
are dBm.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)

This command returns the delta V cursor readout value of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-261

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?

Returns Returns the delta V cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified
view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA 59.9867396737569
indicating the delta V cursor readout value is 59.99.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:MODe
This command sets or queries the cursor tracking mode of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:MODe {INDEPENDENT|TRACK}

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:MODe?

Arguments TRACK ties the navigational functionality of the two cursors together. For cursor A
adjustments, this ties the movement of the two cursors together; however, cursor
B continues to move independently of cursor A.
INDEPENDENT allows independent adjustment of the two cursors.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:MODe TRACK sets the cursors to track

together.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:MODe? might return
:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:MODE INDEPENDENT indicating
the cursors move independently.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? (Query Only)

This command returns the one over delta T cursor readout value of the specified
cursor in the specified view.

Group Cursor

2-262 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE?

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? might

return :DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE
2.540935140340E-9 indicating the one over delta T cursor readout value is
2.54 ns.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified
cursor in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition 1.0E+6 sets the

cursor position to 1.0 MHz.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:SCREEN:AXPOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:SCREEN:AXPOSITION
792.4465962305570E+3 indicating the A cursor horizontal position is
792.447 kHz.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified view.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-263

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition -20.9 sets the

position to -20 dBm.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:SCREEN:AYPOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:SCREEN:AYPOSITION
-30.0132603262431 indicating the A cursor vertical position is -30.01 dBm.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified
cursor in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition 300 sets the position

to 300 MHz.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:SCREEN:BXPOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:SCREEN:BXPOSITION
394.3483403001212E+6 indicating the B cursor horizontal position is
394.348 MHz.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified view.

2-264 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition -80 sets the cursor

position to -90 dBm.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:SCREEN:BYPOSition? might return
:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:SCREEN:BYPOSITION -90.0 indicating
the B cursor vertical position is -90 dBm.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SPLITMODE
This command sets or queries whether both cursors have same or different source.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SPLITMODE {SAME|SPLIT}

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SPLITMODE?

Arguments SAME specifies both cursors have the same sources.

SPLIT specifies both cursors have different sources.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:SPLITMODE SPLIT specified that the cursors

have different sources.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:SPLITMODE? might return
:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:SPLITMODE SAME indicating both cursors
have the same source.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:STATE
This command sets or queries the visible state of the cursor of the specified cursor
n the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:STATE {OFF|ON|0|1}

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:STATE?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 specifies the cursor is not visible; any other value displays the cursor.

OFF specifies the cursor is not visible.

ON displays the cursor.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-265

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:STATE ON specifies the cursor is visible.

DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:STATE? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:STATE 1 indicating the cursor is
visible.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified
cursor in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition 1.0E+6 sets the cursor

to 1 MHz.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:VBArs:APOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:VBARS:APOSITION
792.4465962305570E+3 indicating the cursor position is 792.447 kHz.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified
cursor in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition 300.0E+6 sets the

cursor position to 300 MHz.

2-266 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:VBArs:BPOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:VBARS:BPOSITION
394.3483403001212E+6 indicating the B cursor horizontal position is
394.348 MHz.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)

This command returns the delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor
in the specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?

Returns Returns the delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified
view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:VBARS:DELTA 393.5558937038906E+6
indicating the delta T cursor readout value is 393.556 MHz.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:UNIts? (Query Only)

This command returns cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the
specified view.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:UNIts?

Returns Returns cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:VBArs:UNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS "Hz" indicating the A
cursor vertical units are Hz.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-267

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:AHPOSition? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the value of the cursor A horizontal position.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:AHPOSition?

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView1:CURSor:WAVEform:AHPOSition? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:AHPOSITION 9.91E+37.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition
Sets or returns the waveform cursor A position in the specified plot view.

NOTE. In case of an XY plot, this command has no effect when used to set the
value. In the case of a bathtub plot, this command sets or queries the cursor A
vertical position. For all other plots, this command sets or queries the cursor
A horizontal position.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the waveform cursor A position in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition 7E+5 sets the

position to 700 kHz.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:WAVEform:APOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:APOSITION
792.4465962305570E+3 indicating the A cursor waveform position is
792.4 kHz.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:AVPOSition? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the value of the cursor A vertical position.

2-268 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:AVPOSition?

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:AVPOSition? might return

:DISplay:REFFFTView1:CURSor:WAVEform:AVPOSition 1.605E+0
indicating the cursor vertical position is 1.6 dBm.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BHPOSition? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the value of the cursor B horizontal position.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BHPOSition?

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BHPOSition? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW1:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:BHPOSITION 9.91E+37.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition
Sets or returns the waveform cursor B position in the specified plot view.

NOTE. In case of an XY plot, this command has no effect when used to set the
value. In the case of a bathtub plot, this command has no effect. Queries return
invalid values. For all other plots, this command sets or queries the cursor
B horizontal position.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the waveform cursor B position in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition 4E+8 sets the

cursor position to 400 MHz.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-269

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:REFFFTView5:CURSor:WAVEform:BPOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:BPOSITION
394.3483403001212E+6 indicating the B waveform curosr position is
394.35 MHz.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BVPOSition? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the value of the cursor B vertical position.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BVPOSition?

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView1:CURSor:WAVEform:BVPOSition? might

return :DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:BVPOSition
-119.866E+0 indicating the cursor vertical position is -119.9 dBm.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:GRIDlines
This command sets or returns the grid lines setting of the plot.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:GRIDlines {HORizontal|VERTical|BOTH}

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:GRIDlines?

Arguments HORizontal specifies horizontal grid lines.

VERTical specifies vertical grid lines.
BOTH specifies both horizontal and vertical grid lines.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:GRIDlines hhorizontal specifies horizontal gird

lines.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:GRIDlines? might return
:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:GRIDLINES BOTH indicating that both vertical
and horizontal grid lines are diplayed

2-270 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:REF:REF<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the state of the specified reference waveform in
the specified Waveform View.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:REF:REF<x>:STATE boolean

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:REF:REF<x>:STATE?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the specified reference; any other value turns this feature on.

OFF disables the display the specified reference.

ON enables the specified reference.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:REF:REF5:STATE 0 turns display of the reference off.

DISplay:REFFFTView5:REF:REF5:STATE? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:REF:REF5:STATE 1 indicating the
reference is displayed.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE
This command sets or queries the x-axis scale setting for Ref FFT.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE {LINEAr|LOG}

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE?

Arguments LINEAr specifies a linear scale.

LOG specifies a logarithmic scale.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:XAXIS:SCALE linear sets the x-axis scale to linear.

DISplay:REFFFTView5:XAXIS:SCALE? might return

:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:XAXIS:SCALE LOG indicating x-axis
scale for the specified reference view is logarithmic.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-271

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM
This command sets or returns the left edge of the zoom x-axis in the specified
plot view.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM?

Arguments <NR3> is the left edge of the zoom x-axis in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM 2.0E+6 sets the left edge of

the specified view to 2.0 MHz.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM? might return
:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:ZOOM:XAXIS:FROM 1.3295739742362E+6
indicating the left edge of the specified view is 1.33 MHz.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO
This command sets or queries the right edge of the zoom x-axis in the specified
plot view.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO?

Arguments <NR3> is the right edge of the zoom x-axis in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO 2.0E+8 sets the right edge of the

zoom x-axis to 200 MHz.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO? might return
:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO 235.0376933178995E+6
indicating the right edge of the zoom x-axis is 235.0 MHz.

2-272 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM
This command sets or queries the bottom value of the zoom y-axis in the specified
plot view.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM?

Arguments <NR3> is the bottom value of the zoom y-axis in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM -120.0 sets the bottom value of

the zoom y-axis to -120.0 dBm.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM? might return
:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:ZOOM:YAXIS:FROM -129.7533120632172
indicating the bottom value of the zoom y-axis is -129.8 dBm.

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO
This command sets or queries the top value of the zoom y-axis in the specified
plot view.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO <NR3>

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO?

Arguments <NR3> is the top value of the zoom y-axis in the specified plot view.

Examples DISplay:REFFFTView5:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO 0.0 sets the top value of the zoom

y-axis to 0.0 dBm.
DISplay:REFFFTView5:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO? might return
:DISPLAY:REFFFTVIEW5:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO 15.8820685863495
indicating the top value of the zoom y-axis is 15.9 dBm.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-273

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:SELect:BUS
This command sets or queries the overall selected bus. Sets are applied to all views
that contain the source and the selected view is changed. When multiple buses are
open, querying the command gives the correct result, but the bus cannot set.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:SELect:BUS BUS<x>

DISplay:SELect:BUS?

Arguments BUS<x> is the selected bus.

Examples DISplay:SELect:BUS Bus2 sets Bus 2 as the selected bus.

DISplay:SELect:BUS? might return :DISPLAY:SELECT:BUS BUS1

indicating Bus 1 is the selected bus.

DISplay:SELect:MATH
This command sets or queries the overall selected math. Sets are applied to all
views that contain the source and the selected view is changed. When multiple
Math are open, querying the command gives the correct result, but the required
Math cannot be set.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:SELect:MATH MATH<x>

DISplay:SELect:MATH?

Arguments MATH<x> is the selected math.

Examples DISplay:SELect:MATH MATH1 selects Math 1.

DISplay:SELect:MATH? might display :DISPLAY:SELECT:MATH MATH2

indicating that Math 2 is selected.

2-274 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:SELect:REFerence
This command sets or queries the overall selected reference waveform. Sets are
applied to all views that contain the source and the selected view is changed.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:SELect:REFerence {NONE|REF<x>}

Arguments Arguments are the selected reference.

Examples DISplay:SELect:REFerence REF2 selects reference 2.

DISplay:SELect:REFERENCE? might return DISPLAY:SELECT:REFERENCE

NONE indicating no reference is selected.

DISplay:SELect:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the overall selected source. Sets are applied to all
views that contain the source and the selected view is changed.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:SELect:SOUrce {NONE |CH<x> |DCH<x> |BUS<x> |MATH<x>

|PLOT<x> |REF<x>}

Arguments NONE disables the selected source.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel to use as the source.

DCH<x> specifies a digital channel to use as the source. The supported digital
channel value is 1.
MATH<x> specifies a math waveform to use as the source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform to use as the source.

PLOT<x> specifies a plot as the source.

Examples DISplay:SELect:SOUrce Bus1 selects Bus1 as the selected source.

DISplay:SELect:SOUrce? might return :DISPLAY:SELECT:SOURCE MATH1

indicating Math 1 is the selected source.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-275

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:SELect:VIEW
This command sets or queries the selected view.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:SELect:VIEW
{WAVEVIEW1|MATHFFT<x>|PLOTVIEW<x>|REFFFT<x>}

Arguments Arguments are the selected view.

Examples DISplay:SELect:VIEW PLOTVIEW1 selects PLOTVIEW1 as the selected view.

DISplay:SELect:VIEW? might return :DISPLAY:SELECT:VIEW MATHFFT1

indicating MATHFFT1 is the selected view.

DISplay:SELect:WAVEView<x>:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the selected source in the given waveview.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:SELect:WAVEView<x>:SOUrce
{CH<x>|MATH<x>|BUS<x>|REF<x>|PLOT<x>}

Arguments Arguments are the selected source.

Examples DISplay:SELect:WAVEView1:SOUrce MATH1 sets MATH1 as the selected

source.
DISplay:SELect:WAVEView1:SOUrce? might return
:DISPLAY:SELECT:WAVEVIEW1:SOURCE CH2 indicating CH2 is the
selected source.

DISplay:VARpersist
This command sets or queries display persistence decay time, which is the
approximate decay time for a freshly struck persistence sample.

Group Display Control

2-276 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:VARpersist <NR3>

DISplay:VARpersist?

Related Commands DISplay:PERSistence

Arguments <NR3> indicates the persistence decay time and ranges from 0.5 to 100.

Examples DISPLAY:VARPERSIST 5 sets the persistence decay time to 5.

DISPLAY:VARPERSIST? might return :DISPLAY:VARPERSIST 3.0000E-01,

indicating that persistence decay time is currently set to 0.300.

DISplay:WAVEform
This command globally enables or disables the waveform display. When
disabled, the waveform is still acquired and held in memory, but it is not drawn to
the screen. Disabling the waveform display may improve processing speed.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEform {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:WAVEform?

Arguments <NR1> enables or disables the waveform display. 0 disables the waveform
display; any other value enables the waveform display.
ON enables the waveform display.

OFF disables the waveform display.

Examples DISplay:WAVEform OFF disables the waveform display.

DISplay:WAVEform? might return DISplay:WAVEform 1, indicating that the

waveform display is enabled.

DISplay:WAVEView:CURSor:CURSOR1:ROLOCATION
This command sets or queries the location to display the Waveform View cursor
readouts (in the Waveform View graticule or in a badge in the Results Bar).

Group Cursor

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-277

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView:CURSor:CURSOR1:ROLOCATION {GRATICULE|BADGE}

DISplay:WAVEView:CURSor:CURSOR1:ROLOCATION?

Arguments GRATICULE sets the Waveform View cursor readouts to display as part of the
cursors in the plot view.
BADGE removes the Waveform View cursor readouts from the cursors in the
graticule and displays the cursor information as a badge in the Results Bar.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView:CURSor:CURSOR1:ROLOCATION GRATICULE sets the

cursor readout information for the Waveform View to display in the Waveform
View graticule.
DISplay:WAVEView:CURSor:CURSOR1:ROLOCATION? might return
DISplay:WAVEView:CURSor:CURSOR1:ROLOCATION BADGE, indicating that
cursor readout information for the Waveform View is set to display as a badge
in the Results Bar.

DISplay:WAVEView:GRIDTYPE
This command sets or queries the Waveform View Graticule type.

Group Display

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView:GRIDTYPE {MOVEABLE|FIXED}

DISplay:WAVEView:GRIDTYPE?

Arguments MOVEABLE sets the Waveform View so that both the waveform and the grid
(graticule) move together when moving the waveform horizontally
FIXED sets the Waveform View so that the grid dows not move when moving the
waveform horizontally.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView:GRIDTYPE MOVEABLE sets the Waveform View to enable

both the graticule and the waveform to move together.
DISplay:WAVEView:GRIDTYPE? might return FIXED, indicating that the
graticule will not change positions if the waveform moves horizontally.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:STATE
Sets or queries the state of the specified bus in the specified Waveform View.

2-278 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:STATE {OFF|ON|0|1}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:STATE?

Arguments 0 turns specified bus off.

1 turns the specified bus on.

ON turns the specified bus on.

OFF turns specified bus off.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:BUS:B1:STATE OFF turns specified bus off.

DISplay:WAVEView1:BUS:B1:STATE? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:BUS:B1:STATE 1 indicating the specified bus is on.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:VERTical:POSition
Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified bus in the specified Waveform
View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:VERTical:POSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical position of the specified bus.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:BUS:B1:VERTical:POSition 1.0e0 sets the position

to 1 division.
DISplay:WAVEView1:BUS:B1:VERTical:POSition? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:BUS:B1:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E+0 indicating
the position is 0.0 divisions.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-279

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:STATE
Sets or queries the state of the specified channel in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:STATE?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the specified channel on the specified Waveform View; any
other value turns this feature on.
OFF disables the display the specified channel on the specified Waveform View.

ON enables the specified channel on the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CH1:STATE ON turns on channel 1.

DISplay:WAVEView1:CH1:STATE? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1:STATE 0 indicating channel 1 is off.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:VERTical:POSition
Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified channel in the specified
Waveform View in divisions. 0.0 divisions is center, 5.0 top of the window, and
-5.0 the bottom of the window.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:VERTical:POSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical position in divisions. 0.0 divisions is center, 5.0 top of the
window, and -5.0 the bottom of the window.

2-280 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CH1:VERTical:POSition 1.0e0 sets the position

to 1 division.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CH1:VERTical:POSition? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1:VERTICAL:POSITION -3.4400 indicating the
channel 1 vertical position is -3.44 divisions.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:VERTical:SCAle
Sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified channel in volts per division
within the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:VERTical:SCAle?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical scale of the specified channel.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CH1:VERTical:SCAle 2.0e2 sets the vertical scale to

200 mV per division.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CH1:VERTical:SCAle? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1:VERTICAL:SCALE 200.0000E-3 indicating the
scale is 200 mV per division.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor? (Query Only)

This query returns the cursor parameters for the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor?

Returns Returns the cursor parameters for the specified Waveform View.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-281

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor? might return

WAVEFORM;AUTO;2.4993299784074;2.4958885115371;
-3.4414668702805E-3;"A";"A";300.0E-6;2.2369669999970;
256.967000E-3;-300.0E-6;-300.0E-6;300.0E-6; "????
????";"s";"???? ????";600.0E-6;1.6666666666667E+3;
1;300.0E-6;-300.0E-6;SAME;4.1655499640123E+3;INDEPENDENT;AUTO

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>? (Query Only)

This query returns the cursor parameters for the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>?

Returns Returns the cursor parameters for the specified cursor in the specified Waveform
View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:BPOSITION
5.0E-6;APOSITION
-5.0E-6;:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR:BSOURCE
AUTO;HBARS:BPOSITION 9.91E+37;BUNITS
"V";AUNITS "V";APOSITION 9.91E+37;DELTA
9.91E+37;:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR:VBA
RS:BPOSITION 5.0E-6;APOSITION -5.0E-6;UNITS "s";DELTA
10.0E-6;ALTERNATEB "???? ????";ALTERNATEA
"???? ????";:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR:STATE
1;FUNCTION WAVEFORM;SCREEN:AYPOSITION
-2.0E-3;BXPOSITION -5.0E-6;BYPOSITION -2.0E-3;AXPOSITIO N
-5.0E-6;:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR:MODE
INDEPENDENT;ASOURCE AUTO;DDT
9.91E+37;ONEOVERDELTATVALUE 100.0E+3;SPLITM ODE
SAME;LINESTYLE SOLID.

2-282 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:ASOUrce
This command sets or queries the cursor A source of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and
must be WAVEView1. Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:ASOUrce {AUTO| CH<x>|

BUS<x>| DCH<x>_DALL| MATH<x>| REF<x>| PLOT<x>}
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:ASOUrce?

Arguments AUTO specifies auto as the cursor A source.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel to use as the cursor A source.

BUS<x> specifies a bus to use as the cursor A source.

DCH<x>_DALL specifies a digital channel to use as the cursor A source The

supported digital channel value is 1.
MATH<x> specifies a math waveform to use as the cursor A source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform to use as the cursor A source.

PLOT<x> specifies a plot as the cursor A source.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:ASOUrce CH1 sets the cursor

1 source to channel 1.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:ASOUrce? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:ASOURCE REF1 indicating the
cursor A source is reference 1.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:BSOUrce
This command sets or queries the cursor B source of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and
must be WAVEView1. Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:BSOUrce {AUTO| CH<x>|

BUS<x>| DCH<x>_DALL| MATH<x>| REF<x>| PLOT<x>
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:BSOUrce?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-283

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments AUTO specifies auto as the cursor B source.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel to use as the cursor B source.

BUS<x> specifies a bus to use as the cursor B source.

DCH<x>_DALL specifies a digital channel to use as the cursor B source The

supported digital channel value is 1.
MATH<x> specifies a math waveform to use as the cursor B source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform to use as the cursor B source.

PLOT<x> specifies a plot as the cursor B source.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:BSOUrce CH1 sets the cursor B

source to channel 1.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:BSOUrce? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:BSOURCE REF1 indicating the
cursor b source is reference 1.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:DDT? (Query Only)

This query returns the delta V over delta T cursor readout value of the specified
cursor in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:DDT?

Returns The delta V over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:DDT? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:DDT 9.91E+37 indicating the delta
V over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor is 9.91E+37.

2-284 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:FUNCtion
This command sets or queries the cursor type of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:FUNCtion
{SCREEN|WAVEFORM|VBArs|HBArs}
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:FUNCtion?

Arguments HBArs specifies horizontal bar cursors, which measure in vertical units.
VBArs specifies vertical bar cursors, which measure in horizontal units.
SCREEN specifies both horizontal and vertical bar cursors, which measure in
horizontal and vertical units specified by the Cursor 1 and Cursor 2 Sources. Use
these cursors to measure anywhere in the waveform display area.
WAVEform specifies paired or split cursors in YT display format for measuring
waveform amplitude and time. In XY and XYZ format, these cursors indicate the
amplitude positions of an XY pair (Ch1 vs Ch2 voltage, where Ch1 is the X axis
and Ch2 is the Y axis) relative to the trigger.

Examples DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:FUNCTION VBArs selects the

vertical bar cursor type for the specified Waveform View and cursor.
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:FUNCTION? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:FUNCTION HBArs indicating that
the specified cursor is set to HBArs.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:APOSition
Sets or queries the HBARs vertical A position of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-285

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:APOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View. 0.0 divisions is center, 5.0 top of the waveview, and -5.0 the
bottom of the waveview.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:HBArs:APOSition 3.0e0 sets the

cursor position to 3 V.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:HBArs:APOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:HBARS:APOSITION
2.9303448275862 indicating the cursor position is 2.93 V.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:AUNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:AUNIts?

Arguments <QString> is the cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:HBArs:AUNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:HBARS:AUNITS "V" indicating
the AUNITS are set to Volts.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:BPOSition
Sets or queries the HBARs vertical B position of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

2-286 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:BPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:HBArs:BPOSition 4.0e-1 sets

the position to 400 mV.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:HBArs:BPOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:HBARS:BPOSITION
387.9148706896567E-3 indicating the B cursor position is 387.9 mV.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:BUNIts? (Query Only)

This command queries the cursor B vertical units of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:BUNIts?

Returns <QString> is the cursor B vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:HBArs:BUNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:HBARS:BUNITS "V" indicating
the BUNITS are set to Volts.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)

This command queries the delta V cursor readout value of the specified cursor in
the specified Waveform View.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-287

Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:HBArs:DELTa?

Returns The delta V cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified Waveform
View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:HBArs:DELTa? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:HBARS:DELTA 2.612085129310
indicating the delta between the cursors is 2.61 V.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:MODe
Sets or queries the cursor tracking mode of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:MODe
{INDEPENDENT|TRACK}

Arguments TRACK ties the navigational functionality of the two cursors together. For cursor 1
adjustments, this ties the movement of the two cursors together; however, cursor 2
continues to move independently of cursor 1.
INDEPENDENT allows independent adjustment of the two cursors.

Examples DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:MODE TRACK specifies that the

cursor positions move in unison.
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:MODE? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:MODE TRACK, indicating that the
two cursors move in unison.

2-288 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? (Query
Only)
This query returns the one over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor
in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE?

Returns The one over delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE? might

return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:ONEOVERDELTATVALUE
179.3188E+3 indicating the one over delta time value is 179.3 kHz.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:AXPOSition
Sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:AXPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:AXPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:AXPOSITION 15.0E-3

sets the x position of screen cursor1 in waveview1 to 15 mV.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-289

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:AXPOSITION? might
return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:AXPOSITION
-64.0000E-03 indicating that x position of the specified screen cursor in the
specified Waveform View is set to -64 mV.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:AYPOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor
in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:AYPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:AYPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> the vertical cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:AYPOSITION 25.0E-3

sets the y position of the specified screen cursor of the specified Waveform View
to 25 mV.
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:AYPOSITION? might
return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:AYPOSITION
-53.0000E-03 indicating that y position of the specified screen cursor of the
specified Waveform View is set to -53 mV.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:BXPOSition
Sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

2-290 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:BXPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:BXPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:AXPOSITION 15.0E-3

sets the x position of the specified screen cursor in the specified Waveform View
to 15 mV.
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:AXPOSITION? might
return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:AXPOSITION
-64.0000E-03 indicating that x position of the specified screen cursor in the
specified Waveform View is set to -64 mV.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:BYPOSition
This command sets or queries the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor
in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:BYPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SCREEN:BYPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> the vertical cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:BYPOSITION 25.0E-3

sets the y position of the screen cursor of waveview1 to 25 mV.
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:BYPOSITION? might
return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SCREEN:BYPOSITION
-53.0000E-03 indicating that y position of the specified screen cursor of the
specified Waveform View is set to -53 mV.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-291

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SPLITMODE
This command sets or queries whether both cursors have the same or different
sources.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SPLITMODE {SAME|SPLIT}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:SPLITMODE?

Arguments SAME specifies both cursors have the same source.

SPLIT specifies the cursors have different sources.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:SPLITMODE SPLIT specifies the

cursors have different sources.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:SPLITMODE? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:SPLITMODE SAME indicating the
cursors have the same source.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the visible state of the specified cursor in the
specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:STATE?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the specified cursor in the specified Waveform View; any
other value turns this feature on.
OFF disables the specified cursor in the specified Waveform View.

2-292 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

ON enables the specified cursor in the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:STATE OFF turns the specified

cursor off.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:STATE? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:STATE 1 indicating the specified
cursor in the specified Waveform View is on.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:VBArs:APOSition
This command sets or queries the cursor A horizontal position of the specified
cursor in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:VBArs:APOSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:VBArs:APOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:VBArs:APOSition -4.0e-6 set

the cursor position to 4.0 μs.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:VBArs:APOSition? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:VBARS:APOSITION -5.0E-6
indicating the cursor A position is -5.0 μs.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:VBArs:BPOSition
This command sets or queries the cursor B horizontal position of the specified
cursor in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-293

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:VBArs:BPOSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:VBArs:BPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:VBArs:BPOSition 4.0e-6 sets

the cursor position to 4.0 μs.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:VBArs:BPOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:VBARS:BPOSITION
3.2736951319481E-6 indicating the B cursor position is 3.27 μs.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:VBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)

This query sets or returns the delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor
in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:VBArs:DELTa?

Returns The delta T cursor readout value of the specified cursor in the specified Waveform
View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:VBArs:DELTa? might

return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:VBARS:DELTA
6.7926388747725E-6 indicating the delta T cursor readout value is 6.79 μs.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:VBArs:UNIts? (Query Only)

This query returns cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

2-294 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:VBArs:UNIts?

Returns The cursor A vertical units of the specified cursor in the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:VBArs:UNIts? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:VBARS:UNITS "s" indicating
the cursor units are seconds.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:WAVEform:APOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor A position of the specified
cursor in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:WAVEform:APOSition
<NR3>
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:WAVEform:APOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:WAVEform:APOSition 1.5e-6

sets the position to 1.5 μs.
DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:WAVEform:APOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:WAVEFORM:APOSITION
-1.2667480236557E-6 indicating the position is 1.27 μs.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-295

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:AVPOSition? (Query Only)

This command queries the vertical waveform value at the cursor A position in
the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1. .

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:AVPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:AVPOSition? might

return :DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:AVPOSition
1.35, indicating that the vertical waveform value at the Cursor A position is
1.35 V.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:WAVEform:BPOSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal cursor B position of the specified
cursor in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Cursor<x> is the specified cursor and must be CURSOR1.

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:WAVEform:BPOSition
<NR3>
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:WAVEform:BPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal cursor B position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:WAVEform:BPOSition 8.0e-9

sets the position to 8.0 ns.

2-296 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR1:WAVEform:BPOSition? might
return :DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CURSOR:CURSOR1:WAVEFORM:BPOSITION
711.6310718892624E-9 indicating the cursor position is 711.6 ns.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:BVPOSition? (Query Only)

This command queries the vertical waveform value at the cursor B position in
the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1. .

Group Cursor

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:BVPOSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal cursor A position of the specified cursor in the specified
Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:BVPOSition? might

return :DISplay:WAVEView1:CURSor:CURSOR:WAVEform:BVPOSition
-0.72, indicating that the vertical waveform value at the Cursor B position is
-0.72 V.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:DCH<x>_D<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the display state of the specified digital channel in
the specified waveview. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and
must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:DCH<x>_D<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:DCH<x>_D<x>:STATE?

Arguments DCH<x>_D<x> specifies the digital channel. The supported digital channel value
is 1. The supported digital bit values are 0 to 15 and ALL (all digital bits).
<NR1> = 0 disables the specified channel on the specified Waveform View; any
other value turns this feature on.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-297

Commands listed in alphabetical order

OFF disables the display the specified channel on the specified Waveform View.

ON enables the specified channel on the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:DCH1_DALL:STATE ON enables the display of all bits of

digital channel on the specified waveview.
DISplay:WAVEView1:DCH1_D0:STATE? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:DCH1_D0:STATE 0 indicating specified
digital channels in the specified waveview are off.

DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW<x>:DCH<x>_DALL:DIGORDER
This command sets or queries the order of the digital channels. WAVEView<x> is
the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW<x>:DCH<x>_DALL:DIGORDER <QString>

DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW<x>:DCH<x>_DALL:DIGORDER?

Arguments DCH<x> specifies the digital channel. The supported digital channel value is 1.

<QString> specifies the ascending or descending order , enclosed in quotes.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:DCH1_DALL:DIGORDER "fedcba9876543210" sets

the ascending or descending order of the digital channels.
DISplay:WAVEView1:DCH1_DALL:DIGORDER? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:DCH1_DALL:DIGORDER "fedcba9876543210"
indicating the order of the digital channels.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:DCH<x>_DALL:VERTical:POSition
Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified channel in the specified
Waveform View in divisions. 0.0 divisions is center, 5.0 top of the window, and
-5.0 the bottom of the window. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View
and must be WAVEView1. DCH<x> is the specified digital channel and must be 1.

Group Display Control

2-298 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:DCH<x>_DALL:VERTical:POSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:DCH<x>_DALL:VERTical:POSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical position in divisions. 0.0 divisions is center, 5.0 top of the
window, and -5.0 the bottom of the window.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:DCH1_DALL:VERTical:POSition 1.0e0 sets the

position to 1 division.
DISplay:WAVEView1:DCH1_DALL:VERTical:POSition? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:DCH1_DALL:VERTICAL:POSITION -3.4400
indicating the vertical position is -3.44 divisions.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:FILTer
This command sets or queries the type of interpolation filter for the display.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:FILTer {SINX|LINear}

Arguments LINEAr specifies linear interpolation, where acquired points are connected with
straight lines.
SINX specifies sin(x)/x interpolation, where acquired points are fit to a curve.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:FILTer SINX specifies sine-curve interpolation, when

magnifying waveforms.
DISplay:WAVEView1:FILTer? might return :DISplay:WAVEView1:FILTer
LINEAR, indicating that straight-line interpolation is specified for magnifying
waveforms.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:GRAticule
This command selects or queries the type of graticule that is displayed.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-299

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:GRAticule {GRId|TIMe|FULl|NONe}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:GRAticule?

Arguments GRId specifies a frame and grid only.

TIMe specifies a time graticule only.

FULl specifies a frame, a grid and cross hairs.

NONe specified no graticule.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:GRAticule TIME specifies a time graticule.

DISplay:WAVEView1:GRAticule? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:GRATICULE GRID indicating the graticule is a grid.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:INTENSITy:GRATicule
This command sets or queries the graticule saturation level.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:INTENSITy:GRATicule <NR2>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:INTENSITy:GRATicule?

Arguments <NR2> is the graticule saturation level.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:INTENSITy:GRATicule 75 sets the saturation level

to 75%.
DISplay:WAVEView1:INTENSITy:GRATicule? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:INTENSITY:GRATICULE 66.0000 indicating the
saturation level is at 66%.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:INTENSITy:WAVEform
This command sets or queries the waveform saturation level.

2-300 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:INTENSITy:WAVEform <NR2>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:INTENSITy:WAVEform?

Arguments <NR2> is the waveform saturation level.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:INTENSITy:WAVEform 75 sets the saturation level

to 75%.
DISplay:WAVEView1:INTENSITy:WAVEform? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM 62.0000 indicating the
saturation level is 62%.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:AUTOScale
This command sets or queries whether the specified math gets auto-scaled when
the math equation changes within the specified Waveform View.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:AUTOScale {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:AUTOScale?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the autoscaling the math in the specified Waveform View;
any other value turns this feature on.
OFF disables the autoscaling the math in the specified Waveform View.

ON enables the autoscaling the math in the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:MATH:MATH3:AUTOScale 1 enables the autoscaling the

math in the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView1:MATH:MATH3:AUTOScale? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:MATH:MATH3:AUTOSCALE 0 indicating that Math
3 will not auto-scale.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-301

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the state of the specified math waveform in the
specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:STATE?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the specified math in the specified Waveform View; any other
value turns this feature on.
OFF disables the specified math in the specified Waveform View.

ON enables the specified math in the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:MATH:MATH1:STATE OFF disables the specified math in

the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView1:MATH:MATH2:STATE? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:MATH:MATH2:STATE 1 indicating the math
is displayed.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition
This command sets or queries the vertical position in divisions of the specified
math waveform in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical position in divisions of the specified math waveform.

2-302 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:MATH:MATH1:VERTical:POSition 0 sets the position

to 0 divisions.
DISplay:WAVEView1:MATH:MATH1:VERTical:POSition? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:MATH:MATH1:VERTICAL:POSITION -2.2800
indicating the position is at -2.28 divisions.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle
Sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified math in volts per division within
the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical scale of the specified math waveform.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:MATH:MATH1:VERTical:SCAle 400e-3 sets the scale

to 400 mV per division.
DISplay:WAVEView1:MATH:MATH1:VERTical:SCAle? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:MATH:MATH1:VERTICAL:SCALE 395.0000E-3
indicating the scale is 395 mV.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:STATE
This command sets or queries the state of the specified reference waveform in
the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:STATE?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-303

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables the specified reference in the specified Waveform View; any
other value turns this feature on.
OFF disables the specified reference in the specified Waveform View.

ON enables the specified reference in the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:REF:REF1:STATE OFF disables the specified reference

in the specified Waveform View.
DISplay:WAVEView1:REF:REF1:STATE? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:REF:REF1:STATE 1 indicating the specified
reference in the specified Waveform View is on.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:VERTical:POSition
This command sets or queries the vertical position in divisions of the specified
reference in the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:VERTical:POSition?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical position in divisions.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:REF:REF1:VERTical:POSition -2.5e0 sets the

position to -2.5 divisions.
DISplay:WAVEView1:REF:REF1:VERTical:POSition? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:REF:REF1:VERTICAL:POSITION -2.6400
indicating the position is set to -2.64 divisions.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle
This command sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified reference in volts
per div within the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

2-304 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle?

Arguments <NR3> is the vertical scale of the specified reference waveform.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:REF:REF1:VERTical:SCAle 400e-3 sets the scale to

400 mV per division.
DISplay:WAVEView1:REF:REF1:VERTical:SCAle? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:REF:REF1:VERTICAL:SCALE 378.0000E-3
indicating the scale is 378 mV per division.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:STYle
This command sets or queries how the waveforms are displayed for analysis mode.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:STYle {VECtors|DOTsonly}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:STYle?

Arguments DOTs displays individual data points. New points immediately replace old ones.

VECtors connects adjacent data points. New points immediately replace old ones.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:STYle VECTORS sets the display to connect adjacent

data points.
DISplay:WAVEView1:STYle? might return :DISplay:WAVEView1:STYle
DOTs, indicating that data points are not connected.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:VIEWStyle
The command sets or queries the waveform layout style used by the display.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-305

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:VIEWStyle {OVErlay|STAcked}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:VIEWStyle?

Arguments OVErlay specifies that the display view style used by the specified Waveform
View is overlay.
STAcked specifies that the display view style used by the specified Waveform
View is stacked.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:VIEWStyle OVERLAY sets the view style to overlay.

DISplay:WAVEView1:VIEWStyle? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:VIEWSTYLE STACKED indicating the view style
is stacked.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:Zoom? (Query Only)

This query returns the zoom parameters of the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:Zoom?

Returns Returns the zoom parameters of the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:Zoom? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORIZONTAL:SCALE
2.5000;POSITION 70.0000;WINSCALE
400.0000E-9;:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM 1:VERTICAL:SCALE
3.8000;POSITION 2.5951;:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATE 0.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>? (Query Only)

This query returns the zoom parameters of the specified zoom in the specified
Waveform View. <x> must be 1.

2-306 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

ZOOM<x> is the specified zoom and must be ZOOM1.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>?

Returns Returns the zoom parameters of the specified zoom in the specified Waveform
View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORIZONTAL:SCALE
2.5000;POSITION 70.0000;WINSCALE
400.0000E-9;:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM 1:VERTICAL:SCALE
3.8000;POSITION 2.5951;:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATE 0.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:POSition
Sets or queries the horizontal zoom position (of the specified zoom in the specified
Waveform View) of the zoomed waveform or zoom waveform in the display,
around which the zoom waveform displays. It is freely movable around the
acquisition settings (horizontal span). An acquired waveform or reference could
extend off screen. The valid zoom area does not care about the waveform itself,
only the user setting for acquisition.
For example, if horizontal scale is set to 1 second, position to 50, then the
acquisition area will go from -5 s to +5 s. Zoom window 0 will focus on -5 s
and zoom area 100 will focus on +5 s. If the instrument is stopped and the scale
changed to 0.5 s, there will be data off the ends of the display. However, 0% zoom
will put the user focus on -2.5 s, the lower bound of the acquisition span.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

ZOOM<x> is the specified zoom and must be ZOOM1.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:POSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:POSition?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-307

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR3> is a value from 0 to 100.00 and is the percent of the waveform that is to the
left of screen center, when the zoom factor is 2× or greater.

Examples DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50 sets the

horizontal position of the zoom box of waveview1 to 50 so that it is centered
horizontally on the screen.
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION? might return
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 10.0000,
indicating that the horizontal position of the zoom box of waveview 1 is centered
over the first major graticule division.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:SCALe
This command sets or queries the horizontal zoom factor of the specified zoom in
the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

ZOOM<x> is the specified zoom and must be ZOOM1.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:SCALe <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:SCALe?

Arguments <NR3> is the amount of expansion in the horizontal direction in 1-2-4 increments
of the specified zoom in the specified Waveform View.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORizontal:SCALe 5 sets the horizontal

zoom factor of zoom1 in waveview1 to 5x.
DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORizontal:SCALe? might return
:DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORizontal:SCALe 10, indicating that
the zoom factor of waveview1 is set to 10x.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:WINSCALe
This command sets or queries the overview window horizontal scale in the
specified Waveform View.

2-308 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

ZOOM<x> is the specified zoom and must be ZOOM1.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:WINSCALe <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:HORizontal:WINSCALe?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal scale of the zoom window.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1HORizontal:WINSCALe? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:HORIZONTAL:WINSCALE 80.0000E-9
indicating that the horizontal scale of the overview window is 80 ns per division.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:STATe
This command sets or queries the zoom display state of the specified zoom in the
specified Waveform View. This command is equivalent to pushing the zoom
button on the front panel.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

ZOOM<x> is the specified zoom and must be ZOOM1.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:STATe {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:STATe?

Arguments ON turns the specified zoom on.

OFF turns specified zoom off.

<NR1> = 0 disables the specified zoom; any other value enables the specified
zoom.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATe ON turns the specified zoom on.

DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATe? might return

:DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATe 1, indicating that specified zoom
is on.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-309

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:VERTical:POSition
This command sets or queries the vertical position of the specified zoom in the
specified Waveform View. It is freely movable within the confines of the acquired
waveform. It is measured from the top to bottom of the acquisition window.
The top of the zoom window is -5 * vertical zoom factor. The bottom of the
zoom window is +5 * the vertical zoom factor. For a zoom of 5x, the position
ranges from -25 to 25.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

ZOOM<x> is the specified zoom and must be ZOOM1.

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:VERTical:POSition?

Arguments NR3 is the vertical position of the specified zoom in the specified Waveform View.
It is freely movable within the confines of the acquired waveform. The top of the
zoom window is -5 * vertical zoom factor. The bottom of the zoom window is
+5 * the vertical zoom factor. For a vertical zoom of 5x, the position ranges
from -25 to 25.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:VERTical:POSition 50 sets the vertical

position of the specified zoom in the specified Waveform View to 50, where the
vertical zoom factor is 10x, top of screen is -50 and bottom if +50, and 0 is the
vertical center.
DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:VERTical:POSition? might return
:DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:VERTical:POSition 23.90000,
indicating that the vertical position of the specified zoom in the specified
Waveform View is set to 23.9, where the vertical zoom factor is 10x, top of screen
is -50 and bottom if +50, and 0 is the vertical center.

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:VERTical:SCALe
This command sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of the specified zoom in
the specified Waveform View.

NOTE. WAVEView<x> is the specified Waveform View and must be WAVEView1.

ZOOM<x> is the specified zoom and must be ZOOM1.

2-310 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Zoom

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:VERTical:SCALe <NR3>

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>:VERTical:SCALe?

Arguments <NR3> is the amount of vertical expansion or compression. Based on the value
that you entered, this command uses the nearest scale factor. Setting the vertical
scale to 1 indicates unity (no zoom).

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM2:VERTical:SCALe 5 sets the vertical

scale of zoom1 of waveview1 to 5×.
DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM2:VERTical:SCALe? might return
:DISplay:WAVEView1:ZOOM:ZOOM2:VERTical:SCALe 2.0000, indicating
that the vertical scale of zoom1 of waveview1 is 2×.

DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF:REF<x>:FRAMe
This command sets or returns the selected frame of the specified analog ref. Each
ref has a unique selected frame.

Group Display Control

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF:REF<x>:FRAMe <NR1>

DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF:REF<x>:FRAMe?

Arguments <NR1> is the selected frame of the specified analog ref.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView1:REF:REF2:FRAMe? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:REF:REF2:FRAME 1, indicating the selected
frame is 1.

DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF<x>_DALL:FRAMe
This command sets or returns the selected frame of the specified digital ref. Each
ref has a unique selected frame.

Group Display Control

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-311

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF<x>_DALL:FRAMe <NR1>

DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF<x>_DALL:FRAMe?

Arguments <NR1> is the selected frame of the specified digital ref.

Examples DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF<x>_DALL:FRAMe? might return

:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:REF1_DALL:FRAME 1, indicating the selected frame
is 1.

*ESE
This command sets and queries the bits in the Event Status Enable Register
(ESER). The ESER prevents events from being reported to the Status Byte
Register (STB). For a more detailed discussion of the use of these registers, see
Registers.

Group Status and Error

Syntax *ESE <NR1>

*ESE?

Related Commands *CLS

DESE
*ESR?
EVENT?
EVMsg?
*SRE
*STB?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the binary bits of the ESER according to this value, which ranges
from 0 through 255.
The power-on default for the ESER is 0 if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the ESER
maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle.

NOTE. Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same values allows only those
codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit (bit 5) of
the Status Byte Register. Use the DESE command to set the DESER.

2-312 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples *ESE 209 sets the ESER to binary 11010001, which enables the PON, URQ,
EXE, and OPC bits.
*ESE? might return 186, showing that the ESER contains DESE the binary
value 10111010.

*ESR? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the contents of the Standard Event Status
Register (SESR). *ESR? also clears the SESR (since reading the SESR clears it).
For a more detailed discussion of the use of these registers, see Registers.

Group Status and Error

Syntax *ESR?

Related Commands ALLEv?

*CLS
DESE
*ESE
EVENT?
EVMsg?
*SRE
*STB?

Examples *ESR? might return *ESR 213, showing that the SESR contains the binary
value 11010101.

ETHERnet:DHCPbootp
This command sets the network configuration method to DHCP (that is ON) or
static IP address (that is OFF).

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:DHCPbootp {ON|OFF}

ETHERnet:DHCPbootp?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-313

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ON enables the instrument to search the network for a DHCP server in order to
automatically assign a dynamic IP address to the instrument.

NOTE. Do not use DHCP searching if your instrument has been assigned a static
address on a network. If you set this command to ON, the DHCP search will
delete or change your static IP address information.

OFF disables the instrument to search the network for a DHCP server.

Examples ETHERNET:DHCPBOOTP ON sets the instrument to search for a DHCP server and
assign a dynamic IP address to the instrument.

ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress
This command specifies the network Domain Name Server (DNS) IP address.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress <QString>

ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress?

Arguments <QString> is a standard IP address value, enclosed in quotes.

Examples ETHERNET:DNS:IPADDRESS "128.196.13.252" sets the DNS IP address that

the instrument uses to communicate with the network.

ETHERnet:DOMAINname
This command specifies the network domain name.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:DOMAINname <QString>

ETHERnet:DOMAINname?

Arguments <QString> is the network domain name, enclosed in quotes.

2-314 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples ETHERNET:DOMAINNAME "Alpha1.Mycorp.com" sets the domain name that

the instrument uses to communicate with the network.

ETHERnet:ENET:ADDress? (Query Only)

Returns the Ethernet address (MAC address) value assigned to the instrument.
This is assigned at the factory and can not be changed.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:ENET:ADDress?

Examples ETHERNET:ENET:ADDRESS? returns an Ethernet address such as

08:00:11:01:02:03

ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress
This command specifies the network gateway IP address.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress <QString>

ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress?

Related Commands ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig

ETHERnet:IPADDress
ETHERnet:SUBNETMask

Arguments <QString> is a standard IP address value, enclosed in quotes.

Examples ETHERNET:GATEWAY:IPADDRESS "128.143.16.1" sets the gateway IP

address.

ETHERnet:IPADDress
This command sets the IP address assigned to the instrument.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-315

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:IPADDress <QString>

ETHERnet:IPADDress?

Related Commands ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig

ETHERnet:SUBNETMask
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress

Arguments <QString> is a standard IP address value, enclosed in quotes.

Examples ETHERNET:IPADDRESS "123.121.13.214" sets the instrument's IP address.

ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:RESET (No Query Form)

This command resets the LXI local area network.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:RESET

Examples ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:RESET resets the LXI local area network.

ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:SERVICENAMe
This command sets or queries the service name used for the LXI interface.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:SERVICENAMe <QString>

ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:SERVICENAMe?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of up to 64 characters that specifies the mDNS

service name used for the LXI interface.

2-316 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:SERVICENAMe? might return "Tektronix Oscilloscope

MSO2 053CVV"

ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:STATus? (Query Only)

This query returns the LXI network status: one of OK, FAULT, or IDENTIFY.
IDENTIFY indicates that the device identify mode is enabled.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:STATus?

Related Commands ETHERnet:PING

ETHERnet:PING:STATus?

Returns OK — indicates the network is running and the instrument can “see” the network.

FAULT — indicates the network is not visible, or the network settings are incorrect.

IDENTIFY indicates that a message is being displayed on the instrument’s front

panel indicating which scope the user is currently accessing.

Examples ETHER:LXI:LAN:STAT? might return FAULT, indicating the network is not

visible, or the network settings are incorrect.

ETHERnet:NAME
This command sets or queries the instrument Ethernet hostname assigned to the
instrument.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:NAME <QString>

ETHERnet:NAME?

Arguments <QString> is the network name assigned to the instrument, enclosed in quotes.

Examples ETHERNET:NAME "labscope1" sets the instrument's network name.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-317

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig
This command specifies the Ethernet network configuration setting.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig {AUTOmatic|MANual}

ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig?

Related Commands ETHERnet:NAME

ETHERnet:IPADDress
ETHERnet:SUBNETMask
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress
ETHERnet:DHCPbootp

Arguments AUTOmatic specifies that the instrument’s IP address, subnet mask and gateway
settings will be received from a DHCP server on the local network.
MANual specifies that the Ethernet settings will be configured
manually, using ETHERnet:IPADDress, ETHERnet:SUBNETMask, and
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress.

Examples ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig MANual specifies to configure the Ethernet

settings manually.
ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig? might return AUTOMATIC, indicating the
settings are being configured automatically.

ETHERnet:PING (No Query Form)

Sends a ping packet to the instrument gateway and sets the status accordingly.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:PING EXECute

Examples ETHERNET:PING EXECute causes the instrument to ping the gateway IP address.

2-318 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

ETHERnet:PING:STATus? (Query Only)

Returns the results of sending the ETHERnet:PING command to ping the gateway
IP address.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:PING:STATus?

Returns OK is returned if the computer at the gateway IP address answers.

NORESPOnsE is returned if the computer at the gateway IP address does not

answer.
TRYING is returned if the ping operation is still executing.

NEVER is returned if ETHERnet:PING EXECute has not been previously

sent, indicating that no ping response has ever been received in response to an
ETHERnet:PING EXECute command since the instrument was powered on.

ETHERnet:SUBNETMask
This command sets or queries the instrument subnet mask value.

Group Ethernet

Syntax ETHERnet:SUBNETMask <QString>

ETHERnet:SUBNETMask?

Related Commands ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig

ETHERnet:IPADDress
ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress

Arguments <QString> is the subnet mask value, enclosed in quotes.

Examples ETHERNET:SUBNETMASK "255.255.255.0" sets the subnet mask value using

standard IP address notation format.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-319

Commands listed in alphabetical order

EVENT? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns an event code from the Event Queue that
provides information about the results of the last *ESR? read. EVENT? also
removes the returned value from the Event Queue.

Group Status and Error

Syntax EVENT?

Related Commands ALLEv?

*CLS
DESE
*ESE
*ESR?
EVMsg?
*SRE
*STB?

Examples EVENT? might return :EVENT 110, showing that there was an error in a command
header.

EVMsg? (Query Only)

This query-only command removes a single event code from the Event Queue that
is associated with the results of the last *ESR? read and returns the event code
with an explanatory message. For more information, see Event Handling.

Group Status and Error

Syntax EVMsg?

Related Commands ALLEv?

*CLS
DESE
*ESE

2-320 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

*ESR?
EVENT?
*SRE
*STB?

Returns The event code and message in the following format:

<Event Code><Comma><QString>[<Event
Code><Comma><QString>...]<QString>::= <Message>;[<Command>]
where <Command> is the command that caused the error and may be returned
when a command error is detected by the instrument. As much of the command
will be returned as possible without exceeding the 60 character limit of the
<Message> and <Command> string combined. The command string is
right-justified.

Examples EVMSG? might return :EVMSG 110,"Command header error".

EVQty? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the number of events that are enabled in the
queue. This is useful when using the ALLEv? query, since it lets you know
exactly how many events will be returned.

Group Status and Error

Syntax EVQty?

Related Commands ALLEv?

EVENT?
EVMsg?

Examples EVQTY? might return :EVQTY 3, indicating the number of event codes in the
Event Queue.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-321

Commands listed in alphabetical order

FACtory (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) resets the instrument to its factory default settings.
This command is equivalent to pressing the DEFAULT SETUP button located on
the instrument front panel or selecting Default Setup from the File menu.
This command Performs the following in addition to what is done for the *RST
command:
Clears any pending OPC operations.
Resets the following IEEE488.2 registers:
*ESE 0 (Event Status Enable Register)
*SRE 0 (Service Request Enable Register)
DESE 255 (Device Event Status Enable Register)
*PSC 1 (Power-on Status Clear Flag)
Deletes all defined aliases.
Enables command headers (:HEADer 1).

Group Save and Recall

Syntax FACtory

Related Commands *PSC

RECAll:SETUp

*RST

Arguments None

Examples FACTORY resets the instrument to its factory default settings.

FILESystem? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the directory listing of the current working
directory. This query is the same as the FILESystem:DIR? query.

Group File System

2-322 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax FILESystem?

Related Commands FILESystem:COPy

FILESystem:CWD
FILESystem:DELEte
FILESystem:DIR?
FILESystem:READFile
FILESystem:REName
FILESystem:WRITEFile

Arguments None.

Examples FILESYSTEM? might return :FILESYSTEM:DIR

"myFile.txt","myWaveform.wfm".

FILESystem:COPy (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) copies a named file to a new file. The new file
might be in a totally separate directory than the old file. You can only copy one
file at a time using this command. Wild card characters are not allowed.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:COPy {<source_file_path>,<destination_file_path>}

Related Commands FILESystem:CWD

FILESystem:DELEte

Arguments <source_file_path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path or
directory. If the file path is within the current working directory, you need only
specify the file name.
<destination_file_path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and
path. If the file path is within the current working directory, you need only specify
the file name.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-323

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples FILESYSTEM:COPY "E:/setup1.set","E:/SETUPS/setup1.set" copies

the file named setup1.set, on the E drive to a file named setup1.set in the SETUPS
directory on the E drive.
:FILESystem:CWD "E:/SETUPS"
:FILESystem:COPy ".","I:/Archive/SETUPS"
:FILESystem:COPy "../ch1.isf","I:/SavedWfms/ch1_new.isf"

FILESystem:CWD
This command sets or queries the current working directory. CWD is short
for Current Working Directory. It changes the directory (folder) that the other
FILESystem commands operate on.

NOTE. There are three host ports on the front panel (E:, F:, and G:), and two
on the back panel (H: and I:.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:CWD {<new_working_directory_path>}

FILESystem:CWD?

Arguments <new_working_directory_path> is a quoted string that defines the current

working; a directory name can be up to 128 characters.

Examples FILESYSTEM:CWD "E:/waveforms/" changes the current working directory

to a folder named "waveforms" on the USB flash drive installed in the "E:" USB
Host port.
FILESYSTEM:CWD? might return :FILESYSTEM:CWD "E:/" Indicates the
current working directory is the root folder of the E: USB flash drive port.

FILESystem:DELEte (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) deletes a named file or directory from a mass
storage device. Once removed, the data in that file or directory can no longer be
accessed. If the specified file is a directory, it must be empty before it can be
deleted.

Group File System

2-324 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax FILESystem:DELEte <file_path>

Related Commands FILESystem:COPy

FILESystem:CWD
FILESystem:RMDir

Arguments <file_path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file
path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the file name.

Examples FILESYSTEM:DELETE "NOT_MINE.SET" deletes the file

named NOT_MINE.SET from the folder referred to by the
FILESYSTEM:CWDFILESystem:CWD command.

FILESystem:DIR? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns a comma separated list of quoted strings. Each
string contains the name of a file or directory in the folder referred to by the
FILESYSTEM:CWDFILESystem:CWD command.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:DIR?

Related Commands FILESystem:CWD

FILESystem:MKDir

Arguments None

Examples FILESYSTEM:DIR? might return :FILESYSTEM:DIR

"161012_132039_000.wfm","161012_132039_001.wfm","161220_191452.png",
"161220_191554.csv","170320_132925_0 00.wfm","170320_132929_000.set",
"Ch2-Ch3_000.set","E:","F:","G:","H:","I:","J:","Rgjtest_000.set",
"RgjSetupRuntTrig4chnl
s_000.set","RgjSetup_000.set","ScrnShot1jeh2_000.wfm","ScrnShot1jeh_000.wfm",
"ScrnShot_000.png","ScrnShot_000.wfm","Scrn
_000.set","Scrn_001.set","Scrn_002.set","Scrn_003.set","Scrn_004.set",
"Wfm_000.wfm","Wfm_001.wfm","Wfm_002.wfm","Wfm_003
.wfm","Wfm_004.wfm","Wfm_005.wfm","Wfm_006.wfm","digChans_000.wfm".

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-325

Commands listed in alphabetical order

FILESystem:HOMEDir? (Query Only)

This query returns the current user's home directory.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:HOMEDir?

Returns The current user's home directory as a quoted string.

Examples FILESYSTEM:HOMEDIR? might return: "C:".

FILESystem:LDIR? (Query Only)

Returns a comma separated list of every file, file size, type,
modification date and time, and directory in the folder referred to by the
FILESYSTEM:CWDFILESystem:CWD command. This is different than the
:DIR query in that it provides a long output format with the file size, type,
and modification date/time. Each entry is a semicolon separated list: < file
name>;<type>;<size in bytes>;<date>;<time>

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:LDIR?

Returns A comma separated list of every file, file size, type, modification date and time,
and directory in the folder referred to by the FILESystem:CWDcommand.

Examples FILESYSTEM:LDIR? might return "tek0000CH1.isf;FILE;20342;2009-05-21;13:

58:24", "TEMP;DIR;4096;2009-09-15;06:20:44".

FILESystem:MKDir (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) creates a new directory.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:MKDir <directory_path>

2-326 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands FILESystem:CWD

FILESystem:DIR?

Arguments <directory_path> is a quoted string that specifies the directory to create.

Examples FILESYSTEM:MKDIR "E:\NewDirectory" creates the directory named

NewDirectory at the root of the E drive.
These two commands create the directory MyNewSubDirectory within the
existing directory MyDirectory at the root of the E drive:
FILESYSTEM:CWD "E:/MyDirectory"; FILESYSTEM:MKDIR
"MyNewSubDirectory"

FILESYSTEM:MOUNT:DRIVE
The command form mounts a network drive specified by the quoted string
argument. The quoted string argument is a semicolon separated list of the
following fields:
Drive name - The drive name to be mounted. It is a case insensitive single
letter followed by a colon. The drive name must be a letter between 'L:' and
'Z:', inclusive.
Server identity - The server identity is the DNS name of the server or the IP
address of the server.
Path - The path to be mounted (e.g. /level1/level2/mydirectory).
User name - The user name for the drive.
User password - The password for the drive.
Domain name - The domain/workgroup of the target mount.
Verbose - The verbose option to capture mount failure messages.
Domain name, user name, user password, and verbose are optional and are only
used for mounts requiring SMB/CIFS interworking (MS Windows and MacOS).
The query form returns a 0 or 1 to indicate that the drive name (quoted string) is
currently mounted or not. A return of 1 indicates the drive is mounted. A return of
0 indicated the drive is not mounted.

Group File System

Syntax FILESYSTEM:MOUNT:DRIVE <QString>

FILESYSTEM:MOUNT:DRIVE? <QString>

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-327

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples FILESYSTEM:MOUNT:DRIVE "L:;000.000.0.0;/level1/level2/mydir"

specifies to mount the L: drive using the drive name, server identity, and path.
FILESYSTEM:MOUNT:DRIVE? "L:" might return 0, indicating the L: drive is
not mounted.

FILESystem:MOUNT:TEKDrive
This command mounts the TekDrive specified by the quoted string arguments.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:MOUNT:TEKDrive <QString>

FILESystem:MOUNT:TEKDrive? <QString>

Arguments The quoted string must contain the following information:

Drive name - The TekDrive name to be mounted. It is a case insensitive.
AutoDisconnectMode:
Power Cycle - Select to unmount the TekDrive after power cycling the
oscilloscope. There is no time restriction when this option is selected.
Never - Select to mount the TekDrive connection permanently.
Custom - Select to disconnect the TekDrive after a chosen duration. The
default selection is Power Cycle.
RestrictToCurrentIP - Restrict connection to current network IP only. This
may be used for additional network security.
AutoDisconnectTime - Enter the required time for the Auto Disconnect.
The TekDrive gets disconnected automatically from the instrument after the
specified time. The duration is in hours. The minimum is 0.25 hours and
the maximum is 744 hours.

Examples FILESystem:MOUNT:TEKDrive "TekDrive1;Custom;true;8" specifies to

mount TekDrive1, auto disconnect it after 8 hours, and restrict the connection to
current network IP only.
FILESYSTEM:MOUNT:DRIVE? "TekDrive1" might return 1, indicating
TekDrive1 is mounted.

2-328 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

FILESystem:READFile (No Query Form)

This command writes the contents of the specified file to the current interface.
If the specified file does not exist or is not readable, an appropriate error event
is posted.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:READFile <QString>

Related Commands FILESystem:CWD

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file path is
within the current working directory, you need only specify the file name.

Examples FILESYSTEM:READFILE “E:/test_data/tek00016CH1.csv” reads the

content of the specified file, if the file exists and is readable, and sends the content
of the file to the current interface.

FILESystem:REName (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) assigns a new name to an existing file or folder.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:REName <old_file_path>,<new_file_path>

Related Commands FILESystem:CWD

Arguments <old_file_path> is a quoted string that defines the file or folder name and
path. If the path is within the current working directory, you need only specify
the file or folder name.
<new_file_path> is a quoted string that defines the file or folder name and
path. If the path is within the current working directory, you need only specify
the file or folder name.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-329

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples FILESYSTEM:RENAME "E:/TEK00000.SET","E:/MYSETTING.SET" gives the

file named TEK00000.SET the new name of MYSETTING.SET. The file remains
in the root directory on the E drive.
FILESYSTEM:RENAME
"e:/mySettings/tek00000.set","e:/setup1.set". This example
illustrates how to move a file from one folder to another.

FILESystem:RMDir (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) deletes a named directory. The directory must
be empty.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:RMDir <directory_path>

Related Commands FILESystem:CWD

Arguments <directory_path> is a quoted string that defines the folder name and path. If
the folder path is within the current working directory, you need only specify
the folder name.

Examples FILESYSTEM:RMDIR "E:/OldDirectory" removes the directory named

OldDirectory from the root of the E drive.

FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE? (Query Only)

This command returns short code in string format. This code must be entered (or
pasted) at http://drive.tekcloud.com/activate. After the code is entered click the
Activate button to complete the mounting of the TekDrive.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE?

Examples FILESYSTEM:TEKDRIVE:CODE? might return "xYxrr", indicating the code

string xYxrr needs to entered at http://drive.tekcloud.com/activate and activated.

2-330 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE:EXPirytime? (Query Only)

This command returns expiry time of short code. It is the absolute time that the
expiry command returns. For example, if 2:11 pm is the time the user initiated the
TekDrive mounting, then the expiry query returns + 5 minutes (2:16 pm).

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE:EXPirytime?

Examples FILESYSTEM:TEKDRIVE:CODE:EXPIRYTIME? might return “Wed Nov 11

17:29:44 2020”.

FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE:STATus? (Query Only)

This command returns status of short code.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE:STATus?

Returns Success indicates the operation was successful.

AccessDenied indicates it is unable to process the request as permission was

denied.
Invalid indicates the operation was invalid.

Unknown indicates it is unable to process the request due to an unknown error.

Pending indicates it is able to generate the code.

NetworkNotFound indicates it is unable to connect to internet.

UserCancelled indicates the operation was cancelled by user.

Examples FILESYSTEM:TEKDRIVE:CODE:STATUS? might return Pending, indicating it

is able to generate the code.

FILESystem:UNMOUNT:DRIve (No Query Form)

This command unmounts the USB drive specified by the quoted string argument.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-331

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:UNMOUNT:DRIve <QString>

Related Commands
Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that specifies which USB drive to unmount. String
is a case insensitive single letter followed by a colon.

Examples FILESYSTEM:UNMOUNT:DRIVE "G:" specifies to unmount the flash drive

installed in the right-most USB slot on the front of the instrument.

FILESystem:UNMOUNT:TEKDrive (No Query Form)

This command unmounts the TekDrive specified by the quoted string argument
and the drive name is case insensitive.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:UNMOUNT:TEKDrive <QString>

Related Commands
Arguments <QString> specifies the TekDrive to unmount.

Examples FILESystem:UNMOUNT:TEKDrive "TekDrive1" specifies to unmount the

TekDrive named "TekDrive1".

FILESystem:WRITEFile (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) writes the specified block data to the specified
file on the instruments file system. If the destination file cannot be written, an
error event is posted.

Group File System

Syntax FILESystem:WRITEFile <file_path>,<data>

2-332 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands FILESystem:CWD

Arguments <file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file
path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the file name.
<data> is the specified block data to be written.

FPAnel:PRESS (No Query Form)

This command is used to emulate a button press. When used with knob
enumerations, this command pushes the knob. Use the FPAnel:TURN command
to emulate knob turns.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax FPAnel:PRESS {AUTOset| BUS| CH1<x>| CLEAR| DEFaultsetup|

FORCetrig| GPKNOB1| GPKNOB2| HORZPOS| MATh| REF| RUNSTop|
SETTO50| SINGleseq| TOUCHSCReen| TRIGMode| USER| VERTPOS|
VERTSCALE}

Arguments Arguments are instrument buttons.

Examples FPANEL:PRESS FORCETRIG emulates pressing the Force trigger button.

FPAnel:TURN
This command is used to emulate a knob turn. The optional NR1 specifies
the number of clicks where negative values indicate counter clockwise. If not
specified, the default of 1 click is used indicating the knob is turned clockwise
1 click.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax FPAnel:TURN {GPKNOB1| GPKNOB2| HORZPOS| HORZScale|

TRIGLevel| VERTPOS| VERTSCALE} [,<NR1>]

Arguments Arguments are knobs that turn obtained during startup.

<NR1> is the number of clicks to turn the knob.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-333

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples FPANEL:TURN TRIGLEVEL ,3 emulates turning the trigger Level knob 3 clicks
in the clockwise direction.

HEADer
This command sets or queries the Response Header Enable State that causes the
instrument to either include or omit headers on query responses.

NOTE. This command does not affect IEEE Std 488.2-1987 Common Commands
(those starting with an asterisk); these commands never return headers.

Whether the long or short form of header keywords and enumerations are returned
is dependent upon the state of :VERBose.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax HEADer {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

HEADer?

Related Commands VERBose

Arguments <NR1> = 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false; any other value sets
this state to true.
OFF sets the Response Header Enable State to false. This causes the instrument to
omit headers on query responses, so that only the argument is returned.
ON sets the Response Header Enable State to true. This causes the instrument
to include headers on applicable query responses. You can then use the query
response as a command.

Examples HEADER OFF specifies that the instrument omits headers on query responses,
so that only the argument is returned.
HEADER? might return :HEADER 1, indicating that the instrument is including
headers on applicable query responses.
With :VERBose ON and :HEADer ON, the :ACQuire:MODe? query might
return: :ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE.
With :VERBose OFF and :HEADer ON, the :ACQuire:MODe? query might
return: :ACQ:MOD SAM

2-334 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

With :VERBose ON and :HEADer OFF, the :ACQuire:MODe? query might

return: SAMPLE
With :VERBose OFF and :HEADer OFF, the :ACQuire:MODe? query might
return: SAM

HORizontal? (Query Only)

Queries the current horizontal settings.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal?

Examples HORIZONTAL? might return :HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE

6.2500E+9;SAMPLERATE:ANALYZEMODE:MINIMUM:VALUE
AUTOMATIC;OVERRIDE 1;VALUE
1250;:HORIZONTAL:MODE:MANUAL:CONFIGURE
HORIZONTALSCALE;:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:UNITS
S;:HORIZONTAL:DIVISIONS 10;RECORDLENGTH 62500;DELAY:TIME
0.0E+0;MODE 1;:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;SCALE
1.0000E-6;ACQDURATION 10.0000E-6.

HORizontal:ACQDURATION? (Query Only)

This query returns the timebase duration.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:ACQDURATION?

Returns <NR3> returns the duration of the acquisition.

Examples HORIZONTAL:ACQDURATION? might return :HORIZONTAL:ACQDURATION

5.0E-9, indicating the acquisition duration is 5.0 us.

HORizontal:DELay:MODe
This command sets or queries the horizontal delay mode.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-335

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:DELay:MODe {OFF|ON|<NR1>}

HORizontal:DELay:MODe?

Related Commands HORizontal:POSition

Arguments OFF sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to off. This causes the HORizontal:POSition
command to operate like the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel.
ON sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to on. This causes the
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe command to operate like the HORIZONTAL
POSITION knob on the front panel.
<NR1> = 0 sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to off; any other value sets this mode
to on.

Examples HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE OFF sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to off, allowing
the horizontal position command to operate like the HORIZONTAL POSITION
knob on the front panel.
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE? might return HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE OFF
indicating that the Horizontal Delay Mode is off and that the horizontal position
command operates like the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel.

HORizontal:DELay:TIMe
This command sets or queries the horizontal delay time that is used when delay
mode is on.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:DELay:TIMe <NR3>

HORizontal:DELay:TIMe?

Related Commands HORizontal:POSition

Arguments NR3 is the delay in seconds.

Examples HORizontal:DELay:TIME 0.3 sets the delay of acquisition data so that the
resulting waveform is centered 300 ms after the trigger occurs.

2-336 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

HORizontal:DIVisions? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the number of graticule divisions.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:DIVisions?

Examples HORIZONTAL:DIVISIONS? might return :HORIZONTAL:DIVISIONS 10.0000,

indicating that the waveform is displayed across ten divisions.

HORizontal:MAIn:INTERPRatio? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the Horizontal interpolation ratio.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:MAIn:INTERPRatio?

Examples HORIZONTAL:MAIN:INTERPRATIO? might return

:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:INTERPRATIO 10.0.

HORizontal:MODE
This command set or queries the horizontal operating mode.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:MODE {AUTO|MANual}

HORizontal:MODE?

Related Commands HORizontal:MODE:RECOrdlength

HORizontal:MODE:SAMPLERate
HORizontal:MODE:SCAle

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-337

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments AUTO selects the automatic horizontal model. Auto mode automatically adjusts
the sample rate and record length to provide a high acquisition rate in Fast Acq or
signal fidelity in analysis. Record length is read only.
MANUAL selects the manual horizontal model. Manual mode lets you change
the sample rate, horizontal scale, and record length. These values interact. For
example, when you change record length then the horizontal scale also changes.

Examples HORIZONTAL:MODE AUTO sets the horizontal mode to auto.

HORIZONTAL:MODE? might return :HORIZONTAL:MODE MANUAL, indicating that

the horizontal mode is manual.

HORizontal:MODe:MANual:CONFIGure
Sets or queries which horizontal control (scale or record length) will primarily
change when the sample rate is changed in Manual mode. If the selected control
(scale or record length) reaches a limit then the unselected control (record length
or scale) may also change.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:MODe:MANual:CONFIGure
{HORIZontalscale|RECORDLength}
HORizontal:MODe:MANual:CONFIGure?

Arguments HORIZontalscale will change when sample rate is adjusted.

RECORDLength will change when sample rate is adjusted.

Examples HORIZONTAL:MODE:MANUAL:CONFIGURE RECORDLength allows the record

length be adjusted when sample rate is changed in Manual mode.

HORizontal:MODE:RECOrdlength
This command sets or queries the record length.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:MODE:RECOrdlength <NR1>

HORizontal:MODE:RECOrdlength?

2-338 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR1> is the record length in samples. Manual mode lets you change the record
length, while the record length is read only for Automatic mode.

Examples HORIZONTAL:MODE:RECORDLENGTH 1000 sets the record length to

1000 samples.
HORIZONTAL:MODE:RECORDLENGTH? might return
:HORIZONTAL:MODE:RECORDLENGTH 1000000, indicating that the record
length is set to 1,000,000 samples

HORizontal:MODE:SAMPLERate
This command sets or queries the sample rate.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:MODE:SAMPLERate <NR1>

HORizontal:MODE:SAMPLERate?

Arguments <NR1> is the sample rate in samples per second.

Examples HORIZONTAL:MODE:SAMPLERATE 1e6 sets the sample rate to 1 million samples

per second.
HORIZONTAL:MODE:SAMPLERATE? might return
:HORIZONTAL:MODE:SAMPLERATE 5.0000E+6, indicating that the sample rate
is set to 5 million samples per second.

HORizontal:MODE:SCAle
This command sets or queries the horizontal scale.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:MODE:SCAle <NR1>

HORizontal:MODE:SCAle?

Arguments <NR1> is the horizontal scale in seconds per division.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-339

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples HORIZONTAL:MODE:SCALE 2e-9 sets the horizontal scale to 2 ns per division.

HORIZONTAL:MODE:SCALE? might return :HORIZONTAL:MODE:SCALE

20.0000E-6, indicating that the horizontal scale is set to 10 μs per division.

HORizontal:POSition
This command sets or queries the horizontal position as a percent of screen
width. When Horizontal Delay Mode is turned off, this command is equivalent
to adjusting the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel. When
Horizontal Delay Mode is turned on, the horizontal position is forced to 50%.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:POSition <NR3>

HORizontal:POSition?

Arguments <NR3> is from 0 to ≈100 and is the position of the trigger point on the screen (0 =
left edge, 100 = right edge).

Examples HORIZONTAL:POSITION 10 sets the trigger position of the waveform such that
10% of the display is to the left of the trigger position.
HORIZONTAL:POSITION? might return :HORIZONTAL:POSITION
5.0000E+01 indicates the trigger point displayed on the screen.

HORizontal:PREViewstate? (Query Only)

This query returns the display system preview state.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:PREViewstate?

Returns <NR1> = 1 if the system is in the preview state.

<NR1> = 0 if the system is not in the preview state.

Examples HORIZONTAL:PREVIEWSTATE? might return :HORIZONTAL:PREVIEWSTATE

0 indicating the system is not in the preview state.

2-340 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

HORizontal:RECOrdlength
This command sets or queries the horizontal record length. To change the record
length the Horizontal Mode must be set to Manual.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:RECOrdlength <NR1>

HORizontal:RECOrdlength?

Arguments <NR1> is the horizontal record length.

Examples HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000 sets the record length to 1000 samples.

HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH? might return :HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH

1000000, indicating that the record length is set to 1,000,000 samples

HORizontal:SAMPLERate
This command sets or queries the horizontal sample rate.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:SAMPLERate <NR3>

HORizontal:SAMPLERate?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal sample rate in samples per second.

Examples HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE 1e6 sets the sample rate to 1 million samples per
second.
HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE? might return :HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE
5.0000E+6, indicating that the sample rate is set to 5 million samples per second.

HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode:MINimum:OVERRide
Sets or queries the flag which allows override of the horizontal analyze minimum
sample rate.

Group Horizontal

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-341

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode:MINimum:OVERRide
{OFF|ON|0|1}
HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode:MINimum:OVERRide?

Arguments 0 does not allow override of the horizontal analyze minimum sample rate.

1 allows override of the horizontal analyze minimum sample rate.

OFF does not allow override of the horizontal analyze minimum sample rate.

ON allows override of the horizontal analyze minimum sample rate.

Examples HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE:ANALYZEMODE:MINIMUM:OVERRIDE OFF does not

allow override of the horizontal analyze minimum sample rate.
HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE:ANALYZEMODE:MINIMUM:OVERRIDE? might
return :HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE:ANALYZEMODE:MINIMUM:OVERRIDE 1
indicating that override of the horizontal analyze minimum sample rate is allowed.

HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode:MINimum:VALue
Sets or queries the minimum sample rate used by Analysis Automatic horizontal
mode.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode:MINimum:VALue
{AUTOmatic|<NR3>}
HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode:MINimum:VALue?

Related Commands
Arguments AUTOmatic allows the instrument to set the minimum value.

<NR3> is the minimum sample rate.

Examples HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode:MINimum:VALue AUTOMATIC

allows the instrument to set the minimum value.
HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode:MINimum:VALue? might return
HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE:ANALYZEMODE:MINIMUM:VALUE AUTOMATIC
indicating the instrument automatically sets the minimum value.

2-342 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

HORizontal:SCAle
This command sets or queries the horizontal scale.

Group Horizontal

Syntax HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>

HORizontal:SCAle?

Arguments <NR3> is the horizontal scale in time per division.

Returns The current horizontal scale is returned.

Examples HORIZONTAL:SCALE 20e-9 sets the horizontal scale to 20 ns/division.

HORIZONTAL:SCALE? might return HORIZONTAL:SCALE 20e-9 indicating the

horizontal scale is set to 20 ns/division.

ID? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns identifying information about the instrument
and related firmware similar to that returned by the *IDN? IEEE488.2 common
query but does not include the instrument serial number.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax ID?

Related Commands *IDN?

Examples ID? might return ID TEK/MSO24,CF:91.1CT,FV:1.42.5, indicating that the

instrument model number is set to MSO24, codes and formats is CF:91.1CT, and
firmware version is FV:1.42.5.

*IDN? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the instrument identification code.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-343

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax *IDN?

Related Commands ID?

Examples *IDN? might return TEKTRONIX,MSO24,C100123,CF:91.1CT FV:1.42.5,

indicating the instrument model number, serial number, codes and formats
number, and firmware version number.

LIC:UNINSTALL? (Query Only)

Returns the exit license indicated for the user to return to their TekAMS
account. Active licenses can be specified by their nomenclature. TransactionIDs
can be used to specify an active license or a previously uninstalled license. In
either case, the exit-license is returned as block-data.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LIC:UNINSTALL? <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the nomenclature of an active license or a TransactionIDs to

specify an active license or a previously uninstalled license.

Returns The exit-license is returned as block-data.

Examples LIC:UNINSTALL? “2-ULTIMATE” uninstalls the given license and returns the
license block data.
LIC:UNINSTALL? “569765772” uninstalls the license with the given
transaction ID and returns the license block data.

LICense? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns all license parameters.

Group Miscellaneous

2-344 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax LICense?

Examples LICENSE? might return :LICENSE:GMT

"2022-04-05T16:35:22-07:00";"TES-AAA6BLR2KJN35XVN";"2-ULTIMATE:Licens
Ultimate Bundle for 2 Series MSO, includes Source
and Serial options; Node Locked,LIC2-500:License;
2 Series 500MHz bandwidth; Node Locked";2;0,"No
events to report - queue empty".

LICENSE:APPID? (Query Only)

This query returns a comma-separated list of the active application IDs. If a string
argument is provided, a “0” or “1” is returned, according to whether the string
matches an active application ID.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LICENSE:APPID? {<QString>}

Returns This query returns a comma-separated list of the active application IDs. If a string
argument is provided, a “0” or “1” is returned, according to whether the string
matches an active application ID.

Examples LIC:APPID? might return "BW2-500,SRAUTO,SRAUTOSEN,SRCOMP,SREMBD",

which is a complete list of the active applications.
LIC:APPID? “BW2-500” would return “1” because the app is active.

LICense:COUNt? (Query Only)

This query returns a count of the number of active licenses installed.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LICense:COUNt?

Returns A count of the number of active licenses installed.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-345

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples LICENSE:COUNT? might return :LICENSE:COUNT 2 indicating that 2 active

licenses are installed

LICense:ERRor? (Query Only)

This query-only command prompts the instrument to return all events and their
messages (delimited by commas), and removes the returned events from the Event
Queue. This command is an alias for ALLEV?.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LICense:ERRor?

Related Commands ALLEv?

*ESR?
EVMsg?

Examples LICense:ERRor? might return 0, "No events to report- queue empty".

LICense:GMT? (Query Only)

This query returns the GMT time in ISO 8601 format, the local date, 24 hour time
and time-zone offset.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LICense:GMT?

Returns The GMT time in ISO 8601 format, the local date, 24 hour time and time-zone
offset.

Examples LICENSE:GMT? might return :LICENSE:GMT

"2016-05-23T17:05:10-07:00" indicating the local GMT time.

LICense:HID? (Query Only)

This query returns the instrument HostID unique identifier.

2-346 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LICense:HID?

Returns The instrument HostID unique identifier.

Examples LICENSE:HID? might return :LICENSE:HID "TES-AAA6BLR2KJN35XVN"

LICense:INSTall (No Query Form)

This command accepts a <block_data> license and installs it on the instrument.
Restarting the instrument may be necessary to fully activate the additional
capabilities.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LICense:INSTall <block_data>

Arguments <block_data> is the license in block data format.

Examples LICENSE:INSTALL <block_data>

LICense:ITEM? (Query Only)

This query returns the details pertaining to a specific license. The NR1 argument
is zero-indexed. If no argument is provided, zero is assumed.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LICense:ITEM? <NR1>

Arguments <NR1> is the zero-indexed argument specifying a specific license.

Returns The details pertaining to a specific license.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-347

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples LICENSE:ITEM? 0 might return

"2-ULTIMATE,Fixed,2023-01-20T02:07:18-08:00,846713276,
""AFG,SRAUTO,SRAUTOSEN,SRCOMP,SREMBD"",License; Ultimate
Bundle for 2 Series MSO, includes Source and Serial options;
Node Locked"

LICense:LIST? (Query Only)

This query returns the active license nomenclatures as a comma-separated list of
strings. Duplicate nomenclatures, that is, the same license but with different
expiration dates, are included.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LICense:LIST?

Returns The active license nomenclatures as a comma-separated list of strings.

Examples LICENSE:LIST? might return :LICENSE:LIST "2-ULTIMATE:License;

Ultimate Bundle for 2 Series MSO, includes Source and Serial
options; Node Locked,LIC2-500:License; 2 Series 500MHz
bandwidth; Node Locked".

LICense:VALidate? (Query Only)

This query accepts a license nomenclature as an argument and returns True (1) if
that nomenclature is active and any required hardware is installed, or False (0) if
either the nomenclature is not active or required hardware is not installed.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LICense:VALidate? <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the license nomenclature.

Returns True (1) if that nomenclature is active and any required hardware is installed.

False (0) if either the nomenclature is not active or required hardware is not
installed.

2-348 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples LICENSE:VALIDATE? "AFG" might return :LICENSE:VALIDATE

"AFG",0 indicating the license is not active.

LOCk
This command enables or disables the touch screen and all front panel buttons and
knobs. There is no front panel equivalent.
When the front panel is locked, the front panel commands will not work and
will not generate error events. You can work around a locked front panel,
by using the appropriate programmatic interface commands, instead of the
front-panel commands. For example, to set the trigger level to 50%, you could
use TRIGger:A SETLevel. To force a trigger, you could use TRIGger FORCe.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax LOCk {ALL|NONe}

LOCk?

Related Commands UNLock

TOUCHSCReen:STATe

Arguments ALL disables all front panel controls and the touch screen.

NONe enables all front panel controls and the touch screen. The UNLock ALL
command only unlocks the front panel controls.
If the instrument is in the Remote With Lockout State (RWLS), the LOCk
NONe command has no effect. For more information, see the ANSI/IEEE Std
488.1-1987 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation, section
2.8.3 on RL State Descriptions.

Examples LOCK ALL locks the front panel controls and touch screen.

LOCK? might return :LOCK NONE, indicating that the front panel controls are
enabled.

*LRN? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the commands that list the instrument settings,
allowing you to record or “learn” the current instrument settings. You can use
these commands to return the instrument to the state it was in when you made the
*LRN? query. This command is identical to the SET? command.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-349

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax *LRN?

Related Commands SET?

Examples *LRN? might return the following response: *RST;:PARAMBATCHING

0;:HEADER 1;:VERBOSE 1;:ALIAS:STATE 0;:ACQUIRE:STATE
1;:ACQUIRE:NUMENV INFINITE;:FASTACQ:STATE 0;:FASTACQ:PALETTE
TEMPERATURE;:HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE:ANALYZEMODE:MINIMUM:VALUE
AUTOMATIC;:SELECT:CH1 1;:SELECT:CH2 0;:SELECT:CH3
0;:SELECT:CH4 0;:SELECT:CH5 0;:SELECT:CH6 0;:SELECT:CH7
0;:SELECT:CH8 0;:CH1:BANDWIDTH 250.0000E+6;:CH2:BANDWIDTH
500.0000E+6;:CH3:BANDWIDTH 500.0000E+6;:CH4:BANDWIDTH
500.0000E+6;:CH5:BANDWIDTH 500.0000E+6;:CH6:BANDWIDTH
500.0000E+6;:CH7:BANDWIDTH 120.0000E+6;:CH8:BANDWIDTH
500.0000E+6;:CH1:BANDWIDTH:ENHANCED
0;:CH2:BANDWIDTH:ENHANCED 0;:CH3:BANDWIDTH:ENHANCED
0;:CH4:BANDWIDTH:ENHANCED 0;:CH5:BANDWIDTH:ENHANCED
0;:CH6:BANDWIDTH:ENHANCED 0;:CH7:BANDWIDTH:ENHANCED
0;:CH8:BANDWIDTH:ENHANCED 0;:DATA:DESTINATION
REF1;:DATA:ENCDG ASCII;:DATA:SOURCE CH1;:DATA:START
1;:DATA:STOP 1000000;:HORIZONTAL:MODE
AUTO;:HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE:ANALYZEMODE:MINIMUM:OVERRIDE
1;:HORIZONTAL:MODE:MANUAL:CONFIGURE
HORIZONTALSCALE;:HORIZONTAL:SAMPLERATE
6.2500E+9;:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000;:TRIGGER:A:TYPE EDGE;:ACQUIRE:SEQUENCE:NUMSEQUENCE
1;:ACQUIRE:SEQUENCE:MODE NUMACQS;:ACQUIRE:MODE
SAMPLE;:ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;:ACQUIRE:FASTACQ:PALETTE
TEMPERATURE;:ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 16T.

MAINWindow:BADGe:BRINgtoview (No Query Form)

This command is used to automatically scroll the specified badge to make it
visible. The input to the command is the badge title name.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax MAINWindow:BADGe:BRINgtoview <Qstring>

Arguments <Qstring> specifies a badge title name to make the badge visible.

2-350 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MAINWindow:BADGe:BRINgtoview "Meas 1" makes sure the Meas1 badge

is shown in the RRB.

MAINWindow:FONTSize (No Query Form)

Sets the font size for UI text elements. Font size range is 12 to 19 points.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax MAINWindow:FONTSize <NR1>

Arguments <NR1> specifies the font size.

Examples MAINWindow:FONTSize 18 sets the UI text size to 18 points.

MAINWindow:RRBDisplaystate (No Query Form)

Sets the display state of the Results readout bar to ON (displayed) or OFF (not
displayed).

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax MAINWindow:RRBDisplaystate {1|ON|0|OFF}

Arguments 1 or ON enables Autoset to change vertical settings.

0 or OFF disables Autoset from changing vertical settings.

Examples MAINWindow:RRBDisplaystate 1 expands (displays) the Results readout bar.

MASK:DELete (No Query Form)

This command deletes all mask segments of the specified mask test.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:DELete “MASK<x>”

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-351

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test. This argument is enclosed in quotes.

Examples MASK:DELETE “mask2” will delete all mask segments of mask test 2.

MASK:MASK<x>:COUNT? (Query Only)

This command returns the total number of mask hits in all segments and the
number of mask hits in each individual mask segment for the specified mask test.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:COUNT?

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

Returns <NR1> is the total number of mask hits in all segments and the number of mask
hits in each individual mask segment.

Examples MASK:MASK1:COUNT? might return :MASK:MASK1:COUNT:HITS

211;SEG1:HITS;:MASK:MASK1:COUNT:SEG2:HITS 199;
MASK:MASK1:COUNT:SEG3:HITS 12, indicating the number of mask hits on
segment 1, 2, and 3 for mask test 1.

MASK:MASK<x>:COUNT:HITS? (Query Only)

This command returns the total number of mask hits in all mask segments for
the specified mask test.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:COUNT:HITS?

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

Returns <NR1> is the total number of mask hits in all mask segments.

2-352 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MASK:MASK1:COUNT:HITS? might return :MASK:MASK1:COUNT:HITS

211, indicating 211 mask hits for mask test 1.

MASK:MASK<x>:DEFinedby
This command sets or queries whether the specified mask is defined by segments
or tolerances. Segment masks are defined by one or more polygons. Tolerance
masks are defined by specified horizontal and vertical tolerances around the
mask source.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:DEFinedby {SEGments|TOLerances}

MASK:MASK<x>:DEFinedby?

Related Commands MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HORizontal

MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VERTical
MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:UPDatenow

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask number.

SEGments defines the mask by segments.

TOLerances defines the mask by horizontal and vertical tolerances around

mask source.

Examples MASK:MASK1:Definedby SEGments sets mask 1 to be defined by segments.

MASK:MASK1:Definedby? might return :MASK:MASK1:Definedby

TOLerances, indicating mask 1 is defined by the horizontal and vertical
tolerances.

MASK:MASK<x>:DISplay
This command sets or queries the display state of the mask used for the specified
mask test.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:DISplay {ON|OFF}

MASK:MASK<x>:DISplay?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-353

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

ON sets the display state of the specified mask to on.

OFF sets the display state of the specified mask to off.

Examples MASK:MASK1:DISPLAY OFF disables the display of the mask used by mask test 1.

MASK:MASK1:DISPLAY? might return :MASK:MASK1:DISPLAY OFF, indicating

the display state for mask test 1 is off.

MASK:MASK<x>:LIST? (Query Only)

This command queries the list of segments in the mask used by the specified
mask test.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:LIST?

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

Returns A comma separated list of segment names.

Examples MASK:MASK1:LIST? might return :MASK:MASK1:LIST

SEG1,SEG2,SEG3, indicating that segment 1, 2, and 3 are used by
mask test 1.

MASK:MASK<x>:SEG<x>COUNT:HITS? (Query Only)

The command returns the total number of mask hits in the specified mask segment
of the specified mask test.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:SEG<x>COUNT:HITS?

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

SEG<x> specifies the mask segment.

2-354 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Returns <NR1> is the total number of mask hits in the specified segment.

Examples MASK:MASK1:COUNT:SEG2:HITS? might return

:MASK:MASK1:COUNT:SEG2:HITS 211, indicating 211 mask 1 hits in segment
2.

MASK:MASK<x>:SEG<x>:POINTS
This command sets or queries the X/Y coordinates of all points in the designated
mask segment. Mask vertices are in time/volts (currently limited to 1024
characters). The set form defines new points in the mask, replacing any existing
points.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:SEG<x>:POINTS
MASK:MASK<x>:SEG<x>:POINTS?

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

SEG<x> specifies the mask segment.

Examples MASK:MASK1:SEG1:POINTS “-40E-9,-200E-3,0,0,-40E-9,0” sets the

X/Y coordinates of all the points in segment 1 of mask test 1.
MASK:MASK1:SEG1:POINTS? might return :MASK:MASK1:SEG1:POINTS
“-40E-9,-200E-3,0,0,-40E-9,0”, indicating the X/Y coordinates of all
the points in segment 1 of mask test 1.

MASK:MASK<x>:SOUrce
This command sets or queries analog source for the specified mask test.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:SOUrce {CH<x>|REF<x>|MATH<x>|RFvsTime}

MASK:MASK<x>:SOUrce?

Arguments Arguments are the available analog sources.

MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-355

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MASK:MASK1:SOURCE CH2 sets the analog source for mask test 1 to Channel 2.

MASK:MASK1:SOURCE? might return :MASK:MASK1:SOURCE CH2, indicating

the analog source for mask test 1 is Channel 2.

MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATE
This command sets or queries the state of the specified mask test.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATE {ON|OFF}

MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATE?

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

ON sets the mask test state to ON. When the state is ON the Pass/Fail status and hit
count information are reset and the mask test is started.
OFF sets the mask test state to OFF. When the mask test completes the state is set
to OFF.

Examples MASK:MASK1:TEST:STATE ON sets the state of mask test 1 to ON.

MASK:MASK1:TEST:STATE? might return :MASK:MASK1:TEST:STATE

OFF, indicating mask test 1 is OFF.

MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATUS? (Query Only)

This command returns the status of the specified mask test.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATUS?

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

Returns Return values are PASSING, FAILING, PASSED, or FAILED. When the total hit
count equals or exceeds the minimum threshold the status changes from PASSING
to FAILING. When the test completes the status changes to PASSED or FAILED.
Default value when test state is first set ON or after CLEAR is PASSING.

2-356 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MASK:MASK1:TEST:STATUS? might return :MASK:MASK1:TEST:STATUS

PASSED, indicating mask test 1 passed.

MASK:MASK<x>:TEST:THReshold
This command sets or queries the number of waveform violations needed for the
specified mask test to change from PASS to FAIL.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:TEST:THReshold <NR1>

MASK:MASK<x>:TEST:THReshold?

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

<NR1> specifies the threshold value.

Examples MASK:MASK1:TEST:THRESHOLD 10 sets the number of waveform violations

to 10 for mask test 1 to fail.
MASK:MASK1:TEST:THRESHOLD? might return
:MASK:MASK1:TEST:THRESHOLD 10, indicating 10 waveform violations
on mask test 1.

MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HORizontal
This command sets or queries the mask horizontal tolerance.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HORizontal <NR3>

MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HORizontal?

Related Commands MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:UPDatenow

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask number.

<NR3> is the tolerance in units of graticule divisions. The maximum is 1 division.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-357

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MASK:MASK1:TOLerance:HORizontal .200 sets the tolerance of mask 1 to

200 mdiv or 20% of a division. The mask is not recalculated until an UPDatenow
command is sent.
MASK:MASK1:TOLerance:HORizontal? might return
:MASK:MASK1:TOLerance:HORizontal .200, indicating the
tolerance of mask 1 is 200 mdiv.

MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:UPDatenow (No Query Form)

This command causes the tolerance mask to be recalculated with the current
horizontal and vertical tolerances.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:UPDatenow

Related Commands MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HORizontal

MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VERTical

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask number.

Examples MASK:MASK1:TOLerance:UPDatenow recalculates the tolerance of mask 1 with

the current horizontal and vertical tolerance settings.

MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VERTical
This command sets or queries the mask vertical tolerance.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VERTical <NR3>

MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VERTical?

Related Commands MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:UPDatenow

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask number.

<NR3> is the tolerance in units of graticule divisions. The maximum is 1 division.

2-358 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MASK:MASK1:TOLerance:VERTical .100 sets the tolerance of mask 1 to 100

mdiv or 10% of a division. The mask is not recalculated until an UPDatenow
command is sent.
MASK:MASK1:TOLerance:VERTical? might return
:MASK:MASK1:TOLerance:VERTical .100, indicating the tolerance of
mask 1 is 100 mdiv.

MASK:TESt:WAVEforms
This command sets or queries the number of waveform acquisitions to test during
mask testing. The number of waveforms applies to all mask tests.

Group Mask

Syntax MASK:TESt:WAVEforms <NR1>

MASK:TESt:WAVEforms?

Arguments MASK<x> specifies the mask test.

<NR1> specifies the number of waveform acquisitions.

Examples MASK:TEST:WAVEFORMS 1k sets the number of waveform acquisitions to test

to 1000.
MASK:TEST:WAVEFORMS? might return :MASK:TEST:WAVEFORMS
1k, indicating the number of waveform acquisitions to test is 1000.

MATH:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds the specified math.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:ADDNew <QString>

Related Commands MATH:LIST?

MATH:DELete

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-359

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> is the quoted string specifying the math waveform to add. The
argument is of the form "MATH<NR1>”, where <NR1> is ≥1.

Examples MATH:ADDNEW "MATH2" adds MATH2.

MATH:DELete (No Query Form)

This command deletes the specified math.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:DELete <QString>

Related Commands MATH:ADDNew

MATH:LIST?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string specifying the math waveform to delete. The
quoted string is of the form "MATH<NR1>”, where <NR1> is ≥1.

Examples MATH:DELETE "MATH1", which deletes the MATH1 waveform.

MATH:LIST? (Query Only)

This query returns a comma separated list of all currently defined math waveforms.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:LIST?

Related Commands MATH:ADDNew

MATH:DELete

Returns All currently defined math waveforms.

Examples MATH:LIST? Might return :MATH:LIST MATH1,MATH4, indicating MATH1 and

MATH4 are the currently defined math waveforms.

2-360 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MATH:MATH<x>:AVG:MODE
This command sets or queries the math average mode flag. If the flag is set to 1,
math averaging is turned on. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:AVG:MODE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Related Commands MATH:MATH<x>:AVG:WEIGht

Arguments <NR1> = 0 turns off average mode, and any other integer turns on average mode.

OFF turns off average mode.

ON turns on average mode.

Examples MATH:MATH2:AVG:MODE ON sets the average mode on.

MATH:MATH1:AVG:MODE? might return :MATH:MATH1:AVG:MODE 0,
indicating average mode is off.

MATH:MATH<x>:AVG:WEIGht
This command sets or queries the number of acquisitions at which the averaging
algorithm will begin exponential averaging. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:AVG:WEIGht <NR1>

Related Commands MATH:MATH<x>:AVG:MODE

Arguments <NR1> is the number of acquisitions at which the averaging algorithm will begin
exponential averaging.

Examples MATH:MATH2:AVG:WEIGHT 143 sets the number of acquisitions needed

to begin averaging to 20 MATH:MATH3:AVG:WEIGHT? might return
:MATH:MATH3:AVG:WEIGHT 20 indicating the number of acquisitions needed
to begin averaging is 8.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-361

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MATH:MATH<x>:CAN:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
CAN bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:CAN:SUPPortedfields {DATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:CAN:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:CAN:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:CAN:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:CAN:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field
type for MATH2 for the bus source for CAN bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:DEFine
This command allows you to define new waveforms using mathematical
expressions. The query form of this command returns the math definition for the
specified math waveform. The math waveform is specified by x.
You can specify a math expression from waveforms, measurements and scalar
sources, functions, operands, and numerical constants.
Math expressions can be simple, such as Ch1, which specifies that a waveform
should show the signal source of Channel 1 with no mathematical computation.
Math expressions can also be complex, consisting of 100 plus characters and
comprising many sources (including other math waveforms), functions, and
operands. As an example, you can enter the expression Log(Ch1+Ch2), which
specifies that the signals from channels 1 and 2 are to be algebraically added, and
the base 10 log of the sum is to be shown as the final math waveform.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:DEFine <QString>

MATH:MATH<x>:DEFine?

Arguments <QString> quoted string argument is the mathematical expression that defines the
waveform. MATH:MATH<x>:DEFINE? is for use when the MATH:MATH<x>:TYPE
is ADVANCED.

2-362 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MATH:MATH2:DEFine "CH1+CH2" adds the Channel 1 and Channel 2, defines

the Math2 waveform to be Channel1 and Channel2 added together.
MATH:MATH1:DEFine? might return

:MATH:MATH1:DEFine "CH2*REF2" as the expression that defines Math 1

waveform.

MATH:MATH<x>:FUNCtion
This command sets or queries the basic math arithmetic function. The math
waveform is specified by x.

NOTE. This command does not affect the same Math equation in Advanced math
(also accessed via the command MATH:MATH<x>:DEFINE).

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:FUNCtion {ADD|SUBtract|MULTiply|DIVide}

Arguments ADD sets the basic math function to add.

SUBtract sets the basic math function to subtract.
MULTiply sets the basic math function to multiply.
DIVide sets the basic math function to divide.

Examples MATH:MATH2:FUNCTION MULTIPLY sets the basic math function to multiply.

MATH:MATH1:FUNCTION? might return :MATH:MATH1:FUNCTION ADD
indicating the current basic math function is addition.

MATH:MATH<x>:I2C:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
I2C bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:I2C:SUPPortedfields {DATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:I2C:SUPPortedfields?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-363

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:I2C:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:I2C:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:I2C:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field
type for MATH2 for the bus source for I2C bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:INTERpolation
This command
sets or queries whether sinc interpolation is enabled for math on bus source.
The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:INTERpolation {ON|OFF}

Arguments ON indicates that the sinc interpolation is used for math waveform.

OFF indicates no interpolation is used for math waveform. Waveform will appear
“stair-steppy” in this case.

Examples MATH:MATH2:INTERpolation ON enables sinc interpolation.

MATH:MATH1:INTERpolation? might return :MATH:MATH1:INTERpolation

ON indicating that the sinc interpolation is used for math waveform.

MATH:MATH<x>:GATing
This command specifies or returns the gating setting. It only applies to Math FFT
plots. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:GATing {NONE|SCREEN|CURSor}

MATH:MATH<x>:GATing?

Related Commands MATH:MATH<x>:TYPe

2-364 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments NONE turns off math gating.

SCREEN turns on gating, using the left and right edges of the screen.

CURSor limits math to the portion of the waveform between the vertical bar
cursors, even if they are off screen.

Examples MATH:MATH3:GATING CURSOR sets the spectral math plot to be gated by the
cursors.
MATH:MATH2:GATING? might return :MATH:MATH:2:GATING SCREEN which
indicates the spectral math plot is gated by the screen.

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:COLor
This command sets or queries color of the specified math's label. The math
waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:COLor <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the color of the label. To return the color to the default color, send
an empty string as in this example: :MATH:MATH1:LABEL:COLOR "".

Examples MATH:MATH3:LABEL:COLOR "GREEN" sets the Math 3 label color to green.

MATH:MATH1:LABEL:COLOR? might return :MATH:MATH1:LABEL:COLOR
"BLUE" indicating the color of the Math1 label is blue.

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD
This command sets or queries the bold state of the specified math label. The
math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Arguments <NR1> = 0 turns off bold, and any other integer turns on bold.

OFF turns off bold.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-365

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ON turns on bold.

Examples MATH:MATH3:FONT:BOLD ON set the math 3 label to bold.

MATH:MATH2:FONT:BOLD? might return :MATH:MATH2:FONT:BOLD

0 indicating the math 2 label is not currently bold.

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic
This command sets or queries italic state of the specified math label. The math
waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Arguments <NR1> = 0 turns off italic, and any other integer turns on italic.

OFF turns off italic.

ON turns on italic.

Examples MATH:MATH4:FONT:ITALIC ON set the math 4 label to be italic.

MATH:MATH1:FONT:ITALIC? might return :MATH:MATH1:FONT:ITALIC

0 indicating the math 1 label is not currently italic.

<NR1> is the font size of the label.

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE
This command sets or queries font size of the specified math label. The math
waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE <NR1>

2-366 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments
Examples MATH:MATH4:LABEL:FONT:SIZE 32 sets the math 4 label size to 32.

MATH:MATH2:LABEL:FONT:SIZE? might return

:MATH:MATH2:LABEL:FONT:SIZE 14 indicating the math 2 label size is
currently 14.

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE
This command sets or queries font type of the specified math label, such as Arial
or Times New Roman. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the name of the font type.

Examples MATH:MATH2:LABEL:FONT:TYPE "Serif" sets the math 2 label font type to Serif.

MATH:MATH3:LABEL:FONT:TYPE? might return

:MATH:MATH3:LABEL:FONT:TYPE "Monospace" indicating the math 3 font
type is currently Monospace.

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline
This command sets or queries the underline state of the specified math label.
The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Arguments <NR1> = 0 turns off underline, and any other integer turns on underline.

OFF turns off underline.

ON turns on underline.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-367

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MATH:MATH3:FONT:UNDERLINE ON sets the math 3 label to be underlined.

MATH:MATH2:FONT:UNDERLINE? might return

:MATH:MATH2:FONT:UNDERLINE 0 indicating the math 2 label is currently
not underlined.

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:NAMe
This command sets or queries the label string, which is used for annotating the
math waveform on the screen. The math waveform to which the label is attached
is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:NAMe <QString>

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:NAMe?

Arguments <QString> specifies the label to annotate the math waveform.

Examples MATH:MATH2:LABel:NAMe "PROBE POINT7" assigns "Probe point7" Math

2 waveform.
MATH:MATH2:LABel:NAMe? might return :MATH:MATH2:LABel:NAMe
"Probe point7", indicating that Probe point 7 is the label for the Math 2
waveform.

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS
This command sets or queries the X position of the specified math label. Maths
are specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS <NR1>

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS?

Related Commands MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS

Arguments <NR1> is the location (in pixels) where the label for the selected math waveform
is displayed, relative to the left edge of the display.

2-368 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MATH:MATH2:LABEL:XPOS 5 moves the waveform label for the Math 2

waveform so that it begins 5 pixels to the right of the left edge of the screen.
MATH:MATH2:LABEL:XPOS? might return :MATH:MATH2:LABEL:XPOS 2.5,
indicating that the waveform label for the Math 2 waveform is currently 2.5 pixels
to the right of the left edge of the display.

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS
This command sets or queries the y-position of the specified math label. The
Math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS <NR1>

MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS?

Related Commands MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS

Arguments <NR1> is the location (in pixels) where the label for the selected math waveform
is displayed, relative to the baseline of the waveform.

Examples MATH:MATH2:LABEL:YPOS -2.5 moves the waveform label for the Math 2
waveform to 2.5 pixels below the baseline of the waveform.
MATH:MATH2:LABEL:YPOS? might return :MATH:MATH2:LABEL:YPOS 0,
indicating that the waveform label for the Math 2 waveform is currently located at
the baseline of the waveform.

MATH:MATH<x>:LIN:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
LIN bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:LIN:SUPPortedfields {DATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:LIN:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-369

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MATH:MATH2:LIN:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:LIN:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:LIN:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field
type for MATH2 for the bus source for LIN bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:PARallel:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
PARallel bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:PARallel:SUPPortedfields {DATa}

MATH:MATH<x>:PARallel:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

Examples MATH:MATH2:PARallel:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:PARallel:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:PARallel:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field type
for MATH2 for the bus source for PARallel bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:RS232C:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
RS232C bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:RS232C:SUPPortedfields {DATa|TXData|RXData}

MATH:MATH<x>:RS232C:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

TXData sets the field type to TXData. TXData field can be set when RS232 Bus
configuration for Data Inputs is set to Two.
RXData sets the field type to RXData. RXData field can be set when RS232 Bus
configuration for Data Inputs is set to Two.

2-370 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MATH:MATH2:RS232C:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:RS232C:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:RS232C:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the
field type for MATH2 for the bus source for RS232C bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:SENT:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for
SENT bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SENT:SUPPortedfields
{FCData|FCDFirst|FCDTwo|SDATa}
MATH:MATH<x>:SENT:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments FCData sets the field type to FCData. FCData field is available to select when
SENT Bus configuration for Fast Data Channels is set to 2.
FCDFirst sets the field type to FCDFirst.

FCDTwo sets the field type to FCDTwo.

SDATa sets the field type to SDATa. SDATa is available when SENT Bus
configuration for Slow Channel is not None.

Examples MATH:MATH2:SENT:SUPPortedfields FCData sets the field type to FCData.

MATH:MATH2:SENT:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:SENT:SUPPortedfields FCData, indicating the
field type for MATH2 for the bus source for SENT bus is FCData.

MATH:MATH<x>:SIGNeddata
This command sets or queries value to denote that bus field is decoded as
signed/unsigned data for math on bus source. The math waveform is specified
by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SIGNeddata {ON|OFF}

MATH:MATH<x>:SIGNeddata?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-371

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ON indicates that the bus field is decoded as signed data for drawing the math
waveform.
OFF indicates that the bus field is decoded as unsigned data for drawing the
math waveform.

Examples MATH:MATH2:SIGNeddata ON turns on signed data for MATH2 waveform.

MATH:MATH2:SIGNeddata? might return :MATH:MATH2:SIGNeddata ON,

indicating that the bus field is decoded as signed data for drawing the math
waveform.

MATH:MATH<x>:SOUrce<x>
This command sets or queries the specified math source. The source in the
command can be either 1 or 2. This command sets the Basic Math components in
the user interface, with two sources and a function. You would also need to set the
math type to Basic to see the change in the user interface but this will not effect
the programmable interface. The math waveform and source are specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SOUrce<x> {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

Related Commands MATH:MATH<x>:TYPe

MATH:MATH<x>:FUNCtion

Arguments Arguments are possible math sources. SOURCE1 and SOURCE2 are for use when
the MATH:MATH<x>:TYPE is BASIC.

Examples MATH:MATH2:SOURCE1 CH1 sets the first source of math 2 to Channel 1.

MATH:MATH3:SOURCE2? might return :MATH:MATH3:SOURCE2 REF3

indicating the second source of Math 3 is Ref 3.

MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow
This command sets or queries the window function used to apply the specified
FFT window to the input data for the specified math waveform. The Math
waveform is specified by x. A spectral window determines what the filter shape
of the spectral analyzer will be in the frequency domain. It can be described by

2-372 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

a mathematical function that is multiplied point-by-point times the input data to

the spectral analyzer.
Following is a list of arguments that specify the window function used to multiply
the input data. The windows are listed in the order of their ability to resolve
frequencies (resolution bandwidth).

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow {RECTANGular|HAMMing|

HANNing|BLACKMANHarris|KAISERBessel|GAUSSian|
FLATTOP2|TEKEXPonential}
MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow?

Related Commands MATH:MATH<x>:TYPe

Arguments RECTANGular window function is equivalent to multiplying all gate data by one.

HAMMing window function is based on a cosine series.

HANNing window function is based on a cosine series.

BLACKMANHarris window function is based on a cosine series.

KAISERBessel window function is based on a cosine series.

GAUSSian window function has the best localization characteristics in the joint
time/frequency plane
FLATTOP2 window function is a cosine series window with a flattened frequency
response lobe.
TEKEXPonential window has an exponential nonsymmetrical shape in the time
domain and a triangular shape in the frequency domain.

Examples MATH2:SPECTRAL:WINDOW GAUSSIAN applies a Gaussian window to the

spectral analyzer input data.
MATH2:SPECTRAL:WINDOW? might return :MATH2:SPECTRAL:WINDOW
BLACKMANHarris, indicating that the window function used to multiply the
spectral analyzer input data is the BLACKMANHarris function.

MATH:MATH<x>:SPI:SUPPortedfields
This command sets or queries the field type for the math for the bus source for SPI
bus. The math waveform is specified by x.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-373

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:SPI:SUPPortedfields {DATa|MOSIdata|MISOdata}

MATH:MATH<x>:SPI:SUPPortedfields?

Arguments DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MOSIdata sets the field type to MOSIdata. MOSIdata field is available to select
when SPI Bus configuration for Data Inputs is set to Two.
MISOdata sets the field type to MISOdata. MISOdata field is available to select
when SPI Bus configuration for Data Inputs is set to Two.

Examples MATH:MATH2:SPI:SUPPortedfields DATa sets the field type to DATa.

MATH:MATH2:SPI:SUPPortedfields? might return

:MATH:MATH2:SPI:SUPPortedfields DATa, indicating the field
type for MATH2 for the bus source for SPI bus is DATa.

MATH:MATH<x>:TYPe
This command sets or queries the math type. The math waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:TYPe {BASic|FFT|ADVanced}

Arguments BASic set the type to basic math.

FFT sets the type to FFT math, which can use any live analog or reference
waveform in the time domain. NOTE. You can also use FFT as part of a math
expression by declaring the type
ADVanced. See examples for the command MATH:MATH<x>:DEFine.
ADVanced sets the type to advanced math.

Examples MATH:MATH2:TYPE BASIC sets the type of Math 2 to basic.

MATH:MATH2:TYPE? might return :MATH:MATH2:TYPE FFT indicating the

type of Math 4 is currently FFT.

2-374 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MATH:MATH<x>:VUNIT
This command specifies or returns the math custom vertical units. The math
waveform is specified by x.

Group Math

Syntax MATH:MATH<x>:VUNIT <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the custom vertical units.

Examples MATH:MATH2:VUNIT "Small"

MATH:MATH2:VUNIT? might return :MATH:MATH2:VUNIT "Large" indicating

the Math 2 vertical unit is set to "Large".

MEASTABle:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds a new measurement results view table to the scope
application. The results view table can be named through the argument sent to
the command.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASTABle:ADDNew <QString>

Arguments <QString> specifies a new measurement results view table to the scope
application.

Examples MEASTABle:ADDNew "TABLE1" adds a new table view by name TABLE1.

MEASTABle:DELETE (No Query Form)

This command removes the requested measurement results view table from the
scope application.

Group Measurement

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-375

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASTABle:DELETE <QString>

Arguments <QString> specifies a measurement results view table to remove.

Examples MEASTABle:DELETE "TABLE1" removes TABLE1 from the view.

MEASUrement? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns all measurement parameters.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement?

Examples MEASUREMENT? might return :MEASUREMENT:GATING

OFF;IMMED:TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS "V";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE
PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:METHOD
PERCENT;ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000;LOW 0.0000;MID1 0.0000;MID2
0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90.0000;LOW
10.0000;MID1 50.0000;MID2 50.0000;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:METHOD
HISTOGRAM;NOISE HIGH;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE
0;TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS "V";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE
PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:METHOD
PERCENT;ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000;LOW 0.0000;MID1 0.0000;MID2
0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90.0000;LOW
10.0000;MID1 50.0000;MID2 50.0000;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:METHOD
HISTOGRAM;NOISE HIGH;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:STATE
0;TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS "V";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE
PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE;DIRECTION.

MEASUrement:ADDMEAS (No Query Form)

This command adds a measurement.

Group Measurement, IMDA

2-376 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:ADDMEAS {ACRMS |AMPlITUDE |AREA |BASE

|BURSTWIDTH |DATARATE |DELAY |FALLSLEWRATE |FALLTIME
|FREQUENCY |HIGHTIME |HOLD |LOWTIME |MAXIMUM |MEAN |MINIMUM
|NDUty |NOVERSHOOT |NPERIOD |NWIDTTH |PDUTY |PERIOD |PHASE
|PK2Pk |POVERSHOOT |PWIDTH |RISESLEWRATE |RISETIME |RMS
|SETUP |SKEW |TIMEOUTSIDELEVEL |TIMETOMAX |TIMETOMIN |TOP}

Arguments ACRMS (AC RMS) is the true Root Mean Square of the data points, about the
Mean. This measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each cycle
in the record.
AMPLITUDE is the difference between the Top value and the Base value. This
measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
Amplitude = High - Low
AREA is the area under the curve, calculated by integrating the data points. The
area measured above ground is positive. The area measured below ground is
negative. This measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each
cycle in the record.
BASE is the most common data value below the midpoint of the waveform. This
measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
BURSTWIDTH (Burst Width) is the duration of a series of adjacent crossings of the
Mid reference level (RM). Bursts are separated by a user-defined idle time (tI).
This measurement is made on each burst in the record.
DATARATE (Data Rate) is the reciprocal of Unit Interval. This measurement is
made on each bit in the record.
DELay is the time between the specified Mid reference level (RM) crossing on
one source to a specified Mid reference level (RM) crossing on a second source.
This measurement is made on the first occurrence in the record.
FALLSLEWRATE (Falling Slew Rate) is the rate of change in voltage as an edge
transitions from the Top reference level (RT) to the Bottom reference level (RB).
This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
FALLTIME (Fall Time) is the time required for an edge to fall from the Top
reference level (RT) to the Base reference level (RB). This measurement is made
on each cycle in the record.
FREQuency is the reciprocal of Period. This measurement is made on each cycle
in the record.
HIGHTIME (High Time) is the time the signal remains above the Top reference
level (RT). This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
HOLD (Hold Time) is the time between the specified Mid reference level crossing
(RM) on the Clock source to the closest specified Mid reference level (RM)
crossing on the Data source. This measurement is made on each specified Clock
edge in the record.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-377

Commands listed in alphabetical order

LOWTIME (Low Time) is the time the signal remains below the Base reference
level (RB). This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
MAXimum is the maximum data point. This measurement can be made across the
entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
MEAN is the arithmetic mean of the data points. This measurement can be made
across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
MINImum is the minimum data point. This measurement can be made across the
entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
NDUty (Negative Duty Cycle) is the ratio of the Negative Pulse Width to the
Period. This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
Negative Duty Cycle = (Negative Width) / Period × 100%
NPERIOD (Duration N-Periods) is the time required to complete N cycles. A cycle
is the time between two adjacent (same direction) crossings of the Mid reference
level (RM). This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
NOVershoot (Negative Overshoot) is the difference between Minimum and
Base, divided by the Amplitude. This measurement can be made across the entire
record, or on each cycle in the record.
Negative Overshoot = (Base - Minimum) / Amplitude × 100%)
NWIdth (Negative Pulse Width) is the time the signal remains below the Mid
reference level (RM). This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
PDUTY (Positive Duty Cycle) is the ratio of the Positive Pulse Width to the Period.
This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
Positive Duty Cycle = (Positive Width)/Period × 100%
PERIOD is the time required to complete a cycle. A cycle is the time between
two adjacent (same direction) crossings of the Mid reference level (RM). This
measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
PHASE is the ratio of the Skew between two sources to the Period of the first
source. This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
PK2Pk (Peak-to-peak) is the difference between Maximum and Minimum. This
measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
POVERSHOOT (Positive Overshoot) is the difference between Maximum and Top,
divided by the Amplitude. This measurement can be made across the entire
record, or on each cycle in the record.
Positive Overshoot = (Maximum - Top) / Amplitude ×100%
PWIDTH (Positive Pulse Width) is the time the signal remains above the Mid
reference level (RM). This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.

2-378 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

RISESLEWRATE (Rising Slew Rate) is the rate of change in voltage as an edge

transitions from the Base reference level (RB) to the Top reference level (RT).
This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
RISETIME Rise Time is the time required for an edge to rise from the Base
reference level (RB) to the Top reference level (RT). This measurement is made
on each cycle in the record.
RMS is the true Root Mean Square of the data points. This measurement can be
made across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
SETUP (Setup Time) is the time between the specified Mid reference level (RM)
crossing on the Data source to the closest specified Mid reference level (RM)
crossing on the Clock source. This measurement is made on each specified Clock
edge in the record.
SKEW Skew is the time between the specified Mid reference level (RM) crossing
on one source to the following specified Mid reference level (RM) crossing on a
second source. This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
TIMEOUTSIDELEVEL Time Outside Level is the time the signal remains above
the Top reference level (RT) and/or below the Base reference level (RB). This
measurement is made on each occurrence in the record.
TIMETOMAX Time to Max is the amount of time from the trigger point to the
maximum data point. This measurement can be made across the entire record
or on each cycle in the record.
TIMETOMIN Time to Min is the amount of time from the trigger point to the
minimum data point. This measurement can be made across the entire record
or on each cycle in the record.
TOP is the most common data value above the midpoint of the waveform. This
measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.

Examples MEASUREMENT:ADDMEAS FREQUENCY adds a frequency measurement.

MEASUrement:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds the specified measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:ADDNew "QString"

Arguments "QString" is the measurement to add. The argument is of the form

"MEAS<NR1>" where NR1 ≥ 1.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-379

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:ADDNew "MEAS11" adds measurement 11.

MEASUrement:ANNOTate
This command sets or queries the annotation state for measurements.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:ANNOTate {OFF|AUTO}

MEASUrement:ANNOTate?

Arguments OFF turns off measurement annotations.

AUTO turns on visible measurement annotations.

Examples MEASUREMENT:ANNOTATE OFF turns off measurement annotations.

MEASUREMENT:ANNOTATE? might return :MEASUREMENT:ANNOTATION:STATE

OFF, indicating that no measurement annotations are active.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the
falling edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute. The channel
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh?

Arguments <NR3> is the high reference level, and is the zero percent level when
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLHIGH 1.5 sets the high

reference level of the falling edge to 1.5 V.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLHIGH? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLHIGH 1.0000 indicating
that the high reference level of the falling edge is 1.0 V.

2-380 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the
falling edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute. The channel
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow?

Arguments <NR3> is the high reference level, and is the zero percent level when
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLLOW 1.5 sets the low

reference level of the falling edge to 1.5 V.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLLOW? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLLOW 1.5000 indicating
that the low reference level of the falling edge is 1.5 V.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the
falling edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute. The channel
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the mid reference level used to calculate the mid reference level when
the measurement's Ref level method is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLMID 0 sets the mid reference

level of the falling edge to 0.0 V.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLMID? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLMID 0.0E+0 indicating
that the mid reference level of the falling edge is 0.0 V.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-381

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level
when the source ref level method is set to absolute. The channel number is
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis?

Arguments <NR3> is the hysteresis value used for autoset.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:HYSTERESIS 30.0000E-3 sets

the reference hysteresis level to 30 mV.
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:HYSTERESIS? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:HYSTERESIS 30.0000E-3
indicating that reference hysteresis level is set to 30 mV.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the
rising edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute. The channel
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh?

Arguments <NR3> is the high reference level of the rising edge when the source ref level
method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEHIGH 1.5 sets the high

reference level of the rising edge to 1.5 V.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEHIGH? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEHIGH 1.0000 indicating
that the high reference level of the rising edge is 1.0 V.

2-382 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow
This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the
rising edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute. The channel
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow?

Arguments <NR3> is the low reference level of the rising edge when the source ref level
method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISELOW 1.5 sets the low

reference level of the rising edge to 1.5 V.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISELOW? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISELOW 1.0000 indicating
that the low reference level of the rising edge is 1.0 V.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the
rising edge when the source ref level method is set to absolute. The channel
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the mid reference level of the rising edge when the source ref level
method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEMID 0 sets the mid reference

level of the rising edge to 0.0 V.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEMID? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEMID 0.0E+0 indicating
that the mid reference level of the rising edge is 0.0 V.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-383

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE
This command sets or queries the reference level type for the source. The channel
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE {SAME|UNIQue}

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE?

Arguments SAME specifies that the absolute reference levels for the specified measurement
channel are the same.
UNIQue specifies that the absolute reference levels for the specified measurement
channel are not the same.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:TYPE SAME set the reference

levels to be the same.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:TYPE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:TYPE SAME indicating that the
reference levels for absolute measurements are the same.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:BASETop
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE,
used to calculate reference levels for the measurement. The channel number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:BASETop
{AUTO|MINMax|MEANhistogram|MODEhistogram}
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:BASETop?

Arguments AUTO automatically chooses a reference level method.

MINMax specifies that reference levels are relative to the measurement MIN and
MAX.
MEANhistogram specifies that reference levels are relative to the histogram mean
BASE and TOP.

2-384 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MODEhistogram specifies that reference levels are relative to the histogram mode
BASE and TOP.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:BASETOP MINMAX specifies that reference

levels are relative to the measurement MIN and MAX.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:BASETOP? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:BASETOP AUTO indicating the
reference levels are chosen automatically.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:METHod
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels for the
measurement. The channel number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:METHod {PERCent|ABSolute}

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:METHod?

Arguments PERCent specifies percent reference level units.

ABSolute specifies absolute reference level units.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:METHOD PERCENT sets reference levels to be

calculated in percent.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:METHOD? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:METHOD PERCENT indicating the
reference levels are calculated in percent.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the falling
edge when the source ref level method is set to percent. The channel number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-385

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP) used to calculate the high
reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLHIGH 90.0000 sets the high

reference level for the falling edge to 90%.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLHIGH? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLHIGH 90.0000 indicating
the high reference level for the falling edge is set to 90%.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the falling
edge when the source ref level method is set to percent. The channel number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP) used to calculate the low
reference level when the measurement Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLLOW 10.0000 sets the

reference levels for the falling edge to 10%.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLLOW? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLLOW 10.0000 indicating the
reference levels for the falling edge is set to 10%.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling
edge when the source ref level method is set to percent. The channel number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

2-386 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage (where 50% is equal to MID) used to calculate the mid
reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLMiD 50.0000 sets the MID

reference level for the falling edge to 50%.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLMID? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLMID 50.0000 indicating the
MID reference level for the falling edge is set to 50%.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to MAX
and 0% is equal to MIN) used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level
when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The channel number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis?

Arguments <NR3> is the hysteresis value used for the autoset.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:HYSTERESIS 5.0000 sets the

reference level hysteresis to 5.0 mV.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:HYSTERESIS? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:HYSTERESIS 5.0000 indicating
the reference level hysteresis is set to 5.0 mV.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The channel number
is specified by x.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-387

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP) used to calculate the high
reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEHIGH 90.0000 sets the high

reference level for the rising edge to 90%.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEHIGH? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEHIGH 90.0000 indicating
the high reference level for the rising edge is set to 90%.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The channel number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP) used to calculate the mid
reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISELOW 10.0000 sets the

reference levels for the rising edge to 10%.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISELOW? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISELOW 10.0000 indicating the
reference levels for the rising edge is set to 10%.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising edge

2-388 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The channel number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage (where 50% is equal to MID) used to calculate the mid
reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEMiD 50.0000 sets the MID

reference level for the rising edge to 50%.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEMID? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEMID 50.0000 indicating the
MID reference level for the rising edge is set to 50%.

MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE
This command specifies or queries the reference level percent type for the
measurement. The channel number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE
{TENNinety|TWENtyeighty|CUSTom}
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE?

Arguments TENNinety specifies reference levels at the 10 and 90% levels.

TWENtyeighty specifies reference levels at the 20 and 80% levels.

CUSTom specifies custom reference levels.

Examples MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:TYPE TENNINETY sets the

reference levels to the 10 and 90% levels.
MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:TYPE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:CH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:TYPE TWENTYEIGHTY indicating
the reference levels are set to the 20 and 80% levels.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-389

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:DELete (No Query Form)

The command deletes the specified measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:DELete <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the measurement to delete. Argument is of the form "MEAS<NR1>"

where <NR1> is ≥1.

Examples MEASUREMENT:DELETE "MEAS4" deletes measurement 4.

MEASUrement:DELETEALL (No Query Form)

This command deletes all the active instances of measurements defined in the
scope application.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:DELETEALL

Examples MEASUREMENT:DELETEALL deletes all the active instances of measurements.

MEASUrement:EDGE<x>
This command sets or queries the type of the edge for the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:EDGE<x> {RISE|FALL|BOTH}

Arguments FALL specifies the falling edge of the waveform.

RISE specifies the rising edge of the waveform.

BOTH specifies both a rising and falling edge of the waveform.

2-390 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:EDGE2
MEASUrement:EDGE2? might return :MEASUREMENT:EDGE2 BOTH
indicating

MEASUrement:GATing
This command sets or queries the global gating type for the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:GATing {NONE|SCREEN|CURSor|LOGic|SEARch|TIMe}

MEASUrement:GATing?

Related Commands MEASUrement:GATing:ENDtime

MEASUrement:GATing:STARTtime

Arguments NONE turns off measurement gating.

SCREen turns on gating, using the left and right edges of the screen.

CURSor limits measurements to the portion of the waveform between the vertical
bar cursors, even if they are off screen.
LOGic specifies that measurements are taken only on the portion of the waveform
where the logic source is in the active state.
SEARCH specifies that measurements are taken based on search criteria.

TIMe limits measurements to the portion of the waveform between the Start and
End gate times

Examples MEASUREMENT:GATING SCREEN turns on measurement gating, using the left

and right edges of the screen.
MEASUREMENT:GATING? might return :MEASUREMENT:GATING CURSOR,
indicating that measurements are limited to the portion of the waveform between
the vertical bar cursors.

MEASUrement:GATing:ACTive
This command sets or queries the global gating active level used for logic gating.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-391

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:GATing:ACTive {HIGH|LOW}

MEASUrement:GATing:ACTive?

Arguments HIGH specifies the gate is HIGH.

LOW specifies the gate is LOW.

Examples MEASUREMENT:GATING:ACTIVE LOW specifies a low gate.

MEASUREMENT:GATING:ACTIVE? might return

:MEASUREMENT:GATING:ACTIVE HIGH indicating the gate is high.

MEASUrement:GATing:ENDtime
Sets or queries the end gate time for all measurements that use Global gating.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:GATing:ENDtime <NR3>

MEASUrement:GATing:ENDtime?

Related Commands MEASUrement:GATing

Arguments <NR3> is the time gating end gate time in seconds. The valid range is -10000
s to 10000 s.

Examples MEASUrement:GATing:ENDtime 5.31e-2 sets the global end gate time to

53.1 ms.
MEASUrement:GATing:ENDtime? might return 1.05 indicating that the global
end gate time is 1.05 s

MEASUrement:GATing:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the global gating hysteresis value used for logic
gating.

Group Measurement

2-392 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:GATing:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:GATing:HYSTeresis?

Arguments <NR3> is the gating hysteresis.

Examples MEASUREMENT:GATING:HYSTERESIS 40.0e-3 sets the hysteresis to 40 mV.

MEASUREMENT:GATING:HYSTERESIS? might return

:MEASUREMENT:GATING:HYSTERESIS 30.0000E-3 indicating the hysteresis
is 30 mV.

MEASUrement:GATing:LOGICSource
This command sets or queries the gating data source used for logic gating.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:GATing:LOGICSource {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

MEASUrement:GATing:LOGICSource?

Arguments Arguments are the logic gating source.

Examples MEASUREMENT:GATING:LOGICSOURCE MATH1 sets the logic source to MATH 1.

MEASUREMENT:GATING:LOGICSOURCE? might return

:MEASUREMENT:GATING:LOGICSOURCE CH6 indicating the logic source is
channel 6.

MEASUrement:GATing:MIDRef
This command sets or queries the global gating mid ref value used for logic gating.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:GATing:MIDRef <NR3>

MEASUrement:GATing:MIDRef?

Arguments <NR3> is the mid ref value for gating.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-393

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUREMENT:GATING:MIDREF 2.0 set the gating mid ref to 2.0 V.

MEASUREMENT:GATING:MIDREF? might return

:MEASUREMENT:GATING:MIDREF 1.5000 indicating the gating mid ref is 1.5 V.

MEASUrement:GATing:SEARCHSource
This command sets or queries the global gating search source when the gating
type is search.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:GATing:SEARCHSource SEARCH1

MEASUrement:GATing:SEARCHSource?

Arguments Argument is the search source.

Examples MEASUREMENT:GATING:SEARCHSOURCE SEARCH1 set the search source to

search 1.
MEASUREMENT:GATING:SEARCHSOURCE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:GATING:SEARCHSOURCE UNDEFINED indicating the
search source is not defined.

MEASUrement:GATing:STARTtime
Sets or queries the start gate time for all measurements that use Global gating.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:GATing:STARTtime <NR3>

MEASUrement:GATing:STARTtime?

Related Commands MEASUrement:GATing

Arguments <NR3> is the time gating start gate time in seconds. The valid range is -10000
s to 10000 s.

Examples MEASUrement:GATing:STARTtime -1.5e-3 sets the global start gate time to

-1.5 ms.

2-394 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:GATing:STARTtime? might return 3.0e-9, indicating that the

global start gate time is 3 ns.

MEASUrement:INTERp
This command sets or queries the interpolation mode used to locate edge crossings.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:INTERp {AUTO|SINX|LINear}

MEASUrement:INTERp?

Arguments AUTO automatically selects the interpolation mode.

SINX specifies sin(x)/x interpolation, where acquired points are fit to a curve.

LINear specifies linear interpolation, where acquired points are connected with
straight lines.

Examples MEASUREMENT:INTERP SINX set the interpolation mode to sin(x)/x.

MEASUREMENT:INTERP? might return :MEASUREMENT:INTERP AUTO indicating

the interpolation mode is auto.

MEASUrement:LIST? (Query Only)

This query returns a comma separated list of all currently defined measurements.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:LIST?

Returns Returns a list of all currently defined measurements. When no measurements are
defined, the command returns NONE.

Examples MEASUREMENT:LIST? might return :MEASUREMENT:LIST

MEAS1,MEAS2,MEAS3,MEAS4,MEAS5,MEAS6 indicating 6 measurements are
defined.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-395

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the
falling edge when the measurement ref level method is set to absolute. The math
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the high reference level, and is the zero percent level when
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH1:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh 1.5 sets the

reference level to 1.5 V.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLHIGH 1.0000
indicating the reference level is 1.0 V.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the
falling edge when the measuement ref level method is set to absolute. The math
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the high reference level, and is the zero percent level when
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow -1.5 sets the

reference level to -1.5 V.

2-396 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLLOW -1.0000
indicating the reference level is -1.0 V.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the
falling edge when the measurement ref level method is set to absolute. The math
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the mid reference level (where 50% is equal to MID) used to calculate the
mid reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid 0.0 sets the

reference level to 0.0 V.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLMID 0.0E+0 indicating
the reference level is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level
when the measurement ref level method is set to absolute. The math number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the hysteresis value used for the autoset.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-397

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis 20.0E-3 sets

the hysteresis to 20.0 mV.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:HYSTERESIS 30.0000E-3
indicating the hysteresis value is 30.0 mV.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement ref level method is set to absolute. The math
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the high reference level, and is the zero percent level when
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh 1.5 sets the

reference level to 1.5 V.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEHIGH 1.0000
indicating the reference level is 1.0 V.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow
This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement ref level method is set to absolute. The math
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow?

2-398 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the high reference level, and is the zero percent level when
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow -1.5 sets the

reference level to -1.5 V.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISELOW -1.0000
indicating the reference level is -1.0 V.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement ref level method is set to absolute. The math
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the mid reference level (where 50% is equal to MID) used to calculate
the mid reference level when the measurement Ref level method is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid 30.0E-3 sets the

reference level to 30 mV.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEMID 0.0E+0 indicating
the reference level is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE
This command sets or queries the reference level type for the measurement. The
math number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-399

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE {SAME|UNIQue}

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

SAME specifies that the absolute levels are set the same.

UNIQue specifies that the absolute levels can be set independently.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE UNIQUE specifies that

the absolute levels can be set independently.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:TYPE SAME indicating that
the absolute levels are set the same.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:BASETop
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE
used to calculate reference levels for the measurement. The math number is
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:BASETop
{AUTO|MINMax|MEANhistogram| MODEhistogram|EYEhistogram}
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:BASETop?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

AUTO automatically chooses a reference level method.

MINMax specifies that reference levels are relative to the measurement MIN and
MAX.
MEANhistogram specifies that reference levels are relative to the histogram mean
BASE and TOP.
MODEhistogram specifies that reference levels are relative to the histogram mode
BASE and TOP.
EYEhistogram specifies that reverence levels are relative to the eye histogram
BASE and TOP.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH1:REFLevels:BASETop MINMax specifies that reference

levels are relative to the measurement MIN and MAX.

2-400 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MATH1:REFLevels:BASETop? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:BASETOP AUTO indicating the instrument
automatically chooses a reference level method.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:METHod
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels for the
measurement. The math number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:METHod {PERCent|ABSolute}

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:METHod?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

PERCent specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent

relative to HIGH and LOW. The percentages are defined using the
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevel:PERCent commands.
ABSolute specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly using the
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute commands. This method is
useful when precise values are required.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:METHod ABSOLUTE specifies that the

reference levels are set explicitly
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:METHod? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:METHOD PERCENT indicating reference
levels are in percent relative to HIGH and LOW.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the falling
edge when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The math number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-401

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to HIGH) used to calculate the
high reference level when the measurement Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh 95 sets the reference

level to 95% of TOP.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLHIGH 90.0000
indicating the reference level is set to 90% of TOP.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the falling
edge when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The math number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to HIGH) used to calculate the mid
reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow 5 sets the reference

level to 5% of TOP.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLLOW 10.0000 indicating
the reference level is set to 10% of TOP.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling
edge when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The math number
is specified by x.

2-402 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 50% is equal to MID) used to calculate the mid
reference level when the measurement Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid 50 sets the reference

level to 50% of TOP.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLMID 50.0000 indicating
the reference level is set to 50% of TOP.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to MAX
and 0% is equal to MIN) used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level
when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The math number is
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the hysteresis value used for the autoset.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis 2.5 sets the

hysteresis to 2.5% of MAX
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:HYSTERESIS 5.0000
indicating the hysteresis is set to 5% of MAX.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-403

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The math number is
specified by x. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP) used to calculate the high
reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh 95 sets the reference

level to 95% of TOP.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEHIGH 90.0000
indicating the reference level is set to 90% of TOP.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The math number is
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP) used to calculate the mid
reference level when the measurement Ref level method is set to Percent.

2-404 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow 5 sets the reference

level to 5% of TOP.
MEASUrement:MATH2REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISELOW 10.0000 indicating
the reference level is set to 10% of TOP.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement ref level method is set to percent. The math number is
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 50% is equal to MID) used to calculate the mid
reference level when the measurement Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid 50 sets the reference

level to 50% of TOP.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEMID 50.0000 indicating
the reference level is set to 50% of TOP.

MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE
This command specifies or queries the reference level percent type for the
measurement. The math number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE
{TENNinety|TWENtyeighty|CUSTom}
MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-405

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

TENNinety sets the values for Low, Mid and High Ref to 10%, 50% and 90%
respectively.
TWENtyeighty sets the values for Low, Mid and High Ref are set to 20%, 50%
and 80% respectively.
CUSTom allows setting other reference level percents.

Examples MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE TWENTYEIGHTY sets the

values for Low, Mid and High Ref are set to 20%, 50% and 80% respectively.
MEASUrement:MATH2:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MATH2:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:TYPE TENNINETY indicating
the reference levels are set to 10%, 50% and 90%.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BURSTEDGTYPe
This command sets or queries the burst edge type for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BURSTEDGTYPe {RISE|FALL}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BURSTEDGTYPe?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

RISE specifies a burst with a rising edge.

FALL specifies a burst with a falling edge.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:BURSTEDGTYPe FALL specifies a burst with a falling

edge.
MEASUrement:MEAS2:BURSTEDGTYPe? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:BURSTEDGTYPE RISE indicating a burst
with a rising edge.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:MAXimum? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the maximum cycle-cycle value for the
specified measurement for all acquisitions. Measurements are specified by x.

2-406 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:MAXimum?

Returns The maximum cycle-cycle statistic value for the specified measurement for all
acquisitions.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:MAXimum? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:CCRESULTS:ALLACQS:MAXIMUM 9.91E+37.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:MEAN? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the mean cycle-cycle value for the specified
measurement for all acquisitions. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:MEAN?

Returns The mean cycle-cycle statistic value for the specified measurement for all
acquisitions.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:MEAN? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:CCRESULTS:ALLACQS:MEAN 9.91E+37.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:MINimum? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the minimum cycle-cycle value for the specified
measurement for all acquisitions. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:MINimum?

Returns The minimum cycle-cycle statistic value for the specified measurement for all
acquisitions.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-407

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:MINimum? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:CCRESULTS:ALLACQS:MINIMUM 9.91E+37.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:PK2PK? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the peak to peak cycle-cycle statistic for the
specified measurement for all acquisitions. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:PK2PK?

Returns The peak to peak cycle-cycle statistic value for the specified measurement all
acquisitions.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:PK2PK? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:CCRESULTS:ALLACQS:PK2PK 9.91E+37.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:POPUlation? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the population of all cycle-cycle statistics for
the specified measurement for all acquisitions accumulated since statistics were
last reset. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:POPUlation?

Returns The population of all cycle-cycle statistics for the specified measurement
accumulated over all acquisitions since statistics were last reset.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:POPUlation? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:CCRESULTS:ALLACQS:POPULATION 0 indicating no
statistics for the measurement.

2-408 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:STDDev? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the standard deviation cycle-cycle for the
specified measurement for all acquisitions. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:STDDev?

Returns The standard deviation cycle-cycle statistic value for the specified measurement
all acquisitions.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:STDDev? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:CCRESULTS:ALLACQS:STDDEV 9.91E+37.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:MAXimum? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the maximum cycle-cycle value for the
specified measurement for the current acquisition. Measurements are specified
by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:MAXimum?

Returns The maximum cycle-cycle statistic value for the specified measurement for the
current acquisition.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:MAXimum? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CCRESULTS:CURRENTACQ:MAXIMUM 9.91E+37.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the mean cycle-cycle value for the specified
measurement for the current acquisition. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-409

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?

Returns The mean cycle-cycle statistic value for the specified measurement for the current
acquisition.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CCRESULTS:CURRENTACQ:MEAN 9.91E+37.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:MINimum? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the minimum cycle-cycle value for the specified
measurement for the current acquisition. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:MINimum?

Returns The minimum cycle-cycle statistic value for the specified measurement for the
current acquisition.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:MINimum? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CCRESULTS:CURRENTACQ:MINIMUM 9.91E+37.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:PK2PK? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the peak to peak cycle-cycle statistic for the
specified measurement for the current acquisition. Measurements are specified
by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:PK2PK?

Returns The peak to peak cycle-cycle statistic value for the specified measurement for
the current acquisition.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:PK2PK? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CCRESULTS:CURRENTACQ:PK2PK 9.91E+37.

2-410 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:POPUlation? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the population of the cycle-cycle statistics
for the specified measurement for the current acquisition. Measurements are
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:POPUlation?

Returns The population of the cycle-cycle statistics for the specified measurement for
the current acquisition.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:POPUlation? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CCRESULTS:CURRENTACQ:POPULATION 0 indicating
the population is 0.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:STDDev? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the standard deviation cycle-cycle for the
specified measurement for the current acquisition. Measurements are specified
by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:STDDev?

Returns The standard deviation cycle-cycle statistic value for the specified measurement
for the current acquisition.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:CCRESUlts:CURRentacq:STDDev? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:CCRESULTS:CURRENTACQ:STDDEV 9.91E+37.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x>
This command sets or queries the 'to edge' type when EDGE<x> is EDGE1 and
the 'from edge' type when EDGE<x> is EDG2, for the measurement when the
measurement type is DELAY. Measurements are specified by x.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-411

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x>
{FALL|RISe|BOTH|SAMEas|OPPositeas}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x>?

Related Commands MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOEdge

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

FALL specifies the falling edge of the waveform.

RISE specifies the rising edge of the waveform.

BOTH specifies both a rising and falling edge of the waveform.

SAMEas specifies that both edges of the waveform are the same.

OPPositeas specifies that the edges of the waveform are not the same.

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:EDGE2 RISE specifies that the rising edge of the

waveform be used for measurement 3.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE2? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE2 FALL, indicating that the falling edge
of the waveform is being used for measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DISPlaystat:ENABle
This command turns on and off display of statistics in measurement badges in the
user interface. This command affects only the display of statistics, basic-statistics
are computed regardless of the state of this command. Measurements are specified
by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DISPlaystat:ENABle {OFF|ON|<NR1>}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DISPlaystat:ENABle?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

OFF turns off the display of statistics in measurement badges.

ON turns on the display of statistics in measurement badges.

2-412 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

<NR1> = 0 turns off the display of statistics in the measurement badge, any other
value turns on the display of statistics.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DISPlaystat:ENABle 0 turns off the display of

statistics in the measurement badge.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DISPlaystat:ENABle? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DISPLAYSTAT:ENABLE 1 indicating that the display of
statistics in the measurement badge is on.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEIncre
This command sets or queries the edge increment value for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEIncre <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEIncre?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the measurements edge increment value.

Examples :MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:EDGEINCRE? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:EDGEINCRE 1.0000 indicating the edge increment
value is set to 1.0000.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:FROMLevel
This command sets or queries the 'from level' edge for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:FROMLevel {MID|LOW|HIGH}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:FROMLevel?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

MID specifies the MID level.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-413

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HIGH specifies the HIGH level.

LOW specifies the LOW level.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGES:FROMLevel HIGH set the from level to the high

level
MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGES:FROMLevel? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:EDGES:FROMLEVEL LOW indicating the from
level is the low level.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:LEVel
This sets or queries the level type for the 'time outside level' measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:LEVel {HIGH|LOW|BOTH}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:LEVel?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

HIGH specifies the HIGH level.

LOW specifies the LOW level.

BOTH specifies both the HIGH and LOW level.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGES:LEVel LOW sets the level to the low level.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGES:LEVel? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:EDGES:LEVEL HIGH indicating the level is set to
the high level.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:N
The command sets or queries the number of accumulation cycles for the
measurement when the measurement type is nperiod. Measurements are specified
by x.

Group Measurement

2-414 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:N <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:N?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the maximum number of edges used by the measurement.

Examples measurement:meas1:edges:n 2 sets the number of edges to 2.

measurement:meas1:edges:n? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:EDGES:N 6.0000.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:SLEWRATEMethod
This command sets or queries the slew rate method for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:SLEWRATEMethod {NOMinal|DDR}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:SLEWRATEMethod?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

NOMinal specifies the nominal slew rate method.

DDR specifies the DDR slew rate method.

Examples measurement:meas1:edges:slewratemethod NOMINAL specifies the

nominal slew rate method.
measurement:meas1:edges:slewratemethod? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:EDGES:SLEWRATEMETHOD NOMINAL indicating the
slew rate method is set to NOMINAL.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:TOLevel
This command sets or queries the 'to level' edge for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-415

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:TOLevel {HIGH|MID|LOW}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:TOLevel?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

HIGH specifies the HIGH level.

MID specifies the MID level.

LOW specifies the LOW level.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGES:TOLevel HIGH specifies the High to level.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:EDGES:TOLevel? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:EDGES:TOLEVEL LOW indicating the to level
edge is set to the Low level.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGE<x>
This command sets or queries the type of the specified edge, rise or fall, for the
measurement. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGE<x> {RISE|FALL|BOTH}

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

RISE specifies the rising edge.

FALL specifies the falling edge.

BOTH specifies either the rising or falling edge.

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:EDGE1? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:EDGE1

RISE indicating that edge 1 of measurement 2 is the rising edge.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FAILCount? (Query Only)

This command returns the number of measurement failures, if applicable, for the selected measure
The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

2-416 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FAILCount?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE

Returns A running sum of the number of violations of the user specified measurement limit.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:FAILCount? might return

:MEASUrement:MEAS2:FAILCount 2 indicating that measurement 2 has
two measurement failures.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMedge
This command sets or queries the from edge type for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMedge {RISe|FALL|BOTH}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMedge?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

FALL specifies the falling edge of the waveform.

RISE specifies the rising edge of the waveform.

BOTH specifies both the rising and falling edges of the waveform.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMedge RISE specifies the rising edge of the

waveform.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMedge? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:FROMEDGE BOTH indicating both the rising and falling
edges of the waveform.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-417

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMEDGESEARCHDIRect
This command sets or queries the from edge search direction for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMEDGESEARCHDIRect {FORWard|BACKWard}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMEDGESEARCHDIRect?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

FORWard specifies a forward search from the edge.

BACKWard specifies a backward search from the edge.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMEDGESEARCHDIRect BACKWard specifies a

backward search from the edge.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:FROMEDGESEARCHDIRect? might return
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:FROMEDGESEARCHDIRECT FORWARD indicating a
forward search from the edge.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing
This command sets or queries the gating type for the measurement. Measurements
are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing
{NONE|SCREEN|CURSor|LOGic|SEARch|TIMe}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing?

Related Commands MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ENDtime

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:STARTtime

Arguments MEAS<x> is the measurement number for which to return a value.

NONE specifies measurements are taken across the entire record.

SCREEN turns on gating, using the left and right edges of the screen.

2-418 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

CURSor limits measurements to the portion of the waveform between the vertical
bar cursors, even if they are off screen.
LOGic specifies that measurements are taken only when the logical state of other
waveforms is true.
SEARch specifies that measurements are taken only where the results of a user
specified search are found.
TIMe limits measurements to the portion of the waveform between the Start and
End gate times.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing CURSOR limits measurements to the portion of

the waveform between the vertical bar cursor.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:GATING
NONE indicating measurements are taken across the entire record.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ACTive
This command sets or queries the gating active level when the gating type is
logic. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ACTive {HIGH|LOW}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ACTive?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

HIGH takes a measurement when logic gating is High.

LOW takes a measurement when logic gating Low.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:ACTive LOW specifies taking measurements

when logic gating is Low.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:ACTive? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:GATING:ACTIVE HIGH indicating measurements are
taken when logic gating is High.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ENDtime
Sets or queries the end gate time for the measurement when using Local gating.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-419

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ENDtime <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ENDtime?

Related Commands MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the time gating end gate time in seconds. The valid range is -10000
s to 10000 s.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS4:GATing:ENDtime 5.31e-2 sets the local end gate

time for Meas 4 to 53.1 ms.
MEASUrement:MEAS6:GATing:ENDtime? might return 1.05, indicating that
the local end gate time for Meas 6 is 1.05 s.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:GLOBal
This command sets or queries the gating settings global flag. Measurements are
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:GLOBal {OFF|ON|0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:GLOBal?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

OFF specifies gate settings can be changed independently for each individual
measurement.
ON applies global gate settings to all the measurements' gate settings.

0 specifies gate settings can be changed independently for each individual

measurement.
1 applies global gate settings to all the measurements' gate settings.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:GLOBal OFF specifies gate settings can be

changed independently for each individual measurement.

2-420 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:GLOBal? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:GATING:GLOBAL 1 indicating that gating
settings apply to all measurements.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the gating hysteresis value when the gating type is
logic. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:HYSTeresis?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the gating hysteresis.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:HYSTeresis 25.0E-3 sets the hysteresis

to 25 mV.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:HYSTeresis? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:GATING:HYSTERESIS 30.0000E-3 indicating the
hysteresis is set to 30.0 mV.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:LOGICSource
This command sets or queries the gating data source when the gating type is logic.
The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:LOGICSource
{CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

Arguments are the sources for logic gating.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:LOGICSource CH3 sets the gating logic source

to channel 3.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-421

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:LOGICSource? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:GATING:LOGICSOURCE CH2 indicating the gating
logic source is channel 2.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:MIDRef
This command sets or queries the gating mid ref value when the gating type is
logic. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:MIDRef <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:MIDRef?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the mid ref value for gating.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:MIDRef 1.0E+0 sets the gating midref to 1.0.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:MIDRef? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:GATING:MIDREF 0.0E+0 indicating the
midref value is set to 0.0.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:SEARCHSource
This command sets or queries the gating search source when the gating type is
search. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:SEARCHSource SEARCH1

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

SEARCH1 is the gating source for search gating.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:SEARCHSource SEARCH1 sets the gating

search source to SEARCH1.

2-422 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:SEARCHSource? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:GATING:SEARCHSOURCE SEARCH1 indicating the
gating search source is SEARCH1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:STARTtime
Sets or queries the start gate time for the measurement when using Local gating.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:STARTtime <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:STARTtime?

Related Commands MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the time gating start gate time in seconds. The valid range is -10000
s to 10000 s.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:STARTtime -1.5e-3 sets the local start gate

time for Meas 1 to -1.5 ms.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:GATing:STARTtime? might return 3.0e-9, indicating
that the local start gate time for Meas 1 is 3 ns.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GLOBalref
This command sets or queries the reference levels global flag for the measurement.
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GLOBalref {OFF|ON|0|1}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GLOBalref?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

OFF allows ref levels to be set separately for each measurement.

ON applies the same ref levels to all measurements.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-423

Commands listed in alphabetical order

0 allows ref levels to be set separately for each measurement.

1 applies the same ref levels to all measurements.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:GLOBalref 0 allows ref levels to be set separately for

each measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:GLOBalref? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:GLOBALREF 1 indicating the same ref levels apply
to all measurements.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHREFVoltage
This command sets or queries the high reference voltage value for the 'time
outside level' measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHREFVoltage <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHREFVoltage?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the high reference voltage value for the selected configuration.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHREFVoltage 1.5 sets the high reference voltage

to 1.5 V.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:HIGHREFVoltage? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:HIGHREFVOLTAGE 1.0000 indicating the
high reference voltage is set to 1.0 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:IDLETime
This command sets or queries the idle time for the measurement when the
measurement type is burst width. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:IDLETime <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:IDLETime?

2-424 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the idle time.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:IDLETime 40.0E-6 sets the idle time to 40.0 μs.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:IDLETime? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:IDLETIME 50.0000E-6 indicating the idle time
is 50.0 μs.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LABel
This command sets or queries the label for the measurement. As the label can
contain non 7-bit ASCII text, it is stored in Percent Encoding format. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LABel <QString>

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<QString> is the measurement label.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:LABel “Delay” sets the label to Delay.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:LABel? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:LABEL

"Peak-to-Peak" indicating that the measurement 1 label is Peak-to-peak.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LOWREFVoltage
This command sets or queries the low reference voltage value for the 'time outside
level' measurement. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LOWREFVoltage <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LOWREFVoltage?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the low reference voltage value for the selected configuration.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-425

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:LOWREFVoltage -1.30 sets the low reference voltage

to -1.3 V.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:LOWREFVoltage? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:LOWREFVOLTAGE -1.0000 indicating the
low ref voltage is -1.0 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILENabled
This command returns or sets the pass/fail test enable status. If enabled, this
will turn on pass fail testing for the specified measurement. Measurements are
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILENabled <NR1>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILENabled?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE

Arguments <NR1> enables or disables pass fail testing for the specified measurement. A value
of 1 enables and a value of 0 disables.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILENabled 1 enables pass fail testing for the

specified measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILENabled? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILENabled 0 indicating that pass
fail testing for the specified measurement is disabled.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILHIGHlimit
This command returns or sets the high limit for a measurement test. Used as the
test value when the "fail when" criteria is set to "less than" or "greater than".
Measurements are specified by x.

2-426 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILHIGHlimit <NR2>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILHIGHlimit?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE

Arguments <NR2> sets the high limit for a measurement test. The high limit is a number
which a measurement result will be tested against.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILHIGHlimit 710 specifies 710 as the high

limit for measurement 1.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILHIGHlimit? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILHIGHlimit 710 indicating that 710 is the
high limit for measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILLIMit
This command returns or sets the limit for a measurement test. Used as the
test value when the "fail when" criteria is set to "less than" or "greater than".
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILLIMit <NR2>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILLIMit?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-427

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR2> sets the limit for a measurement test. The limit is a number which a
measurement result will be tested against.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILLIMit 710 specifies 710 as the limit for

measurement 1.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILLIMit? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILLIMit 710 indicating that 710 is
the limit for measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILLOWlimit
This command returns or sets the low limit for a measurement test. Used as the
test value when the "fail when" criteria is set to "less than" or "greater than".
Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILLOWlimit <NR2>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILLOWlimit?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE

Arguments <NR2> sets the low limit for a measurement test. The limit is a number which a
measurement result will be tested against.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILLOWlimit 690 specifies 690 as the limit

for measurement 1.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILLOWlimit? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILLOWlimit 690 indicating that 690 is the
low limit for measurement 1.

2-428 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILMARgin
This command returns or sets the allowed margin for limit comparisons for all pass/fail checks.
This is given as a percentage with a default value of 0.05 representing
5%. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILMARgin <NR2>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILMARgin?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE

Arguments <NR2> sets the allowed margin for limit comparisons for all pass/fail checks.
The margin as a percentage of the limit.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILMARgin 0.10 specifies 10% as

the allowed margin for limit comparisons for all pass/fail checks.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILMARgin? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILMARgin 0.10 indicating that
10% is the allowed margin for limit comparisons for all pass/fail checks on
measurement 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILWHEN
This command sets or returns the condition on which a measurement test fails. Measurements
are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILWHEN {LESSthan| GREATERthan|

Equals| NOTEQuals| INSIDErange| OUTSIDErange}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILWHEN?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-429

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE

Arguments LESSthan sets the condition for measurement test failure as less than the given
limit. This is the default value.
GREATERthan sets the condition for measurement test failure as greater than
the given limit.
Equals sets the condition for measurement test failure as equals the given limit.

NOTEQuals sets the condition for measurement test failure as not equal to the
given limit.
INSIDErange sets the condition for measurement test failure as inside the limit
range.
OUTSIDErange sets the condition for measurement test failure as outside the
limit range.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILWHEN LESSthan specifies the condition for

measurement 1 test failure as less that the given limit.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILWHEN? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:PASSFAILWHEN LESSthan indicating that the
condition for measurement 1 test failure as less that the given limit.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PERFREQ:EDGE
This command sets or queries the edge type of a Period/Frequency measurement.
The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PERFREQ:EDGE {FIRST|RISE|FALL}

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

FIRST computes the measurement between Rising edges if the first edge is Rising.
Computes the measurement between Falling edges if the first edge is Falling.

2-430 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

RISE computes the measurement between Rising edges.

FALL computes the measurement between Falling edges.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:PERFREQ:EDGE RISE specifies computing the

measurement between Rising edges.
measurement:meas1:perfreq:edge? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:PERFREQ:EDGE FIRST if the measurement
is computed between edges of the first type edge found.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POLarity
This command sets or queries the polarity for the measurement when the
measurement type is burst width. Measurements are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POLarity {NORMal|INVerted}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POLarity?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

NORMal specifies normal polarity.

INVerted specifies inverted polarity.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:POLarity INVERTED specifies inverted polarity.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:POLarity? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:POLARITY NORMAL indicating normal polarity.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of
the falling edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.
Measurements are specified by x.

NOTE. This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements

Group Measurement

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-431

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the high reference level in volts. The default is 0.0 V.

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLHIGH 1.71 sets the high

reference level to 1.71 V.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLHIGH? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLHIGH 1.7100E+00,
indicating that the absolute high reference level is set to 1.71 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of
the falling edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.
Measurements are specified by x.

NOTE. This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:FALLLow <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:FALLLow?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the low reference level in volts. The default is 0.0 V.

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:FALLLOW 0.0 V sets the

low reference level to 0.0 V.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:FALLLOW? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:FALLLOW 0.0000E+00,
indicating that the absolute low reference level is set to 0.0 V.

2-432 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of
the falling edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.
Measurements are specified by x.

NOTE. This command affects the results of period, frequency, delay, and all
cyclic measurements.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:FALLMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:FALLMid?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the mid reference level in volts. The default is 0.0 V.

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:FALLMID 0.5 sets the mid

reference level for the delay waveform to 0.5 V.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:FALLMID? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:FALLMID 0.5000E+00,
indicating that the absolute mid reference level is set to 0.5 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level
when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute. The measurement
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:HYSTeresis?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the hysteresis value used for autoset.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-433

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:ABSolute:HYSTeresis 25.0E-3 sets

the hysteresis to 25 mV.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:ABSolute:HYSTeresis? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:HYSTERESIS 30.0000E-3
indicating the hysteresis is set to 30 mV.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:RISEHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:RISEHigh?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the high reference level, and is the zero percent level when the
measurement's Ref level method is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:ABSolute:RISEHigh 1.50 sets the

high reference level to 1.5 V.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:ABSolute:RISEHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:RISEHIGH 1.0000
indicating the high reference level is set to 1.0 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:RISELow
This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:RISELow <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:RISELow?

2-434 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the low reference level, and is the zero percent level when the
measurement's Ref level method is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:ABSolute:RISELow -1.50 sets the

low reference level to -1.5 V.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:ABSolute:RISELow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:RISELOW -1.0000
indicating the low reference level is -1.0 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:RISEMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:RISEMid?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the mid reference level (where 50% is equal to MID) used to calculate the
mid reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:ABSolute:RISEMid 30.0E-3 sets the

mid reference level to 30 mV.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:ABSolute:RISEMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:RISEMID 0.0E+0
indicating the mid reference level is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:TYPE
This command sets or queries the reference level type for the measurement. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-435

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:TYPE {SAME|UNIQue}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:ABSolute:TYPE?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

SAME specifies that the absolute levels are set the same.

UNIQue specifies that the absolute levels can be set independently.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:ABSolute:TYPE UNIQUE specifies that

the absolute levels can be set independently.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:ABSolute:TYPE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:ABSOLUTE:TYPE SAME indicating the
absolute levels are set the same.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:BASETop
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE
used to calculate reference levels for the measurement. The measurement number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:BASETop
{AUTO|MINMax|MEANhistogram| MODEhistogram|EYEhistogram}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:BASETop?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

AUTO automatically chooses a reference level method.

MINMax specifies that reference levels are relative to the measurement MIN and
MAX.
MEANhistogram specifies that reference levels are relative to the histogram mean
BASE and TOP.
MODEhistogram specifies that reference levels are relative to the histogram mode
BASE and TOP.
EYEhistogram specifies that reverence levels are relative to the eye histogram
BASE and TOP.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:BASETop MINMAX specifies that reference

levels are relative to the measurement MIN and MAX.

2-436 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:BASETop? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:BASETOP AUTO indicating the
instrument automatically chooses a reference level method.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:METHod
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels for the
measurement. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:METHod {PERCent|ABSolute}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:METHod?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

PERCent specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent

relative to HIGH and LOW. The percentages are defined using the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent commands.
ABSolute specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly using the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute commands. This method is
useful when precise values are required.

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:METHOD ABSOLUTE specifies that explicit

user-defined values are used for the reference levels.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:METHOD? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:METHOD PERCENT, indicating that the
reference level units used are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the falling edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent. The measurement
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:FALLHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:FALLHigh?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-437

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to HIGH) used to calculate the
high reference level.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:FALLHigh 95.0 sets the high

reference level of the falling edge to 95%.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:FALLHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:PERCENT:FALLHIGH 90.0000
indicating the high reference level is set to 90%.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the falling edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent. The measurement
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:FALLLow <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:FALLLow?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to HIGH) used to calculate the
mid reference level.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:FALLLow 5.0 sets the low

reference level of the falling edge is 5%.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:FALLLow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:PERCENT:FALLLOW 10.0000
indicating the low reference level of the falling edge is 10%.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent. The measurement
number is specified by x.

2-438 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:FALLMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:FALLMid?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 50% is equal to MID) used to calculate the mid
reference level.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:FALLMid 50.0 sets the mid

reference level of the falling edge to 50%.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:FALLMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:PERCENT:FALLMID 50.0000
indicating the mid reference level of the falling edge is set to 50%.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to MAX and
0% is equal to MIN) used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level when
the measurement's ref level method is set to percent. The measurement number
is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:HYSTeresis?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the hysteresis value used for the autoset.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:HYSTeresis 5.0 sets the

hysteresis level to 5%.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:HYSTeresis? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:PERCENT:HYSTERESIS 5.0000
indicating the hysteresis is 5.0%.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-439

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent. The measurement
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:RISEHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:RISEHigh?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP) used to calculate the high
reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:RISEHigh 95.0 sets the high

reference level of the rising edge is set to 95%.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:RISEHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:PERCENT:RISEHIGH 90.0000
indicating the high reference level of the rising edge is set to 90%.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:RISELow
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent. The measurement
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:RISELow <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:RISELow?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> is the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP) used to calculate the mid
reference level when the measurement's Ref level method is set to Percent.

2-440 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:RISELow 5.0 sets the low

reference level is set to 5.0%.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:RISELow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:PERCENT:RISELOW 10.0000
indicating the low reference level is set to 10.0%.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent. The measurement
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:RISEMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:RISEMid?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

<NR3> the percentage (where 50% is equal to MID) used to calculate the mid
reference level when the measurement Ref level method is set to Percent.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:RISEMid 50.0000 sets the

mid reference level of the rising edge is set to 50.0%.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:RISEMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:PERCENT:RISEMID 50.0000
indicating the mid reference level of the rising edge is set to 50.0%.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:TYPE
This command specifies or queries the reference level percent type for the
measurement. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:TYPE
{TENNinety|TWENtyeighty|CUSTom}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:TYPE?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-441

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

TENNinety sets the values for Low, Mid and High Ref to 10%, 50% and 90%
respectively.
TWENtyeighty sets the values for Low, Mid and High Ref are set to 20%, 50%
and 80% respectively.
CUSTom allows setting other reference level percents.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:TYPE TWENtyeighty sets the

reference levels percent to 20%, 50% and 80%.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFLevels1:PERCent:TYPE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVELS1:PERCENT:TYPE TENNINETY indicating
the reference levels percent type is 10%, 50% and 90% respectively

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFMode
This command sets or queries the reference level mode for the measurement. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFMode {AUTO|MANual}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFMode?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

AUTO sets the reference level for the measurement automatically.

MANual allows the user to set the reference level for the measurement.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFMode Manual allows the user to set the reference

level for the measurement.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFMode? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFMODE AUTO indicating the reference levels for the
measurement are set automatically.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFVoltage
This command sets or queries the reference voltage value for the measurement.
The measurement number is specified by x.

2-442 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFVoltage <NR3>

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFVoltage?

Arguments <NR3> is the reference voltage value for the selected configuration.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFVoltage 30.E-3 sets the reference voltage value

for the measurement to 30 mV.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:REFVoltage? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFVOLTAGE 0.0E+0 indicating the reference voltage
value for the measurement is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MAXimum? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the maximum value for all accumulated
measurement acquisitions of the specified measurement. The measurement
number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MAXimum?

Returns The maximum value for all accumulated measurement acquisitions of the
specified measurement.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MAXimum? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:ALLACQS:MAXIMUM 2.420 indicating the
maximum measurement value is 2.420 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MEAN? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the mean value for all accumulated
measurement acquisitions for measurement <x>.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MEAN?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-443

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Returns The mean value for all accumulated measurement acquisitions for measurement
<x>.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MEAN? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:ALLACQS:MEAN 2.2807617754647
indicating the measurement mean is 2.28 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MINimum? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the minimum value for all accumulated
measurement acquisitions for measurement <x>.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MINimum?

Returns The minimum value for all accumulated measurement acquisitions for
measurement <x>.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:MINimum? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:ALLACQS:MINIMUM 2.220 indicating the
measurement minimum value is 2.220 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:PK2PK? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the peak-to-peak value for all accumulated
measurement acquisitions for measurement <x>.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:PK2PK?

Returns The peak-to-peak value for all accumulated measurement acquisitions for
measurement <x>.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:PK2PK? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:ALLACQS:PK2PK 200.0E-3 indicating the
measurement peak-to-peak value is 200 mV.

2-444 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:POPUlation? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the population measurement value for
measurement <x>.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:POPUlation?

Returns The population measurement value for measurement <x>.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:POPUlation? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:ALLACQS:POPULATION 29825 indicating
the measurement population is 29825 measurements.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:STDDev? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the standard deviation for all accumulated
measurement acquisitions for measurement <x>.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:STDDev?

Returns The standard deviation for all accumulated measurement acquisitions for
measurement <x>.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:ALLAcqs:STDDev? might

return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:ALLACQS:STDDEV
23.5741246494459E-3 indicating the measurement standard deviation is
23.57 mV.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MAXimum? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the maximum value found for the specified
measurement since the last statistical reset. The measurement number is specified
by x.

Group Measurement

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-445

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MAXimum?

Returns The maximum value found for the specified measurement since the last statistical
reset.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MAXimum? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:CURRENTACQ:MAXIMUM 2.280 indicating
the current measurement maximum value is 2.28 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the mean value for the measurement for the
current acquisition.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?

Arguments MEAS<x> is the measurement number for which to return a value. This is the
equivalent of the number shown in the measurement badge on the UI.

Returns The mean value accumulated for the specified measurement since the last
statistical reset.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS3:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:RESULTS:CURRENTACQ:MEAN 2.30 indicating the
mean of measurement 3 in the current acquisition is 2.3 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MINimum? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the minimum value found for the specified
measurement since the last statistical reset. The measurement number is specified
by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MINimum?

2-446 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Returns The minimum value found for the specified measurement since the last statistical
reset.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MINimum? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:CURRENTACQ:MINIMUM 2.260 indicating
the minimum value of the measurement in the current acquisition is 2.26 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:PK2PK? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the peak-to-peak value for the specified
measurement for the current acquisition. The measurement number is specified
by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:PK2PK?

Returns The peak-to-peak value for the specified measurement.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:PK2PK? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:CURRENTACQ:PK2PK 0.0E+0 indicating
the peak-to-peak value for the specified measurement for the current acquisition
is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POPUlation? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the population for the specified measurement
for the current acquisition. The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POPUlation?

Returns The population measurement value for the specified measurement.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:POPUlation? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:CURRENTACQ:POPULATION 1 indicating the
population for the current measurement is 1 measurement.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-447

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:STDDev? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the standard deviation for the specified
measurement for all acquisitions accumulated since statistics were last reset. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:STDDev?

Returns The standard deviation of values accumulated for the specified measurement
since the last statistical reset.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq:STDDev? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESULTS:CURRENTACQ:STDDEV 0.0E+0 indicating
the standard deviation for the measurement is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SIGNALType
This command sets or queries the signal type of source 1 for the measurement.
The measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SIGNALType {CLOCK|DATA|AUTO}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SIGNALType?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

CLOCK specifies a clock signal type.

DATA specifies a data signal type.

AUTO automatically selects the signal type.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SIGNALType CLOCK specifies a clock signal type.

MEASUrement:MEAS1:SIGNALType? might return

:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SIGNALTYPE AUTO indicating the instrument
automatically selects the signal type.

2-448 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>
This command sets or queries the measurement source. The measurement number
and source are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x> {CH<x> |DCH<x>_D<x> |MATH<x>

|REF<x>}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

SOUrce<x> specifies the source number.

CH<x> specifies an analog channel to use as the source.

DCH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel to use as the source. The supported

digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are 0 to 15.
MATH<x> specifies a math waveform to use as the source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform to use as the source.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:SOUrce1 CH1 sets the source for measurement 1 to

channel 1.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:SOUrce1? might return
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:SOUrce CH1 indicating the measurement source is
channel 1.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATUS? (Query Only)

This command returns the pass fail status, if applicable, for the selected measurement. Measur
are specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATUS?

Related Commands ACTONEVent:ENable

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:STATE

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-449

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ:STATE
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE

Arguments PASS specifies that the user specified measurement limit has not been violated.

FAIL specifies that the user specified measurement limit has been violated.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:STATUS? might return :MEASUrement:MEAS1:STATUS

PASS indicating that the user specified measurement limit has not been violated.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOEdge
This command sets or queries the 'to edge' type for the measurement. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOEdge
{SAMEas|OPPositeas|RISe|FALL|BOTH}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOEdge?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

FALL specifies the falling edge of the waveform.

RISE specifies the rising edge of the waveform.

BOTH specifies both a rising and falling edge of the waveform.

SAMEas specifies that both edges of the waveform are the same.

OPPositeas specifies that the edges of the waveform are not the same.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:TOEdge FALL specifies the to edge is the falling edge

of the waveform.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:TOEdge? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TOEDGE
SAMEAS indicating that both edges of the waveform are the same.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOEDGESEARCHDIRect
This command sets or queries the to edge search direction for the measurement.
The measurement number is specified by x.

2-450 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOEDGESEARCHDIRect {FORWard|BACKWard}

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOEDGESEARCHDIRect?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

FORWard specifies a forward search to the edge.

BACKWard specifies a backward search to the edge.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:TOEDGESEARCHDIRect FORWARD specifies a forward

search to the edge.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:TOEDGESEARCHDIRect? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TOEDGESEARCHDIRECT FORWARD indicating the
instrument will search in the forward direction for the to edge.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TRANSition
This command sets or queries the transition edges flag for the measurement. The
measurement number is specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TRANSition {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Arguments <NR1> = 1, the measurement is computed on rising (if measurement type is

rise time) or falling edges (if measurement type is fall time) following a double
transition only. If it is set to 0, the measurement is computed on all rising (if
measurement type is rise time) or falling (if measurement type is fall time) edges.
OFF computes the measurement on all rising (if measurement type is rise time)
or falling (if measurement type is fall time) edges.
ON computes the measurement on rising (if measurement type is rise time) or
falling edges (if measurement type is fall time) following a double transition only.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS1:TRANSition 1 specifyingthe measurement is computed

on rising (if measurement type is rise time) or falling edges (if measurement type
is fall time) following a double transition only.
MEASUrement:MEAS1:TRANSition? might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TRANSITION 0 indicating the measurement is

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-451

Commands listed in alphabetical order

computed on all rising (if measurement type is rise time) or falling (if
measurement type is fall time) edges.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
This command sets or queries the measurement type for the measurement
specified by x.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe {ACRMS |AMPlITUDE |AREA |BASE

|BURSTWIDTH |DATARATE |DELAY |FALLSLEWRATE |FALLTIME
|FREQUENCY |HIGHTIME |HOLD |LOWTIME |MAXIMUM |MEAN |MINIMUM
|NDUtY |NPERIOD |NOVERSHOOT |NWIDTH |PDUTY |PERIOD |PHASE
|PK2Pk |POVERSHOOT |PWIDTH |RISESLEWRATE |RISETIME |RMS
|SETUP |SKEW |TIMEOUTSIDELEVEL |TOP}
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe?

Arguments ACRMS (AC RMS) is the true Root Mean Square of the data points, about the
Mean. This measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each cycle
in the record.
AMPLITUDE is the difference between the Top value and the Base value. This
measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
Amplitude = High - Low
AREA is the area under the curve, calculated by integrating the data points. The
area measured above ground is positive. The area measured below ground is
negative. This measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each
cycle in the record.
BASE is the most common data value below the midpoint of the waveform. This
measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
BURSTWIDTH (Burst Width) is the duration of a series of adjacent crossings of the
Mid reference level (RM). Bursts are separated by a user-defined idle time (tI).
This measurement is made on each burst in the record.
DATARATE (Data Rate) is the reciprocal of Unit Interval. This measurement is
made on each bit in the record.
DELay is the time between the specified Mid reference level (RM) crossing on
one source to a specified Mid reference level (RM) crossing on a second source.
This measurement is made on the first occurrence in the record.

2-452 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

FALLSLEWRATE (Falling Slew Rate) is the rate of change in voltage as an edge

transitions from the Top reference level (RT) to the Bottom reference level (RB).
This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
FALLTIME (Fall Time) is the time required for an edge to fall from the Top
reference level (RT) to the Base reference level (RB). This measurement is made
on each cycle in the record.
FREQuency is the reciprocal of Period. This measurement is made on each cycle
in the record.
HIGHTIME (High Time) is the time the signal remains above the Top reference
level (RT). This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
HOLD (Hold Time) is the time between the specified Mid reference level crossing
(RM) on the Clock source to the closest specified Mid reference level (RM)
crossing on the Data source. This measurement is made on each specified Clock
edge in the record.
LOWTIME (Low Time) is the time the signal remains below the Base reference
level (RB). This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
MAXimum is the maximum data point. This measurement can be made across the
entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
MEAN is the arithmetic mean of the data points. This measurement can be made
across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
MINImum is the minimum data point. This measurement can be made across the
entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
NDUty (Negative Duty Cycle) is the ratio of the Negative Pulse Width to the
Period. This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
Negative Duty Cycle = (Negative Width) / Period × 100%
NPERIOD (Duration N-Periods) is the time required to complete N cycles. A cycle
is the time between two adjacent (same direction) crossings of the Mid reference
level (RM). This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
NOVershoot (Negative Overshoot) is the difference between Minimum and
Base, divided by the Amplitude. This measurement can be made across the entire
record, or on each cycle in the record.
Negative Overshoot = (Base - Minimum) / Amplitude × 100%)
NWIdth (Negative Pulse Width) is the time the signal remains below the Mid
reference level (RM). This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
PDUTY (Positive Duty Cycle) is the ratio of the Positive Pulse Width to the Period.
This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
Positive Duty Cycle = (Positive Width)/Period × 100%

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-453

Commands listed in alphabetical order

PERIOD is the time required to complete a cycle. A cycle is the time between
two adjacent (same direction) crossings of the Mid reference level (RM). This
measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
PHASE is the ratio of the Skew between two sources to the Period of the first
source. This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
PK2Pk (Peak-to-peak) is the difference between Maximum and Minimum. This
measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
POVERSHOOT (Positive Overshoot) is the difference between Maximum and Top,
divided by the Amplitude. This measurement can be made across the entire
record, or on each cycle in the record.
Positive Overshoot = (Maximum - Top) / Amplitude ×100%
PWIDTH (Positive Pulse Width) is the time the signal remains above the Mid
reference level (RM). This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
RISESLEWRATE (Rising Slew Rate) is the rate of change in voltage as an edge
transitions from the Base reference level (RB) to the Top reference level (RT).
This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
RISETIME Rise Time is the time required for an edge to rise from the Base
reference level (RB) to the Top reference level (RT). This measurement is made
on each cycle in the record.
RMS is the true Root Mean Square of the data points. This measurement can be
made across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.
SETUP (Setup Time) is the time between the specified Mid reference level (RM)
crossing on the Data source to the closest specified Mid reference level (RM)
crossing on the Clock source. This measurement is made on each specified Clock
edge in the record.
SKEW Skew is the time between the specified Mid reference level (RM) crossing
on one source to the following specified Mid reference level (RM) crossing on a
second source. This measurement is made on each cycle in the record.
TIMEOUTSIDELEVEL Time Outside Level is the time the signal remains above
the Top reference level (RT) and/or below the Base reference level (RB). This
measurement is made on each occurrence in the record.
TOP is the most common data value above the midpoint of the waveform. This
measurement can be made across the entire record, or on each cycle in the record.

Examples MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:TYPE FREQUENCY defines measurement 2 as a

measurement of the frequency of a waveform.
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE? might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE RMS,
indicating that measurement 1 is defined to measure the RMS value of a waveform.

2-454 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:XUNIT? (Query Only)

Returns the horizontal scale units of the specified measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:XUNIT?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS2:XUNIT? might return "V", indicating that the horizontal

unit for measurement 2 is seconds.

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:YUNIT? (Query Only)

Returns the vertical scale units of the specified measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:YUNIT?

Arguments MEAS<x> specifies the measurement number.

Examples MEASUrement:MEAS12:YUNIT? might return “V”, indicating that the vertical

unit for measurement 12 is volts.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the
falling edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-455

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the high reference level of the falling edge when the
measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh 1.5 sets the high reference

level to 1.5 V.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLHIGH 1.0000 indicating the
high reference level is 1.0 V.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the
falling edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow?

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the low reference level of the falling edge.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow -1.5 sets the low reference

level to -1.5 V.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLLOW -1.0000 indicating the
low reference level is -1.0 V.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the
falling edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the mid reference level of the falling edge.

2-456 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid 10.0E-3 sets the mid

reference level to 10.0 mV.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLMID 0.0E+0 indicating the mid
reference level is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level
when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis?

Arguments <NR3> is the value of the hysteresis of the reference level.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis 20.0E-3 sets the

hysteresis to 20.0 mV.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:HYSTERESIS 30.0000E-3
indicating the hysteresis is set to 30.0 mV.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh?

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the high reference level of the rising edge.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh 1.5 sets the high reference

to 1.5 V.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-457

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh? might return

:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEHIGH 1.0000 indicating the
high reference is 1.0 V.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow
This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow?

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the the low reference level of the rising edge

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow -1.5 sets the low reference

level to -1.5 V.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISELOW -1.0000 indicating the
low reference level is -1.0 V.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the mid reference level of the rising edge.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid 10.0E-3 sets the mid

reference to 10.0 mV.

2-458 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid? might return

:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEMID 0.0E+0 indicating the mid
reference is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE
This command sets or queries the reference level type for the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE {SAME|UNIQue}

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE?

Arguments SAME specifies that the absolute levels are set the same.

UNIQue specifies that the absolute levels can be set independently.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE UNIQUE specifies that the

absolute levels can be set independently.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:TYPE SAME indicating the absolute
levels are set the same.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:BASETop
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE,
used to calculate reference levels for the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:BASETop
{AUTO|MINMax|MEANhistogram|MODEhistogram|EYEhistogram}
MEASUrement:REFLevels:BASETop?

Arguments Arguments are the base top methods.

Examples MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:BASETOP MINMAX selects the MINMAX base top

method.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-459

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:BASETOP? might return

:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:BASETOP MINMAX indicating the base top method
is MINMAX.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:METHod
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels for
the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:METHod {PERCent|ABSolute}

MEASUrement:REFLevels:METHod?

Arguments PERCent specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent
relative to HIGH and LOW. The percentages are defined using the
MEASUrement:REFLevels:REFLevel:PERCent commands.

ABSolute specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly using the
MEASUrement:REFLevels:REFLevel:ABSolute commands. This method is
useful when precise values are required.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:METHod ABSOLUTE specifies that the reference

levels are set explicitly.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:METHod? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:METHOD PERCENT indicating the reference levels
are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:MODE
This command sets or queries how often reference levels are calculated.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:MODE {LATCh|CONTinuous}

MEASUrement:REFLevels:MODE?

Arguments LATCh calculates reference levels only on the first acquisition after a statistics
reset.
CONTinuous calculates reference levels on every acquisition.

2-460 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:MODE CONTINUOUS calculates reference levels on

every acquisition.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:MODE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:MODE LATCH indicating reference levels are
calculated only on the first acquisition after a statistics reset.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the falling edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the high reference level of the falling
edge

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh 90 sets the high reference

level to 90%.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLHIGH 80.0000 indicating the
high reference level is 80%.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling
edge.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-461

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow 10 sets the low reference level

to 10%.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLLOW 20.0000 indicating the low
reference level is 20%.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling
edge

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid 55 sets the mid reference

level to 55%.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLMID 50.0000 indicating the mid
reference level is 50%.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to MAX and
0% is equal to MIN) used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level when
the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level.

2-462 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis 3 sets the hysteresis to 3%.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis? might return

:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:HYSTERESIS 5.0000 indicating the
hysteresis is set to 5%.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the high reference level of the rising
edge.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh 90 sets the high reference

level to 90%.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEHIGH 80.0000 indicating the
high ref level is 80%.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-463

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow 10 sets the low reference level

to 10%.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISELOW 20.0000 indicating the low
reference level is 20%.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising
edge.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid 55 sets the mid reference

level to 55%.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEMID 50.0000 indicating the mid
reference level is 50%.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE
This command sets or queries the reference level percent type for the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE
{TENNinety|TWENtyeighty|CUSTom}
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE?

Arguments TENNinety sets the values for Low, Mid and High Ref to 10%, 50% and 90%
respectively.

2-464 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

TWENtyeighty sets the values for Low, Mid and High Ref are set to 20%, 50%
and 80% respectively.
CUSTom allows setting other reference level percents.

Examples MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE TENNINETY sets the values for

Low, Mid and High Ref to 10%, 50% and 90% respectively.
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:TYPE CUSTOM indicating
that custom reference levels can be set.

MEASUrement:REFLevels:TYPE
This command sets or queries the shared reference level method used for sources
of measurement calculations.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevels:TYPE {GLOBal|PERSource}

MEASUrement:REFLevels:TYPE?

Arguments GLOBal shares reference levels across measurements.

PERSource causes reference levels to be used on individual measurements.

Examples MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:TYPE PERSource causes reference levels to be used

on individual measurements.
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:TYPE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVELS:TYPE GLOBAL indicating reference levels are
shared across measurements.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the
falling edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-465

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the high reference level of the falling edge when the
measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh 1.5 sets the

reference level to 1.5 V.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLHIGH 1.0000 indicating
the reference level is 1.0 V.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the
falling edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow?

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the low reference level of the falling edge when the
measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow -1.5 sets the low

reference level to -1.5 V.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLLow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLLOW -1.0000 indicating
the low reference level is -1.0 V.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the
falling edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid?

2-466 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the mid reference level of the falling edge when the
measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid 50.0E-3 sets the

mid reference level to 50.0 mV.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:FALLMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:FALLMID 0.0E+0 indicating
the reference level is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the value of the hysteresis of the reference level
when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis?

Arguments <NR3> is the value of the hysteresis of the reference level when the measurement's
ref level method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis 20.0E-3 sets the

hysteresis to 20.0 mV.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:HYSTeresis? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:HYSTERESIS 30.0000E-3
indicating the hysteresis is 30.0 mV.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the value used as the high reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-467

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the high reference level of the rising edge when the
measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh 1.5 sets the

reference level to 1.5 V.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEHIGH 1.0000 indicating
the reference level is 1.0 V.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow
This command sets or queries the value used as the low reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow?

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the low reference level of the rising edge when the
measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow -1.5 sets the

reference level to -1.5 V.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISELow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISELOW -1.0000 indicating
the reference level is -1.0 V.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the value used as the mid reference level of the
rising edge when the measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid?

2-468 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR3> is the value used as the mid reference level of the rising edge when the
measurement's ref level method is set to absolute.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid 10.0E-3 sets the

reference level to 10.0 mV.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:RISEMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:RISEMID 0.0E+0 indicating
the mid reference level is 0.0 V.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE
This command sets or queries the reference level type for the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE {SAME|UNIQue}

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE?

Arguments SAME specifies that the absolute levels are set the same.

UNIQue specifies that the absolute levels can be set independently.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE UNIQUE specifies that the

absolute levels can be set independently.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:ABSOLUTE:TYPE SAME indicating that the
absolute levels are set the same.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:BASETop
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate the TOP and BASE,
used to calculate reference levels for the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:BASETop

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-469

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments AUTO automatically chooses a reference level method.

MINMax specifies that reference levels are relative to the measurement MIN and
MAX.
MEANhistogram specifies that reference levels are relative to the histogram mean
BASE and TOP.
MODEhistogram specifies that reference levels are relative to the histogram mode
BASE and TOP.
EYEhistogram specifies that reverence levels are relative to the eye histogram
BASE and TOP.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:BASETop MINMAX specifies that reference

levels are relative to the measurement MIN and MAX.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:BASETop? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:BASETOP AUTO indicating the instrument
automatically chooses a reference level method.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:METHod
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate reference levels for
the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:METHod {PERCent|ABSolute}

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:METHod?

Arguments PERCent specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent
relative to HIGH and LOW. The percentages are defined using the
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevel:PERCent commands.

ABSolute specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly using the
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute commands. This method is
useful when precise values are required.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:METHod ABSOLUTE specifies that the

reference levels are set explicitly.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:METHod? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:METHOD PERCENT indicating the
reference levels are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW.

2-470 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the falling edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the high reference level of the falling
edge

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh 95 sets the reference

level to 95%.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLHIGH 90.0000 indicating
the reference level is 90%.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the falling edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the low reference level

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow 5 sets the low reference

level to 5%.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLLow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLLOW 10.0000 indicating
the low reference level is 10%.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-471

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the falling
edge.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid 55 sets the reference

level to 50%.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:FALLMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:FALLMID 50.0000 indicating
the mid reference level is 50%.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to MAX and
0% is equal to MIN) used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level when
the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the hysteresis of the reference level.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis 2 sets the hysteresis

to 2%.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:HYSTeresis? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:HYSTERESIS 5.0000
indicating the hysteresis is 5%.

2-472 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the high reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the high reference level of the rising
edge

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh 95 sets the reference

level to 95%.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEHigh? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEHIGH 90.0000 indicating
the reference level is 90%.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the low reference level of the rising edge.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow 5 sets the low reference

level to 5%.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:RISELow? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISELOW 10.0000 indicating
the reference level is 10%.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-473

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to TOP and
0% is equal to BASE) used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising edge
when the measurement's ref level method is set to percent.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid <NR3>

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid?

Arguments <NR3> is the percentage used to calculate the mid reference level of the rising
edge.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid 55 sets the mid

reference level to 55%.
MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:RISEMid? might return
:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:RISEMID 50.0000 indicating
the mid reference level is 50%.

MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE
This command sets or queries the reference level percent type for the measurement.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE
{TENNinety|TWENtyeighty|CUSTom}
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE?

Arguments TENNinety sets the values for Low, Mid and High Ref to 10%, 50% and 90%
respectively.
TWENtyeighty sets the values for Low, Mid and High Ref are set to 20%, 50%
and 80% respectively.
CUSTom allows setting other reference level percents.

Examples MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE TWENTYEIGHTY sets the

values for Low, Mid and High Ref are set to 20%, 50% and 80% respectively.

2-474 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MEASUrement:REF1:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE? might return

:MEASUREMENT:REF1:REFLEVELS:PERCENT:TYPE TENNINETY indicating the
values for Low, Mid and High Ref to 10%, 50% and 90% respectively.

MEASUrement:STATIstics:CYCLEMode
This command turns on and off cycle to cycle measurement statistics tracking
and affects computation and display of cycle-cycle statistics in the Measurement
Result table. It affects measurement statistics after being enabled and after new
data is acquired and measured.

Group Measurement

Syntax MEASUrement:STATIstics:CYCLEMode {OFF|ON|0|1}

MEASUrement:STATIstics:CYCLEMode?

Arguments OFF turns off statistics for all measurements. This is the default value.

ON turns on statistics and displays all statistics for each measurement.

0 turns off statistics for all measurements.

1 turns on statistics and displays all statistics for each measurement.

Examples MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:CYCLEMODE OFF turns off statistics for all

measurements.
MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:CYCLEMODE? might return
:MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:CYCLEMODE 1 indicating that
statistics are displayed for each measurement.

NEWpass (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) changes the password that enables access to
password protected data. The PASSWord command must be successfully executed
before using this command or an execution error will be generated.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax NEWpass <QString>

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-475

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands PASSWord

*PUD

Arguments <QString> is the new password, which can contain up to 10 characters.

Examples NEWPASS"mypassword" creates a new password (mypassword) for accessing

your protected data.

*OPC
This command generates the operation complete message in the Standard Event
Status Register (SESR) when all pending commands that generate an OPC
message are complete. The *OPC? query places the ASCII character “1” into the
output queue when all such OPC commands are complete. The *OPC? response is
not available to read until all pending operations finish. For a complete discussion
of the use of these registers and the output queue, see Registers and Queues.
The *OPC command allows you to synchronize the operation of the instrument
with your application program. For more information, see Synchronization
Methods. Refer to the Oscilloscope operations that can generate OPC table for a
list of commands that generate an OPC message. (See Table 3-3.)

Group Status and Error

Syntax *OPC
*OPC?

Related Commands BUSY?

*WAI

Examples *OPC generates the operation complete message in the SESR at the completion of
all pending OPC operations.
*OPC? might return 1 to indicate that all pending OPC operations are finished.

*OPT? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns a comma separated list of installed options as
an arbitrary ASCII string (no quotes) of the form:
<optionCode>:<optionDescription>,<optionCode>:<optionDescription>...

2-476 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

The last section of each entry (the text following the last hyphen) indicates the
license type.
If no options are found, NONE is returned.

Group Status and Error

Syntax *OPT?

Examples *OPT? response (with each option listed on a separate line for clarity):

2-ULTIMATE:License; Ultimate Bundle for 2 Series

MSO, includes Source and Serial options; Node Locked,
LIC2-500:License; 2 Series 500MHz bandwidth; Node Locked

PASSWord (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) enables the *PUD and NEWpass set commands.
Sending PASSWord without any arguments disables these same commands. Once
the password is successfully entered, the *PUD and NEWpass commands are
enabled until the instrument is powered off, or until the FACtory command, the
PASSWord command with no arguments, or the *RST command is issued.
To change the password, you must first enter the valid password with the
PASSWord command and then change to your new password with the NEWpass
command. Remember that the password is case sensitive.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax PASSWord <QString>

Related Commands NEWpass

*PUD

Arguments <QString> is the password, which can contain up to 10 characters. The factory
default password is “XYZZY” and is always valid.

Examples PASSWORD "XYZZY" enables the *PUD and NEWPass set commands.

PASSWORD disables the *PUD and NEWPass set commands. You can still use the
query version of *PUD.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-477

Commands listed in alphabetical order

PAUSe (No Query Form)

This command causes the interface to pause the specified number of seconds
before processing any other commands.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax PAUSe <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> is the specified number of seconds the interface is to pause before
processing any other commands. The pause time is specified as a floating point
value in seconds and must be > 0.0 and ≥1800.0.

Examples PAUSE 10.0e0;:ACQUIRE:NUMACQ causes the interface to pause 10 seconds

before returning the number of acquisitions.

PG:AMPlitude
This command sets or queries the Pattern Generator output voltage. You can give
any value, but the command will replace it with the nearest valid value (2.5, 3.3
and 5). In burst mode, only 5 V is supported.

Conditions Requires option 2-SOURCE.

Group Pattern Generator

Syntax PG:AMPlitude {2.5|3.3|5V}

PG:AMPlitude?

Arguments 2.5 sets the Pattern Generator amplitude to 2.5 V.

3.3 sets the Pattern Generator amplitude to 3.3 V.

5 sets the Pattern Generator amplitude to 5 V. This is the default value.

Examples PG:AMPlitude 2.5 sets the Pattern Generator output voltage to 2.5 V.

PG:AMPlitude? might return :PG:AMPlitude 5, indicating the Pattern

Generator output voltage is 5 V.

2-478 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

PG:BIT:ONE
This command sets or queries the output value of Pattern Generator bit 1.

Conditions Requires option 2-SOURCE.

Group Pattern Generator

Syntax PG:BIT:ONE {HIGH|LOW|TOGGLE|HIGH_Z}

PG:BIT:ONE?

Arguments LOW sets the Pattern Generator bit value to Low.

HIGH sets the Pattern Generator bit value to High.

TOGGLE sets the Pattern Generator bit value to Toggle.

HIGH_Z sets the Pattern Generator bit value to Hi-Z. Only available for Continuos
mode.

Examples PG:BIT:ONE TOGGLE sets the Pattern Generator bit 1 output to toggle state.

PG:BIT:ONE? might return :PG:BIT:ONE HIGH, indicating the Pattern

Generator bit 1 output is set to High.

PG:BIT:THREE
This command sets or queries the output value of Pattern Generator bit 3.

Conditions Requires option 2-SOURCE.

Group Pattern Generator

Syntax PG:BIT:THREE {HIGH|LOW|TOGGLE|HIGH_Z}

PG:BIT:THREE?

Arguments LOW sets the Pattern Generator bit value to Low.

HIGH sets the Pattern Generator bit value to High.

TOGGLE sets the Pattern Generator bit value to Toggle.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-479

Commands listed in alphabetical order

HIGH_Z sets the Pattern Generator bit value to Hi-Z. Only available for Continuos
mode.

Examples PG:BIT:THREE TOGGLE sets the Pattern Generator bit 3 output to toggle state.

PG:BIT:THREE? might return :PG:BIT:THREE HIGH, indicating the Pattern

Generator bit 3 output is set to High.

PG:BIT:TWO
This command sets or queries the output value of Pattern Generator bit 2.

Conditions Requires option 2-SOURCE.

Group Pattern Generator

Syntax PG:BIT:TWO {HIGH|LOW|TOGGLE|HIGH_Z}

PG:BIT:TWO?

Arguments LOW sets the Pattern Generator bit value to Low.

HIGH sets the Pattern Generator bit value to High.

TOGGLE sets the Pattern Generator bit value to Toggle.

HIGH_Z sets the Pattern Generator bit value to Hi-Z. Only available for Continuos
mode.

Examples PG:BIT:TWO TOGGLE sets the Pattern Generator bit 2 output to toggle state.

PG:BIT:TWO? might return :PG:BIT:TWO HIGH, indicating the Pattern

Generator bit 2 output is set to High.

PG:BIT:ZERO
This command sets or queries the output value of Pattern Generator bit 0.

Conditions Requires option 2-SOURCE.

Group Pattern Generator

2-480 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax PG:BIT:ZERO {HIGH|LOW|TOGGLE|HIGH_Z}

PG:BIT:ZERO?

Arguments LOW sets the Pattern Generator bit value to Low.

HIGH sets the Pattern Generator bit value to High.

TOGGLE sets the Pattern Generator bit value to Toggle.

HIGH_Z sets the Pattern Generator bit value to Hi-Z. Only available for Continuos
mode.

Examples PG:BIT:ZERO TOGGLE sets the Pattern Generator bit 0 output to toggle state.

PG:BIT:ZERO? might return :PG:BIT:ZERO HIGH, indicating the Pattern

Generator bit 0 output is set to High.

PG:BITRate
This command sets or queries the bit rate of data in the Pattern Generator. You
can give any value, but it will take nearest possible value and generate the pattern.

Conditions Requires option 2-SOURCE.

Group Pattern Generator

Syntax PG:BITRate <NR3>

PG:BITRate?

Arguments <NR3> sets the Pattern Generator bit rate. The minimum bit rate is 1 b/s and
maximum bit rate is 25 Mb/s. The default value is 125000 b/s.

Examples PG:BITRate 1000 sets the Pattern Generator bit rate to 1000 b/s.

PG:BITRate? might return :PG:BITRate 1, indicating the Pattern Generator

bit rate is 1 b/s.

PG:BURSt:CCOUnt
This command sets or queries the cycle count for Pattern Generator burst mode.
This is only available when output is Burst.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-481

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 2-SOURCE.

Group Pattern Generator

Syntax PG:BURSt:CCOUnt <NR1>

PG:BURSt:CCOUnt?

Arguments <NR1> sets the cycle count for Pattern Generator burst mode. The minimum cycle
value can be set is 1 and maximum cycles are 2000. The default value is 1.

Examples PG:BURSt:CCOUnt 1 sets the cycle count for Pattern Generator burst mode to 1.

PG:BURSt:CCOUnt? might return :PG:BURSt:CCOUnt 1, indicating the cycle

count for Pattern Generator burst mode is 1.

PG:BURSt:TRIGger (No Query Form)

This command manually starts the burst pattern. This is only available when
output is Burst.

Conditions Requires option 2-SOURCE.

Group Pattern Generator

Syntax PG:BURSt:TRIGger

Related Commands PG:BURSt:CCOUnt

Examples PG:BURSt:TRIGger triggers a burst pattern.

PG:FILE:PATTern
This command sets or queries the path of your data file to generate a digital
pattern in file mode. Only .csv files are supported.

Conditions Requires option 2-SOURCE.

Group Pattern Generator

2-482 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax PG:FILE:PATTern <QString>

PG:FILE:PATTern?

Arguments <QString> is the file path that specifies the location of the specified instrument
file.
If a file name or path is specified, the file is expected to be located in a directory
relative to the current working directory (specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless
a complete path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with a drive
designator (such as C), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples PG:FILE:PATTern "E:/2Power.csv" specifies the path to the pattern file.

PG:FILE:PATTern? might return PG:FILE:PATTern "E:/2Power.csv",

indicating pattern file path.

PG:OUTPut:MODe
This command sets or queries the Pattern Generator output mode.

Conditions Requires option 2-SOURCE.

Group Pattern Generator

Syntax PG:OUTPut:MODe {CONTinuous|BURSt|OFF}

PG:OUTPut:MODe?

Arguments CONTinuous sets the Pattern Generator output type to continuous.

BURSt sets the Pattern Generator output type to burst.

OFF sets the Pattern Generator output type to off. This is the default value.

Examples PG:OUTPut:MODe BURSt sets the Pattern Generator mode to burst.

PG:OUTPut:MODe? might return PG:OUTPut:MODe CONTinuous, indicating

the Pattern Generator mode is set to continuous.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-483

Commands listed in alphabetical order

PG:PATTERNdefinition
This command sets or queries the Pattern Generator definition. If set to manual
mode, you can configure the bit independently. If set to file mode, you can set a
data file that will be loaded into memory and generated as a sequence.

Conditions Requires option 2-SOURCE.

Group Pattern Generator

Syntax PG:PATTERNdefinition {MANual|FILE}

PG:PATTERNdefinition?

Arguments MANual sets the pattern definition source to Manual. This is the default value.

FILE sets the pattern definition source to File.

Examples PG:PATTERNdefinition FILE sets the pattern definition to file mode.

PG:PATTERNdefinition? might return PG:PATTERNdefinition MANual,

indicating the pattern definition source is set to manual mode.

PLOT:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds the specified plot.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:ADDNew <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the specified plot. The argument is of the form “PLOT<NR1>”,
where <NR1> ≥ 1.

Examples PLOT:ADDNEW "PLOT1" adds PLOT1.

PLOT:DELete (No Query Form)

This command deletes the specified plot.

2-484 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:DELete <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the specified plot. Argument is of the form “PLOT<NR1>, where
<NR1> is ≥ 1).

Examples PLOT:DELETE "PLOT1" deletes PLOT1.

PLOT:LIST? (Query Only)

This command lists all currently defined plots.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:LIST?

Returns A list of all currently defined plots is returned.

Examples PLOT:LIST? might return :PLOT:LIST

PLOT1,PLOT3,PLOT4,PLOT5,PLOT6,PLOT7 listing all currently defined plots.

PLOT:PLOT<x>:SOUrce<x>
This command sets or queries the plot source.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:SOUrce<x> MEAS<x>

PLOT:PLOT<x>:SOUrce<x>?

Arguments MEAS<x> is the specified measurement source for the specified plot.

Examples PLOT:PLOT1:SOUrce1 MEAS2 sets source 1 of plot 1 to measurement 2.

PLOT:PLOT1:SOUrce1? might return :PLOT:PLOT1:SOURCE1 MEAS1

indicating the specified source of the specified plot is measurement 1.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-485

Commands listed in alphabetical order

PLOT:PLOT<x>:TYPe
This command sets or returns the current plot type of the specified plot.

Group Plot

Syntax PLOT:PLOT<x>:TYPe {NONE|XY}

Arguments <x> is the plot number. This is the equivalent of the number shown on a plot
heading in the UI.
NONE does not create a plot.

XY creates a XY plot.

Examples PLOT:PLOT2:TYPe XY creates a XY plot.

PLOT:PLOT2:TYPe? might return :PLOT:PLOT2:TYPE XY indicating the plot

is an XY plot.

*PSC
This command sets and queries the power-on status flag that controls the
automatic power-on handling of the DESER, SRER, and ESER registers. When
*PSC is true, the DESER register is set to 255 and the SRER and ESER registers
are set to 0 at power-on. When *PSC is false, the current values in the DESER,
SRER, and ESER registers are preserved in nonvolatile memory when power is
shut off and are restored at power-on.

Group Status and Error

Syntax *PSC {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

*PSC?

Related Commands DESE

*ESE
FACtory
*RST
*SRE

2-486 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR1> = 0 sets the power-on status clear flag to false, disables the power-on clear
and allows the instrument to possibly assert SRQ after power-on; any other value
sets the power-on status clear flag to true, enabling the power-on status clear and
prevents any SRQ assertion after power on.
OFF sets the power-on status clear flag to false, disables the power-on clear and
allows the instrument to possibly assert SRQ after power-on.
ON sets the power-on status clear flag to true, enabling the power-on status clear
and prevents any SRQ assertion after power on.

Examples *PSC 0 sets the power-on status clear flag to false.

*PSC? might return 1 to indicate that the power-on status clear flag is set to true.

*PUD
This command sets or queries a string of Protected User Data. This data is
protected by the PASSWord command. You can modify it only by first entering
the correct password. This password is not necessary to query the data.

Group Status and Error

Syntax *PUD {<Block>|<QString>}

*PUD?

Related Commands PASSWord

Arguments <Block> is a block containing up to 100 characters.

<QString> is a string containing up to 100 characters.

Examples *PUD #229This instrument belongs to me stores the string "This

instrument belongs to me" in the user protected data area.
*PUD? might return #221PROPERTY OF COMPANY X.

RECAll:MASK (No Query Form)

This command recalls a saved mask definition from a Mask File. File suffixes can
be xml or msk. If the specified mask test already exists the mask associated with
that mask test will be replaced, otherwise a new mask test is created.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-487

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Mask

Syntax RECAll:MASK <source file>,MASK<x>

Arguments MASK<x> is the destination mask.

<source file> is the source file. The file is expected to be located in a directory
relative to the current working directory (specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless
a complete path is specified:

Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with a drive

designator (such as C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or "" or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples RECALL:MASK "MaskWD17",MASK1 recalls the mask stored in the file named
MASKWD17 and stores it in mask 1. If mask 1 already exists then its mask
will be replaced.

RECAll:SESsion (No Query Form)

Restores the state of the instrument, including reference waveforms, from a
saved session file.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax RECAll:SESsion <file_path>

Arguments <file_path> is the file path that specifies the location of the specified instrument
session file.
If a file name or path is specified, the file is expected to be located in a directory
relative to the current working directory (specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless
a complete path is specified:

2-488 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with a drive

designator (such as C), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Returns Recalls the instrument session from the specified session file.

Examples RECALL:SESSION "TEK00000.TSS" recalls the setup from the file

TEK00000.TSS in the current working directory.

RECAll:SETUp (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) returns stored or factory settings to the instrument
from a copy of the settings stored in memory. This command performs the same
function as selecting Recall from the File menu, and then choosing the Setup
button.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax RECAll:SETUp {FACtory|<file_path>}

Related Commands FACtory

*RST

Arguments FACtory restores the factory setup. Performs the same operation as the :FACtory
command.
<file_path> specifies a location for an instrument setup file. <file path> is a
quoted string that defines the file name and path. If a file name or path is specified,
the file is expected to be located in a directory relative to the current working
directory (specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless a complete path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with drive designator
(such as C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-489

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples RECALL:SETUP FACTORY recalls (and makes current) the instrument setup to its
factory defaults.
RECALL:SETUP "TEK00000.SET" recalls the setup from the file TEK00000.SET
in the default directory for setups.

RECAll:WAVEform (No Query Form)

This command recalls a stored waveform to a reference memory location.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax RECAll:WAVEform <source file>,<destination>

Arguments <source file> is the source file. The file is expected to be located in a directory
relative to the current working directory (specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless
a complete path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with drive designator
(such as C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.
<destination> is REF<x> which specifies a reference to create from the
recalled waveform data file.

Examples RECALL:WAVEFORM "TEK00000.ISF",REF1 recalls the waveform stored in the

file named TEK00000.ISF from the current directory to reference 1.

REF:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds the specified reference. Argument is of the form "REF<NR1>
", where NR1 ≥ 1.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:ADDNew <QString>

2-490 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> is the specified reference. Argument is of the form "REF<NR1> ",
where NR1 ≥ 1.

Examples REF:ADDNEW "REF2" adds reference 2 to the display.

REF:DELete (No Query Form)

Deletes the specified reference. Argument is of the form "REF<NR1>", where
NR1 ≥ 1.

Conditions Vertical

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:DELete <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the specified reference. Argument is of the form "REF<NR1>",

where NR1 ≥ 1.

Examples REF:DELETE “REF2” deletes reference 2 from the display.

REF:LIST? (Query Only)

This command returns a comma separated list of all currently defined references.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:LIST?

Returns All currently defined references.

Examples REF:LIST? might return :REF:LIST REF1,REF2 indicating references 1 and

2 are defined.

REF:REF<x>:DESKew
This command sets or queries the deskew value used for the specified reference.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-491

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:DESKew <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> is the deskew value used for the specified reference.

Examples REF:REF1:DESKew -1.5e-9 sets the deskew value to -1.5 ns.

REF:REF1:DESKew? might return :REF:REF1:DESKEW 1.5200E-9 indicating

the deskew value is 1.52 ns.

REF:REF<x>:LABel:COLor
This command sets or queries the color of the specified ref label.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:LABel:COLor <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the label. To return the color to the default color, send an empty
string as in this example: :REF:REF1:LABEL:COLOR "".

Examples REF:REF1:LABel:COLor "#FFFF00" sets the font color to yellow.

REF:REF1:LABel:COLor? might return :REF:REF1:LABEL:COLOR

"#FF0000" indicating the font color is red.

REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD
This command sets or queries the bold state of the specified reference label.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables bold font; any other value turns this feature on.

OFF disables bold font.

2-492 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

ON enables bold font.

Examples REF:REF1:LABel:FONT:BOLD ON turns on the bold font.

REF:REF1:LABel:FONT:BOLD? might return :REF:REF1:LABEL:FONT:BOLD

0 indicating the bold font is off.

REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic
This command sets or queries the italic state of the specified reference label.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables italic font; any other value turns this feature on.

OFF disables italic font.

ON enables italic font.

Examples REF:REF1:LABel:FONT:ITALic ON turns on the italic font.

REF:REF1:LABel:FONT:ITALic? might return

:REF:REF1:LABEL:FONT:ITALIC 0 indicating the italic font is off.

REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE
This command sets or queries the font size of the specified reference label.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE <NR1>

Arguments <NR1> is the font size of the label.

Examples REF:REF1:LABel:FONT:SIZE 20 sets the font size to 20 points.

REF:REF1:LABel:FONT:SIZE? might return :REF:REF1:LABEL:FONT:SIZE

14 indicating that the font size is 14 points.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-493

Commands listed in alphabetical order

REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE
This command sets or queries the font type of the specified reference label, such
as Arial or Times New Roman.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the font type.

Examples REF:REF1:LABel:FONT:TYPE "Monospace" specifies a mono spaced font.

REF:REF1:LABel:FONT:TYPE? might return :REF:REF1:LABEL:FONT:TYPE

"Frutiger LT Std 55 Roman".

REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline
This command sets or queries the underline state of the specified reference label.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables underline font; any other value turns this feature on.

OFF disables underline font.

ON enables underline font.

Examples REF:REF1:LABel:FONT:UNDERline ON turns on the underline font.

REF:REF1:LABel:FONT:UNDERline? might return

:REF:REF1:LABEL:FONT:UNDERLINE 0 indicating that underline is off.

REF:REF<x>:LABel:NAMe
This command sets or queries the label of the specified reference. The reference
waveform is specified by x.

2-494 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:LABel:NAMe <QString>

REF:REF<x>:LABel:NAMe?

Arguments <QString> is the character string that will be used for the reference waveform
label name.

Examples REF:REF4:LABEL:NAME "My Reference" sets the label name of Reference 4

waveform to "My Reference".
REF:REF3:LABEL:NAME? might return :REF:REF3:LABEL:NAME "Signal2",
indicating that the label name for Reference 3 waveform is currently set to
"Signal2".

REF:REF<x>:LABel:XPOS
This command sets or queries the X-position at which the label (attached to the
displayed waveform of the specified reference) is displayed, relative to the left
edge of the waveview. The reference waveform is specified by x.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:LABel:XPOS <NR1>

REF:REF<x>:LABel:XPOS?

Arguments <NR1> is the location (control in divisions) where the waveform label for the
selected reference is displayed, relative to the left edge of the screen.

Examples REF:REF4:LABEL:XPOS 10 moves the waveform label for the Reference 3

waveform, so that it begins 10 divisions to the right of the left edge of the screen.
REF:REF2:LABEL:XPOS? might return :REF:REF2:LABEL:XPOS 1.5,
indicating that the x-axis for the Reference 2 waveform is currently 1.5 divisions
to the right of the left edge of the screen.

REF:REF<x>:LABel:YPOS
This command sets or queries the Y-position of the label (attached to the displayed
waveform of the specified reference), relative to the baseline of the waveform.
The reference waveform is specified by x.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-495

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:LABel:YPOS <NR1>

REF:REF<x>:LABel:YPOS?

Arguments <NR1> is the location where the waveform label for the selected reference is
displayed, relative to the baseline of the waveform.

Examples REF:REF3:LABEL:YPOS -10 moves the waveform label for the Reference 3
waveform 10 vertical units below the baseline of the waveform.
REF:REF2:LABEL:YPOS? might return :REF:REF2:LABEL:YPOS 0, indicating
that the waveform label for the Reference 2 waveform is currently located at
the baseline of the waveform.

REF:REF<x>:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the filename used by the given reference.

Group Vertical

Syntax REF:REF<x>:SOUrce <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the reference file name.

Examples REF:REF1:SOUrce
"/home/guest/.local/share/Tektronix/TekScope/
FirstRecalledSession/161012_132000_000.wfm" sets the source of
the reference.
REF:REF1:SOUrce? might return :REF:REF1:SOURCE
"/home/guest/.local/share/Tektronix/TekScope/
LastRecalledSession/161012_132039_000.wfm".

REM (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) embeds a comment within programs as a means
of internally documenting the programs. This is how to embed comments in a .set
file. The instrument ignores these embedded comment lines.

2-496 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax REM <QString>

Arguments <QString> is a string that can contain a maximum of 80 characters.

Examples REM "This is a comment" is a comment string that the instrument will ignore.

ROSc:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the selected source for the time base reference
oscillator. The reference oscillator locks to this source. Depending on the
command argument that you specify, you can use an external reference or use the
internal crystal oscillator as the time base reference.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax ROSc:SOUrce {INTERnal|EXTernal}

ROSc:SOUrce?

Related Commands ROSc:STATE?

Arguments INTERnal specifies the internal 10 MHz crystal oscillator as the time base
reference.
EXTernal specifies the user-supplied external signal as the time base reference.

Examples ROSC:SOURCE INTERNAL specifies the internal 10 MHz crystal oscillator as

the time base reference.
ROSC:SOURCE? might return :ROSC:SOURCE INTERNAL, indicating that the
10 MHz crystal oscillator is being used as the time base reference.

ROSc:STATE? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns whether the time base reference oscillator is
locked. This command will return either LOCKED or UNLOCKED.

Group Miscellaneous

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-497

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax ROSc:STATE?

Returns LOCKED indicates the reference oscillator is locked.

UNLOCKED indicates the reference oscillator is not locked.

Examples ROSC:STATE? might return :ROSC:STATE LOCKED, indicating that the time
base reference is locked.

*RST (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) resets the instrument to the factory default settings.
This command does the following:
Recalls the default instrument setup.
Clears the current *DDT command.
Disables aliases (:ALIAS:STATE 0).
Disables the user password (for the *PUD command).

2-498 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

The *RST command does not change the following:

The current working directory (:FILESystem:CWD command).
The state of command headers (:HEADer command).
The state of keyword and enumeration verbosity (:VERBose command).
The Power-on Status Clear Flag (*PSC command).
The Event Status Enable Register (*ESE command).
The Service Request Enable Register (*SRE command).
The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESE command).
The user password for protected user data (:PASSWord command).
The content of protected user data (*PUD command).
The enabled state of the socket server (:SOCKETServer:ENAble command).
The socket server port number (:SOCKETServer:PORT command).
The socket server protocol (:SOCKETServer:PROTOCol command).
The USBTMC port configuration (:USBDevice:CONFigure command).
The destination reference waveform or file path for the :CURVe command
(:DATa:DESTination command).
The source waveform for the :CURVe? or :WAVFrm? queries
(:DATa:SOUrce command).
The waveform data encoding for the :CURVe command or query or the
:WAVFrm? query (:DATa:ENCdg command).

The starting point for :CURVe? queries (:DATa:STARt command).

The ending point for :CURVe? queries (:DATa:STOP command).
All settings associated the :WFMInpre commands.
All user settable settings associated with the WFMOutpre commands.
*RST only resets the programmable interface settings, it does not change the
user interface settings.

Group Status and Error

Syntax *RST

Related Commands FACtory

RECAll:SETUp

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-499

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments None

Examples *RST resets the instrument settings to factory defaults.

SAVe:EVENTtable:BUS (No Query Form)

This command saves bus results table to the specified file.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:EVENTtable:BUS <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the specified file. If a file name or path is specified, the file is
expected to be located in a directory relative to the current working directory
(specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless a complete path is specified.
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with drive designator
(such as C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples SAVe:EVENTtable:BUS "TEK000.CSV" saves the bus decode event table in

the file named TEK000.CSV.

SAVe:EVENTtable:MEASUrement (No Query Form)

This command saves data (measurement) results to the specified file.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:EVENTtable:MEASUrement <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the specified file. If a file name or path is specified, the file is
expected to be located in a directory relative to the current working directory
(specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless a complete path is specified:

2-500 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with drive designator
(such as C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples SAVe:EVENTtable:MEASUrement "TEK000.CSV" saves the measurement in

the file named TEK000.CSV.

SAVe:EVENTtable:SEARCHTable (No Query Form)

This command saves a search results table to the specified file.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:EVENTtable:SEARCHTable <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the specified file. If a file name or path is specified, the file is
expected to be located in a directory relative to the current working directory
(specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless a complete path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with drive designator
(such as C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples SAVe:EVENTtable:SEARCHTable
"C:\Users\Tek_Local_Admin\Tektronix\TekScope\Results
Tables\Tek002.csv" saves the search results table in the file named
TEK002.CSV.

SAVe:IMAGe (No Query Form)

Saves a capture of the screen contents to the specified image file. Supported
image formats are PNG, Windows Bitmap, and JPEG.

Group Save and Recall

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-501

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SAVe:IMAGe <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the file name and location used to store the image file.

When specifying the file name with this command, use the correct file
extension (".png" for PNG format, ".bmp" for BMP format, or ".jpg" for
JPEG format). If a file name or path is specified, the file is expected to be
located in a directory relative to the current working directory (specified by
:FILESystem:CWDFILESystem:CWD) unless a complete path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with drive designator
(such as C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples SAVE:IMAGE “C:/Dut12–tests.png” saves the image at the location specified.

SAVe:IMAGe:COMPosition
Sets or queries the color mode for saved images (normal or inverted).

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:IMAGe:COMPosition {NORMal|INVErted}

SAVe:IMAGe:COMPosition?

Arguments NORMal Sets the saved screen capture to Normal colors.

INVErted sets the saved screen capture to Inverted colors.

Examples SAVE:IMAGE:COMPOSITION NORMal saves the screen image using the current
normal color settings.
SAVE:IMAGE:COMPOSITION? might return INVERTED, indicating that captured
screen images will be saved using the inverted color settings.

SAVe:IMAGe:VIEWTYpe
Sets or queries the view type for saved images. Currently only FULLScreen
is supported.

2-502 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:IMAGe:VIEWTYpe {FULLScreen}

SAVe:IMAGe:VIEWTYpe?

Arguments FULLScreen sets the screen capture mode to capture the full screen.

Examples SAVE:IMAGE:VIEWTYPE FULLScreen sets the screen capture mode to capture

the full screen.
SAVE:IMAGE:VIEWTYPE? might return FULLScreen, indicating that the screen
capture mode is set to full screen.

SAVe:PLOTData (No Query Form)

Saves the plot data of the currently selected plot to a specified file. Supported
file format is CSV.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:PLOTData <Qstring>

Related Commands DISplay:SELect:VIEW

FILESystem:CWD

Arguments Qstring sets the file name and location used to store the plot data. When
specifying the file name with this command, use the correct file extension (.CSV).
If a file name or path is specified, the file is expected to be located in a directory
relative to the current working directory (specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless
a complete path is specified.
If the file argument begins with a drive designator (such as C:), then the file name
is interpreted as a full path. If the file argument begins with "." or "", or has a file
path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position, then the
file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working directory.
To export an eye diagram plot data to a .csv file, the prerequisite command is
MEASUrement:ADDMEAS TIE

Examples SAVE:PLOTDATA “plot1.csv” saves the plot to the designated file in the
current working directory.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-503

Commands listed in alphabetical order

The following is the example of exporting an XY plot data to a .csv file:

PLOT:PLOT1:TYPe XY
DISplay:SELect:VIEW PLOTVIEW1
SAVe:PLOTData "C:/plot1.csv"

SAVe:REPOrt (No Query Form)

This command saves a report to the specified file. Supported report formats are
PDF and MHT (web page archive file).

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:REPOrt <QString>

Related Commands SAVe:REPOrt:COMMents

Arguments <QString> is the complete path specification. When specifying the file name
with this command, use the correct file extension (.pdf for PDF format, or .mht
for MHT format).
If a file name or path is specified, the file is expected to be located in a directory
relative to the current working directory (specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless
a complete path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with a file path
separator (forward slash character) or a Windows drive designator such as
C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples SAVE:REPORT "report.pdf" creates a report in PDF format, in the location

specified.

SAVe:REPOrt:COMMents
This command sets or queries the comments to be included in saved report files.

Group Save and Recall

2-504 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SAVe:REPOrt:COMMents <QString>

SAVe:REPOrt:COMMents?

Arguments <QString> is the comments to be included in saved report files.

Examples SAVE:REPORT:COMMENTS "Test 3" adds comments to the report.

SAVE:REPORT:COMMENTS? might return :SAVE:REPORT:COMMENTS "High

Temp Test 1".

SAVe:SESsion (No Query Form)

Saves the state of the instrument, including reference waveforms, to a saved
session file.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:SESsion <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the file path that specifies the location to save the specified
instrument session file. If a file name or path is specified, the file is expected to
be located in a directory relative to the current working directory (specified by
FILESystem:CWDFILESystem:CWD) unless a complete path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with a file path
separator (forward slash character) or a Windows drive designator such as
C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples SAVE:SESSION “c:/rose_was_here.tss” saves the instrument state in the specified

file.

SAVe:SETUp (No Query Form)

Saves the current instrument state to the specified file.

Group Save and Recall

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-505

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SAVe:SETUp <QString>

Related Commands SAVe:SETUp:INCLUDEREFs

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the complete path specification. If a file
name or path is specified, the file is expected to be located in a directory relative to
the current working directory (specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless a complete
path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with a file path
separator (forward slash character) or a Windows drive designator such as
C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples SAVE:SETUP “c:/rose_was_here.set” saves the instrument setup in the

specified file.

SAVe:SETUp:INCLUDEREFs
This command sets or queries whether displayed reference waveforms are to
be included in saved setups.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:SETUp:INCLUDEREFs {OFF|ON|0|1}

SAVe:SETUp:INCLUDEREFs?

Arguments OFF specifies not including displayed reference waveforms in saved setups.

ON specifies including displayed reference waveforms in saved setups.

0 specifies not including displayed reference waveforms in saved setups.

1 specifies including displayed reference waveforms in saved setups.

Examples SAVE:SETUP:INCLUDEREFS 0 sets reference waveforms not to be included in

saved setups.
SAVE:SETUP:INCLUDEREFS? might return :SAVE:SETUP:INCLUDEREFS 1
indicating that reference waveforms are to be included in saved setups.

2-506 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

SAVe:WAVEform (No Query Form)

This command saves the specified waveform(s) to the specified destination file.
The waveform source or sources must be active (turned on) to save data to a file.

Conditions _MAG_VS_TIME, _FREQ_VS_TIME, _PHASE_VS_TIME, and

_SV_BASEBAND_IQ require option SV-RFVT.
Option SV-RFVT on the 4 Series MSO instruments requires option SV-BAS.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:WAVEform
{CH<x>[_DALL|_SV_NORMal|_SV_AVErage|_SV_MAXHold|
_SV_MINHold|_MAG_VS_TIME|_FREQ_VS_TIME|
_PHASE_VS_TIME]|MATH<x>|REF<x>|ALL| },<QString>

Related Commands FILESystem:CWD

SAVe:WAVEform:SOURCELIst?

Arguments <x> is the number of the analog channel, math, or reference waveform source
used to save the waveform data.
_DALL saves the digital channel waveform data of the specified channel. This
argument is required if the channel specified is a digital channel.
_SV_NORMal saves the Normal Spectrum view waveform of the specified channel.

_SV_AVErage saves the Average Spectrum view waveform of the specified

channel.
_SV_MAXHold saves the Maximum Hold Spectrum view waveform of the
specified channel.
_SV_MINHold saves the Minimum Hold Spectrum view waveform of the
specified channel.
_MAG_VS_TIME saves the Magnitude vs. Time waveform of the specified channel.

_FREQ_VS_TIME saves the Freuency vs. Time waveform of the specified channel.

_PHASE_VS_TIME saves the Phase vs. Time waveform of the specified channel.

_SV_BASEBAND_IQ saves the baseband I & Q data of the specified channel. The
data is saved in Tektronix TIQ format using a .TIQ file extension. You can import
.TIQ files into Tektronix SignalVu-PC software (PC based), SignalVu software
(oscilloscope based), RSAVu software (PC based) or into a Tektronix real-time
spectrum analyzer for pulse analysis and demodulation analysis.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-507

Commands listed in alphabetical order

ALL saves all displayed analog, math, and reference waveforms to individual files.
Each file name created includes the name of the source (ch1, math3, and so on)
used to create that file. ALL is not supported when FastAcq Mode is enabled.
<Qstring> is a quoted string that defines the path and file name to use to save
the specified file, in the format ‘[<path>]<filename.ext>’. Specifying a path is
optional. If no path is entered, the file is saved to the current working directory
as set in FILESystem:CWD.
<path> uses the form ‘<drive>/<dir>.../’. You can specify a relative path or
a complete path:
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with a file path
separator (forward slash character) or a drive designator (such as C:), then the
file name is interpreted as a full path from the specified drive.
<filename> sets the file name to use to create the file. A file can have up to 125
characters. When using the ALL agument to save multiple files, each filename
has the filename appended with the source used to create that file. For example, a
filename of QualTest can create QualTest_ch1.xxx, QualTest_ref1.xxx,
and so on.
<.ext> sets the file format to which to save the data. To save Channel FastAcq
data, only .csv format is supported. The saved fastacq pixmap data .csv file
cannot be recalled.
Use the .wfm extension to save waveform data to a Tektronix Internal format.
Use the .csv extension to save waveform data to a comma separated values
spreadsheet format.
Use the .mat extension to save waveform data to a matlab compatible file
format.

Examples SAVE:WAVEFORM MATH1,"TEK0000.WFM" saves the Math1 waveform to the file

TEK00000.WFM in the current working directory.

SAVe:WAVEform:GATing
This command specifies the method to save a specified part of the waveform
data or the entire waveform.

Group Save and Recall

2-508 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SAVe:WAVEform:GATing {NONe|CURSors|SCREEN|RESAMPLE|SELected}

SAVe:WAVEform:GATing?

Arguments NONe saves the full waveform data.

CURSors saves the waveform data located between the vertical cursors.

SCREEN saves the waveform data that is on the screen. Nothing outside the
waveform will be saved.
RESAMPLE saves the waveform data at a sample interval set by the user. The
resulting saved waveform is a resampled version of the original waveform with
fewer data points.
SELected saves the data from the currently selected history or FastFrame
acquisition.

Examples SAVE:WAVEFORM:GATING NONe saves the entire waveform.

SAVE:WAVEFORM:GATING? might return :SAVe:WAVEform:GATing SCREEN,

indicating the save waveform operation is set to save the waveform data on the
screen.

SAVe:WAVEform:GATing:RESAMPLErate
This command saves the waveform data at a sample interval. The resulting saved
waveform is a resampled version of the original waveform with fewer data points.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:WAVEform:GATing:RESAMPLErate <NR1>

SAVe:WAVEform:GATing:RESAMPLErate?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the resample interval.

Examples SAVE:WAVEFORM:GATING:RESAMPLERATE 3 sets to save waveform data every

third data point.
SAVE:WAVEFORM:GATING:RESAMPLERATE? might return
:SAVe:WAVEform:GATing:RESAMPLErate 2, indicating the saved
waveform will have half as many data points. This command saves the first data
point and then every other following data point.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-509

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SAVe:WAVEform:SOURCELIst? (Query Only)

This query returns a list of the available waveforms that can be specified as the
source for the SAVe:WAVEform command. Source waveforms must have their
display mode set to On to appear in this list and to be saved.

Group Save and Recall

Syntax SAVe:WAVEform:SOURCELIst?

Examples SAVE:WAVEFORM:SOURCELIST? might return

ALL,CH1,CH2,CH3,MATH1,MATH2,REF2,REF4,DCH1_DALL..

SAVEON:FILE:DEST
This command sets or queries the location where files are saved when
SAVEON:TRIGGER is ON and SAVEON:WAVEFORM is ON. You can save the
files to a local drive or network path by entering the desired location in <QString>.
You can also select to save the files to a USB drive.

Group Save On

Syntax SAVEON:FILE:DEST <QString>

SAVEON:FILE:DEST?

Related Commands SAVEON:FILE:NAME

Arguments <QString> specifies the location to store files.

Examples SAVEON:FILE:DEST
”C:\users\username\Tektronix\TekScope\SaveOnTrigger” sets this
as the location to save files (named by the SAVEON:FILE:NAME
command), when there is a trigger.
SAVEON:FILE:DEST? might return :SAVEON:FILE:DEST
”C:\users\username\Tektronix\TekScope\SaveOnEvent”,
indicating the drive location where files will be saved when there is a trigger.

2-510 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

SAVEON:FILE:NAME
Sets or queries the file name to use when SAVEON:TRIGer is ON.

Group Save On

Syntax SAVEON:FILE:NAME <QString>

SAVEON:FILE:NAME?

Related Commands SAVEON:FILE:DEST

Arguments <QString> is the file name you want to use.

Examples SAVEON:FILE:NAME "MaskFailure" sets the name of the file to MaskFailure.

SAVEON:FILE:NAME? might return ":SAVEON:FILE:NAME MaskFailure5",

indicating the name you set for the instrument to use, with the autoincrement
number (5) appended.

SAVEON:IMAGe
This command sets or queries whether to save a screen capture when a trigger
occurs and SAVEON:TRIGer is ON and SAVEON:IMAGE is ON.

Group Save On

Syntax SAVEON:IMAGe {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

SAVEON:IMAGe?

Related Commands SAVEON:FILE:DEST

SAVEON:FILE:NAME
SAVEON:TRIGger
SAVEON:IMAGe

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables Save On Image; any other value turns this feature on.

OFF disables Save On Image.

ON enables Save On Image.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-511

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SAVEON:IMAGE ON sets the instrument to save a screen capture on a specified

trigger.
SAVEON:IMAGE? might return :SAVEON:IMAGE 1, indicating that the instrument
will save a screen capture when the specified trigger occurs.

SAVEON:IMAGe:FILEFormat
This command sets or queries the file format to be used for saved image files
when :SAVEON:IMAGe is set to 1.

Group Save On

Syntax SAVEON:IMAGe:FILEFormat {PNG|BMP|JPG}

SAVEON:IMAGe:FILEFormat?

Arguments PNG specifies using PNG format for saved image files.

BMP specifies using BMP format for saved image files.

JPG specifies using JPEG format for saved image files.

When specifying the file name with this command, use the correct file extension
(".png" for PNG format, ".bmp" for BMP format, or ".jpg" for JPEG format). If a
file name or path is specified, the file is expected to be located in a directory
relative to the current working directory (specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless
a complete path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with drive designator
(such as C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or ".." or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples SAVEON:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT JPG sets the image file format to JPEG.

SAVEON:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT? might return :SAVEON:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT

PNG indicating that the file format is set to PNG.

SAVEON:TRIGger
Sets or queries whether to save a file when a trigger occurs. You can define the
trigger using Trigger commands or the instrument user interface.

2-512 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

This command is longer necessary. Please see Act On Event commands for future
development.
The trigger will cause the instrument to save an image or a waveform to a file,
depending on what you specified. For example, if you have set SAVEON:IMAGe
to On, and a trigger event occurs, the instrument will save a screen capture.
You can set options for file storage (such as file name, file destination, and auto
increment), using the SAVEON:FILE commands.
Use the instrument interface to select whether to save one or more analog
channels, digital channels, or math waveforms
Analog and math waveforms are saved using one file per waveform. Digital
waveforms are all saved to a single file.

Group Save On

Syntax SAVEON:TRIGger {<NR1>|ON|OFF}

SAVEON:TRIGger?

Related Commands SAVEON:IMAGe

SAVEON:WAVEform
SAVEON:FILE:DEST
SAVEON:FILE:NAME

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables Save On Trigger; any other value turns this feature on.

OFF disables Save On Trigger.

ON enables Save On Trigger.

Examples SAVEON:TRIGGER ON sets the instrument to save an image, measurement, and/or

waveform when a trigger occurs.
SAVEON:TRIGGER? might return :SAVEON:TRIGGER ON, indicating that a file
will be saved on triggering.

SAVEON:WAVEform
Sets or queries whether to save a waveform when a trigger occurs when
SAVEON:TRIGger is ON.
The waveform will be saved to the file you selected with SAVEON:FILE:NAME,
in the location that you selected using SAVEON:FILE:DEST. You can set options

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-513

Commands listed in alphabetical order

for file storage (such as file name, file destination, and autoincrement), using
the SAVEON:FILE commands.

Group Save On

Syntax SAVEON:WAVEform {<NR1>|ON|OFF}

SAVEON:WAVEform?

Related Commands SAVEON:FILE:DEST

SAVEON:FILE:NAME
SAVEON:TRIGger

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables Save On Waveform; any other value turns this feature on.

OFF disables Save On Waveform.

ON enables Save On Waveform.

Examples SAVEON:WAVEFORM ON turns on the Save On Waveform feature, so that a

waveform will be saved when a selected trigger occurs.
SAVEON:WAVEFORM? might return :SAVEON:WAVEFORM ON, indicating that a
waveform will be saved when a selected trigger occurs.

SAVEON:WAVEform:FILEFormat
This command sets or queries the file format for saving waveforms when
:SAVEON:WAVEform is set to 1.

Group Save On

Syntax SAVEON:WAVEform:FILEFormat {INTERNal|SPREADSheet}

SAVEON:WAVEform:FILEFormat?

Arguments INTERNal specifies saving the waveform in the instrument internal format.

SPREADSheet specifies saving the waveform in comma separated values format.

Examples SAVEON:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT SPREADSheet sets the file format to

spreadsheet.

2-514 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

SAVEON:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT? might return

:SAVEON:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT INTERNAL indicating the file format is set
to INTERNAL.

SAVEON:WAVEform:SOURce
This command sets or queries the sources for saving waveforms when
SAVEON:TRIGger is ON.

Group Save On

Syntax SAVEON:WAVEform:SOURce {CH<x>| DCH<x>_D<x>| MATH<x>| REF<x>|

ALL}
SAVEON:WAVEform:SOURce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel to use as the save on source.

DCH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel to use as the save on source. The

supported digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are 0 to 15 or
DALL (all digital channels).
MATH<x> specifies a math waveform to use as the save on source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform to use as the save on source.

ALL specifies all analog, math, digital, and reference waveforms as the source
waveforms for saving.

Examples SAVEON:WAVEform:SOURce MATH1 specifies MATH 1 as the save on source.

SAVEON:WAVEform:SOURce? might return :SAVEON:WAVEFORM:SOURCE

REF1 indicating the save on source is REF1.

SAVEONEVent:FILEDest
This command sets or queries the location where files are saved. This command
replaces SAVEON:FILE:DEST (still valid command, but only an alias for this
new command).

Group Act On Event

Syntax SAVEONEVent:FILEDest
SAVEONEVent:FILEDest? <Qstring>

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-515

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <QString> specifies the location to store files.

Examples SAVEONEVENT:FILEDEST
"C:\users\username\Tektronix\TekScope\SaveOnTrigger" sets
this as the location to save files (named by the SAVEONEVent:FILEName
command), when there is a trigger.
SAVEONEVENT:FILEDEST? might return :SAVEONEVent:FILEDest
"C:\users\username\Tektronix\TekScope\SaveOnTrigger", indicating
the drive location where files will be saved when there is a trigger.

SAVEONEVent:FILEName
This command sets or queries the file name without the extension. This command
replaces SAVEON:FILE:NAME (still valid command, but only an alias for this
new command).

Group Act On Event

Syntax SAVEONEVent:FILEName <QString>

SAVEONEVent:FILEName?

Arguments <QString> specifies the name of the file.

Examples SAVEONEVENT:FILENAME "MaskFailure" sets the name of the file to

MaskFailure.
SAVEONEVENT:FILENAME? might return :SAVEONEVent:FILEName
"MaskFailure5", indicating the name you set for the instrument to use. The
autoincrement number of 5 is appended.

SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat
This command sets or returns the image file extension (png, jpg, bmp). This
command replaces SAVEON:IMAGe:FILEFormat (still valid command, but
only an alias for this new command).

Group Act On Event

Syntax SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat {PNG|BMP|JPG}

SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat?

2-516 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments PNG specifies using PNG format for saved image files.

BMP specifies using BMP format for saved image files.

JPG specifies using JPEG format for saved image files.

When specifying the file name with this command, use the correct file extension
(".png" for PNG format, ".bmp" for BMP format, or ".jpg" for JPEG format). If a
file name or path is specified, the file is expected to be located in a directory
relative to the current working directory (specified by FILESystem:CWD) unless
a complete path is specified:
Complete path specification. If the file argument begins with drive designator
(such as C:), then the file name is interpreted as a full path.
Relative path specification. If the file argument begins with "." or "" or has a
file path separator appearing anywhere other than the first character position,
then the file name is treated as a path that is relative to the current working
directory.

Examples SAVEONEVENT:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT JPG sets the image file format to JPEG.

SAVEONEVENT:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT? might return

:SAVEON:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT PNG indicating that the file format is set to PNG.

SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
This command sets or returns the file extension (csv, wfm, mat). This command
replaces SAVEON:WAVEform:FILEFormat (still valid command, but only an
alias for this new command).

Group Act On Event

Syntax SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat
{INTERNal|SPREADSheet|MATlab}
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat?

Arguments INTERNal specifies saving the waveform in the instrument internal format.

SPREADSheet specifies saving the waveform in comma separated values format.

MATlab specifies saving the waveform in matlab compatible file format.

Examples SAVEONEVENT:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT SPREADSheet sets the file format to

spreadsheet (csv).

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-517

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SAVEONEVENT:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT? might return

:SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat INTERNAL, indicating the
file format is set to INTERNAL.

SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce
This command sets or returns the sources for saving waveforms when an event
occurs. This command replaces SAVEON:WAVEform:SOURce (still valid
command, but only an alias for this new command).

Group Act On Event

Syntax SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce {CH<x>| DCH<x>_D<x>| MATH<x>|

REF<x>| ALL}
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the source waveform for saving.

DCH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel to use as the save on source. The

supported digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are 0 to 15 or
DALL (all digital channels).
Math<x> specifies a math waveform as the source waveform for saving.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform as the source waveform for saving.

ALL specifies all analog, math, digital, and reference waveforms as the source
waveforms for saving.

Examples SAVEONEVENT:WAVEFORM:SOURCE MATH1 specifies MATH 1 as the save on

source.
SAVEONEVENT:WAVEFORM:SOURCE? might return
:SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat REF1, indicating the save on source
is REF 1.

SCOPEApp REBOOT (No Query Form)

This command reboots the scope.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax SCOPEApp REBOOT

2-518 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SCOPEApp REBOOT reboots the scope.

SEARCH:ADDNew (No Query Form)

This command adds the specified search.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:ADDNew <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the specified search. The argument is of the form "SEARCH<NR1>",
where <NR1> is ≥ 1.

Examples SEARCH:ADDNEW “SEARCH2” adds a new search named SEARCH 2.

SEARCH:DELete (No Query Form)

This command deletes the specified search.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:DELete <QString>

Arguments <QString> is the specified search. The argument is of the form "SEARCH<NR1>",
where <NR1> is ≥ 1).

Examples SEARCH:DELETE “SEARCH3” deletes SEARCH 3.

SEARCH:DELETEALL (No Query Form)

This command deletes all the active instances of search definitions defined in
the scope application.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:DELETEALL

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-519

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:DELETEALL deletes all the active instances of search definitions.

SEARCH:LIST? (Query Only)

This command returns a comma separated list of all currently defined searches.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:LIST?

Returns All currently defined searches.

Examples SEARCH:LIST? might return :SEARCH:LIST SEARCH1,SEARCH2 indicating

that Search 1 and Search 2 are defined.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:COPy (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) copies the search criteria to or from the trigger.
The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:COPy {SEARCHtotrigger|TRIGgertosearch}

Arguments SEARCHtotrigger copies the search criteria to the trigger.

TRIGgertosearch copies the trigger criteria to the search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:COPY TRIGGERTOSEARCH copies the trigger criteria to the

search 1 criteria.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:COPY SEARCHTOTRIGGER copies the search criteria to the
trigger.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:NAVigate (No Query Form)

This command sets the navigation action for search marks. The NONE action is the
default setting when no action is being taken. The search number is specified by x.

2-520 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:NAVigate {NEXT|PREVious|MIN|NONE|MAX}

Arguments NEXT goes to the next search mark.

PREVious goes to the previous search mark.

MIN goes to the search result with the smallest value. Only supported by search
results which have quantitative values (example: pulse width is supported, but
not edge).
NONE is the default setting when no action is being taken.

MAX goes to the search result with the largest value. Only supported by search
results which have quantitative values (example: pulse width is supported, but
not edge).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:NAVigate NEXT goes to the next search mark.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TOTAL? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the total number of found search marks for this
search. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TOTAL?

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TOTAL? might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TOTAL 7,

indicating that there are 7 matches for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:CONDition
This command sets or queries the search condition for a CAN bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-521

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:CONDition
{SOF|FRAMEtype|IDentifier|DATa|IDANDDATA|EOF|ERRor|FDBITS}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:CONDition?

Arguments Arguments specify the CAN bus trigger condition.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:CONDition EOF sets the CAN

bus trigger condition to end of frame.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:CONDition? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:CONDITION SOF, indicating the
CAN bus trigger condition is set to start of frame.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:DIRection
This command specifies the CAN search type to be valid on a Read, Write, or
Either condition. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:DIRection
{READ|WRITE|NOCARE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:DIRection?

Arguments READ specifies the read direction.

WRITE specifies the write direction.

NOCARE specifies either data direction.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:DIRection READ sets the

data direction to READ.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:DIRection? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE,
indicating the data direction is set to either data direction.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:OFFSet
This command sets or queries the data offset value, in bytes, to use when searching
on the CAN data field. The search number is specified by x. The search condition
must be set to DATA or IDANDDATA.

2-522 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:OFFSet <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:OFFSet?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:CAN:STANDard

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:SIZe

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:VALue

Arguments <NR1> is an integer whose minimum and default values are -1 (don't care) and
maximum is up to 7 (for CAN 2.0) or up to 63 (for ISO CAN FD and Non-ISO
CAN FD). The maximum is dependent on the number of bytes being matched
and the CAN standard selected. Its value is calculated as [Absolute Maximum] -
[Data Match Size]. For CAN 2.0, the absolute maximum is 8 bytes. For ISO CAN
FD and Non-ISO CAN FD, the absolute maximum is 64 bytes. The minimum
data match size is 1 byte, which produces the ranges listed above. Increasing the
data match size above 1 byte will adjust the range of valid data offset values
accordingly.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:DATA:OFFSET 5sets the CAN data

offset to 5 bytes.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:DATA:OFFSET? might return 7,
indicating the CAN data offset is 7 bytes. If the CAN standard is set for CAN 2.0
and the search data size is set to 3, the maximum value for the data offset will be 5
(8 - 3 = 5). If the CAN standard is set for ISO CAN FD or Non-ISO CAN FD
and the search data size is set to 8, the maximum value for the data offset will be
56 (64 - 8 = 56).

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the CAN bus trigger data qualifier to be used when
searching on a CAN bus signal. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-523

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
{EQUal|LESSEQual|MOREEQua|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:QUALifier?

Arguments Arguments are the data qualifier types.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:QUALifier UNEQual sets

the data qualifier to unequal.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:QUALifier? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL,
indicating that the data qualifier is set to equal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string, in bytes, to be used
when searching on a CAN bus signal. The search condition must be set to
IDANDDATA or DATA. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the data size.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:SIZe 1 sets the data size to 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:SIZe? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:DATA:SIZE 1, indicating the data
size is set to 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data value to be used when searching on
a CAN bus signal. The search condition must be set to IDANDDATA OR DATA.

Group Search and Mark

2-524 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:VALue <QString>

Arguments <QString>

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:VALue "1111" sets the data

value to 1111.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:DATa:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:DATA:VALUE "1010" indicating
the data value is 1010.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:ERRType
This command sets or queries the type of error condition for a CAN bus to
search on. The search number is specified by x. The search condition must be
set to ERRor.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:ERRType
{ACKMISS|BITSTUFFing|FORMERRor |ANYERRor}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:ERRType?

Arguments ACKMISS specifies a search based on a missing ACK field.

BITSTUFFing specifies a search based on a bit stuffing error.

FORMERRor specifies a search based on a CAN FD form error. To use this option,
the CAN standard must be set to FDISO or FDNONISO.
ANYERRor specifies a search based on any error type.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:ERRTYPE ACKMISS specifies

searching for any missing ACK fields.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:ERRTYPE? might return
ANYERROR, indicating that the bus is being searched for all error types.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-525

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FD:BRSBit
This command sets or queries the value of the bit rate switch bit (BRS bit) for a
CAN bus to search on. The search number is specified by x. The search condition
must be set to FDBITS, and the CAN standard must be FDISO or FDNONISO.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FD:BRSBit
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FD:BRSBit?

Arguments ONE filters CAN FD packets to only match those where the BRS bit has a value of
1 (fast data enabled).
ZERo filters CAN FD packets to only match those where the BRS bit has a value
of 0 (fast data disabled).
NOCARE disables filtering of CAN FD packets on the BRS bit.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:FD:BRSBit ONE specifies filtering

CAN FD packets for those where the BRS bit has a value of 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:FD:BRSBIT? might return
NOCARE, indicating that CAN FD packets are not being filtered based on the
BRS bit value.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FD:ESIBit
This command sets or queries the value of the error state indicator bit (ESI bit)
for a CAN bus to search on. The search number is specified by x. The search
condition must be set to FDBITS, and the CAN standard must be FDISO or
FDNONISO.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FD:ESIBit
{ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}

2-526 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FD:ESIBit?

Arguments ONE filters CAN FD packets to only match those where the ESI bit has a value
of 1 (recessive).
ZERo filters CAN FD packets to only match those where the ESI bit has a value
of 0 (dominant).
NOCARE disables filtering of CAN FD packets on the ESI bit.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:FD:ESIBit ONE specifies filtering

CAN FD packets for those where the ESI bit has a value of 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:FD:ESIBIT? might return
NOCARE, indicating that CAN FD packets are not being filtered based on the
ESI bit value.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FRAMEtype
This command sets or queries CAN bus trigger frame type to be used when
searching on a CAN bus signal. The search condition must be set to FRAMEtype.
The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FRAMEtype
{DATa|ERRor|OVERLoad|REMote}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FRAMEtype?

Arguments Arguments are the available frame types.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FRAMEtype ERROR sets the frame

type to error.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FRAMEtype? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:FRAMETYPE DATA, indicates the
frame type is set to data.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-527

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:IDentifier:MODe
This command sets or queries the CAN bus trigger identifier (address) mode to be
used when searching on a CAN bus signal. The search number is specified by x.
The search condition must be set to IDANDDATA or DATA.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:IDentifier:MODe
{EXTENDed|STandard}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:IDentifier:MODe?

Arguments EXTENDed specifies the extended identifier mode.

STandard specifies the standard identifier mode.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:IDentifier:MODe EXTEND sets

the identifier mode to extended.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:IDentifier:MODe? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:IDENTIFIER:MODE STANDARD,
indicating the identifier mode is set to standard.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:IDentifier:VALue
This command sets or queries CAN bus trigger identifier (address) value to be
used when searching on a CAN bus signal. The search number is specified by x.
The search condition must be set to IDANDDATA or DATA.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:IDentifier:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:IDentifier:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the identifier value.

2-528 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:IDentifier:VALue "1010" sets

the identifier value to 1010.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:IDentifier:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "101011",
indicating the identifier value is 101011.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRess:MODe
This command sets or queries the I2C address mode for the specified bus search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRess:MODe
{ADDR10|ADDR7}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRess:MODe?

Arguments ADDR10 specifies the address mode as ADDR10.

ADDR7 specifies the address mode as ADDR7.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR10 sets the

address mode for I2C bus trigger search 1 to ADDR10.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR7, indicating
that the address mode for I2C bus trigger search 2 is set to ADDR7.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRess:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary address string used for the I2C search
the specified search condition is Address or AddressData. The search number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-529

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRess:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRess:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRess:MODe

Arguments <QString> specifies the address value. This is either a 7-bit or 10-bit value
depending on the address mode. The valid characters are 0-9, A-F, and X for
addresses in hexadecimal format; and 0, 1, and X otherwise.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE "01XXXXX" sets

the address value to "01XXXXX" when the mode is ADDR7 and the format
is binary.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE "XX", indicating
that the address value is "XX" when the address mode is set to ADDR7 and the
address format is hexadecimal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:CONDition
This command sets or queries the search condition for an I2C bus. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:CONDition
{ADDRess|ADDRANDDATA|DATa|ACKMISS|REPEATstart|STARt|STOP}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:CONDition?

Arguments ADDress specifies the trigger condition as Address.

ADDRANDDATA specifies the trigger condition as Address and Data.

DATa specifies the trigger condition as Data.

ACKMISS specifies the trigger condition as Missing of Acknowledgement.

REPEATstart specifies the trigger condition as Repeat of Start.

STARt specifies the trigger condition as Start.

STOP specifies the trigger condition as Stop.

2-530 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:CONDITION ADDRESS sets the

trigger condition for I2C bus trigger search 1 to Address.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:CONDITION? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:CONDITION ADDRANDDATA,
indicating that the trigger condition for I2C bus trigger search 1 is set to Address
and Data.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:DIRection
This command sets or queries the direction of the data for the I2C bus search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x. Read or
write is indicated by the R/W bit in the I2C protocol.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:DIRection
{NOCARE|READ|WRITE}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:DIRection?

Arguments NOCARE specifies the direction of data as Don’t Care.

READ specifies the direction of data as Read.

WRITE specifies the direction of data as Write.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION READ sets the

data direction for I2C bus trigger search 1 to READ.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION DONTCARE,
indicating that the data direction of the I2C bus trigger search 2 is DONTCare.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes used for an I2C
bus search to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by
x. The search condition must be DATA or ADDRANDDATA.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-531

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the data size in bytes.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:DATA:SIZE 1 sets the length of the

data string for I2C bus trigger search 1 to 1 byte.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:DATA:SIZE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:DATA:SIZE 3, indicating that the
length of the data string for I2C bus trigger search 1 is 3 bytes.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string used for I2C bus search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x. The search
condition must be DATA or ADDRANDDATA.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the data value. The valid characters are 0, 1, or X for binary
format; and A-F, 0-9, and X for hexadecimal format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:DATA:VALUE "1001" sets the data

value for I2C bus trigger search 1 to "1001".
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:DATA:VALUE? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:I2C:DATA:VALUE "XX", indicating that
the data value for I2C bus trigger search is "XX" in hexadecimal format.

2-532 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:CONDition
This command sets or queries the condition for a LIN bus search. The search
number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:CONDition
{DATA|IDANDDATA|ERRor|IDentifier|SLEEP|SYNCfield|WAKEup}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:CONDition?

Arguments Arguments are the available trigger conditions.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:CONDition DATA sets the trigger

condition to data.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:CONDition? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:LIN:CONDITION SYNC, indicating the
trigger condition is sync.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high data value string used in a LIN bus search.
The search number is specified by x. The search condition must be DATA or
IDANDDATA and the data qualifier must be INRANGE or OUTRANGE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:HIVALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string of 1s, 0s, or Xs representing the binary data string
to be used in a LIN search if the search condition is IDentifier or IDANDDATA
(identifier and data).

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE? might

return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX" indicating the high value is "don't care".

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-533

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the data qualifier used in a LIN bus search. The
search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:QUALifier
{EQual|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|
INrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:QUALifier?

Arguments Arguments are the available data qualifiers.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:QUALifier LESS sets the

data qualifier to less than.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:QUALifier? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL,
indicating the data qualifier is equal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the stat string in bytes used for a LIN
bus search. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the data size.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:SIZe 1.0 sets the data size

to 1.

2-534 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:SIZe? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:LIN:DATA:SIZE 1, indicating the data
size is 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the data string used for a LIN bus search. The search
number is specified by x. The search condition must be DATA or IDANDDATA.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the data value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:VALue 1010 sets the data

value to XXXXXX1010.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:LIN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXX",
indicating that the data value is a don’t care.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:ERRTYPE
This command sets or queries the error type for a LIN bus search. The search
number is specified by x. The search condition must be set to ERROR.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:ERRTYPE
{CHecksum|PARity|SYNC}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:ERRTYPE?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-535

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments CHecksum specifies the error type is checksum.

PARity specifies the error type is parity.

SYNC specifies the error type is sync.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:ERRTYPE Parity sets the error

type to parity.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:ERRTYPE? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:LIN:ERRTYPE SYNC, indicating that
the error type is sync.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:IDentifier:VALue
This command sets or queries the string used for a LIN bus identifier value. The
search number is specified by x. The search condition must be IDENTIFIER
or IDANDDATA.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:IDentifier:VALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:IDentifier:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the identifier value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:IDentifier:VALue 1010 sets

the identifier value to XX1010.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:IDentifier:VALue? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXX",
indicates the identifier value is don’t care.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PARallel:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary data string used for a parallel bus search
to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

2-536 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PARallel:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PARallel:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the data value in a valid format. Valid characters are 0-9,

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PARALLEL:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"

sets the string data value to "XXXXXXXX" in binary format.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PARALLEL:DATA:VALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:PARALLEL:DATA:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX10010", indicating that the data value string is set to
"XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX10010" in binary format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:CONDition
This command sets or queries the condition for an RS232C bus search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:CONDition
{DATa|EOp|PARItyerror|STARt}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:CONDition?

Arguments DATa specifies the search condition as Data.

EOp specifies the search condition as End of Packet.

PARItyerror specifies the search condition as Parity Error.

STARt specifies the search condition as Start.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:RS232C:CONDITION DATA sets the

search condition for RS232C bus trigger search 1 to Data.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:RS232C:CONDITION? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:RS232C:CONDITION EOP, indicating
that the search condition for RS232C bus trigger search 2 is set to End of Packet.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-537

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used
for an RS232 bus search to determine where to place a mark when the search
condition is Data. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:DATa:SIZe <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR3> is the number of bits per word in the data string, from 1 to 8.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:RS232C:DATA:SIZE 1 sets the number

of bits per word in RS232C bus trigger search 1 data string to 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:RS232C:DATA:SIZE? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:RS232C:DATA:SIZE 8, indicating that
the bits per word for RS232C bus trigger search 2 is set to 8.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the data string used for the specified RS232C bus
trigger search to determine where to place a mark. The search condition must be
Data. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the value of the data string. The valid characters are 0, 1,
and X for values in binary format; and A-F, 0-9, and X for values in hexadecimal
format.

2-538 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:RS232C:DATA:VALUE "01" sets the

value of the data string for RS232C bus trigger search 1 to "01" when the format
is hexadecimal.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:RS232C:DATA:VALUE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:RS232C:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXX1",
indicating that the data string value for RS232C bus trigger search 1 is set to
"XXXXXXX1" when the format is binary.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition
This command sets or queries the search condition for a SENT bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition
{START|FAST|SLOW|PAUSE|ERRor}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition?

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

START specifies searching for start of packet.

FAST specifies searching for fast channel data.

SLOW specifies searching for slow channel data.

PAUSE specifies searching for pause pulses.

ERRor specifies searching on errors.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:CONDITION SLOW specifies

searching for slow channel packet.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:CONDITION? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:CONDITION PAUSE, indicating
the search is set to find pause pulses.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:ERRType
This command sets or queries the error type to be used when searching on SENT
data.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-539

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

SENT bus trigger condition is set to ERRor.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:ERRType
{FRAMELENgth|CRC}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:ERRType?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

FRAMELENgth specifies searching for SENT frame length errors.

CRC specifies searching for CRC errors.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:ERRTYPE FRAMELENGTH sets the

search to find SENT frame length errors.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:ERRTYPE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:ERRTYPE CRC to indicate the
search is set to find CRC errors.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:ERRType:CRC
This command sets or queries the CRC error type to be used when searching
on SENT data.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

SENT bus trigger condition is set to ERRor and ERRType is set to CRC.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:ERRType:CRC {FAST|SLOW}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:ERRType:CRC?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:ERRType

2-540 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

FAST specifies searching for CRC errors only in the fast channel.

SLOW specifies searching for CRC errors only in the slow channel.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:ERRTYPE:CRC SLOW sets the

search to find SENT slow channel CRC errors.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:ERRTYPE:CRC? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:ERRTYPE:CRC FAST, indicating
that the SENT fast channel is being searched for CRC errors.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high binary fast channel 1 value to use when
searching on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus search condition must be set to FAST.

Group Trigger

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search identifier number.

<Qstring> sets the Fast Channel 1 binary data high value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue
"XXXXXXXXXXXX" sets the Fast Channel 1 high value on which to search to
XXXXXXXXXXXX, or "don't care."
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALUE
"0101XXXX1111", indicating the Fast Channel 1 high value on which to search is
set to the binary value 0101XXXX1111.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-541

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on SENT
fast packet bus data for device channel 1.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|
LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALifier?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALue

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

EQUal specifies the qualifier as Equal.

LESSEQual specifies the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

LESSThan specifies the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREEQual specifies the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

MOREThan specifies the qualifier as More Than.

UNEQual specifies the qualifier as Unequal.

INrange sets the qualifier to inside a range.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to outside a range.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALIFIER
UNEQUAL sets the fast channel 1 data qualifier to not equal for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALIFIER?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALIFIER
MOREEQUAL to indicate that the fast channel 1 data qualifier is set
to greater than or equal for search 3.

2-542 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary fast channel 1 value to be used when
searching on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALue
<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<Qstring> is the Fast Channel 1 binary value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALUE
"XXXXXXXXXXXX" sets the Fast Channel 1 value to XXXXXXXXXXXX, or
"don't care."
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALUE
"0000XXXX1111" to indicate the binary value 0000XXXX1111.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high binary fast channel 2 value to use when
searching on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus search condition must be set to FAST.

Group Trigger

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue
<QString>

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-543

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the Search identifier number.

<Qstring> sets the Fast Channel 2 high binary data value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue
"100000000000" sets the Fast Channel 2 high value on which to search to
100000000000.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALUE
"0101XXXX1111", indicating the Fast Channel 2 high value on which to search is
set to the binary value 0101XXXX1111.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on SENT
fast packet bus data for device channel 2.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|
LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:QUALifier?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALue

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

EQUal specifies the qualifier as Equal.

LESSEQual specifies the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

LESSThan specifies the qualifier as Less Than.

2-544 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

MOREEQual specifies the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

MOREThan specifies the qualifier as More Than.

UNEQual specifies the qualifier as Unequal.

INrange sets the qualifier to inside a range.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to outside a range.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:QUALIFIER
UNEQUAL sets the fast channel 2 data qualifier to not equal for search 5.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:QUALIFIER?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:QUALIFIER
MOREEQUAL to indicate that the fast channel 2 data qualifier is set
to greater than or equal for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary fast channel 2 value to be used when
searching on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALue
<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<Qstring> is the Fast Channel 2 binary value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALUE
"111111111111" sets the Fast Channel 2 value to 111111111111.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-545

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALUE
"000000000000" to indicate the binary value 000000000000.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high binary fast message counter value to use
when searching on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus search condition must be set to FAST.
The number of channels must be set to 1.
The nibble count must be set to 6.

Group Trigger

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:HIVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:HIVALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel
BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount

Arguments Search<x> is the Search identifier number.

<Qstring> sets the Fast Channel 1 counter binary value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:HIVALUE
"XXXXXXXX" sets the Fast Channel secure counter high value on which to search
to "don't care."
SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:HIVALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH4:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:HIVALUE
"11110000" to indicate a binary value of 11110000 on which to search.

2-546 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on SENT
fast packet bus data for the secure format counter.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|
LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:QUALifier?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:VALue

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

EQUal specifies the qualifier as Equal.

LESSEQual specifies the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

LESSThan specifies the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREEQual specifies the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

MOREThan specifies the qualifier as More Than.

UNEQual specifies the qualifier as Unequal.

INrange sets the qualifier to inside a range.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to outside a range.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH5:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:QUALifier
LESSThan sets the fast channel 2 data qualifier on search 5 to less than.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:QUALifier?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:QUALIFIER
EQUAL to indicate that the fast channel 2 data qualifier on search 1 is set to equal.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-547

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary fast message counter value to be used
when searching on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The search condition must be set to FAST.
The number of channels must be set to 1.
The nibble count must be set to 6.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:VALue
<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount
BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<Qstring> is the Fast Channel 1 counter value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:VALUE
"XXXXXXXX" sets the Fast Channel 1 secure counter value to "don't care."

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:VALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:VALUE
"00001111" to search for a binary counter value of 00001111.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBble:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary fast message inverted nibble value to be
used when searching on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The search condition must be set to FAST.
The number of channels must be set to 1.

2-548 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

The nibble count must be set to 6.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBble:VALue
<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBble:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount
BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<Qstring> is the fast message inverted nibble binary value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBBLE:VALUE "XXXX" sets the

Fast Channel 1 secure inverted nibble value to "don't care."
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBBLE:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBBLE:VALUE "1111" to search
for a binary inverted nibble value of 1111.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:STATus:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary status value to be used when searching
on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:STATus:VALue
<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:STATus:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-549

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<Qstring> is the binary status binary value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:STATus:VALue "XXXX"

sets the binary status value to XXXX.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:STATUS:VALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:FAST:STATUS:VALUE
"1010" to indicate searching on a binary status value of 1010.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on SENT
pause pulses.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to PAUSE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|
LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:QUALifier?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKs:VALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKs:HIVALue

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

EQUal specifies the qualifier as Equal.

INrange sets the qualifier to be within a range.

LESSEQual sets the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

LESSThan sets the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREEQual sets the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

MOREThan sets the qualifier as More Than.

2-550 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

OUTrange sets the qualifier to be outside a range.

UNEQual specifies the qualifier as Unequal.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:QUALIFIER LESSTHAN

sets the pause pulse qualifier to less than.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:QUALIFIER? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:QUALIFIER INRANGE to
indicate that the pause pulse qualifier is set to search inside the range of ticks
low and ticks high.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKs:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the maximum number of pause clock ticks to be
used when searching on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The trigger condition must be set to PAUSE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKs:HIVALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKs:HIVALue ?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<NR1> is the maximum number of pause clock ticks to be used when searching.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKS:HIVALUE 15 sets

the maximum pause tick count for which to search to 15.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKS:HIVALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKS:HIVALUE
20 to indicate the maximum number of pause ticks to search for is 20.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKs:VALue
This command sets or queries the minimum number of pause clock ticks to be
used when searching on a SENT bus signal.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-551

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The trigger condition must be set to PAUSE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKs:VALue <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKs:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<NR1> is the minimum number of pause clock ticks to be used when searching.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKS:VALUE 12 sets the

minimum pause tick count on which to search to 12.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKS:VALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKS:VALUE 15
to indicate the minimum number of pause ticks to search for is 15.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high binary Slow channel data value to use
when searching on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus search condition must be set to SLOW.

Group Trigger

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALue
<QString>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

2-552 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments Search<x> is the Search identifier number.

<Qstring> sets the binary Slow channel data value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALUE
"XXXXXXXX" sets the Slow data high value on which to search to "don't care"
for Search 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALUE? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALUE
"11110001", to indicate searching on slow data values that match 11110001.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when searching on SENT
slow packet bus data.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to SLOW.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|
LESSEQual|MOREEQualINrange|OUTrange}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALifier?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALue

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

EQUal specifies the qualifier as Equal.

LESSEQual sets the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

LESSThan sets the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREEQual sets the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

MOREThan sets the qualifier as More Than.

UNEQual specifies the qualifier as Unequal.

INrange sets the search qualifier to inside a range.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-553

Commands listed in alphabetical order

OUTrange sets the search qualifier to outside a range.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALIFIER
LESSEQUAL sets the slow channel data qualifier to less than or equal.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALIFIER? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALIFIER
EQUAL to indicate that the slow channel data qualifier is set to equal.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary slow channel data value to be used when
searching on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The trigger condition must be set to SLOW.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALue
<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<Qstring> is the slow channel data binary value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"

sets the slow data search value to "don't care."
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALUE? might return
"XXXX1111", indicating the search is marking slow data values that match
XXXX1111.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:IDentifier:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary slow identifier value to be used when
searching on a SENT bus signal.

2-554 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The trigger condition must be set to SLOW.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:IDentifier:VALue
<Qstring>
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:IDentifier:VALue?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Search<x> is the number of the search.

<Qstring> is the slow channel identifier binary value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:IDENTIFIER:VALUE
"XXXX" sets the search identifier value to "don't care."

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:IDENTIFIER:VALUE?
might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SENT:SLOW:IDENTIFIER:VALUE
"0001" indicating to search for the slow channel identifier value of 0001.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the bus source for the bus search to determine
where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce
{B0|B1|B2|B3|B4|B5|B6|B7|B8|B9|B10| B11|B12|B13|B14|B15|B16}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce?

Arguments B0–B16 specifies the bus source as a bus number from B01 to B16.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SOURCE B1 sets the bus source for bus

trigger search 1 to B1.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-555

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SOURCE? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SOURCE B15, indicating that the bus
source for bus trigger search 1 is B15.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:CONDition
This command sets or queries the search condition for an SPI bus search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:CONDition
{DATA|SS|STARTofframe}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:CONDition?

Arguments DATA specifies the trigger condition as Data.

SS specifies the trigger condition as Slave Selection.

STARTofframe specifies the trigger condition as start of frame.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:CONDITION SS sets the trigger

condition for SPI bus trigger search 1 to SS.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:CONDITION? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:CONDITION DATA, indicating that
the trigger condition for SPI bus trigger search 1 is set to Data.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes used for the
specified SPI bus trigger search to determine where to place a mark. The search
condition must be DATA. The search number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

2-556 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> specifies the number of contiguous data bytes.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:DATA:SIZE 1 sets the length of the

data string for SPI bus trigger search 1 to 1 byte.
SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:DATA:SIZE? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH2:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:DATA:SIZE 4, indicating that the
length of the data string for SPI bus trigger search 2 is 4 bytes.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:DATa:VALue
The command sets or queries the binary data string used for an SPI bus search
to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x. The
search condition must be DATA.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:DATa:VALue <QString>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the data value in the specified valid format. The valid
characters are 0, 1, and X for binary format; and A-F, 0-9, and X for hexadecimal
format.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:DATA:VALUE "00001111" sets the

data value for SPI bus trigger search 1 to "00001111" in binary format.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:DATA:VALUE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:DATA:VALUE "11", indicating that
the data value for SPI bus trigger search 1 is set to "11" in hexadecimal format.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:SOURCETYpe
This command sets or queries trigger Source for SPI bus. The search number
is specified by x.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-557

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option SR-SPI.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:SOURCETYpe {MISo|MOSi}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:SOURCETYpe?

Arguments MISo specifies the trigger source as MISo. The default search source type is MISo.

MOSi specifies the trigger source as MOSi.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:SOURCETYpe MOSi sets the trigger

source for SPI bus trigger search 1 to MOSi.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:SOURCETYpe? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SPI:SOURCETYpe MOSi, indicating that
the trigger source for SPI bus trigger search 1 is MOSi.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe
This command sets or queries the slope for an edge trigger search to determine
where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe {RISe|FALL|EITher}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe?

Arguments RISe specifies a rising edge.

FALL specifies a falling edge.

EITher specifies either rising or falling edge.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE RISE sets the slope for search

1 to rise.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE RISE, indicating that the slope
for the trigger for search 1 is rise.

2-558 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the source waveform for an edge trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce {CH<x>| DCH<x>_D<x>|

MATH<x>| REF<x>| REF<x>_D<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies one input channel as the edge source, where the channel number
is specified by x.
DCH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital waveform as the source waveform for the
specified search. The supported digital channel value is 1. The supported digital
bit values are 0 to 15.
MATH<x> specifies the math waveform as the search source, where the math
number is specified by x.
REF<x> specifies the reference waveform as the search source, where the
reference number is specified by x.
REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source waveform
for the specified search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH2 sets the source waveform

for the A trigger to Channel 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH2, indicating that the
Channel 2 edge trigger is the source for search 1.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:THReshold
This command sets or queries the source threshold level for an edge trigger search
to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:THReshold <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:THReshold?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-559

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR3> is the source threshold level for an edge trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:EDGE:THReshold 50.0e-3 sets the threshold

to 50 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:EDGE:THReshold? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0 indicating the
threshold is 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLOCk:THReshold
This command sets or queries the logic clock threshold for a logic trigger search
to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLOCk:THReshold <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLOCk:THReshold?

Arguments <NR3> is the logic clock threshold.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLOCk:THReshold 50.0e-3 sets

the threshold to 50 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLOCk:THReshold? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLOCK:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0
indicating the threshold is set to 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:DELTatime
This command specifies the Logic search delta time value. The time value is used
as part of the Logic search condition to determine if the duration of a logic pattern
meets the specified time constraints. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:DELTatime <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:DELTatime?

Arguments <NR3> is delta time value.

2-560 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:DELTatime 1.5e-9 sets the delta

time to 1.5 ns.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:DELTatime? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:DELTATIME 1.0000E-9 indicating
the delta time is 1.0 ns.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion
This command sets or queries the logic operator for a pattern or state trigger
search to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion {AND|NANd|NOR|OR}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion?

Arguments AND places a mark if all conditions are true.

NANd places a mark if any of the conditions are false.

NOR places a mark if all conditions are false.

OR places a mark if any of the conditions are true.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION AND sets the trigger a logic

function for search 1 to AND.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION NOR, indicating that the
logic function for search 1 is set to NOR.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPUT:CLOCK:SOUrce
This command specifies or queries the channel to use as the clock source for logic
trigger. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPUT:CLOCK:SOUrce {CH<x>|

DCH<x>_D<x>| REF<x>_D<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPUT:CLOCK:SOUrce?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-561

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments CH<x> specifies one input channel as the edge source, where the channel number
is specified by x.
DCH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital waveform as the source waveform for the
specified search. The supported digital channel value is 1. The supported digital
bit values are 0 to 15.
REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source waveform
for the specified search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPUT:CLOCK:SOUrce CH2 sets the

clock source to channel 2.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPUT:CLOCK:SOUrce? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CLOCK:SOURCE UNDEFINED
indicating the clock source is not defined.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:CH<x>
This command sets or queries the voltage level to use for logic trigger search.
The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:CH<x> <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:CH<x>?

Arguments <NR3> is the voltage level to use for logic trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:CH2 50.0e-3 sets the level

to 50 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:CH2? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:LEVEL:CH2 0.0E+0 indicating the
level is set to 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:MATH<x>
This command sets the voltage level to use for logic trigger search. The search
number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

2-562 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:MATH<x> <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:MATH<x>?

Arguments <NR3> is the voltage level to use for logic trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:MATH1 50.0e-3 sets the level

to 50.0 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:MATH1? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:LEVEL:MATH1 0.0E+0 indicating
the level is set to 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:REF<x>
This command sets the voltage level to use for logic trigger search. The search
number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:REF<x> <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:REF<x>?

Arguments <NR3> is the voltage level to use for logic trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:REF1 50.0e-3 sets the level

to 50.0 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:REF1? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:LEVEL:REF1 0.0E+0 indicating the
level is set to 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:CH<x>
This command sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic
pattern, with respect to the defined input pattern, and identifies the time that the
selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger. The search number
is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-563

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:CH<x> {H|L|X}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:CH<x>?

Arguments H specifies triggering when the pattern is high.

L specifies triggering when the pattern is low.

X specifies triggering when the pattern is high or low.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:CH2 H sets the

channel 2 pattern to a high.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:CH2? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:LOGICPATTERN:CH2 X indicating
channel 2 is a don’t care.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:DCH<x>_D<x>
This command sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic
pattern, with respect to the defined input pattern, and identifies the time that the
selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger. The search number is
specified by x. The supported digital channel value is 1. The supported digital
bit values are 0 to 15.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:DCH<x>_D<x>
{H|L|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:DCH<x>_D<x>?

Arguments H specifies triggering when the pattern is high.

L specifies triggering when the pattern is low.

X specifies triggering when the pattern is high or low.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:DCH1_D1 H sets the

channel pattern to a high.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:DCH1_D1? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:LOGICPATTERN:DCH1_D1 X
indicating channel 2 is a don’t care.

2-564 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:MATH<x>
This command sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic
pattern, with respect to the defined input pattern, and identifies the time that the
selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger. The search number
is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:MATH<x>
{H|L|X}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:MATH<x>?

Arguments H specifies triggering when the pattern is high.

L specifies triggering when the pattern is low.

X specifies triggering when the pattern is high or low.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:MATH1 H sets the

pattern to a high.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:MATH1? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:LOGICPATTERN:MATH1 X indicating
the pattern is a don’t care.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:REF<x>
This command sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic
pattern, with respect to the defined input pattern, and identifies the time that the
selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger. The search number
is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:REF<x> {H|L|X}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:REF<x>?

Arguments H specifies triggering when the pattern is high.

L specifies triggering when the pattern is low.

X specifies triggering when the pattern is high or low.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-565

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:REF1 H sets the

pattern to a high.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:REF1? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:LOGICPATTERN:REF1 X indicating the
pattern is a don’t care.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:POLarity
This command sets or queries the polarity for the clock channel when Use Clock
Edge is set to Yes for Logic search type. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:POLarity
{POSitive|NEGative|EITher}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:POLarity?

Arguments POSitive specifies using the positive clock edge.

NEGative specifies using negative clock edge.

EITher specifies using either the positive or negative clock edge.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:POLarity NEGATIVE sets the polarity

to negative.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:POLarity? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:POLARITY POSITIVE indicating the
polarity is set to positive.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:USEClockedge
This command specifies whether or not Logic search uses a clock source. The
search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:USEClockedge {OFF|ON|0|1}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:USEClockedge?

2-566 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments OFF specifies not to use the clock source.

ON specifies to use the clock source.

0 specifies not to use the clock source.

1 specifies to use the clock source.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:USEClockedge ON specifies to use

the clock source.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:USEClockedge? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:USECLOCKEDGE 0 indicating not to use
the clock source.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:WHEn
This command sets or queries the condition for generating an A or B logic search
with respect to the defined input pattern.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:WHEn
{TRUe|FALSe|MOREThan|LESSThan|EQual|UNEQual}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:WHEn?

Arguments TRUe searches on an input value that is true.

FALSe searches on an input value that is false.

MOREthan searches on an input value that is greater than a set value.

LESSthan searches on an input value that is less than a set value.

EQual searches on an input value that is equal to a set value.

UNEQual searches on an input value that is not equal to a set value.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:WHEn FALSE specifies a search on an

input value that is false.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:WHEn? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:WHEN TRUEindicating a search on an
input value that is true.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-567

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit
This command specifies the upper limit to use, in seconds, when searching for
a pulse whose duration is inside or outside a range of two values. The search
number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit?

Arguments <NR3> is the upper limit to use, in seconds, when searching for a pulse.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit 2.5e-9 sets the

high limit to 2.5 ns.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:HIGHLIMIT 2.0000E-9
indicating the pulse width high limit is 2.0 ns.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOGICQUALification
This command specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a pulse width
search. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOGICQUALification
{ON|OFF}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOGICQUALification?

Arguments ON specifies to use logic qualification.

OFF specifies not to use logic qualification.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOGICQUALification ON
turns on logic qualification.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOGICQUALification? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:LOGICQUALIFICATION
OFF indicating logic qualification is off.

2-568 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit
This command specifies the lower limit to use, in seconds, when searching for
a pulse whose duration is inside or outside a range of two values. The search
number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit?

Arguments <NR3> is the lower limit to use, in seconds, when searching for a pulse.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit 0.5e-9 sets the

low limit to 0.5 ns.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:LOWLIMIT 1.0000E-9
indicating the low limit is 2.0 ns.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity
This command specifies the polarity for a pulse width search. The search number
is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity
{POSitive|NEGative}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity?

Arguments POSitive specifies positive polarity for a pulse width search.

NEGative specifies negative polarity for a pulse width search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity NEGATIVE sets the

polarity to negative.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:POLARITY POSITIVE
indicating the polarity is positive.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-569

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce
This command sets and queries the source for the pulse width search input. The
search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce {CH<x>|

DCH<x>_D<x>| REF<x>| REF<x>_D<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel to use as the source.

DCH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel to use as the source. The supported

digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are 0 to 15.
MATH<x> specifies a math waveform to use as the source.

REF<x> specifies a reference waveform to use as the source.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce CH1 sets the source

to channel 1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:SOURCE CH2 indicating channel
2 is the source.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:THReshold
Sets or queries the source threshold level for a pulse width trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:THReshold <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:THReshold?

Arguments <NR3> is the source threshold level for a pulse width trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:THReshold 1.0e-9 sets to

1.0 V.

2-570 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:THReshold? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0 indicating
the threshold is 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn
This command specifies to search for a pulse with a width
(duration) that is less than, greater than, equal to, or unequal to
a specified value (set using SEARch:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth),
OR whose SEARch:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit and
SEARch:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit). The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn
{LESSthan|MOREthan| EQual|UNEQual|WIThin|OUTside}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn?

Arguments LESSthan causes a search when a pulse is detected with a width less than the time
set by the SEARch:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth command.
MOREthan causes a search when a pulse is detected with a width greater than the
time set by the SEARch:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth command.
EQual causes a search when a pulse is detected with a width equal to the time
period specified in SEARch:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth within a ±5% tolerance.
UNEQual causes a search when a pulse is detected with a width greater than or less
than (but not equal) the time period specified in SEARch:A:PULSEWidth:WIDth
within a ±5% tolerance.
WIThin causes a search when a pulse is detected that is within a range set by
two values.
OUTside causes a search when a pulse is detected that is outside of a range set
by two values.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn Outside causes a search

when a pulse is detected that is outside the set range.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WHEN WITHIN indicating that a
search will occur when a pulse is detected that is within a set range.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-571

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:LOGICQUALification
This command specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a runt search.
The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:LOGICQUALification {ON|OFF}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:LOGICQUALification?

Arguments ON specifies to use logic qualification for a runt search.

OFF specifies not to use logic qualification for a runt search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:LOGICQUALification ON turns on

logic qualification.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:LOGICQUALification? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:LOGICQUALIFICATION OFF
indicating logic qualification is off.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity
This command specifies the polarity for the runt search. The search number is
specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity
{POSitive|NEGative|EITher}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity?

Arguments POSitive specifies using positive polarity for the runt search.

NEGative specifies using negative polarity for the runt search.

EITher specifies using either positive or negative polarity for the runt search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity NEGATIVE specifies using

negative polarity for the runt search.

2-572 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE indicating the
polarity is set to positive.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce
This command sets and queries the source for the Runt search input. The search
number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce {CH<x>|REF<x>}

Arguments Arguments are the available sources.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce CH1 sets the source to channel

1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:SOURCE CH2 indicating the source is
set to channel 2.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH
This command sets or queries the source threshold HIGH level for a runt trigger
search to determine where to place a mark.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH?

Arguments <NR3> is the source threshold HIGH level for a runt trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH 50.0E-3 sets the

high threshold to 50 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:THRESHOLD:HIGH 0.0E+0 indicating
the high threshold is 0.0 V.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-573

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:LOW
Sets or queries the source threshold LOW level for a runt trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:LOW <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:LOW?

Arguments <NR3> is the source threshold LOW level for a runt trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:LOW 50.0e-3 sets the

thresholdo to 50 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:LOW? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:THRESHOLD:LOW 0.0E+0 indicating
the threshold is 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn
This command sets or queries the condition setting for a runt trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn
{OCCURS|LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual}NOTEQual}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn?

Arguments LESSthan argument sets the instrument to search if the a

runt pulse is detected with width less than the time set by the
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth command.

MOREthan argument sets the instrument to search if the a runt

pulse is detected with width more than the time set by the
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth command.

EQual argument sets the instrument to search when the pattern

is true for a time period equal to the time period specified in
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth within a ±5% tolerance.

2-574 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

NOTEQual argument sets the instrument to search when the pattern is true for
atime period greater than or less than (but not equal) the time period specified in
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth within a ±5% tolerance.

OCCURS argument specifies a search event if a runt of any detectable width occurs.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WHEN MORETHAN sets the instrument to

trigger when a runt pulse is detected with width wider than the time set by the
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth command.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WHEN? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS, indicating that
a mark is placed if a runt trigger event occurs.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth
This command sets or queries the width setting for a runt trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the minimum width in seconds.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WIDTH 400E–12 sets the runt trigger

minimum width for search 1 to 0.4 nanoseconds.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WIDTH? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WIDTH 500.00O0E-12, indicating that
the runt trigger minimum width for search 1 is set to 0.5 nanoseconds.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
This command sets or queries the clock slope setting for a setup/hold trigger
search to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE {FALL|RISe}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-575

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments FALL specifies the polarity as the clock falling edge.

RISe specifies the polarity as the clock rising edge.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE FALL sets the

setup/hold trigger clock slope polarity for search 1 to falling edge.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE, indicating that
the setup/hold trigger clock slope polarity for search 1 is set to rising edge.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the clock source setting for a setup/hold trigger
search to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH<x>|

DCH<x>_D<x>| MATH<x>| REF<x>| REF<x>_D<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an input channel as the edge source, where <x> = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
7, or 8, depending on the number of channels in your instrument.
DCH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital waveform as the setup and hold clock source
waveform for the specified search. The supported digital channel value is 1. The
supported digital bit values are 0 to 15.
MATH<x> specifies the math waveform as the search source, where <x> = ≥1.

REF<x> specifies the reference waveform as the search source, where <x> = ≥1.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the setup and hold clock
source waveform for the specified search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE MATH1 sets the

setup/hold trigger clock source setting for search 1 to MATH1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1, indicating that
the setup/hold trigger clock source setting for search 1 is set to CH1.

2-576 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
This command sets or queries the clock threshold setting for a setup/hold trigger
search to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold?

Arguments <NR3> the clock threshold setting for a setup/hold trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD -1.3 sets

the setup/hold trigger clock threshold setting for search 1 to -1.3 volts.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD –1.3000,
indicating that the setup/hold trigger clock threshold setting for search 1 is set
to -1.3 volts.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime
This command sets or queries the hold time setting for a setup/hold trigger search
to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the hold time setting in seconds. Positive values for hold time
occur after the clock edge. Negative values occur before the clock edge.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 400E-12 sets the

setup/hold trigger hold time setting for search 1 to 400 ps.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 500.0000E–12,
indicating that the setup/hold trigger hold time setting for search 1 is set to 0.5 ns.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-577

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:CH<x>
This command sets or queries the voltage level to use for setup & hold trigger
search. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:CH<x> <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:CH<x>?

Arguments <NR3> the voltage level to use for setup & hold trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:CH1 50.0e-3 sets the level

to 50.0 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:CH1? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:LEVEL:CH1 0.0E+0 indicating
the level is 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:MATH<x>
This command sets or queries the voltage level to use for setup & hold trigger
search. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:MATH<x> <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:MATH<x>?

Arguments <NR3> isi the voltage level to use for setup & hold trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:MATH1 50.0e-3 sets the

level to 50.0 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:MATH1? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:LEVEL:MATH1 0.0E+0 indicating
the level is 0.0 V.

2-578 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:REF<x>
This command sets or queries the voltage level to use for setup & hold trigger
search. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:REF<x> <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:REF<x>?

Arguments <NR3> is the voltage level to use for setup & hold trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:REF1 50.0e-3 sets the

level to 50.0 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LEVel:REF1? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:LEVEL:REF1 0.0E+0 indicating
the level is 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:CH<x>
This command sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic
pattern, with respect to the defined input pattern, and identifies the time that the
selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger. The search number
is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:CH<x>
{INCLude|DONTInclude}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:CH<x>?

Arguments INCLude specifies including the specified channel SETHOLD inputs in the
specified search.
DONTInclude specifies not including the specified channel SETHOLD inputs
in the specified search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:CH1 INCLUDE

specifies including the specified channel SETHOLD inputs in the specified search.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-579

Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:CH1? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:LOGICPATTERN:CH1
DONTINCLUDE indicating the specified channel SETHOLD inputs will not be
included in the specified search.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold :LOGICPattern:DCH<x>_D<x>
This command sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic
pattern, with respect to the defined input pattern, and identifies the time that the
selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger. The search number is
specified by x. The supported digital channel value is 1. The supported digital
bit values are 0 to 15.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold :LOGICPattern:DCH<x>_D<x>

{INCLude|DONTInclude}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold :LOGICPattern:
DCH<x>_D<x>?

Arguments INCLude specifies including the specified channel SETHOLD inputs in the
specified search.
DONTInclude specifies not including the specified channel SETHOLD inputs
in the specified search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:DCH1_D0
INCLUDE specifies including the specified digital channel SETHOLD inputs in the
specified search.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:DCH1_D0? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:LOGICPATTERN:DCH1_D0
DONTINCLUDE indicating the specified digital channel SETHOLD inputs will
not be included in the specified search.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:MATH<x>
This command sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic
pattern, with respect to the defined input pattern, and identifies the time that the
selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger. The search number
is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

2-580 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:MATH<x>
{INCLude|DONTInclude}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:MATH<x>?

Arguments INCLude specifies including the specified math SETHOLD inputs in the specified
search.
DONTInclude specifies not including the specified math SETHOLD inputs in the
specified search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:MATH1 INCLUDE

specifies including the specified math SETHOLD inputs in the specified search.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:MATH1? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:LOGICPATTERN:MATH1
DONTINCLUDE indicating the specified math SETHOLD inputs will not be
included in the specified search.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:REF<x>
This command sets and returns the conditions used for generating an A logic
pattern, with respect to the defined input pattern, and identifies the time that the
selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger. The search number
is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:REF<x>
{INCLude|DONTInclude}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:REF<x>?

Arguments INCLude specifies including the specified reference SETHOLD inputs in the
specified search.
DONTInclude specifies not including the specified reference SETHOLD inputs
in the specified search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:REF1 INCLUDE

specifies including the specified reference SETHOLD inputs in the specified
search.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:SETHold:LOGICPattern:REF1? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:LOGICPATTERN:REF1

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-581

Commands listed in alphabetical order

DONTINCLUDE indicating the specified reference SETHOLD inputs will not be

included in the specified search.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime
This command sets or queries the setup time setting for a setup/hold trigger search
to determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:SETTIME 2E–9 sets the setup/hold

trigger setup time setting for search 1 to 2 ns.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:SETTIME? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:SETTIME 1.0000E–9, indicating
that the setup/hold trigger setup time setting for search 1 is set to 1.0 ns.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STATE
This command sets or queries the enabled state of the search. The search number
is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STATE {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Arguments <NR1> = 1 enables the search. Any other character disables the search.

ON enables the search.

OFF disables the search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:STATE OFF disables the search.

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:STATE? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:STATE 1 indicating search 1 is enabled.

2-582 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STOPAcq
This command sets or queries whether acquisitions are stopped when a search hit
is found. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STOPAcq {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STOPAcq?

Arguments <x> is the number of the search on which to enable or disable the stop acquisition
function.
<NR1> = 1 enables stopping when a search hit is found. Any other character
disables the feature.
ON enables stopping when a search hit is found.

OFF disables stopping on a search hit.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:STOPAcq ON enables stopping when a search

hit is found.
SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGger:A:STOPAcq? might return
:SEARCH:SEARCH3:TRIGGER:A:STOPACQ 1 indicating acquisitions
are stopped when a search hit is found on search number 3.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:LOGICQUALification
This command specifies whether or not to use logic qualification for a timeout
search. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:LOGICQUALification
{ON|OFF}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:LOGICQUALification?

Arguments ON specifies to use logic qualification.

OFF specifies not to use logic qualification.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-583

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:LOGICQUALification ON
specifies to use logic qualification.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:LOGICQUALification? might
return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:LOGICQUALIFICATION OFF
indicating logic qualification is off.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity
The polarity to be used for a Timeout search. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity
{STAYSHigh|STAYSLow|EITher}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity?

Arguments STAYSHigh specifies the polarity stays HIGH.

STAYSLow specifies the polarity stays LOW.

EITher specifies the polarity stays HIGH or stays LOW.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity STAYSLOW specifies

the polarity stays LOW.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:POLARITY STAYSHIGH indicating
the polarity stays HIGH.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce
This command sets and queries the source for timeout search input. The search
number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce {CH<x>|

DCH<x>_D<x>| MATH<x>| REF<x>| REF<x>_D<x>}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce?

2-584 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments CH<x> specifies an input channel as the edge source, where <x> = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
7, or 8, depending on the number of channels in your instrument.
DCH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel for the search source. The supported
digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are 0 to 15.
MATH<x> specifies the math waveform as the search source, where <x> = ≥1.

REF<x> specifies the reference waveform as the search source, where <x> = ≥1.

REF<x>_D<x> specifies a digital reference waveform as the source waveform the

specified search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce? might return

SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:SOURCE CH1 indicating CH1 is the
source.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:THReshold
Sets or queries the source threshold level for a timeout trigger search to determine
where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:THReshold <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:THReshold?

Arguments <NR3> is the source threshold level for a timeout trigger search.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:THReshold 50.0e-3 sets the

threshold to 50.0 mV.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:THReshold? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0 indicating
the threshold is 0.0 V.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe
This command sets or queries the time setting for a timeout trigger search to
determine where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-585

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe <NR3>

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe?

Arguments <NR3> is the time in seconds.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:TIME 400E-9 sets the timeout

trigger time setting for search 1 to 400 ns.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:TIME? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:TIME 500.0000E-12, indicating
that the timeout trigger time setting for search 1 is set to 500 ns.

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe
This command sets or queries the trigger type setting for a search to determine
where to place a mark. The search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe {EDGE| RUNT| TRANsition|

PULSEWidth| TIMEOut| LOGIc| SETHold| Bus}
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe?

Arguments EDGE triggers when the source input signal amplitude crosses the specified level
in the direction given by the slope.

NOTE. Some trigger types are optional.

RUNT triggers when a pulse crosses the first preset voltage threshold but
does not cross the second preset threshold before recrossing the first. The
thresholds are set with the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNt:HIGH and
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNt:LOW THRESHOLD commands.
TRANsition triggers when a pulse crosses both thresholds in the same direction
as the specified polarity and the transition time between the two threshold
crossings is greater or less than the specified time delta.
PULSEWidth triggers on input signal source pulses that are
inside or outside of the given time range specified by
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit and
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit.
The polarity is selected using the SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
POLarity command.

2-586 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

TIMEOut triggers on an input signal source that stays above, stays below, or stays
either above or beow the trigger level for a given time.
LOGIc specifies that a search occurs when specified conditions are met, and is
controlled by the SEARCH:A:LOGIc commands.
SETHold triggers on a functional pattern combination of one to three data sources
at the time of the clock transition.
Bus specifies that a search occurs when a communications signal is found.

Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TYPE RUNT sets the trigger type setting for

search 1 to RUNT.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TYPE? might return
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TYPE EDGE, indicating that the trigger type
setting for search 1 is set to EDGE.

SEARCH:SELected
This command sets or queries the selected search, for example SEARCH1. The
search number is specified by x.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax SEARCH:SELected SEARCH1

Arguments SEARCH1 is the specified search.

Examples SEARCH:SELected SEARCH1 specifies a search 1 search.

SEARCH:SELected? might return :SEARCH:SELECTED SEARCH1 indicating

search 1 is selected.

SELect:DCH<x>:DAll
This command turns on or off all constituent digital channels.

Group Digital

Syntax SELect:DCH<x>:DAll {ON|OFF|<NR1>}

SELect:DCH<x>:DAll?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-587

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments DCH<x> specifies the digital channel. The supported value is 1.

<NR1> = 0 disables the specified digital channel; any other value turns the on
the digital channel.
OFF turns off the specified digital channel.

ON turns on the specified digital channel.

Examples SELect:DCH1:DAll ON turns ON all the bits of separate digital channel 1.

SELect:DCH1:DAll? might return :SELect:DCH1:DAll 0 indicating all the

bits are turned off.

SET? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the commands that list the instrument settings,
except for configuration information for the calibration values. You can use these
commands to return the instrument to the state it was in when you made the SET?
query. The SET? query always returns command headers, regardless of the setting
of the HEADer command. This is because the returned commands are intended
to be sent back to the instrument as a command string. The VERBose command
can still be used to specify whether the returned headers should be abbreviated
or full-length.
This command is identical to the *LRN? command.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax SET?

Related Commands HEADer

*LRN?
VERBose

Examples SET? might return the following response: :ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER

RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;NUMENV 10;NUMAVG 16;REPET
1;:FASTACQ:STATE 0;:APPLICATION:GPKNOB1:ACTIVE
0;:APPLICATION:GPKNOB2:ACTIVE 0;:APPLICATION:WINDOW:HEIGHT
236;WIDTH 640;:APPLICATION:SCOPEAPP:STATE
RUNNING;WINDOW FULLSCREEN;:APPLICATION:EXTAPP:STATE
NOTRUNNING;:AUXOUT:SOURCE ATRIGGER;EDGE FALLING;:CMDBATCH
1;:HEADER 1;:LOCK NONE;:ROSC:SOURCE INTERNAL;:VERBOSE
1;:ALIAS:STATE 0;:DISPLAY:CLOCK 1;COLOR:PALETTE

2-588 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

NORMAL;MATHCOLOR DEFAULT;REFCOLOR DEFAULT;:DISPLAY:FILTER

SINX;FORMAT YT;GRATICULE FULL;INTENSITY:WAVEFORM
75.0000;AUTOBRIGHT 1;:DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE
OFF;STYLE VECTORS;TRIGBAR SHORT;TRIGT 1;VARPERSIST
500.0000E-3;PORT FILE;:DIAG:LEVEL SUBSYS;:TRIGGER:A:MODE
AUTO;TYPE EDGE;LEVEL 0.0000;HOLDOFF:BY DEFAULT;TIME
1.5000E-6;:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE;.

SOCKETServer:ENAble
This command enables or disables the socket server which supports a telnet or
other TCPIP socket connection to send commands and queries to the instrument.
The default state is enabled.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax SOCKETServer:ENAble {0|1|OFF|ON}

SOCKETServer:ENAble?

Arguments 1 enables the socket server. If the state is 0 (disabled) and this command is sent
to enable the socket server when the port is in use by another service, then the
error event code 221 (Settings conflict) is posted to the event queue and the socket
server remains disabled. In this case, select a different port number and attempt to
enable the socket server again.
0 disables the socket server.

ON enables the socket server.

OFF disables the socket server.

Examples SOCKETSERVER:ENABLE On enables the socket server.

SOCKETSERVER:ENABLE? might return :SOCKETSERVER:ENABLE 1 indicating

the socket server is enabled.

SOCKETServer:PORT
This command sets the TCPIP port for the socket server connection.

Group Miscellaneous

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-589

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax SOCKETServer:PORT <NR1>

SOCKETServer:PORT?

Arguments <NR1> is the TCPIP port for the socket server connection.

If the socket server is enabled and the port specified is in use by another service,
then the error event code 221 (Settings conflict) is posted to the event queue
and the socket server remains in its current state (i.e. enabled/disabled and port
address remain unchanged).
Similarly, if any sessions are active when the port is changed, this same error event
may be posted to the event queue and the port will remain unchanged. In this case,
exit all current sessions and send the :SOCKETServer:PORT command again.

Examples SOCKETSERVER:PORT 4000 sets the socket server port number to 4000.

SOCKETSERVER:PORT? might return :SOCKETSERVER:PORT 4000 indicating

that the port number is 4000.

SOCKETServer:PROTOCol
This command sets or queries the protocol for the socket server.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax SOCKETServer:PROTOCol {TERMinal|NONe}

SOCKETServer:PROTOCol?

Arguments TERMinal specifies terminal protocol for the socket server. When set to
TERMinal, a session startup message is sent to the socket and a command prompt
is provided.
NONe disables the terminal features, allowing the server to be used for raw socket
transactions, such as with a VISA socket server. The default setting is NONe.

Examples SOCKETSERVER:PROTOCOL NONE sets the protocol to none.

SOCKETSERVER:PROTOCOL? might return :SOCKETSERVER:PROTOCOL

TERMINAL indicating the protocol is set to terminal.

2-590 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

*SRE
The *SRE (Service Request Enable) command sets and queries the bits in the
Service Request Enable Register. For more information, refer to Registers.

Group Status and Error

Syntax *SRE <NR1>

*SRE?

Related Commands *CLS

DESE
*ESE
*ESR?
EVENT?
EVMsg?
FACtory
*STB?

Arguments <NR1> is a value in the range from 0 through 255. The binary bits of the SRER
are set according to this value. Using an out-of-range value causes an execution
error. The power-on default for SRER is 0 if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the SRER
maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle.

Examples *SRE 48 sets the bits in the SRER to binary 00110000.

*SRE? might return 32, showing that the bits in the SRER have the binary value
of 00100000.

*STB? (Query Only)

The *STB? (Read Status Byte) query returns the contents of the Status Byte
Register (SBR) using the Master Summary Status (MSS) bit. For more
information, refer to Registers.

Group Status and Error

Syntax *STB?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-591

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands *CLS

DESE
*ESE
*ESR?
EVENT?
EVMsg?
FACtory
*SRE

Returns <NR1>

Examples *STB? might return 96, showing that the SBR contains the binary value 01100000.

TEKSecure (No Query Form)

This command initializes, for the current user, both waveform and setup
memories, overwriting any previously stored data.
Equivalent to invoking Teksecure from the Utility menu. This is a time-consuming
operation (3 to 5 minutes) and the instrument is inoperable until the TekSecure
operation is complete.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax TEKSecure

Examples TEKSECURE initializes both waveform and setup memories.

TIMe
This command sets the time in the form hh:mm:ss where hh refers to a two-digit
hour number, mm refers to a two-digit minute number from 01 to 60, and ss refers
to a two-digit second number from 01 to 60.

Conditions Time can only be changed in increments of 1 hour maximum.

There is a 24-hour total time change limit. Time changes cannot cross the
00:00:00 boundary.

2-592 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax TIMe <QString>

TIMe?

Related Commands DATE?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string representing the desired time.

Examples TIME "13:02:10" sets the time to 1:02 p.m. and 10 seconds.

TIME? might return :TIME "14:05:17", indicating the current time is set to
2:05 p.m. and 17 seconds.

TIMe:ZONe
This command sets the time zone to the one specified.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax TIMe:ZONe <QString>

TIMe:ZONe?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string representing the desired time zone.

Examples TIME:ZONE "America/Yellowknife" sets the time zone to UTC delta -7.

TIME:ZONE? might return :TIME:ZONE "America/Los_Angeles".

TIMe:ZONe:UTCDELTa
This command sets or queries the time zone using the difference between the
desired time zone and UTC.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax TIMe:ZONe:UTCDELTa <NR3>

TIMe:ZONe:UTCDELTa?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-593

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR3> is the specified number of hours difference between the desired time zone
and UTC which is equivalent to GMT. The deltas supported are: -12.00, -11.00,
-10.00, -9.30, -9.00, -8.30, -8.00, -7.00, -6.00, -5.00, -4.00, -3.30, -3.00, -2.00,
-1.00, 0.0, 1.00, 2.00, 3.00, 3.30, 4.00, 4.30, 5.00, 5.30, 6.00, 6.30, 7.00, 8.00,
9.00, 9.30, 10.00, 10.30, 11.00, 11.30, 12.00

Examples TIME:ZONE:UTCDELTA -7.0e0 sets the time zone to America/Yellowknife.

TIME:ZONE:UTCDELTA? might return :TIME:ZONE:UTCDELTA -8.0000.

TOTaluptime? (Query Only)

Total number of hours the instrument has been turned on since the NV memory
was last programmed, usually during the initial manufacturing process.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax TOTaluptime?

Returns The total number of hours the instrument has been turned on since the NV
memory was last programmed.

Examples TOTALUPTIME? might return :TOTALUPTIME 756 indicating the up time is

756 minutes.

TOUCHSCReen:STATe
This sets or queries the enabled state of the touch screen only. This command is
equivalent to pushing the Touch Off button on the front panel.
To completely disable front panel operation, use the command LOCK ALL. To
re-enable the front panel, send the command LOCK NONE.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax TOUCHSCReen:STATe {0|1|OFF|ON}

TOUCHSCReen:STATe?

Related Commands LOCk

2-594 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments 0 disables the touch screen.

ON enables the touch screen.

OFF disables the touch screen.

Examples TOUCHSCReen:STATe OFF disables the touch screen.

TOUCHSCReen:STATe? might return :TOUCHSCREEN:STATE 1 indicating the

touch screen is enabled.

*TRG (No Query Form)

Performs a group execute trigger on commands defined by *DDT.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax *TRG

Related Commands *DDT

Examples *TRG immediately executes all commands that have been defined by *DDT.

TRIGger
This command forces a trigger event to occur. The query returns the current
trigger parameters for the instrument.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger FORCe

TRIGger?

Arguments FORCe creates a trigger event. If TRIGger:STATE is set to READy, the acquisition
will complete. Otherwise, this command will be ignored. This is equivalent to
pressing the Force button on the front panel.

Examples TRIGGER FORCE forces a trigger event to occur.

TRIGGER? returns the current trigger parameters for the instrument.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-595

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:A
This command sets the A trigger level automatically to 50% of the range of the
minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal. The query returns
current trigger parameters. The trigger level is the voltage threshold through
which the trigger source signal must pass to generate a trigger event. This
command is equivalent to pushing the LEVEL knob on the front panel.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A SETLevel

TRIGger:A?

Arguments SETLevel sets the trigger level to 50% of the range of the minimum and
maximum values of the trigger input signal.

Examples TRIGger:A SETLEVEL sets the trigger level to 50% of the range of the minimum
and maximum values of the trigger input signal.
TRIGger:A? returns current trigger parameters.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition
This command sets the condition (start of frame, frame type, identifier, matching
data, EOF, missing ACK field, bit-stuffing error) to be used when triggering on a
CAN bus signal. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition
{SOF|FRAMEtype|IDentifier|DATa|IDANDDATA|EOF|ERRor|FDBITS}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition?

Arguments SOF enables triggering on the start of frame.

FDBITS enables triggering on the values of the BRS and ESI bits in an FD packet.

FRAMEtype enables triggering on the type of frame.

IDentifier enables triggering on a matching identifier.

2-596 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

DATa enables triggering on matching data.

IDANDDATA enables triggering on a matching identifier and matching data.

EOF enables triggering on the end of frame.

ERRor enables triggering on a specified error condition.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:CONDITION? might return

:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:CONDITION EOF indicating an end of file
condition.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:CONDITION DATA enables triggering on matching
CAN data.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection
This command sets the data direction (read, write or “nocare”) to be used to
search on a CAN bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to IDentifier (using
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition). The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection {READ|WRITE|NOCARE}

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection?

Arguments READ sets the CAN data direction to READ.

WRITE sets the CAN data direction to WRITE.

NOCARE sets the CAN data direction to either.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION WRITE sets the CAN data

direction to Write.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE indicating the data
direction can be either read or write.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-597

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:OFFSet
This command sets or queries the data offset value, in bytes, to use when
triggering on the CAN data field. The bus number is specified by x. The trigger
condition must be set to DATA or IDANDDATA.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:OFFSet <NR1>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:OFFSet?

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:CAN:STANDard

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue

Arguments <NR1> is an integer whose minimum and default values are -1 (don't care), and the
maximum is up to 7 (for CAN 2.0) or up to 63 (for ISO CAN FD and Non-ISO
CAN FD).
The maximum is dependent on the number of bytes being matched and the CAN
standard selected. Its value is calculated as [Absolute Maximum] - [Data Match
Size]. For CAN 2.0, the absolute maximum is 8 bytes. For ISO CAN FD and
Non-ISO CAN FD, the absolute maximum is 64 bytes. The minimum data match
size is 1 byte, which produces the ranges listed above. Increasing the data match
size above 1 byte will adjust the range of valid data offset values accordingly.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:OFFSET 5 sets the CAN data offset to 5 bytes.

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:OFFSET? might return 7, indicating the CAN

data offset is 7 bytes.
If the CAN standard is set for CAN 2.0, and the trigger data size is set to 3, the
maximum value for the data offset will be 5 (8 - 3 = 5).
If the CAN standard is set for ISO CAN FD or Non-ISO CAN FD, and the trigger
data size is set to 8, the maximum value for the data offset will be 56 (64 - 8 = 56).

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
This command sets the qualifier (<, >, =, ≠, ≤, ≥) to be used when triggering on
a CAN bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to IDANDDATA or DATa

2-598 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

(using TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition). The bus number is specified

by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier
{LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|LESSEQual|MOREEQual}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier?

Arguments LESSthan sets the instrument to trigger when the data is less than the qualifier
value.
MOREthan sets the instrument to trigger when the data is greater than the qualifier
value.
EQual sets the instrument to trigger when the data is equal to the qualifier value.

UNEQual sets the instrument to trigger when the data is not equal to the qualifier
value.
LESSEQual sets the instrument to trigger when the data is less than or equal
to the qualifier value.
MOREEQual sets the instrument to trigger when the data is greater than or equal
to the qualifier value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the instrument to

trigger when the data is less than the qualifier value.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER LESSTHAN, indicating that the
instrument is set to trigger when the data is less than the qualifier value.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe
This command sets the length of the data string, in bytes, to be used when
triggering on a CAN bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to
IDANDDATA or DATa (using TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition). The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-599

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> is the length of the data string in bytes.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATa:SIZe 2 sets the data size to 2 bytes.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATa:SIZe? might return

:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:SIZE 1 indicating the data size is
set to 1 byte.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue
This command sets the binary data value to be used when triggering on a CAN
bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to IDANDDATA or DATa (using
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition). The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the data value in binary format. The only allowed characters in
the QString are 0, 1, and X.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:VALUE "1011" sets the CAN data value to

1011.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX" indicating
the data valule is set to XXXXXXXX.

2-600 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:ERRType
This command sets or queries the type of error condition for a CAN bus to
triggering on. The bus number is specified by x. The trigger condition must be
set to ERRor.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:ERRType
{ACKMISS|BITSTUFFing|FORMERRor|ANYERRor}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:ERRType?

Arguments ACKMISS specifies triggering on a missing ACK field.

BITSTUFFing specifies triggering on a bit stuffing error.

FORMERRor specifies triggering on a CAN FD form error. To use this option, the
CAN standard must be set to FDISO or FDNONISO.
ANYERRor specifies triggering on any error type.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:ERRTYPE ACKMISS specifies triggering on any

missing ACK fields.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:ERRTYPE? might return ANYERROR, indicating that
the bus is triggering on all error types.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BRSBit
This command sets or queries the value of the bit rate switch bit (BRS bit) for a
CAN bus to triggering on. The bus number is specified by x. The trigger condition
must be set to FDBITS, and the CAN standard must be FDISO or FDNONISO.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BRSBit {ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BRSBit?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-601

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments ONE filters CAN FD packets to only match those where the BRS bit has a value of
1 (fast data enabled).
ZERo filters CAN FD packets to only match those where the BRS bit has a value
of 0 (fast data disabled).
NOCARE disables filtering of CAN FD packets on the BRS bit.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FD:BRSBit ONE specifies filtering CAN FD packets

for those where the BRS bit has a value of 1.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FD:BRSBIT? might return NOCARE, indicating that
CAN FD packets are not being filtered based on the BRS bit value.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:ESIBit
This command sets or queries the value of the error state indicator bit (ESI bit)
for a CAN bus to triggering on. The bus number is specified by x. The trigger
condition must be set to FDBITS, and the CAN standard must be FDISO or
FDNONISO.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:ESIBit {ONE|ZERo|NOCARE}

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:ESIBit?

Arguments ONE filters CAN FD packets to only match those where the ESI bit has a value
of 1 (recessive).
ZERo filters CAN FD packets to only match those where the ESI bit has a value
of 0 (dominant).
NOCARE disables filtering of CAN FD packets on the ESI bit.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FD:ESIBit ONE specifies filtering CAN FD packets

for those where the ESI bit has a value of 1.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FD:ESIBIT? might return NOCARE, indicating that
CAN FD packets are not being filtered based on the ESI bit value.

2-602 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype
This command sets the frame type (data, remote, error or overload) to be used
when triggering on a CAN bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to
FRAMEtype (using TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition). B<x> is the bus
number.The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype
{DATa|REMote|ERRor|OVERLoad}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype?

Arguments DATa specifies a data frame type.

REMote specifies a remote frame type.

ERRor specifies an error frame type.

OVERLoad specifies an overload frame type.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FRAMETYPE DATA sets the CAN trigger frame type

to DATA.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FRAMETYPE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FRAMETYPE DATA indicating the frame type is data.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:IDentifier:MODe
This command sets the addressing mode (standard or extended format) to be
used when triggering on a CAN bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to
IDANDDATA or DATa (using TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition). The
bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:IDentifier:MODe {STandard|EXTended}

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:IDentifier:MODe?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-603

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments STandard specifies the standard addressing mode.

EXTended specifies the extended addressing mode.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDentifier:MODe EXTENDED sets the addressing

mode to extended.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDentifier:MODe? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:MODE STANDARD indicating the
address mode is standard.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:IDentifier:VALue
This command sets the binary address value to be used when triggering on a CAN
bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to IDANDDATA or DATa (using
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition). The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:IDentifier:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:IDentifier:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is up to 29 bits specifying the binary identifier value. The only
allowed characters in the QString are 0, 1, and X.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "1011" sets the identifier

value to 1011.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX" indicating
the identifier values is XXXXXXXXXXX.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe
This command specifies the I2C address mode to 7 or 10-bit. The bus number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

2-604 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe {ADDR7|ADDR10}

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe?

Arguments ADDR7 specifies the 7-bit I2C address mode.

ADDR10 specifies the 10-bit I2C address mode.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR10 sets the I2C address mode

to 10-bit.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR7 indicating the
address mode is set to the 7-bit mode.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue
This command specifies the binary address string used for the I2C trigger if
the trigger condition is ADDRESS or ADDRANDDATA. The bus number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is up to 7 or 10-bits depending on the address mode that specifies the
address. The only allowed characters in the QString are 0, 1, and X.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE "1011" sets the I2C address value

to XXX1011.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE "XXXXXXX" indicating
the address value is set to XXXXXXX.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-605

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition
This command specifies the trigger condition for an I2C trigger. The bus number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition
{STARt|STOP|REPEATstart|ACKMISS|ADDRess|DATa|ADDRANDDATA}

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition?

Arguments STARt specifies a search based on start condition.

STOP specifies a search based on stop condition.

REPEATstart specifies a search based on repeat of start condition.

ACKMISS specifies a search based on missing acknowledgement condition.

ADDRess specifies a search based on address.

DATa specifies a search based on data.

ADDRANDDATA specifies a search based on address and data.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:CONDITION START specifies start as the I2C trigger

condition.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:CONDITION? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:CONDITION START indicating the condition is set
to the start condition.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection
This command specifies the I2C trigger type to be valid on a Read, Write, or
Either condition. Read or write is indicated by the R/W bit in the I2C protocol.
The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

2-606 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection {READ|WRITE|NOCARE}

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection?

Arguments READ specifies read as the data direction.

WRITE specifies write as the data direction.

NOCARE specifies either as the data direction.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION WRITE specifies write as the

I2C data direction.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE indicating the data
direction is either read or write.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an
I2C trigger if the trigger condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA. Applies to bus
<x>, where the bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> is the length of the data string in bytes.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATa:SIZe 1 sets the data size to 1 byte.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATa:SIZe? might return

:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:SIZE 1 indicating the size is set
to 1 byte.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for I2C triggering if the trigger
condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA. The bus number is specified by x.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-607

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary data string, where the number of bits is 8 times the
number of bytes specified. The only allowed characters in the string are 0, 1,
and X.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATa:VALue "11001101" sets the data value to

1100101.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATa:VALue? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX" indicating the
data value is XXXXXXXX.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition
This command specifies the trigger condition for LIN. The bus number is specified
by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition
{SYNCfield|IDentifier|DATa|IDANDDATA|WAKEup|SLEEP|ERRor}

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition?

Arguments SYNCfield sets the LIN trigger condition to sync field.

IDentifier sets the LIN trigger condition to identifier.

DATa sets the LIN trigger condition to data.

IDANDDATA sets the LIN trigger condition to id and data.

WAKEup sets the LIN trigger condition to wake up.

SLEEP sets the LIN trigger condition to sleep.

2-608 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

ERRor sets the LIN trigger condition to error.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:CONDITION ERROR sets the LIN trigger condition

to error.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:CONDITION? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:CONDITION SYNCFIELD indicating the LIN trigger
condition is sync field.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue
This command specifies the high data value string used for a LIN bus trigger
when the trigger condition is DATA or IDANDDATA and the data qualifier is
INRANGE or OUTRANGE. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue <QString>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the binary data string used for LIN trigger if
the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE "11001010" sets the high value

to 11001010.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX"indicating
the high value is don't care.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier
This command specifies the LIN data qualifier. This only applies if the trigger
condition is IDANDDATA or DATA. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-609

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier
{LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|
INrange|OUTrange}

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier?

Arguments LESSthan sets the LIN data qualifier to less than.

MOREthan sets the LIN data qualifier to greater than.

EQual sets the LIN data qualifier to equal.

UNEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to not equal.

LESSEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to less than or equal.

MOREEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to greater than or equal.

INrange sets the LIN data qualifier to in range.

OUTrange sets the LIN data qualifier to out of range.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER OUTRANGE sets the data qualifier

to out of range.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the data
qualifier is set to equal.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the data string in bytes to be used for LIN
trigger. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR1> is the size of the data string in bytes.

2-610 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:SIZE 8 sets the data size to 8 bytes.

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:SIZE? might return

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:SIZE 1 indicating the data size is 1 byte.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string to be used for LIN trigger condition
if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is a quoted string that is the LIN trigger data value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:VALUE "11001101"sets the data value to

11001101.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:VALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX" indicating the
data value is don't care.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE
This command specifies the error type be used for LIN trigger. The bus number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE {SYNC|PARity|CHecksum}

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-611

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments SYNC sets the LIN error type to SYNC.

PARity sets the LIN error type to parity.

CHecksum sets the LIN error type to checksum.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:ERRTYPE CHECKSUM sets the LIN error type to

checksum.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:ERRTYPE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:ERRTYPE SYNC indicating the LIN error type
is SYNC.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue
This command specifies the binary address string used for LIN bus trigger if the
trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary address string used for LIN trigger if the trigger
condition is ID or IDANDDATA.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "110010" sets the identifier

value to 110010.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXX" indicating the
identifier value is XXXXXX.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for a Parallel Bus trigger. The
bus number is specified by x.

Group Trigger

2-612 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:DATa:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> is the binary data string used for a Parallel Bus trigger.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:PARallel:DATa:VALue "11001101" sets the data

value to 11001101.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:PARallel:DATa:VALue? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:PARALLEL:DATA:VALUE "X" indicating the data value
is X.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:CONDition
This command specifies the condition for an RS-232C trigger, where the bus
number is specified by< >x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:CONDition
{STARt|EOp|DATa|PARItyerror}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:CONDition?

Arguments STARt sets the Trigger on condition to Start.

EOp sets the Trigger on condition to End of Packet.

DATa sets the Trigger on condition to Data.

PARItyerror sets the Trigger on condition to Parity Error.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:CONDition DATA sets the trigger on condition

to data.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:CONDition? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:CONDITION START indicating start
is the trigger condition.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-613

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATa:SIZe
This command sets or queries the length of the data string in bytes to be used
for an RS-232C trigger when the trigger condition is Data. The bus number is
specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATa:SIZe <NR3>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the data size in bytes.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:DATA:SIZE 3 sets three bytes data size for the

RS-232C bus B1 trigger.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:DATA:SIZE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:DATA:SIZE 2, indicating that the
data size for the RS-232C bus B1 trigger is set to two bytes.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATa:VALue
This command sets or queries the data address string used for the RS-232 bus
trigger when the trigger condition is set to Data. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATa:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATa:VALue?

Arguments <QString> specifies the address value. The argument is a string of 0, 1, or X

representing a binary number.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:DATA:VALUE "011XX11" sets the data address

string used for the RS-232 bus trigger to 011XX11.

2-614 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:DATA:VALUE? might return

:TRIGGER:A:BUS:RS232C:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXX01", indicating
that the data address string used for the RS-232 bus trigger is set to "XXXXXX01"

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition
This command sets or queries the trigger condition for a SENT bus.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition {START|FAST|SLOW|ERRor}

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition?

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

START sets triggering on start of packet.

FAST sets triggering on fast channel packets.

SLOW sets triggering on slow channel packets.

ERRor sets triggering on errors.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:CONDITION START specifies triggering on start

of packet.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:CONDITION? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:CONDITION ERROR, indicating the bus
is triggering on errors.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType
This command sets or queries the error type to be used when triggering on SENT
data.

Conditions Requires option 5SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus trigger condition is set to ERRor.

Group Trigger

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-615

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType CRC

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

CRC specifies triggering on CRC errors.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:ERRTYPE CRC sets the bus to trigger on CRC errors.

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:ERRTYPE? might return

:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:ERRTYPE CRC to indicate the bus is triggering
on CRC errors.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType:CRC
This command sets or queries the CRC error type to be used when triggering
on SENT data.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus trigger condition is set to ERRor.
The ERRType is set to CRC.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType:CRC {FAST|SLOW}

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType:CRC?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

FAST specifies triggering on CRC errors in only the Fast Channel.

SLOW specifies triggering on CRC errors in only the slow channel.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:ERRTYPE:CRC FAST sets the bus to trigger on Fast

Channel CRC errors.

2-616 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:ERRTYPE:CRC? might return

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:ERRTYPE:CRC FAST to indicate that the
bus is triggering on Fast Channel CRC errors.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high binary fast channel 1 value to use when
triggering on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue <QString>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Bus<x> is the bus identifier number.

<Qstring> sets the Fast Channel 1 binary data high value.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B12:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue "XXXXXXXXXXXX"

sets the SENT bus B12 Fast Channel 1 high value to XXXXXXXXXXXX, or
"don't care."
TRIGger:A:BUS:B3:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B3:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALUE "0101XXXX1111",
indicating the SENT bus B3 Fast Channel 1 high is set to the binary value
0101XXXX1111.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on SENT
fast packet bus data for device channel 1.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to FAST.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-617

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|
LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALifier?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALue

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

EQUal sets the qualifier as Equal.

LESSEQual sets the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

LESSThan sets the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREEQual sets the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

MOREThan sets the qualifier as More Than.

UNEQual sets the qualifier as Unequal.

INrange sets the qualifier to inside a range.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to outside a range.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALIFIER UNEQUAL sets the fast

channel 1 data qualifier trigger to not equal for bus 2.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B5:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALIFIER? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALIFIER MOREEQUAL to
indicate that the fast channel 1 data qualifier trigger is set to greater than or equal
for bus 5.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary fast channel 1 value to be used when
triggering on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The search trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Trigger

2-618 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALue <Qstring>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:QUALifier

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<Qstring> is the Fast Channel 1 value on which to trigger.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXX" sets the

Fast Channel 1 value to trigger on XXXXXXXXXXXX, or "don't care."
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A:VALUE "0000XXXX1111" to
indicate the Fast Channel 1 binary trigger value is 0000XXXX1111.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high binary fast channel 2 value to use when
triggering on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue <QString>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Bus<x> is the bus identifier number.

<Qstring> sets the Fast Channel 2 high binary data value.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B2:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue "100000000000" sets

the SENT bus B2 Fast Channel 2 high value to 100000000000.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-619

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:A:BUS:B4:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue? might return

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B4:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALUE "0101XXXX1111",
indicating the SENT bus B4 Fast Channel 2 high is set to the binary value
0101XXXX1111.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on SENT
fast packet bus data for device channel 2.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|
LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:QUALifier?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALue

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

EQUal sets the qualifier as Equal.

LESSEQual sets the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

LESSThan sets the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREEQual sets the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

MOREThan sets the qualifier as More Than.

UNEQual sets the qualifier as Unequal.

INrange sets the qualifier to inside a range.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to outside a range.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:QUALIFIER UNEQUAL sets the fast

channel 2 data qualifier trigger to not equal for bus 2.

2-620 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B5:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:QUALIFIER? might return

TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:QUALIFIER MOREEQUAL to
indicate that the fast channel 2 data qualifier trigger is set to greater than or equal
for bus 5.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary fast channel 2 value to be used when
triggering on a SENT bus signal. The trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The search condition must be set to FAST.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALue <Qstring>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSE:QUALifier

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<Qstring> is the Fast Channel 2 binary value on which to trigger.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALUE "111111111111" sets the

Fast Channel 2 value on which to trigger to 111111111111.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B:VALUE "000000000000" to
indicate the Fast Channel 2 binary value on which to trigger is 000000000000.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high binary fast message counter value to be
used when triggering on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to FAST.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-621

Commands listed in alphabetical order

The number of channels must be set to 1.

The nibble count must be set to 6.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:HIVALue <QString>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:HIVALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel
BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount

Arguments Bus<x> is the bus identifier number.

<Qstring> sets the Fast Channel 1 counter binary value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX" sets the

Fast Channel 1 secure counter high value to "don't care."
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B3:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:HIVALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B3:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:HIVALUE "11110000" to
indicate a binary value of 11110000.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on SENT
fast packet bus data for the secure format counter.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:
QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|LESSthan|MOREthan|
LESSEQual|MOREEQual|INrange|OUTrange}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:QUALifier?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

2-622 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:VALue

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus.

EQUal sets the qualifier as Equal.

LESSEQual sets the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

LESSThan sets the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREEQual sets the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

MOREThan sets the qualifier as More Than.

UNEQual sets the qualifier as Unequal.

INrange sets the qualifier to inside a range.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to outside a range.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:QUALIFIER UNEQUAL sets the

fast channel 2 counter qualifier trigger to not equal for bus 2.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B5:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:QUALIFIER? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:QUALIFIER MOREEQUAL to
indicate that the fast channel 2 counter qualifier trigger is set to greater than or
equal for bus 5.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary fast message counter value to be used
when triggering on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The search condition must be set to FAST.
The number of channels must be set to 1.
The nibble count must be set to 6.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:VALue <Qstring>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-623

Commands listed in alphabetical order

BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount
BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<Qstring> is the Fast Channel 1 fast message counter binary value on which
to trigger.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:VALUE "XXXXXXXX" sets the Fast

Channel 1 fast message counter value to "don't care."
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:COUNTER:VALUE "00001111" to indicate
the Fast Channel 1 fast message counter binary value on which to trigger is
00001111.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBble:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary fast message inverted nibble value to be
used when triggering on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The search condition must be set to FAST.
The number of channels must be set to 1.
The nibble count must be set to 6.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBble:VALue <Qstring>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBble:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount
BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<Qstring> is the Fast Channel 1 inverted nibble binary value on which to trigger.

2-624 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBBLE:VALUE "XXXX" sets the

Fast Channel 1 secure inverted nibble value to "don't care."
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBBLE:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBBLE:VALUE "1111" to
indicate a binary value of 1111.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:STATus:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary status value to be used when triggering
on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The search trigger condition must be set to FAST.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:STATus:VALue <Qstring>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:STATus:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

Arguments B<x> is the number of the bus waveform.

<Qstring> is the binary status value on which to trigger.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:STATus:VALue "XXXX" sets the binary

status trigger value to XXXX.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:STATUS:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:FAST:STATUS:VALUE "1010" to indicate a
binary trigger value is 1010.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSE:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the qualifier to be used when triggering on SENT
pause pulses.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to PAUSE.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-625

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSE:QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|

LESSthan|MOREthan|LESSEQual|MOREEQual|Inrange|OUTrange}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSE:QUALifier?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKs:HIVALue
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:PAUSE:TICKs:VALue

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

EQUal sets the qualifier as Equal.

INrange sets the qualifier to in range.

LESSEQual sets the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

LESSThan sets the qualifier as Less Than.

MOREEQual sets the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

MOREThan sets the qualifier as More Than.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to out of range.

UNEQual sets the qualifier as Unequal.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SENT:PAUSE:QUALifier UNEQUAL sets the pause pulse

qualifier trigger to not equal for bus 2.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:PAUSE:QUALIFIER? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:PAUSE:QUALIFIER INRANGE to indicate that
the pause pulse qualifier is set to trigger inside the range of ticks low and ticks
high on bus 1.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALue
This command sets or queries the high binary Slow channel data value to use
when triggering on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN.

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to SLOW.

2-626 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALue <QString>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

Arguments Bus<x> is the bus identifier number.

<Qstring> sets the binary Slow channel data value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX" sets the Slow

data high value to "don't care."
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALUE? might return
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:SLOW:DATA:HIVALUE "11110001", to indicate
triggering on Slow data values that match 11110001.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALifier
This command sets or queries the binary identifier value to use when triggering
on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to SLOW.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALifier {EQual|UNEQual|

LESSthan|MOREthan|LESSEQual|MOREEQual}
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALifier?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

EQUal specifies the qualifier as Equal.

UNEQual specifies the qualifier as Not Equal to.

LESSthan specifies the qualifier as Less Than.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-627

Commands listed in alphabetical order

MOREthan specifies the qualifier as More Than.

LESSEQual specifies the qualifier as Less Than or Equal to.

MOREEQual specifies the qualifier as More Than or Equal to.

INrange sets the qualifier to inside a range.

OUTrange sets the qualifier to outside a range.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B2:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALIFIER LESSEQUAL sets the

slow channel data qualifier to less than or equal for bus 2.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B5:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALIFIER? might return
:TRIGger:A:BUS:B5:SENT:SLOW:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL to indicate that
the slow channel data qualifier is set to equal on bus 5.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALue
This command sets or queries the binary slow channel value to use when
triggering on a SENT bus signal.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to SLOW.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALue <Qstring>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

<Qstring> is the binary slow channel data value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX" sets the slow

data value to "don't care" for bus 2.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B4:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B4:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALUE "XXXX1111", to indicate
triggering on slow data values that match XXXX1111 on bus 4.

2-628 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:IDentifier:VALue
This command sets or queries the qualifier to use when triggering on SENT slow
packet bus data.

Conditions Requires option SRAUTOSEN

The SENT bus trigger condition must be set to SLOW.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:IDentifier:VALue <Qstring>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:IDentifier:VALue

Related Commands TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA:VALue

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

<Qstring> is the binary identifier value.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:B3:SENT:SLOW:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXX" sets the

identifier value to "don't care" for bus 3.
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:SLOW:IDENTIFIER:VALUE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SENT:SLOW:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "0001" to indicate
the slow channel identifier is set to 0001 on bus 1.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition
This command specifies the trigger condition for a SPI trigger. The bus number
is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition {SS|STARTofframe|DATa}

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-629

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime

BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

SS specifies the Slave Selection condition.

STARTofframe is applicable when BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING is set to

IDLEtime. When the trigger condition is set to STARTofframe, the instrument
triggers on the first SPI clock after an idle time when there are no clocks.
DATa sets the trigger condition to Master-In Slave-Out and Master-Out Slave-In.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe
This command specifies the length of the data string to be used for a SPI trigger if
the trigger condition is DATa. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe <NR1>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe?

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

<NR1> is the length of the data string in bytes.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATa:SIZe 1 sets the data size to 1 byte.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATa:SIZe? might return

:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SIZE 1 indicating the data size is
1 byte.

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:VALue
This command specifies the binary data string used for SPI triggering if the trigger
condition is DATA. The bus number is specified by x.

Conditions Requires option 2-SERIAL or 2-ULTIMATE.

2-630 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:VALue <QString>

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:VALue?

Arguments B<x> is the bus identifier number.

<QString> specifies the data value in the specified valid format. The valid
characters are 0, 1, and X for binary format.

Examples TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATa:VALue "11011010" sets the data value to

11011010.
TRIGger:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATa:VALue? might return
:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX" indicating
the data value is XXXXXXXX.

TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the source bus for a bus trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce B<x>

TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce?

Arguments B<x> sets the selected source to the bus.

Examples TRIGGER:A:BUS:SOURCE B2 sets the selected source for the bus trigger to Bus 2.

TRIGGER:A:BUS:SOURCE? might return TRIGGER:A:BUS:SOURCE B1,

indicating that the selected source for the bus trigger is set to Bus 1.

TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling
This command sets or queries the type of coupling for the edge trigger. This
command is equivalent to selecting Edge from the Trigger Type drop-down in the
Trigger setup context menu, and choosing from the Coupling drop-down list.

Group Trigger

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-631

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling {DC|HFRej|LFRej|NOISErej}

TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce

TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe

Arguments DC selects DC trigger coupling, which passes all input signals to the trigger
circuitry.
HFRej coupling attenuates signals above 50 kHz before passing the signals to the
trigger circuitry.
LFRej coupling attenuates signals below 80 kHz before passing the signals to the
trigger circuitry.
NOISErej coupling provides stable triggering by increasing the trigger hysteresis.
Increased hysteresis reduces the trigger sensitivity to noise but can require greater
trigger signal amplitude.

Examples TRIGGER:A:EDGE:COUPLING DC sets the A edge trigger coupling to DC.

TRIGGER:A:EDGE:COUPLING? might return :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:COUPLING

DC, indicating that the A edge trigger coupling is set to DC.

TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe
This command sets or queries the slope for the edge trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting Edge from the Trigger Type drop-down in the Trigger
setup context menu, and then choosing the desired Slope. This command is also
equivalent to pressing the front-panel Slope button.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe {RISe|FALL|EITher}

TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce

TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling

Arguments RISe specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal.

FALL specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal.

2-632 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

EITHER specifies to trigger on either the rising or falling edge of a signal.

Examples TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE RISE sets the A edge trigger slope to positive, which
triggers on the rising edge of the signal.
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE? might return :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE FALL,
indicating that the A edge trigger slope is negative.

TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the source for the edge trigger. For instruments that
have an Auxiliary Input, AUXiliary can be selected as trigger source.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce {CH<x>| DCH<x>_D<x>| INTernal|

AUXiliary}
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe

TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the edge trigger source.

DCH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel as the edge trigger source. The

supported digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are 0 to 15.
INTernal specifies a internal edge trigger source.

AUXiliary specifies the Auxiliary Input.

Examples TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH2 sets the A edge trigger source to input

channel 2.
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE? might return :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1,
indicating that the A edge trigger source is set to input channel 1.

TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>
This command sets or queries the CH<x> trigger level for an Edge, Pulse Width,
Runt or Rise/Fall (Transition and Slew Rate) trigger when triggering on an analog
channel waveform. Each channel can have an independent trigger level. The <x>
is the channel number.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-633

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x> <NR3>

TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the trigger level in user units (usually volts).

Examples TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH1 1.5 sets the A trigger level for Channel 1 to 1.5 V.

TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH2? might return :TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH2

1.3000E+00, indicating that the A trigger level for Channel 2 is set to 1.3 V.

TRIGger:A:LOGIc:DELTatime
This command specifies or queries the Logic trigger delta time value. The time
value is used as part of the Logic trigger condition to determine if the duration of
a logic pattern meets the specified time constraints.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:LOGIc:DELTatime <NR3>

TRIGger:A:LOGIc:DELTatime?

Arguments <NR3> the Logic trigger delta time value.

Examples TRIGger:A:LOGIc:DELTatime 4.5e-9 sets the delta time to 4.5 ns.

TRIGger:A:LOGIc:DELTatime? might return

:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:DELTATIME 4.0E-9 indicating the delta time is set to
4 ns.

TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion
This command sets or queries the logical combination of the input channels for
logic triggers. This command is equivalent to selecting Logic for the Trigger
Type, and setting or viewing the Define Logic.

Group Trigger

2-634 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion {AND|NANd|NOR|OR}

TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion?

Arguments AND specifies to trigger if all conditions are true.

NANd specifies to trigger if any of the conditions are false.

NOR specifies to trigger if all conditions are false.

OR specifies to trigger if any of the conditions are true.

Examples TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION AND sets the logical combination of channels to

be true when all conditions are true.
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION? might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION
NAND, indicating that the instrument will trigger if the AND logic conditions
are false.

TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command specifies the channel to use as the clock source for logic trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH<x>|DCH<x>_D<x>}

TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the clock source. Number of channels
depends on instrument configuration.
DCH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel as the clock source. The supported
digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are 0 to 15.

Examples TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce CH3 sets the clock source to

channel 3.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce? might return
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CLOCK:SOURCE CH3 indicating the clock source is
set to channel 3.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-635

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:A:LOGIc:POLarity
This command sets or queries the polarity for the clock channel when Use Clock
Edge is set to Yes for Logic trigger type.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:LOGIc:POLarity {POSitive|NEGative|EITher}

TRIGger:A:LOGIc:POLarity?

Arguments NEGative specifies negative polarity.

POSITIVe specifies positive polarity.

EITher specifies either polarity.

Examples TRIGger:A:LOGIc:POLarity EITHER sets the polarity to either positive or

negative.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:POLarity? might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:POLARITY
POSITIVE indicating the polarity is set to positive.

TRIGger:A:LOGIc:USECLockedge
This command specifies whether or not Logic trigger type uses clock source.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:LOGIc:USECLockedge {OFF|ON|0|1}

TRIGger:A:LOGIc:USECLockedge?

Arguments ON specifies that logic trigger type uses clock source.

OFF specifies that logic trigger type does not use clock source.

<NR1> = 0 specifies that logic trigger type does not use clock source; any other
value uses clock source.

Examples TRIGger:A:LOGIc:USECLockedge OFF specifies that the clock edge will

not be used.

2-636 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:A:LOGIc:USECLockedge? might return

:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:USECLOCKEDGE 1 indicating that the clock edge will be
used.

TRIGger:A:LOGIc:WHEn
This command sets or queries the condition for generating an A or B logic trigger
with respect to the defined input pattern. This command is equivalent to selecting
Logic for Trigger Type, Use Clock Edge to No, and choosing a trigger condition
from the Logic Pattern drop-down list.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:LOGIc:WHEn {TRUe|FALSe|MOREThan|LESSThan|EQual|

UNEQual}
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:WHEn?

Arguments TRUe triggers on an input pattern that is true.

FALSe triggers on an input pattern that is false.

MOREthan triggers on an input pattern that is true for a time period greater than a
user defined Time Limit (DELTatime) value.
LESSthan triggers on an input pattern that is true for a time period less than a
user defined Time Limit (DELTatime) value.
EQual triggers on an input pattern that is true for a time period equal to a user
defined Time Limit (DELTatime) value.
UNEQual triggers on an input pattern that is true for a time period not equal to a
user defined Time Limit (DELTatime) value.

Examples TRIGger:A:LOGIc:WHEn EQual specifies triggering when the input pattern is

true for a time period equal to a user defined Time Limit value.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:WHEn? might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:WHEN TRUE
indicating a trigger when the logic is true.

TRIGger:A:LOGICPattern:CH<x>
This command sets or queries the Logic Pattern for the specified channel. This
command is used along with the Define Logic choice (LOGIc:FUNCtion) to
determine when the logic trigger occurs.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-637

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:LOGICPattern:CH<x> {HIGH|LOW|X}

TRIGger:A:LOGICPattern:CH<x>?

Arguments CH<x> specifies the channel.

HIGH specifies triggering when the pattern is high.

LOW specifies triggering when the pattern is low.

X specifies triggering when the pattern is high or low.

Examples TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:CH2 HIGH sets the triggering logic to

when pattern is high.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:CH2? might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:LOGICPATTERN:CH2 X indicating the state can
be high or low.

TRIGger:A:LOGICPattern:DCH<x>_D<x>
This command sets or queries the Logic Pattern for the specified digital channel.
This command is used along with the Define Logic choice (LOGIc:FUNCtion) to
determine when the logic trigger occurs.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:LOGICPattern:DCH<x>_D<x> {HIGH|LOW|X}

TRIGger:A:LOGICPattern:DCH<x>_D<x>?

Arguments DCH<x>_D<x> specifies the digital channel. The supported digital channel value
is 1. The supported digital bits values are 0 to 15.
HIGH specifies triggering when the pattern is high.

LOW specifies triggering when the pattern is low.

X specifies triggering when the pattern is high or low.

Examples TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:DCH1_D1 HIGH sets the triggering logic

to when pattern is high.

2-638 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LOGICPattern:DCH1_D1? might return

:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:LOGICPATTERN:DCH1_D1 X indicating the state can be
high or low.

TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>
This command sets or queries the A or B lower trigger level threshold for the
channel, specified by x.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> <NR3>

TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>

Arguments <NR3> specifies the threshold voltage in user units.

Examples TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH2 1.3 sets the A trigger threshold voltage

for Channel 2 to 1.3 V.
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH3? might return
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH3 1.2000E+00, indicating that the A trigger
threshold voltage for Channel 3 is 1.2 V.

TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit
This command specifies the upper limit to use, in seconds, when triggering on
detection of a pulse whose duration is inside or outside a range of two values. (Use
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit to specify the lower value of the range.)

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit <NR3>

TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn

TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-639

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that represents the higher value of the range.

Examples TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit 110.0E-9 sets the high limit to

110.0 ns.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit? might return
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:HIGHLIMIT 178.88000E-9 indicates
the high limit is set to 178.88 ns.

TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit
This command specifies the lower limit to use, in seconds, when triggering on
detection of a pulse whose duration is inside or outside a range of two values. (Use
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit to specify the upper limit of the range.)
This command also specifies the single limit to use, in seconds, when triggering
on detection of a pulse whose duration is less than, greater than, equal to, or not
equal to this time limit.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit <NR3>

TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn

TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that represents the lower value of the range.

Examples TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit 100.0E-9 sets the low limit to 100.0 ns.

TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit? might return

TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:LOWLIMIT 77.7600E-9 indicating the
low limit is set to 77.76 ns.

TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity
This command specifies the polarity for a pulse width trigger.

Group Trigger

2-640 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity {NEGative|POSitive}

TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity?

Arguments NEGative specifies a negative pulse.

POSitive specifies a positive pulse.

Examples TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity NEGATIVE sets the pulse polarity to

negative.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity? might return
TRIGGER:A:WIDTH:POLARITY POSITIVE indicating a positive pulse.

TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce
This command specifies the source waveform for a pulse width trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce {CH<x>|DCH<x>_D<x>}

TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog input channel as the pulse-width trigger source.

DCH<x>_D<x> specifies an digital input channel as the pulse-width trigger source.

The supported digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are
0 to 15.

Examples TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the pulse width

source.
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:SOURCE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:SOURCE CH1 indicating that channel 1 is the
pulse width trigger source.

TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn
This command specifies to trigger when a pulse is detected with a width (duration)
that is less than, greater than, equal to, or unequal to a specified value (set using
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit), OR whose width falls outside of or within
a specified range of two values (set using TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit
and TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit).

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-641

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn
{LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|WIThin|OUTside}
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit

TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce

Arguments LESSthan causes a trigger when a pulse is detected with a width less than the
time set by the TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit command.
MOREthan causes a trigger when a pulse is detected with a width greater than the
time set by the TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit command.
EQual causes a trigger when a pulse is detected with a width equal to the time
period specified in TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit within a ±5% tolerance.
UNEQual causes a trigger when a pulse is detected with a width
greater than or less than (but not equal) the time period specified in
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit within a ±5% tolerance.
WIThin causes a trigger when a pulse is detected that is within a range set by
two values.
OUTside causes a trigger when a pulse is detected that is outside of a range set
by two values.

Examples :TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn LESSthan causes the instrument to

trigger when a pulse is detected that is shorter than the time specified by
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn ? might return
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WHEN GREATER THAN 2.0000E-9, indicating that
a trigger is generated when a pulse is detected greater than 2 ns.
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn? might return
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn MOREthan indicating that a trigger is
generated when a pulse is detected that is greater than the time specified by
TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit.

TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity
This command specifies the polarity for the runt trigger.

2-642 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity {EITher|NEGative|POSitive}

TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity?

Arguments POSitive indicates that the rising edge crosses the low threshold and the falling
edge recrosses the low threshold without either edge ever crossing the high
threshold.
NEGative indicates that the falling edge crosses the high threshold and the
rising edge recrosses the high threshold without either edge ever crossing the
low threshold.
EITher triggers on a runt of either polarity.

Examples TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity NEGATIVE specifies that the polarity of the A

pulse runt trigger is negative.
TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity? might return :TRIGGER:A:RUNT:POLARITY
POSITIVE indicating that the polarity of the A pulse runt trigger is positive.

TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce
This command specifies the source waveform for the runt trigger.

NOTE. Digital channels are not supported as runt trigger sources.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce {CH<x>}

TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce?

Arguments CH<x> specifies the analog channel number to use as the source waveform for the
runt trigger. To specify the threshold levels when using CH<x> as the source, use
TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> and TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>.

Examples TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce CH4 sets channel 4 as the trigger source.

TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce? might return :TRIGGER:A:RUNT:SOURCE CH2

indicating that channel 2 is the trigger source.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-643

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn
This command specifies the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when
it detects a runt.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn {LESSthan|MOREthan|EQual|UNEQual|OCCURS}

TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth

Arguments OCCURS sets the instrument to trigger if a runt signal of any detectable width
occurs.
LESSthan sets the instrument to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width
less than the time set by the TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth command.
MOREthan sets the instrument to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width
greater than the time set by the TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth command.
EQual sets the instrument to trigger if a runt pulse is detected with width equal to
the time period specified in TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth within a ±5% tolerance.
NOTEQual sets the instrument to trigger if a runt pulse is detected with
width greater than or less than (but not equal to) the time period specified in
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth within a ±5% tolerance.

Examples TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn MORETHAN sets the runt trigger to occur when the
instrument detects a runt in a pulse wider than the specified width.
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn? might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN
OCCURS indicating that a runt trigger will occur if the instrument detects a runt of
any detectable width.

TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth
This command specifies the width, in seconds, for a runt trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth <NR3>

TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth?

2-644 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that specifies the minimum width, in seconds.

Examples TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth 15E-6 sets the minimum width of the pulse runt
trigger to 15 µs.
TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth? might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WIDTH
2.0000E-09 indicating that the minimum width of a pulse runt trigger is 2 ns.

TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
This command specifies the clock edge polarity for setup and hold triggering.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE {FALL|RISe}

TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE?

Arguments FALL specifies polarity as the clock falling edge.

RISe specifies polarity as the clock rising edge.

Examples TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE RISE specifies the polarity as the clock

rising edge.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE? might return
:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE indicating that polarity is specified
as the clock rising edge.

TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
This command specifies the clock source for the setup and hold triggering. You
cannot specify the same source for both clock and data.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH<x>|DCH<x>_D<x>}

TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce?

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-645

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments CH<x> specifies the analog channel to use as the clock source waveform.

DCH<x>_D<x> specifies the digital channel to use as the clock source waveform.
The supported digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are
0 to 15.

Examples TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce CH1 specifies channel 1 as the clock

source for a setup and hold trigger operation.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce? might return
:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH4 indicating that channel
4 is the clock source for a setup and hold trigger operation.

TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime
This command specifies the hold time for setup and hold violation triggering.
This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu
and then setting the desired Hold Time.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime <NR3>

TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime?

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that specifies the hold time setting, in seconds.
Positive values for hold time occur after the clock edge. Negative values occur
before the clock edge.

Examples TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime 3.0E-3 sets the hold time for the setup and
hold trigger to 3 ms.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime? might return
:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 2.0000E-09 indicating that the current
hold time for the setup and hold trigger is 2 ns.

TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime
This command specifies the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering.
This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu
and then setting the desired Setup Time.

Group Trigger

2-646 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime <NR3>

TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime?

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that specifies the setup time for setup and hold
violation triggering.

Examples TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime 3.0E-6 specifies that the current setup time

for setup and hold trigger is 3 µs.
TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime? might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:SETTIME 2.0000E-09 indicating that the
current setup time for setup and hold trigger is 2 ns.

TRIGGER:A:SETHOLDLOGICVAL:DCH<x>_D<x>
This command sets or queries the conditions used for generating an A logic
pattern, with respect to the defined input pattern, and identifies the time that the
selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger.

Group Search and Mark

Syntax TRIGGER:A:SETHOLDLOGICVAL:DCH<x>_D<x> {INCLude|DONTInclude}

TRIGGER:A:SETHOLDLOGICVAL:DCH<x>_D<x>?

Arguments DCH<x>_D<x> specifies the digital channel to use as the clock source waveform.
The supported digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are
0 to 15.
INCLude specifies including the specified digital channel SETHOLD inputs.

DONTInclude specifies not including the specified digital channel SETHOLD

inputs.

Examples TRIGGER:A:SETHOLDLOGICVAL:DCH1_D0 INCLUDE specifies including the

specified digital channel SETHOLD inputs.
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLDLOGICVAL:DCH1_D0? might return
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLDLOGICVAL:DCH1_D0 DONTINCLUDE indicating
the specified digital channel SETHOLD inputs will not be included.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-647

Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity
When triggering using the TIMEOut trigger type, this commands specifies the
polarity to be used.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity {STAYSHigh|STAYSLow|EITher}

TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce

TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe

Arguments STAYSHigh — Trigger when the signal stays high during the timeout time
specified by the command TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe.
STAYSLow — Trigger when the signal stays low during the timeout time
specified by the command TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe.
EITher — Trigger when the signal is either high or low during the timeout time
specified by the command TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe.

Examples TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity STAYSHigh specifies to trigger when the

signal stays high during the timeout time when triggering using the TIMEOut
trigger type.
TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity? might return EITHER, indicating that the
signal stays either high or low during the timeout time.

TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce
When triggering using the TIMEOut trigger type, this command specifies the
source. The available sources are live channels and digital channels. The default is
channel 1. The timeout trigger type is selected using TRIGger:A:TYPe TIMEOut.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce {CH<x>|DCH<x>_D<x>}

TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce?

Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce

2-648 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe
TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity

Arguments CH<x> specifies an analog channel as the timeout trigger source.

DCH<x>_D<x> specifies a digital channel as the timeout trigger source. The

supported digital channel value is 1. The supported digital bit values are 0 to 15.

Examples TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce CH4 specifies to use channel 4 as the source

for the timeout trigger.
TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce? might return CH1, indicating that channel 1 has
been set as the source for the timeout trigger.

TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe
When triggering using the TIMEOut trigger type, this command specifies the
timeout time, in seconds. This command is equivalent to selecting Timeout from
the Trig menu and setting a value for Time Limit. The timeout trigger type is
selected using TRIGger:A:TYPe TIMEOut

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe <NR3>

TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity

TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce

Arguments <NR3> is a floating point number that specifies the timeout time, in seconds.

Examples :TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe 4.0E-9 specifies the timeout time of 4.0 nsec.

:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe? might return 8.0000E-9.

TRIGger:A:TYPe
This command sets or queries the type of A trigger.

Group Trigger

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-649

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax TRIGger:A:TYPe {EDGE| WIDth| RISE| FALL| TIMEOut| RUNt|

LOGIc| SETHold| BUS}
TRIGger:A:TYPe?

Arguments EDGE is a normal trigger. A trigger event occurs when a signal passes through
a specified voltage level in a specified direction and is controlled by the
TRIGger:A:EDGE commands.
WIDth specifies that the trigger occurs when a pulse with a specified width is
found.
RISE specifies that the trigger occurs when a pulse with a specified rise is found.

FALL specifies that the trigger occurs when a pulse with a specified fall is found.

TIMEOut specifies that a trigger occurs when a pulse with the specified timeout
is found.
RUNt specifies that a trigger occurs when a pulse with the specified parameters
is found.
LOGIc specifies that a trigger occurs when specified conditions are met and is
controlled by the TRIGger:A:LOGIc commands.
SETHold specifies that a trigger occurs when a signal is found that meets the
setup and hold parameters.
BUS specifies that a trigger occurs when a signal is found that meets the specified
bus setup parameters.

Examples TRIGGER:A:TYPE EDGE sets the A trigger type to EDGE.

TRIGGER:A:TYPE? might return :TRIGGER:A:TYPE RUNT indicating that the A

trigger type is a runt trigger.

TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>
This command sets or queries the specified channel upper trigger level. The
CH<x> range is 1 to 4 and depends on the number of analog channels on your
instrument.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> <NR3>

TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>

2-650 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments <NR3> specifies the trigger level in user units (usually volts).

Examples TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH1 1.3 This command sets the A trigger level

for Channel 1 to 1.3 V level.
TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH2? might return
TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH2 1.3000E+00, indicating that the A trigger
level for Channel 2 is set to 1.3 V.

TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe
This command sets or queries the A trigger holdoff time. This command is
equivalent to selecting Mode & Holdoff from the Trig menu, selecting Time, and
then setting the desired Holdoff Time.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe <NR3>

TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe?

Arguments <NR3> specifies the holdoff time in seconds. The range is from 0 seconds through
10 seconds.

Examples TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:TIME 10 sets the A trigger holdoff time to 10 s.

TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:TIME? might return :TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFFTIME

1.2000E-06, indicating that the A trigger holdoff time is set to 1.2 µs.

TRIGger:A:MODe
This command sets or queries the A trigger mode. This command is equivalent to
pushing the Mode button on the front panel.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:A:MODe {AUTO|NORMal}

TRIGger:A:MODe?

Arguments AUTO generates a trigger if one is not detected within a specified time period.

NORMal waits for a valid trigger event.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-651

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples TRIGGER:A:MODE NORMAL sets the trigger mode to normal.

TRIGGER:A:MODE? might return TRIGGER:A:MODE AUTO, indicating that the

trigger mode is auto.

TRIGger:AUXLevel
This command sets or queries the Auxiliary Input voltage level to use for an
edge trigger.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:AUXLevel {<NR3>|ECL|TTL}

TRIGger:AUXLevel?

Arguments <NR3> is trigger level in Volts.

ECL sets trigger level to -1.3 Volts.

TTL sets trigger level to 1.4 Volts.

Returns <NR3> is trigger level in Volts.

Examples TRIGger:AUXLevel 1.2 sets trigger level for the Auxiliary Input to 1.2 Volts.

TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:STATe
This command enables or disables user-defined trigger hysteresis.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:STATe {ON|OFF|1|0}

TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:STATe?

Related Commands TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:VALue

Arguments ON enables user-defined trigger hysteresis.

OFF disables user-defined trigger hysteresis.

1 enables user-defined trigger hysteresis.

2-652 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

0 disables user-defined trigger hysteresis.

Examples TRIGGER:HYSTERESIS:USER:STATE ON enables user-defined trigger hysteresis.

TRIGGER:HYSTERESIS:USER:STATE? might return

TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:STATe 0, indicating that the user-defined trigger
hysteresis is disabled.

TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:VALue
This command sets or returns the height of the user-defined trigger hysteresis
zone in volts.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:VALue <NR1>

TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:VALue?

Related Commands TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:STATe

Arguments <NR1> sets the height of the hysteresis zone in volts.

Examples TRIGGER:HYSTERESIS:USER:VALUE 27.0e-3 sets the height of the hysteresis

zone to 27 mV.
TRIGGER:HYSTERESIS:USER:VALUE? might return
TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:VALue 27.0e-3, indicating that the height of
the hysteresis zone is 27 mV.

TRIGger:STATE? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the current state of the triggering system.

Group Trigger

Syntax TRIGger:STATE?

Related Commands TRIGger:A:MODe

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-653

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Returns ARMED indicates that the instrument is acquiring pretrigger information.

AUTO indicates that the instrument is in the automatic mode and acquires data
even in the absence of a trigger.
READY indicates that all pretrigger information is acquired and that the instrument
is ready to accept a trigger.
SAVE indicates that the instrument is in save mode and is not acquiring data.

TRIGGER indicates that the instrument triggered and is acquiring the post trigger
information.

Examples TRIGGER:STATE? might return TRIGGER:STATE ARMED, indicating that the

pretrigger data is being acquired.

*TST? (Query Only)

Tests (self-test) the interface and returns a 0.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax *TST?

Examples *TST? always returns 0.

UNDO (No Query Form)

Reverts the instrument settings to a state before the previous command or user
interface action.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax UNDO

Examples UNDO reverts the instrument settings to a state before the previous command or
user interface action.

2-654 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

UNLock (No Query Form)

This command (no query form) unlocks the front panel controls only. To unlock
the front panel controls and the touch screen use the LOCk NONe command. The
command TOUCHSCReen:STATE ON enables the touch screen only.

NOTE. If the instrument is in the Remote With Lockout State (RWLS), the UNLock
command has no effect. For more information, see the ANSI-IEEE Std 488.1-1987
Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation, section 2.8.3 on
RL State Descriptions.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax UNLock ALL

Related Commands LOCk

Arguments ALL specifies that all front panel buttons and knobs are unlocked.

Examples UNLOCK ALL unlocks all front panel buttons and knobs.

USBDevice:CONFigure
This command may be used to configure the rear USB port to be off or enabled
as a USBTMC device. Users should be cautious using this command via the
USBTMC interface as a change to the configuration of this interface from a
USBTMC device will cause USBTMC communication to cease. It is intended to
be used via the Ethernet interface to control the USB device interface.

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax USBDevice:CONFigure {DISabled|USBTmc}

USBDevice:CONFigure?

Arguments DISabled will disable the rear USB port.

USBTmc enables the rear USB port.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-655

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples USBDEVICE:CONFIGURE DISABLED will disable the rear USB port.

USBDEVICE:CONFIGURE? might return :USBDEVICE:CONFIGURE USBTMC

indicating the USB port is enabled.

VERBose
This command sets or queries the Verbose state that controls the length of
keywords on query responses. Keywords can be both headers and arguments.

NOTE. This command does not affect IEEE Std 488.2-1987 Common Commands
(those starting with an asterisk).

Group Miscellaneous

Syntax VERBose {<NR1>|OFF|ON}

Related Commands HEADer

*LRN?
SET?

Arguments <NR1> = 0 disables Verbose, any other value enables Verbose.

OFF sets the Verbose state to false, which returns minimum-length keywords
for applicable setting queries.
ON sets the Verbose state to true, which returns full-length keywords for applicable
setting queries.
A 0 returns minimum-length keywords for applicable setting queries; any other
value returns full-length keywords.

Examples VERBOSE ON sets the Verbose state to true and return the full length keyword for
the applicable setting queries.
VERBOSE? might return :VERBOSE OFF, indicating that the Verbose state is set to
false and return the minimum-length keywords for the applicable setting queries.
With :HEADer ON and :VERBose ON, the :ACQuire:MODe? query might
return: :ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
With :HEADer ON and :VERBose OFF, the :ACQuire:MODe? query might
return: :ACQ:MOD SAM

2-656 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

With :HEADer OFF and :VERBose ON, the :ACQuire:MODe? query might
return: SAMPLE
With :HEADer OFF and :VERBose OFF, the :ACQuire:MODe? query might
return: SAM

VERTical:DESKew:FROM:CUSTOMPROPAgation
This command sets or queries a target (FROM) delay that you can specify when
the propagation delay of the target (FROM) probe used for deskew cannot be
detected automatically.

Group Vertical

Syntax VERTical:DESKew:FROM:CUSTOMPROPAgation <NR3>

VERTical:DESKew:FROM:CUSTOMPROPAgation?

Arguments <NR3> is a target (FROM) delay that you can specify when the propagation delay
of the target (FROM) probe used for deskew cannot be detected automatically.

Examples VERTICAL:DESKEW:FROM:CUSTOMPROPAGATION 0.25e-9 sets the custom

delay to 250 ps.
VERTICAL:DESKEW:FROM:CUSTOMPROPAGATION? might return
:VERTICAL:DESKEW:FROM:CUSTOMPROPAGATION 0.0E+0 indicating the
custom delay is 0.0 s.

VERTical:DESKEW:FROM:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the source channel for performing
channel-to-channel deskew adjustment. Sources can be any of the analog
channels.

Group Vertical

Syntax VERTical:DESKEW:FROM:SOUrce CH<x>

VERTical:DESKEW:FROM:SOUrce?

Arguments The vertical deskew source.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-657

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples VERTICAL:DESKEW:FROM:SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the from source.

VERTICAL:DESKEW:FROM:SOURCE? might return

:VERTICAL:DESKEW:FROM:SOURCE CH2 indicating channel 2 is the from
source.

VERTical:DESKEW:STATIC (No Query Form)

This command executes static deskew using the deskew settings.

Group Vertical

Syntax VERTical:DESKEW:STATIC EXECute

Arguments EXECute will execute static deskew using the deskew settings.

Examples VERTICAL:DESKEW:STATIC EXECUTE will execute static deskew using the

deskew settings.

VERTical:DESKew:TO:CUSTOMPROPAgation
This command sets or queries a target (TO) delay that can be specified by the user
when the propagation delay of the target (TO) probe used for deskew cannot be
detected automatically.

Group Vertical

Syntax VERTical:DESKew:TO:CUSTOMPROPAgation <NR3>

Arguments <NR3> is a target (TO) delay that can be specified by the user when the propagation
delay of the target (TO) probe used for deskew cannot be detected automatically.

Examples VERTICAL:DESKEW:TO:CUSTOMPROPAGATION 0.25e-9 sets the custom

propagation to 250 ps.
VERTICAL:DESKEW:TO:CUSTOMPROPAGATION? might return
:VERTICAL:DESKEW:TO:CUSTOMPROPAGATION 0.0E+0 indicating the custom
propagation is set to 0.0 ns.

2-658 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

VERTical:DESKEW:TO:SOUrce
This command sets or queries the target channel for performing channel-to-channel
deskew adjustment. Target sources can be any of the live analog channels.

Group Vertical

Syntax VERTical:DESKEW:TO:SOUrce CH<x>

VERTical:DESKEW:TO:SOUrce?

Arguments Arguments are the live analog channels.

Examples VERTICAL:DESKEW:TO:SOURCE CH4 sets the deskew to source is channel 4.

VERTICAL:DESKEW:TO:SOURCE? might return

:VERTICAL:DESKEW:TO:SOURCE CH2 indicating the deskew to source is
channel 2.

*WAI (No Query Form)

The *WAI (Wait) command (no query form) prevents the instrument from
executing further commands or queries until all pending commands that generate
an OPC message are complete. This command allows you to synchronize the
operation of the instrument with your application program. For more information,
refer to Synchronization Methods.

Group Status and Error

Syntax *WAI

Related Commands BUSY?

*OPC

Examples *WAI prevents the instrument from executing any further commands or queries
until all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-659

Commands listed in alphabetical order

WAVFrm? (Query Only)

This query-only command provides the Tektronix standard waveform query
which returns the waveform preamble followed by the waveform data for the
source specified by :DATa:SOUrce using the :DATa settings for encoding, width,
and so forth.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WAVFrm?

Related Commands CURVe?

DATa:SOUrce
WFMOutpre?

Examples WAVFRM? might return the waveform data as: WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR

8;BN_FMT RI;BYT_NR 1; BYT_OR MSB;ENCDG ASC;NR_PT 500;PT_FMT
Y; PT_ORDER LINEAR;PT_OFF 0;XINCR 400.0000E-12; XZERO
0.0000;XUNIT "s";YMULT 4.0000E-3; YOFF 0.0000;YZERO
0.0000;YUNIT "V"; WFID "Ch1,DC coupling, 100.0mV/div,
200.0ns/div, 5000 points,Sampl mode".

WFMOutpre? (Query Only)

This query-only command queries the waveform formatting data for the
waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. The preamble components
are considered to be of two types; formatting and interpretation. The
formatting components are: ENCdg, BN_Fmt, BYT_Or, BYT_Nr, BIT_Nr.
The interpretation components are derived from the DATa:SOUrce specified
waveform.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre?

Examples WFMOUTPRE? might return the waveform formatting data as: WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR
2;BIT_NR 16;ENCDG BINARY;BN_FMT RI;BYT_OR MSB;WFID "Ch1,
DC coupling, 200.0mV/div, 10.00us/div, 1250 points, Sample
mode";NR_PT 1000;PT_FMT Y;XUNIT "s";XINCR 80.0000E-9;XZERO

2-660 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

0.0000;PT_OFF 625;YUNIT "V";YMULT 31.2500E-6;YOFF

0.0000;YZERO 0.0000;NR_FR 3.

WFMOutpre:ASC_Fmt? (Query Only)

This query returns the format for ASCII data transferred from the instrument.
No command form is provided as the format is determined by the data source
type. Some waveforms are normalized vector data where the data points are
8-byte doubles in floating point format whereas other formats are 1-byte or 2-byte
integers.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:ASC_Fmt?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt

WFMOutpre:ENCdg

Returns FP represents floating point ASCII data. The waveforms are normalized vector
data where the data points are 8-byte doubles in floating point format.
INTEGER represents signed integer ASCII data. The waveform data are 1-byte
or 2-byte integers.

Examples WFMOutpre:ASC_Fmt? might return WFMOUTPRE:ASC_FMT INTEGER

indicating the ASCII format is integer.

WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr
This command sets and queries the number of bits per waveform point that
outgoing waveforms contain, as specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. Note
that values will be constrained according to the underlying waveform data. This
specification is only meaningful when WFMOutpre:ENCdg is set to BIN and
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt is set to either RI or RP.

Group Waveform Transfer

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-661

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr <NR1>

WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt

WFMOutpre:ENCdg

Arguments <NR1> number of bits per data point can be 8 or 16.

Examples WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR 16 sets the number of bits per waveform point to 16 for
incoming RI and RP binary format data.
WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR? might return WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR 8, indicating that
outgoing RI or RP binary format data uses 8 bits per waveform point.

WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
This command sets or queries the format of binary data for outgoing waveforms
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt {RI|RP|FP}

WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

Arguments RI specifies signed integer data point representation.

RP specifies positive integer data point representation.

FP specifies floating point representation.

Examples WFMOUTPRE:BN_FMT FP specifies that outgoing waveform data will be in

single-precision binary floating point format.
WFMOUTPRE:BN_FMT? might return WFMOUTPRE:BN_FMT RI, indicating that the
outgoing waveform data is currently in signed integer format.

2-662 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
This command sets or queries the binary field data width (bytes per point) for the
waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. Note that values will be
constrained according to the underlying waveform data. This specification is only
meaningful when WFMOutpre:ENCdg is set to BIN, and WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
is set to either RI or RP.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr <NR1>

WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt

WFMOutpre:ENCdg

Arguments <NR1> is the number of bytes per data point and can be 1, 2 or 8. A value of 1 or
2 bytes per waveform point indicates channel data; 8 bytes per waveform point
indicate pixel map (fast acquisition) data.

Examples WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 1 sets the number of bytes per outgoing waveform data
point to 1, which is the default setting.
WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR? might return WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 2, indicating that
there are 2 bytes per outgoing waveform data point.

WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
This command sets or queries which byte of binary waveform data is transmitted
first, during a waveform data transfer, when data points require more than one byte.
This specification only has meaning when WFMOutpre:ENCdg is set to BIN.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:BYT_Or {LSB|MSB}

WFMOutpre:BYT_Or?

Related Commands WFMOutpre:ENCdg

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-663

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Arguments LSB specifies that the least significant byte will be transmitted first.

MSB specifies that the most significant byte will be transmitted first.

Examples WFMOUTPRE:BYT_OR MSB sets the most significant outgoing byte of waveform
data to be transmitted first.
WFMOUTPRE:BYT_OR? might return WFMOUTPRE:BYT_OR LSB, indicating that
the least significant data byte will be transmitted first.

WFMOutpre:CENTERFREQuency? (Query Only)

This query returns the center frequency of the outgoing waveform. The center
frequency is a precise frequency at the center of the display of the frequency
domain graticule. In many applications, it is a carrier frequency.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:CENTERFREQuency?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

Returns Returns the center frequency of the outgoing waveform, in Hertz.

Examples WFMOutpre:CENTERFREQuency? might return

WFMOutpre:CENTERFREQuency 1.0E+9, indicating a center frequency of 1
GHz.

WFMOutpre:DOMain? (Query Only)

This query returns the domain of the outgoing waveform, either TIMe or
FREQuency. If the domain is TIMe, it indicates that the data is to be treated as
integer information. If the domain is FREQuency, it indicates that the data is to be
treated as floating point information.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:DOMain?

2-664 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt

WFMOutpre:ENCdg

Returns Returns the domain of the outgoing waveform.

Examples WFMOUTPRE:DOMAIN? might return WFMOUTPRE:DOMAIN TIME, indicating that

the outgoing waveform is a time domain trace.
WFMOutpre:DOMain? might return WFMOutpre:DOMain FREQuency,
indicating that the outgoing waveform is one of the four Spectrum View
frequency domain traces (CH<x>_SV_NORMal, CH<x>_SV_AVErage,
CH<x>_SV_MINHOLD, or CH<x>_SV_MAXHOLD).

WFMOutpre:ENCdg
This command sets or queries the type of encoding for outgoing waveforms.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:ENCdg {ASCii|BINary}

WFMOutpre:ENCdg?

Related Commands DATa:ENCdg

WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt

Arguments ASCii specifies that the outgoing data is to be in ASCII format. Waveforms
internally stored as integers will be sent as <NR1> numbers, while those stored as
floating point will be sent as <NR3> numbers.
BINary specifies that outgoing data is to be in a binary format whose further
specification is determined by WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr,
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt and WFMOutpre:BYT_Or.

Examples WFMOUTPRE:ENCDG ASCii specifies that the outgoing waveform data will be
sent in ASCII format.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-665

Commands listed in alphabetical order

WFMOUTPRE:ENCDG? might return WFMOUTPRE:ENCDG BINary, indicating that

outgoing waveform data will be sent in binary format.

WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the number of points for the DATa:SOUrce
waveform that will be transmitted in response to a CURVe?? query.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?

Related Commands CURVe?

DATa
DATa:STARt
DATa:STOP
SAVe:WAVEform
SAVEON:WAVEform:FILEFormat

Examples WFMOUTPRE:NR_PT? might return WFMOUTPRE:NR_PT 5000, indicating that

there are 5000 data points to be sent.

WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the point format for the waveform specified by
the DATa:SOUrce command. The format specifies a set of equations describing
how the scale factors in the preamble are used to give meaning to the CURVe?
data points.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?

Related Commands CURVe?

DATa:SOUrce

2-666 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Examples WFMOUTPRE:PT_FMT? might return WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt ENV, indicating that

the waveform data is a series of min-max pairs.

WFMOutpre:PT_Off? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the trigger point relative to DATa:STARt for
the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.

NOTE. This returned value is the point immediately following the actual trigger.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:PT_Off?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

DATa:STARt
WFMOutpre:XZEro?

Examples WFMOUTPRE:PT_OFF? might return WFMOUTPRE:PT_OFF 251 specifying that

the trigger actually occurred between points 250 and 251.

WFMOutpre:PT_ORder? (Query Only)

This query-only command specifies whether the source waveform is Fast
Acquisition. A Fast Acquisition waveform is stored as a 500 (vertical) by
1000 (horizontal) point bitmap. Each point represents display intensity for that
screen location. Only CURVe? query functions are allowed on Fast Acquisition
waveforms. When the WFMOutpre:PT_ORder? query returns Row, this indicates
that the source is a Fast Acquisition waveform (and that each of 1000 possible
horizontal columns being transmitted contains 500 vertical points. Note: 500
might vary based on how many channels enabled from same FastAcq group.) and
waveform points are transmitted in the following order: left to right; then top to
bottom.
When the WFMOutpre:PT_ORder? query returns Linear, this indicates that the
source is not a Fast Acquisition waveform (and that each horizontal column being
sent contains only one vertical point). Note that waveform points are transmitted
in the following order: top to bottom, then left to right.

Group Waveform Transfer

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-667

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax WFMOutpre:PT_ORder?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

Examples WFMOUTPRE:PT_ORDER? might return WFMOUTPRE:PT_ORder ROW,

specifying that the waveform designated by the DATa:SOUrce waveform is a
Fast Acquisition waveform and CURve? is returning the PIXmap data for that
source.
WFMOUTPRE:PT_ORDER? might return WFMOUTPRE:PT_ORder LINEAR,
specifying that the source waveform is a non-Fast Acquisition waveform and
CURve? is returning the Vector data for that source.

WFMOutpre:RESample
This command sets or queries the resampling of outgoing waveform data.
This command is equivalent to setting DATa:RESample. Setting the
WFMOutpre:RESample value causes the corresponding DATa value to be
updated and vice versa.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:RESample <NR1>

WFMOutpre:RESample?

Related Commands DATa:RESample

Arguments <NR1> is the resampling rate. The default value is 1, which means every sample
is returned. A value of 2 returns every other sample, while a value of 3 returns
every third sample, and so on.

Examples WFMOUTPRE:RESAMPLE 1 sets the resampling to return all waveform data

samples.
WFMOUTPRE:RESAMPLE? might return WFMOUTPRE:RESAMPLE 4, indicating that
every forth sample of the waveform data is returned.

WFMOutpre:SPAN? (Query Only)

This query returns the frequency span of the outgoing waveform. The span is the
range of frequencies you can observe around the center frequency.

2-668 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:SPAN?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

Returns Returns the frequency span of the outgoing waveform, in Hertz.

Examples RF:SPAN? might return RF:SPAN 10.0000E+6, indicating the span is 10 MHz.

WFMOutpre:WFId? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns a string describing several aspects of the
acquisition parameters for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:WFId?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

Returns <QString> contains the following comma-separated fields documented in the

following tables:

Table 2-48: Waveform Suffixes

Field Description Examples
Source The source identification string as it appears in "CH1–8"
the front panel scale factor readouts. "Math<x>
"Ref<x>"
Coupling A string describing the vertical coupling of the "AC coupling"
waveform (the Source1 waveform in the case of "DC coupling"
Dual Waveform Math). "GND coupling"

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-669

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Table 2-48: Waveform Suffixes (cont.)

Field Description Examples
Vert Scale A string containing the vertical scale factor of "100.0 mV/div"
the unzoomed waveform. The numeric portion "20.00 dB/div"
will always be four digits. The examples cover "45.00 deg/div"
all known internal units. "785.4 mrad/div"
"500.0 μVs/div"
"10.00 kV/s/div"
"200.0 mV/div"
"50.00 unk/div"
Horiz Scale A string containing the horizontal scale factor of "100 ms/div"
the unzoomed waveform. The numeric portion "10.00 kHz/div"
will always be four digits. The examples cover "50.00 c/div"
all known internal units.
Record Length A string containing the number of waveform "500 points"
points available in the entire record. The "500000 points"
numeric portion is given as an integer.
Acquisition Mode A string describing the mode used to acquire "Sample mode"
the waveform. "Pk Detect mode"
"Hi Res mode"
"Envelope mode"
"Average mode"
Center Frequency A string containing the center frequency value “2.400GHz”
of the waveform.
Span A string containing the frequency span value of “20.00MHz”
the waveform.
Reference Level A string containing the reference level value of “1.000mW”
the waveform.

Examples WFMOUTPRE:WFID? might return WFMOUTPRE:WFID "Ch1, DC

coupling,100.0mVolts/div,500.0µs/div,500 points, Hi Res
mode".

WFMOutpre:WFMTYPe? (Query Only)

This query returns the type of the outgoing waveform.
The type of waveform that is being transferred in turn determines in which
window it will display on the instrument screen: (the Waveform View window or
Spectrum View window). Both the Analog and RF_TD arguments specify the time
domain window; the RF_RD argument specifies the frequency domain window.

Group Waveform Transfer

2-670 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax WFMOutpre:WFMTYPe?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

Returns Returns the type of the outgoing waveform:

ANALOG indicates a Channel or Math waveform.

SV_FD indicates a Spectrum View RF frequency domain waveform.

RF_TD indicates an RF time domain waveform.

Examples WFMOutpre:WFMTYPe? might return WFMOutpre:WFMTYPe CH<x>_SV_FD,

which indicates that the outgoing waveform is an RF frequency domain waveform
(CH<x>_SV_AVErage, CH<x>_SV_MAXHold, CH<x>_SV_MINHold, or
CH<x>_SV_NORMal).

WFMOutpre:XINcr? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the horizontal point spacing in units of
WFMOutpre:XUNit for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.
This value corresponds to the sampling interval.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:XINcr?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

WFMOutpre:XUNit?

Examples WFMOUTPRE:XINCR? might return WFMOUTPRE:XINCR 10.0000E-6, indicating

that the horizontal sampling interval is 10 µs/point (500 µs/div).

WFMOutpre:XUNit? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the horizontal units for the waveform specified
by the DATa:SOUrce command.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-671

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:XUNit?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

Examples WFMOUTPRE:XUNIT? might return WFMOUTPRE:XUNIT "HZ", indicating that the

horizontal units for the waveform are in Hertz.

WFMOutpre:XZEro? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the sub-sample time between the trigger
sample (designated by PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trigger for
the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. This value is in units
of WFMOutpre:XUNit.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.

NOTE. During steady state operation, when all control changes have settled and
triggers are arriving on a regular basis, this is the only part of the preamble that
changes on each acquisition.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:XZEro?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

WFMOutpre:XUNit?

Examples WFMOUTPRE:XZERO? might return WFMOUTPRE:XZERO 5.6300E-9, indicating

that the trigger actually occurred 5.63 ns before the trigger sample.

WFMOutpre:YMUlt? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing level
in units specified by WFMOutpre:YUNit for the waveform specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command. For those formats in which WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr is
important (all non-floating point formats), WFMOutpre:YMUlt? must take the
location of the binary point implied by BYT_NR into consideration.

2-672 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Commands listed in alphabetical order

An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:YMUlt?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

Examples WFMOUTPRE:YMULT? might return WFMOUTPRE:YMULT 4.0000E-3, indicating

that the vertical scale for the corresponding waveform is 100 mV/div.

WFMOutpre:YOFf? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the vertical offset of the source specified by
DATa:SOUrce. For this instrument family, the value returned is always 0.0 as the
offset is combined with the :YZEro value.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:YOFf?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr

Examples WFMOUTPRE:YOFF? might return WFMOUTPRE:YOFF -50.0000E+0, indicating

that the position indicator for the waveform was 50 digitizing levels (2 divisions)
below center screen.

WFMOutpre:YUNit? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the vertical units for the waveform specified by
the DATa:SOUrce command.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.

Group Waveform Transfer

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 2-673

Commands listed in alphabetical order

Syntax WFMOutpre:YUNit?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

Examples WFMOUTPRE:YUNIT? might return WFMOUTPRE:YUNIT "dB", indicating that the

vertical units for the waveform are measured in decibels.

WFMOutpre:YZEro? (Query Only)

This query-only command returns the combined vertical position and offset for the
source waveform specified by DATa:SOUrce. This represents a departure from
previous instruments where the :YZEro value represented the vertical position
in vertical units and the :YOFf value represented the vertical offset in digitizing
levels. For this instrument family, the value of :YOFf is always 0.0.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.

Group Waveform Transfer

Syntax WFMOutpre:YZEro?

Related Commands DATa:SOUrce

WFMOutpre:YUNit?

Examples WFMOUTPRE:YZERO? might return WFMOUTPRE:YZERO -100.0000E-3,

indicating that vertical offset is set to -100 mV.

2-674 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Status and Events
The instrument provides a status and event reporting system for the Ethernet
and USB interfaces. This system informs you of certain significant events that
occur within the instrument.
The instrument status handling system consists of five 8-bit registers and two
queues for each interface. The remaining Status subtopics describe these registers
and components. They also explain how the event handling system operates.

Registers
Overview The registers in the event handling system fall into two functional groups:
Status Registers contain information about the status of the instrument. They
include the Standard Event Status Register (SESR).
Enable Registers determine whether selected types of events are reported to
the Status Registers and the Event Queue. They include the Device Event
Status Enable Register (DESER), the Event Status Enable Register (ESER),
and the Service Request Enable Register (SRER).

Status Registers The Standard Event Status Register (SESR) and the Status Byte Register (SBR)
record certain types of events that may occur while the instrument is in use. IEEE
Std 488.2-1987 defines these registers.
Each bit in a Status Register records a particular type of event, such as an
execution error or message available. When an event of a given type occurs, the
instrument sets the bit that represents that type of event to a value of one. (You can
disable bits so that they ignore events and remain at zero. See Enable Registers).
Reading the status registers tells you what types of events have occurred.

The Standard Event Status Register (SESR). The SESR records eight types of
events that can occur within the instrument. Use the *ESR? query to read the
SESR register. Reading the register clears the bits of the register so that the
register can accumulate information about new events.

NOTE. TekVISA applications use SESR bit 6 to respond to any of several events,
including some front panel actions.

Figure 3-1: The Standard Event Status Register (SESR)

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 3-1

Status and Events

Table 3-1: SESR Bit Functions

Bit Function
7 (MSB) PON Power On. Shows that the instrument was powered on.
On completion, the diagnostic self tests also set this bit.
6 URQ User Request. Indicates that an application event has
occurred. *See note.
5 CME Command Error. Shows that an error occurred while
the instrument was parsing a command or query.
4 EXE Execution Error. Shows that an error executing a
command or query.
3 DDE Device Error. Shows that a device error occurred.
2 QYE Query Error. Either an attempt was made to read the
Output Queue when no data was present or pending, or that
data in the Output Queue was lost.
1 RQC Request Control. This is not used.
0 (LSB) OPC Operation Complete. Shows that the operation
is complete. This bit is set when all pending operations
complete following an *OPC command.

The Status Byte Register (SBR). Records whether output is available in the
Output Queue, whether the instrument requests service, and whether the SESR
has recorded any events.
Use a Serial Poll or the *STB? query to read the contents of the SBR. The bits in
the SBR are set and cleared depending on the contents of the SESR, the Event
Status Enable Register (ESER), and the Output Queue. When you use a Serial
Poll to obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the RQS bit. When you use the *STB? query to
obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the MSS bit. Reading the SBR does not clear the bits.

Figure 3-2: The Status Byte Register (SBR)

Table 3-2: SBR Bit Functions

Bit Function
7 (MSB) ———— Not used.
6 RQS Request Service. Obtained from a serial poll. Shows
that the instrument requests service from the controller.
6 MSS Master Status Summary. Obtained from *STB?
query. Summarizes the ESB and MAV bits in the SBR.
5 ESB Event Status Bit. Shows that status is enabled and
present in the SESR.
4 MAV Message Available. Shows that output is available
in the Output Queue.
3 ———— Not used.

3-2 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Status and Events

Table 3-2: SBR Bit Functions (cont.)

Bit Function
2 ———— Not used.
1–0 ———— Not used.

Enable Registers DESER, ESER, and SRER allow you to select which events are reported to the
Status Registers and the Event Queue. Each Enable Register acts as a filter to a
Status Register (the DESER also acts as a filter to the Event Queue) and can
prevent information from being recorded in the register or queue.
Each bit in an Enable Register corresponds to a bit in the Status Register it
controls. In order for an event to be reported to a bit in the Status Register, the
corresponding bit in the Enable Register must be set to one. If the bit in the Enable
Register is set to zero, the event is not recorded.
Various commands set the bits in the Enable Registers. The Enable Registers and
the commands used to set them are described below.

The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER). This register controls which
types of events are reported to the SESR and the Event Queue. The bits in the
DESER correspond to those in the SESR.
Use the DESE command to enable and disable the bits in the DESER. Use the
DESE? query to read the DESER.

Figure 3-3: The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER)

The Event Status Enable Register (ESER). This register controls which types of
events are summarized by the Event Status Bit (ESB) in the SBR. Use the *ESE
command to set the bits in the ESER. Use the *ESE? query to read it.

Figure 3-4: The Event Status Enable Register (ESER)

The Service Request Enable Register (SRER). This register controls which bits
in the SBR generate a Service Request and are summarized by the Master Status
Summary (MSS) bit.
Use the *SRE command to set the SRER. Use the *SRE? query to read the
register. The RQS bit remains set to one until either the Status Byte Register is
read with a Serial Poll or the MSS bit changes back to a zero.

Figure 3-5: The Service Request Enable Register (SRER)

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 3-3

Status and Events

*PSC Command The *PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power-on. Sending
*PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows:
DESER 255 (equivalent to a DESe 255 command)
ESER 0 (equivalent to an *ESE 0 command)
SRER 0 (equivalent to an *SRE 0 command)
Sending *PSC 0 lets the Enable Registers maintain their values in nonvolatile
memory through a power cycle.

NOTE. To enable the PON (Power On) event to generate a Service Request, send
*PSC 0, use the DESe and *ESE commands to enable PON in the DESER and
ESER, and use the *SRE command to enable bit 5 in the SRER. Subsequent
power-on cycles will generate a Service Request.

Queues
The *PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power-on. Sending
*PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows:

Output Queue The instrument stores query responses in the Output Queue and empties this
queue each time it receives a new command or query message after an <EOM>.
The controller must read a query response before it sends the next command (or
query) or it will lose responses to earlier queries.

CAUTION. When a controller sends a query, an <EOM>, and a second query,

the instrument normally clears the first response and outputs the second while
reporting a Query Error (QYE bit in the ESER) to indicate the lost response. A
fast controller, however, may receive a part or all of the first response as well. To
avoid this situation, the controller should always read the response immediately
after sending any terminated query message or send a DCL (Device Clear) before
sending the second query.

Event Queue The Event Queue stores detailed information on up to 33 events. If than 32
events stack up in the Event Queue, the 32nd event is replaced by event code
350, "Queue Overflow."
Read the Event Queue with the EVENT? query (which returns only the event
number), with the EVMSG? query (which returns the event number and a text
description of the event), or with the ALLEV? query (which returns all the event
numbers along with a description of the event). Reading an event removes it
from the queue.

3-4 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Status and Events

Before reading an event from the Event Queue, you must use the *ESR? query to
read the summary of the event from the SESR. This makes the events summarized
by the *ESR? read available to the EVENT? and EVMSG? queries, and empties
the SESR.
Reading the SESR erases any events that were summarized by previous *ESR?
reads but not read from the Event Queue. Events that follow an *ESR? read are
put in the Event Queue but are not available until *ESR? is used again.

Event Handling Sequence

The following figure shows how to use the status and event handling system. In
the explanation that follows, numbers in parentheses refer to numbers in the figure.

Figure 3-6: Status and Event Handling Process

When an event occurs, a signal is sent to the DESER (1). If that type of event
is enabled in the DESER (that is, if the bit for that event type is set to 1), the
appropriate bit in the SESR is set to one, and the event is recorded in the Event
Queue (2). If the corresponding bit in the ESER is also enabled (3), then the
ESB bit in the SBR is set to one (4).
When output is sent to the Output Queue, the MAV bit in the SBR is set to one (5).
When a bit in the SBR is set to one and the corresponding bit in the SRER
is enabled (6), the MSS bit in the SBR is set to one and a service request is
generated (7).

Synchronization Methods
Overview Although most commands are completed almost immediately after being received
by the instrument, some commands start a process that requires time. For example,
once a single sequence acquisition command is executed, depending upon the
applied signals and trigger settings, it may take an extended period of time before
the acquisition is complete. Rather than remain idle while the operation is in
process, the instrument will continue processing other commands. This means
that some operations will not be completed in the order that they were sent.
Furthermore, sometimes the result of an operation depends upon the result of an
earlier operation. A first operation must complete before the next one is processed.
In order to handle these situations, the instrument status and event reporting
system allows you to synchronize the operation of the instrument with your
application program, using the Operation Complete function. Note, however,
that only some operations are able to take advantage of this function; a table is
provided below of commands that support this.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 3-5

Status and Events

The following commands are used to synchronize the instrument functions using
Operation Complete. See examples of how to use these commands later on in
this section:
*OPC — sending the *OPC command will set bit 0 of the SESR (Standard
Events Status Register). The bit will only be set high when all pending operations
that generate an OPC message have finished execution. (The SESR is queried
using *ESR?) The *OPC? query form returns 1 only when all operations have
completed, or a device clear is received.
*WAI — prevents the instrument from executing further commands or queries
until all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete.
BUSY? — returns the status of operations: 1 means there are pending operations,
0 means that all pending operations are complete.

NOTE. Some OPC operations may require an extended period of time to complete
or may never complete. For example, a single sequence acquisition may never
complete when no trigger event occurs. You should be aware of these conditions
and tailor your program accordingly by:
— setting the timeout sufficiently for the anticipated maximum time for the
operation and
— handle a timeout appropriately by querying the SESR (*ESR?) and event queue
(EVMsg? or ALLEv?).

NOTE. The *OPC command form can also be used to cause an SRQ to be
generated upon completion of all pending operations. This requires that the
ESB (Event Status Bit, bit 5) of the SRER (Service Request Enable Regiser) is set,
and the OPC bit (bit 0) of the DESR (Device Event Status Enable Register) and
the ESER (Event Status Enable Register) are set. (The SRER is set/queried using
*SRE. The DESR is set/queried using DESE. The ESER is set/queried using *ESE.)

Only a subset of instrument operations support the Operation Complete function

(OPC):

Table 3-3: instrument operations that can generate OPC

Command Conditions
ACQuire:STATE <non-zero NR1>| ON|RUN Only when in single sequence acquisition
mode
:AUTOset < EXECute >
CALibrate:INTERNal
CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt
CALibrate:FACtory STARt

3-6 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Status and Events

Table 3-3: instrument operations that can generate OPC (cont.)

Command Conditions
CALibrate:FACtory CONTinue
CALibrate:FACtory PREVious
DIAg:STATE EXECute
FACtory
MEASUrement:MEAS<x> :RESUlts When used in single sequence acquisition
mode or during waveform recall.
RECAll:SETUp (<file as quoted
string>|FACtory)
RECAll:WAVEform <.ISF or .CSV file >,<
REF<x> >
:RF:REFLevel AUTO
*RST
SAVe:IMAGe <file as quoted string>
SAVe:SETUp <file as quoted string>
SAVe:WAVEform < source wfm >, (< REF<x>
>|< file >)
TEKSecure
TRIGger:A SETLevel

Example of Acquiring For example, a typical application might involve acquiring a single-sequence
and Measuring a waveform and then taking a measurement on the acquired waveform. You could
Single-Sequence use the following command sequence to do this:
Waveform /** Set up conditional acquisition **/
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1:STATE 1
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/** Acquire waveform data **/
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/** Set up the measurement parameters **/
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE CH1
/** Take amplitude measurement **/
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?

The acquisition of the waveform requires extended processing time. It may not
finish before the instrument takes an amplitude measurement (see the following
figure). This can result in an incorrect amplitude value.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 3-7

Status and Events

Figure 3-7: Command Processing Without Using Synchronization

To ensure the instrument completes waveform acquisition before taking the
measurement on the acquired data, you can synchronize the program using *WAI,
BUSY, *OPC, and *OPC?.

Figure 3-8: Processing Sequence With Synchronization

Example of Using the *OPC If the corresponding status registers are enabled, the *OPC command sets the
Command OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register (SESR) when an operation is
complete. You achieve synchronization by using this command with either a
serial poll or service request handler.
Serial Poll Method: Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable
Register (DESER) and the Event Status Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE
and *ESE commands.
When the operation is complete, the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register
(SESR) will be enabled and the Event Status Bit (ESB) in the Status Byte Register
will be enabled.
The same command sequence using the *OPC command for synchronization with
serial polling looks like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1:STATE 1
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Enable the status registers */
DESE 1
*ESE 1
*SRE 0
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters on the channel we’re
about to sequence */
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the
measurement. */
*OPC
While serial poll = 0, keep looping
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?

3-8 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Status and Events

This technique requires less bus traffic than did looping on BUSY.
Service Request Method: Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable
Register (DESER) and the Event Status Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE
and *ESE commands.
You can also enable service requests by setting the ESB bit in the Service Request
Enable Register (SRER) using the *SRE command. When the operation is
complete, the instrument will generate a Service Request.
The same command sequence using the *OPC command for synchronization
looks like this
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1:STATE 1
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Enable the status registers */
DESE 1
*ESE 1
*SRE 32

/* Set up the measurement parameters on the channel we’re

about to sequence */ :MEASUrement:MEAS1:TYPE AMPLITUDE
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:SOURCE CH1
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the
measurement*/
*OPC

The program can now do different tasks such as talk to other devices. The SRQ,
when it comes, interrupts those tasks and returns control to this task.
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?

Example of Using the The *OPC? query places a 1 in the Output Queue once an operation that generates
*OPC? Query an OPC message is complete. The *OPC? query does not return until all pending
OPC operations have completed. Therefore, your time-out must be set to a time at
least as long as the longest expected time for the operations to complete.
The same command sequence using the *OPC? query for synchronization looks
like this:
/* Set up single sequence acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1:STATE 1
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 3-9

Status and Events

ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Set up the measurement parameters on the channel we’re
about to sequence */
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE CH1
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the
measurement*/
*OPC?

Wait for read from Output Queue.

/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?

This is the simplest approach. It requires no status handling or loops. However,

you must set the controller time-out for longer than the acquisition operation.

Example of Using the *WAI The *WAI command forces completion of previous commands that generate
Command an OPC message. No commands after the *WAI are processed before the OPC
message(s) are generated
The same command sequence using the *WAI command for synchronization
looks like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1:STATE 1
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Set up the measurement parameters on the channel we’re
about to sequence */
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE CH1
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking
the measurement*/
*/
*WAI
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?

The controller can continue to write commands to the input buffer of the
instrument, but the commands will not be processed by the instrument until all
in-process OPC operations are complete. If the input buffer becomes full, the

3-10 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Status and Events

controller will be unable to write commands to the buffer. This can cause a
time-out.

Example of Using the The BUSY? query allows you to find out whether the instrument is busy
BUSY Query processing a command that has an extended processing time such as
single-sequence acquisition.
The same command sequence, using the BUSY? query for synchronization, looks
like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1:STATE 1
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 1000
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking
the measurement */
While BUSY? keep looping
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?

This sequence lets you create your own wait loop rather than using the *WAI
command. The BUSY? query helps you avoid time-outs caused by writing too
many commands to the input buffer. The controller is still tied up though, and
the repeated BUSY? query will result in bus traffic.

Reference waveforms Measurements on references also support OPC when used in conjunction with a
:RECALL:WAVEFORM command.
/* Load the waveform file */
:RECALL:WAVEFORM "C:/Digital8.wfm”,REF1
*OPC?
/* Set up the measurement parameters on the reference */
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:TYPE PERIOD
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:SOURCE REF1
*OPC?
/* Wait for read from Output Queue. */
/* Take amplitude measurement */
:MEASUrement:MEAS1:RESUlts:CURRentacq:MEAN?

Messages The information contained in the topics above covers all the programming
interface messages the instrument generates in response to commands and queries.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 3-11

Status and Events

For most messages, a secondary message from the instrument gives detail about
the cause of the error or the meaning of the message. This message is part of the
message string and is separated from the main message by a semicolon.
Each message is the result of an event. Each type of event sets a specific bit in the
SESR and is controlled by the equivalent bit in the DESER. Thus, each message
is associated with a specific SESR bit. In the message tables, the associated SESR
bit is specified in the table title, with exceptions noted with the error message text.

No Event The following table shows the messages when the system has no events or status
to report. These have no associated SESR bit.

Table 3-4: No Event Messages

Code Message
0 No events to report; queue empty
1 No events to report; new events pending *ESR?

Command Error The following table shows the command error messages generated by improper
syntax. Check that the command is properly formed and that it follows the rules
in the section on command Syntax.

Table 3-5: Command Error Messages (CME Bit 5)

Code Message
100 Command error
101 Invalid character
102 Syntax error
103 Invalid separator
104 Data type error
105 GET not allowed
108 Parameter not allowed
109 Missing parameter
110 Command header error
112 Program mnemonic too long
113 Undefined header
120 Numeric data error
121 Invalid character in numeric
123 Exponent too large
124 Too many digits
130 Suffix error
131 Invalid suffix
134 Suffix too long

3-12 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Status and Events

Table 3-5: Command Error Messages (CME Bit 5) (cont.)

Code Message
140 Character data error
141 Invalid character data
144 Character data too long
150 String data error
151 Invalid string data
152 String data too long
160 Block data error
161 Invalid block data
170 Command expression error
171 Invalid expression

Execution Error The following table lists the execution errors that are detected during execution of
a command.

Table 3-6: Execution Error Messages (EXE Bit 4)

Code Message
200 Execution error
221 Settings conflict
222 Data out of range
224 Illegal parameter value
241 Hardware missing
250 Mass storage error
251 Missing mass storage
252 Missing media
253 Corrupt media
254 Media full
255 Directory full
256 File name not found
257 File name error
258 Media protected
259 File name too long
280 Program error
282 Insufficient network printer information
283 Network printer not responding
284 Network printer server not responding
286 Program runtime error

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 3-13

Status and Events

Table 3-6: Execution Error Messages (EXE Bit 4) (cont.)

Code Message
287 Future use
2200 Measurement error, Measurement system error
2201 Measurement error, Zero period
2202 Measurement error, No period, second waveform
2203 Measurement error, No period, second waveform
2204 Measurement error, Low amplitude, second waveform
2205 Measurement error, Low amplitude, second waveform
2206 Measurement error, Invalid gate
2207 Measurement error, Measurement overflow
2208 Measurement error, No backwards Mid Ref crossing
2209 Measurement error, No second Mid Ref crossing
2210 Measurement error, No Mid Ref crossing, second waveform
2211 Measurement error, No backwards Mid Ref crossing
2212 Measurement error, No negative crossing
2213 Measurement error, No positive crossing
2214 Measurement error, No crossing, target waveform
2215 Measurement error, No crossing, second waveform
2216 Measurement error, No crossing, target waveform
2217 Measurement error, Constant waveform
2219 Measurement error, No valid edge - No arm sample
2220 Measurement error, No valid edge - No arm cross
2221 Measurement error, No valid edge - No trigger cross
2222 Measurement error, No valid edge - No second cross
2223 Measurement error, Waveform mismatch
2224 Measurement error, WAIT calculating
2225 Measurement error, No waveform to measure
2226 Measurement error, Null Waveform
2227 Measurement error, Positive and Negative Clipping
2228 Measurement error, Positive Clipping
2229 Measurement error, Negative Clipping
2230 Measurement error, High Ref < Low Ref
2231 Measurement error, No statistics available
2233 Requested waveform is temporarily unavailable
2235 Math error, invalid math description
2240 Invalid password
2241 Waveform requested is invalid
2244 Source waveform is not active

3-14 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Status and Events

Table 3-6: Execution Error Messages (EXE Bit 4) (cont.)

Code Message
2245 Saveref error, selected channel is turned off
2250 Reference error, the reference waveform file is invalid
2253 Reference error, too many points received
2254 Reference error, too few points received
2259 File too big
2270 Alias error
2271 Alias syntax error
2273 Illegal alias label
2276 Alias expansion error
2277 Alias redefinition not allowed
2278 Alias header not found
2285 TekSecure(R) Pass
2286 TekSecure(R) Fail
2500 Setup error, file does not look like a setup file
2501 Setup warning, could not recall all values from external setup
2620 Mask error, too few points received
2760 Mark limit reached
2761 No mark present
2762 Search copy failed

Device Error The following table lists the device errors that can occur during instrument
operation. These errors may indicate that the instrument needs repair.

Table 3-7: Device Error Messages (DDE Bit 3)

Code Message
310 System error
311 Memory error
312 PUD memory lost
314 Save/recall memory lost

System Event The following table lists the system event messages. These messages are
generated whenever certain system conditions occur.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 3-15

Status and Events

Table 3-8: System Event Messages

Code Message
400 Query event
401 Power on (PON bit 7 set)
402 Operation complete (OPC bit 0 set)
403 User request (URQ bit 6 set)
404 Power fail (DDE bit 3 set)
405 Request control
410 Query INTERRUPTED (QYE bit 2 set)
420 Query UNTERMINATED (QYE bit 2 set)
430 Query DEADLOCKED (QYE bit 2 set)
440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response (QYE bit 2 set)
468 Knob/Keypad value changed
472 Application variable changed

Execution Warning The following table lists warning messages that do not interrupt the flow of
command execution. They also notify you of possible unexpected results.

Table 3-9: Execution Warning Messages (EXE Bit 4)

Code Message
528 Parameter out of range
532 Curve data too long, Curve truncated
533 Curve error, Preamble values are inconsistent
540 Measurement warning, Uncertain edge
541 Measurement warning, Low signal amplitude
542 Measurement warning, Unstable histogram
543 Measurement warning, Low resolution
544 Measurement warning, Uncertain edge
545 Measurement warning, Invalid in minmax
546 Measurement warning, Need 3 edges
547 Measurement warning, Clipping positive/negative
548 Measurement warning, Clipping positive
549 Measurement warning, Clipping negative

Table 3-10: Execution Warning Messages (EXE Bit 4)

Code Message
540 Measurement warning
541 Measurement warning, Low signal amplitude

3-16 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Status and Events

Table 3-10: Execution Warning Messages (EXE Bit 4) (cont.)

Code Message
542 Measurement warning, Unstable histogram
543 Measurement warning, Low resolution
544 Measurement warning, Uncertain edge
545 Measurement warning, Invalid min max
546 Measurement warning, Need 3 edges
547 Measurement warning, Clipping positive/negative
548 Measurement warning, Clipping positive
549 Measurement warning, Clipping negative

Internal Warning The following table shows internal errors that indicate an internal fault in the
instrument.

Table 3-11: Internal Warning Messages

Code Message
630 Internal warning, 50Ω overload

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual 3-17

Status and Events

3-18 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix A: Character Set

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual A-1

Appendix A: Character Set

A-2 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix B: Reserved Words
This is a list of reserved words for your instrument. Capital letters identify the
required minimum spelling.

*CAL ACCM AN AUTOset

*CLS ACCOMMONMODE ANALOG DPMAutoset
*DDT ACDC ANALOg AUTOset DPMPReset
*ESE ACDCRMS ANALYSISMethod AUXLevel
*ESR ACK ANALYZemode AUXiliary
*IDN ACKMISS AND AUXout
*LRN ACKNowledge ANNOTate AVAILable
*OPC ACKnum ANOISEDensity AVErage
*OPT ACQ ANY AVG
*PSC ACQDURATION ANYERRor AVPOSition
*PUD ACQuire AOFFSet AXPOSition
*RST ACQuisition APOSition AYPOSition
*SRE ACRMS APPID Auto
*STB ACTION APPPWR B
*TRG ACTONEVent APPPWRSUM B0
*TST ACTive APPly B1
*WAI ADD ARBitrary B10
0 ADDMEAS AREA B11
1 ADDNew AREAlt;x> B12
1066 ADDR10 AREAofcrosssection B13
1200 ADDR7 ARROW B14
128 ADDRANDDATA ASCII B15
1333 ADDRESS ASCIi B16
1466 ADDRess ASC_Fmt B2
15 ADDress ASCii B3
1600 ADVanced ASIC B4
1866 AFG ASOUrce B5
2133 AGND ASPEctratio B6
333 AHPOSition ATRIGger B7
500E1 ALARMSEARch AUDio B8
500E15 ALERT AUNIts B9
500E3 ALIas AUTHenticate BACA
7 ALL AUTO BACKLight
8 ALLAcqs AUTODim BACKWard
800 ALLBits AUTOETHERnet BADDr
9 ALLEv AUTOINCrement BADGE
A ALLTHResholds AUTORange BADGe
AB ALWAYS AUTORbw BANDWidth
ABC AM14 AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT BANdwidth
ABCB AMPL AUTOSAVEUITIMEOUT BASE
ABORt AMPLINear AUTOScale BASETop
ABOrt AMPLITUDE AUTOSet BASic
ABSOLUTE AMPLitude AUTOZero BATHTUB
ABSolute AMPMode AUTOfit BATHtub
AC AMP[1-10]Val AUTOmatic BC
ACBC AMPlITUDE AUTOset BCR

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual B-1

Appendix B: Reserved Words

BCRType BULK CH4 COMPlete

BDIFFBP BUNIts CH5 COMPosition
BEACon BURSTDETectmethod CH6 COMPression
BER BURSTEDGTYPe CH7 CONDENRG
BHPOSition BURSTLENGTH CH8 CONDLOSS
BIAS BURSTLatency CHAN1A CONDition
BIN BURSTWIDTH CHAN2B CONFIGuration
BINARY BURSt CHANWidth CONFIGure
BINary BUS CHX CONFigure
BIT BUSANDWAVEFORM CHannel CONNECTSTATus
BITAMPLITUDE BUSTABle CHecksum CONNect
BITCfgmode BUSTURNAROUnd CHlt;x> CONNected
BITDelay BUSY CHlt;x>_DALL CONSTAMPlitude
BITEnd BUSx CHlt;x>_Dlt;x> CONSTANTCLOCK
BITHIGH BVPOSition CHx CONSTCLOCKMODe
BITLOW BXPOSition CHx_DALL CONSTant
BITORDer BY CHx_Dx CONTROL
BITOrder BYPOSition CHx_Dy CONTROLCHARTYPe
BITPERiod BYT_Nr CLASSA CONTROLCODETYPe
BITPcnt BYT_Or CLASSB CONTROLMESSage
BITRate BYTe CLASSC CONTRol
BITS Block CLASSD CONTinuous
BITSTUFFing Blt;x> CLASs CONTrol
BITSTart Blt;x>PSIFIVe CLEAR COPy
BITType Bpeak CLEar COUNT
BIT_Nr Br CLIPping COUNTer
BITlt;n>SOUrce Bus CLOCK COUNt
BJT Bx CLOCKBITSPERCHANNEL COUPling
BLACKMANHarris C CLOCKFrequency COUnt
BLACkmanharris CA CLOCKMultiplier CPHY
BLANKingtime CALLOUTS CLOCKRecovery CR
BLOCKDATa CALLOUTlt;x> CLOCKSOUrce CRC
BLOCkid CALibrate CLOCk CRC16
BLUe CAN CLOCkSOUrce CRC5
BM CAN2X CLRESPONSE CRCERRor
BMP CANH CMEThod CRCHeader
BMSGEnd CANL CN CRCTrailer
BN CAPACITANCE COFFSet CREATor
BNOISE CARDIac COLOR CROSSIng
BN_Fmt CATalog COLOROFF CSActive
BOFFSet CB COLORON CSI
BOLD CCODe COLORy CSIBLANk
BOOKMARK CCOUnt COLor CSINULL
BOOKMark CCRESUlts COLors CSLevel
BOTH CCYCles COMM CSMode
BPACKets CENTERFREQuency COMMAND CSPLIT
BPOSition CENTERFrequency COMMONMODE CSSource
BRGTID CGND COMMONMode CSYMVALue
BRINgtoview CGS COMMand CURRENT
BROADCASTPacket CH COMMents CURRent
BROadcast CH1 COMPRESSEDPSTReam CURRentacq
BRSBit CH2 COMPRESSION CURSOR
BSOUrce CH3 COMPensate CURSOR1

B-2 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix B: Reserved Words

CURSORlt;x> DATa DDT DISPlaystat

CURSor DBCA DECIMAL DISabled
CURSors DBM DECode DISplay
CURVe DBMA DEFect DISplaymode
CURrent DBMV DEFine DIVide
CUSTOM DBUA DEFinedby DIVisions
CUSTOMLIMITSFile DBUV DEGAUSS DJ
CUSTOMPROPAgation DBUW DEGrees DJDD
CUSTOMTABle DC DELAY DJDIRAC
CUSTom DCD DELETE DMINus
CWD DCDC DELETEALL DMSGEnd
CYCLE DCP1W2 DELEte DNS
CYCLEAmp DCPWR DELIMiter DOFFSet
CYCLEBase DCR DELTA DOMAINname
CYCLECount DCREJ DELTATime DOMain
CYCLEMAX DCRType DELTa DONTInclude
CYCLEMin DCSGLONGWRITE DELTatime DONTcare
CYCLEMode DCSLONGREAD DELay DOTsonly
CYCLEPKPK DCSR DELete DOUBLE
CYCLETop DCSSRR DELeteqstring DPHY
CYCLEcount DCSSW DELta DPLUs
CYCLemode DDJ DESE DPMOVERSHOOT
ChipSelect DDR DESKEW DPMRIPPLE
Chx_Dx DDR3 DESKew DPMTURNOFFTIME
ClockEdge DDRAOS DEST DPMTURNONTIME
Current DDRAOSPERTCK DESTination DPMUNDERSHOOT
D DDRAOSPERUI DESTinationaddr DPlus
DADDr DDRAUS DESTinationport DQ0
DAMPing DDRAUSPERTCK DEVERRor DQDQS
DATA DDRAUSPERUI DEVICEChirp DRIVE
DATA0 DDRHOLDDIFF DEVICEDESCMASTERREAd DRIve
DATA1 DDRREAD DEVICEDESCSLAVEREAd DSI
DATA2 DDRREADWRITE DEVICETYPe DSIBLANk
DATAA DDRREADWrite DEVICEType DSINULL
DATAB DDRRead DEVicetype DUty
DATABITS DDRSETUPDIFF DHCPbootp DVBYDT
DATABITs DDRTCHABS DIAg DVDT
DATABits DDRTCHAVERAGE DIBYDT DVM
DATAFORMat DDRTCKAVERAGE DIDT DWORd
DATAFORmat DDRTCLABS DIFF DYNAMIC
DATAFormat DDRTCLAVERAGE DIFFerential DYNAMic
DATAMINUS DDRTDQSCK DIGGRPlt;x> DYNRange
DATAMINUSTHRESHOLD DDRTERRMN DIR DeltaB
DATAMINUSTHRESHold DDRTERRN DIRECTPacket DeltaH
DATAPLUS DDRTJITCC DIRacmodel Dlt;x>
DATAPLUSTHRESHold DDRTJITDUTY DIRect EACHCLOCKCYCLE
DATAPacket DDRTJITPER DIRection EBIT
DATAPath DDRTPST DISCMODe EBITVALue
DATARATE DDRTRPRE DISCrete ECC
DATARate DDRTWPRE DISLave ECL
DATASource DDRVIXAC DISPLAY ECU
DATATHRESHold DDRWRITE DISPLAYUnits ECUDATa
DATE DDRWrite DISParity ECUSENSor

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual B-3

Appendix B: Reserved Words

ECUSOURce EQUation Equals FILEName

EDECAy EQual Execute FILESYSTEM
EDGE EQualNOTEQual F1MAG FILESystem
EDGEIncre ERISe F2 FILTERRANGEFROM
EDGEQUALONE ERROR F3MAG FILTERRANGETO
EDGEQUALTWO ERRORREPort F4 FILTer
EDGEQUALifier ERRORTYPe F8 FILTers
EDGES ERROr FACtory FILepath
EDGESOURce ERRTYPE FAIL FIRST
EDGESource ERRTYPe FAILCount FIVE
EDGEType ERRType FALL FIVEHundred
EDGElt;x> ERRor FALLHigh FIXED
EDGe ERRors FALLING FIXed
EFFICIENCY ESCAPEMODe FALLLow FLATNESS
EFFiciency ESIBit FALLMid FLATTOP2
EIGHTBIT ET FALLSLEWRATE FLATtop2
EIGHTHUNDREdhz EVEN FALLTIME FLAg
EITHER EVENT FALLing FLEXRAY
EITHer EVENTBYTe FALSe FLEXray
EITher EVENTS FALling FLIP
EMBEDDED EVENTtable FAMILYCODe FLYBACK
ENABle EVERY FAST FOLDer
ENAble EVMsg FASTAcq FONT
ENAbled EVQty FASTERthan FONTSize
ENCdg EXCURsion FASTer FORCEDRange
ENCoding EXECUTEQUEue FASTframe FORCe
END EXECute FAst FORMERRor
ENDPoint EXITSWindow FBD1 FORMat
ENDSEARch EXPLICITCLOCK FBD2 FORWard
ENDtime EXPLICITCLOCKMODe FBD3 FOUR
ENET EXPORTRaw FC1063 FOURBIT
ENET100 EXTAtten FC133 FOURHUNDREDHZ
ENET1000 EXTDBatten FC2125 FOURHUNDREdhz
ENGineering EXTENDED FC266 FOURHundred
ENHANCED4 EXTENDed FC4250 FOURTEENten
ENHANCED8 EXTENDuis FC531 FP
ENSLave EXTREGREAd FC8500 FPAnel
ENTERSWindow EXTREGWRIte FCS FPBinary
ENTRDya EXTUnits FCSError FRAME
ENTRTSTMode EXTended FD FRAMECONTrol
ENTasx EXTernal FDBITS FRAMEEND
ENVelope EXTime FDISO FRAMEID
ENable EYEDIAGRAM FDNONISO FRAMELENgth
EOF EYEHIGH FFT FRAMEREJ
EOFTYPE EYELOW FIBREchannel FRAMESTARt
EOP EYEMASK FIFTY FRAMETYPe
EOPBITS EYERENDER FIFTYHZ FRAMEType
EOT EYERender FIFTy FRAMEtype
EOTP EYEWIDTHBER FIFTyhz FRAMING
EOTPDATa EYEhistogram FIFty FRAMe
EOW Efficiency1 FILE FRAme
EOp Efficiency2 FILEDest FREFerence
EQUal Efficiency3 FILEFormat FREQ

B-4 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix B: Reserved Words

FREQBYTe GM HISTOGRAM IMDAINPUTVOLTAGE

FREQUENCY GMT HIStory IMDALINERIPPLE
FREQ[1-10]Val GPKNOB1 HITDMVALue IMDAPHASORDIAGRAM
FREQ[1-11]Val GPKNOB2 HITS IMDAPLOTDisplay
FREQuency GR HITType IMDAPOWERQUALITY
FROM GRATICULE HIVALue IMDASWITCHRIPPLE
FROMEDGESEARCHDIRect GRATicule HOLD IMDATIMETREND
FROMLevel GRAticule HOLDTime IMPEDANCE
FROMSearch GREATERthan HOLDoff IMPEDance
FROMSymbol GREen HOMEDir IN
FROMedge GRIDTYPE HORDer INACCBYTe
FRame GRIDlines HORIZontalscale INCLUDEREFs
FULL GRId HORZ INCLUde
FULLSPEED GROUPDelay HORZPOS INCLude
FULLScreen GSLSb HORZScale INDBits
FULl GSMSb HORizontal INDEPENDENT
FUNCTIONCODETYPe GSP HOSTChirp INDUCT
FUNCTIONCODe GSRR HOTJoin INDUCTANCE
FUNCtion GSW HS INDex
FUNDCURRent H HSOURce INFILTers
FW1394BS1600B HAMMing HSYNCEND INFInite
FW1394BS400B HANDSHAKEPacket HSYNCSTART INFMAXimum
FW1394BS800B HANDSHAKEType HUB INFMINimum
False HANNing HUNDREDBASETX INFPersist
GAIN HARMONICS HUNdred INFormation
GAINCROSSOVERFREQ HARMONICSCLass HYSTeresis INIT
GAP HARMONICSSOURce HYSteresis INPUT
GATESOurce HARMONICSStd Hc INPUTCAP
GATEWay HARMONICSUNits Hmax INPUTLEVel
GATing HAVERSINe I2C INPUTMode
GAUSSian HBArs I2S INPUTPOwer
GAUSsian HDRCapability IBA2500 INPUTSOurce
GENIPADDress HDRExit IBA_GEN2 INPUTType
GENerator HDRRestart ICFACTOR INPWR
GET HEADER ID INPWRSUM
GETBusch HEADer IDANDDATA INPut
GETDevch HEIGHT IDFORmat INRUSH
GETMRdl HEIGHTBER IDLE INRUSHcurrent
GETMWrl HEIGht IDLETime INSIDEGreater
GETPrid HEX IDLe INSIDErange
GETReg HEXAgon IDentifier INSTR
GETRegpktalert HFRej IEC INSTall
GETRegpktbad HI IEEE519 INTENSITy
GETRegpktrecent HID ILEVELAbs INTERNal
GETRegtestcfg HIGH ILEVELPct INTERPRatio
GETRegvendor HIGHLEVel IMAGe INTERRUPT
GETRegvrevent HIGHLevel IMAGinary INTERnal
GETSlave HIGHLimit IMDAACQTREND INTERp
GLOBal HIGHPass IMDADQ0 INTernal
GLOBalref HIGHREFVoltage IMDAEFFICIENCY INVERTColor
GLONGREAD HIGHTIME IMDAHARMONICS INVERTNIBble
GLONGWRITE HIGHZ IMDAINPUTCURRENT INVERTed
GLObal HIRes IMDAINPUTPOWER INVErted

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual B-5

Appendix B: Reserved Words

INVert LESSthan LOWLevel MATHFFTx

INVerted LEVELUNIts LOWLimit MATHlt;x>
INputs LEVel LOWPass MATHx
INrange LF LOWREFVoltage MATlab
IO LFREQuency LOWSPEED MAX
IOUT1SOUrce LFRej LOWTHRESHold MAXCAS
IOUT2SOUrce LIC LOWTIME MAXCycle
IOUT3SOUrce LICENSE LOWer MAXFRames
IPADDress LICense LOWerthreshold MAXHold
IPHeader LIMIT LP MAXIMUM
IPOWer LIMITCount LPDDR3 MAXPSRR
IPVFOUR LIMit LPDT MAXPSRRFREQ
IRMS LIN LPS666 MAXREAD
IRipple LINE LPTHRESHold MAXRETSIZE
ISCLOCKED LINEAR LPYCBCR24 MAXRTURN
ISOALL LINEAr LRIPPKPK MAXSamplerate
ISOEND LINEEND LRIPRMS MAXTIMe
ISOMID LINEFREQUEncy LSB MAXVoltage
ISOSTART LINERIPPLE LSLave MAXWRITe
ISOURce LINESTARt LXI MAXimum
ISOUrce LINESelected LogicState MDATA
ISOchronous LINear MAC MDATASpeed
ITALIC LIST MACADDRess ME
ITALic LJ MACLENgth MEAN
ITEM LOAd MAG MEANAUTOCalculate
IVSINTEGRALV LOCKCenter MAGLOSS MEANhistogram
IVSINTV LOCKRJ MAGNETICLOSS MEAS
InputPwr LOCKRJValue MAGNITUDE MEAS1
Inrange LOCKSpectrum MAGNitude MEASRange
J2 LOCk MAGPROPERTY MEASTABle
J9 LOG MAINWindow MEASU
JITTERMODE LOGARITHM MAIn MEASUREAT
JITTERSUMMARY LOGIC MANChester MEASUrement
JITTERSummary LOGIC1SOUrce MANUAL MEASlt;x>
JITTermodel LOGIC2SOUrce MANual MEASured
JPG LOGIC3SOUrce MARKER MEASurement
JTFBandwidth LOGIC4SOUrce MARgin MEASx
KAISERBessel LOGIC5SOUrce MASK MEDian
KAISerbessel LOGICPattern MASKFail MEDium
L LOGICQUALification MASKHit MEMORY
L2LTOL2N LOGICSource MASKOffset MESSaging
LABELANDDATA LOGIc MASKPass METHod
LABel LOGic MASKfile MID
LAN LONG MASKlt;x> MIDRef
LATCh LONGEXTREGREAd MASTERADDRess MIL
LAYout LONGEXTREGWRIte MASTERREAd MIN
LDIR LOOP MASTERWRIte MINCas
LEFt LOOPBandwidth MASTer MINCycle
LENGth LORENtz MATCHROM MINHold
LENgth LOW MATH MINIMUM
LESSEQual LOWDATAMINus MATHArbfltlt;x> MINImum
LESSLimit LOWDATAPLUS MATHFFTViewlt;n> MINMax
LESSThan LOWERFREQuency MATHFFTViewlt;x> MINPSRR

B-6 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix B: Reserved Words

MINPSRRFREQ NOISErej OCCURS OUTPUT7SOURce

MINUI NOISe ODD OUTPUT7VOLTage
MINimum NOMINALOFFset ODDEVen OUTPUTSOurce
MISo NOMinal OFF OUTPUTType
MIXED NOMinalfreq OFF1 OUTPUTlt;n>VOLTage
MIXEDASCII NONE OFFSet OUTPWR
MIXEDHEX NONTRANsition ON OUTPWRSUM
MIXed NONe ONCE OUTPut
MKDir NOPARity ONE OUTSIDEGreater
MODE NOR ONEOVERDELTATVALUE OUTSIDErange
MODEhistogram NORESPonse ONEPAIRI OUTSOURCE
MODe NORMALColor ONEPAIRV OUTWIRing
MODel NORMal ONEPAIRVI OUTrange
MODulo NORmal ONEWIRe OUTside
MOREEQua NOSTATion ONFAIL OVERDRIVEMATCh
MOREEQual NOTE OPCODEERRor OVERDRIVESKIP
MOREEQualINrange NOTEQuals OPCode OVERDRIVe
MORELimit NOVERSHOOT OPERating OVERLoad
MOREThan NOne OPPositeas OVERRide
MOREthan NPERIOD OPTIMIZation OVERlay
MOSFET NPJ OPTIMize OVErdrive
MOSi NPULSE OPTIONALPARam OVErlay
MOUNT NPULSEWIDTH OPTion Output1Pwr
MOVEABLE NR1 OPTional Output2Pwr
MSB NR2 OR Output3Pwr
MULTiply NR3 OUT P1W2V1I1
MULtipleframes NRZ OUTEDGEQUALifier P1W3V2I2
Manual NR_Pt OUTFILTers P3W3
Mathlt;x> NTIMES OUTL2LTOL2N P3W3V2I2
Mathx NTIMes OUTLINESelected P3W3V3I3
N NULL OUTPUT P3W4
NACK NULLFRDynamic OUTPUT1 PACKET
NAK NULLFRStatic OUTPUT1SOURce PACKets
NAME NULl OUTPUT1Type PALEtte
NAMe NUMACQs OUTPUT1VOLTage PANKNOB
NAND NUMACq OUTPUT2 PARItyerror
NANd NUMAVg OUTPUT2SOURce PARallel
NATive NUMBer OUTPUT2Type PARity
NAVigate NUMBins OUTPUT2VOLTage PASSFAILENabled
NDUTY NUMCHANnel OUTPUT3 PASSFAILHIGHlimit
NDUTYCYCLE NUMERICORDer OUTPUT3SOURce PASSFAILLIMit
NDUtY NUMFRAMESACQuired OUTPUT3Type PASSFAILLOWlimit
NDUty NUMOFOutputs OUTPUT3VOLTage PASSFAILMARgin
NEGAtive NUMOUTputs OUTPUT4 PASSFAILWHEN
NEGative NUMSEQuence OUTPUT4SOURce PASSWord
NETWORKCONFig NWIDTH OUTPUT4VOLTage PATTERNDETECTION
NEWpass NWIDTTH OUTPUT5 PATTERNLENgth
NEXT NYET OUTPUT5SOURce PATTERNTYPe
NIBBLECount None OUTPUT5VOLTage PATTern
NIBBLe OC1 OUTPUT6 PAUSE
NO OC12 OUTPUT6SOURce PAUSEPULSe
NOCARE OC3 OUTPUT6VOLTage PAUSe
NOISEAdd OC48 OUTPUT7 PAYLENgth

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual B-7

Appendix B: Reserved Words

PAYLOAD PNG PSRR RATE33K

PAYLength PNJUNCTION PTYPe RATE38K
PAYLoad POHCL PT_Fmt RATE3M
PAYload POHCM PT_Off RATE400K
PCIE_GEN1 POHCS PULSEWIDTh RATE4K
PCIE_GEN2 POINT PULSEWidth RATE4M
PCIE_GEN3 POINTS PULSe RATE500K
PCIExpress POLARITY PULse RATE50K
PDUTTY POLarity PWIDTH RATE5M
PDUTY POPUlation PWRFACTOR RATE62K
PDUTYCYCLE PORT PWRFREQ RATE68K
PEAK PORTConfiguration PWRUpstatus RATE6M
PEAKCURRent PORTReset ParaltBlockgt RATE7M
PEAKVOLTage POSITIVe Permeability RATE800K
PEAKdetect POST QFACTOR RATE83K
PERCent POSTAMBLE QString RATE8M
PERFREQ POSition QStringNR1 RATE921K
PERIOD POSitive QStringQString RATE92K
PERIod POVERSHOOT QTAG RATE9K
PERSistence POWERFACtor QTAGGING RATE9M
PERSource POWERQUALITY QUALifier RATed
PFACtor POWERRating QUAlifier RAW10
PFC POWERx Qstring RAW12
PHASE POWLINear RADians RAW14
PHASECROSSOVERFREQ POWLOG RAIL17 RAW16
PHASENOISE POWer RAILNUM RAW20
PHASEONE POWerlt;x> RAMP RAW6
PHASETHREE PPD RAMPtime RAW7
PHASETWO PPS101010 RANDom RAW8
PHASOR PPS121212 RAP RBW
PHASe PPS565 RAPDATa RBWMode
PHYSICALADDRess PPS666 RATE100K RCURRent
PHYSicaladdress PPS888 RATE10K RDS
PICPARameter PPULSE RATE10M RDSON
PID PPULSEWIDTH RATE115K RDSOn
PING PREAMBLE RATE11M READ
PIXELNUMBer PRESET RATE125K READFile
PIXELVALue PRESS RATE12M READROM
PIXel PREViewstate RATE13M READout
PJ PREVious RATE14M READy
PK2PK PREamble RATE153K REAL
PK2Pk PREsence RATE15M RECAll
PKPK PRIMARYTURNs RATE16M RECAllmask
PLL PRIOD RATE19K RECORD
PLOT PROBECOntrol RATE1K RECORDLength
PLOTData PROBECal RATE1M RECOrdlength
PLOTVIEWlt;x> PROBEFunc RATE20K RECTANGLE
PLOTVIEWx PROFile RATE250K RECTANGular
PLOTViewlt;n> PROTOCol RATE25K RECTangle
PLOTViewlt;x> PROTOcol RATE2K RECTangular
PLOTlt;x> PROTocol RATE2M RED
PLOTx PRObe RATE300 REF
PM PSIFIVe RATE31K REFERence

B-8 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix B: Reserved Words

REFFFTViewlt;n> RESPonsetime RRBDisplaystate SEARCH

REFFFTViewlt;x> RESUME RS232C SEARCH1
REFFFTx RESUlt RSTDya SEARCHOPTion
REFLEVELMode RESUlts RUN SEARCHROM
REFLevel RESample RUNSTop SEARCHSource
REFLevels RESet RUNT SEARCHTABle
REFLevelslt;x> RESistance RUNt SEARCHTable
REFMode RF_AVErage RWINADDR SEARCHlt;x>
REFOUT RF_FREQuency RX SEARCHtotrigger
REFVOLTAGElt;n>Val RF_FREQuencylt;x> S8B10B SEARCHx>
REFVoltage RF_MAGnitude SADDress SEARch
REFerence RF_MAGnitudelt;x> SAME SEC1SOURce
REFlt;x> RF_MAXHold SAMEas SEC1TURNs
REFlt;x>_DALL RF_MINHold SAMPLERate SEC2SOURce
REFlt;x>_Dlt;x> RF_NORMal SAMPLEpoint SEC2TURNs
REFx RF_PHASe SAMple SEC3SOURce
REFx_Dx RF_PHASelt;x> SAS12_NOSSC SEC3TURNs
REG0WRIte RFvsTime SAS12_SSC SEC4SOURce
REGAddrtestconfg RGB444 SAS15_NOSSC SEC4TURNs
REGAddrvendor RGB555 SAS15_SSC SEC5SOURce
REGDatatestconfg RGB565 SAS3_NOSSC SEC5TURNs
REGDatavendor RGB666 SAS3_SSC SEC6SOURce
REGISTERADDRess RGB888 SAS6_NOSSC SEC6TURNs
REGREAd RI SAS6_SSC SECOND
REGWRIte RIBinary SATA_GEN1 SECOnds
REGion RIGht SATA_GEN2 SECPhase
REGister RIO125 SATA_GEN3 SECVolt
REGisteraddress RIO250 SAVEIMAGe SECWINDings
REJ RIO3125 SAVEON SEConds
REJect RIPPLEFREQlt;n>Val SAVEONEVent SEGlt;x>
REM RISE SAVEWAVEform SEGlt;x>COUNT
REMote RISEHigh SAVe SEGlt;y>
REName RISELow SAVemask SELECTED
REPEATERHOSt RISEMid SC SELECTIONtype
REPEATERPERIPHERAL RISESLEWRATE SCALE SELTrace
REPEATStart RISETIME SCALERATio SELect
REPEATstart RISING SCALe SELected
REPOrt RISe SCAle SENSORADDRess
REPWR RISing SCIentific SENSORECU
REPWRSUM RJ SCLk SENSORSTATus
REPeating RJDD SCOPEApp REBOOT SENSor
REQDISConnect RJDIRAC SCRAMBLING SENT
REQSETINIT RMDir SCREEN SEQSETup
REQUested RMS SCRambling SEQnum
RERUN RNR SDATa SEQuence
RESAMPLE ROLL SDI SERIALNUMBer
RESAMPLErate ROLOCATION SDIDATA SERVICE
RESERVed ROMCODe SDIDATASSM SERVICEMODe
RESET ROSc SDLC SERVICENAMe
RESETTRIGger ROTAtion SDR SERnumber
RESOlution RP SDRBroadcast SESsion
RESPONSECODe RPBinary SDRDirect SET
RESPonse RR SE SETBrt

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual B-9

Appendix B: Reserved Words

SETDecay SLAVe SRJ STandard

SETDya SLEEP SRPbinary STop
SETFast SLEWRATEMethod SRQ SUBADdress
SETHOLDLogicval SLEep SS SUBGROUP
SETHold SLOW SSC SUBNETMask
SETLevel SLOWERthan SSCFREQDEV SUBSF
SETMrdl SLOWer SSCMODRATE SUBTYPe
SETMwrl SLOpe SSCPROFILE SUBtract
SETNdya SMPS SSM SUMFrame
SETPs SNAp SSPLIT SUPPORTBYTe
SETRegaddr SNRM STADDress SUPPress
SETRegdata SNRME STALL SUPervisory
SETSlow SOA STANDard SUSPEND
SETTime SOAHITSCNT STANdard SV
SETUP SOCKETServer START SWITCHING
SETUp SOF STARTBIT SWITCHINGLOSS
SETWp SOFFRAMENUMber STARTCONDition SWITCHINGRIPPLE
SEText SOT STARTFREQUEncy SWL
SEVEN SOURCE STARTFREQuency SWLCONFIGType
SFD SOURCEEDGEType STARTFrequency SWRIPPKPK
SFPbinary SOURCELIst STARTPACKet SWRIPRMS
SHAPE SOURCETYpe STARTofframe SYMB
SHORt SOURCEs STARTtime SYMBol
SHOWAReas SOURce STARTup SYMbol
SHOWCRiteria SOUrce STARTupnosync SYMbols
SHOWEQuation SOUrceaddr STARt SYMmetry
SHOrt SOUrcelt;x> STATE SYNC
SHUTDOWN SOUrceport STATEBYTe SYNCBITS
SHUTdown SOW STATIC SYNCFrame
SI SPACEWIRe STATIONADDr SYNCMODe
SIGNAL SPAN STATIstics SYNCSEARch
SIGNALFREQUEncy SPANABovebw STATUS SYNCTHRESHold
SIGNALTYpe SPANBELowdc STATe SYNCfield
SIGNALType SPANRBWRatio STATic SYSTEM
SIGNal SPEC STATus Start
SIGnal SPECIALPacket STAYSHigh Stop
SINC SPECIALType STAYSLow String
SINE SPECTRAL STAcked Symbol
SINGLE SPECTRALBUJ STAndard TARGETBER
SINX SPECTRUM STDDev TBIT
SIX SPECTral STEPRESPONSE TBITRDNeg
SIXBIT SPECViewlt;x> STOP TBITRDPos
SIXFIFTyhz SPECtral STOPACQ TBITVALue
SIXTEENeight SPECtrum STOPAcq TCKAVG
SIXTYHZ SPI STOPAfter TCPHeader
SIXTyhz SPLIT STOPFREQuency TDM
SIXty SPLITMODE STOPFrequency TDMVALue
SIZE SPLit STROBE TEKEXPonential
SIZe SPREADSheet STROBESource TEKSecure
SKEW SPace STRObe TEMPerature
SKIPROM SQUELCH STRobe TENBASET
SLAVE SQUare STYPe TENNinety
SLAVEADDRess SRIbinary STYle TERMinal

B-10 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix B: Reserved Words

TERmination TRACK UNIQue VOUT1SOUrce

TEST TRAILER UNITINTERVAL VOUT2SOUrce
TESTCONNection TRANSferbusownership UNITINtervals VOUT3SOUrce
TESTMODe TRANSition UNITIntervals VRMS
TESTmode TRANsition UNITs VSOURce
TESt TRANstion UNIts VSOUrce
TEXT TRAPezoid UNLock VSYNCEND
TF TRAiler UNLocked VSYNCSTART
THDF TRBit UNMOUNT VTERm
THDR TRIAngle UNNumbered VUNIT
THIRD TRIGLevel UNWRap WAITTime
THREE TRIGger UP WAKEup
THREEPHASEAUTOset TRIGgertosearch<! UPDatenow WAKeup
THREESIXTyhz TRPWR UPPERFREQuency WAVEFORM
THRESHold TRPWRSUM UPPer WAVEVIEW1
THReshold TRUEPWR UPPerthreshold WAVEView
TICKTIME TRUe USAGe WAVEViewlt;x>
TICKTOLerance TRack USB3 WAVEViewlt;y>
TICKs TTL USBDevice WAVEform
TIE TTLENRG USBTmc WAVEforms
TIEHISTOGRAM TTLLOSS USECLockedge WAVFrm
TIESPECTRUM TURN USEClockedge WEIGht
TIETIMETREND TURNOFFtime USEGLOBAL WFId
TIMECode TURNON USEREIGHTB WFMOutpre
TIMEOUTSIDELEVEL TURNONTIME UTCDELTa WFMTYPe
TIMEOut TURNONtime V WHEn
TIMEStamp TWELVEtwelve V1X WIDTH
TIMETOMAX TWENTYBIT V2X WIDTHBER
TIMETOMIN TWENtyeighty VALUe WIDth
TIMETREND TWENtyfive VALidate WINDOW
TIMINGMode TWO VALue WINDOWLENgth
TIMe TWOBIT VARpersist WINSCALe
TJBER TWOCLOCKCYCLES VBArs WINdow
TNTRATIO TWOFifty VCESat WIRing
TO TWOThousand VCFACTOR WIThin
TOEDGESEARCHDIRect TX VDIFFXOVR WORD
TOEdge TXRX VECtors WORDCOUNt
TOFFENRG TXRXTHRESHold VERBose WORDSIZe
TOFFLOSS TYPE VERTICES WORDSel
TOKENPacket TYPE1 VERTPOS WORDSize
TOKENType TYPE2 VERTSCALE WRAP
TOLERance TYPe VERTical WRITE
TOLerance TotalEfficiency VERsion WRITEFile
TOLevel True VGLevel WRITe
TONENRG U VIEW Word
TONLOSS UACK VIEWStyle X
TOOTHGAP UI VIEWTYpe XAUI
TOP ULPS VISIBility XAUI_GEN2
TOSYmbol UNDERLine VISual XAXIS
TOTAL UNDERline VLEVELAbs XAXISUnits
TOTALEFFiciency UNDO VLEVELPct XFF
TOTaluptime UNEQual VOLTAGE XID
TOUCHSCReen UNINSTALL VOLTage XINcr

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual B-11

Appendix B: Reserved Words

XN YN ZOOMOVERride name
XPOS YOFf ZOOMlt;x> new_working_directory_path
XPOSition YPOS Zoom old_file_pathnew_file_path
XUNIT YPOSition _FREQ_VS_TIME packetOffData
XUNit YUNIT _MAG_VS_TIME parity
XY YUNit _PHASE_VS_TIME reverse
XYZ YUV _SV_AVErage source_file_pathdestination_
XYZY YUV420B10 _SV_MAXHold sourcefileMASKx
XZEro YUV420L8 _SV_MINHold sourcefiledestination
XZYZ YUV422B10 _SV_NORMal v1
Y YUV8BIT block_data v2
YAXIS YXZX boolean wfmwfm
YCBCR YZEro directory_path x
YCBCR12 ZERo file_path x201cMASKxx201d
YCBCR16 ZN file_pathdata x201cNR3NR3NR3NR3NR3NR3NR3N
YCBCR24 ZONe forward x201cPOWERxx201d
YES ZOOM harmonics
YMUlt ZOOMNR1 ltasccurvegtPara

B-12 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Default Setup
The following table lists the default values for each command.

NOTE. Find the most up-to-date default values for your instrument and software
by performing a TekSecure command, saving the instrument setup and looking
at the instrument or setup file.

Table C-1: Default Values

Item Description
ACQUIRE:FASTACQ:PALETTE TEMPERATURE
ACQUIRE:MAGNIVU 0
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 16
ACQUIRE:NUMENV INFINITE
ACQUIRE:STATE 1
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP
ACTONEVENT:ACTION:AUXOUT:STATE 0
ACTONEVENT:ACTION:EMAIL:SETUP:TOADDRESS "TestString"
ACTONEVENT:ACTION:EMAIL:STATE 0
ACTONEVENT:ACTION:PRINT:STATE 0
ACTONEVENT:ACTION:SAVEIMAGE:STATE 0
ACTONEVENT:ACTION:SAVEWFM:STATE 0
ACTONEVENT:ACTION:SRQ:STATE 0
ACTONEVENT:ACTION:STOPACQ:STATE 1
ACTONEVENT:ACTION:VISUAL:STATE 0
ACTONEVENT:EVENTTYPE NONE
ACTONEVENT:NUMACQS 1
ACTONEVENT:REPEATCOUNT 1.0000
AFG:AMPLITUDE 500.0000E-3
AFG:ARBITRARY:EMEM:POINTS:ENCDG ASCII
AFG:FREQUENCY 100.0E+3
AFG:FUNCTION SINE
AFG:HIGHLEVEL 250.0000E-3
AFG:LEVELPRESET USER
AFG:LOWLEVEL -250.0000E-3
AFG:NOISEADD:PERCENT 0.0E+0

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-1

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
AFG:NOISEADD:STATE 0
AFG:OFFSET 0.0E+0
AFG:OUTPUT:LOAD:IMPEDANCE HIGHZ
AFG:PERIOD 9.9999999999916E-6
AFG:PHASE 0.0E+0
AFG:PULSE:WIDTH 1.0E-6
AFG:RAMP:SYMMETRY 50.0000
AFG:SQUARE:DUTY 50.0000
ALIAS:STATE 0
APPLICATION:TYPE POWER
AUXOUT:EDGE RISING
AUXOUT:SOURCE ATRIGGER
BUS:B1:CAN:BITRATE 500000
BUS:B1:CAN:FD:BITRATE 4000000
BUS:B1:CAN:FD:STANDARD ISO
BUS:B1:CAN:SAMPLEPOINT 50
BUS:B1:CAN:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B1:CAN:STANDARD CAN2X
BUS:B1:DISPLAY:FORMAT HEXADECIMAL
BUS:B1:DISPLAY:TYPE BUS
BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:RWINCLUDE 0
BUS:B1:I2C:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:SOURCE CH2
BUS:B1:LABEL "Parallel"
BUS:B1:LIN:BITRATE 19200
BUS:B1:LIN:IDFORMAT NOPARITY
BUS:B1:LIN:POLARITY NORMAL
BUS:B1:LIN:SAMPLEPOINT 50
BUS:B1:LIN:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B1:LIN:STANDARD V2X
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT0:SOURCE D0
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT10:SOURCE D10
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT11:SOURCE D11
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT12:SOURCE D12
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT13:SOURCE D13
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT14:SOURCE D14
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT15:SOURCE D15

C-2 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT16:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT17:SOURCE CH2
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT18:SOURCE CH3
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT19:SOURCE CH4
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT1:SOURCE D1
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT2:SOURCE D2
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT3:SOURCE D3
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT4:SOURCE D4
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT5:SOURCE D5
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT6:SOURCE D6
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT7:SOURCE D7
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT8:SOURCE D8
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:BIT9:SOURCE D9
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:CLOCK:EDGE RISING
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:CLOCK:ISCLOCKED NO
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B1:PARALLEL:WIDTH 16
BUS:B1:POSITION 0.0E+0
BUS:B1:RS232C:BITRATE 9600
BUS:B1:RS232C:DATABITS 8
BUS:B1:RS232C:DELIMITER LF
BUS:B1:RS232C:DISPLAYMODE FRAME
BUS:B1:RS232C:PARITY NONE
BUS:B1:RS232C:POLARITY NORMAL
BUS:B1:RS232C:RX:SOURCE OFF
BUS:B1:RS232C:TX:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B1:SPI:BITORDER MSB
BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCK:POLARITY RISE
BUS:B1:SPI:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:IN:POLARITY HIGH
BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:IN:SOURCE OFF
BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:OUT:POLARITY HIGH
BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:OUT:SOURCE CH3
BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SIZE 8
BUS:B1:SPI:FRAMING SS
BUS:B1:SPI:IDLETIME 5.0000E-6
BUS:B1:SPI:SELECT:POLARITY LOW

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-3

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
BUS:B1:SPI:SELECT:SOURCE CH2
BUS:B1:STATE 0
BUS:B1:TYPE PARALLEL
BUS:B2:CAN:BITRATE 500000
BUS:B2:CAN:FD:BITRATE 4000000
BUS:B2:CAN:FD:STANDARD ISO
BUS:B2:CAN:SAMPLEPOINT 50
BUS:B2:CAN:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B2:CAN:STANDARD CAN2X
BUS:B2:DISPLAY:FORMAT HEXADECIMAL
BUS:B2:DISPLAY:TYPE BUS
BUS:B2:I2C:ADDRESS:RWINCLUDE 0
BUS:B2:I2C:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:SOURCE CH2
BUS:B2:LABEL "Parallel"
BUS:B2:LIN:BITRATE 19200
BUS:B2:LIN:IDFORMAT NOPARITY
BUS:B2:LIN:POLARITY NORMAL
BUS:B2:LIN:SAMPLEPOINT 50
BUS:B2:LIN:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B2:LIN:STANDARD V2X
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT0:SOURCE D0
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT10:SOURCE D10
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT11:SOURCE D11
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT12:SOURCE D12
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT13:SOURCE D13
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT14:SOURCE D14
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT15:SOURCE D15
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT16:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT17:SOURCE CH2
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT18:SOURCE CH3
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT19:SOURCE CH4
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT1:SOURCE D1
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT2:SOURCE D2
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT3:SOURCE D3
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT4:SOURCE D4
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT5:SOURCE D5

C-4 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT6:SOURCE D6
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT7:SOURCE D7
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT8:SOURCE D8
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:BIT9:SOURCE D9
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:CLOCK:EDGE RISING
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:CLOCK:ISCLOCKED NO
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B2:PARALLEL:WIDTH 16
BUS:B2:POSITION 0.0E+0
BUS:B2:RS232C:BITRATE 9600
BUS:B2:RS232C:DATABITS 8
BUS:B2:RS232C:DELIMITER LF
BUS:B2:RS232C:DISPLAYMODE FRAME
BUS:B2:RS232C:PARITY NONE
BUS:B2:RS232C:POLARITY NORMAL
BUS:B2:RS232C:RX:SOURCE OFF
BUS:B2:RS232C:TX:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B2:SPI:BITORDER MSB
BUS:B2:SPI:CLOCK:POLARITY RISE
BUS:B2:SPI:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1
BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:IN:POLARITY HIGH
BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:IN:SOURCE OFF
BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:OUT:POLARITY HIGH
BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:OUT:SOURCE CH3
BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:SIZE 8
BUS:B2:SPI:FRAMING SS
BUS:B2:SPI:IDLETIME 5.0000E-6
BUS:B2:SPI:SELECT:POLARITY LOW
BUS:B2:SPI:SELECT:SOURCE CH2
BUS:B2:STATE 0
BUS:B2:TYPE PARALLEL
BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH1 0.0E+0
BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH2 0.0E+0
BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH3 0.0E+0
BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH4 0.0E+0
BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:MATH 0.0E+0
BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:REF1 0.0E+0

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-5

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:REF2 0.0E+0
BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:REF3 0.0E+0
BUS:LOWERTHRESHOLD:REF4 0.0E+0
BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH1 800.0000E-3
BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH2 800.0000E-3
BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH3 800.0000E-3
BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH4 800.0000E-3
BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:MATH 0.0E+0
BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:REF1 0.0E+0
BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:REF2 0.0E+0
BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:REF3 0.0E+0
BUS:UPPERTHRESHOLD:REF4 0.0E+0
CH1:AMPSVIAVOLTS:ENABLE 0
CH1:AMPSVIAVOLTS:FACTOR 10.0000
CH1:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+9
CH1:COUPLING DC
CH1:DESKEW 0.0E+0
CH1:INVERT 0
CH1:LABEL ""
CH1:OFFSET 0.0E+0
CH1:POSITION 0.0E+0
CH1:SCALE 100.0000E-3
CH1:TERMINATION 1.0000E+6
CH1:YUNITS "V"
CH2:AMPSVIAVOLTS:ENABLE 0
CH2:AMPSVIAVOLTS:FACTOR 10.0000
CH2:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+9
CH2:COUPLING DC
CH2:DESKEW 0.0E+0
CH2:INVERT 0
CH2:LABEL ""
CH2:OFFSET 0.0E+0
CH2:POSITION 0.0E+0
CH2:SCALE 100.0000E-3
CH2:TERMINATION 1.0000E+6
CH2:YUNITS "V"
CH3:AMPSVIAVOLTS:ENABLE 0

C-6 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
CH3:AMPSVIAVOLTS:FACTOR 10.0000
CH3:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+9
CH3:COUPLING DC
CH3:DESKEW 0.0E+0
CH3:INVERT 0
CH3:LABEL ""
CH3:OFFSET 0.0E+0
CH3:POSITION 0.0E+0
CH3:SCALE 100.0000E-3
CH3:TERMINATION 1.0000E+6
CH3:YUNITS "V"
CH4:AMPSVIAVOLTS:ENABLE 0
CH4:AMPSVIAVOLTS:FACTOR 10.0000
CH4:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+9
CH4:COUPLING DC
CH4:DESKEW 0.0E+0
CH4:INVERT 0
CH4:LABEL ""
CH4:OFFSET 0.0E+0
CH4:POSITION 0.0E+0
CH4:SCALE 100.0000E-3
CH4:TERMINATION 1.0000E+6
CH4:YUNITS "V"
CURSOR:FUNCTION OFF
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 0.0E+0
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION2 0.0E+0
CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS BASE
CURSOR:MODE INDEPENDENT
CURSOR:SOURCE AUTO
CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION1 -12.00E-6
CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION2 12.00E-6
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS
CURSOR:XY:READOUT RECTANGULAR
CURSOR:XY:RECTANGULAR:X:POSITION1 0.0E+0
CURSOR:XY:RECTANGULAR:X:POSITION2 0.0E+0
CURSOR:XY:RECTANGULAR:Y:POSITION1 0.0E+0
CURSOR:XY:RECTANGULAR:Y:POSITION2 0.0E+0

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-7

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
D0:LABEL ""
D0:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D0:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D10:LABEL ""
D10:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D10:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D11:LABEL ""
D11:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D11:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D12:LABEL ""
D12:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D12:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D13:LABEL ""
D13:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D13:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D14:LABEL ""
D14:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D14:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D15:LABEL ""
D15:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D15:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D1:LABEL ""
D1:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D1:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D2:LABEL ""
D2:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D2:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D3:LABEL ""
D3:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D3:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D4:LABEL ""
D4:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D4:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D5:LABEL ""
D5:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D5:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D6:LABEL ""

C-8 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
D6:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D6:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D7:LABEL ""
D7:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D7:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D8:LABEL ""
D8:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D8:THRESHOLD 1.4000
D9:LABEL ""
D9:POSITION 80.0000E-3
D9:THRESHOLD 1.4000
DATA:DESTINATION REF1
DATA:ENCDG RIBINARY
DATA:SOURCE CH1
DATA:START 1
DATA:STOP 10000
DESKEW:DISPLAY 1
DISPLAY:CLOCK 1
DISPLAY:DIGITAL:ACTIVITY 0
DISPLAY:DIGITAL:HEIGHT MEDIUM
DISPLAY:GRATICULE FULL
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT HIGH
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT:AUTODIM:ENABLE 1
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:BACKLIGHT:AUTODIM:TIME 60
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:GRATICULE 75
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM 35
DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE 0.0E+0
DISPLAY:STYLE:DOTSONLY 0
DISPLAY:TRIGFREQUENCY 0
DISPLAY:XY OFF
DISPLAY:XY:WITHYT 0
DVM:AUTORANGE 0
DVM:DISPLAYSTYLE FULL
DVM:MODE OFF
DVM:SOURCE CH1
EMAIL:SETUP:FROMADDRESS "TestString"
EMAIL:SETUP:HOSTALIASNAME "TestString"

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-9

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
EMAIL:SETUP:SMTPLOGIN "TestString"
EMAIL:SETUP:SMTPPORT 25
EMAIL:SETUP:SMTPSERVER "TestString"
FASTACQ:STATE 0
HEADER 0
HISTOGRAM:BOXPCNT 20.0000,20.0000,80.0000,80.0000
HISTOGRAM:DISPLAY LINEAR
HISTOGRAM:MODE OFF
HISTOGRAM:SOURCE CH1
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE 1
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME 0.0E+0
HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 10000
4.0000E-6
LOCK NONE
MARKER:M1:FREQUENCY:ABSOLUTE 0.0E+0
MARKER:M2:FREQUENCY:ABSOLUTE 0.0E+0
MARKER:MANUAL 0
MARKER:PEAK:EXCURSION 30.0000
MARKER:PEAK:MAXIMUM 5
MARKER:PEAK:STATE 1
MARKER:PEAK:THRESHOLD -50.0000
MARKER:TYPE ABSOLUTE
MATH:AUTOSCALE 1
MATH:DEFINE "CH1+CH2"
MATH:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000
MATH: 4.0000E-6
MATH:HORIZONTAL:UNITS "s"
MATH:LABEL ""
MATH:SPECTRAL:MAG DB
MATH:SPECTRAL:WINDOW HANNING
MATH:TYPE DUAL
MATH:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E+0
MATH:VERTICAL:SCALE 100.0000E-3
MATH:VERTICAL:UNITS "V"
MATHVAR:VAR1 0.0E+0
MATHVAR:VAR2 0.0E+0

C-10 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
MEASUREMENT:GATING SCREEN
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE2 RISE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1 CH1
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2 CH2
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PERIOD
MEASUREMENT:INDICATORS:STATE OFF
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE2 RISE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE1 CH1
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE2 CH2
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE 0
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE PERIOD
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:DELAY:EDGE2 RISE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE1 CH1
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE2 CH2
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:STATE 0
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:TYPE PERIOD
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:EDGE2 RISE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:SOURCE1 CH1
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:SOURCE2 CH2
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:STATE 0
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:TYPE PERIOD
MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS
MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:DELAY:EDGE2 RISE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:SOURCE1 CH1
MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:SOURCE2 CH2
MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:STATE 0
MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:TYPE PERIOD
MEASUREMENT:METHOD AUTO

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-11

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0E+0
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW 0.0E+0
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID1 0.0E+0
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2 0.0E+0
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD PERCENT
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90.0000
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW 10.0000
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID1 50.0000
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2 50.0000
MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE ALL
MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:WEIGHTING 32
MESSAGE:BOX 167,67,167,83
MESSAGE:SHOW ""
MESSAGE:STATE 0
PICTBRIDGE:DATEPRINT DEFLT
PICTBRIDGE:IDPRINT OFF
PICTBRIDGE:IMAGESIZE DEFLT
PICTBRIDGE:PAPERSIZE DEFLT
PICTBRIDGE:PAPERTYPE DEFLT
PICTBRIDGE:PRINTQUAL DEFLT
REF1:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME 16.0000E-6
REF1: 4.0000E-6
REF1:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E+0
REF1:VERTICAL:SCALE 100.0000E-3
REF2:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME 16.0000E-6
REF2: 4.0000E-6
REF2:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E+0
REF2:VERTICAL:SCALE 100.0000E-3
REF3:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME 16.0000E-6
REF3: 4.0000E-6
REF3:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E+0
REF3:VERTICAL:SCALE 100.0000E-3
REF4:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME 16.0000E-6
REF4: 4.0000E-6
REF4:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E+0
REF4:VERTICAL:SCALE 100.0000E-3
ROSC:SOURCE INTERNAL

C-12 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
SAVE:ASSIGN:TYPE WAVEFORM
SAVE:IMAGE:FILEFORMAT PNG
SAVE:IMAGE:INKSAVER 1
SAVE:IMAGE:LAYOUT PORTRAIT
SAVE:WAVEFORM WFM
SAVE:WAVEFORM:GATING NONE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:STATE 0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:CONDITION SOF
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:OFFSET 0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:WORD EITHER
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:CONDITION SOF
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:OFFSET 0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FD:BRSBIT X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FD:ESIBIT X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FRAMETYPE DATA
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:MODE STANDARD
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR7
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:TYPE USER
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE "XXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:CONDITION START
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:CONDITION SYNCFIELD
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:ERRTYPE SYNC

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-13

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:PARALLEL:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:CONDITION TXSTART
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:RX:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:RX:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:TX:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:TX:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:CONDITION SS
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:MISO:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:MOSI:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:AUDIO:CONDITION SOF
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:AUDIO:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:AUDIO:DATA:OFFSET 0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:AUDIO:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:AUDIO:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:AUDIO:DATA:WORD EITHER
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:CONDITION SOF
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:OFFSET 0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:FD:BRSBIT X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:FD:ESIBIT X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:FRAMETYPE DATA
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:IDENTIFIER:MODE STANDARD
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR7
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:ADDRESS:TYPE USER
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE "XXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:CONDITION START
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:CONDITION SYNCFIELD
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX"

C-14 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:ERRTYPE SYNC
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:PARALLEL:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:CONDITION TXSTART
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:RX:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:RX:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:TX:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:TX:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:CONDITION SS
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:MISO:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:MOSI:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:SIZE 1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:BUS:SOURCE B1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE RISE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH1 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH2 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH3 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH4 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:MATH 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:REF1 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:REF2 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:REF3 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:REF4 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION AND
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH2 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH3 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH4 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CLOCK:EDGE RISE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CLOCK:SOURCE NONE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D0 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D1 X

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-15

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D10 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D11 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D12 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D13 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D14 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D15 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D2 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D3 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D4 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D5 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D6 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D7 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D8 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D9 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:MATH X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:REF1 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:REF2 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:REF3 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:REF4 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D0 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D1 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D10 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D11 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D12 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D13 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D14 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D15 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D2 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D3 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D4 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D5 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D6 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D7 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D8 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:D9 X
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN TRUE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:LESSLIMIT 8.0000E-9

C-16 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:MORELIMIT 8.0000E-9
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH2 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH3 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH4 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:MATH 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:REF1 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:REF2 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:REF3 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:REF4 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH1 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH2 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH3 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH4 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:MATH 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:REF1 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:REF2 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:REF3 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:REF4 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:HIGHLIMIT 12.0000E-9
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:LOWLIMIT 8.0000E-9
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:POLARITY POSITIVE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WHEN LESSTHAN
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WIDTH 8.0000E-9
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WIDTH 8.0000E-9
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE NONE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD 9.91E+37
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 8.0000E-9
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:SETTIME 8.0000E-9
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:CH1 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:CH2 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:CH3 0.0E+0

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-17

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:CH4 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:MATH 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:REF1 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:REF2 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:REF3 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:REF4 0.0E+0
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:POLARITY STAYSHIGH
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:TIME 8.0000E-9
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 8.0000E-9
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:POLARITY POSITIVE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:WHEN SLOWER
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TYPE EDGE
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH1 800.0000E-3
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH2 800.0000E-3
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH3 800.0000E-3
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH4 800.0000E-3
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:MATH 800.0000E-3
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:REF1 800.0000E-3
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:REF2 800.0000E-3
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:REF3 800.0000E-3
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:REF4 800.0000E-3
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:OFFSet 0
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BRSBIT X
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGGER:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:ESIBIT X
SELECT:CH1 1
SELECT:CH2 0
SELECT:CH3 0
SELECT:CH4 0
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:CONDITION SOF
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:OFFSET 0
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:AUDIO:DATA:WORD EITHER
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:CONDITION SOF
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:OFFSET 0

C-18 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:START 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FD:BRSBIT X
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FD:ESIBIT X
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:FRAMETYPE DATA
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:MODE STANDARD
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR7
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:TYPE USER
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE "XXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:CONDITION START
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:START 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:I2C:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:CONDITION SYNCFIELD
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:ERRTYPE SYNC
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:PARALLEL:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:CONDITION TXSTART
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:RX:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:RX:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:TX:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:RS232C:TX:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:CONDITION SS
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:IN:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:OUT:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B1:SPI:DATA:START 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:CONDITION SOF
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-19

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:OFFSET 0
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:START 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:FD:BRSBUT X
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:FD:ESIBIT X
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:FRAMETYPE DATA
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:IDENTIFIER:MODE STANDARD
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR7
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:ADDRESS:TYPE USER
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:ADDRESS:VALUE "XXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:CONDITION START
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:DIRECTION NOCARE
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:START 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:I2C:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:CONDITION SYNCFIELD
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:HIVALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:QUALIFIER EQUAL
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:ERRTYPE SYNC
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:LIN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE "XXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:PARALLEL:VALUE "XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:CONDITION TXSTART
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:RX:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:RX:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:TX:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:RS232C:TX:DATA:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:CONDITION SS
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:IN:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:OUT:VALUE "XXXXXXXX"
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:SIZE 1
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B2:SPI:DATA:START 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:OFFSet 0

C-20 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BRSBIT X
TRIGGER:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:ESIBIT X
TRIGGER:A:BUS:SOURCE B1
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:COUPLING DC
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE RISE
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1
TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:TIME 20.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH1 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH2 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH3 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH4 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D0 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D1 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D10 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D11 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D12 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D13 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D14 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D15 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D2 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D3 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D4 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D5 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D6 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D7 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D8 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:D9 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS LOGIC
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION AND
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH2 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH3 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH4 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CLOCK:EDGE RISE
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CLOCK:SOURCE NONE
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D0 X

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-21

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D1 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D10 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D11 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D12 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D13 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D14 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D15 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D2 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D3 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D4 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D5 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D6 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D7 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D8 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:D9 X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:DELTATIME 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN TRUE
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:LESSLIMIT 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:MORELIMIT 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH2 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH3 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH4 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D0 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D1 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D10 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D11 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D12 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D13 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D14 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D15 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D2 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D3 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D4 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D5 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D6 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D7 1.4000

C-22 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D8 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:D9 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH1 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH2 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH3 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH4 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D0 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D1 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D10 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D11 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D12 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D13 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D14 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D15 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D2 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D3 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D4 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D5 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D6 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D7 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D8 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:D9 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:MODE AUTO
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS WIDTH
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:HIGHLIMIT 12.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:LOWLIMIT 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:POLARITY POSITIVE
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WHEN LESSTHAN
TRIGGER:A:PULSEWIDTH:WIDTH 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS
TRIGGER:A:RUNT:WIDTH 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE NONE
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD 9.91E+37

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-23

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:SETTIME 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:CH1 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:CH2 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:CH3 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:CH4 0.0E+0
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D0 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D1 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D10 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D11 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D12 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D13 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D14 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D15 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D2 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D3 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D4 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D5 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D6 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D7 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D8 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:THRESHOLD:D9 1.4000
TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:POLARITY STAYSHIGH
TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:TIME 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 8.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:POLARITY POSITIVE
TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:WHEN SLOWER
TRIGGER:A:TYPE EDGE
TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH1 800.0000E-3
TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH2 800.0000E-3
TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH3 800.0000E-3
TRIGGER:A:UPPERTHRESHOLD:CH4 800.0000E-3
VERBOSE 1
VIDPIC:AUTOCONTRAST 1
VIDPIC:AUTOCONTRAST:UPDATERATE 20
ZOOM:MODE 0
ZOOM:ZOOM1:POSITION 50.0000

C-24 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix C: Factory Defaults

Table C-1: Default Values (cont.)

Item Description
ZOOM:ZOOM1:SCALE 4.0000E-6
ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATE 0

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual C-25

Appendix C: Factory Defaults

C-26 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe
Query) Examples
Here are several examples of command sequences using the WFMOutpre? and
CURVe? queries to transfer data from the instrument to a PC, with different
data sources, including Analog, Digital waveforms. Each command sequence
example is followed by an explanation of the returned WFMOutpre? results.
The WFMOutpre? values act as settings that apply to the CURVe query data
being transferred.

NOTE. In order to guarantee that the waveform data returned from CURVE?
queries of multiple waveforms are correlated to the same acquisition, you should
use single sequence acquisition mode to acquire the waveform data from a single
acquisition. Single sequence acquisition mode is enabled using SEQuence.

Example 1: Analog Waveform (Channels 1–4)

Goal: Transfer 10,000 points of analog channel waveform data from the
instrument to a PC.

Command Comment
:DATa:SOUrce CH1
:DATa:START 1
:DATa:STOP 10000
:WFMOutpre:ENCdg BINARY
:WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr 1
:HEADer 1
:WFMOutpre? Returns the following values. Each value represents the current settings that a
CURVe? query will use to format the data that will be transferred from the instrument
to a PC or other device (see next table for explanations):
:WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 1;BIT_NR 8;ENCDG BINARY;BN_FMT
RI;BYT_OR MSB;WFID "Ch1, DC coupling, 100.0mV/div,
4.000us/div, 10000 points, Sample mode";NR_PT
10000;PT_FMT Y;PT_ORDER LINEAR;XUNIT "s";XINCR
4.0000E-9;XZERO 139.9999E-12;PT_OFF 5000;YUNIT "V";YMULT
4.0000E-3;YOFF 0.0E+0;YZERO 0.0E+0
:CURVE? Returns 10,000 data points:
:CURVe #510000<10,000 binary bytes of waveform data.>

NOTE. You can also use the WAVFrm? query, which concatenates the WFMOutpre?
and CURVe? queries.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual D-1

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

BYT_NR 1 This value specifies the number of bytes per data point in the waveform data. To change
this value automatically, use the WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr command. Note that changing this
value automatically changes the BIT_NR value accordingly. (This value can also be set
using the command.)
BIT_NR 8 This value specifies the number of bits per data point in the waveform data. To change this
value, use the WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr command. Note that changing this value automatically
changes the BYT_NR value accordingly.
ENCDG BINARY This value specifies the encoding of the waveform data. To change this value (the other
possibility is ASCii), use the WFMOutpre:ENCdg command. (This value can also be set using
the DATa:ENCdg command, which provides the ability to set the WFMOutpre:ENCdg,
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt,: and WFMOutpre:BYT_Or values using a single command.)
BN_FMT RI This value specifies the binary format, which in this case is RI (signed integer). To change
this value (the other possibility is RP or positive integer), use the WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
command. Note: this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
BYT_OR MSB This value specifies the byte order for the BINARY encoding, which in this case is MSB
(most significant byte first). To change this value to LSB, use the WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
command. Note: this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
WFID "Ch1, DC This quoted string represents information about the source waveform that would be returned
coupling, 100.0mV/div, by a. WFMOutpre:WFId? query.
4.000us/div, 10000
points, Sample mode"
NR_PT 10000 This value indicates the number of data points in the waveform record to be transferred
using the CURVE? query. (If you would like to determine only this value, use the
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? query.) Note: this value is typically equal to the full record length,
but you also have the option to transfer only a portion of the record length by using the
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.
PT_FMT Y This value indicates the format of the data points in the waveform record. In this case,
the value represents YT format. This is query only – the returned values can be Y for YT
format or ENV for envelope format (min/max pairs). (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? query.)
PT_ORDER LINEAR This value is LINEAR or ROW.
XUNIT "s" This value indicates the units of the x-axis of the waveform record. This is determined by the
horizontal settings for the waveform source. Typically, this value is “s”, representing seconds.
When using the math waveform as a source, the value can be “s” or “Hz”. This is query only.
(If you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:XUNit? query.)
XINCR 4.0000E-9 This value indicates the time, in seconds, or frequency, in hertz, between data points in the
waveform record. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:XINcr? query.)
XZER0 139.9999E-12 This value indicates the sub-sample time between the trigger sample (designated by
PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trigger in the waveform record. The value is in
units of WFMOutpre:XUNit. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:XZEro? query.)
PT_OFF 5000 This value indicates the data point immediately following the trigger point relative to
DATa:STARt in the waveform record. This is a query only. (If you would like to determine
only this value, use the WFMOutpre:PT_Off? query.)

D-2 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

YUNIT "V" This value indicates the vertical units of data points in the waveform record. This can be
any of several string values, depending upon the vertical units of the source waveform –
in this case, volts. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:YUNit? query.)
YMULT 4.0000E-3 This value indicates the multiplying factor to convert the data point values from digitizing
levels to the units specified by the WFMOUTpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If
you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YMUlt? query.)
YOFF 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical position of the source waveform in digitizing levels. There
are 25 digitizing levels per vertical division. This is query only. (If you would like to determine
only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YOFf? query.)
YZERO 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical offset of the source waveform in units specified by the
WFMOUTpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:YZEro? query.)

Example 2: Digital Waveform

Goal: Transfer 25 points of digital channel waveform data from the instrument
to a PC.

Command Comment
:DATa:SOUrce CH1_D5
:DATa:START 1
:DATa:STOP 25
:WFMOutpre:ENCdg ASCii
:WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr 1
:HEADer 1
:VERBose 1
:WFMOutpre? Returns the following values. Each value represents the current settings that
a CURVe? query will use to format the data that will be transferred from the
instrument to a PC or other device (see next table for explanations):
:WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 1;BIT_NR 8;ENCDG ASCII;BN_FMT
RI;BYT_OR MSB;WFID "D5, unknown coupling,
100.0us/div, 10000 points, Digitalmode";NR_PT 25;PT_FMT
Y;PT_ORDER LINEAR;XUNIT "s";XINCR 100.0000E-9;XZERO
155.000E-12;PT_OFF 5000;YUNIT "State";YMULT 1.0000;YOFF
0.0E+0;YZERO 0.0E+0

:CURVe? Returns the following values. Each value represents a data point:
:CURVe 0,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0

NOTE. You can also use the WAVFrm? query, which concatenates the WFMOutpre?
and CURVe? queries.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual D-3

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 1 This value specifies the number of bytes per data point in the waveform data. To change
this value automatically, use the WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr command. Note that changing this
value automatically changes the BIT_NR value accordingly. (This value can also be set
using the DATa:WIDth command.)
BIT_NR 8 This value specifies the number of bits per data point in the waveform data. To change this
value, use the WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr command. Note that changing this value automatically
changes the BYT_NR value accordingly.
ENCDG ASCII This value specifies the encoding of the waveform data. To change this value (the
other possibility is BINARY), use the WFMOutpre:ENCdg command. (This value can
also be set using the DATa:ENCdg command, which provides the ability to set the
WFMOutpre:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt,: and WFMOutpre:BYT_Or values
using a single command.)
BN_FMT RI This value specifies the binary format, which in this case is RI (signed integer). To change
this value (the other possibility is RP or positive integer), use the WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
command. Note: this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
BYT_OR MSB This value specifies the byte order for the BINARY encoding, which in this case is MSB
(most significant byte first, also known as IBM format). To change this value to LSB, use the
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or command. Note: this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
WFID "D5, unknown This quoted string represents information about the source waveform that would be returned
coupling, 100.0us/div, by a. WFMOutpre:WFId? query. It cannot be changed.
10000 points, Digital
mode"
NR_PT 25 This value indicates the number of data points in the waveform record to be transferred
using the CURVE? query. (If you would like to determine only this value, use the
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? query.) Note: this value is typically equal to the full record length,
but you also have the option to transfer only a portion of the record length by using the
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.
PT_FMT Y This value indicates the format of the data points in the waveform record. In this case, the
value represents YT format. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? query.)
PT_ORDER LINEAR This value is always LINear.
XUNIT "s" This value indicates the units of the x-axis of the waveform record. This is determined by
the horizontal settings for the waveform source. Typically, this value is “s”, representing
seconds. When using the math waveform as a source, the value can be “s” or “Hz”. This
is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:XUNit?
query.)
XINCR 100.0000E-9 This value indicates the time, in seconds, or frequency, in hertz, between data points in the
waveform record. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:XINcr? query.)
XZER0 155.000E-12 This value indicates the sub-sample time between the trigger sample (designated by
PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trigger in the waveform record. The value is in
units of WFMOutpre:XUNit. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:XZEro? query.)
PT_OFF 5000 This value indicates the data point immediately following the trigger point relative to
DATa:STARt in the waveform record.(If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:PT_Off? query.)

D-4 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

YUNIT "State" This value indicates the vertical units of data points in the waveform record. This can be
any of several string values, depending upon the vertical units of the source waveform –
in this case, State. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:YUNit? query.)
YMULT 1.0000 This value indicates the multiplying factor to convert the data point values from digitizing
levels to the units specified by the WFMOUTpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If
you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YMUlt? query.)
YOFF 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical position of the source waveform in digitizing levels. There
are 25 digitizing levels per vertical division. This is query only. (If you would like to determine
only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YOFf? query.)
YZERO 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical offset of the source waveform in units specified by the
WFMOUTpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only
this value, use the WFMOutpre:YZEro? query.)

Example 3: Digital with 4 Bytes Per Point and Zoom Off

Goal: Transfer 25 points of Digital data from the instrument to a PC using 4
bytes per point and Zoom off.

Command Comment
:DATa:SOUrce CH1_D1
:ACQuire:MAGnivu 0
:DATa:START 1
:DATa:STOP 25
:WFMOutpre:ENCdg ASCii
:WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr 4
:HEADer 1
:VERBose 1
:WFMOutpre? Returns the following values. Each value represents the current settings that a
CURVe? query will use to format the data that will be transferred from the instrument
to a PC or other device (see next table for explanations):
:WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 4;BIT_NR 32;ENCDG ASCII;BN_FMT
RI;BYT_OR MSB;WFID "Digital, unknown coupling,
100.0us/div, 10000 points, Digital mode";NR_PT 25;PT_FMT
Y;PT_ORDER LINEAR;XUNIT "s";XINCR 100.0000E-9;XZERO
155.000E-12;PT_OFF 5000;YUNIT "State";YMULT 1.0000;YOFF
0.0E+0;YZERO 0.0E+0

:CURVe? Returns the following values. Each value represents a data point:
:CURVe
FB386,FB366,FB3E6,FB366,FB3E6,FB32E,FB3A2,FB32E,FB3AA,FB366,
FB3EA,FB366,FB3E2,FB36,FB3E6,FB366,FB3E6,FB346,FB3C6,FB346,FB3C6,
FB34E,FB3C2,FB34E,FB3CA

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual D-5

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

NOTE. The returned hexadecimal data values are formatted without leading
zeroes. For example, a 4-byte digital value of FB386 should be interpreted
as 000FB386.

NOTE. You can also use the WAVFrm? query, which concatenates the WFMOutpre?
and CURVe? queries.

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 4 This value specifies the number of bytes per data point in the waveform data. To change
this value automatically, use the WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr command. Note that changing this
value automatically changes the BIT_NR value accordingly. (This value can also be set
using the DATa:WIDth command.)
BIT_NR 32 This value specifies the number of bits per data point in the waveform data. To change this
value, use the WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr command. Note that changing this value automatically
changes the BYT_NR value accordingly.
ENCDG ASCII This value specifies the encoding of the waveform data. To change this value (the
other possibility is BINARY), use the WFMOutpre:ENCdg command. (This value can
also be set using the DATa:ENCdg command, which provides the ability to set the
WFMOutpre:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt,: and WFMOutpre:BYT_Or values
using a single command.)
BN_FMT RI This value specifies the binary format, which in this case is RI (signed integer). To change
this value (the other possibility is RP or positive integer), use the WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
command. Note: this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
BYT_OR MSB This value specifies the byte order for the BINARY encoding, which in this case is MSB
(most significant byte first, also known as IBM format). To change this value to LSB, use the
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or command. Note: this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
WFID "Digital, unknown This quoted string represents information about the source waveform that would be returned
coupling, 100.0us/div, by a. WFMOutpre:WFId? query. It cannot be changed.
10000 points, Digital
mode"
NR_PT 25 This value indicates the number of data points in the waveform record to be transferred
using the CURVE? query. (If you would like to determine only this value, use the
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? query.) Note: this value is typically equal to the full record length,
but you also have the option to transfer only a portion of the record length by using the
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.
PT_FMT Y This value indicates the format of the data points in the waveform record. In this case,
the value represents YT format. This is query only – the returned values can be Y for YT
format or ENV for envelope format (min/max pairs). (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? query.)
PT_ORDER LINEAR This value is always LINear.
XUNIT "s" This value indicates the units of the x-axis of the waveform record. This is determined by the
horizontal settings for the waveform source. For live channels, this value is “s”, representing
seconds. When using the math waveform as a source, the value can be “s” or “Hz”. This
is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:XUNit?
query.)

D-6 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

XINCR 100.0000E-9 This value indicates the time, in seconds, or frequency, in hertz, between data points in the
waveform record. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:XINcr? query.)
XZER0 155.000E-12 This value indicates the sub-sample time between the trigger sample (designated by
PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trigger in the waveform record. The value is in
units of WFMOutpre:XUNit. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:XZEro? query.)
PT_OFF 5000 This value indicates the data point immediately following the trigger point relative to
DATa:STARt in the waveform record. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:PT_Off? query.)
YUNIT "State" This value indicates the vertical units of data points in the waveform record. This can be
any of several string values, depending upon the vertical units of the source waveform –
in this case, State. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:YUNit? query.)
YMULT 1.0000 This value indicates the multiplying factor to convert the data point values from digitizing
levels to the units specified by the WFMOUTpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If
you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YMUlt? query.)
YOFF 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical position of the source waveform in digitizing levels. There
are 25 digitizing levels per vertical division. This is query only. (If you would like to determine
only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YOFf? query.)
YZERO 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical offset of the source waveform in units specified by the
WFMOUTpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:YZEro? query.)

Example 4: Digital with 8 Bytes Per Point and Zoom Off

Goal: Transfer 25 points of Digital data from the instrument to a PC using 8
bytes per point and Zoom off.

Command Comment
:DATa:SOUrce CH1_D1
:ACQuire:MAGnivu 0
:DATa:START 1
:DATa:STOP 25
:WFMOutpre:ENCdg ASCii
:WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr 8
:HEADer 1
:VERBose 1

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual D-7

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

Command Comment
:WFMOutpre? Returns the following values. Each value represents the current settings that a
CURVe? query will use to format the data that will be transferred from the instrument
to a PC or other device (see next table for explanations):
:WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 8;BIT_NR 64;ENCDG ASCII;BN_FMT
RI;BYT_OR MSB;WFID "Digital, unknown coupling,
100.0us/div, 10000 points, Digital mode";NR_PT 25;PT_FMT
Y;PT_ORDER LINEAR;XUNIT "s";XINCR 100.0000E-9;XZERO
155.000E-12;PT_OFF 5000;YUNIT "State";YMULT 1.0000;YOFF
0.0E+0;YZERO 0.0E+0
:CURVe? Returns the following values. Each value represents a data point:
:CURVe
80000FB386,E0000FB386,80000FB3E6,80000FB3E6,80000FB3E6,
C8000FB3A6,8C000FB3A6, 8C000FB3A6,84000FB3AE,CC000FB3A6,
8C000FB3E6,8C000FB3E6,84000FB3E6,80000FB3E6,80000FB3E6,
80000FB3E6,80000FB3E6,A0000FB3C6,80000FB3C6,80000FB3C6,
80000FB3C6,88000FB3C6,8C000FB3C6, 8C000FB3C6,84000FB3CE

NOTE. The returned hexadecimal data values are formatted without leading
zeroes.

NOTE. You can also use the WAVFrm? query, which concatenates the WFMOutpre?
and CURVe? queries.

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 8 This value specifies the number of bytes per data point in the waveform data. To change
this value automatically, use the WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr command. Note that changing this
value automatically changes the BIT_NR value accordingly. (This value can also be set
using the DATa:WIDth command.)
BIT_NR 64 This value specifies the number of bits per data point in the waveform data. To change this
value, use the WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr command. Note that changing this value automatically
changes the BYT_NR value accordingly.
ENCDG ASCII This value specifies the encoding of the waveform data. To change this value (the
other possibility is BINARY), use the WFMOutpre:ENCdg command. (This value can
also be set using the DATa:ENCdg command, which provides the ability to set the
WFMOutpre:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt,: and WFMOutpre:BYT_Or values
using a single command.)
BN_FMT RI This value specifies the binary format, which in this case is RI (signed integer). To change
this value (the other possibility is RP or positive integer), use the WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
command. Note: this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
BYT_OR MSB This value specifies the byte order for the BINARY encoding, which in this case is MSB
(most significant byte first, also known as IBM format). To change this value to LSB, use the
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or command. Note: this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.

D-8 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

WFID "Digital, unknown This quoted string represents information about the source waveform that would be returned
coupling, 100.0us/div, by a. WFMOutpre:WFId? query. It cannot be changed.
10000 points, Digital
mode"
NR_PT 25 This value indicates the number of data points in the waveform record to be transferred
using the CURVE? query. (If you would like to determine only this value, use the
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? query.) Note: this value is typically equal to the full record length,
but you also have the option to transfer only a portion of the record length by using the
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.
PT_FMT Y This value indicates the format of the data points in the waveform record. In this case,
the value represents YT format. This is query only – the returned values can be Y for YT
format or ENV for envelope format (min/max pairs). (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? query.)
PT_ORDER LINEAR This value is always LINear.
XUNIT "s" This value indicates the units of the x-axis of the waveform record. This is determined by the
horizontal settings for the waveform source. Typically, this value is “s”, representing seconds.
When using the math waveform as a source, the value can be “s” or “Hz”. This is query only.
(If you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:XUNit? query.)
XINCR 100.0000E-9 This value indicates the time, in seconds, or frequency, in hertz, between data points in the
waveform record. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:XINcr? query.)
XZER0 155.000E-12 This value indicates the sub-sample time between the trigger sample (designated by
PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trigger in the waveform record. The value is in
units of WFMOutpre:XUNit. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:XZEro? query.)
PT_OFF 5000 This value indicates the data point immediately following the trigger point relative to
DATa:STARt in the waveform record. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:PT_Off? query.)
YUNIT "State" This value indicates the vertical units of data points in the waveform record. This can be
any of several string values, depending upon the vertical units of the source waveform –
in this case, State. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:YUNit? query.)
YMULT 1.0000 This value indicates the multiplying factor to convert the data point values from digitizing
levels to the units specified by the WFMOUTpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If
you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YMUlt? query.)
YOFF 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical position of the source waveform in digitizing levels. There
are 25 digitizing levels per vertical division. This is query only. (If you would like to determine
only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YOFf? query.)
YZERO 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical offset of the source waveform in units specified by the
WFMOUTpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:YZEro? query.)

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual D-9

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

Example 5: Digital with 4 Bytes Per Point and Zoom On

Goal: Transfer 25 points of Digital data from the instrument to a PC using 4
bytes per point and Zoom on.

Command Comment
:DATa:SOUrce CH1_D1
:ACQuire:MAGnivu 1
:DATa:START 1
:DATa:STOP 25
:WFMOutpre:ENCdg ASCii
:WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr 4
:HEADer 1
:VERBose 1
:WFMOutpre? Returns the following values. Each value represents the current settings that a
CURVe? query will use to format the data that will be transferred from the instrument
to a PC or other device (see next table for explanations):
:WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 4;BIT_NR 32;ENCDG ASCII;BN_FMT
RI;BYT_OR MSB;WFID "Digital, unknown coupling,
100.0us/div, 10000 points, Digital mode";NR_PT 25;PT_FMT
Y;PT_ORDER LINEAR;XUNIT "s";XINCR 1.2121E-9;XZERO
155.000E-12;PT_OFF 5000;YUNIT "State";YMULT 1.0000;YOFF
0.0E+0;YZERO 0.0E+0

:CURVe? Returns the following values. Each value represents a data point:
:CURVe
FB6E6,FB666,FB6E6,FB666,FB666,FB6E6,FB666,FB6E6,FB666,
FB666, FB6E6,FB666,FB6E6,FB6E6,FB666,FB6E6,FB666,FB666,
FB6E6,FB666,FB6E6,FB6E6,FB666,FB6E6,FB666

NOTE. The returned hexadecimal data values are formatted without leading
zeroes.

NOTE. You can also use the WAVFrm? query, which concatenates the WFMOutpre?
and CURVe? queries.

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 4 This value specifies the number of bytes per data point in the waveform data. To change
this value automatically, use the WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr command. Note that changing this
value automatically changes the BIT_NR value accordingly. (This value can also be set
using the DATa:WIDth command.)
BIT_NR 32 This value specifies the number of bits per data point in the waveform data. To change this
value, use the WFMOutpre:BIT_Nrcommand. Note that changing this value automatically
changes the BYT_NR value accordingly.

D-10 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

ENCDG ASCII This value specifies the encoding of the waveform data. To change this value (the
other possibility is BINARY), use the WFMOutpre:ENCdg command. (This value can
also be set using the DATa:ENCdg command, which provides the ability to set the
WFMOutpre:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt,: and WFMOutpre:BYT_Or values
using a single command.)
BN_FMT RI This value specifies the binary format, which in this case is RI (signed integer). To change
this value (the other possibility is RP or positive integer), use the WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
command. Note: this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
BYT_OR MSB This value specifies the byte order for the BINARY encoding, which in this case is MSB
(most significant byte first, also known as IBM format). To change this value to LSB, use the
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or command. Note: this field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
WFID "Digital, unknown This quoted string represents information about the source waveform that would be returned
coupling, 100.0us/div, by a. WFMOutpre:WFId? query. It cannot be changed.
10000 points, Digital
mode"
NR_PT 25 This value indicates the number of data points in the waveform record to be transferred
using the CURVE? query. (If you would like to determine only this value, use the
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? query.) Note: this value is typically equal to the full record length,
but you also have the option to transfer only a portion of the record length by using the
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.
PT_FMT Y This value indicates the format of the data points in the waveform record. In this case,
the value represents YT format. This is query only – the returned values can be Y for YT
format or ENV for envelope format (min/max pairs). (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? query.)
PT_ORDER LINEAR This value is always LINear.
XUNIT "s" This value indicates the units of the x-axis of the waveform record. This is determined by the
horizontal settings for the waveform source. Typically, this value is “s”, representing seconds.
When using the math waveform as a source, the value can be “s” or “Hz”. This is query only.
(If you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:XUNit? query.)
XINCR 1.2121E-9 This value indicates the time, in seconds, or frequency, in hertz, between data points in the
waveform record. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:XINcr? query.)
XZER0 155.000E-12 This value indicates the sub-sample time between the trigger sample (designated by
PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trigger in the waveform record. The value is in
units of WFMOutpre:XUNit. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:XZEro? query.)
PT_OFF 5000 This value indicates the data point immediately following the trigger point relative to
DATa:STARt in the waveform record. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:PT_Off? query.)
YUNIT "State" This value indicates the vertical units of data points in the waveform record. This can be
any of several string values, depending upon the vertical units of the source waveform –
in this case, State. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:YUNit? query.)
YMULT 1.0000 This value indicates the multiplying factor to convert the data point values from digitizing
levels to the units specified by the WFMOUTpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If
you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YMUlt? query.)

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual D-11

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

YOFF 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical position of the source waveform in digitizing levels. There
are 25 digitizing levels per vertical division. This is query only. (If you would like to determine
only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YOFf? query.)
YZERO 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical offset of the source waveform in units specified by the
WFMOUTpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:YZEro? query.)

Example 6: RF Frequency Domain Waveform

Goal: Transfer 5 points of RF frequency domain data from the instrument to
a PC using 8 bytes per point.

NOTE. A frequency domain waveform used in data transfer from the instrument
to a PC or other device may be one of the four RF frequency domain traces or
the Spectrum Math waveform.

Command Comment
:DATa:SOUrce CH1_SV_NORMal
:DATa:STARt 495
:DATa:STOP 505
:WFMOutpre:ENCdg ASCii
:WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr 8
:HEADer 1
:VERBose 1
:WFMOutpre? Returns the following values. Each value represents the current settings that a
CURVe? query will use to format the data that will be transferred from the instrument
to a PC or other device (see next table for explanations):
:WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 8;BIT_NR 64;ENCDG ASCII;BN_FMT
FP;BYT_OR MSB;WFID "RF_NORMAL, unknown coupling,
10.00W/div, 200.0MHz/div, 1001 points, Sample mode,
Center Freq: 2.400GHz, Span: 2.000GHz, Reference
Level: 1.000mW";NR_PT 21;PT_FMT Y;PT_ORDER LINEAR;XUNIT
"Hz";XINCR 2.0000E+6;XZERO 1.4000E+9;PT_OFF 0;YUNIT
"W";YMULT 1.5625E-3;YOFF 0.0E+0;YZERO 0.0E+0;DOMAIN
FREQUENCY;WFMTYPE RF_FD;CENTERFREQUENCY 2.4000E+9;SPAN
2.0000E+9;REFLEVEL 1.0000E-3
:CURVe? Returns the following values. Each value represents a data point:
:CURVE
2.43108E-10,1.62648E-10,2.78478E-10,4.15163E-10,7.66223E-10,
7.63905E-10,3.68375E-10,3.42668E-10,3.06422E-10,1.81561E-10,
2.0223E-10,4.24327E-10,1.95298E-10,2.1304E-10,9.41791E-11,
4.56513E-10,4.33067E-10,6.57215E-11,1.65388E-10,9.09116E-10,
5.39507E-10

D-12 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

WFMOutpre? Query results Explanation

BYT_NR 8 This value specifies the number of bytes per data point in the waveform data. This value
is fixed for RF frequency domain traces.
BIT_NR 64 This value specifies the number of bits per data point in the waveform data. This value
is fixed for RF frequency domain traces.
ENCDG ASCII This value specifies the encoding of the waveform data. To change this value (the other
possibility for RF frequency domain traces is FPBINARY), use the WFMOutpre:ENCdg
command. This value can also be set using the DATa:ENCdg command.
BN_FMT FP This value specifies the binary format, which in this case is FP (floating point). This value is
fixed for RF frequency domain traces. Note: This field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
BYT_OR MSB This value specifies the byte order for the BINARY encoding, which in this case is MSB
(most significant byte first, also known as IBM format). To change this value to LSB, use the
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or command. Note: This field is not applicable for ASCii encoding.
WFID "CH1_SV_NORMal, unknown This quoted string represents information about the source waveform that would be returned
coupling, 10.00W/div, 200.0MHz/div, by a WFMOutpre:WFId? Query. It cannot be changed.
1001 points, Sample mode, Center
Freq: 2.400GHz, Span: 2.000GHz,
Reference Level: 1.000mW"
NR_PT 21 This value indicates the number of data points in the waveform record. (If you would like to
determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? query.) Note: This value is typically
equal to the full record length of the RF frequency domain trace, but you also have the option
to transfer only a portion of the record using the DATs:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.
PT_FMT Y This value indicates the format of the data points in the waveform record. In this case, the
value represents YF (Amplitude vs. Frequency) format. This is query only. (If you would like
to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? query.
PT_ORDER LINEAR . This value is always LINear
XUNIT "Hz" This value indicates the units of the x-axis of the waveform record. This value is always “Hz”
for RF frequency domain traces. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this
value, use the WFMOutpre:XUNit? query.)
XINCR 2.0000E+6 This value indicates the frequency, in hertz, between data points in the waveform record.
This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:XINcr?
query.)
XZERO 1.4000E+9 This value indicates the frequency, in hertz, of the first data point in the waveform record.
This frequency is relative to the time of the trigger, which is always 0. This XZEro frequency
can be negative. This is query only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use
the WFMOutpre:XZEro? query.)
PT_OFF 0 This is a query provided only for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments. The
returned value is always 0. (If you would like to determine only this value, use the
WFMOutpre:PT_Off? query.)
YUNIT "W" This value indicates the units of data points in the waveform record. This value depends on
the vertical units of the source waveform – in this case, watts. This is query only. (If you
would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YUNit? query.)
YMULT 1.5625E-3 This value indicates the multiplying factor to convert the data point values to the units
specified by the:WFMOutpre:YUNit command. This is query only. (If you would like to
determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:YMUlt? query.)

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual D-13

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

YOFF 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical position of the source waveform. This value is unused for
RF frequency domain traces and is always 0.
YZERO 0.0E+0 This value indicates the vertical offset of the source waveform. This value is unused for RF
frequency domain traces and is always 0.
DOMAIN FREQUENCY This value indicates the domain in which the source waveform is displayed and stored. For
RF time domain traces, the domain is Time and waveform transfer information is treated
as integer information. For RF frequency domain traces, the domain is Frequency and
waveform transfer information is treated as floating point information. This is query only. (If
you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:DOMain? query.)
WFMTYPE RF_FD This value indicates the type of the source waveform. RF_FD indicates an RF frequency
domain trace (frequency domain waveform). This is query only. (If you would like to
determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:WFMTYPe? query.)
CENTERFREQUENCY 2.4000E+9 This value indicates the center frequency, in hertz, of the source waveform. This is query only.
(If you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:CENTERFREQuency?
query.)
SPAN 2.0000E+9 This value indicates the frequency span, in hertz, of the source waveform. This is query
only. (If you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:SPAN? query.)
REFLEVEL 1.0000E-3 This value indicates the reference level, in watts, of the source waveform. This is query only.
(If you would like to determine only this value, use the WFMOutpre:REFLEvel? query.)

Example 7: Baseband IQ Waveform

Goal: Transfer Baseband I and Q data from the instrument to a PC.

NOTE. Requires SV-RFVT option.

Command Comment
:DATa:SOUrce CH1_BASEBAND_IQ
:DATa:WIDth 2 Set data width for every I,Q pair to 2.
:WFMOutpre:ENCdg SRIbinary Request data LSB first.
:WFMOutpre:YMUlt? Apply 2*YMUlt scaling to I and Q samples returned by CURVe?

D-14 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

Command Comment
:WFMOutpre? Returns the following values. Each value represents the current settings that
aCURVe? query will use to format the data that will be transferred from the instrument
to a PC or other device:
:WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 1;BIT_NR 8;:WFMOUTPRE:ENCDG
BINARY;BN_FMT RI;:WFMOUTPRE:ASC_FMT INTEGER;BYT_OR
MSB;:WFMOUTPRE:WFID "CH1_SV_BASEBAND_IQ, 5062
points, Center Freq: 1GHz, Span: 312.5MHz";NR_PT
9;:WFMOUTPRE:PT_FMT ENV;PT_ORDER LINEAR;:WFMOUTPRE:XUNIT
"s";XINCR 1.280E-9;:WFMOUTPRE:XZERO 815.000E-12;PT_OFF
0;:WFMOUTPRE:YUNIT "V";YMULT 8.0000E-3;:WFMOUTPRE:YOFF
0.0E+0;YZERO0.0E+0;:WFMOUTPRE:DOMAIN TIME;WFMTYPE
F_TD;:WFMOUTPRE:CENTERFREQUENCY 1.0000E+9;SPAN
312.5000E+6

:CURVe? CURVe? will transmit NR_Pt points which are interleaved I and Q pairs. The result
can be read from the binary buffer as uint16 to get I and Q pair values in “digitizing
levels”. Multiply the digitizing level value by 2*YMUlt to get absolute I and Q point
values.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual D-15

Appendix D: Waveform Transfer (WFMOutpre and CURVe Query) Examples

D-16 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Appendix E: Search and Trigger Command Sequence
Examples
The following are some example command sequences that show a variety of
different searches and triggers. The commands in these sequences are not
order-dependent.
To use these examples, connect channel 1, channel 2, channel 3 and channel 4 to
the probe compensation signal located on the right hand side of the front panel.
The search and trigger command group sections contain more information on
general search and trigger concepts. ,

Example 1: Single Threshold Edge Search

Goal: Search the channel 2 waveform and place a mark at each instance where it
crosses below a threshold of 1.4 volts.

Command Comment
*RST;:*OPC? Resets the instrument and waits for that operation to complete
(approximately 1 to 5 seconds depending on the complexity of
the previous setup).
display:waveview1:ch2:state 1 Turns the CH2 waveform on.
:AUTOset EXECute>;*OPC? Autosets the displayed waveform CH2 and waits for the auto
setup to complete.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TYPe EDGE Specifies that this will be an edge search (a mark will be placed
when the source waveform passes through a specified threshold
level in the specified direction).
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce CH2 Specifies the CH2 waveform as the source waveform.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH2 1.4 Specifies 1.4 volts as the threshold level.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe FALL Specifies the falling edge as the direction.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:STATE 1 Turns the search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TOTal? Returns 4, indicating that CH2 fell below the 1.4 volt threshold 4
times.

Example 2: Single Threshold Edge Trigger

Goal: Trigger on the channel 2 waveform when the waveform crosses below a
threshold of 1.4 volts.

Command Comment
*RST Resets the instrument. Wait for the reset to complete (approximately
3 seconds).
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH2:STATE 1 Turns the CH2 waveform on.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual E-1

Appendix E: Search and Trigger Command Sequence Examples

Command Comment
:TRIGger:A:TYPe EDGE Specifies that this will be an edge trigger (trigger will occur when the
source waveform passes through a specified threshold level in the
specified direction).
:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce CH2 Specifies the CH2 waveform as the source waveform.
:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH2 1.4 Specifies 1.4 volts as the threshold level.
:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe FALL Specifies as falling edge as the direction.
:TRIGger:STATE? Should return TRIGGER, not AUTO.

Example 3: Dual Threshold Runt Search

Goal: Search the channel 3 waveform for negative runt pulses and place a mark at
each instance when the waveform drops below an upper threshold of 1.4 volts, but
does not cross a lower threshold of -2 volts before re-crossing the upper threshold.
The pulse width must be less than 600 microseconds.

Command Comment
*RST Resets the instrument. Wait for the reset to complete (approximately
3 seconds).
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH3:STATE 1 Turns the CH3 waveform on.
:AUTOset EXECute Autosets the displayed waveform CH3. Wait for the autoset to
complete (approximately 3 seconds).
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TYPe RUNT Specifies that this will be a runt search (a mark will be placed on
a pulse amplitude that crosses one threshold but fails to cross a
second threshold before re-crossing the first).
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce CH3 Specifies to use channel 3 as the source waveform.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH3 -2 Specifies to use -2 volts as the lower threshold.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold: CH3 1.4 Specifies to use 1.4 volts as the upper threshold.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity NEGative Specifies to search for when the runt polarity is negative.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth 600E-6 Specifies a pulse width of 600E-6 seconds.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn LESSthan Specifies to search for when the pulse width is less than
600E-6 seconds.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:STATE 1 Turns the search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TOTal? Returns 3, indicating that 3 total negative runt pulses were less than
600E-6 seconds wide

NOTE. You could use a similar command sequence with a transition type search.

E-2 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Appendix E: Search and Trigger Command Sequence Examples

Example 4: Single Threshold Logic Search on Three Waveforms

Goal: Search the channel 1, 2 and 3 waveforms and place a mark at each instance
when either channel 1 is above 1.4 volts, channel 2 is above 1.5 volts, or channel
3 is above 1.3 volts.

Command Comment
*RST Resets the instrument. Wait for the reset to complete
(approximately 3 seconds).
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH1:STATE 1 Turns the CH1 waveform on.
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH2:STATE 1 Turns the CH2 waveform on.
:DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW1:CH3:STATE 1 Turns the CH3 waveform on.
:AUTOset EXECute Autosets the displayed waveforms CH1, CH2 and CH3. Wait
for the autoset to complete (approximately 3 seconds).
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:TYPe LOGIc Specifies that this will be a logic search (a mark will be placed
when all channels transition to the specified state).
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH1 HIGH Specifies the Boolean logic criteria for channel 1; in this case,
high.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH2 HIGH Specifies the Boolean logic criteria for channel 2; in this case,
high.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH3 HIGH Specifies the Boolean logic criteria for channel 3; in this case,
high.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH1 1.4 Specifies to use 1.4 volts as the threshold for CH1.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH2 1.5 Specifies to use 1.5 volts as the threshold for CH2.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH3 1.3 Specifies to use 1.3 volts as the threshold for CH3.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn TRUE Specifies the condition for generating a logic pattern search;
in this case, true.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion OR Specifies the logic operator for the logic search; in this case,
OR.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:STATE 1 Turns the search on.
SEARCH:SEARCH1:TOTal? Returns 3 or 4, indicating 3 or 4 times when one of channels
1, 2 or 3 became high.
Note: Depending upon the number of transitions displayed,
you may get 3 or 4 search marks for this example. If you get
3 search marks, try adjusting the horizontal position until you
see 4 search marks.

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual E-3

Appendix E: Search and Trigger Command Sequence Examples

E-4 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Glossary
ASCII
Acronym for the American Standard Code for Information Interchange.
Controllers transmit commands to the instrument using ASCII character encoding.
Address
A 7-bit code that identifies an instrument on the communication bus. The
digitizing instrument must have a unique address for the controller to recognize
and transmit commands to it.
Backus-Naur Form (BNF)
A standard notation system for command syntax diagrams. The syntax diagrams
in this manual use BNF notation.
Controller
A computer or other device that sends commands to and accepts responses from
the digitizing instrument.
EOI
A mnemonic referring to the control line End or Identify. One of the two possible
end-of-message terminators.
EOM
A generic acronym referring to the end-of-message terminator. The
end-of-message terminator can be either an EOI or the ASCII code for line feed
(LF).
Equivalent-Time sampling (ET)
A sampling mode in which the instrument acquires signals over many repetitions
of the event. This instrument uses a type of equivalent time sampling called
random equivalent time sampling. It utilizes an internal clock that runs
asynchronously with respect to the input signal and the signal trigger. The
instrument takes samples continuously, independent of the trigger position, and
displays them based on the time difference between the sample and the trigger.
Although the samples are taken sequentially in time, they are random with respect
to the trigger.
Real-Time sampling
A sampling mode where the instrument samples fast enough to completely fill a
waveform record from a single trigger event. Use real-time sampling to capture
single-shot or transient events.
IEEE
An acronym for the Institute for Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
Serial poll
A device on the bus can request service from the Controller by asserting the SRQ
line. When a controller acknowledges the SRQ, it serial polls each device on
the bus to determine which device on the bus requested service. Any device
requesting service returns a status byte indicating it needs to be serviced and then

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual Glossary-1

Glossary

unasserts the SRQ line. Devices not requiring service return a status byte that
indicates they do not need servicing.
TEKSecure
A Tektronix custom command that initializes both waveform and setup memories.
This overwrites any previously stored data.

Glossary-2 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

Index

A ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:STOPACQ:
ACQuire?, 2-73 STATE, 2-89
ACQuire:MAXSamplerate?, 2-73 ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:
ACQuire:MODe, 2-73 STATE, 2-90
ACQuire:NUMACq?, 2-74 ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:
ACQuire:NUMAVg, 2-75 SAVEWAVEform:STATE, 2-91
ACQuire:SEQuence:CURrent?, 2-75 ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:SRQ:
ACQuire:SEQuence:MODe, 2-76 STATE, 2-91
ACQuire:SEQuence:NUMSEQuence, 2-76 ACTONEVent:SEARCH:ACTION:STOPACQ:
ACQuire:STATE, 2-76 STATE, 2-92
ACQuire:STOPAfter, 2-77 ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe:
ACTONEVent:ENable, 2-78 STATE, 2-93
ACTONEVent:LIMit, 2-78 ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SAVEWAVEform:
ACTONEVent:LIMITCount, 2-79 STATE, 2-93
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe: ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:SRQ:STATE, 2-94
STATE, 2-79 ACTONEVent:TRIGger:ACTION:STOPACQ:
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION: STATE, 2-95
SAVEWAVEform:STATE, 2-80 AFG:AMPLitude, 2-95
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:SRQ: AFG:ARBitrary:SOUrce, 2-96
STATE, 2-81 AFG:BURSt:CCOUnt, 2-96
ACTONEVent:MASKFail:ACTION:STOPACQ: AFG:BURSt:TRIGger, 2-97
STATE, 2-81 AFG:FREQuency, 2-97
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe: AFG:FUNCtion, 2-98
STATE, 2-82 AFG:HIGHLevel, 2-98
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION: AFG:LOWLevel, 2-99
SAVEWAVEform:STATE, 2-83 AFG:NOISEAdd:PERCent, 2-99
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:SRQ: AFG:NOISEAdd:STATE, 2-100
STATE, 2-83 AFG:OFFSet, 2-100
ACTONEVent:MASKHit:ACTION:STOPACQ: AFG:OUTPut:LOAd:IMPEDance, 2-101
STATE, 2-84 AFG:OUTPut:MODe, 2-101
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SAVEIMAGe: AFG:OUTPut:STATE, 2-102
STATE, 2-84 AFG:PERIod, 2-102
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION: AFG:PULse:WIDth, 2-103
SAVEWAVEform:STATE, 2-85 AFG:RAMP:SYMmetry, 2-103
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:SRQ: AFG:SQUare:DUty, 2-104
STATE, 2-86 ALIas, 2-104
ACTONEVent:MASKPass:ACTION:STOPACQ: ALIas:CATalog?, 2-105
STATE, 2-86 ALIas:DEFine, 2-105
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION: ALIas:DELEte, 2-106
SAVEIMAGe:STATE, 2-87 ALIas:DELEte:ALL, 2-107
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION: ALIas:DELEte:NAMe, 2-107
SAVEWAVEform:STATE, 2-88 ALIas:STATE, 2-107
ACTONEVent:MEASUrement:ACTION:SRQ: ALLEv?, 2-108
STATE, 2-89 AUTOSAVEPITIMEOUT, 2-108

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-1

Index

AUTOSAVEUITIMEOUT, 2-109 BUS:B<x>:LIN:POLarity, 2-134

AUTOSet, 2-109 BUS:B<x>:LIN:SAMPLEpoint, 2-135
AUTOSet:ACQuisition:ENAble, 2-110 BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce, 2-135
AUTOSet:ENAble, 2-110 BUS:B<x>:LIN:SOUrce:THReshold, 2-136
AUTOSet:HORizontal:ENAble, 2-111 BUS:B<x>:LIN:STANDard, 2-136
AUTOSet:TRIGger:ENAble, 2-111 BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds, 2-137
AUTOSet:VERTical:ENAble, 2-112 BUS:B<x>:PARallel:ALLTHResholds:APPly, 2-138
AUTOSet:VERTical:OPTIMize, 2-113 BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<n>SOUrce:
AUXout:EDGE, 2-113 THReshold, 2-139
AUXout:SOUrce, 2-114 BUS:B<x>:PARallel:BIT<x>SOUrce, 2-138
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:EDGE, 2-139
B BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCk:ISCLOCKED, 2-140
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCkSOUrce, 2-140
BATTery:ACPOWer?, 2-114
BUS:B<x>:PARallel:CLOCKSOUrce:
BATTery:SLOT<1,2>:CHARGE?, 2-115
THReshold, 2-141
BATTery:SLOT<1,2>:INSTalled?, 2-115
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate, 2-142
BATTery:SLOT<1,2>:SERIALnumber?, 2-116
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:BITRate:CUSTom, 2-142
BATTery:SLOT<1,2>:TIMETOEMPty?, 2-116
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATABits, 2-143
BATTery:SLOT<1,2>:TIMETOFULL?, 2-116
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DELIMiter, 2-144
BUS:ADDNew, 2-117
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DISplaymode, 2-144
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate, 2-117
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:PARity, 2-145
BUS:B<x>:CAN:BITRate:VALue, 2-118
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:POLarity, 2-146
BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate, 2-119
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:SOUrce, 2-146
BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BITRate:CUSTom, 2-119
BUS:B<x>:RS232C:SOUrce:THReshold, 2-147
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SAMPLEpoint, 2-120
BUS:B<x>:SENT:CHANWidth, 2-147
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SIGNal, 2-121
BUS:B<x>:SENT:NIBBLECount, 2-148
BUS:B<x>:CAN:SOUrce, 2-121
BUS:B<x>:SENT:NUMCHANnel, 2-149
BUS:B<x>:CAN:STANDard, 2-122
BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSEPULSe, 2-149
BUS:B<x>:CAN:THReshold, 2-122
BUS:B<x>:SENT:POLARITY, 2-150
BUS:B<x>:DISplay:FORMat, 2-123
BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW, 2-150
BUS:B<x>:DISplay:LAYout, 2-124
BUS:B<x>:SENT:SOUrce, 2-151
BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-124
BUS:B<x>:SENT:THRESHold, 2-152
BUS:B<x>:I2C:CLOCk:THReshold, 2-125
BUS:B<x>:SENT:TICKTIME, 2-152
BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SOUrce, 2-126
BUS:B<x>:SENT:TICKTOLerance, 2-153
BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:THReshold, 2-126
BUS:B<x>:SPI:BITOrder, 2-153
BUS:B<x>:I2C:RWINADDR, 2-127
BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:POLarity, 2-154
BUS:B<x>:LABel:COLor, 2-128
BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-155
BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD, 2-128
BUS:B<x>:SPI:CLOCk:THReshold, 2-156
BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic, 2-129
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:POLarity, 2-156
BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE, 2-129
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe, 2-157
BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE, 2-130
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SOUrce, 2-157
BUS:B<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline, 2-130
BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:THReshold, 2-158
BUS:B<x>:LABel:name, 2-131
BUS:B<x>:SPI:FRAMING, 2-158
BUS:B<x>:LABel:XPOS, 2-131
BUS:B<x>:SPI:IDLETime, 2-159
BUS:B<x>:LABel:YPOS, 2-132
BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:DATa:POLarity, 2-160
BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate, 2-132
BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:INPut, 2-160
BUS:B<x>:LIN:BITRate:CUSTom, 2-133
BUS:B<x>:SPI:MISo:THReshold, 2-161
BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDFORmat, 2-134

Index-2 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Index

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:DATa:POLarity, 2-161 CH<x>:LABel:COLor, 2-182

BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:INPut, 2-162 CH<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD, 2-182
BUS:B<x>:SPI:MOSi:THReshold, 2-163 CH<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic, 2-183
BUS:B<x>:SPI:NUMBer:INputs, 2-163 CH<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE, 2-183
BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:POLarity, 2-164 CH<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE, 2-184
BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:SOUrce, 2-164 CH<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline, 2-184
BUS:B<x>:SPI:SELect:THReshold, 2-165 CH<x>:LABel:NAMe, 2-185
BUS:B<x>:TYPe, 2-166 CH<x>:LABel:XPOS, 2-185
BUS:DELete, 2-167 CH<x>:LABel:YPOS, 2-186
BUS:LIST?, 2-167 CH<x>:OFFSet, 2-186
BUSTABle:ADDNew, 2-167 CH<x>:POSition, 2-187
BUSTABle:DELete, 2-168 CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten, 2-187
BUSTABle:LIST?, 2-168 CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten, 2-188
BUSY?, 2-168 CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits, 2-188
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits:STATE, 2-189
C CH<x>:SCAle, 2-189
CH<x>:SCALERATio, 2-190
*CAL?, 2-169
CH<x>:TERmination, 2-190
CALibrate?, 2-169
CH<x>:VTERm:BIAS, 2-191
CALibrate:INTERNal, 2-170
CLEAR, 2-191
CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt, 2-170
*CLS, 2-192
CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus?, 2-171
Command Groups, 2-11
CALibrate:PWRUpstatus?, 2-172
CONFIGuration:ANALOg:BANDWidth?, 2-193
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>, 2-172
CONNected:REQUested:STATus , 2-193
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:BOOKMark:
CONNected:STATus?, 2-193
SOURCE, 2-172
CONNected:USAGe:TRack:REQUested:
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:BOOKMark:
STATus, 2-194
XPOS, 2-173
CONNected:USAGe:TRack:STATus?, 2-194
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:COLOR, 2-173
CURVe?, 2-195
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:DISPLAYPOSition:
CURVEStream?, 2-196
X, 2-174
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:DISPLAYPOSition:
Y, 2-174 D
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:BOLD, 2-175 DATa, 2-198
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:ITALIC, 2-175 DATa:ENCdg, 2-199
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:SIZE, 2-176 DATA:MODe , 2-201
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT:TYPE, 2-176 DATa:RESample, 2-201
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:FONT: DATa:SOUrce, 2-202
UNDERLine, 2-176 DATa:SOUrce:AVAILable?, 2-203
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:TEXT, 2-177 DATa:STARt, 2-203
CALLOUTS:CALLOUT<x>:TYPE, 2-177 DATa:STOP, 2-204
CH<x>?, 2-178 DATa:WIDth, 2-205
CH<x>:BANdwidth, 2-178 DATE?, 2-205
CH<x>:CLIPping?, 2-179 DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:COLor, 2-206
CH<x>:COUPling, 2-179 DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD, 2-207
CH<x>:DESKew, 2-180 DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic, 2-207
CH<x>:DITHERrange, 2-181 DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE, 2-208
CH<x>:INVert, 2-181 DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE, 2-208

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-3

Index

DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline, 2-209 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:

DCH<x>_D<x>:LABel:NAMe, 2-209 BUNIts?, 2-227
DCH<x>:D<x>:THReshold, 2-206 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:
*DDT, 2-210 DELTa?, 2-228
DESE, 2-211 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:MODe, 2-228
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion, 2-212 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:
DIAg:LOOP:OPTion:NTIMes, 2-212 ONEOVERDELTATVALUE?, 2-229
DIAg:LOOP:STOP, 2-212 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:
DIAg:MODe, 2-213 AXPOSition, 2-229
DIAg:RESUlt?, 2-213 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?, 2-214 AYPOSition, 2-230
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?, 2-214 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:
DIAg:SELect, 2-214 BXPOSition, 2-230
DIAg:STATE, 2-215 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:
DISplay?, 2-215 BYPOSition, 2-231
DISplay:{CH<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>}: DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:STATE, 2-231
INVERTColor, 2-216 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:
DISplay:{CH<x>|Math<x>|REF<x>}: APOSition, 2-232
NORMALColor, 2-217 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:
DISplay:COLors, 2-217 AUNIts?, 2-232
DISplay:GLObal:B<x>:STATE, 2-218 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:
DISplay:GLObal:CH<x>:STATE, 2-218 BPOSition, 2-233
DISplay:GLObal:DCH<x>:STATE, 2-219 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:
DISplay:GLObal:MATH<x>:STATE, 2-220 BUNIts?, 2-233
DISplay:GLObal:REF<x>:STATE, 2-220 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:
DISplay:INTENSITy?, 2-221 DELTa?, 2-234
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight, 2-221 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim: APOSition, 2-234
ENAble, 2-222 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:
DISplay:INTENSITy:BACKLight:AUTODim: BPOSition, 2-234
TIMe, 2-222 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:GRIDlines, 2-235
DISplay:MATHFFTView<n>:CURSor: DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>:
ROLOCATION, 2-223 STATE, 2-236
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:AUTOScale, 2-223 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE, 2-236
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:YAXIS:SCALE, 2-237
ASOUrce?, 2-224 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: FROM, 2-237
BSOUrce?, 2-224 DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:DDT?, 2-225 TO, 2-238
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor: DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:
FUNCtion, 2-225 FROM, 2-238
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:
APOSition, 2-226 TO, 2-239
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: DISplay:PERSistence, 2-239
AUNIts?, 2-226 DISplay:PERSistence:RESET, 2-240
DISplay:MATHFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: DISplay:PLOTView<n>:CURSor:
BPOSition, 2-227 ROLOCATION, 2-240

Index-4 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Index

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:AUTOScale, 2-241 DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:

DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:ASOUrce?, 2-242 FROM, 2-256
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:BSOUrce?, 2-242 DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO, 2-256
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:DDT?, 2-242 DISplay:REFFFTView<n>:CURSor:
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:FUNCtion, 2-243 ROLOCATION, 2-257
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:AUTOScale, 2-257
APOSition, 2-243 DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: ASOUrce?, 2-258
AUNIts?, 2-244 DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: BSOUrce?, 2-258
BPOSition, 2-244 DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:DDT?, 2-259
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:
BUNIts?, 2-245 FUNCtion, 2-259
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs: DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:
DELTa?, 2-245 APOSition, 2-260
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:MODe, 2-246 DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor: AUNIts?, 2-260
ONEOVERDELTATVALUE?, 2-246 DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: BPOSition, 2-261
AXPOSition, 2-247 DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: BUNIts?, 2-261
AYPOSition, 2-247 DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:HBArs:
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: DELTa?, 2-261
BXPOSition, 2-248 DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:MODe, 2-262
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN: DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:
BYPOSition, 2-248 ONEOVERDELTATVALUE?, 2-262
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor: DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:
SPLITMODE, 2-249 AXPOSition, 2-263
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:STATE, 2-249 DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: AYPOSition, 2-263
APOSition, 2-250 DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: BXPOSition, 2-264
BPOSition, 2-250 DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:SCREEN:
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: BYPOSition, 2-264
DELTa?, 2-251 DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs: SPLITMODE, 2-265
UNIts?, 2-251 DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:STATE, 2-265
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform: DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:
APOSition, 2-252 APOSition, 2-266
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform: DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:
BPOSition, 2-252 BPOSition, 2-266
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:GRIDlines, 2-253 DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:
DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW<x>:XAXIS:SCALE, 2-254 DELTa?, 2-267
DISPLAY:PLOTVIEW<x>:YAXIS:SCALE, 2-254 DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:VBArs:
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS: UNIts?, 2-267
FROM, 2-255 DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform:
DISplay:PLOTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO, 2-255 AHPOSition?, 2-268

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-5

Index

DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform: DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
APOSition, 2-268 ASOUrce, 2-283
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform: DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
AVPOSition?, 2-268 BSOUrce, 2-283
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform: DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
BHPOSition?, 2-269 DDT?, 2-284
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform: DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
BPOSition, 2-269 FUNCtion, 2-285
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:CURSor:WAVEform: DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
BVPOSition?, 2-270 HBArs:APOSition, 2-285
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:GRIDlines, 2-270 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:REF:REF<x>: HBArs:AUNIts?, 2-286
STATE, 2-271 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:XAXIS:SCALE, 2-271 HBArs:BPOSition, 2-286
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS: DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
FROM, 2-272 HBArs:BUNIts?, 2-287
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:XAXIS:TO, 2-272 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS: HBArs:DELTa?, 2-287
FROM, 2-273 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
DISplay:REFFFTView<x>:ZOOM:YAXIS:TO, 2-273 MODe, 2-288
DISplay:SELect:BUS, 2-274 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
DISplay:SELect:MATH, 2-274 ONEOVERDELTATVALUE?, 2-289
DISplay:SELect:REFerence, 2-275 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
DISplay:SELect:SOUrce, 2-275 SCREEN:AXPOSition, 2-289
DISplay:SELect:VIEW, 2-276 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
DISplay:SELect:WAVEView<x>:SOUrce, 2-276 SCREEN:AYPOSition, 2-290
DISplay:VARpersist, 2-276 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
DISplay:WAVEform, 2-277 SCREEN:BXPOSition, 2-290
DISplay:WAVEView:CURSor:CURSOR1: DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
ROLOCATION, 2-277 SCREEN:BYPOSition, 2-291
DISplay:WAVEView:GRIDTYPE, 2-278 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:STATE, 2-278 SPLITMODE, 2-292
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:BUS:B<x>:VERTical: DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
POSition, 2-279 STATE, 2-292
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:STATE, 2-280 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:VERTical: VBArs:APOSition, 2-293
POSition, 2-280 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CH<x>:VERTical: VBArs:BPOSition, 2-293
SCAle, 2-281 DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor?, 2-281 VBArs:DELTa?, 2-294
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
WAVEform:AVPOSition?, 2-296 VBArs:UNIts?, 2-294
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR: DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
WAVEform:BVPOSition?, 2-297 WAVEform:APOSition, 2-295
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor: DISplay:WAVEView<x>:CURSor:CURSOR<x>:
CURSOR<x>?, 2-282 WAVEform:BPOSition, 2-296

Index-6 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Index

DISplay:WAVEView<x>:DCH<x>_D<x>: E
STATE, 2-297 *ESE, 2-312
DISPLAY:WAVEVIEW<x>:DCH<x>_DALL: *ESR?, 2-313
DIGORDER, 2-298 ETHERnet:DHCPbootp, 2-313
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:DCH<x>_DALL:VERTical: ETHERnet:DNS:IPADDress, 2-314
POSition, 2-298 ETHERnet:DOMAINname, 2-314
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:FILTer, 2-299 ETHERnet:ENET:ADDress?, 2-315
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:GRAticule, 2-299 ETHERnet:GATEWay:IPADDress, 2-315
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:INTENSITy: ETHERnet:IPADDress, 2-315
GRATicule, 2-300 ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:RESET, 2-316
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:INTENSITy: ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:SERVICENAMe, 2-316
WAVEform, 2-300 ETHERnet:LXI:LAN:STATus?, 2-317
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: ETHERnet:NAME, 2-317
AUTOScale, 2-301 ETHERnet:NETWORKCONFig, 2-318
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: ETHERnet:PING, 2-318
STATE, 2-302 ETHERnet:PING:STATus?, 2-319
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: ETHERnet:SUBNETMask, 2-319
VERTical:POSition, 2-302 EVENT?, 2-320
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:MATH:MATH<x>: EVMsg?, 2-320
VERTical:SCAle, 2-303 EVQty?, 2-321
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:
STATE, 2-303
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:VERTical: F
POSition, 2-304 FACtory, 2-322
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:REF:REF<x>:VERTical: FILESystem?, 2-322
SCAle, 2-304 FILESystem:COPy, 2-323
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:STYle, 2-305 FILESystem:CWD, 2-324
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:VIEWStyle, 2-305 FILESystem:DELEte, 2-324
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:Zoom?, 2-306 FILESystem:DIR?, 2-325
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>?, 2-306 FILESystem:HOMEDir?, 2-326
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>: FILESystem:LDIR?, 2-326
HORizontal:POSition, 2-307 FILESystem:MKDir, 2-326
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>: FILESYSTEM:MOUNT:DRIVE, 2-327
HORizontal:SCALe, 2-308 FILESystem:MOUNT:TEKDrive, 2-328
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>: FILESystem:READFile, 2-329
HORizontal:WINSCALe, 2-308 FILESystem:REName, 2-329
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>: FILESystem:RMDir, 2-330
STATe, 2-309 FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE?, 2-330
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>: FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE:EXPirytime?, 2-331
VERTical:POSition, 2-310 FILESystem:TEKDrive:CODE:STATus?, 2-331
DISplay:WAVEView<x>:ZOOM:ZOOM<x>: FILESystem:UNMOUNT:DRIve, 2-331
VERTical:SCALe, 2-310 FILESystem:UNMOUNT:TEKDrive, 2-332
DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF:REF<x>: FILESystem:WRITEFile, 2-332
FRAMe, 2-311 FPAnel:PRESS, 2-333
DISplay:WAVEView<y>:REF<x>_DALL: FPAnel:TURN, 2-333
FRAMe, 2-311

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-7

Index

H MAINWindow:RRBDisplaystate, 2-351
HEADer, 2-334 MASK:DELete, 2-351
HORizontal?, 2-335 MASK:MASK<x>:COUNT?, 2-352
HORizontal:ACQDURATION?, 2-335 MASK:MASK<x>:COUNT:HITS?, 2-352
HORizontal:DELay:MODe, 2-335 MASK:MASK<x>:DEFinedby, 2-353
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe, 2-336 MASK:MASK<x>:DISplay, 2-353
HORizontal:DIVisions?, 2-337 MASK:MASK<x>:LIST?, 2-354
HORizontal:MAIn:INTERPRatio?, 2-337 MASK:MASK<x>:SEG<x>:POINTS, 2-355
HORizontal:MODE, 2-337 MASK:MASK<x>:SEG<x>COUNT:HITS?, 2-354
HORizontal:MODe:MANual:CONFIGure, 2-338 MASK:MASK<x>:SOUrce, 2-355
HORizontal:MODE:RECOrdlength, 2-338 MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATE, 2-356
HORizontal:MODE:SAMPLERate, 2-339 MASK:MASK<x>:TESt:STATUS?, 2-356
HORizontal:MODE:SCAle, 2-339 MASK:MASK<x>:TEST:THReshold, 2-357
HORizontal:POSition, 2-340 MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:HORizontal, 2-357
HORizontal:PREViewstate?, 2-340 MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:UPDatenow, 2-358
HORizontal:RECOrdlength, 2-341 MASK:MASK<x>:TOLerance:VERTical, 2-358
HORizontal:SAMPLERate, 2-341 MASK:TESt:WAVEforms, 2-359
HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode: MATH:ADDNew, 2-359
MINimum:OVERRide, 2-341 MATH:DELete, 2-360
HORizontal:SAMPLERate:ANALYZemode: MATH:LIST?, 2-360
MINimum:VALue, 2-342 MATH:MATH<x>:AVG:MODE, 2-361
HORizontal:SCAle, 2-343 MATH:MATH<x>:AVG:WEIGht, 2-361
MATH:MATH<x>:CAN:SUPPortedfields, 2-362
MATH:MATH<x>:DEFine, 2-362
I MATH:MATH<x>:FUNCtion, 2-363
ID?, 2-343 MATH:MATH<x>:GATing, 2-364
*IDN?, 2-343 MATH:MATH<x>:I2C:SUPPortedfields, 2-363
MATH:MATH<x>:INTERpolation, 2-364
L MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:COLor, 2-365
LIC:UNINSTALL?, 2-344 MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD, 2-365
LICense?, 2-344 MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic, 2-366
LICENSE:APPID?, 2-345 MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE, 2-366
LICense:COUNt?, 2-345 MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE, 2-367
LICense:ERRor?, 2-346 MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline, 2-367
LICense:GMT?, 2-346 MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:NAMe, 2-368
LICense:HID?, 2-346 MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS, 2-368
LICense:INSTall, 2-347 MATH:MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS, 2-369
LICense:ITEM?, 2-347 MATH:MATH<x>:LIN:SUPPortedfields, 2-369
LICense:LIST?, 2-348 MATH:MATH<x>:PARallel:SUPPortedfields, 2-370
LICense:VALidate?, 2-348 MATH:MATH<x>:RS232C:SUPPortedfields, 2-370
LOCk, 2-349 MATH:MATH<x>:SENT:SUPPortedfields, 2-371
*LRN?, 2-349 MATH:MATH<x>:SIGNeddata, 2-371
MATH:MATH<x>:SOUrce<x>, 2-372
MATH:MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow, 2-372
M MATH:MATH<x>:SPI:SUPPortedfields, 2-373
MAINWindow:BADGe:BRINgtoview, 2-350 MATH:MATH<x>:TYPe, 2-374
MAINWindow:FONTSize, 2-351 MATH:MATH<x>:VUNIT, 2-375

Index-8 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Index

MEASTABle:ADDNew, 2-375 MEASUrement:GATing:LOGICSource, 2-393

MEASTABle:DELETE, 2-375 MEASUrement:GATing:MIDRef, 2-393
MEASUrement?, 2-376 MEASUrement:GATing:SEARCHSource, 2-394
MEASUrement:ADDMEAS , 2-376 MEASUrement:GATing:STARTtime, 2-394
MEASUrement:ADDNew, 2-379 MEASUrement:INTERp, 2-395
MEASUrement:ANNOTate, 2-380 MEASUrement:LIST?, 2-395
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
FALLHigh, 2-380 FALLHigh, 2-396
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
FALLLow, 2-381 FALLLow, 2-396
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
FALLMid, 2-381 FALLMid, 2-397
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
HYSTeresis, 2-382 HYSTeresis, 2-397
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
RISEHigh, 2-382 RISEHigh, 2-398
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
RISELow, 2-383 RISELow, 2-398
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
RISEMid, 2-383 RISEMid, 2-399
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
TYPE, 2-384 TYPE, 2-399
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:BASETop, 2-384 MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:METHod, 2-385 BASETop, 2-400
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:
FALLHigh, 2-385 METHod, 2-401
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
FALLLow, 2-386 FALLHigh, 2-401
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
FALLMid, 2-386 FALLLow, 2-402
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
HYSTeresis, 2-387 FALLMid, 2-402
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
RISEHigh, 2-387 HYSTeresis, 2-403
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
RISELow, 2-388 RISEHigh, 2-404
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
RISEMid, 2-388 RISELow, 2-404
MEASUrement:CH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent: MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
TYPE, 2-389 RISEMid, 2-405
MEASUrement:DELete , 2-390 MEASUrement:MATH<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
MEASUrement:DELETEALL , 2-390 TYPE, 2-405
MEASUrement:EDGE<x>, 2-390 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:BURSTEDGTYPe, 2-406
MEASUrement:GATing, 2-391 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:
MEASUrement:GATing:ACTive, 2-391 MAXimum?, 2-406
MEASUrement:GATing:ENDtime, 2-392 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs:
MEASUrement:GATing:HYSTeresis, 2-392 MEAN?, 2-407

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-9

Index

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:
MINimum?, 2-407 STARTtime, 2-423
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GLOBalref, 2-423
PK2PK?, 2-408 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:HIGHREFVoltage, 2-424
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:IDLETime, 2-424
POPUlation?, 2-408 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LABel, 2-425
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts:ALLAcqs: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:LOWREFVoltage, 2-425
STDDev?, 2-409 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: PASSFAILENabled, 2-426
CURRentacq:MAXimum?, 2-409 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: PASSFAILHIGHlimit, 2-426
CURRentacq:MEAN?, 2-409 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILLIMit, 2-427
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:
CURRentacq:MINimum?, 2-410 PASSFAILLOWlimit, 2-428
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:
CURRentacq:PK2PK?, 2-410 PASSFAILMARgin, 2-429
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PASSFAILWHEN, 2-429
CURRentacq:POPUlation?, 2-411 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:PERFREQ:EDGE, 2-430
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:CCRESUlts: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:POLarity, 2-431
CURRentacq:STDDev?, 2-411 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x>, 2-411 FALLHigh, 2-431
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DISPlaystat: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:
ENABle, 2-412 ABSolute:FALLLow, 2-432
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGE<x>, 2-416 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGEIncre, 2-413 ABSolute:FALLMid, 2-433
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:
FROMLevel, 2-413 ABSolute:HYSTeresis, 2-433
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:LEVel, 2-414 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:N, 2-414 ABSolute:RISEHigh, 2-434
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:
SLEWRATEMethod, 2-415 ABSolute:RISELow, 2-434
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:EDGES:TOLevel, 2-415 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FAILCount?, 2-416 ABSolute:RISEMid, 2-435
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:FROMedge, 2-417 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: ABSolute:TYPE, 2-435
FROMEDGESEARCHDIRect, 2-418 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing, 2-418 BASETop, 2-436
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ACTive, 2-419 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:ENDtime, 2-419 METHod, 2-437
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:GLOBal, 2-420 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing: FALLHigh, 2-437
HYSTeresis, 2-421 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing: FALLLow, 2-438
LOGICSource, 2-421 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing:MIDRef, 2-422 FALLMid, 2-438
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:GATing: MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent:
SEARCHSource, 2-422 HYSTeresis, 2-439

Index-10 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Index

MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent: MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
RISEHigh, 2-440 FALLLow, 2-466
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent: MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
RISELow, 2-440 FALLMid, 2-466
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent: MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
RISEMid, 2-441 HYSTeresis, 2-467
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevels<x>:PERCent: MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
TYPE, 2-441 RISEHigh, 2-467
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFMode, 2-442 MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFVoltage, 2-442 RISELow, 2-468
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs: MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MAXimum?, 2-443 RISEMid, 2-468
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs: MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEAN?, 2-443 TYPE, 2-469
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs: MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:
MINimum?, 2-444 BASETop, 2-469
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs: MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:METHod, 2-470
PK2PK?, 2-444 MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs: FALLHigh, 2-471
POPUlation?, 2-445 MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:ALLAcqs: FALLLow, 2-471
STDDev?, 2-445 MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq: FALLMid, 2-472
MAXimum?, 2-445 MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq: HYSTeresis, 2-472
MEAN?, 2-446 MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq: RISEHigh, 2-473
MINimum?, 2-446 MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq: RISELow, 2-473
PK2PK?, 2-447 MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq: RISEMid, 2-474
POPUlation?, 2-447 MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:PERCent:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:RESUlts:CURRentacq: TYPE, 2-474
STDDev?, 2-448 MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SIGNALType, 2-448 FALLHigh, 2-455
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>, 2-449 MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATUS?, 2-449 FALLLow, 2-456
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TOEdge, 2-450 MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>: FALLMid, 2-456
TOEDGESEARCHDIRect, 2-450 MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TRANSition, 2-451 HYSTeresis, 2-457
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe, 2-452 MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:XUNIT?, 2-455 RISEHigh, 2-457
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:YUNIT?, 2-455 MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:
MEASUrement:REF<x>:REFLevels:ABSolute: RISELow, 2-458
FALLHigh, 2-465 MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:
RISEMid, 2-458

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-11

Index

MEASUrement:REFLevels:ABSolute:TYPE, 2-459 PLOT:PLOT<x>:SOUrce<x>, 2-485

MEASUrement:REFLevels:BASETop, 2-459 PLOT:PLOT<x>:TYPe, 2-486
MEASUrement:REFLevels:METHod, 2-460 *PSC, 2-486
MEASUrement:REFLevels:MODE, 2-460 *PUD, 2-487
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:
FALLHigh, 2-461 R
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:
RECAll:MASK, 2-487
FALLLow, 2-461
RECAll:SESsion, 2-488
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:
RECAll:SETUp, 2-489
FALLMid, 2-462
RECAll:WAVEform, 2-490
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:
REF:ADDNew, 2-490
HYSTeresis, 2-462
REF:DELete, 2-491
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:
REF:LIST?, 2-491
RISEHigh, 2-463
REF:REF<x>:DESKew, 2-491
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:
REF:REF<x>:LABel:COLor, 2-492
RISELow, 2-463
REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:BOLD, 2-492
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:
REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:ITALic, 2-493
RISEMid, 2-464
REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:SIZE, 2-493
MEASUrement:REFLevels:PERCent:TYPE, 2-464
REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:TYPE, 2-494
MEASUrement:REFLevels:TYPE, 2-465
REF:REF<x>:LABel:FONT:UNDERline, 2-494
MEASUrement:STATIstics:CYCLEMode, 2-475
REF:REF<x>:LABel:NAMe, 2-494
REF:REF<x>:LABel:XPOS, 2-495
N REF:REF<x>:LABel:YPOS, 2-495
NEWpass, 2-475 REF:REF<x>:SOUrce, 2-496
REM, 2-496
O ROSc:SOUrce, 2-497
ROSc:STATE?, 2-497
*OPC, 2-476
*RST, 2-498
*OPT?, 2-476

P S
SAVe:EVENTtable:BUS, 2-500
PASSWord, 2-477
SAVe:EVENTtable:MEASUrement, 2-500
PAUSe, 2-478
SAVe:EVENTtable:SEARCHTable, 2-501
PG:AMPlitude, 2-478
SAVe:IMAGe, 2-501
PG:BIT:ONE, 2-479
SAVe:IMAGe:COMPosition, 2-502
PG:BIT:THREE, 2-479
SAVe:IMAGe:VIEWTYpe, 2-502
PG:BIT:TWO, 2-480
SAVe:PLOTData, 2-503
PG:BIT:ZERO, 2-480
SAVe:REPOrt, 2-504
PG:BITRate, 2-481
SAVe:REPOrt:COMMents, 2-504
PG:BURSt:CCOUnt, 2-481
SAVe:SESsion, 2-505
PG:BURSt:TRIGger, 2-482
SAVe:SETUp, 2-505
PG:FILE:PATTern, 2-482
SAVe:SETUp:INCLUDEREFs, 2-506
PG:OUTPut:MODe, 2-483
SAVe:WAVEform, 2-507
PG:PATTERNdefinition, 2-484
SAVe:WAVEform:GATing, 2-508
PLOT:ADDNew, 2-484
SAVe:WAVEform:GATing:RESAMPLErate, 2-509
PLOT:DELete, 2-484
SAVe:WAVEform:SOURCELIst?, 2-510
PLOT:LIST?, 2-485

Index-12 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Index

SAVEON:FILE:DEST, 2-510 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:

SAVEON:FILE:NAME, 2-511 ADDRess:VALue, 2-529
SAVEON:IMAGe, 2-511 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:
SAVEON:IMAGe:FILEFormat, 2-512 CONDition, 2-530
SAVEON:TRIGger, 2-512 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:
SAVEON:WAVEform, 2-513 DIRection, 2-531
SAVEON:WAVEform:FILEFormat, 2-514 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:
SAVEON:WAVEform:SOURce, 2-515 SIZe, 2-531
SAVEONEVent:FILEDest, 2-515 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C:DATa:
SAVEONEVent:FILEName, 2-516 VALue, 2-532
SAVEONEVent:IMAGe:FILEFormat, 2-516 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:FILEFormat, 2-517 CONDition, 2-533
SAVEONEVent:WAVEform:SOUrce, 2-518 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:
SCOPEApp REBOOT, 2-518 HIVALue, 2-533
SEARCH:ADDNew, 2-519 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:
SEARCH:DELete, 2-519 QUALifier, 2-534
SEARCH:DELETEALL, 2-519 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:
SEARCH:LIST?, 2-520 SIZe, 2-534
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:COPy, 2-520 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:DATa:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:NAVigate, 2-520 VALue, 2-535
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TOTAL?, 2-521 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: ERRTYPE, 2-535
CONDition, 2-521 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:LIN:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: IDentifier:VALue, 2-536
DATa:DIRection, 2-522 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:PARallel:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: DATa:VALue, 2-536
DATa:OFFSet, 2-522 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: CONDition, 2-537
DATa:QUALifier, 2-523 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: DATa:SIZe, 2-538
DATa:SIZe, 2-524 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:RS232C:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: DATa:VALue, 2-538
DATa:VALue, 2-524 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: CONDition, 2-539
ERRType, 2-525 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FD: ERRType, 2-539
BRSBit, 2-526 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN:FD: ERRType:CRC, 2-540
ESIBit, 2-526 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: FAST:CHAN1A:HIVALue, 2-541
FRAMEtype, 2-527 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: FAST:CHAN1A:QUALifier, 2-542
IDentifier:MODe, 2-528 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:CAN: FAST:CHAN1A:VALue, 2-543
IDentifier:VALue, 2-528 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT:
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:I2C: FAST:CHAN2B:HIVALue, 2-543
ADDRess:MODe, 2-529

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-13

Index

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
FAST:CHAN2B:QUALifier, 2-544 DELTatime, 2-560
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
FAST:CHAN2B:VALue, 2-545 FUNCtion, 2-561
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPUT:
FAST:COUNTer:HIVALue, 2-546 CLOCK:SOUrce, 2-561
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:
FAST:COUNTer:QUALifier, 2-547 CH<x>, 2-562
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:
FAST:COUNTer:VALue, 2-548 MATH<x>, 2-562
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:LEVel:
FAST:INVERTNIBble:VALue, 2-548 REF<x>, 2-563
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
FAST:STATus:VALue, 2-549 LOGICPattern:CH<x>, 2-563
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PAUSE:QUALifier, 2-550 LOGICPattern:DCH<x>_D<x>, 2-564
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PAUSE:TICKs:HIVALue , 2-551 LOGICPattern:MATH<x>, 2-565
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
PAUSE:TICKs:VALue, 2-551 LOGICPattern:REF<x>, 2-565
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
SLOW:DATA:HIVALue, 2-552 POLarity, 2-566
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
SLOW:DATA:QUALifier, 2-553 USEClockedge, 2-566
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:
SLOW:DATA:VALue, 2-554 WHEn, 2-567
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SENT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
SLOW:IDentifier:VALue, 2-554 HIGHLimit, 2-568
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
SOUrce, 2-555 LOGICQUALification, 2-568
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
CONDition, 2-556 LOWLimit, 2-569
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:DATa: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
SIZe, 2-556 POLarity, 2-569
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI:DATa: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
VALue, 2-557 SOUrce, 2-570
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:BUS:SPI: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
SOURCETYpe, 2-557 THReshold, 2-570
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:
SLOpe, 2-558 WHEn, 2-571
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
SOUrce, 2-559 LOGICQUALification, 2-572
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
THReshold, 2-559 POLarity, 2-572
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLOCk: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
THReshold, 2-560 SOUrce, 2-573

Index-14 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Index

SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: SET?, 2-588

THReshold:HIGH, 2-573 SOCKETServer:ENAble, 2-589
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: SOCKETServer:PORT, 2-589
THReshold:LOW, 2-574 SOCKETServer:PROTOCol, 2-590
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: *SRE, 2-591
WHEn, 2-574 *STB?, 2-591
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:
WIDth, 2-575 T
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold
TEKSecure, 2-592
:LOGICPattern:DCH<x>_D<x>, 2-580
TIMe, 2-592
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
TIMe:ZONe, 2-593
CLOCk:EDGE, 2-575
TIMe:ZONe:UTCDELTa, 2-593
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
TOTaluptime?, 2-594
CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-576
TOUCHSCReen:STATe, 2-594
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
*TRG, 2-595
CLOCk:THReshold, 2-577
TRIGger, 2-595
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
TRIGger:A, 2-596
HOLDTime, 2-577
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:CONDition, 2-596
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:DIRection, 2-597
LEVel:CH<x>, 2-578
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:OFFSet, 2-598
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:QUALifier, 2-598
LEVel:MATH<x>, 2-578
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:SIZe, 2-599
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:DATa:VALue, 2-600
LEVel:REF<x>, 2-579
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:ERRType, 2-601
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:BRSBit, 2-601
LOGICPattern:CH<x>, 2-579
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FD:ESIBit, 2-602
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:FRAMEtype, 2-603
LOGICPattern:MATH<x>, 2-580
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:IDentifier:MODe, 2-603
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:CAN:IDentifier:
LOGICPattern:REF<x>, 2-581
VALue, 2-604
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:MODe, 2-604
SETTime, 2-582
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:ADDRess:VALue, 2-605
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STATE, 2-582
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:CONDition, 2-606
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STOPAcq, 2-583
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:DIRection, 2-606
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:SIZe, 2-607
LOGICQUALification, 2-583
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:I2C:DATa:VALue, 2-607
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:CONDition, 2-608
POLarity, 2-584
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:HIVALue, 2-609
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:QUALifier, 2-609
SOUrce, 2-584
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:SIZe, 2-610
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:DATa:VALue, 2-611
THReshold, 2-585
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:ERRTYPE, 2-611
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:LIN:IDentifier:VALue, 2-612
TIMe, 2-585
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:PARallel:DATa:VALue, 2-612
SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe, 2-586
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:CONDition, 2-613
SEARCH:SELected, 2-587
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATa:SIZe, 2-614
SELect:DCH<x>:DAll, 2-587
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:RS232C:DATa:VALue, 2-614

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-15

Index

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:CONDition, 2-615 TRIGger:A:LOGIc:POLarity, 2-636

TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType, 2-615 TRIGger:A:LOGIc:USECLockedge, 2-636
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:ERRType:CRC, 2-616 TRIGger:A:LOGIc:WHEn, 2-637
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A: TRIGger:A:LOGICPattern:CH<x>, 2-637
HIVALue, 2-617 TRIGger:A:LOGICPattern:DCH<x>_D<x>, 2-638
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A: TRIGger:A:LOWerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-639
QUALifier, 2-617 TRIGger:A:MODe, 2-651
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN1A: TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:HIGHLimit, 2-639
VALue, 2-618 TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:LOWLimit, 2-640
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B: TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:POLarity, 2-640
HIVALue, 2-619 TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:SOUrce, 2-641
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B: TRIGger:A:PULSEWidth:WHEn, 2-641
QUALifier, 2-620 TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity, 2-642
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:CHAN2B: TRIGger:A:RUNT:SOUrce, 2-643
VALue, 2-621 TRIGger:A:RUNT:WHEn, 2-644
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer: TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth, 2-644
HIVALue, 2-621 TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE, 2-645
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer: TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-645
QUALifier, 2-622 TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime, 2-646
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:COUNTer: TRIGger:A:SETHold:SETTime, 2-646
VALue, 2-623 TRIGGER:A:SETHOLDLOGICVAL:
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:INVERTNIBble: DCH<x>_D<x>, 2-647
VALue, 2-624 TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity, 2-648
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:FAST:STATus: TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:SOUrce, 2-648
VALue, 2-625 TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe, 2-649
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:PAUSE: TRIGger:A:TYPe, 2-649
QUALifier, 2-625 TRIGger:A:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-650
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA: TRIGger:AUXLevel, 2-652
HIVALue, 2-626 TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:STATe, 2-652
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA: TRIGger:HYSTeresis:USER:VALue, 2-653
QUALifier, 2-627 TRIGger:STATE?, 2-653
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:DATA: *TST?, 2-654
VALue, 2-628
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SENT:SLOW:IDentifier: U
VALue, 2-629
UNDO, 2-654
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:CONDition, 2-629
UNLock, 2-655
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:SIZe, 2-630
USBDevice:CONFigure, 2-655
TRIGger:A:BUS:B<x>:SPI:DATa:VALue, 2-630
TRIGger:A:BUS:SOUrce, 2-631
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling, 2-631 V
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe, 2-632 VERBose, 2-656
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce, 2-633 VERTical:DESKew:FROM:
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe, 2-651 CUSTOMPROPAgation, 2-657
TRIGger:A:LEVel:CH<x>, 2-633 VERTical:DESKEW:FROM:SOUrce, 2-657
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:DELTatime, 2-634 VERTical:DESKEW:STATIC, 2-658
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion, 2-634 VERTical:DESKew:TO:
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CLOCk:SOUrce, 2-635 CUSTOMPROPAgation, 2-658

Index-16 2 Series MSO Programmer Manual

 Index

VERTical:DESKEW:TO:SOUrce, 2-659 WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?, 2-666

WFMOutpre:PT_Off?, 2-667
W WFMOutpre:PT_ORder?, 2-667
WFMOutpre:RESample, 2-668
*WAI, 2-659
WFMOutpre:SPAN?, 2-668
WAVFrm?, 2-660
WFMOutpre:WFId?, 2-669
WFMOutpre?, 2-660
WFMOutpre:WFMTYPe?, 2-670
WFMOutpre:ASC_Fmt?, 2-661
WFMOutpre:XINcr?, 2-671
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr, 2-661
WFMOutpre:XUNit?, 2-671
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt, 2-662
WFMOutpre:XZEro?, 2-672
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr, 2-663
WFMOutpre:YMUlt?, 2-672
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or, 2-663
WFMOutpre:YOFf?, 2-673
WFMOutpre:CENTERFREQuency?, 2-664
WFMOutpre:YUNit?, 2-673
WFMOutpre:DOMain?, 2-664
WFMOutpre:YZEro?, 2-674
WFMOutpre:ENCdg, 2-665
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?, 2-666

2 Series MSO Programmer Manual Index-17